Year: 2013

  • Acts of Becoming: Autobiography, Frankenstein, and the Postmodern Body

    Mark Mossman

    Department of English and Journalism
    Western Illinois University
    shourd@gtec.com

    Introduction

     

    My body is a postmodern text. I have had sixteen major surgeries in thirty years and I am about to have a kidney transplant. My left leg has been amputated and I have only four fingers on one hand. I walk with a limp, and in each step my left shoulder drops down lower than my right, which gives me an awkward, seemingly uncertain gait. My life has been in many ways a narrative typical of postmodern disability, a constant physical tooling and re-tooling, a life marked by long swings into and out of “health” and “illness,” “ability” and “disability.” As I write this I am in end stage renal failure, with about twelve percent kidney function. My body is in jeopardy, running a race to transplantation, a race against dialysis, debilitating nausea, and ultimate mortality.

     

    My body is a postmodern text. I play basketball every day; I am good at tennis, racquetball; I garden, walk for miles. I look “healthy,” young, and am often mistaken for a student. My life is defined by activity, work, ambition. I write now in the evening, after a day that started with several hours of critical reading, and then included teaching two writing courses and one literary criticism and theory class, meeting individually with four freshman composition students, playing an hour of basketball, spending another hour in a contentious faculty meeting, taking a trip to the grocery store, cooking supper, and, at last, talking for a few short but meaningful minutes with my spouse before I scurried downstairs to where I currently sit working in my office in our basement.

     

    My body is a postmodern text. When I sit behind a desk, looking out to my class on that first day of the semester, my students think I am a “norm.” It is rare in those first moments for students to notice my disfigurement. I usually arrive at the classroom early. I prepare, go over notes for the opening class session. I sit down. Students slowly drift in, and then finally, after taking roll and beginning the arduous process of matching names with faces, I get up and distribute the syllabus. What happens? I see surprised expressions, eyes quickly shifting away from my body, often glancing anywhere but the location, the space where disability is unexpectedly and suddenly being written. I go on and begin my introduction to the particular course, while my students hurriedly attempt to account for difference, to manage the contrast of the literal with the prescribed stereotype and the previous impression. These are the crucial moments that constitute the process of my life; these are the absolutely significant points that define the narrative of my body.

     

    My body is a postmodern text. I am aware that I am constantly located in a social space, a gray area where the category of disability is manufactured. My body is deceptive, though, so I can at times escape, slip out of the net of discourses that determine the lives of so many disabled people. I am aware that I am able to have these moments because my body is so pliable in its ability to be normal and then abnormal and then normal again. I live in a space that allows perception, comprehensive awareness. I can feel the colonizing discourses of biomedical culture wash over my body like waves sweeping up onto the seashore. They recede and I am normal; they crash again and I am drowning in stereotype and imposed identity. The unique privilege of my life has been the fact that I am, figuratively, a beach, an edge of something; I know the different spheres of water and sand; I am able to live in both worlds. And as I move through these worlds, as the narrative of my life is constructed around and through me, I am aware of how I change and am changed, written and re-written by the different clusters of discourse that mark all of our lives: at the doctor’s office last week, for example, I was “ill,” a “patient”; on the basketball court later that day I was “healthy,” a “player.”

     

    The goal of this paper is manifold and ambitious. My intention here is to swirl together autobiography, narrative, and critical analysis in order to simultaneously create a reading of disability, of Mary Shelley’s novel Frankenstein, and of the construction of the postmodern body. I acknowledge the irritating impossibility, the bombastic complexity of such a goal for a piece of critical writing. I recognize the likely failure of this project, although I am not going to lie: I am terribly hopeful for it. That hope is tempered by fear, coupled with the risk of it all: it is important for me to record that I write this document knowing of such matters, as I am aware of my own tenuous situation as a tenure-track, first-year assistant professor of English. I am a young professional at the beginnings of difficult career, a career that demands excellence and grinding dedication to work in the classroom, on departmental and college-wide committees, and in the chaotic arenas of published research. At the same time, I am a disabled individual who has been, in one context or another, disabled his entire life and has, therefore, acquired a range of experiences and a distinct knowledge as to what it means to negotiate exclusion and discrimination. My own self, then, presented within the framework of these words and of the autobiographical examples that follow, is at issue here, is vulnerable and open. Indeed, the way that these pressures, histories, and goals pull at each other, contradict and countermine each other in this essay is, in part, the very reason for the paper’s existence. Like the creature in Mary Shelley’s novel, and like the novel itself for Mary Shelley, this work is understood by its author to be something sewn together, hideously grotesque, monstrous, something that is most likely a powerful failure. My hope, however, is that the very fracturing agents that conflict at the core of this essay will slowly fold into each other, connect, blend together, and produce a reading, and an understanding of my own experience, that ultimately helps to define what David T. Mitchell and Sharon L. Snyder have recently demanded: an authentic, developed “disabled perspective” of culture (242).

     

    At the outset my question is, what happens when a disabled individual writes herself? What happens when the disabled person explains and articulates, through either writing or bodily practice, disability? There has been an increasing number of theorists and researchers working in the field of disability studies who have attempted to construct answers to these kinds of questions. In doing so, what critics often discover is a need to expand the emerging field itself. For example, in commenting on the importance of scholars in the humanities working in a field dominated by the social sciences, Lennard J. Davis asserts that narratives written by individuals who are disabled constitute important voices in the workings of culture at large and need, therefore, to be understood through a humanities-centered critical approach:

     

    Cultural productions are virtually the only permanent records of a society’s ideological structure. If we acknowledge that communal behaviors and thought processes have a material existence, then that existence coalesces in the intersection between the individual mind and the collective market. Nowhere can we understand this intersection better than in literary and cultural productions. (“Enabling” 248-49)

     

    Davis continues: “We must examine the process by which normalcy, taken for granted by definition, is shaped into hegemonic force that requires micro-enforcement at each and every cultural, somatic, and political site in the culture…. People learn themselves through consumed cultural artifacts” (250). In the same journal publication, Mitchell and Snyder echo Davis in arguing that

     

    disability study in the humanities has been critiqued for a tendency to surf amidst a sea of metaphors rather than stand on the firm ground of policy and legislative action. However, the identification of variable representational systems for approaching disability in history demonstrates in and of itself that disability operates as a socially constructed category. The more varied and variable the representation, the more fervent and exemplary disability studies scholars can make our points about the complexity of this social construction. (242)

     

    In this theoretical context, writing disability is the (re)production of disability, a potent act of creation. Autobiography by a disabled person is an authentication of lived, performed experience; it is a process of making, of being able to “translate knowing into telling” (White 1). Using the last two decades of criticism and theory as a map, disabled autobiography can be traced as a postmodern, postcolonial endeavor, for when disability writing constructs the particular self-definition it is attempting to narrate, it automatically resists repressive stereotype at large and attempts to reclaim ownership of the body and the way the body is understood. In other words, writing, autobiography, the narration of an experience by a disabled person to a reader or an immediate listener, enables a marginalized voice to be heard, which in turn causes cultural practice and stereotyped roles to change. The experiences rendered in “illness narratives,” as Arthur Kleinmann has named them, work against any kind of essential universalism and instead attempt to demonstrate particularity and individuality in experience. The writing of illness and the writing of disability, and as David Morris has recently noted the two terms are often collapsed together in postmodern culture, involve new constructions of reality, new categories for the body’s performance in cultural practice. Disabled autobiography is a conscious act of becoming.

     

    What disability writing constitutes, then, is an unfolding of culture so that, in addition to negative stereotype, liberatory constructs are present and available to the practice of the body, in the body’s movement through the different representational systems of general culture. Disability writing, in other words, often takes the instability inherent in the body and spins it into the articulation of a volitional mode of selfhood; writing disability becomes an empowering act of control, a deconstructive critical strategy that attempts to break down oppressive and imprisoning cultural construction. By writing disability, the performance and general representation of disability is re-centered, re-focused on the disabled subject itself, which deflects and displaces the powerful gaze of the “norm.” As one critic argues, “as self-representation, autobiography is perhaps uniquely suited to validate the experience of people with disabilities and to counter stereotypical (mis)representation” (Couser 292).

     

    For example, one of the students I talked with today is orthopedically disabled. In our conference, I commented on how beautiful the weather has been, and how much I love the springtime. The student responded with a detailed explanation of just how much she hates the spring. She dreads the spring because it is a ritualistic moment in the story or text of her life: each spring she becomes newly disabled. The weather changes, and she is unable to wear clothes that help to conceal her disfigurement. Each spring, then, she confronts new stares, the feeling of awkward humiliation that is attached to being physically abnormal in a public zone where normalcy is in effect. She is undressed by those stares, by the cumulative and constant recognition of difference: she is stripped and re-written with the coming of warm weather; putting on a pair of shorts, a t-shirt, or a bathing suit equates putting on a “disability,” dressing down into abnormality.

     

    What this particular student experiences every spring is a process of conflict, resistance, and liberation. Again, in the spring, with the eyes, faces, and general behavior of curious and almost always kind-hearted people, this disabled student feels her body, her self, being lifted from her, being re-shaped and re-made because of the recognition of difference and the discursive and perceptual location of abnormality. Her response, however, is to attempt to re-define herself, again to resist the imposition of “abnormality” that comes from the matrix of culture surrounding her. In articulating her anger to me and to others, in speaking of her lack of control and building up a narrative of her experiences for her audience, she gains a measure of control, takes her body back, realizes a liberation from the construct of abnormality. In this way, she can re-determine and re-write the acts of becoming through which her body must annually move; she can trigger a process of self-definition that works against the subject/object, normal/abnormal polarization of her experience. Her voice, and her body, can claim a degree of power in her ability to narrate her feelings of abnormality. She does not stop wearing the shorts, but instead embraces the perceptual process invoked when she puts them on because she knows that she can define herself, that she can become and re-become what she knows she is.

     

    Thinking of this project, I asked her if she had read Frankenstein. She had not (again, though she is obviously very mature, the student is only a freshman). When I was her age I had read the book, though, and when I read Frankenstein for the first time, at eighteen, I read myself as the creature, as a body that has no place in the world, a body that, in its long twisting scars and attachable prosthetic limb, has the imprint of technology and modernist science written upon it, and seems, therefore, “unnatural.” When I read of the creature being built, made from selected parts of dead bodies, I easily read it as an enactment that mirrored my own development as a person: artificial, “fashioned” limbs and transplanted organs create the creature, the daemon; such things also construct myself. At eighteen, again my age at that first reading, I felt all of the resentment of the creature, the anger, the isolation, the loneliness. The creature was the ultimate victim of stereotyped oppression, of a disabling construction of “ugliness”; the creature’s response was to torment its author, to triumph in the end by driving its creator and the one who first names it “ugly” to a cruel death. In this way, I vaguely recognized that the creature resisted what it had become and used its disabled body, a body that was incredible and superior in strength, in its ability to experience extremes in cold and heat, to wreck the inscribing process of outside definition. Being constructed in postmodern discourse, being the person I was and am, I read the creature as “powerful” in its resistance: the creature gained power through its disempowered body; it took the imposition of “abnormality” and used it as an articulation of strength and purpose. When I read the narrative, I read these terms into my own body; I used them to explain my own life.

     

    Before I move to a more critical discussion of Frankenstein, I have one more autobiographical example of this postmodern process of becoming. I love to swim. I love the sun, the exertion of a day of swimming. A few weeks ago, with a couple of days off for the Easter holiday, my spouse and I spent a long weekend in Florida. We went to a place south of Tampa, to a condo on Indian Rocks Beach. The facility has a heated pool, but I wanted to swim in the Gulf. In order to get to the beach, though, I had to leave my limb upstairs and use crutches (salt and sand sometimes damage the hydraulic knee of my leg, so I try to avoid leaving it for long stretches on a beach). As I passed by the pool on crutches and felt the stares of roughly forty sunbathing, vacationing people, and heard the questions of several small, inquisitive children, I felt deeply disabled. I called that passage, a route I would take probably eight to ten times during the trip, the running of the gauntlet. That was what it was: a painful, bruising journey that simply had to be made. In those moments, I felt vulnerable. I felt angry. I will be honest: I felt hatred. I remember telling myself, on several occasions, that “I didn’t care what they thought of me,” that “I was going to do this no matter what.” I remember trying hard not to look back at them, those innocent people, not to hear the questions, but instead to focus on the goal: the gateway to the beach and ultimately the sea. I knew that making eye contact meant imprisonment, displacement, perhaps even failure. I knew how the process worked: eye contact would equate deep inscription, the aggressive internalization of abnormality and disability, and I knew that too much of that would have meant a decision to just avoid the whole troublesome thing and not swim at all.

     

    When I did get to the water, however, I was free again, my disability hidden beneath the waves. And at that point, typically, I felt a rush of emotions. I was thankful and pleased to be in the water swimming. I was embarrassed by my body’s power to cause discomfort. I was anxious about the return passage back to the condo. I was ashamed of my profound inability to resist becoming what those stares had made me into: disabled, a person who needs help–the gates opened for him, the pathways cleared–a person who needs kindness and smiles to offset the uncomfortable stares and questions.

     

    Of course, as usual these feelings were almost immediately countered by another very different experience. On the first day back from that trip, I went to the dentist for a check-up. Having been out in the Florida sun, I had a tan, and as I sat down in the reclined dentist’s chair, ready to be examined, he mentioned that I looked great and had a “healthy glow.” I laughed, but what flashed across my mind was what I had actually experienced while I was getting this tan (which has now begun to peel): that is, disability, the constructions of illness. The dentist defined my body and, in turn, “me,” as being “healthy.” But just the day before at the pool I was certainly defined as “disabled.” Any nephrologist will tell you that for the last three years I have been seriously “ill.” My point here is simple: it is clear that the text of my body, which is my body, is profoundly unstable. Again and again I discover how I am both normal and abnormal, both able-bodied and healthy, and disabled and ill. As I will demonstrate, it is this profound discursive indeterminacy that defines the postmodern body and the direction that both body criticism and disability studies are taking as they develop.

     

    I will end this introduction with the following description. We have a full-length mirror in our bedroom. I looked in it tonight; I looked in it with the issues of this essay in my mind, with the experiences of the past couple of weeks clicking off in my head. What I saw was a tanned, smiling face, a body clothed in casual khaki Dockers and a light blue buttoned down shirt by Structure, a body wearing comfortable brown leather shoes and tan dress socks. I then took off the shoes, the shirt. The body was different, just slightly, no longer wearing several markers of class, no longer appearing totally healthy–the left shoulder slightly deformed, again lower and smaller than the right; the body uneven, slightly misshapen. I then took off the pants, the undershirt, and then the underwear and the socks. And there I was, stripped, naked. The body had become disfigured, disabled. Scars danced across the abdomen. A prosthetic limb dominated the left side of the body, drawing the eyes to it. I turned and it was apparent that the hips turn outward, the spine curves inward. My body looked bent, odd, strange to me. I took off the limb and the transformation was complete: I had stripped into disability and disfigurement, into powerlessness and vulnerability.

     

    I had changed. In the mirror I had morphed from an apparently normal, youngish, tanned person in reasonably fashionable clothing to a nakedly disfigured creature. If only my dentist could see me now, I thought.

     

    The Creature as Monster

     

    The first time I taught Mary Shelley’s most famous book I was in graduate school, a teaching fellow, and I was teaching my first upper-division course. The class was a junior-level survey of nineteenth- and twentieth-century British literature. The students were mostly sophomore and junior English majors, and there were about fifteen of them total.

     

    The first day we took up the novel was surprising, and one of the highpoints in my early teaching experience. My class loved the book, and responded well to it; they overwhelming aligned themselves with the creature. In fact, at one point in our initial discussion, several of them asked me to stop calling the creature “the monster.” They claimed that he was not a “monster”; calling it one, they said, was the whole problem.

     

    When I walked out of class that afternoon I think you could describe my disposition as jubilant, very happy with the discussion, with the way the students responded. At the time, and with my own biases hovering in the background, I thought that it was only natural that the class, all of whom were young and disenfranchised by definition, could identify as readers with the scorned, lonely creature. The creature is victimized; it made sense to me then and still does now that readers familiar with any kind of powerlessness will identify with the hated and marginalized creature. In truth, I was really just happy that my students had even read the book! The fact that they had had something to say about it, that they had wanted to talk about it and develop an understanding of the world through it seemed to validate my own experience as a graduate student being trained to teach in an English Department.

     

    When I read Frankenstein now, I read the text and my own sympathetic alignment with the creature in a slightly different light. More than ever, it seems that the novel demonstrates the power of cultural inscription, the way an individual comes to subjectivity through a series of aggressive cultural acts. In his anonymous review of the narrative, Percy Shelley framed the creature in a similar light, as a being who is made into a violent monster. He argues for the following concise explanation of the narrative: “Treat a person ill and he will become wicked” (Clark 307). What the creature experiences through the narrative, from its birth to its last scene with Walton, is a continued repetition of scorn, hatred, and fear, a constant construction of monstrosity. The creature learns itself in this way; it becomes “unnatural,” “abnormal,” again a monster through its consumption of “cultural artifacts” (to again cite Davis), and through the practice of everyday life. What the narrative enacts, then, is the creature’s inability to resist this overwhelming definition of itself by culture. Unlike my student described above, or myself, the creature lacks the postmodern, technologically driven ability to “dress” out of abnormality, but is instead always starkly naked, stripped, openly abnormal. In the end, the tragedy of the creature is that it can see itself as nothing but a monster. In its own self-narration at the center of the book, it claims: “when I became fully convinced that I was in reality the monster that I am, I was filled with the bitterest sensations of despondence and mortification. Alas! I did not yet entirely know the fatal effects of this miserable deformity” (108). And again the creature articulates a self-understanding in terms of abnormality: “I was… endued with a figure so hideously deformed and loathsome; I was not even of the same nature as man” (115).

     

    Arthur Frank tells us that “Repetition is the medium of becoming” (159). The creature is trapped in repeated social construction, is unable to cloak its disability and escape the constant repetition of “monster.” The creature attempts to resist this repetition, to become something other than the monster it is constantly being made into. There is, for example, the way it approaches the blind patriarch of the DeLacy family, attempting to lose its body and become simply a voice; and there is its ultimate utopian desire to hide from the oppressive, normalizing sight of humanity, to have a companion or a mate like itself, with whom the creature can run away and live peacefully in isolation. But again it is never anything but nakedly disabled in its “hideousness.” It can never hide with clothes or technology or self-narration or any other cloaking device other than the darkness of night. In open daylight, its disfigurement and abnormality are always present, immediate, defining.

     

    Jay Clayton has argued the following point concerning the way the creature’s body works in culture:

     

    Although the monster in Shelley’s novel is hideous to look at, Frankenstein himself feels more keenly the horror of the creature looking at him. In this respect, Shelley reverses the terms of monstrosity. Frankenstein cannot bear to see the eyes of his creation watching him. Indeed, the eyes themselves seem to be the most horrid organs the creature possesses. (61)

     

    The passage Clayton refers to is the creature’s first act in the novel, which is narrated by Frankenstein in the following way: “He [the creature] held up the curtain of the bed; and his eyes, if eyes they may be called, were fixed on me. His jaws opened, and he muttered some inarticulate sounds, while a grin wrinkled his cheeks. He might have spoken, but I did not hear; one hand was stretched out, seemingly to detain me, but I escaped, and rushed downstairs” (57). In this passage, the creature seeks unity, contact, a reception from its parent, and is instead roughly abandoned. This is the first act in the process of the creature’s development into a monster: the creature’s body, which initiates contact here by reaching out to Frankenstein, causes discomfort and anxiety in the one it confronts, the one it “fixes” its eyes upon. Terror for both Frankenstein and the creature occur most often when the creature looks back, makes eye contact, for that is the moment when construction takes place, when both bodies are written. One body, Frankenstein’s, is located in normalcy, while the other, the creature’s, is represented as the excluded “Other,” as “abnormal.” Indeed, it is Frankenstein, the creature’s physical author and the first human the creature knows, who gives the creature the first elements of his identity as a monster. Frankenstein again describes his first confrontation with the victimized creature in the following way: “I had gazed on him while unfinished; he was ugly then; but when those muscles and joints were rendered capable of motion, it became such a thing as even Dante could not have conceived” (57). It is when the creature is “capable,” then, when it articulates an ability, and worst of all when it looks back at the observer, that it becomes a monster. Thus, Frankenstein can further narrate his understanding of the creature with the deep horror of normalcy, of the oppressor:

     

    His limbs were in proportion, and I had selected his features as beautiful. Beautiful! Great God! His yellow skin scarcely covered the work of muscles and arteries beneath; his hair was of a lustrous black, and flowing; his teeth of pearly whiteness; but these luxuriances only formed a more horrid contrast with his watery eyes, that seemed almost of the same colour as the dun-white sockets in which they were set, his shrivelled complexion and straight black lips. (56)

     

    Rather than attaching special power to the creature through its disfigured body, however, most critics have treated the novel as Percy Shelley does in his before-mentioned review, traditionally reading the creature’s body as a representation of marginalization and victimization, of binding cultural construction. For example, one critic argues, “In Nietzschean terminology, the being’s problem is that he is so thoroughly creature [i.e., Other] he is incapable of forming his own values. He is forced to accept them ready-made from his creator and his creator’s race” (Hetherington 22). Likewise, David Hirsch highlights that first moment when Frankenstein names his creation a monster, and asserts that it “is Victor’s baptismal enslavement of [the creature] with an image, a name, an identity which this ‘monster’ will attempt to erase by manipulating those very same chains of language and image which bind him” (57). Hirsch continues:

     

    By seeking inclusion into exclusive structures, [the creature] realizes that his reverent attempts to assimilate disempower him as they reinforce the exclusivity of the closed domestic circle. Asking for similar rights by stressing one’s similarity to a normal structure does little to alter the norm and demands no reciprocal conversion on the part of the one to be persuaded. (59)

     

    Hirsch and other critics, in both queer studies and feminist theory, often see the creature as the problematic of marginalization, a dramatization of either femininity or homosexuality in a culture dominated by repressive patriarchy and heterosexuality. The creature fails to break out of stereotype and the repressive discourses that define it, but is instead thoroughly and completely shaped by those discourses. The creature’s body, its ugliness and abnormality, and the resulting exclusion and disability, become the ultimate symbols of practices of discrimination.

     

    These approaches, all of which choose to focus primarily on the creature rather than its creator or the actual author of the novel, give shape and critical substance to my own reading of the book. The creature attempts to break out of this definite bind of stereotype, out of this “principle of disfiguration” (Vine 247), first when it tells its story to its maker, which in the context of this discussion appears as an autobiographical attempt to claim selfhood, to write and perform disability, and then when it makes its final demand for “a mate.” Thinking of Hirsch’s argument, it seems that both the self-narrative and the desire for a similar companion can be read as tools or strategies that the creature uses to establish some kind of normalcy for itself. A female mate, for example, would destroy the uniqueness the creature feels, would instead create a sense of sameness, a solidarity of experience, a “domestic circle.”

     

    The creature’s self-narrative, which I would like to place more emphasis on here simply because it is more relevant to our discussion, likewise demonstrates the potential power and cultural force the creature possesses. As we have seen, it is when the creature becomes mobile, a potential functional and able member of society, that it becomes dangerous and needs to be, literally, turned into a monster. Power, then, which the creature achieves by simply being able to breathe and live–that is, to perform in everyday life–is immediately repressed. Power is in a measure re-achieved, however, in the creature’s narrative of itself. Again, self-narrative is a tool used by the creature to gain self-determinacy. It is an “illness narrative,” an act of becoming and re-becoming. Through self-narration the creature can, to a point, re-make itself, re-fashion and re-invent a new understanding of its self. With its story, the creature tries to resist the disabling definition of “monster” and to write itself into rhetorical normalcy, which it hopes will lead to real, if limited, acceptance in everyday cultural practice.

     

    The creature does this by attempting to draw pity, a sympathy, out of its audience, and therefore some kind of recognition of sameness, some kind of inclusion. Once again, in part it works. For example, after hearing the creature’s narrative Frankenstein comments, “His words had a strange effect upon me. I compassioned him, and sometimes felt a wish to console him” (140). It is in these moments that it appears that the creature has established some kindred feeling, some sense of sameness. But, even in these moments, the creature cannot overcome its physical hideousness and the resulting sense of abnormality and otherness. Frankenstein’s next thoughts are as follows: “but when I looked upon him, and when I saw the filthy mass that moved and talked, my heart sickened, and my feelings were altered to those of horror and hatred” (126). The creature’s body, its “filthy mass,” is too much in the present and too radically different; it claims too much definition, and cannot be ignored or put aside. The creature’s narrative, then, is the fulfillment of a paradigm first outlined by Leonard Kriegel: “the cripple is threat and recipient of compassion, both to be damned and to be pitied–and frequently to be damned as he is pitied” (32).

     

    Indeed, in the end, the only real control or power that the creature is able to achieve is not through the rhetoric of understanding or empathy, but rather through its threats and eventual acts of physical violence. It does control Frankenstein, and drives him to death. It can even claim:”‘ Remember that I have power…. You are my creator, but I am your master;–obey!’” (160). It is key to recognize that that power comes not in achieving normalcy, but in embodying deviance, the violence associated with physical abnormality. Rather than becoming a “person” or “human” through an act of language and rhetoric, the creature becomes a “master” through “monstrous” acts of violence.

     

    Eleanor Salotto has written:

     

    Narrative in this text is divided among three narrators: Walton, Frankenstein, and the creature. This diffusion of narrative voice indicates that the narrative body is not whole, incapable of reproducing a sutured narrative about the origins of one’s life…. The frame of narrative thus disturbs the notion of unitary identity, on which the notion of autobiography has rested. (190)

     

    We have seen that autobiography is not a viable strategy in the text; it does not lead, ultimately, to empowerment for the creature. Salotto argues that it is similarly a failure for all of the characters and for the author of the text herself, Mary Shelley:

     

    As we have seen… categories break down, and what one character demonstrates at one moment shifts ground continuously, as with the creature’s innate goodness and his subsequent reign of terror… the introduction concentrates on Shelley looking into the mirror and asking the same questions that the creature does: ‘Who was I? What was I?’ and veering off the ‘traditional’ signification of the feminine subject. (191)

     

    Thus, when Shelley writes the narrative, and the introduction to the 1831 edition, she writes herself, just as each of her characters, especially the creature, attempt to write themselves when they in turn write their own stories. All of them, all of the narratives, are not quite successful; they all lack the ultimate self-definition that they attempt to achieve. What this says for our purposes here is that narrative is used as a tool, a technology, that is intended to be a vehicle to freedom, self-definition, and self-expression. Again, the problem that this novel demonstrates is that such technology–perhaps all technology–fails. The monster, for example, tries to un-monster itself with its personal narrative. Because narrative fails, the creature’s ability to resist stereotype and construct a new, more “human” identity likewise fails. It is always victim, always resisting the powerful inscription it feels on its body, but never able to avoid the snares of abnormality that trap it and direct its every move. The creature’s body is trapped in a kind of profound disability, is transformed into a violent monster and lacks any power to stop this transformation from taking place. It tries to narrate itself out of that construction; it attempts to become something else. It fails.

     

    The Postmodern Body

     

    It seems that we now have a deep contradiction working in this paper. The first section establishes how, through autobiography, the disabled individual can narrate herself into a kind of ability, how the instability of the discourses that presently define the body leads ultimately to possible constructs of freedom and re-self-definition. The next section of the essay then undermines that notion in its assertion that the creature in Mary Shelley’s Frankenstein is unable to narrate itself into ability and normalcy; the creature attempts to narrate itself out of the disfigurement that defines it as “monster” and excludes it from normal practice, and it is of course unable to do this. What is the solution to this paradox? The answer is postmodernity, or the condition where, according to Donna Haraway, there is “agency… without defended subjects” (3).

     

    I want to refer again to the class in which I first taught Frankenstein. In that class the students aligned themselves with the creature, and more importantly refused to recognize the creature as “monstrous.” If I recall correctly, the students in that class looked like many of the classes I have taught during my eight years of teaching experience. Body piercings, tattoos, dyed hair, extremes in baggy and tight clothing–all are characteristics of our students today. Notions of individuality, self-expression, and freedom dominate the self-presentations of our students. Indeed, with the abundance of research on the teaching of writing and literature out there these days, it is no surprise to me that when I teach my writing and literature sections, the work that requires personal narration and experience from my students is always the best, the most rewarding and the most productive writing and speaking. It has been demonstrated time and time again that teaching writing is linked with teaching empowerment, self-exploration and discovery, personal relationships, and the ability to have a voice in the functioning of our culture.

     

    But again as we have just seen, narrative, self-writing, and self-presentation or performance are the very tools that fail the creature. I think the answer here is that in the contemporary West there are simply more tools to work with, more experiences to augment narration and the process of self-becoming: today the creature could have plastic surgery, for example, or use its size and strength to play a professional sport, or use its intellect to manage itself into financial and cultural power. Put simply, not only are the times a-changin’, the times have already changed. Postmodernism has unhinged the hegemony of culture and stereotype, and has allowed for the development and availability of liberatory constructs and discursive practices that lead to freedom. Indeed, the dynamic of postmodern cultural practice is to center such marginalized subjectivities, to hear voices now that before were not heard. A disabled perspective of culture, then, is now available, possible, likely.

     

    In my own research, I know that I am reading more and more autobiographical narratives written by disabled authors offering a variety of perspectives on their experience; and in my everyday life, I am seeing more and more disabled people claiming power in the functioning of culture, resisting stereotype, and re-making the ways in which their bodies are understood by others. A good example here is Sean Elliott, the professional basketball player. Sean Elliott is a transplanted body, a body that is surrounded by images of abnormality and “unnaturalness.” He now plays a sport dominated in the eighties and early nineties by images of perfection, ideal normalcy–when one thinks of professional basketball, one thinks of Michael Jordan’s athletic body, a body that is often cited by multiple intelligence theorists to be a kind of kinesthetic “genius.” Elliott’s play, though, his ability on the court, wrecks the polarization of normal and abnormal that the marketing of Jordan’s body seems to establish. Elliott is able to be both extremes of the pole: he is ill and healthy; he is a body that is unnatural and a body that is strikingly natural. He is impaired and disabled and neither all at the same time. He is postmodern. Sean Elliott does not only “look back” at or make eye contact with the defining practices of culture and the stares of millions of people; he redefines himself in those moments, and he succeeds in the re-definition by making himself a viable option for the three-point shot, by being a professional player. When millions of people see him playing basketball on television, what they see is disability becoming ability, again a wrecking of the whole polarization of able- and disabled-body experience. The dichotomy is destroyed because Sean Elliott, a transplanted, reconstructed person–in addition to the transplant, both of his knees have been rebuilt–is able to play the most glamorous, most promoted, and most marketed sport in recorded history. Every night he is in an arena of perfect bodies. His body works, claims the same perfection, without any loss of what he actually is: a transplant patient, a medically maintained body, a professional athlete, a great three-point shooter.

     

    Lennard J. Davis has written that, “When we think of bodies, in a society where the concept of the norm is operative, then people with disabilities will be thought of as deviants” (“Normalcy” 13). Though many, if not all scholars working in the field of disability studies will disagree, I am arguing in the end here that we can now foresee the moment when postmodern culture pushes into a realm where disabled bodies are, literally, no longer disabled. By establishing a disabled perspective of culture, the notion of disability itself radically changes, is perhaps lost, for a fully articulated disabled perspective seems to reach beyond disability and into an entirely different conceptual and cultural space for all bodies. Already, advances in technology blur the traditional lines between ability and disability as they blur the boundary between “the natural” and “the artifical.” The very notion of normalcy/abnormality, an “able body” and a “disabled body,” seems to be breaking down; the “norm” is eroding, and certainly attachments of social deviance are no longer relevant in a cultural environment where those images are embraced.

     

    I have already demonstrated here how my own body is often able, with the technology of modernist and postmodernist medicine, to float into spheres of traditional normalcy, zones from which I would have been excluded just two decades ago. According to Jay Clayton and Donna Harraway, most people living today have such technologically dependent, equalized, postmodern bodies, bodies that are, to use Harraway’s phrase, “cyborgs.” Clayton writes,

     

    Think of how one’s character has been reshaped by the total integration of technology with the body. Many people would be different beings without the glasses or contact lenses that let them see. How would one’s self-conception and behavior be changed without the availability of contraception (one form of which can be permanently implanted in women’s bodies)? What about mood-altering drugs such as Prozac or body-altering drugs such as steroids and estrogen? For that matter, what about the far older technology of vaccination? In terms of more interventionist procedures, think of people whose lives have been transformed by pacemakers, prosthetic limbs, sex-change operations, cosmetic surgery, and more. (65-66)

     

    With Sean Elliott’s comeback, it is now widely apparent that the transplanted body too has this same indeterminacy inscribed upon it, built inside of it. The suggestion is, I think, that the person, any person, is a system of organs, almost all of which can be either replaced or relocated, depending on the immediate need. In this light, the body itself seems to break down as an absolute posit of selfhood and determinacy. What emerges is a sense of possibility. What emerges is the postmodern body.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Clark, D. L. Shelley’s Prose. Albuquerque: U of New Mexico P, 1954.
    • Clayton, Jay. “Concealed Circuits: Frankenstein’s Monster, the Medusa, and the Cyborg.” Raritan: A Quarterly Review 15.4 (1996): 53-69.
    • Couser, G. Thomas. “Disability and Autobiography: Enabling Discourse.” Disability Studies Quarterly 17.4 (1997): 292-296.
    • Davis, Lennard J. “Constructing Normalcy: The Bell Curve, the Novel, and the Invention of the Disabled Body in the Nineteenth Century.” The Disability Studies Reader. Ed. Lennard J. Davis. New York: Routledge, 1997. 9-28.
    • —. “Enabling Texts.” Disability Studies Quarterly 17.4 (1997): 248-251.
    • Frank, Arthur W. The Wounded Storyteller: Body, Illness, and Ethics. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1995.
    • Haraway, Donna J. Simians, Cyborgs, and Women: The Reinvention of Nature. New York: Routledge, 1991.
    • Hetherington, Naomi. “Creator and Created in Mary Shelley’s Frankenstein.The Keats-Shelley Review 11 (1997): 1-39.
    • Hirsch, David. “De-Familiarizations, De-Monstrations.” Pre/Text 13 (Fall/Winter 1992): 53-67.
    • Kleinman, Arthur. The Illness Narratives: Suffering, Healing, and the Human Condition. New York: Basic Books, 1989.
    • Kriegel, Leonard. “The Cripple in Literature.” Images of the Disabled, Disabling Images. Ed. Alan Gartner and Tom Joe. New York: Praeger, 1987. 31-46.
    • Mitchell, David T., and Sharon L. Snyder. “Exploring Foundations: Languages of Disability, Identity, and Culture.” Disability Studies Quarterly 17.4 (1997): 241-247.
    • Morris, David. Illness and Culture in the Postmodern Age. Berkeley: U of California P, 1998.
    • Salotto, Eleanor. “Frankenstein and Dis(re)membered Identity.” The Journal of Narrative Technique 24 (Fall 1994): 190-211.
    • Shelley, Mary. Frankenstein. Ed. Maurice Handle. New York: Penguin, 1983.
    • Vine, Steven. “Filthy Types: Frankenstein, Figuration, Femininity.” Critical Survey 8 (1996): 246-58.
    • White, Hayden. “The Value of Narrativity in the Representation of Reality.” On Narrative. Ed. W. J. T. Mitchell. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1981. 1-24.

     

  • Genesis and Structure and the Object of Postmodernism

    Lee Spinks

    Department of English Literature
    University of Edinburgh
    elilss@srv0.arts.ed.ac.uk

    1. The Problem of “Genesis” and “Structure”

    This paper began as an attempt to make sense of the enigma presented by two sentences in a postscript and a paragraph in an interview. In an addendum to his influential The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge, Jean-François Lyotard answers the question “What is Postmodernism?” by declaring “a work can become modern only if it is first postmodern. Postmodernism thus understood is not modernism at its end but in the nascent state, and this state is constant” (Postmodern Condition 79). Two pages later he expands on this statement in a passage which retains, in many quarters, a certain doxological authority:

     

    The postmodern would be that which, in the modern, puts forward the unpresentable in presentation itself; that which denies itself the solace of good forms, the consensus of a taste which would make it possible to share collectively the nostalgia for the unattainable; that which searches for new presentations, not in order to enjoy them but in order to impart a stronger sense of the unpresentable. A postmodern artist or writer is in the position of a philosopher: the text he writes, the work he produces are not in principle governed by preestablished rules, and they cannot be judged according to a determining judgment, by applying familiar categories to the text or to the work. Those rules and categories are what the work of art itself is looking for. The artist and the writer, then, are working without rules in order to formulate the rules of what will have been done. Hence the fact that work and text have the characters of an event; hence also, they always come too late for their author, or, what amounts to the same thing, their being put into work, their realization… always begin too soon. Post modern would have to be understood according to the paradox of the future… anterior.

     

    Several aspects of these statements are puzzling. Why, for example, does Lyotard insist, here as elsewhere, upon a distinction between “the postmodern” and postmodernism and what governs the relationship between these forces? How can the “nascent state” of postmodernism be “constant” rather than the consequence of a particular interplay of historical forces, and what transcendental or quasi-transcendental determination lies behind this claim? What, finally, does it mean to say that a work must be postmodern before and after it is modern, and what effect does this perception have upon our idea of the historical transition between the two? Lyotard’s insistence that the postmodern artist occupies the contradictory temporal and cognitive space of the “future anterior” is unexpected since it arrives at the conclusion of an analysis that begins from a specifically periodizing hypothesis.1 For The Postmodern Condition describes the “postmodern age” as the historical effect of a shift in the status of knowledge, evident “since at least the end of the 1950s,” in which the “open system” of postmodern science has, “by concerning itself with such things as undecidables, the limits of precise control… ‘fracta,’ catastrophes, and pragmatic paradoxes,” redefined knowledge in terms of paralogy and the heterogeneity of language games (60). The radical character of these new postmodern scientific epistemologies lies in their rejection of a “general metalanguage in which all other languages can be translated and evaluated.” They therefore stand opposed to those philosophical meta-narratives such as the Hegelian “dialectic of Spirit” or the “hermeneutics of meaning” that Lyotard identifies with the effacement of difference within the logic of the same and, in political terms, with “terror” in general (xxiii).

     

    What is clear, even at this early stage, is that “the postmodern” and “postmodernism” are problematic terms for Lyotard insofar as they are defined both in terms of a genetic movement (or process of historicity) and as the necessary structural inscription of postmodernity within modernity. Lyotard’s focus upon the complex relationship between genesis and structure as somehow constitutive of the “postmodern condition” immediately suggests that to understand his work we must forestall any simple identification of the “postmodern” with the “contemporary” and situate it instead within the epistemic shift inaugurated by Kant and brought to prominence by modern structuralist analysis. The importance of this movement of thought to Lyotard’s philosophy is that it raises the formal question of how a term within a totality could act as a representation of that totality. To think in historical and critical terms after Kant is inevitably to be confronted with the question: how can a concept aim to explore conceptuality in general? This question appears forcefully in Kant’s Critique of Pure Reason at the point where he considers how concepts within time and space such as “freedom” enable us to think that which cannot be spatio-temporal in character. Kant argues that there are certain pure concepts that make experience possible and that we structure or synthesize our intuitions according to their causal order. When this synthesis is applied empirically to what we experience it is as a pure concept, rather than an empirical object, because it is not some thing that we experience but the form of experience itself. If we take this pure concept and think it independently of any object, then we get what Kant calls an “idea.” Experience, in the Kantian sense, is causal and we can never experience freedom within this causal order. But we can take the form or synthesis of this empirical order and think it as an idea. In this way we can extend the synthesis beyond experience to a first cause (freedom) or to a substance of infinite magnitude (God) or of eternal existence (immortality). Thus we begin from the order that we apply to the world, and then take this pure form to think (but not know) what cannot be given in the world:

     

    We are dealing with something which does not allow of being confined within experience, since it concerns a knowledge of which any empirical knowledge (perhaps even the whole of possible experience or of its empirical synthesis) is only a part. No actual experience has ever been completely adequate to it, yet to it every actual experience belongs. Concepts of reason enable us to conceive, concepts of understanding to understand… perceptions. If the concepts of reason contain the unconditioned, they are concerned with something to which all experience is subordinate, but which is never itself an object of experience–something to which reason leads in its inferences from experience, and in accordance with which it estimates and gauges the degree of its empirical employment, but which is never itself a member of the empirical synthesis…. so we shall give a new name to the concepts of pure reason, calling them transcendental ideas. (Critique 308-309)

     

    Kant’s creation of the category of “transcendental ideas” was his solution to the problem of how the thought of structure could conceive of the forces that brought structure into being. This “problem” of genesis and structure has haunted Western thought ever since. It resurfaces powerfully in two modern theories of meaning–structuralism and post-structuralism–that have exerted a profound influence on Lyotard’s account of the “postmodern.” According to structuralist analysis an individual speech (parole) can only exist within an already constituted system of signs (langue). A sign has no meaning in itself; it only becomes meaningful in its differential relation to the total signifying structure. But as Jacques Derrida noted in a series of works that marked a movement beyond or “post” structuralism, this thought of total structure exposes a crucial contradiction within structuralist axiomatics. For if the meaning of a sign is produced by the play of structural difference, then this differential play must also constitute the system or totality that seeks to explain it. Derrida’s critique proceeds from the insight that every signifying structure is produced by a play of differences that can never be accounted for or explained from within the system itself (“Structure” 292). Instead, the structure of meaning and conceptuality (such as law, culture, history, and representation) reproduces the logic of the future anterior because it will “always have to be based on a certain determination which, because it produces the text, cannot be exhaustively known by the text itself” (Colebrook 223).

     

    The work of Kant and Derrida offers two important contexts for Lyotard’s work on genesis, structure, and postmodernity. His fascination with this subject, as well as his difficulty in thinking through the relationship between its constituent terms, becomes particularly evident in another of his works of the 1970s, Just Gaming (a collaboration with Jean-Loup Thébaud), in which he advances a theory of the modern as pagan (“I believe that modernity is pagan”) where paganism is defined as the “denomination of a situation in which one judges without criteria” (16). The description of “modernity” here, we should note, is identical to the description of postmodern artistic practice in The Postmodern Condition. Lyotard’s acute discomfort on this point is displayed in a remarkable retrospective footnote to a passage from Just Gaming, the principal function of which is to readdress the relation between genesis and structure:

     

    [Jean-François Lyotard] believes that he can dissipate today some of the confusion that prevails in this conversation on modernity by introducing a distinction between the modern and the postmodern within that which is confused here under the first term. The modern addressee would be the “people,” an idea whose referent oscillates between the romantics’ Volk and the fin-de-siècle bourgeoisie. Romanticism would be modern as would the project, even if it turns out to be impossible, of elaborating a taste, even a “bad” one, that permits an evaluation of works. Postmodern (or pagan) would be the condition of the literatures and arts that have no assigned addressee and no regulating ideal, yet in which value is regularly measured on the stick of experimentation. Or, to put it dramatically, in which it is measured by the distortion that is inflicted upon the materials, the forms and the structures of sensibility and thought. Postmodern is not to be taken in a periodizing sense. (Gaming 16)

     

    It is questionable how much confusion is dissipated by this statement. On the one hand we have The Postmodern Condition, published in French in 1979, which cheerfully accepts the designation “postmodern” to describe “the state of our culture following the transformations which, since the end of the nineteenth century, have altered the game rules for science, literature, and the arts” (xxiii); on the other hand we have Just Gaming, published in French in 1979, in which this designation has no periodizing force. One solution to this dilemma would be to reject Lyotard’s account of postmodern epistemology as incoherent on its own grounds. Such a stance finds unexpected support from Lyotard himself, who spoke about The Postmodern Condition in an interview in the following terms:

     

    I told stories in the book, I referred to a quantity of books I’d never read. Apparently it impressed people, it’s all a bit of a parody…. I remember an Italian architect who bawled me out because he said the whole thing could have been done much more simply…. I wanted to say first that it’s the worst of my books, they’re almost all bad, but that one’s the worst… really that book relates to a specific circumstance, it belongs to the satirical genre. (“On the Postmodern” 17)

     

    A rather more complex response, however, would be to accept the hesitations and contradictions of Lyotard’s account as symptomatic of the difficulty of thinking through a set of concepts–the postmodern, modernity, and postmodernism–that are both produced and brought to crisis by their radicalization of the relationship between the historical “event” and the discursive structures within which “history” is represented to us as an object of knowledge. Indeed, Lyotard’s reworking of the relation between genesis and structure suggests that these contradictions are inevitable whenever we try to periodize the postmodern. For the concept of periodicity presupposes a continuous horizon and structure of historical discourse against which difference can be measured; but the postmodern, for Lyotard, denotes a historical event that breaks with this idea of continuous genesis and disperses “historical” time into a multiplicity of different discursive practices.

     

    The difficulty of thinking “postmodernism” as a radicalized relationship between the event of historicity and the discursive structures of discrete historical formations is also apparent in the work of Fredric Jameson. In his influential response to postmodernism entitled Postmodernism; or, the Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism, Jameson sets himself the complex dialectical labor of conceptualizing the historical ground of postmodernity, no small task given his conviction that the postmodern exhibits a “crisis of historicity” that disables the subject from locating herself within a normative set of spatio-temporal co-ordinates (22). Elsewhere, however, Jameson makes the surprising claim that the concept of the postmodern is “an attempt to think the present historically in age that has forgotten how to think historically in the first place” which figures postmodernity as a form of critique that registers the historicity of historical formations (Postmodernism ix). The effect of this declaration is to resituate his own historicizing critique back within the productive schema of postmodern culture itself, thereby offering us a deliberately ironic illustration of his claim that the force of postmodernity derives from the ability of capital to penetrate through cultural forms into the locus of representation so that critique or dissent can be transcoded as “theory” or “lifestyle” options in an almost seamless circuit of commodities (ix). This displacement therefore underscores Jameson’s assertion that “the interrelationship of culture and the economic [within postmodernism] is not a one-way street but a continuous reciprocal interaction and feedback loop,” or a model of cultural production no longer amenable to determination or critique in terms of the base/superstructure paradigm of traditional marxian dialectics (xiv-xv). But why should Jameson bemoan the difficulty of effecting resistance to the closed circuit of postmodern production in an introduction to a series of essays that have established precisely such a hermeneutics of resistance? He does so because the paradoxical movement of his own critique produces an ironic perspective both “inside” and “outside” postmodern practice. His analysis of postmodernism then takes advantage of this ironic and doubled perspective to undertake a form of immanent critique by inhabiting “postmodern consciousness” and decoding its attempts at “theorizing its own condition of possibility” while simultaneously projecting a utopian moment of totality from which the heterogeneous and interconnected discursive practices of postmodernity might be inscribed back within a more complex form of social relation (ix).

     

    Jameson’s reading of postmodernism as the “cultural logic of late capitalism” presents postmodernism as a new mode of production that realigns the economic and cultural according to the internal principle of a recent stage in capitalist development in which the structures of commodification and representation have become indivisible. His analysis is predicated, as he readily admits, upon Ernest Mandel’s projection beyond traditional marxian theory of a “third stage” of “monopoly capitalism”; Jameson’s version of postmodernism is his “attempt to theorize the specific logic of the cultural production of that third stage” (Postmodernism 400). This approach leads him to postulate the postmodern as an “enlarged third stage of classical capitalism” which offers a “purer” and “more homogenous” expression of capitalist principles in which “many of the hitherto surviving enclaves of socio-economic difference have been effaced (by way of their colonization and absorption by the commodity form)” (405). The functional place of “culture” within this monopoly mode of production is crucial to Jameson because it describes a contradictory and overdetermined space that cannot be wholly assimilated by the self-enclosed circuits of commodity capitalism. Indeed, there is a certain deconstructive logic to his analysis of the ambivalent position of culture within postmodern systematics, which argues both that the locus of representation enforces conformity through the structural commodification of difference (or the conversion of difference into commodities) and that this ceaseless production of difference beyond any absolute limit or point of totalization discloses a possible site of resistance to the self-representations of late capitalism. In marked contrast to Baudrillard, upon whose insights Jameson often builds, he argues that a mode of production cannot be a “total system” since it “also produces differences or differentiation as a function of its own internal logic” (406).

     

    The cultural logic of “postmodernism,” in the sense that Jameson intends, is then as much a conflictual and schismatic response to the global transmission of multinational capitalism as it is the superstructural expression of these new socioeconomic conditions. Such resistance to late capitalism as Jameson is presently able to envisage is dependent upon his notion of “cognitive mapping,” which explores ways of redefining our relation to the built space of our lived environment in response to the “penetration” of capital into “hitherto uncommodified areas” (Postmodernism 410). He describes the concept as a utopian solution to the subjective crisis enforced upon the modern city dweller unable to sustain a sense of place in a metropolis devoid of all the usual demarcations of urban space. Transposing this classical modernist dilemma into postmodern terms, Jameson seeks “to enable a situational representation on the part of the individual subject to that vaster and properly unrepresentable totality which is the ensemble of society’s structures as a whole” (51). Jameson is attracted to the motif of cognitive mapping because the spatial metaphor that it develops enables us to trace the effects of emerging modes of production as they play themselves out in a number of cultural fields. From this perspective we can understand how the “logic of the grid” commensurate with classical or market economics and its “reorganization of some older sacred and heterogeneous space into geometrical and Cartesian homogeneity” could present the background for both Bentham’s panopticon and the realist novel as well as the subjects that these structures helped to produce (410).

     

    Yet the weakness of the concept as a diagnostic tool is that, beyond the vertiginous challenge of architecture, Jameson’s reading of postmodern space describes little that could not be discerned in the culture of modernity. Doubtless it is true that phenomena such as a “perceptual barrage of immediacy,” the “saturated spaces” of representation in commodity culture and “our insertion as individual subjects into a multidimensional set of radically discontinuous realities” are constitutive of the postmodern vistas of monopoly capitalism, but they are also the revolutionary co-ordinates that map the fiction of John Dos Passos (Postmodernism 413). The feeling persists that these “spatial peculiarities” are “spatial” mainly insofar as they relate to visual phenomena, which may explain Jameson’s belief that postmodernism is “essentially a visual culture” (299). But the unresolved problem of defining the cultural turn of postmodernism in spatial terms when these terms enforce no clear distinction between modern and postmodern production robs Jameson’s argument of dialectical vigor. It may well be “crippling” for the contemporary citizen no longer to be able to supply representations that might bridge the gap between phenomenological perception and (post)modern reality, but Jameson’s attempt so to do by a process of cognitive mapping that might transform a spatial problematic into a question of social relations is checked by the recognition that this metonymic displacement between spatial and social figuration is continually reabsorbed by the spatial imaginary of the map itself, which, he ruefully concedes, is “one of the most powerful of all human conceptual instruments” (416). This insight severely reduces the dialectical or “oxymoronic value” of the play between spatial and social mapping which can only find expression as a series of contradictions in Jameson’s own analysis (416). Having acknowledged that the neutralization of the cognitive displacements of this new form of mapping “cancels out its own impossible originality,” Jameson insists with Beckettian stoicism that “a secondary premise must, however, also be argued–namely, that the incapacity to map spatially is as crippling to political experience as the analogous incapacity to map spatially is for urban experience” (416). It is one measure of the incoherence of “cognitive mapping” as a form of imaginary resolution that Jameson’s conclusion to his collection of essays on postmodernism is suspended somewhere between resignation and wish-fulfilment. For it remains surprising to be informed, after more than 400 pages, that postmodernism may well be “little more than a transitional period between two stages of capitalism”; while “cognitive mapping” is itself reduced to a “‘code word’ for… class consciousness of a new and hitherto undreamed of kind” (417-18).

     

    One of the reasons for the disquieting loss of focus in Jameson’s analysis is that it is difficult to “outflank” postmodernism by arguing that it represents something “resolutely unsystematic” and “resolutely ahistorical” while using the term simultaneously to describe the volatilization of the relationship between the modern sense of historicity and the narrative structures within which it is inscribed (Postmodernism 418). This difficulty is particularly apparent at those points where Jameson’s argument is seen to depend upon a duplicitous use of the postmodern as both an expression of the spatial reconfiguration of our historical sense within monopoly capitalist culture and as a concept that allows us to envisage the historicity of historical transitions. It appears forcefully in a remarkable passage in which he momentarily proclaims the possibility of a new spatial history within postmodernism, based upon the potentially “dialectical interrelatedness” of discrete and perspectival forms of information which the individual has to reconstruct into a discursive totality outside the supervening framework of a political or cultural metanarrative (374). “What I want to argue,” Jameson informs us, “is that the tracing of such common ‘origins’–henceforth evidently indispensable for what we normally think of as concrete historical understanding–is no longer exactly a temporal or a genealogical operation in the sense of older logics of historicity or causality” (374). This may well be true, but the problem for Jameson, as we shall see, is that this dialectical insight merely repeats the postmodern challenge to the “older logics of historicity and causality” that organized philosophical and historiographical reflection in the late nineteenth-century. Jameson’s critique of contemporary cultural production therefore appears destined to become merely the latest effect of a system of conceptuality that he wants to outflank. The only way that he can reverse this process, and reconfigure a contemporary marxian practice around the critique of postmodern production, is to transform the crisis of historical morphology that postmodernism expresses into a loss of history itself. It is for this reason that an analysis that begins with the concept of the postmodern as a critique of historical process concludes with the declaration that we can only “force a historical way” of thinking about the present by historicizing a concept that has no connection with the historical life-world at all (418).2

     

    How, then, are we to begin to understand the relationship between genesis and structure that provokes such disturbance within these accounts of the postmodern condition? Let me offer a provisional response by returning to Lyotard’s work long enough to advance three propositions. First, I want to argue that we should respect Lyotard’s equivocation between “the postmodern” and postmodernism because the “postmodern” designates that radical experience of historicity or difference that conditions and exceeds a certain structure of Enlightenment critique in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries and then reappears at the historical limit of modernity as the defining problem for nineteenth-century historicism. Next, I want to argue that the idea of postmodernism as a distinctive ground for historical and cultural production appears as a discursive effect of a revolution in late nineteenth-century constructions of lived historical experience, and it is this postmodernist reconfiguration of the relationship between historicity, subjectivity, and truth that provides a crucial interpretative context for the products of literary modernism. And, third, I want to claim that not just postmodernism, but also post-colonialism and post-structuralism, have their critical origins in what Derrida calls the “genesis-structure problem” that resurfaces so forcefully within nineteenth-century historiography (“Genesis” 156).

     

    These are three large claims. The first involves a problem that is by now familiar: how can the postmodern be thought, according to the logic of the future anterior, as the condition and the effect of the modern? My thesis will be that postmodernism emerges in the nineteenth-century as a limit-attitude to the constitution of man’s historical mode of being within modern Enlightenment practices. This limit appears across a range of disciplines as a renewed attentiveness to the movement of difference and the singularity of the event within the determinate structure of historical contexts. It is marked most profoundly by the questions Dilthey and Nietzsche pose to historical studies: to what extent is it possible to historicize the emergence of historical consciousness? And how could “we” as historical individuals conceive of a pre-historical epoch? Yet it was precisely this postmodern volatilization of the relationship between a historical event and its explanatory context that produced the structures of Renaissance and Enlightenment historiography from the sixteenth-century onwards in the first place. The seventeenth-century, in particular, was notable both for its self-consciousness about the heterogeneous and deeply provisional origins of historical discourse and the functional complicity of this discourse in the furtherance of particular political interests and values. There is accordingly a continuity, rather than a point of contradiction, between Sir Walter Raleigh’s admission at the beginning of his History of the World (1614) that such histories are based on “informations [which] are often false, records not always true, and notorious actions commonly insufficient to discover the passions, which did set them first on foot” and Thomas Heywood’s declaration two years earlier in his An Apology for Actors that the “true use” of history is “to teach the subject’s obedience to their King, to shew the people the untimely ends of such as have moved tumults, commotions and insurrections, to present them with the flourishing estate of such as live in obedience, exhorting them to allegiance, dehorting them from all trayterous and fellonious stratagems.” For what becomes clear from statements such as these is that the seventeenth-century bears witness to the effects of a strategic reinvention of the meaning of historical “truth” that replaces its dependence upon veridical and evidential criteria with a motivated emphasis upon its role in producing representations of civic authority and unitary state power.

     

    2. Rethinking the Time of Modernity

     

    The realignment of the epistemological function of historiography within the general legitimating practices of state power is both an example and an effect of the process of cultural modernity that found expression in the sixteenth-century and which has been analyzed with such revisionary brilliance in the work of Michel de Certeau. Since the sixteenth-century, de Certeau argues, “historiography… ceased to be the representation of a providential time” and assumed instead “the position of the subject of action” or “prince, whose objective is to make history” through a series of purposive gestures (Writing 7). Historiography now appeared explicitly “through a policy of the state” and found its rationale in the construction of “a coherent discourse that specifies the ‘shots’ that a power is capable of making in relation to given facts, by virtue of an art of dealing with the elements imposed by an environment” (7). What makes this historiographical manipulation of facts, practices and spaces “modern” in the first instance is that it was produced through a self-conscious and strategic differentiation between the mute density of a “past” that has no existence outside the labor of exegesis and a “present” that experienced itself as the discourse of intelligibility that brought event and context into disciplined coherence. But this new kind of historiographical analysis is “modern” also and to the extent that it is born at the moment of Western colonial expansion because its intelligibility was “established through a relation with the other” and “‘progresses’ by changing what it makes of its ‘other’–the Indian, the past, the people, the mad, the child, the Third World” (3).

     

    In fact, we could argue that the modern discourse of historiography had a triple genesis. It is predicated, first, upon the production of the past as a temporal “other” discontinuous with the present, one that exists to be reassimilated and mastered by contemporary techniques of power-knowledge. Next, it is indissociable from the appearance of the colonial body as an exterior and visible limit to Western self-identity whose “primitivism” reciprocally constitutes the “West” as a homogenous body of knowledge and the purposive agent of a rational and Enlightenment history. And, third, it is disseminated though the script of a new type of print text which permits the inauguration of a written archive, and therefore new and complex modes of knowledge, enforces divisions between different orders of cultural subject based on the semantic organization of a new form of literacy, and extends the possibility for the first time of a universal or global form of cultural capital that can be “spent” anywhere without diminishing the domestic reserve. Modern history therefore came into being by means of a rupture, a limit, and a general textual economy. It was at this point that the paradox that haunts Enlightenment historiography began to emerge. For this general textual economy was the precondition for the establishment of a “world history” or a “universal” concept of “reason” in the Enlightenment period, but this new universal historiography was itself produced in turn by the strategic division between Western historical culture and a primitive “other” that lay beyond the borders of the West’s own historical consciousness.

     

    de Certeau’s analysis suggests that a major and constitutive paradox of Enlightenment historiography was that its quest for the universal and transcendental structures of historical knowledge emerged as an effect of the always unstable relation between the “West” and a colonial “other” heterogeneous to the emerging forms of Western social and cultural praxis. We should be careful, however, not to take too quickly for granted the relationship between “modern” and non-Western culture as if the idea of the “modern” were able to denote a prior and determining ground of cultural exchange. The concept of Western cultural modernity was in fact produced through that reciprocal relation with an “other” that enabled the West to present itself as the condition for the possibility of modern historical production in general.

     

    3. Kant and the Structure of “Universal History”

     

    The fraught relationship between the general text of modern history and the particular historical forms from which such a transcendental structure might be composed is a guiding theme of Immanuel Kant’s “Idea for a Universal History with a Cosmopolitan Purpose” (1784), one of the principal documents of Enlightenment historiography. Written at a time when the West was threatened with the dispersal of its sense of providential time into the locally determined historicity of different forms of cultural life, Kant’s “Idea” sought a universal standard for historical action in what he called a “teleological theory of nature” (“Idea” 42). The difficulty presented to Kant by modern history is that it has no coherent plan or shape; and history, without proper form or structure, is merely an “aimless, random process” of violence, expropriation, and exchange (42). In response to this abyssal dilemma Kant argued that the transcendental structure of historical knowledge was to be discovered in the “rational… purpose in nature” which ordains that the “natural capacities of a creature are destined sooner or later to be developed completely and in conformity with their end” (42). Nature, reconfigured in Kantian theory as universal human nature, operates in his “universal history” as a philosophical fiction designed to supply precisely the narrative of continuity between cultures that the experience of modern history so systematically destroyed. As Kant declared in his Second Critique, it is because of the absence of any universal law that one should act as if one’s decisions could be universalized. His Third Critique extends this argument by claiming that we should act as if nature were progressing towards the good. The “as if” is a consequence of realizing that we don’t have a universal law, but we are capable of thinking the idea of it. From the given (or seemingly given) law of nature we are capable of thinking the idea or genesis of law. Since every man has the ability to conform to the supposed “will” of nature, which is to lead him towards the fulfilment of his rational capacities by “seeing that he should work his way onwards to make himself by his own conduct worthy of life and well-being,” the practices of each individual or species could be regulated by the same cultural and historical values (44). To this end, “nature” always and everywhere exploits the struggle in man between his social instincts and his individual aspirations. Against this background of struggle Kant constructed a dialectical history of individualism, social resistance, and self-transformation that leads men from torpor and self-absorption towards those general structures of ethics and universal justice upon which an enlightenment version of history depends (44-46).

     

    The problem for Kant is that the dialectical relationship between the particular movement of force or historicity and the general text of an Enlightenment history constitutes simultaneously the condition for the possibility and the impossibility of any universal structure of historical reason. This aporia emerges forcefully as the question of the infinite regress and the economy of cultural exchange. Thus Nature directs man along the path towards reason and ethical self-consciousness by confronting him with a master who breaks his will and forces him to obey a “universally valid will” instead of his own selfish interests. Yet this master is also a man who needs a master to condition his own acceptance of law and society (“Idea” 46). A man will always need a master or law above him; but this highest authority “has to be just in itself and yet also a man” (46). No perfect solution can resolve this dialectic between individual force and general authority; all that Nature requires of us is that we “approximate” our conduct to the radical fiction of a universal and ethical reason (47).

     

    The paradox at the heart of Kant’s reflection upon natural law appears in his argument that a worldly or human master is a representation of the law, but this historical individual must, if he is to be legitimate, also represent what lies above and beyond any particular historical epoch, otherwise what he represents would not be law but a series of relative and historically conditioned judgments. An identical aporia between genesis or historicity and structure is evident in Kant’s theory of the natural historical ground for cultural exchange. Indeed, exactly the same antagonisms that compel our unsociable natures into a dialectic of conflict and resolution recur at the cultural level in the relationships between states, which progress through the expansion of national borders, war, the resolution of conflict, and the ultimate establishment of an enlightened federation that consolidates itself “from a united power and the law-governed decisions of a united will” (“Idea” 47). Kant envisaged a dialectical progression towards a state of universal civic peace in which freedom can maintain itself naturally and automatically because the need to manage the inevitable violence of cultural exchange forces men to discover a “law of equilibrium” that could offer the basis for a “cosmopolitan system of general political security” (49). He explicitly connected the structures of Enlightenment historical reason with material prosperity: a gradual and global enlightenment is the philosophical consequence of our rulers “self-seeking schemes of expansion” which in turn provide the conditions for a “universal history of the world” (51).

     

    Once again, however, the historical tensions that create the need for this general structure of historical reason bring its internal coherence into disrepute. For the movement of economic and cultural expansion that forms the precondition for Kant’s universal history can only be distinguished from “vain and violent schemes of expansion” insofar as they are accompanied by an inward process of self-cultivation that creates a “morally good attitude of mind” in each citizen of the modern state (“Idea” 49). But as we have already seen, violence in the form of a master/slave dialectic is fundamental to the constitution of the enlightened modern citizen, who cannot therefore be appealed to as a neutral ground for the establishment of natural and rational relations between cultures. Violence, war and antagonism should rather be seen in Kant’s work as metaphors for that force or radical difference that both constitutes and exceeds determinate structure, and brings the possibility of a transcendental logic into play.3 Force and structuration operate simultaneously as the ground of a universal history and human nature and as a limit and point of division between and within cultures. We do well to remember this second point when considering Enlightenment historiography, which inaugurated the project of a “universal history of the world in accordance with a plan of nature aimed at a perfect civil union of mankind.” In the same historical period there was concomitantly a division between historical and technological culture on the one hand, and natural and “primitive” culture on the other, which performed a crucial function in justifying the “civilising mission” of European colonialism (51).

     

    Modern historiography is, in this sense, an ex post facto rationalization of a complex cultural exchange between a series of discrete cultures. From the play of forces that governs this exchange certain terms such as “reason” and “enlightenment” emerge as dominant within the historical discourse of the time. It is the task of historiography to render these effected terms as the very agents of historical change: modernity is, in this sense, the form of historical self-realization that recuperates its own becoming. But it is here that we experience our principal difficulty in marking the limits between historical formations. For this tension between the general text of modern Western history and the particular and internal histories of specific cultural totalities which forms the discursive precondition for our Western experience of historical and philosophical modernism also reappears as the historical limit of these discourses within the structures of nineteenth-century historiography and philosophy. Indeed, the “genesis-structure” problem is postmodern in the Lyotardian sense since it precedes modernity and brings it into being and also exceeds modernity when it comes to form the crucial problem for nineteenth-century historicism and the speculative ground of the postmodernist economies of Dilthey and Nietzsche.

     

    4. Dilthey, Nietzsche, and the Construction of “Postmodern” History

     

    Dilthey and Nietzsche are crucial to this discussion because both these writers presented themselves as occupying a historical position beyond the limits of modernity which could not be accommodated within the totalizing narratives of Enlightenment historiography. For Dilthey, writing at the turn of our own century, the nineteenth-century constituted a crisis of historical interpretation since it was here that the “genesis-structure” question reappeared with enigmatic force. The meaning of contemporary history, he argued, now lay in the inadequation between the historical event and any transcendental ground of interpretation. This was because the nineteenth-century witnessed the emergence of a contradiction between “the increasing, historical consciousness and philosophy’s claim to universal validity” (Dilthey 134). To be “historical,” in Dilthey’s terms, was to inhabit a radical and supplementary space beyond the determinate horizon of historical understanding that he identified, in a sweeping gesture, with historiography from antiquity to the dialectics of Hegel (188).

     

    It is here, with Dilthey, that the thought of postmodernity appears as the event or movement of historicity that exceeds any universal or transcendental ground. He is explicit on this point: nineteenth-century consciousness is properly historical to the extent that it moves beyond the world-view of the Enlightenment and “destroys [any residual] faith in the universal validity of any philosophy which attempts to express world order cogently through a system of concepts” (135). In an analysis that resembles an ironic commentary on Kant’s “Universal History” (which sought to unify the various historical world-views of different cultures within a teleological theory of nature underlying all historical process), Dilthey argued that the structure of Enlightenment historiography is simultaneously produced and abrogated by the process of cultural exchange. Thus the “analytical spirit” of eighteenth-century Enlightenment historiography emerged from the application of empiricist theory and methodology to what Dilthey somewhat naively termed “the most unbiased survey of primitive and foreign peoples.” However, the consequence of this empiricist “anthropology” was not a “universal history” but a new “evolutionary theory” which claimed that the meaning of cultural production was determined in its specificity by its local and particular context and “necessarily linked to the knowledge of the relativity of every historical form of life” (135).

     

    Dilthey’s version of historicism therefore presents a post-Enlightenment (and anti-Hegelian) philosophy of history that understands its own time as a passage beyond modernity towards a completely new form of lived historical experience. For now, with Dilthey, the reciprocal play between genesis and structure that formed the basis for both transcendental and immanent critique within modern critical philosophy is theorized as a movement beyond the formal unity of a universal history. Western culture makes the transition from historical modernism to postmodernism at the point when the postmodern “genesis-structure” relation is relocated outside a transcendental and teleological horizon. Hegel, according to Dilthey, understood history “metaphysically” and saw different communities and cultural systems as manifestations of a “universal rational will” (Dilthey 194). Dilthey, in contrast, begins from the premise that the meaning of a historical or cultural event can only be determined by analyzing the distribution of forces within a particular cultural system. We cannot deduce a trans-historical or universal law from the endless variety of cultural phenomena to hand; all the historian can do is “analyze the given” within the determinate contexts that give it meaning and value. The shift from modern history to historical postmodernism is therefore expressed, in Diltheyan terms, by an extreme cultural relativism in which truth is produced as an effect of a particular “world view” rather than being interior to a “single, universally valid system of metaphysics” (Dilthey 143).

     

    The significance of Dilthey’s Weltanschauung or world-view philosophy is that it presents the postmodern force relation (or the non-dialectical relationship between genesis and structure) as the new discursive matrix in which the meaning of historical and cultural production will be determined. The transition from the postmodern to postmodernism occurs when the absence of a “world-ground” that could provide a point of order for the relative historical time of particular cultures becomes the positive principle that will organize Western reflection upon historical change and cultural value (Dilthey 154). If we accept that there is no universal history within which epochs might be located, Dilthey argued, then we also have to abandon the terms “history” or “historicism” as ways of describing difference. Instead, “history” would merely denote a particular epoch’s way of understanding its own specificity. To embrace this positive principle is to move beyond the paralysis of modern historical consciousness which attempts to explain cultural difference in terms of the general structure of a world history:

     

    We cannot think how world unity can give rise to multiplicity, the eternal to change; logically this is incomprehensible. The relationship of being and thought, of extension and thinking, does not become more comprehensible through the magic word identity. So these metaphysical systems, too, leave only a frame of mind and a world-view behind them. (154)

     

    Dilthey writes in the wake of the collapse of the “world-view” of modernity where there is no longer any general ground of interpretation that could understand “multiplicity” or difference in terms of a Universal History or system of cultural practices. Nor is it possible to see expressive structures like “culture” and “history” as reflections of a universal concept of Mind since man is himself a historical being. “Man” cannot be used as a ground to explain historical process because our understanding of ourselves and others is itself an effect of the historical context in which we live: “The individual person in this independent existence is a historical being,” Dilthey reminds us, “he is determined in his position in time and space and in the interaction of cultural systems and communities” (181). Human beings can relate to each other, at a certain level, because they are all historical beings. But because the character of these beliefs and practices is “determined by their horizon” we cannot use one particular cultural form or set of values to explain other types of cultural production (183). The meaning of a cultural practice or historical formation is produced by its own internal rules, norms and values.

     

    The function of historiography, in this situation, is not to promulgate universal laws or rules of progression but to develop “empathy” in order to reconstruct the particular historical context in which a culture or a “mental state” developed (Dilthey 181). The primary virtue of empathy as a diagnostic tool is that it enabled Dilthey to express the reciprocal play between identity and difference that he detected at the basis of every cultural form and historical period. For the meaning of a cultural practice is determined by its own local horizon; and yet it is also determined by the differential play between different cultural horizons. History has no object or goal; and historiography is not an Enlightenment narrative. The meaning of historiography and what Dilthey called “human studies” is to be discovered, instead, in the movement of historicity between and beyond cultural structures:

     

    I find the principle for the settlement of the conflict within these studies in the understanding of the historical world as a system of interactions centred on itself; each individual system of interactions contained in it has, through the positing of values and their realization, its centre within itself, but all are structurally linked into a whole in which the meaning of the whole web of the social-historical world arises from the significance of the individual parts; thus every value-judgement and every purpose projected into the future must be based exclusively on these structural relationships. (183-84)

     

    It is curious that Dilthey’s name is rarely invoked in discussions of the theory and practice of postmodernism because his work marks a crucial phase in the construction of postmodernism as a discursive category and a way of interpreting the meaning of historical experience. The meaning and status of “history” is now no longer to be discovered within a general discursive structure or a universal world-view. “History” now means a form of historical difference, and the task of the historian is to distinguish between the types of world-view produced by the internal structures of each discrete cultural totality. If the postmodern recurred as a tension between genesis and structure in Enlightenment historiography, postmodernism transforms this type of historical relation into a form of historical practice. Dilthey’s historicism moves beyond modern Enlightenment discourse through its hypersensitivity to the way different forms of historicity create different cultural structures. Historicity and difference are now firmly inscribed at the heart of cultural production, while postmodernism begins to acquire its contemporary resonance as the thought of difference-within-identity or the “groundless ground” of historical self-reflection.

     

    This revaluation of the relation between event and context was also the basis upon which Nietzsche challenged the Enlightenment presuppositions of “modern” philosophy and defined the terms that brought philosophical postmodernism into being during the same period in which Dilthey was conducting his own critique. Nietzsche effected this transition by posing a new set of philosophical questions. He identified a form of Enlightenment philosophical interrogation which we might describe, following Foucault, as “one that simultaneously problematizes man’s relation to the present, man’s historical mode of being, and the constitution of the self as an autonomous subject,” and made it the matrix for a new type of relation between subjectivity, history and truth (Foucault 312). Philosophical postmodernism, in the Nietzschean sense, undertakes a positive critique of modern thought by insisting upon the historically conditioned character of all our values. The meaning of experience is not to be found in an “origin” of value that stands before and behind the mutable forms of our beliefs and cultural practices; nor can we discover it in an essential and mute complicity between a “fact” and the “truth” that it embodies. Nietzsche challenged the claim that the interior structure of knowledge could be determined by the formal structures of transcendental critique or a “universal history,” and he scorned belief in a teleological movement of history towards a moment of revelation beyond time and contingency. On the contrary, meaning and value are produced, rather than discovered, by violence, conflict, chance, and the constant desire to enforce a world-view and a set of normative practices that enables certain individuals to develop their capacities with the utmost vigor. The role of the historian, or the “genealogist,” as Nietzsche styled himself, is to attend to the discontinuities and contradictions in the self-representation of every culture and to show how the meaning of an event is continually transformed by the historical context through which it moves. The history of reason is produced and menaced by the movement of historicity “inside” and “outside” epistemological structures. Postmodernism arrives, for Nietzsche, with the inscription of the postmodern force relation within the form of Enlightenment critique.

     

    5. Rethinking the Object of Postmodernism

     

    To understand the postmodern as the future anterior of the modern is to gain some insight into the reasons why so many critics experience difficulty in defining the point of transition between modernism and postmodernism. These difficulties arise because the postmodern signifies both the non-dialectical play between structure and genesis that brings modernity into being as a mode of historical self-recognition and those cultural texts produced at the historical limit of modernity from the nineteenth-century onwards and which reflect upon the incapacity of the modern to constitute itself as a universal field of knowledge. But if we understand the postmodern as both the structural precondition of modernity and as a set of imaginative and speculative responses to modernity’s failed dream of historical and conceptual totality, several new observations can be made.

     

    The first concerns those nineteenth-century literary texts, such as James Hogg’s The Private Memoirs and Confessions of a Justified Sinner, Fyodor Dostoevesky’s Notes From Underground, and Gustave Flaubert’s Madame Bovary which anticipate the style and content of literary postmodernism while occupying a historical position prior to or within literary modernism. It has proved difficult to characterize literary postmodernism as an exclusively twentieth-century phenomenon when writers like Hogg and Dostoevsky devised metafictive texts that dwelt self-consciously on the history of their own narration or which, like Flaubert, made radical use of free indirect style to destabilize the diegetic organization of realist fiction and show how the speaking self is produced through narration rather then existing as a subjectivity before and beyond the event of textuality. However, the solution to the historical enigma posed by these “rogue texts” is to see that they are always already postmodern to the extent that they take as their subject the relationship between the discourse of history and the “event” of thought, writing, and subjectivity. The structures of these works constantly gesture to their own genesis; but this genesis can only be discerned after the event of writing. They occupy, in other words, the position of the future anterior as Lyotard defines it insofar as they work without established rules to formulate the rules of what will have been done. Now, if we accept this view of the postmodern as an intensification of a type of relation between genesis and structure, then it follows that it might appear in any period when the relationship between event and context became a problem within the historical consciousness that a culture has of itself. This observation leads me to suggest, in turn, that our difficulties in thinking through the relationship between history, text, and culture are not constituted by an opacity like the “postmodern.” They are produced, instead, by our critical habit of transforming questions about structure into new structures of cultural production like “romanticism,” “modernism,” and “postmodernism” itself. Rather than disputing the borders between the modern and postmodern, then, we need to attend to the periodizing force that makes such borders meaningful.

     

    One of the most baleful developments in the last thirty years, certainly within literary and cultural studies, has been the conflation of the postmodern as a critique of the structure of historical discourse with a “postmodernism” conceived as a new epoch or era of human experience. The principal problem with recent attempts to describe the culture of postmodernity is that they take the constitutive postmodern play between structure and genesis and transform it into a problem of structure or genesis within “postmodernist” representation. At its most basic level, the postmodern is even described as a pure play of differences (genesis) or the overarching dominance of a single system (structure). Consequently the so-called “postmodernism debate” has rigidified into an obsession with periodicity or the point of transition between modernism and postmodernism on the one hand and, on the other, a reading of postmodernism which identifies it as a form of structural critique whose ironic and self-reflexive style expresses its ambivalent position both “inside” and “outside” the discourse of modernism. This division licenses, in turn, a politics of postmodernism organized around a series of distinctive and regularly repeated arguments. Thus the idea of a postmodernist rupture with the Enlightenment inheritance of modernity is cited as cause for celebration or despair according to the position each critic adopts on the relationship between modern historical consciousness, the Age of Reason, and the types of social and cultural practice it legitimated. Elsewhere the hypostatization of postmodernism as an ironic mode of critique has been embraced by those who see this formal self-consciousness as a critical means to expose the construction of discourses of history and instrumental rationality by sites and systems of power. Meanwhile, the same practice has been condemned by others who view such reflexivity as a hopeless and post-historical gesture that implicates postmodernism within the modern practices it seeks to explain. Despite appearances to the contrary, however, this schismatic postmodernist politics has a profound underlying unity: the transformation of the force of the postmodern into an object, produced variously as a “culture,” a “system,” or a “historical period,” which one can be either “for” or “against” within a more general discourse of social and civic obligation.

     

    From our perspective, however, we can see that any attempt to determine the postmodern as a question either of genesis or structure will miss the meaning of its object in the act of producing it. The postmodern exceeds the singular horizon of every origin because it is constituted as both the ground and the effect of the modern and emerges as what Jacques Derrida calls a “structure-genesis problem” whenever we trace the movement of historicity or the “event” of history within a determinate historical totality. For this reason we cannot answer the transcendental question of the origin, form, or meaning of the postmodern from within a discourse of “postmodernism” because this question recurs as a semantic problem that menaces the internal coherence of every discursive structure. The contemporary confusion about the “meaning” of postmodernism arises in fact because we are asking the hermeneutic question (the question of meaning) about a problematic that produces the transcendental structure of historical meaning as a question. The solution to this dilemma is to start to ask different questions. Instead of asking what the “concept” of the postmodern means we should ask how it works, consider the contexts for the relation between historicity and the structures of historical discourse it establishes, and examine the effects these contexts have upon our understanding of truth, subjectivity, meaning, and the production of a historical “real.”

     

    Let me conclude by noting two ways in which the “genesis-structure problem” has been retrospectively reconfigured in our own time in order to produce a certain world-view, a form of politics, and a version of disciplinary practice. It is a commonplace that many people have difficulty distinguishing between those three troublesome categories “postmodernism,” “post-colonialism,” and “post-structuralism.” What is left unremarked is that this difficulty arises, in part, because these three forms of critique have a common origin in the movement of delegitimation of those universal structures of reason that Dilthey and Nietzsche detected in the 1860s and 1870s. One of the earliest uses of the term “postmodern” came in Arnold Toynbee’s A Study of History, where it was employed to describe the paradoxical status of late nineteenth-century Western historical self-consciousness, which was both global in reach and unsettled by a nagging sense of its own relative status as it witnessed what Robert Young later called “the re-empowerment of non-Western states” (Young 19). History becomes postmodern at the point when the force of historicity both constitutes and exceeds the determinate structure of a specifically “Western” history. This tension is evident in Toynbee’s waspish description of the world-view of mid-Victorian culture. His history was written

     

    against a current Late Modern Western convention of identifying a parvenue and provincial Western Society’s history with “History,” writ large, sans phrase. In the writer’s view this convention was the preposterous off-spring of a distorting egocentric illusion to which the children of a Western Civilisation had succumbed like the children of all other known civilisations and known primitive societies. (Toynbee 410)

     

    The negotiation between post-colonialism as an institutional practice and the “postmodern” as a force of historical difference continues to this day, although it is worth noting that in Toynbee’s terms the two are inseparable. Robert Young’s response, we might note, is to make the post-colonial the discursive ground of postmodernism, although this tactic can only succeed if postmodernism is rigorously distinguished from the postmodern in its quasi-transcendental sense; that is, as a force that disrupts paradigmatic borders. The politics of the separation of postmodernism from the postmodern nowadays organizes much intellectual debate and deserves a study of its own.

     

    But the picture becomes even more complicated when we realize that the inaugural gestures of that mode of critique that has come to be known as “post-structuralism” are also to be discovered in an attentiveness to the movement of a radical historicity within late nineteenth-century historicism that both constituted and exceeded historical structures and representations. Indeed post-structuralism, particularly that phase of its emergence consonant with Derridean “deconstruction,” properly begins in a lecture delivered by Derrida in 1959 on the problematic relation between structure and genesis in Diltheyan historicism and Husserlian phenomenology entitled “‘Genesis and Structure’ and Phenomenology.” The undisclosed origins of post-structuralism are thus to be found in Derrida’s meditation upon a crucial problem of nineteenth-century thought that has subsequently provided a context for so much of modern hermeneutics: the question of the proper form or morphology of historical knowledge. Derrida approaches this problem by means of a critique of Husserlian phenomenology because it is that mode of thought that is attuned to both the historicity of meaning and the conditions of its emergence, and also to that which remains open within a structure in any historical or philosophical problematic. The conceptual coincidence of history and philosophy is significant because Derrida means to show that the necessarily exorbitant relation of genesis to the “speculative closure” of any determined totality produces a “difference between the (necessarily closed) minor structure and the structurality of an opening” and that this unassimilable “difference” identifies the “unlocatable site in which philosophy takes root” (“Genesis and Structure” 155). In a handful of pages Derrida’s lecture on Husserl sketches the outline of a conflict between genesis and structure that is inseparable from the internal legality of post-colonial critique and which is formed against the background of the “postmodern” critique of nineteenth-century historiography. To see what form this conflict assumes in Derrida’s hands we must attend to two different lines of argument in “Genesis and Structure”: Husserl’s reading of Dilthey, and Derrida’s critique of Husserl.

     

    The first phase of phenomenological critique, Derrida notes, is structuralist in its emphasis because Husserl’s account of meaning and intentionality depends for its integrity upon avoiding a historicism (and a psychologism) based on a relativism like Dilthey’s that is incapable of insuring its own truth. The historicism of Dilthey is therefore the “other” of phenomenological critique. Husserl argues that Dilthey’s world-view philosophy, despite its pretensions to structuralist rigor, always remains a historicism (and therefore a relativism and a scepticism) because in Derrida’s words it “reduces the norm to a historical factuality and… confus[es] the truths of fact and the truths of reason” (“Genesis” 160). Husserl does not argue that Dilthey is completely mistaken: he’s right to protest against the naive naturalization of knowledge within some forms of historiography and to insist that knowledge is both culturally and structurally determined. But Dilthey’s world-view philosophy not only confuses “value and existence” and “all types of realities and all types of idealities”; it betrays its own insights into the radical historicity that constitutes the historical sense by continually providing provisional frameworks like “culture” or “structure” within which the movement of historical genesis may be arrested and named. The system of this foreclosure has momentous consequences for Husserl, and for Derrida, who argues, contra Dilthey, that “pure truth or the pretension to pure truth is missed in its meaning as soon as one attempts, as Dilthey does, to account for it from within a determined historical totality” (“Genesis” 160). Instead the “meaning of truth” and the “infinite opening to truth, that is, philosophy” is produced by the inadequation of the Kantian or transcendental idea of “truth” to “every finite structure” that might accommodate it. It is at this point, where we encounter the limit of modern historicism in its attempt to account for truth from within “every determined structure,” that both post-structuralism and the postmodern Nietzschean radicalization of historical forms announce themselves; and it is here that Derrida writes the sentences which outline the genesis of post-structuralist thought: “Moreover, it is always something like an opening which will frustrate the structuralist project. What I can never understand, in a structure, is that by means of which it is not closed” (“Genesis” 160).

     

    If I conclude with the curious claim that what links post-colonialism, postmodernism, and post-structuralism is that they are all postmodern it is because each of these discourses takes it as axiomatic that criticism is no longer going to be practiced as the search for universal value but, rather, as a historical investigation into the events that have led us to constitute ourselves as subjects of specific determinations of truth and responsibility. What is in question is no longer the universal structure of all knowledge but a recontextualization of those instances of discourse that articulate what we can think, say, and do as so many historical events. The value of the postmodern, in my reading, is that it is a force that both constitutes and exceeds determinate historical structures and therefore enables us to mark the limits of those forms of discourse that produce us as subjects of particular kinds of knowledge. But if the postmodern is to yield us both “the historical analysis of the limits imposed on us and an experiment with the possibility of moving beyond them”–if, that is, it is to retain an ethical opening to the future–it must be rigorously distinguished from a postmodernism that has too frequently been constituted as merely a type of cultural structure or mode of historical knowledge (Foucault 319). To think the postmodern, in this radical sense, is to preserve and endlessly reconfigure the idea of the historical limit or the relation between thought and thought’s exterior condition of possibility. This is a difficult inheritance, to be sure. But then, as Derrida reminds us, “if the readability of a legacy were given, natural, transparent, univocal, if it did not call for and at the same time defy interpretation, we would never have anything to inherit from it” (Specters 16). This thought, and the unforeseeable dislocation it guarantees in our relation to our own modes of knowledge, is one of the many things at stake, for us, in literary and cultural studies today.

     

    Notes

     

    1. It is interesting to note that Lyotard’s remarks on the future anterior find an echo in another body of work which, although not specifically concerned with an analysis of postmodernity, attempts to radicalize the relationship between historicity, ethics, and writing: Jacques Derrida’s reading of the “hauntology” and “spectropoetics” of conceptual formations. In the “exordium” to Specters of Marx Derrida writes:

     

    If I am getting ready to speak at length about ghosts, inheritance, and generations, generations of ghosts, which is to say about certain others who are not present, nor presently living, either to us, in us, or outside us, it is in the name of justice. Of justice where it is not yet, not yet there, where it is no longer, let us understand where it is no longer present, and where it will never be, no more than the law, reducible to laws or rights. It is necessary to speak of the ghost, indeed to the ghost and with it, from the moment that no ethics, no politics, whether revolutionary or not, seems possible and thinkable and just that does not recognize in its principle the respect for those others who are no longer or for those others who are not yet there, presently living, whether they are already dead or not yet born. No justice–let us not say no law and once again we are not speaking here of laws–seems possible or thinkable without the principle of some responsibility, beyond all living present, within that which disjoins the living present, before the ghosts of those who are not yet born or who are already dead, be they victims of wars, political or other kinds of violence, nationalist, racist, colonialist, sexist, or other kinds of exterminations, victims of the oppressions of capitalist imperialism or any of the forms of totalitarianism. Without this non-contemporaneity with itself of the living present, without that which secretly unhinges it, without this responsibility and this respect for justice concerning those who are not there, of those who are no longer or who are not yet present and living, what sense would there be to ask the question “where?” “where tomorrow?” “whither?” (xix)

     

    Historicity, Derrida argues here, is constituted by a dialectical play between the texts of the past and the movement of the future-to-come. It is constituted, in fact, by what Derrida calls elsewhere the logic of iterability

     

    in which a sign becomes meaningful only so far as it can be repeated in a series of supplementary contexts. The claim that the meaning of a historical event is not self-identical or immediately present is underscored by the phrase “this non-contemporaneity with itself of the living present,” which insists that every event becomes meaningful only as an effect of its futural movement towards its context of reception. We might say, in keeping with the paradoxical logic of Derrida’s argument, that the meaning of an event comes from the future.

     

    “The future is its memory,” Derrida remarks in response to Marx’s preoccupation with spectres and revenants, and this phrase inscribes the logic of the future anterior within the structure of every historical formation (37).

     

    2. The difficulty that Jameson’s re-negotitation of the postmodern bequeaths him, of course, is to identify the point at which “history” was evacuated from the timeless system of postmodern commodity culture. As we might expect with an assertion that was pragmatic rather than analytic in origin, this clarification has proved difficult to establish. He begins with the confident assertion that the “strange new landscape” of postmodernity emerged in concert with “the great shock of the crisis of 1973” which brought “the oil crisis, the end of the international gold standard, for all intents and purposes the end of the great wave of ‘wars of national liberation’ and the beginning of the end of traditional communism” (Postmodernism xx-xxi). The choice of date is not arbitrary: both Mandel and David Harvey point to the period between 1973-5 as inaugurating a revolutionary new phase in global economic production. This periodization is not unproblematic for Jameson since, as we have seen, Mandel’s Late Capitalism makes a distinction between late capitalism (a mode of production which commences in about 1945) and socio-economic postmodernism (which is born from the slump of 1974-5) which Jameson’s argument frequently occludes. Leaving this problem to one side, it is notable that the epochal rupture with our traditional conception of historical time apparently designated by postmodernism is continually relocated according to the tactical needs of Jameson’s argument. It is first to be found in the cultural torpor engendered by the “canonization and academic institutionalization of the modern movement generally that can be traced to the late 1950s” (Postmodernism 4); it next resurfaces as an effect of the perception of an “end of ideology” produced by the discursive hegemony of American capitalism throughout the 1950s more generally (398); and it reappears to be named as the loss of critical distance between appearance and reality accompanying the “gradual and seemingly natural mediatization of North American society in the 1960s” (399-400). The crisis of historicity that Jameson claims to be a structural feature of postmodernism is evident within the logic of his own argument which eventually conflates historicity and structure in order to situate the postmodern as a general disturbance “in the area of the media.”

     

    3. It is only from the conflict within life, that is, that one is led to think of a concept higher than life and not reducible to life. Such an “end” can be thought but never known or located within this world.

    Works Cited

     

    • de Certeau, Michel. The Writing of History. Trans. Tom Conley. New York: Columbia UP, 1988.
    • Colebrook, Claire. New Literary Histories: New Historicism and Contemporary Criticism. Manchester: Manchester UP, 1997.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “‘Genesis and Structure’ and Phenomenology.” Writing and Difference. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1978. 154-168.
    • —. Specters of Marx: The State of the Debt, the Work of Mourning, and the New International. Trans. Peggy Kamuf. London: Routledge, 1994.
    • —. “Structure, Sign, and Play in the Discourse of the Human Sciences.” Writing and Difference. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1978.
    • Dilthey, Wilhelm. Selected Writings. Trans. H. P. Rickman. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1976.
    • Foucault, Michel. Ethics: Subjectivity and Truth. Trans. Robert Hurley. Ed. Paul Rabinow. New York: New Press, 1997.
    • Jameson, Fredric. Postmodernism; or, the Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. London: Verso, 1996.
    • Kant, Immanuel. Critique of Pure Reason. Trans. Norman Kemp Smith. London: MacMillan, 1933.
    • —. “Idea for a Universal History with a Cosmopolitan Purpose.” Kant: Political Writings. Ed. Hans Reiss. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1991. 41-53.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François. “On the Postmodern.” Eyeline 6 (Nov. 1987): 3-22.
    • —. The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge. Trans. Geoffrey Bennington and Brian Massumi. Manchester: Manchester UP, 1997.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François, and Jean-Loup Thébaud. Just Gaming. Trans Wlad Godzich. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1994.
    • Toynbee, Arnold. A Study of History Volume IX. London: Oxford UP, 1961.
    • Young, Robert. White Mythologies: Writing History and the West. London: Routledge, 1990.

     

  • Sciences of the Text

    David Herman

    Department of English
    North Carolina State University
    dherman@unity.ncsu.edu

     

    Sometime between 1966 and 1968, Roland Barthes began to lose faith that there might be a science of the text. This, to be sure, was not an individualized crisis of belief; it was part of a wider transformation at work in the history of literary and cultural theory–in France and elsewhere. Here I shall not try to document, let alone account for, every aspect of this sea-change in theory and criticism.1 My aims are far more restricted. I mean, first, to conduct a partial genealogical investigation of the notion “science of the text” in Barthes’s own discourse. On the basis of this inquiry, I shall then sketch arguments in favor of a research program that should not be dismissed out of hand, without a fair hearing. At issue is an agenda for research that rehabilitates textual science as a legitimate field of endeavor. And–provisionally, at least–I use the word sciencewithout scare-quotes.

     

    My definition of the term science is, admittedly, a fairly broad one, closer perhaps to the sense of the German word Wissenschaft than to the narrower range of meanings associated with its English cognate. By science I mean the principled investigation of a problem (or set of problems) within a particular domain of inquiry. I acknowledge that “problems,” “domains of inquiry,” and the principles according to which investigation can be “principled” are historico-institutional constructs, not necessarily reflections of the way things truly are. That said, the present essay attempts to reinflect social-constructionist arguments pursued by proponents of the social study of science, for example. Scholars such as Malcolm Ashmore, David Bloor, and Steve Woolgar have demonstrated that scientific practice is always embedded in a particular social context. What counts as scientific, and more specifically what marks the border between “scientific” and “nonscientific” (e.g., humanistic) modes of inquiry, is historically variable. Thus, for Woolgar, “there is no essential difference between science and other forms of knowledge production” (Science 12). Rather, scholars must now “accept that science cannot be distinguished from non-science by decision rules. Judgements about whether or not hypotheses have been verified (or falsified), as to what constitutes the core or periphery in a research programme, and at what point to abandon a research programme altogether, are the upshot of complex social processes within a particular environment” (17). In this way “the ethnographic study of science… portrays the production of scientific facts as a local, contingent accomplishment specific to the culture of the laboratory setting” (“Reflexivity” 18).

     

    But by the same logic, the boundary between humanistic and (social-)scientific research should be viewed not as fixed and impermeable but rather as shifting and porous. My essay centers around a particular instance of this general proposition, examining how the structuralist method articulated by the early Barthes involved an attempt to redraw the border between the science of language and the theory of literature. That attempt can now be reevaluated in light of more recent research in discourse analysis, the field of linguistics that studies units of language larger than the sentence. There were, it is true, important precedents for the structuralists’ efforts to span the disciplinary divide between linguistics and literature–a divide that might be better characterized as an unstable seam in the architecture of inquiry. For example, whereas Ferdinand de Saussure distrusted written data as a basis for the structural analysis of language (23-32), the great speculative grammarians of the Middle Ages used literary language to develop theories about the homology between vox (words), mens (mind), and res (things) (Herman, Universal Grammar 7-14). In contrast to the speculative grammarians of the late thirteenth and early fourteenth centuries, however, twentieth-century structuralists like the early Barthes were adapting linguistic methods and ideas at the very moment when language theory was itself undergoing revolutionary changes.

     

    Those changes stemmed, in part, from emergent formal (e.g., generative-grammatical) models for analyzing language structure (cf. Chomsky’s 1957 and 1964 publications, Syntactic Structures and Aspects of the Theory of Syntax). But the changes also derived from an increasing concern with how contexts of language use bear crucially on the production and interpretation of socially situated utterances–as opposed to the decontextualized sentences (or “sentoids”) that are still the staple of many linguistics textbooks. In the first instance, even as Barthes and Claude Lévi-Strauss were drawing on the linguistic structuralism of Saussure, Roman Jakobson, and Louis Hjelmslev to write texts such as Elements of Semiology and Structural Anthropology, linguistic science was moving from the Saussurean-Hjelmslevian conception of language as a system of similarities and differences to a Chomskyean conception of language as a “discrete combinatorial system” whereby “a finite number of discrete elements [e.g., words] are sampled, combined, and permuted to create larger structures [e.g., sentences] with properties that are quite distinct from those of their elements” (Pinker 84). New, quasi-mathematical formalisms were required to model the workings of this recursively organized system, which has the capacity to operate on its own output and thereby produce such complex strings as The house that the family built that stood on the shoreline that was eroded by the storm that originated from a region that…. At the same time, language theorists working on a different front began to question what they viewed as counterproductive modes of abstraction and idealization in both structuralist linguistics and the Chomskyean paradigm that displaced it. From this other perspective, generative grammarians had perpetuated Saussure’s foregrounding of la langue over la parole, language structure over language use, by taking as their explicandum linguistic competence and jettisoning a host of phenomena (conversational disfluencies, nonliteral usages, differences in speech styles, etc.) that generative grammarians viewed as ignorable–i.e., as matters of linguistic performance only.

     

    For example, Chomsky sought to characterize linguistic competence by abstracting away from the complexities of real-world communication and identifying the cognitive skills and dispositions needed for an idealized speaker and hearer (using a homogenous communicative code) to produce and understand mutually intelligible sentences. By contrast, sociolinguists ranging from Erving Goffman and Dell Hymes to William Labov and J. J. Gumperz insisted on the inherent variability of communicative codes: anyone’s use of any language on any occasion is, in effect, a particular variety or dialect of that language. Speakers can furthermore choose between more or less formal speech styles, as well as registers more or less appropriate for a given situation. We can choose, for instance, between I wonder, may I please have a beer? and Give me a beer; we can also select from among various lexical and discourse options that will be more or less suitable for conversing with a coworker, engaging in a service encounter at the local convenience store, or composing an academic essay. In addition, considerations of age, social status, gender identity, and so on constrain which communicative options potentially available to interlocutors using a given code are typically or preferentially selected by them. Hence, from the perspective of contextually oriented theories of language, formalist idealizations of speakers and hearers are methodologically suspect, yielding models of linguistic competence (i.e., competence at producing and understanding grammatically well-formed strings) that need to be supplanted by ethnographically based models of communicative competence (i.e., competence at producing and interpreting different sorts of utterances in different sorts of situated communicative events) (Hymes 3-66; Saville-Troike 107-80, 220-53). Linguistic competence accounts for my ability to produce the string Look, that person over there is wearing the worst-looking coat I’ve ever seen!; communicative competence accounts for my tendency to refrain from actually producing the string in question, in all but a very few communicative circumstances.

     

    As even this thumbnail sketch suggests, within the field of linguistics itself there are significant disagreements over what properly constitutes the data, methods, and explanatory aims of the science of language, with many of the disagreements at issue starting to crystallize around the time that Francophone structuralists began outlining their project for a science of the text. Yet because of the interests and aptitudes of the commentators who have concerned themselves with structuralism’s legacy, structuralist notions of textual science have remained, for the most part, dissociated from neighboring developments in linguistic analysis.2 My purpose here is thus to reassess the problems and potentials of the structuralist project by reattaching it to a broader context of language-theoretical research. Although structuralist methods have been dismissed as misguided, self-deluded, or worse, I reject the dominant characterization of structuralism as a futile exercise in hyper-rationality, a destructive rage for order. I also dispute the orthodox view that structuralist literary theorists such as Barthes were engaged in a doomed attempt to scientize (the study of) literary art. Instead, I contend that Barthes and his fellow-travellers made a productive, consequential effort to reconfigure the relationship between critico-theoretical and linguistic analysis–to redraw the map that had, in the years preceding the rise of structuralism, fixed the positions of humanistic and scientific inquiry in cognitive and cultural space. In the mid-twentieth century, granted, neither literary theory nor linguistics had reached a stage at which the proposed reconfiguration could be accomplished. There is thus a sense in which the structuralist revolution envisioned by the early Barthes (among others) has started to become possible only now.

     

    Taken as a case-study, Barthes’s emerging ideas about methods for textual analysis reveal larger problems with the way the history of critical theory is sometimes written. In particular, the widespread tendency to chronicle structuralist thought as a brief unfortunate episode of scientism needs to be reconsidered–along with the notion of “scientism” itself. One of my guiding assumptions is that Barthes prematurely stopped using the concept “science of the text” as what Kant would have called a regulative ideal, a goal that orients thought and conduct (Kant 210-11, sections A179-180/B222-223). The project of developing a principled, linguistically informed approach to textual analysis has arguably taken on even greater urgency in the years since Barthes, and those influenced by him, ceased to work in this area. To put things somewhat more colloquially, when at a certain point they abandoned the attempt to use linguistic models to articulate a science of the text, Barthes and his cohorts threw out the baby with the bathwater. After all, the inadequacy of Saussurean models for textual analysis in no way impugns the original insight of the structuralists: namely, that language theory provides invaluable resources for analyzing literary discourse. Post-Saussurean developments in linguistics–specifically, developments in the burgeoning field of discourse analysis–can yield productive new research strategies for analyzing texts. Taken together these new strategies constitute a revitalized textual science, or rather a field of study that needs to be defined by complementary sciences of the text.

     

    Outlining prolegomena for new sciences of the text, the second section of my essay contains a brief illustrative analysis of a scene drawn from Virginia Woolf’s To the Lighthouse.3 I focus on literary discourse as a way of putting the rehabilitation of textual science to its severest test. A fundamental question is this: To what extent can research models associated with the science of language help illuminate the language used in literary art, especially when it comes to literary works that (more or less reflexively and ludically) focus on the nature and functions of language itself? Woolf’s text foregrounds dimensions of language structure and use not describable, let alone explainable, in structuralist terms. Debatably, however, structuralist approaches to literary analysis were problematic not because they aspired to the status of science, but because they mistook what any such science would have to look like. Specifically, the sciences of the text must be integrative rather than immanent; intuitions about textual structures and functions depend not just on competence at selecting and combining formal units, but on the broad communicative and interactional competence both displayed and created by discourse events, including those events recorded in the form of literary texts. Hence textual analysis will become more principled in proportion to its ability to synthesize a variety of research models to study the linguistic, interactional, cultural, and cognitive skills by virtue of which textual patterns are built up, recognized, and used for any number of communicative purposes. My examination of the scene from Woolf’s novel in section II gestures toward a synthesis of this sort, sketching out what will be entailed by redesigning, rather than rejecting, the sciences of the text.

     

    I. Barthes’s Bouquet: Why a Text Is More than the Sum of Its Sentences

     

    What might be called Barthes’s early methodological utopianism, his confidence in the possibility of extending Saussurean language theory across broad domains of linguistic and cultural activity, reached its apex in essays such as “The Structuralist Activity,” published in 1964, and “Introduction to the Structural Analysis of Narratives,” published in 1966. In the former essay, Barthes identified signs of the structuralist activity in the work not only of Troubetskoy, Propp, and Lévi-Strauss, but also of Mondrian, Boulez, and Butor. Both analysts and artists are engaged in the same enterprise–the articulation of “a certain object… by the controlled manifestation of certain units and certain associations of these units”–and it matters little “whether [the] initial object is drawn from a social reality or an imaginary reality” (1197). At this heady stage in Barthes’s thinking, one might say, not just the analysis but the production of text is a science of the sort envisioned by Saussure. By the same token, in his “Introduction to the Structural Analysis of Narratives,” Barthes drew on Saussure’s distinction between la langue and la parole in attempts to find what he called “a principle of classification and a central focus for description from the apparent confusion of individual [narrative] messages” (80). No utterance would be intelligible (or even possible) in the absence of an underlying system of contrastive and combinatory relationships built into the structure of the language in which the utterance is couched. Similarly, argues Barthes, it would be impossible to produce or understand a narrative “without reference to an implicit system of units and rules” (81). As one of the possible object-languages studied by what Barthes describes as a secondary linguistics–i.e., a linguistics not of sentences but of discourses (83)–narrative texts can be construed as higher-order messages whose langue it is the task of structuralist analysis to decode. Though a science of narrative discourse may not yet have been realized in fact, there was for Barthes at this point nothing to indicate that a science of the narrative text could not be accomplished in principle.

     

    By the time he published “The Death of the Author” in 1968, however, Barthes had begun to speak about literary discourse in a very different way.4 Resisting the use of words like code and message as terms of art, and reconceiving texts as gestures of inscription rather than vehicles for communication and expression (146), Barthes had come to embrace a Derridean view of the text as “a tissue of signs, an imitation that is lost, infinitely deferred” (147). The text is, as Barthes now put it, “not a line of words releasing a single ‘theological’ meaning… but a multi-dimensional space in which a variety of writings, none of them original, blend and clash” (146). The scientific decoding of messages has given way to the interpretative disentanglement of strands of meaning–strands more or less densely woven together by the scriptor who fabricates, but does not invent, the discourse. In “From Work to Text,” published in 1971, Barthes characterized the irreducible plurality of the text in similar terms, writing about “the stereographic plurality of its weave of signifiers (etymologically, the text is a tissue, a woven fabric)” (159). To quote another portion of this same passage:

     

    [The text] can be it only in its difference (which does not mean its individuality), its reading is semelfactive (this rendering illusory any inductive-deductive science of texts–no “grammar” of the text) and nevertheless woven entirely with citations, references, echoes, cultural languages… antecedent or contemporary, which cut across it through and through in a vast stereophony. (159-60)

     

    Barthes here disavows the possibility of a science that just a few years earlier he had, if not taken for granted, then assumed as the outcome toward which structuralist research was inexorably advancing.

     

    A moment ago I alluded to Jacques Derrida’s writings as a factor influencing the methodological (or metatheoretical) shift that can be detected in Barthes’s comments on textual analysis; this shift manifests itself in the movement from terms like unit, articulation, classification, rule, and system, to terms such as tissue, fabric, clash, echo, and stereophony. Derrida’s role in the rethinking and radicalization of structuralist semiology has already been well-documented (cf. Dosse). Barthes’s shift from the notion of “expression” to the idea of “inscription,” for example, clearly bears the impress of Derrida’s critique of what he called the transcendental signified (Derrida, “Structure” 83-6; Grammatology 44-73). Less attention, however, has been devoted to the way other, intratextual factors–factors pertaining to Barthes’s original formulation of the nature and scope of textual science–may also have motivated the change in question. Indeed, these other factors do much to account for Barthes’s (and others’) susceptibility to the influence of Derrida’s views about signs, meanings, and texts. Arguably, Barthes was eventually driven to deny the possibility of a science of the text because, in his early work, he lacked the resources to identify key structural properties of texts. He was ipso facto unable to model how such structural properties bear on the design and interpretation of discourse. By contrast, in the years since the heyday of structuralism, linguistic research on extended discourse has demonstrated that certain features and properties of language emerge only at the level beyond the sentence. Researchers have also developed powerful new theories for studying ways in which language-users rely on these discourse-level features and properties to negotiate meanings, to build models of the world, to encode information about temporality, spatial proximity, and relative social status–in short, to communicate in the broadest sense of that term.

     

    Some of the relevant issues may come into better focus through a reexamination of Barthes’s “Introduction to the Structural Analysis of Narratives,” and more particularly of the pages where Barthes discusses the relationship between sentences and discourse (82-84) as a prelude to his account of stories as just “one… of the idioms apt for consideration by the linguistics of discourse” (84). Here Barthes draws on the work of André Martinet in arguing that “there can be no question of linguistics setting itself an object superior to the sentence, since beyond the sentence are only more sentences–having described the flower, the botanist is not to get involved in describing the bouquet” (82-83). But the analogy does not really hold up. Discourse context confers linguistically describable properties on utterances (and parts of utterances) that would not have such properties in isolation from the context in which they occur.5

     

    For example, in the midst of telling someone else about the present essay, one of the readers of this journal might use a definite description like the boring essay to refer to my article. Viewed in isolation, the noun phrase the boring essay has no identifiable feature that would mark it as (part of) an utterance that functions anaphorically. Yet when used in an extended discourse about good and bad journal articles and the differences between them, this definite description could very well pick out an entity previously mentioned in the discourse–namely, this boring essay versus Jones’s lively essay or Wasowski’s controversial one.6 The same argument, of course, can be extended from noun-phrases to full clauses and sentences. Think of all the discourse functions that might possibly attach to a sentence like It’s raining. Depending on the occasion of talk in which it is issued as an utterance, this sentence might be an indirect speech act that functions as a request for someone to close a window (see section II below); a description of climatic conditions contemporaneous with the time of speaking; a narrative proposition describing a past event but couched in the historical present tense; or a predictive utterance made by a blindfolded prisoner during an interrogation in a windowless room.

     

    My larger point here is that research done in the fields of linguistic pragmatics and discourse analysis over the past couple of decades suggests serious problems with the way Barthes defined discourses or texts as mere agglomerations of sentences. There are, in other words, significant grounds for rejecting what Barthes described as a postulate of homology between sentence and discourse. As Barthes put it in his “Introduction,”

     

    [we can] posit a homological relation between sentence and discourse insofar as it is likely that a similar formal organization orders all semiotic systems, whatever their substances and dimensions. A discourse is a long “sentence” (the units of which are not necessarily sentences), just as a sentence, allowing for certain specifications, is a short “discourse.” (83)

     

    As already noted, however, a discourse is not a long sentence. Texts mean in a way that is not strictly componential; in contrast to your knowledge about sentence meaning, you do not necessarily know the meaning of a text if you know the meaning of its parts and the relations, logically specifiable, into which those parts can enter. Rather, during the process of textual interpretation, types of communicative competence come into play that are broader than the linguistic competence based on knowledge about truth conditions for sentences and dependency relations between sentence elements. Because the linguistic models on which the early Barthes relied underspecified discourse structure, making it basically tantamount to sentence structure, Barthes quickly exhausted the descriptive and explanatory yield of those models for the purposes of textual analysis. The models did not furnish an adequate definition of what a text is. Nor did they account satisfactorily for the skills required to fashion and understand texts as ways of communicating. In turn, lacking more nuanced theories of textual structure, yet still eager to draw on the semiological revolution as a resource for textual analysis, Barthes shifted from describing texts as instruments of expression to characterizing them as gestures of inscription. Signs, now, deferred signifieds dilatorily. Discourse was severed from communication, text-interpretation from the framing of inferences about a speaker’s or scriptor’s beliefs. Overall, there seemed to be no good reason to try to anchor texts in language-users’ models for understanding the world, their norms for interaction, or their tacit knowledge of the speech events in which particular speech acts are embedded.

     

    By rejecting the initial reduction of texts to mere collocations of sentences, however, one can avoid heading down the path that leads to a view of texts as things or events that inscribe without expressing, signify without communicating. And by not taking that path, one arguably remains more “faithful” to the structuralist ideal of textual science than were the structuralists themselves. In this spirit, I should like to turn now from a consideration of what was and might have been to some remarks about what may yet be–provided that we restore to the notion “science of the text” its former (if short-lived) status as a regulative ideal for research. Using a scene from Woolf’s To the Lighthouse as my tutor text, I shall discuss features of the text irreducible to features associated with sentence-structure and -meaning. These higher-level features include the following: (1) ways in which the text encodes a complex relation between locutionary and illocutionary acts, or acts of saying and acts of meaning; (2) the manner in which those speech acts are embedded in an overarching speech event, subject to ethnographic description; and (3) strategies by which Woolf at once creates and portrays what Goffman would characterize as a participation framework, in terms of which the participants in the discourse align themselves with one another in certain ways, shift their footing, then take up new alignments. This is of course only a partial inventory of relevant discourse features. My purpose is not to attempt an exhaustive description of all salient properties of the scene, but to use it to promote further debate about the possibilities and limits of textual science.

     

    II. Literary Dialogue in a Discourse-Analytic Context

     

    I should preface my sample analysis with a methodological proviso. The discourse-analytic models on which I am drawing–models originating in speech act theory, interactional sociolinguistics, and the ethnography of communication–were not designed to account for fictional representations of discourse such as we find in Woolf’s novel.7 To mention just one potential problem, fictional representations such as Woolf’s arguably cannot encode all of the “illocutionary force indicating devices” that have been described by speech-act theorists and that are available to discourse participants in other kinds of communicative settings (Searle 30-33). Such devices include, for example, intonational contours, pitch, loudness, and a variety of paralinguistic cues like pauses, conversational synchrony (or asynchrony), head movements, and bodily orientation.8 I assume in what follows that this methodological difficulty, although significant, will not prove fatal to the refashioning of textual science after Barthes.

     

    The scene under discussion occurs in the last chapter (chapter 19) of “The Window,” the first section of To the Lighthouse (Woolf 117-24); it is thus placed just before the “Time Passes” section that serves as a bridge between the first and third parts of the novel, and that records the devastating losses experienced by the Ramsay family during the First World War. The scene in question is hence the last scene in which Mrs. Ramsay is still living.

     

    Consider, first, the way the text foregrounds the complexity of the relation between locutionary acts–acts of saying, whereby one issues an utterance–and illocutionary acts–acts performed on the basis of the act of saying, whereby one does or means something by the issuing of the utterance. More precisely, the text features types of utterance that would be categorized as “indirect speech acts” in the canonical version of speech act theory outlined by J. L. Austin and then systematized by John Searle. In utterances of this sort, illocutionary force disagrees with surface form–as when I utter Can you pass me the salt? in a context in which I want my interlocutor to pass me the salt, not provide an account of his or her reaching, grasping, and passing abilities. In Woolf’s text, there are in fact few true speech acts jointly elaborated by Mr. and Mrs. Ramsay. If we discount the narrator’s reports of thoughts that are not outwardly expressed but rather internally verbalized–instances of what Dorrit Cohn would call “psychonarration”–there are just nine speech acts in the entire scene, seven by Mrs. Ramsay (“‘Well?’”; “‘They’re engaged,… Paul and Minta’”; “‘How nice it would be to marry a man with a wash-leather bag for his watch’”; “‘No,… I shan’t finish it’”; “‘Yes, you were right. It’s going to be wet tomorrow. You won’t be able to go’”) and two by Mr. Ramsay (“‘So I guessed’”; “‘You won’t finish that stocking tonight’”). (Mrs. Ramsay also quotes a line of poetry sotto voce [122].) But as the surrounding narratorial commentary suggests (e.g., “‘Well?’ she said, echoing his smile dreamily, looking up from her book” [122, my emphasis]), these skeletal locutions carry complicated, highly nuanced illocutionary forces. Hence Mr. Ramsay’s acerbic “‘You won’t finish that stocking tonight’” (123) functions not just to predict a state of affairs but also simultaneously to badger, reassure, and comfort Mrs. Ramsay, while likewise serving as an invitation to her to tell Mr. Ramsay that she loves him (123). Indeed, Woolf’s mode of narration compels us to rethink what the notions “literal” and “indirect” might mean in connection with speech acts.9 Indirectness may be a quite loose way of talking about talking, given that, at the very end of this scene, Mrs. Ramsay feels that she has in effect been able to “tell” her husband something without “saying” it at all (124).

     

    Indeed, as Stephen C. Levinson points out, indirect speech acts of the sort represented in Woolf’s text present a challenge to the “literal force hypothesis” associated with classical speech act theory (263-78). According to this hypothesis, “illocutionary force is built into sentence form” (263), such that imperative, interrogative, and declarative sentences have the forces traditionally associated with them, i.e., ordering (or requesting), questioning, and stating, respectively. As already noted, though, in an utterance like Can you pass me the salt?, there is a mismatch between surface form (interrogative) and illocutionary force (ordering/requesting). Woolf portrays Mr. and Mrs. Ramsay’s interchange as one consisting almost entirely of such “nonliteral” utterances. The scene thus bears out Levinson’s contention that most usages are indirect in this sense (264)–especially when it comes to imperatives that tend to be perceived as a threat to recipients’ negative face wants, their desire not to be imposed upon by others (Brown and Levinson). More than this, and as Woolf’s text suggests, there are indefinitely many ways of mitigating a request through indirection. A request for someone to pass the salt might be couched in any number of surface forms, such as My, but this food is underseasoned! or I wonder how this food might be made less bland? or How I wish I were sitting closer to the salt shaker or You seem to be really skilled at passing people salt or May the gods rain down salt upon my food.

     

    In other words, the human proclivity for indirectness provides a compelling reason for not trying to separate out a level of illocutionary force built into–or at least prototypically associated with–particular sentence forms (Levinson 283). Analogously, Woolf’s text underscores the potentially wide disparity between locutionary and illocutionary acts, between modes of saying and strategies for meaning. To rephrase this last point, the scene from To the Lighthouse reveals what might be characterized as the multifunctionality of acts of saying. At stake are both a one-many and a many-one relationship: a single locutionary act can carry multiple illocutionary forces, while a given illocutionary force can be realized by any number of locutionary acts (or even by no locutionary act whatsover). Yet the difficulty of correlating forms with forces and forces with forms does not by and large derail people’s attempts to communicate. It is simply not the case that illocutionary forces pattern randomly with utterance form. This suggests that, in modeling language-users’ ability to understand what speakers mean on the basis of what they say, researchers should complement bottom-up with top-down approaches to discourse comprehension. Theorists should not only work their way up from analyzing individual speech acts to the way they are sequenced in larger stretches of text; they should also work their way down from (strategies for) text interpretation to analysis of the speech acts embedded in discourse. Or, to paraphrase Levinson, the problem of indirect speech acts suggests the advantages of complementing microanalysis of locutionary forms with a more macroanalytic inquiry into communicative intention, utterance function, and interactional context. All of these factors fall under the purview of the new sciences of the text, which focus on how discourse participants (including fictional characters) use language to get meanings across.

     

    Here the usefulness of ethnographic models for textual science makes itself felt. Ethnographers of communication, drawing on Dell Hymes’s SPEAKING grid, have located utterances within a nested structure of speech situations, speech events, and speech acts.10 (Think here of the differences between a colloquium, a lecture given by one of the participants, and then an illocutionary act, e.g., an assertion or a request, occurring within that person’s talk.) Mnemonically associated with each letter in the grid, the factors of Setting, Participants, Ends, Act-sequence, Key, Instrumentalities, Norms, and Genre collectively define a speech situation. The way the factors are realized in a given communicative encounter determines what kind of speech event is involved. Thus, participants relate to one another (and the setting) differently in an interview than they do in a conversation, applying different interpretative norms to the speech act sequences that constitute the event, being more or less restricted as to variations in key and genre, and having different ends in view in each case.

     

    Along the same lines, at the beginning of chapter 19, Woolf specifies the setting and also the participants: Mr. Ramsay is reading, and Mrs. Ramsay is reading and knitting, in their reading room. The key fluctuates from the pathetic to the humorous to the flatly descriptive. Further, partly because of what Mr. and Mrs. Ramsay are reading, the discourse vacillates between different genres, from poetry, to romance, to commentary, to banter. More significant, Woolf represents these characters as participating in a communicative event that they jointly elaborate as a conversation. Note that they enjoy considerable latitude in co-constructing an act sequence that is not strictly dovetailed with the accomplishment of a particular task. Note, too, that the interpretative norms guiding their speech productions reflect the comparatively fuzzy contours of an event that need not unfold in any particular way. And Mr. and Mrs. Ramsay each have their own, more or less covert, ends in performing the acts of saying that they do in fact perform.

     

    In representing this communicative encounter, then, Woolf anchors her text in the same constellation of factors that bears on speech situations at large. Taken together these factors determine what speech event is transpiring from the participants’ standpoint. Mr. and Mrs. Ramsay’s emergent understanding of the discourse as a certain type of event is what enables them to interpret particular acts of saying as part of a more global textual structure. At another level, ongoing assessments about event-type also allow the reader to interpret the act sequence. Structuralist attempts to articulate a science of the text did not focus enough attention on such typicality judgments or their role in discourse interpretation.

     

    Work stemming from interactional sociolinguistics provides additional insights in this connection; this work, too, suggests the advantages of an integrative, holistic approach to textual structure and meaning. Sociolinguists such as Gumperz and Goffman have developed theoretical resources for studying how discourse participants work to interpret sequences of utterances by contextualizing them–in the double sense of situating those utterances in a particular context and specifying what sort of context they mean for the ongoing discourse to create. For example, Goffman has used the notion of “participation frameworks” to rethink older, dyadic models of communication, based on the speaker-hearer pair (124-59). The terms speaker and hearer, on this view, are insufficiently nuanced to capture the many (and fluctuating) statuses that one can have as a discourse participant. These statuses include, on the one hand, speaking as an author, animator, principal, or figure, and, on the other hand, listening as an addressee, an unaddressed but ratified participant, or an unaddressed and unratified participant–e.g., an eavesdropper or a bystander. Further, participants constantly change their “footing” in discourse, thereby changing “the alignment [they] take up to [themselves] and the others present as expressed in the way [they] manage the production or reception of an utterance” (128).

     

    In the scene from To the Lighthouse, both Mr. and Mrs. Ramsay display one sort of footing when they animate utterances authored by other people, i.e., the writers whose works they are reading. (For the most part, they “animate” these utterances only internally, by way of psychonarration, though Mrs. Ramsay does murmur the line of poetry [122].) In effect, the characters’ acts of animation model the reader’s own animating acts: the text encodes the participation framework in terms of which its own analysis is designed to unfold. At the same time, throughout the scene, we readers are unaddressed but ratified participants in the communicative encounter taking place in this fictional world. By making readers participants in the scene it cues them to animate, the text inserts readers in a certain way in the action sequence for which it provides a kind of verbal blueprint. Interpreters’ ability to understand Woolf’s text as a text hinges on their ability to use this blueprint to reconstruct the scene as a coherent whole–a whole whose coherence derives in part from their own specified mode of participation in it. Within the scene itself, Mr. and Mrs. Ramsay change their footing when they begin to converse. They are now not just animators but also authors of the words they animate. Arguably, however, Mr. Ramsay is the principal for whose sake both Mr. and Mrs. Ramsay speak.11 Mrs. Ramsay designs her utterances to accommodate her husband’s need for external affirmation, whereas Mr. Ramsay does not display the same concern with tailoring his speech to the needs of his wife. Mrs. Ramsay is the one who opens the exchange with a question inviting her husband to speak, and all of her turns at talk are designed, in one way or another, to elicit his opinion. Indeed, Woolf herself provides a striking metaphor for this kind of alignment between participants–a mode of alignment rich with implications for the study of discourse and gender–when she describes how Mrs. Ramsay felt her husband’s “mind like a raised hand shadowing her mind” (123).

     

    Thus, from the vantage-point I have started to sketch here, a perspective afforded by integrating ideas from speech act theory, the ethnography of communication, and interactional sociolinguistics, acts of saying take on textual functions because of the way discourse itself is situated in, and helps constitute, sociointeractional contexts. More generally, in the textual science that structuralist theorists glimpsed but could not fully articulate, research begins with the recognition that while a text corresponds to a bounded, integral event, its boundaries are negotiated by participants and its units are saturated with social meanings. It consists not just of words and sentences but of verbal acts made intelligible by what readers and interlocutors know about language, other people, and the world.

     

    III. Textual Science and Literary Theory

     

    I suggested earlier that the structuralist legacy may be, not the lingering trace of a scientism that analysts should work to extirpate from literary theory, but rather the impetus for reassessing what constitutes a principled approach to the analysis of literary as well as nonliterary texts. Structuralism provides this impetus both positively and negatively: it stands as an important precedent for rethinking the scope and aims of literary theory; but it also indicates how the sciences of the text should not be articulated. In its first phase, the project of textual science, true to its Saussurean heritage, went too far in subsuming literary parole under literary langue. It sought to reduce individual messages to the communicative codes by which such messages are produced and interpreted. Misconstruing texts or discourses as agglomerations of sentences, the structuralists also misconstrued the nature of the codes on which they themselves placed so much emphasis. More recent developments in discourse analysis suggest that texts have meaning by virtue of the relationships among messages, codes, and contexts. More precisely, messages or individual texts are made possible by a code that builds in information, first, about the way the parts of a text relate to one another; and second, about the way the text and its parts relate to a particular context of use. The structuralists were thus unable to ask, let alone answer, questions that form the heart of the approach to textual science outlined here–e.g., how a given textual segment evokes an entity referred to in a previous textual segment, and how a stretch of text anchors itself to some essential point in the surrounding context, whether it be the social identities of the interlocutors involved, the overarching communicative event in which the text is embedded, or the participation framework structuring the speech exchanges represented textually.

     

    Insofar as these questions can be asked about all sorts of texts, literary as well as nonliterary, they encourage researchers to explore how aspects of literary interpretation bear on the larger enterprise of developing models for the analysis of discourse in general. Yet this is precisely what Barthes said working out the notion of “text” would entail. To quote some characteristically elegant phrasing from “From Work to Text”:

     

    The work is a fragment of substance, occupying a part of the space of books (in a library for example), the Text is a methodological field…. The work can be seen (in bookshops, in catalogues, in exam syllabuses), the text is a process of demonstration…. The Text is not the decomposition of the work, it is the work that is the imaginary tail of the Text; or again, the Text is experienced only in an activity of production. It follows that the Text cannot stop (for example on a library shelf); its constitutive movement is that of cutting across (in particular, it can cut across the work, several works)…. What constitutes the Text is… its subversive force in respect of the old classifications. (156-57)

     

    Barthes’s remarks were perhaps more future-thinking than he knew. Debatably, it is only now, with the help of linguistic and discourse-analytic concepts to which the structuralists did not have access, that researchers can start reconceiving the literary work as a mode of situated textual practice. In other words, literary texts are definable as discourse productions/events that can be assigned coordinates within an overarching system of sociointeractional parameters. Other sorts of texts–VCR instructions, legal briefs, political speeches, conversational narratives–can be assigned different coordinates within that same sociocommunicative system. Textual science has now begun to amass the tools needed both to characterize the system as a whole and also to pinpoint where particular types of texts are located in the system.12 Participation frameworks function differently in contexts of literary interpretation than in Supreme Court hearings; these two speech situations entail, as well, very different judgments about what kinds of verbal exchanges are typical or preferred, how many (and what sorts of) indirect speech acts are allowable, and so on. But both kinds of discourse events fall within the purview of textual science, whose widened, cross-disciplinary scope is what will enable it to capture the specificity of literary as opposed to nonliterary discourse.

     

    In this way, the new sciences of the text can help bring about the radical interdisciplinarity to which structuralism aspired but which it ultimately failed to achieve. This is the sort of interdisciplinarity that happens “when the solidarity of the old disciplines breaks down… in the interests of a new object and a new language neither of which has a place in the field of the sciences that were to be brought peacefully together, this unease in classification being precisely the point from which it is possible to diagnose a certain mutation” (Barthes, “Work” 155). As it turned out, the mutation that Barthes saw as gripping the idea of the work was held in check by the limited conceptual repertoire of the textual science in its structuralist phase. By contrast, in its new dispensation, textual science can assume its rightful place within the more general endeavor of cognitive science, under whose auspices a number of disciplines have begun to converge on the question of how people use language, in socially situated ways, to build, revise, and communicate models for understanding the world. Yet–and this is the crucial point–the mutated literary text still needs to be studied as a specific type of text. Barthes himself eventually opposed the concept of textuality to what he viewed as an outmoded and reactionary attempt to categorize certain kinds of texts as “literary” (“Work” 157-58). In shifting from a hermeneutics of the work to the sciences of the text, however, researchers do not ipso facto commit themselves to a denial of the specificity of literature. On the contrary, theorists can finally begin to come to terms with literature’s unique properties. Those properties derive from the way literary discourse unfolds as a specific kind of situated textual practice, a form of practice that organizes how we think and act within a particular region of sociocommunicative space.13

     

    Notes

     

    1. See Dosse for a comprehensive and highly readable account of the vicissitudes of the structuralist revolution in which Barthes participated. In “Structuralism’s Fortunate Fall” I examine Dosse’s history of structuralism in light of the broader problem of writing nonreductively about the history of literary and cultural theory.

     

    2. An important exception in this regard is Thomas G. Pavel’s The Feud of Language, which offers a critical reappraisal of the structuralists’ appropriation of linguistic concepts and methods.

     

    3. An earlier version of the second section of my essay appeared as “Dialogue in a Discourse Context.”

     

    4. See my “Roland Barthes’s Postmodernist Turn” for a fuller account of the “postmodern turn” that led to Barthes’s rejection of textual science as a research goal.

     

    5. For an early argument to this effect, published only one year later than Barthes’s essay on the structural analysis of narratives, see Hendricks’s insightful account of discourse-level (i.e., suprasentential) properties of language.

     

    6. On the anaphoric functions of definite descriptions, see Green (26-34).

     

    7. For additional attempts to use pragmatic, discourse-analytic, and sociolinguistic models to analyze literary dialogue, see my “Mutt and Jute” and “Style-Shifting.”

     

    8. See J.J. Gumperz (100-29), Deborah Schiffrin (56-7), John Searle (30), and Deborah Tannen (18-19).

     

    9. For a discussion of how Woolf’s speech representations in Between the Acts similarly complicate the very idea of speech acts, see my Universal Grammar (139-81).

     

    10. See Hymes’s (51-62) original presentation of the SPEAKING grid, and, for an elaboration and refinement of Hymes’s model, Muriel Saville-Troike’s excellent textbook on the ethnography of communication.

     

    11. Analogously, Schiffrin examines speaking for another as a particular sort of alignment strategy, i.e., a way for interlocutors to chip in rather than butt in (106-34). Schiffrin discusses the bearing of this alignment strategy on gender roles.

     

    12. See my “Story Logic” for a preliminary attempt along these lines–one that outlines a basis for comparing and contrasting literary and conversational narratives.

     

    13. I am grateful to James English and to an anonymous reviewer for comments and criticisms that helped me revise an earlier version of this essay. The hard questions put by the reviewer proved especially helpful as I tried to clarify my argument.

    Works Cited

     

    • Austin, J. L. How to Do Things with Words. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1962.
    • Barthes, Roland. “The Death of the Author.” Image, Music, Text. Trans. Stephen Heath. New York: Hill and Wang, 1977. 142-48.
    • —. Elements of Semiology. Trans. Annette Lavers and Colin Smith. New York: Hill and Wang, 1968.
    • —. “From Work to Text.” Image, Music, Text. Trans. Stephen Heath. New York: Hill and Wang, 1977. 155-64.
    • —. “Introduction to the Structural Analysis of Narratives.” Image, Music, Text. Trans. Stephen Heath. New York: Hill and Wang. 79-124.
    • —. “The Structuralist Activity.” Critical Theory Since Plato. Ed. Hazard Adams. San Diego: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1971. 1196-99.
    • Brown, Penelope, and Stephen C. Levinson. Politeness: Some Universals in Language Usage. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1987.
    • Chomsky, Noam. Aspects of the Theory of Syntax. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1965.
    • —. Syntactic Structures. The Hague: Mouton, 1957.
    • Cohn, Dorrit. Transparent Minds: Narrative Modes for Presenting Consciousness. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1978.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Of Grammatology. Trans. Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1976.
    • —. “Structure, Sign and Play in the Discourse of the Human Sciences.” Critical Theory Since 1965. Eds. Hazard Adams and Leroy Searle. Tallahassee: U Presses of Florida, 1986. 83-94.
    • Dosse, François. History of Structrualism. Vols. 1 and 2. Trans. Deborah Glassman. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1997.
    • Goffman, Erving. Forms of Talk. Philadelphia: U of Pennsylvania P, 1981.
    • Green, Georgia A. Pragmatics and Natural Language Understanding. Hillsdale: Erlbaum, 1989.
    • Gumperz, J. J. Discourse Strategies. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1982.
    • Hendricks, William O. “On the Notion ‘Beyond the Sentence.’” Linguistics 37 (1967): 12-51.
    • Herman, David. “Dialogue in a Discourse Context: Discourse-Analytic Models and Woolf’s To the Lighthouse.Virginia Woolf Miscellany 52 (1998): 3-4.
    • —. “The Mutt and Jute Dialogue in Joyce’s Finnegans Wake: Some Gricean Perspectives.” Style 28.2 (1994): 219-241.
    • —. “Roland Barthes’s Postmodernist Turn.” Postmodernism: The Key Figures. Eds. Joseph Natoli and Hans Bertens. Oxford: Basil Blackwell (forthcoming).
    • —. “Story Logic in Conversational and Literary Narratives.” Narrative (forthcoming).
    • —. “Structuralism’s Fortunate Fall.” Postmodern Culture 8.1 (1997); <http://muse.jhu.edu/journals/postmodern_culture/v008/8.1r_herman.html> and <http://www.iath.virginia.edu/pmc/text-only/issue.997/review-1.997>.
    • —. “Style-Shifting in Edith Wharton’s The House of Mirth.Language and Literature 10.1 (2001): 61-77.
    • —. Universal Grammar and Narrative Form. Durham: Duke UP, 1995.
    • Hymes, Dell. Foundations in Sociolinguistics. Philadelphia: U of Pennsylvania P, 1974.
    • Kant, Immanuel. Critique of Pure Reason. Trans. Norman Kemp Smith. New York: St. Martin’s, 1965.
    • Labov, William. Sociolinguistic Patterns. Philadelphia: U of Pennsylvania P, 1972.
    • Levinson, Stephen C. Pragmatics. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1983.
    • Lévi-Strauss, Claude. Structural Anthropology. Trans. Claire Jacobson and Brooke G. Schoepf. New York: Basic Books, 1963.
    • Pavel, Thomas G. The Feud of Language: A History of Structuralist Thought. Trans. Linda Jordan and Thomas G. Pavel. Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1989.
    • Pinker, Steven. The Language Instinct: How the Mind Creates Language. New York: Harper-Collins, 1994.
    • de Saussure, Ferdinand. Course in General Linguistics. Ed. Charles Bally, Albert Sechehaye, and Albert Riedlinger. Trans. Wade Baskin. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1966.
    • Saville-Troike, Muriel. The Ethnography of Communication: An Introduction. 2nd edition. Cambridge, MA: Blackwell, 1989.
    • Schiffrin, Deborah. Approaches to Discourse. Oxford: Blackwell, 1994.
    • Searle, John. Speech Acts. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1969.
    • Tannen, Deborah. Talking Voices: Repetition, Dialogue, and Imagery in Conversational Involvement. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1989.
    • Woolf, Virginia. To the Lighthouse. San Diego: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1989.
    • Woolgar, Steve. “Reflexivity is the Ethnographer of the Text.” Knowledge and Reflexivity: New Frontiers in the Sociology of Science. Ed. Steve Woolgar. London: Sage, 1988. 14-34.
    • —. Science: The Very Idea. New York: Tavistock, 1988.

     

  • Serres Reads Pynchon / Pynchon Reads Serres

    Hanjo Berressem

    Dept. of American Literature and Culture
    University of Cologne
    hanjo.berressem@uni-koeln.de

     

    Elective affinities. …to fold onto each other two texts that have similar diagrams and thus to open up a field of intricate resonances: Thomas Pynchon’s Mason & Dixon (New York: Holt, 1997), a text about the genesis of America, and Michel Serres’s Genesis (Genesis. Trans. G. James & J. Nielson, Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1995), a text about the science & philosophy of surveying.

     

    Serres Reads Pynchon

    Pynchon Reads Serres

     

    Works Cited: Serres Reads Pynchon

     

    • Adorno, Theodor and Max Horkheimer. Dialectic of Enlightenment. Trans. J. Cumming. New York: Verso, 1979.
    • Cilliers, Paul. Complexity and Postmodernism: Understanding Complex Systems. New York: Routledge, 1998.
    • Deleuze, Gilles, and Félix Guattari. Anti-Oedipus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. Trans. Robert Hurley, Mark Seem, Helen R. Lane. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1983.
    • Guattari, Félix. Chaosmosis: An Ethico-Aesthetic Paradigm. Trans. P. Bains and J. Pefanis. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1995.
    • Serres, Michel. Genesis. Trans. G. James and J. Nielson. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1995.
    • —. Hermès III–La traduction. Paris: Minuit, 1974.
    • —. La Naissance de la Physique: Dans le Texte de Lucrèce: Fleuves et Turbulences. Paris: Minuit, 1977.
    • Whitman, Walt. “Democratic Vistas.” Complete Poetry and Selected Prose. Ed. J. E. Miller. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1959. 455-501.

    Works Cited: Pynchon Reads Serres

     

    • Krafton-Minkel, Walter. Subterranean Worlds: 100,000 Years of Dragons, Dwarfs, the Dead, Lost Races & UFOs from Inside the Earth. Port Townsend, WA: Loompanics Unlimited, 1989.
    • Lacan, Jacques. Écrits. New York: Norton, 1977.
    • Pynchon, Thomas. V. Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1963.
    • —. Gravity’s Rainbow. New York: Viking, 1973.
    • —. Vineland. Boston: Little Brown, 1990.
    • —. Mason & Dixon. New York: Holt, 1997.

     

  • The Productive Power of Confessions of Cruelty

    Sara L. Knox

    Humanities Group, School of Cultural Inquiry
    University of Western Sydney
    S.Knox@uws.edu.au

     

    The ideological work of narratives of extreme violence is the subject of this essay. The apocryphal confessions of Henry Lee Lucas will be examined in order to show that narrative authority has greater power than fact, even where that fact is at issue in law. What maintains Lucas’s reputation as one of the world’s worst serial killers–even after the debunking of the majority of his confessions by the Attorney General of Texas–is the typicality of his self-spun narrative of serial killing. The cruelty to which he confessed eclipsed other more “ordinary” homicides, cases cleared on the basis of his confessions. In this way the “ideological work” of Lucas’s confessions is the construction of a horizon of “unacceptable” violence beneath which more ordinary cruelties vanish from sight.

     

    The Making of a Serial Killer

     

    Early in July 1998 Henry Lee Lucas had his single death sentence commuted to life imprisonment by then Governor of Texas, George W. Bush. This was a surprising event in several ways. It was surprising for Texas–the state with the largest number of prisoners on Death Row and the most executions since the reinstatement of the death penalty in 1976. Stays and commutations sought on the basis of “new evidence” are seldom successful–the state is not above executing someone who is wrongfully accused, innocent, or (more frequently) has had no benefit of competent counsel.1 The increasing formalism of capital due process has meant a reduction of legitimate avenues for appeal. The U.S. Court of Appeals for the 5th Circuit found against one of Lucas’s habeas corpus requests for review on the basis that “it is not settled law that a compelling claim of innocence is alone grounds for federal intervention”–that is to say, innocence is not enough if the death sentence was arrived at during a fair trial, by deliberation on the evidence then available.2 Lucas’s commutation came at the recommendation of the Texas Board of Pardons and Paroles, a body who–in the twenty previous years of escalating execution rates–had not intervened once to stop an execution.3

     

    But also surprising is the fact that this sudden largesse was directed at someone who continues to figure–in Web sites, true crime encyclopedias, monographs, and in the popular imagination–as one of America’s worst serial killers; Lucas is widely thought to have killed over 200 people. Even those whose business it is to critique the category of the serial killer tend to forget that the evidence to support his inflated kill ratio is slight. They forget the findings of the methodically researched “Lucas Report,” commissioned by the Texas Attorney General’s Office in 1986, which raised serious doubts about Lucas’s perverse success as a serial killer.4 The “Lucas Report” notwithstanding, Lucas’s name has not been erased from the popular pantheon of killers. People seem to want to believe the grimly evocative tales Lucas told to the Texas Rangers and folks from various County Sheriff’s offices who came to him, hat in hand, with their unsolved cases. It is almost as if compulsive lying could be taken as evidence of–or as an acceptable equivalent for–the supposedly compulsive quality of the most serial serial killings. In the case of Henry Lee Lucas, then, two questions arise. Firstly, why has the narrative of his guilt proven–against all evidence–so enduring? And, secondly, why was his claim for relief successful when the equally strong claims of so many others before him had not been? I’m going to argue that the answers to these two questions are related, as are the questions themselves.

     

    As I’ve already indicated, the law in the Lucas case was not exceptional enough to fully explain the granting of relief. Thus, in what follows, I explore the surprising coalescence of mercy and justice on the part of the State of Texas by comparing the case of Lucas to that of another convicted murderer, Karla Faye Tucker. Tucker was not a serial killer, but she confessed to and was condemned to death for crimes that were considered monstrous–by the trial jury and the media. The different ways in which both of these killers exercised the practice of confession, and the markedly different results of those confessions, reveal something about contemporary attitudes toward violence, as well as the degree of cultural interest in narratives of extreme cruelty.

     

    Like Karla Faye Tucker, Henry Lee Lucas was taken into custody in 1983. After his conviction in 1984 for the “Orange Socks” Murder,5 he was for a while the most well-traveled killer in custody, being chauffeured across Texas and between states by the Texas Rangers, to whom he had begun to confess his many “additional” murders. 213 cases, the majority of them within the state of Texas, were cleared and accounted for as Lucas’s work or that of both Lucas and his partner, Ottis Toole.

     

    In his early years in custody Lucas inspired a number of popular “true” crime or fictional texts around his life, including Mike Cox’s quasi-biographical Confessions of Henry Lee Lucas and the controversial film Henry: Portrait of a Serial Killer. Arrested at the age of 49, Lucas was older than many of his serial killer contemporaries, who are typically profiled as deadly between the ages of 27 and 45. He made up for this atypicality with his self-selection to type. He told stories of an abusive and deprived childhood, went on to describe his rootless existence as an adult, and–in detailing the murders–flourished his pronounced psychopathology to both expert and lay interviewers. One brief description succinctly describes Lucas’s inflated claims:

     

    First Henry Lee Lucas confessed to strangling his traveling companion, 15-year-old Becky Powell, and burying her in a field. The one-eyed drifter’s next admission was grislier. He said he stabbed 82-year-old Kate Rich to death, had sex with her, lugged the body home, cut it to pieces and burned it in a wood stove behind his cabin in Texas. The shocks were just beginning. Arraigned for her murder in 1983, Lucas told a packed courtroom: “I killed Kate Rich, and at least a hundred more.” He gave bigger death counts later, some precise, some rounded up: 157 in all… no, 200, 231, 600. He said he’d killed women in 27 states with nylon rope, a phone cord, .22s, .38s, .357 magnums, rifles, knives, statues, vases, a hammer, a roofer’s axe and a two-by-four. (Pedersen 64)

     

    This paragraph captures the gruesome élan of the serial killer’s excess, excess that Lucas was seen by many to exemplify.

     

    Lucas’s lengthy confessions should have raised doubts about his credibility. Not only did he claim a tally of somewhere between 157 and 600 dead, but he accounted for his victims across fifteen states and, in one particularly florid tale, outside of the U.S. altogether.6 Loquacious about his ordinary brutalities, Lucas was equally articulate about acts extraordinary even for him. He was the man who killed Jimmy Hoffa–he said. He oversaw the delivery of poison to the Rev. Jim Jones’s compound in Guyana–he said. And, to give some kind of overarching form to the various cruelties he’d claimed, Lucas asserted that he’d done much of his killing under the auspices of a satanic cult, “The Hands of Death.” These incredulous claims were buried beneath the information about Lucas’s “regular” killings that was being amassed by the Texas Rangers.

     

    Lucas’s spirit of cooperation was itself taken as evidence of a serial killer’s nature. As one anonymous FBI witness put it to the Subcommittee of the House Committee on Government Operations, “You just can’t shut these guys up. They… want to talk about their crimes” (qtd. in Tithecott 101). Lucas’s confessions were detailed, grisly and full of self-aggrandizement. He had a nuanced sense of the language suitable for a psychopath, lacking not just affect but any appreciation whatsoever of the integrity and particularity of others. Mark Seltzer quotes Lucas as saying “[a] person was a blank” (12).

     

    Lucas began recanting his confessions just prior to the release of the Attorney General’s Report and the deepening of the appeals process. He then admitted that he’d gotten the information he’d “confessed to” from the Orange Socks case file, left sitting in front of him by an over-zealous Texas Ranger (Pagel). Later in the appeals process, Lucas told a reporter from the Detroit News, “I don’t think anybody, a human being anyway, could kill 600 people. I made up some of the worst details you’ve ever heard, like how to mutilate a human being…. I told them I cut this one girl up in pieces and made hamburger out of her. I didn’t do any such thing” (Pressley). Lucas insisted he’d killed no one but his mother–and even that he couldn’t remember: ” I just remember hitting her, but they say I [killed her] , so I’ll go along with that one” (Pressley).

     

    Lucas’s tales of murder restyled as feckless criminality showed an apparent change of heart about the world and his place in it. He struggled to shed the psychopathic image he’d previously cultivated. In this way he distanced himself from his friend and confederate, Ottis Toole, who was busily recanting his own confessions.7 The tone of Lucas’s recanting moved from one of bafflement to one of righteous indignation as he accused the police (whose attentions he’d earlier craved) of underwriting his confessions just to get cases off their books. Lucas’s magnanimity receded with each failure of the appeals process. As could be expected, the closer the execution came, the more his mind turned to his own situation. Lucas began to think that his “biggest crime [since the murder of his mother] was to play along with police officers who viewed him as a convenient scapegoat.” And his capital crime? “They’re going to execute me for lying. That’s what they’re going to execute me for” (qtd. in Hylton).

     

    Lucas had begun to heartily regret having confessed so spectacularly to Texas Rangers and local agencies of the FBI. Even the solid evidence that supported his recantations didn’t seem to help. According to Phil Ryan, the Ranger who’d arrested Lucas, “If anybody deserves to die for something he didn’t do, I’ve never met a better candidate than Henry” (Pedersen 64). Despite his own protests and the evidence to support his recantation put forward by the Texas Attorney General’s office, opinion remained divided about the status of his confessions. Understandably, the Texas Rangers continued to defend their clearing of the associated cases. One retired Ranger, Jack Peoples, warned that “if the people of this area believe him [recanting], that’s their problem” (Thurman). The son of a woman supposedly murdered by Lucas (her murder being one of the “cleared” cases) sent an angry rebuke to Peoples in the Amarillo Globe-News: “First of all, it is not a matter of believing anyone. The evidence, or lack thereof, speaks for itself…. A confession does not a killer make” (Thurman). Perhaps not, but a chauffeured walk down I-95 with a member of the Georgia Bureau of Investigation and the County Sheriff looking for body dump sites certainly did seem to make a killer. Law enforcement in Georgia and Florida stood by the initial clearances and seem to want to continue to do so despite the commutation of Lucas’s sentence.

     

    Indeed, in this story of confession and recantation, everything seemed to happen despite countervailing information. Lucas seemed set to be executed despite the evidence suggesting his innocence for the crimes. People continued private investigations into the murders of their relatives despite the official closing of the cases. The Texas Rangers stood by their clearance of those cases despite heavy criticism from the State Attorney General’s Office about both their procedure and its results. The tag “serial killer” continues to prefix the name Henry Lee Lucas despite the lack of evidence for his inflated kill ratio. The narrative continues despite the facts. This is not news regarding either due process or the media (one need only remember the sad case of the security guard who discovered the backpack-bomb at the Atlanta games). A bad reputation, once made, is very difficult to unmake–the reputation for killing included. But there are other things in play in the struggle over the confessions of Henry Lee Lucas. What was it that made his confessions so tenable?8

     

    Confession, Testimony and “False Witness”

     

    The discursive field for confession has increasingly come to include a commodification of suffering. Trauma as narrative crosses and re-crosses the contemporary American cultural terrain. Confession as a narrative of trauma marks the intersection of all sorts of competing discourses in the popular realm–legal, criminological, psychological, therapeutic, and folkloric. James Ellroy’s Dark Places marks one such intersection. Ellroy made successive public appeals for information on his mother’s unsolved 1958 murder. His book records just some of the responses that crammed his answering machine. Of those offering leads, a fair proportion were women accusing fathers (who had abused them) of the rape-murder of Jean Ellroy. One of these, whom Ellroy called the “Black Dahlia lady,” dutifully replied to each and every plea for information. After cross-checking her story, he dismissed her claim and decided that she could not explain his mother’s murder or his own favorite bête noir, the killing of Elizabeth Short, a.k.a. the “Black Dahlia.”9

     

    While Ellroy didn’t doubt the tales of abuse he heard, he found the structure of narrative oddly colonizing: “Their grief was all-inclusive. They were writing an oral history of the ravaged kids of our time. They wanted to include my story. They were evangelical recruiters” (Ellroy 297). “All-inclusive” naturally says it all. A close reading of Janice Knowlton’s memoirs (she was the so-called “Black Dahlia Lady”) reveals a tale of suffering that is a grab-bag of horrors. The authority of her story of her father’s hidden career of murder has a similar mechanism to Lucas’s florid confessions. Where he includes Jim Jones and the “The Hands of Death,” she has the conspiracy against Marilyn Monroe and unnamed cults.

     

    Knowlton details a traumatic epic, the narrative comprised of recovered memories of her childhood and adolescence. She remembers witnessing numbers of killings (from which, at the time, she “went away”–her coy term for what both her therapists and co-author agree was a dissociative state). Her father’s alleged killings neither ended nor began with the death of the Black Dahlia but covered a five-state area and thirty-year period. Knowlton links her father not only to the most notorious murder in postwar Los Angeles, but also to a Satanic Cult active in the 1950s. And her links between the secret and the public don’t just refer to the realm of the macabre, but refer to other cultural landmarks as well–linking, for instance, the Black Dahlia to a “secret” friendship with Marilyn Monroe. What Knowlton’s narrative lacks in its basis in fact,10 it makes up for in its claim to authority: the sheer breadth of its linkages with the commonsensical and the mythological. That search for authority extends outward into myth, mystery, and notoriety. (Indeed, one of the few things that Knowlton doesn’t blame her father for is the death of Elvis.) Knowlton’s testimony of personal violence is laid upon a backdrop of public, popular, and even historical trauma.

     

    The intimate exposure of the convex folds of memory becomes therefore not just a public act of confession, but an intervention into the meaning of public life and public record. Her narrative thus fits into a set of proliferating discourses about “personal” traumas played out on a public stage. And, more importantly, her narrative pairs the portrait of victimization (the narrative of suffering) with that of the serial killer, the authority of the one supported by the horror of the other. Customarily, the narratives of those who suffer and those who cause harm are separated–theirs is no dialogue but rather one answering the other to rectify loss and the record of wrong (as in the case of victim impact statements in the penalty phase of capital trials). But in what other ways can narratives of the agents and the victims of trauma be seen to relate to one another? Are they in any way interchangeable at the level of consumption? The similarities between Knowlton’s figuring of her father’s wanton and inexhaustible cruelties and the continued persuasiveness to the popular imagination of Lucas’s stylization of himself as serial killer would seem to suggest that such narratives of suffering and cruelty are indeed related.

     

    Narratives of cruelty and narratives of suffering hold in common their ability to impart meaning and identity to those who suffer cruelty and those who commit it (although both groups need not be mutually exclusive). Serving time in prison for committing a violent crime, one inmate spoke of the choice posed by suffering: “‘If I don’t do evil, then evil will do me. If I weren’t evil, I’d be shit’” (qtd. in Alford 115). What Knowlton’s narrative and Lucas’s confessions share is their ability to construct an awful ideality: the meta-identities of victim and killer.

     

    If testimony, in Judith Herman’s phrase, “has both a private dimension, which is confessional and spiritual, and a public aspect, which is political and judicial,” then, by the very nature of the act of testimony, the narrator of suffering endured is initiating the “restoration of the social order” (qtd. in Leys 123). Herman assumes that testimony and its power belong primarily to those who have suffered the cruelty or the annihilating intent of others.11 But what of the situation of those who have not only suffered cruelty, but dispensed it as well? (Such is the case of certain ex-combatants suffering war-related trauma, where one suffers for what one has done as well as for what one has witnessed or endured.)12 And what of those who have primarily been agents of cruelty? Does the “remembering and telling of terrible events” work toward the “restoration of the social order and… the healing of individual victims” when the person testifying put those events in train?

     

    The testimony of the guilty is problematic because it fulfils the broad definition of testimony (bearing witness to terrible events) while simultaneously being suspect, potentially or implicitly self-serving. Often, guilty witnesses will witness to the terror in general but not to what they themselves did. They will, in short, place themselves outside of the stream of events, as if they were merely recording, rather than carrying out, that destruction. And such prevarication might not even be conscious. As Primo Levi puts it:

     

    We are unable to detect whether the subject does or does not know he is lying. Supposing, absurdly, that the liar should for one instant become truthful, he himself would not know how to answer the dilemma; in the act of lying he is an actor totally fused with his part, he is no longer distinguishable from it. (17)

     

    In Levi’s formula we can read the act of lying testimony as being a matter of identity: the liar as wedded to the lie. The lie tells him as effectively as the truth would, because his identity is the lie. But in this description of the liar, Levi also gives us a way to look at the political dimensions of the lie, the world by which the confession, the testimony, and the witnessing is received. Neither the liar nor the lie can stand alone. Both the narrative obscured and the story told are productive–a part of history, or the silence from which a history (and a politics) arises.

     

    Where testimony relates to matters that pass under the banner of “evil” as it is presently understood (murder, and particularly serial murder, being a case in point), testimony is imbued with the aura, the uncertainty, and the complexity of its relation to the Holocaust–as the Holocaust continues to be the “leading image of evil” for our times (Alford 17).13 And one of the particular burdens of testimonies of suffering has been to provoke recognition from those responsible for that suffering. Painful assertions of historical and personal truth continue to be met with the silence, the forgetfulness, and the lying of the perpetrators–those who have given false witness, those who–in Levi’s phrase–have acted in “bad faith” (the Institute for Historical Research is a particularly flagrant example). In such a situation a free confession of guilt–a confession that places the agent of violence at the center of the narrative–may be greeted with profound relief. Even when that confession is a lie.

     

    Robert Jay Lifton has written of the “false witness” to death of those who secure a measure of psychological survival by the strategy of visiting suffering upon others, thereby displacing the “death taint” and their own proven vulnerability. Lifton’s discussion takes in the problematic case of the soldiers at My Lai and, in a very different way, the case of the prisoner doctors at Auschwitz. But the implications of his analysis of the “false witness” are more general:

     

    False witness tends to be a political and ideological process. And really false witness is at the heart of most victimization. Groups victimize others, they create what I now call “designated victims,”…. They are people off whom we live not only economically… but psychologically…. We reassert our own vitality and symbolic immortality by denying them their right to live and by identifying them with the death taint, by designating them as victims. So we live off them. That’s what false witness is. (Lifton, qtd. in Caruth 139)

     

    While Lifton is discussing survival, responsibility, and witnessing in the context of specific persons and specific historical events, his widening of the implications of “false witness” implies that “false witness” is discursive, not solely a property of persons but a productive property of cultures–an engine of history, not its consequence. It is this concept of “false witness” to which I would now like to turn with a comparison of the ideological work of the literal “false witness” of Henry Lee Lucas to the quite different workings of false witness in Karla Faye Tucker’s confession of cruelty and later attempted redemption through religious witness.

     

    Karla Faye Tucker

     

    Like Henry Lee Lucas, Karla Faye Tucker confessed to having committed extraordinary cruelties. But her confession (replayed during the trial and much publicized thereafter) did not establish an awful ideality and invite fascination along with disgust. Instead, it described a violence so anomalous and so extreme that it seemed to stand utterly without reference. And the power of that anomalous confession of sexual cruelty–by a woman–was such that Tucker was never able to successfully remake herself as penitent in the public eye. While Lucas’s confessions seemed to describe that typical atypicality of the serial killer, Tucker’s were the antithesis of contemporary cultural understandings of female violence and, indeed, wider stereotypes of femininity.

     

    Karla Faye Tucker’s execution by the State of Texas was perhaps the most controversial execution in the U.S. since that of Gary Gilmore in 1976. The controversy surrounded her gender as read through the lens of the contest between the killer and the born-again penitent about to be executed. Tucker had implicated herself by confessing, not merely to murder, but to the additional “crime” of having sexually enjoyed the killings. That is, Tucker confessed to having orgasmed while repeatedly stabbing both Jerry Dean and Deborah Thornton with a pickaxe in Dean’s apartment in 1983. On the strength of that boastful confession to friends (played to the jury during the trial), Tucker’s example has been held out as evidence for what some consider to be a new “trend” in female sex crimes (Rappaport).14 The other circumstances of the crime–that it was committed with her companion, Daniel Garrett, the culmination of three days of heavy drug use–were overshadowed by this single fact. The aggravated circumstances of the crime taken into account during sentencing seemed to be more about Karla Faye Tucker’s orgasm than they were, say, about the unusual brutality or the “motivelessness” of the act. The “thrill” in the kill was Karla Faye’s and so, coincidentally, was the fate prescribed for it–she alone was executed, while Daniel Garrett died in prison of liver disease.15

     

    In the fifteen years between the killings and her execution, Karla Faye Tucker was saved: she was “born again” (not necessarily unusual on death row). Though not unique in being penitent, the contrast between the murderer and the penitent was particularly starkly drawn in the furor surrounding Tucker’s gender. One of only a few women on Death Row in Texas, Tucker became the first woman to be executed there since the Civil War. While the battle raged between those who thought it impolitic to execute a woman and those who thought feminism was getting what it asked for, deep-seated cultural anxieties were exposed by the discourse around Tucker’s gender.

     

    The problem for Karla Faye Tucker was that the power of witness could not eradicate and over-write the cultural power of her original confession to cruelty. While Tucker had latterly provided an admission of guilt and the even more satisfying contrition to accompany it, the distance between her present incarnation as repentant witness and her past incarnation as professed sinner was a narrow one. While her supporters agreed that she was a “different person” than the one who did the killing (“International Appeals to Spare Tucker Fail”), the irreducible and particularly embodied fact of her sinning self remained.

     

    Tucker’s persona as repentant witness and member of the faithful rewrote the “kind of woman” she had been. That is to say, by remaking her soul, Tucker invited potential new readings of her femininity and her sexuality. One writer commented on the “fresh-faced sexual desirability” of Tucker in her last days; her ultra-feminine “winsomeness” (King 72). Being saved entailed a renovation of her femininity–in her last year she presented herself as being respectable and conservative. But then, in another sense, the style of Tucker’s contrition and her narrative of salvation can be seen as being discursively undermined by the persistence–in the face of her spiritual redemption–of a highly sexualized and gendered corporeality. The Christian tenet of a relationship between the fate of the flesh and that of the spirit (where the spirit is cleansed by the sufferings of the flesh) broke down in the case of Tucker, despite the pleas of numerous concerned divines that her debt be considered paid. An ostensibly gender-free, anti-Aristotelian distinction between flesh and spirit has been a constant throughout the history of Protestant attitudes to sin, redemption, and punishment. While the physical form has become less important and the life of the soul more important throughout the development of–particularly–evangelical Protestant traditions, the situation of the condemned criminal has always been slightly novel. The coverage of Tucker’s contrition and of her punishment are inextricably entwined, so that Tucker remained accountable for her transgressions even after her death.16 It was–after all–a language of the body that condemned Karla Faye Tucker. Her original confession retains a strange residual power in its embodiment of the feminine, that orgasmic, drug-crazed, dissipated female body that the State of Texas would execute to allow the liberation of the penitent spirit.

     

    The ungendered discourse of redemption by witness can’t contain the wanton particularity of the confession and its transgression of the feminine. As one writer cynically remarked:

     

    Her irreparable mistake was boasting that she orgasms while killing…. True, she was a prostitute, but the orgasm claim was surely a lie. The murder occurred in 1983 when the multiple-orgasm craze was going full-tilt…. I would bet that enough of this pop carnality filtered through to Karla Faye to inspire the trendy lie that sealed her doom. (King 72)

     

    The tense says it all: she orgasms while killing. That boastful moment becomes in this formulation a statement about habits–a description of all possible potential encounters. Reading this, one is forced to wonder whether Tucker would still orgasm while killing. The original confession bequeaths a future that is ineradicable. Ironically, Tucker can’t escape the femininity she’s impugned. The witness does not cancel out the confession. Tucker’s literalization of the profanity of the female body doubly condemned her.

     

    The False Witness of Karla Faye Tucker

     

    In what way can the concept of false witness be applied to the case of Karla Faye Tucker? False witness is, in one way, a failure to witness. Not failure in the sense that Dori Laub, referring to the Holocaust, defines as the inability of the “historical insider” to remove him- or herself “sufficiently from the contaminating power of the historical event” (Laub 66). False witness is a very different kind of failure to witness, although it too contains a failure or inability to bear witness to oneself. Certainly, if we go along with Florence King’s theory about the “trendy lie that sealed her doom,” then Karla Faye Tucker acted as false witness to herself.

     

    But there is something more to it, another level of false witness at work within the case of Karla Faye Tucker. She is both the object and the subject of false witness. In the most general sense, Tucker is the object of false witness because she was arbitrarily (due process notwithstanding) selected for death. The majority of those currently on death row throughout the United States are African American and Latino men from the working classes or the permanently, structurally unemployed. While the racial demographics of women on death row shows a less clearly raced and classed group, the way in which their crimes are gendered (and gender is itself raced and classed) demonstrates a particular unhappy truth about capital due process–a truth that George McClesky failed to advance in his own defense (or, for that matter, failed to advance in the defense of others similarly situated).17 That is, capital due process sacrifices those upon whose lives a lower social value is placed in reprisal for the loss of those more highly valued.

     

    This is not to say that individuals are not guilty of specific crimes and that those crimes very often are–in Lifton’s terms–themselves the product of false witness (viz. the displacement of one’s own suffering upon others). In a larger sense the “juridical complex” (the judiciary, penal institutions, and capital due process) is itself a material strategy of the “ideological process” of false witness–symbolically and literally producing, and then eliminating, a whole class of “designated victims.” And the sacrifice of those “designated victims” rehabilitates the very system that assigns the order of victims to begin with, and thus seems to divide the guilty from the innocent, and the “socially valuable” from the “socially dangerous.” Capital due process is a mechanism for the exorcism of what Lifton calls the “death taint.” It does so literally (in the form of its differential impact upon already socially vulnerable populations) and symbolically (by its attempt to locate and contain urban decay, male violence, racial tension, and economic stratification within those various particular and pathologized bodies earmarked by the state for destruction). In this way Karla Faye Tucker is one of many possible objects of false witness. And this, perhaps, says nothing about her in her particularity. Had the State of Texas executed Henry Lee Lucas then he, too, would have been the object of this kind of false witness.

     

    Karla Faye Tucker, however, was the object of a more specific form of false witness. That is, she suffered a rhetorical obliteration during the controversy attending the lead-up to her execution, and that rhetorical destruction was aimed at the woman she once had been (or, more properly, the type of woman she once had been). The fifteen years between the killings and the execution were not only marked by Tucker’s conversion, but also (and more importantly for the mechanism of false witness) by a profoundly conservative shift in the political sphere. The moral politics of neo-conservatism sought to clarify a traditional opposition between public and private realms by a whole set of linked discursive strategies. One of these was the plea–couched in the rhetoric of neo-maternalism–for women to get back to the home. (Materially underlying that plea were welfare cuts, the abandonment of anti-discrimination policies, and the continuing disparity of men’s and women’s wages.) And increasingly bipartisan law-and-order platforms focused on crimes in the public realm (at the expense of continuing high levels of domestic violence) and the restitution of “public order” policing. The focus in law-and-order discourse on gang violence, stranger killing, drug crimes, and the “problem” of recidivism made certain public spaces, certain communities, certain classes or groups of persons the a priori markers of dangerousness. These “others” were those most likely to offend; they were souls beyond saving, the always already guilty suspect–those circumstantially, and by inheritance, doomed. The rewriting of the realms of public and private taking place under the sign of neo-maternalism and law-and-order discourse effectively re-articulated a commonsensical (and not inconsequentially gendered) binary opposition of the public to the private.

     

    The ideological work of false witness in the cases of Tucker and Lucas operates around this demarcation of the public and the private, or around what counts as–or for–the social. In his discussion of serial killing as a “situated practice” in the postmodern social, Jon Stratton suggests that the supposed “motivelessness” of such killing acts out on the individual level the greater social drama of the loss–in postmodernity–of the possibility of anomie; normlessness only becomes possible to the extent that there are normative values to begin with. But what the discourse of the “motivelessness” of serial killing elides is the transition of the personal or individual motive to the social motive–and the social scene–of killing.18 This social scene includes scenes not normally associated with the actual scene of killing. In a culture of spectacle the serial killer “gains his meaning because his attack is not on his individual victims but on the audience who make up the membership of the social” (Stratton 96). The serial killer manufactures display (the bodies turned inside-out and left in public or semi-public spaces) and is manufactured as display (the fame and infamy of the serial killer). Both Stratton and Mark Seltzer therefore use the figure of the serial killer as a discursive crux in which the individual, the private, and the interior become social, public, and exterior. Their critiques are useful for situating the discourse of serial killing in wider cultural and historical frames.19 Their analysis enables us to understand the survival (literally and figuratively) of Henry Lee Lucas and, contradictorily, the elimination of Karla Faye Tucker.

     

    Henry Lee Lucas’s confessions were refined distillations of an established sub-genre of serial killing. The techniques he claimed to have used varied, but their aim did not. He described brutal damages. His victims were supposedly the usual misplaced, missing, or unwanted figures–the socially marginal: prostitutes, runaways, hitch-hikers. The scenes of murder he described included the deserted semi-public spaces of what Seltzer terms the “pathological public sphere” and the ad hoc private of motels and car interiors (transience temporarily stilled). And in Lucas’s confessions the occasional imputed witness kept a silence that could only be taken as evidence of social dislocation (for so many killings, how could no one have seen?).

     

    The total effect of Lucas’s confessions, then, was to submit to closer scrutiny a depressingly familiar portrait of the postmodern killing scene. Lucas’s confessions were credible precisely to the extent that they conformed to the commonsensical. The confessions (and the 213 cases cleared because of them) made–ironically–for a supportable accounting of death. In this way the figurative dead in Lucas’s false confessions transmuted bureaucratically into 213 actual dead, and the cleared cases represent the nominal sum of “designated victims” for this particular case of false witness. This is not to confuse false confession and false witness. Lucas lied, but the bureaucratic depth of belief for his lies, and the popular market for them, defines the point at which the effect of false confession leaves off and the ideological work of false witness begins. The kinds of crimes described, the kinds of victims, and even the killer (self-selected to type) went together handily to portray a set of pre-eminently public crimes.

     

    Lucas’s invented crimes policed the margins of a tame, familiar, and entirely figurative public sphere by defining the pathological public sphere supposedly anterior to it. His inventions intersected conveniently with a list of actual dead, and his claim to authorship of the killings gave an acceptable discursive clothing to the unnamed, partly naked bodies of the women, children, and young men that turned up (and continue to turn up) in the vacant lots, roadsides, abandoned buildings, and dumpsters that mark the borders of habitable America. The rewriting of these 213 deaths under the putative authorship of Lucas severs their last ties with place, with domesticity, privacy, and, often, their very names, as the name of the victim is obliterated by the more famous name of the killer. The victims become “lost,” “abandoned,” “abducted” or “runaway”; the prey of one who is himself the embodiment of social dislocation–drifter, drinker, loner, killer. For the 213 people supposedly killed by Lucas there can be no imputation of death’s grim domesticity: no death from spousal violence; no death caused by the malice or lack of care of friends and relatives; no death due to simple robbery with violence. The many possible fatal risks endemic to private life vanish from the historical record.

     

    In this way, Lucas’s legendary brutality has a productive side. The events engendered by his false confessions produce an image of violent, inexplicable deaths. Lucas’s killings are exceptionalized and abstracted into the realm of awful chance; they are deaths for which rare evil, monstrosity, or madness are supposedly responsible. Lucas’s confessions discount the social and, in that sense, do a very good job of what Lifton describes as “false witness.” The death taint is displaced onto the pre-eminent human agent of death–the serial killer–and by the “inexplicable” and terrifying deaths of the victims accounted to him. That is why it is not surprising that Lucas himself survived death row when others before him have not. That, also, is why the myth of Lucas (as a template of serial killing) survives–even in the face of the facts that contradict it. Although proven not to have been the itinerant drifter killer, the figure of the killer he performed so effectively remains important. The splitting of the mythological Lucas (serial-killer author of the discounted dead) from Lucas the legal subject (the lying non-entity whose death sentence was commuted) leaves the myth of the crime and the necessary fiction of the serial killer intact.20

     

    As I’ve already suggested, the ideological work of false witness in the case of Karla Faye Tucker is quite different. Tucker’s first confession (to sexual enjoyment of the murders) breached the fragile container of a gendered realm of the private. That is, her narrative of sex and violence radically destabilized even the traditional explanatory frameworks for female violence. By confessing to sexual enjoyment of the murders Tucker gave up the chance to obscure her own agency and thereby skirt criminal responsibility. Had she called upon the available templates for female monstrosity (claiming that she’d been a victim of Garrett’s will, or, perhaps, merely his collaborator) Tucker might have been able to find shelter temporarily under the warped chivalry of the law. As an exemplar of an already statistically and theoretically problematic category (the woman who kills strangers), Tucker became even more exceptionalized by her “free” confession to sexual sadism. Tucker transgressed Reaganite America’s bitterly defended and heavily gendered constructions of the public-private divide by exceeding even the available categories of female monstrosity, thereby sparking a debate about the socially degenerative effects of feminism: a.k.a. the “new trend” in female violence. Her later repentance managed only to compound that transgression (the bodily bequest of sin that she is not allowed to shed).

     

    Years after the crime and the trial, the impact of that transgression still makes itself felt in the (often sympathetic) media coverage of the lead-up to her execution. One writer described her as “charismatic and beautiful”–a description that seemingly looks to the repentant, refeminized Tucker. But in the very next sentence the writer relocates those characteristics in the endless present of her crime: “even when she was high she was charismatic. She always said she was going to be famous” (Dudman 20). The crime begets the execution, her fame secured by both (as if, all along, that had been her intent). It is not Tucker’s conversion that, ultimately, “makes the difference.” The ideological work of false witness proceeds, in Tucker’s case, by means of a symbolically violent rewriting of the femininity she disavowed with her early confession to sexual sadism. All the uncertainty about what kind of woman she was/is (penitent sinner, self-interested fake) falls away at the moment of her death. The specter of the whore and the sadist is sundered–the possibly penitent spirit is liberated and the desired innocence of femininity restored. We can see this transformation discursively enacted in the coverage of the execution: “One guard gently pulled back her flowing curly brown hair so it dangled over the table’s edge. He then lowered the microphone to Karla’s face. [She] smiled as she spoke her last words” (Dudman 17). Tellingly here the text is capped with a photo of Tucker surrounded by her doll collection. We are made to recognize less of the penitent (though elements of Christian forbearance and grace are clearly discernible) and more of Tucker’s purged femininity–her dolls and Shirley Temple curls.21

     

    In Tucker’s case the action of false witness works to obliterate the traces and markings of an untenable femininity: untenable because of its violence, its sexual sadism, and the immutability of the female flesh that witnessed to the sin. On a larger level, the rhetorical annihilation of Karla Faye Tucker (or, perhaps, her transfiguration) arises from its times. It arises from a neo-conservative era informed by a grassroots fundamentalism that holds the theological premise of equality before God of all the penitent, while also propagating an exclusionary politics that attempts to forge a community of strict identity, intolerant of difference (despite the very idea of difference at the heart of an epistemology of conversion).22 Tucker’s annihilation was at least partly the result of neo-maternalism’s discursive push toward a more conservative femininity. And her rhetorical annihilation was the consequence of a law-and-order discourse that figures the private as embattled sanctuary for the law-abiding and proscribes public-order crime and “predation.”

     

    In both Lucas’s confessions and Janice Knowlton’s testimony to violence, witnessed interpersonal violence is relocated into the realm of impersonal violence–the private in the public, the banal in the rare. Behind both body-counts (Knowlton’s not less significant than Lucas’s) should stand a whole set of killers, not just the ascribed murderous “One.” Like the commodified, “talked-up” confessions of cruelty witnessed to by true crime and talk-show culture, both these violent narratives (and the slightly different story of Karla Faye Tucker) take part in the larger strategy of law-and-order discourse in seeking the strange face of a tiresomely familiar violence. Monstrous, evil and multiple killers give an ironically acceptable handle to the unwieldy, ordinary, and routine sufferings of private lives transferred, discursively, to the public account. And that is the consequence of a larger cultural trend in false witness–to displace the scene and the site of violence, and to continually police what counts as the social.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Take the story of one Texas trial judge who, on reviewing an appellant’s claim for relief on the basis of incompetent counsel (the defense attorney slept through much of the trial), said, “The constitution says everyone is entitled to the attorney of their choice. The constitution does not say the lawyer has to be awake.” (That nice sense of irony condemned a man to death.) Justice Doug Shaver, quoted in “United States of America: Death Penalty in Texas: Lethal Injustice” (13).

     

    2. See “The Lucas Case,” The Washington Post 22 June 1998: A20.

     

    3. According to the former Attorney General of Texas, Jim Mattox, evidence had come to hand proving beyond a shadow of a doubt that Lucas had been over a thousand miles away from Texas on the day that the murder he’d confessed to had occurred. The only thing linking Lucas to the “Orange Socks” murder was, essentially, his confession, and that confession had been but one among up to 600 spurious others. It was the 213 cases that were documented and “cleared” by the process of his false and spurious confessions that most concerned the writers of the “Lucas Report,” a report commissioned by the Texas Attorney General’s office that raised doubts about Lucas’s guilt for many of his confessed crimes.

     

    4. It might be said that the difference between 10 (the number of murders conservatively credited to Lucas) and 360 is moot in terms of the prevailing definition of serial killing: more than 3 persons killed with a “cooling off” period between the crimes. Some critics have argued, however, that only the first killing attributed to Lucas is sufficiently documented. But the issue in question is not so much whether Lucas qualifies as a serial killer in these terms, but the way in which his infamy is in strict proportion both to his own narrative of excess and the degree to which his excessive violence was credited as true.

     

    5. The body of this Jane Doe was found under an overpass of I-95. The corpse was clad only in a pair of orange socks, thus the name.

     

    6. As becomes apparent in Philip Jenkins’s discussion of the then widely quoted figures for victimization by serial killers, Lucas’s then accepted kill ratio accounts for exactly 10% of the total figure. Is this symmetry coincidental? I don’t think so. 3,600 was the figure quoted repeatedly by the 1983 “Specter” Committee (Juvenile Justice Sub-Committee of the Judiciary Committee of the U.S. Senate) and it was the 360 figure that got popular attention for Lucas. See Philip Jenkins, Using Murder (64-66).

     

    7. Toole died in Florida while serving five life sentences. One of the most famous of the scores of murders his name had become associated with (not only by virtue of his confessions) was that of 6-year-old Adam Walsh, whose parents later were instrumental in the setting up of the massively influential National Center for Missing and Exploited Children. Toole later denied killing Walsh, although Lucas still firmly insists that his friend was responsible for that killing.

     

    8. There is a small but significant scholarship on the question of the ethics of police interrogation procedures. In these, the question of false confession is considered in relation to the conviction and punishment of innocent persons. See Richard A. Leo and Richard J. Ofshe’s “The Consequence of False Confessions: Deprivations of Liberty and Miscarriages of Justice in the Age of Psychological Interrogation” for a strong critique of police procedure and an exhaustive tallying of the cases of likely extorted confession. For a law-and-order perspective on the question of police procedure and the “risks” of extorted confession, see Paul Cassell, “Protecting the Innocent from False Confessions and Lost Confessions–And from Miranda.” From the perspective of forensic medicine, see Mark Powlson, “Psychology of False Confessions” and “Guilty Innocents: the Road to False Confessions.” While Lucas’s confessions should be taken–in part–as a cautionary tale for police procedure, it is the authoritative standing of those confessions that concerns me here. Lucas was taken as saying something meaningful about serial killing. His “confessions” have a cultural valence in excess of the narrative of individual responsibility and guilt generated by the other cases of extorted or coaxed confessions that Ofshe and Leo consider.

     

    9. On January 15, 1947 Elizabeth Short’s bisected body was discovered in a vacant lot overgrown with weeds on Norton Avenue, Los Angeles. Short had been a good-looking woman, and had worked a few bit parts in Hollywood productions. Both the brutality of the killing and the aura of the exotic surrounding this young, “beautiful” victim (dubbed “The Black Dahlia”) created a sensation of the case relatively quickly. The failure to close the case has merely maintained its notoriety.

     

    10. Just an example of the questionable factual base to the narrative: Knowlton tells the story of Elizabeth Short’s murder as occurring just a few hours after Short had miscarried with Knowlton’s father’s child. It seems likely that such an event would have left postmortem evidence, but nothing to this effect appears in the autopsy report that Knowlton handily reproduces in full earlier in the book.

     

    11. Herman’s argument for the personal and ideological necessity of “remembering and telling the truth about terrible events” must be read in the context of her work–which is exclusively about the damage done by trauma to its survivors.

     

    12. “The enemy was cruel, it was clear, yet this did not trouble me as deeply as did our own cruelty” (Gray 513). For an analysis of the troubled question of agency and constructions of the traumatized veteran, see Allan Young’s The Harmony of Illusions.

     

    13. Interestingly, Alford suggests that one of the competing leading images of evil for our times is the serial killer.

     

    14. Rappaport suggests that Tucker’s case had attracted the capital sentence, and was unlikely to dislodge it, because of the aggravated cruelty and the sexual element to the crime. On the sexualization of female violent crime and murder in particular (“lust-killing”), see Candace Skrapec’s “The Female Serial Killer: an Evolving Crimininality.”

     

    15. That radical desertion by one (less famous) member of a pair of killers is echoed by the death of Ottis Toole, also on death row, and also of liver disease.

     

    16. Added punishment was, after all, the aim of the eighteenth century practice of gibbeting, and–during the nineteenth century–the making available of the cadaver of the executed for anatomical study. In the twentieth century, the added burden placed upon the condemned was transferred to those who are symbolically and socially dead, the “lifer” (who, for instance, might elicit the favor of the authorities by volunteering for dangerous drug trials).

     

    17. In 1986 George McCleskey, a death row inmate, “petitioned the U.S. Supreme Court with a claim that the Georgia capital statutes were applied in a ‘racially discriminatory fashion.’” For an in-depth discussion of the racially discriminatory nature of capital due process see my Murder: A Tale of Modern American Life (69-72, 145-149).

     

    18. “Where the modern serial killer aided in the production of the social, the postmodern serial killer takes the social for granted and acts on it as a reification. This development is reinforced by two interconnected things. On the one hand the gradual breakdown of the moral consensus which underpinned the modern social and the corresponding normalization of the experience of anomie and, on the other hand, the shift towards the society of the spectacle” (Stratton 84).

     

    19. Although both of them inadvertently reinscribe the very categories they are in fact critiquing–reconstituting the social construction of the serial killer that Philip Jenkins so systematically dissects in his Using Murder.

     

    20. A wrongful execution might well have caused more controversy than that productive split could withstand.

     

    21. Ironically, while Tucker is discursively obliterated by the action of the earlier confession to sexual sadism contradictory of any socially acceptable model of the feminine, at the actual moment of her annihilation she is rehabilitated by being returned to a moment prior to that confession.

     

    22. This epistemology of difference is explored in Robert Duvall’s recent film, The Apostle. In this, the central character, who is a father of an established fundamentalist church, kills the boyfriend of his ex-wife in a rage of jealousy and frustration. He flees the state and, after not much soul-searching, sets up a new Church in the area where he has settled. While the film maintains a careful distance and refrains from judging the main character, it is significant that he is buoyed and driven by faith throughout the film. Although, finally, he does not dodge responsibility for the crime, the whole portrait of “the apostle” stresses the continuity, and the strength, of his faith: the durability of his call. The immorality of his act thereby takes second place to his tireless work for the Lord. Of course, there is no point of conversion in the film. The central character is buoyed by Christ from his early childhood. But I would argue that his ability to embody, without too much discomfort, the contradictions of sin and tireless service to the Lord, hinges upon his masculinity (and the gendered nature of his crime) more than upon fact that he is not a repentant sinner and a convert (converted sinners embody most starkly the epistemology of difference: they carry within them, at all times, the person that was–the sin defines the degree of faith). The contrition of the major character in The Apostle is tenable because, unlike Karla Faye Tucker’s, his social transgression has not been great.

    Works Cited

     

    • Alford, C. Fred. What Evil Means to Us. London: Cornell UP, 1997.
    • Antze, Paul and Michael Lambek, eds. Tense Past: Cultural Essays of Trauma and Memory. New York: Routledge, 1998.
    • Cassell, Paul. “Protecting the Innocent from False Confessions and Lost Confessions–And from Miranda.” Journal of Criminal Law and Criminology (Winter 1998): 497-556.
    • Caruth, Cathy. “Interview with Robert Jay Lifton.” Trauma: Explorations in Memory. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1995. 128-147.
    • Dudman, Graham. “The Life that Drove Her to Death.” New Weekly 16 Feb. 1998: 20.
    • Ellroy, James. My Dark Places: An L.A. Crime Memoir. New York: Alfred Knopf, 1996.
    • Gray, J. Glenn. “On Killing.” Crimes of War. Ed. Richard Falk, et al. New York: Random House, 1971.
    • Hylton, Hilary. “Texas Board: Killer’s Life should be Spared.” Houston Post 25 Jun. 1998: 1A.
    • “International Appeals to Spare Tucker Fail.” CNN Online 3 Feb. 1998. 25 Mar. 1999 <http://www.cnn.com/US/9802/03/tucker.world/>.
    • Jenkins, Philip. Using Murder: The Social Construction of Serial Homicide. New York: Aldine de Gruyter, 1994.
    • King, Florence. “The Misanthrope’s Corner.” National Review 50.4 (9 Mar. 1998): 72.
    • Knowlton, Janice and Michael Newtown. Daddy was the Black Dahlia Killer. New York: Pocket Books, 1995.
    • Knox, Sara L. Murder: A Tale of Modern American Life. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1998.
    • Laub, Dori. “Truth and Testimony.” Trauma: Explorations in Memory. Ed. Cathy Caruth. Baltimore: John Hopkins UP, 1995. 61-75.
    • Leo, Richard A., and Richard J. Ofshe. “The Consequence of False Confessions: Deprivations of Liberty and Miscarriages of Justice in the Age of Psychological Interrogation.” Journal of Criminal Law and Criminology (Winter 1998): 429-496.
    • Levi, Primo. The Drowned and the Saved. London: Abacus, 1995.
    • Leys, Ruth. “Traumatic Cures : Shell-Shock, Janet and the Question of Memory.” Tense Past: Cultural Essays of Trauma and Memory. Ed. Paul Antze and Michael Lambek. New York: Routledge, 1998. 103-145.
    • “The Lucas Case.” The Washington Post 22 Jun. 1998: A20.
    • Pagel, Jean. “Lucas Tearfully Denies Slaying that Landed Him on Death Row.” Houston Chronicle 9 Jan. 1996. 24 Mar. 1999 <http://www.chron.com/content/chronicle/metropolitan/96/01/10/lucas.html>.
    • Pedersen, Daniel. “Lies of a Serial Killer.” Newsweek 22 Jun. 1998: 64.
    • Powlson, Mark. “Guilty Innocents: The Road to False Confessions.” Lancet 26 Nov. 1994: 1447-1450.
    • —. “Psychology of False Confessions.” Lancet 2 Nov. 1991: 1136.
    • Pressley, Sue Ann. “Executioner awaits for Henry Lee Lucas, criminal superstar of ’80s.” Detroit News Online 2 Oct. 1995. 25 Mar. 1999 <http://detnews.com/menu/stories/18493.htm>.
    • Rappaport, Elizabeth. “Some Questions about Gender and the Death Penalty.” Golden Gate University Law Review 27 (1990/91): 501-565.
    • Seltzer, Mark. Serial Killers: Death and Life in America’s Wound Culture. New York: Routledge, 1998.
    • Skrapec, Candace. “The Female Serial Killer: An Evolving Criminality.” Moving Targets: Women, Murder and Representation. Ed. Helen Birch. London: Virago, 1993.
    • Stratton, Jon. “Serial Killing and the Transformation of the Social.” Theory, Culture and Society 13.1 (1996): 77-98.
    • Tal, Kali. Worlds of Hurt: Reading the Literature of Trauma. New York: Cambridge, 1996.
    • Thurman, Sam. “No Evidence Lucas Murdered Woman.” Letter. Amarillo Globe-News Online 25 Jun. 1998. 24 Mar. 1999 <http://www.amarillonet.com/stories/062598/let_no.shtml>.
    • Tithecott, Richard. Of Men and Monsters: Jeffrey Dahmer and the Construction of the Serial Killer. Madison: U of Wisconsin P, 1997.
    • “United States of America: Death Penalty in Texas: Lethal Injustice.” Amnesty International Report 3 Jan. 1998 <http://www.web.amnesty.org/ai.nsf/index/AMR510101998>.
    • Young, Allan. The Harmony of Illusions: Inventing Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder. Princeton, NJ: Princeton UP, 1995.

     

  • Notices

     

     

     

    12.1
    September, 2001
    Every issue of Postmodern Culturecarries notices of events, calls for papers, and other announcements, free of charge. If you respond to one of the ads or announcements below, please mention that you saw the notice in PMC.

     


    Publication Announcements

    • glosszine.org
    • Text–Special Issue 2
    • Guy Debord’s The Society of the Spectacle: New Translation
    • mark(s) v. 2.02

    Conferences, Calls for Papers, Invitations to Submit

    • Technotopias: Texts, Identities, and Technological Cultures
    • Perspectives on Evil and Human Wickedness
    • Modern Language Association Publication Prizes 2002

    General Announcements

    • Joel Alden Kingston Exhibit: Manifestations
    • NECSI Education Programs

     

  • Art After Ahab

    Jeffrey Insko

    Department of English
    University of Massachusetts, Amherst
    jinsko@english.umass.edu

     

    Review of: And God Created Great Whales.Conceived and Composed by Rinde Eckert. Performed by Rinde Eckert and Nora Cole. Directed by David Schweizer. The Culture Project at 45 Bleecker, New York, NY. 9 September 2000.

     

    There’s a clever irony in the very premise of And God Created Great Whales, Rinde Eckert’s funny, haunting, and irreverent chamber opera, which finished a two-week off-Broadway run last fall: Nathan, the protagonist, is struggling to remember Moby-Dick. It’s a problem he likely shares with the show’s audience. After all, Melville’s masterpiece is, in M. Thomas Inge’s phrase, “the great unread American novel” (696). It’s also the one work of American fiction everyone knows, even if one has never read it; or for many Americans it’s the one novel they would prefer to forget having been forced to read in college. But Nathan’s inability to recall Moby-Dick is more than just a case of literary amnesia, for he’s desperately rushing to complete his professional opus–an operatic adaptation of Moby-Dick–before his rapidly deteriorating memory, plagued by some unspecified atrophic condition, fails completely.

     

    That a failure of memory should form the basis of this marvelous opera-within-an-anti-opera is fitting. Remembering Moby-Dick, often in oblique ways, forms something of a tradition in twentieth-century America. In the past few years alone, for instance, those of us with an eye on the roiling seas of American popular culture eager for sightings have seen the whale breach in the most unexpected of places, not only on stage but also in print and on screen. Consider: Laurie Anderson’s most recent performance, Songs and Stories from Moby-Dick, unveiled the year before And God Created Great Whales; an op-ed column in the New York Times in which historian Arthur Schlesinger, Jr. compares Independent Counsel Kenneth Starr’s investigation of President Clinton to “Captain Ahab’s monomaniacal ‘quenchless feud’ with the White Whale”; the publications of Sena Jeter Naslund’s Ahab’s Wife (1999), Tim Severin’s In Search of Moby-Dick (2000), and Nathaniel Philbrick’s National Book Award-winning In the Heart of the Sea (2000); and a new television version of the novel (1998) featuring Star Trek‘s Patrick Stewart as Ahab.1 To these, add the countless allusions to the novel on television shows from The X-Files to The Simpsons; mentions of it in movies as disparate as Ricochet, Deep Impact, and Before Night Falls; and even a full-page newspaper ad from the Microsoft Corporation that reproduces the novel’s opening paragraph to announce their “Microsoft Reader.” A century and a half after publication, Herman Melville’s novel, if not his fictitious whale, appears to be everywhere.

     

    Perhaps Ishmael should have been less incredulous when he remarked on “the superstitiously inclined” who accepted “the unearthly conceit that Moby-Dick was ubiquitous” (Melville 158). Or perhaps this ubiquity is nothing new. Since the revival of Melville during the 1920s and ’30s, when he was plucked from literary obscurity and fashioned into the quintessential, heroic American artist, unappreciated and misunderstood, his greatest novel has persisted not only as a pop-culture icon, a mainstay of comic books and seafood restaurants, but as a touchstone for artists with “grand and lofty” ambitions, from John Barrymore, who played the role of the mad Captain twice on film, one silent (1926) and one with sound (1929), to John Huston, whose own film adaptation (1956) starred Gregory Peck and Orson Welles (who wrote just one play, Moby-Dick–Rehearsed), and for several of the most well-known figures in post-WWII American art: Pollock, Stella, Motherwell, Serra, and Basquiat.2 Certainly no other nineteenth-century American novel has left such an impression in our cultural memory.

     

    Inseparable from this rich and disorderly intertextual network, Moby-Dick might well be considered one of the great ongoing cultural productions of postmodern America; a diffuse text that writers, musicians, artists, and politicians, as well as the creators and consumers of popular culture continue to respond to, abuse, revise, and appropriate. And God Created Great Whales is both aware of and a contribution to this vast constellation of meanings within which Melville’s text circulates. With a rare blend of critical intelligence and emotional intensity, it foregoes a faithful recreation of Moby-Dick in favor of a postmodern reimagining. And in a tight 75 minutes, Eckert not only manages to capture the spirit of Melville’s novel–its unruliness and wit as well as its tragedy–but also to provide both a reading of the novel and a meta-commentary on his own musical form, sporting with the conventions of opera as irreverently as Melville flouted novelistic form.

     

    The performance opens to find Nathan, played by Eckert, seated at his piano, which is propped up by wooden crates, lashed with rope and covered with sheaves of paper and Post-it notes. Suspended from the ceiling by black wires, naked light bulbs of various colors surround the stage, evoking a ship’s rigging and providing a visual pun on Nathan’s condition, his mind’s intermittent episodes of darkness and light, and his brief flashes of inspiration. To stave off his memory loss, we learn quickly, Nathan has constructed two elaborate systems that allow him to continue his work. The first is a network of tape-recorders (of the old-fashioned rectangular variety), color-coded, strewn across his piano, dangling from wires at the back of the set, one even hanging from his neck and secured to his waist with duct-tape. These provide Nathan with a surrogate mind and offer detailed instructions: “Your name is Nathan. You are suffering memory loss. Today you will continue to work on your opera: Moby-Dick.” As the performance unfolds, the voice on the tape becomes the voice of Nathan’s progressive disease, the messages a matter-of-fact report on the worsening of his condition: “if you are still listening, your disease has reached an advanced stage.” The second system Nathan has devised is stranger still: it’s a figment of his imagination, a muse in the form of a former diva named Olivia, to whom Nathan is to be obedient, the voice on the tape explains, in all matters concerning his opera.

     

    Working together, these two recreate Nathan’s version of Moby-Dick. Played by Nora Cole, whose powerful mezzo-soprano is a match for Eckert’s own remarkable voice, Olivia instructs and cajoles, admonishes and inspires Nathan, pushing him toward completion. The audience is thus treated to a glimpse inside the creative process, which is to say, inside Nathan’s faltering consciousness. When Nathan digresses in Ishmaelean fashion–say, to ruminate on his mind maintaining an independent existence after his body has passed away (thus explicating at once the symbolic meaning of his tape recordings and the presence of Olivia, who, after all, is really Nathan)–Olivia steers him back to his task. Occasionally in solo, but more often in tandem, they perform bits of scenes from the novel, substituting Eckert’s gorgeous and surprisingly accessible music for Melville’s language. And it’s a fair swap: the range of Eckert’s musical vocabulary–he hybridizes classical composition with styles as diverse as pop, gospel, and old sea chants–is a match for Melville’s own discursive range.

     

    But while Olivia’s primary charge is to assist Nathan, as a performer Cole is hardly relegated to the margins of Nathan’s/Melville’s narrative. Singing the roles of Bulkington, Queequeg, Tashtego and various other male characters aboard the Pequod, Olivia represents the subversive entrance of a prominent female into Melville’s masculine world, allowing Eckert to riff on Moby-Dick‘s notorious gender-exclusivity. One of the play’s funniest running jokes, for instance, is Olivia’s attempt to convince Nathan to write her into the opera: she could swoop down from the sky at the end, she suggests, to rescue the orphaned Ishmael. Of course, Melville is an easy target on this point, and so Eckert doesn’t belabor it. Yet the force of Cole’s riveting presence–as an African-American female embodying so convincingly Melville’s sailors–forms a powerful critique of both Moby-Dick and the culture that has produced it by staging, literally, gender performativity and racial fluidity–the easily forgotten subtext of Ishmael and Queequeg’s homoerotically charged friendship.

     

    Eckert is likewise fascinating to watch. A large, bald white man dressed in a gray suit that looks as if he’s been sleeping in it, he affects Nathan’s frailty with the smallest of gestures: dragging his toes in baby steps, slumping his shoulders feebly. But when he receives a burst of passion, he erupts seamlessly into the more commanding and imposing roles he assigns himself, putting his booming voice to use thundering at the universe as Ahab or exhorting the audience-turned-parishioners as Father Mapple. In fact, Eckert’s version of the sermon on Jonah is one of the show’s highlights, rivaling even Orson Welles’s brilliant performance in the otherwise forgettable John Huston film. At another moment, Eckert shifts just as nimbly into the character of Pip, standing still at the front of the stage to sing a lovely aria in a most unexpected falsetto.

     

    Obviously, it’s impossible to treat all of Moby-Dick‘s multiple characters, stories, discourses, and themes in just over an hour. But Eckert is less interested in re-presenting Moby-Dick than in he is in striving for the kind of “outreaching comprehensiveness of sweep” possessed by Melville’s novel. And this is the great advantage of Eckert’s art form: his music provides the means to compress language. As if to demonstrate this very principle, one exchange has Nathan poised at his piano as Olivia feeds him the names of characters from the novel, each of which Nathan renders in a few short bars, thus transforming Melville’s cast of “isolatoes” into the stock figures of grand opera. Here Eckert is at his most self-consciously playful, parodying both generalized ideas about Moby-Dick and operatic conventions. Not only does he register the novel’s radical shifts in mood and tone, but by mocking the seriousness of both opera and Moby-Dick (as opposed, say, to the “misreadings” perpetrated in comic books and seafood restaurants), he deflates “high” art’s claims to transcendence. Yet, as if to refuse the audience the easy pleasures of such ironic knowingness, these moments are undercut by other parts of the performance that sing so rich in human emotion that truth and beauty and transcendence almost seem possible again.

     

    It’s this balance between postmodern irony (always in danger of becoming what Jameson famously called “blank parody”[17]) and truthful emotion that makes And God Created Great Whales so much more satisfying than most adaptations of Moby-Dick. Unlike the four film versions of the novel, Eckert doesn’t succumb to what might be called the Ahab-problem; that is, he doesn’t concentrate solely on the novel’s dramatic narrative: Ahab’s obsessive desire for revenge. Ahab is, of course, an irresistible dramatic subject, an archetypal figure of tragic hubris. But as anyone who has taught Moby-Dick knows, this dimension of the novel doesn’t always translate effectively to our post-ironic age. That is, as compelling as the “fiery hunt” is, reducing a proto-postmodernist work of encyclopedic fiction to a pre-modern tragedy is no longer adequate. Too often Ahab seems to embody the kind of sententiousness that so bothered D. H. Lawrence about Melville himself–“Oh dear, when the solemn ass brays! brays! brays!,” Lawrence wrote (154). Rather, it’s Ishmael’s more protean sensibility that speaks to our age, his willingness to “try all things,” but to accept, finally, indeterminacy, the kind of undecidability of meaning that typically characterizes postmodern fiction: “I but put that brow before you,” he writes, as if to challenge the reader, “Read it if you can” (293). Isolating Ahab’s quest from the novel’s other, multiple competing narrative energies, then, only diminishes Melville’s accomplishment by attributing to the text a unitary set of meanings that its unreadability and its multivocality work to resist. And worse, it consigns Moby-Dick to the unfortunate status of just another dusty classic with little claim on our attention.

     

    Consider, for instance, two additional contributions to the ongoing production of Melville’s text: Laurie Anderson’s Songs and Stories from Moby-Dick and Tim Hawkinson’s Überorgan. Anderson’s performance style, with its presentation and proliferation of images and languages from across the contemporary American landscape, might seem to lend itself naturally to capturing Moby-Dick‘s heteroglossia. Yet, Songs and Stories, while a pleasurable enough experience (at least for Melville aficionados), ultimately seems to subordinate Anderson’s art to Melville’s.3 She creates plenty of atmosphere, both visually and aurally: long lines of scrolling text, for instance, are superimposed over vast images of seascapes and projected onto an enormous scrim at the back of the stage, and her music, bass-heavy or provided by her ingenious and unnerving “talking stick”–a computerized lance that emits digitally enhanced musical notes as she runs her hands along its breadth–ranges from the ethereal to the funky. But Anderson treats Moby-Dick as nearly inviolable, with little of the incisive, critical consciousness–or the sly ironic wit–that typically characterizes her work.

     

    By contrast, it’s easy to be captivated by Hawkinson’s Überorgan–a massive installation/sculpture on display at the Massachusetts Museum of Contemporary Art–without knowing anything about Moby-Dick, though to experience it is akin to what it must be like to stand in the belly of a whale. A 300-foot network of twelve enormous air-filled polyethylene bladders, many of them suspended from the ceiling, the Überorgan plays on the double meaning of the “organ” in its title. That is, it at once suggests the intestinal system of an impossibly large animal (a mythical whale, for instance) and a musical instrument. Controlled by a rudimentary central nervous system–a mechanism that operates on the principles of the player-piano–a series of valves opens and closes, causing sounds like foghorns or the lowing of cows or flatulence to be emitted from long foil-covered pipes affixed with reeds. Überorgan combines wonder and spectacle, ambition and scope, with pleasure and self-mocking–it’s art that is at once serious and just plain fun. Hawkinson has said that he had Moby-Dick in mind when conceiving his Überorgan,4 but the association Hawkinson’s piece forms with Melville’s text has little to do with Captain Ahab and his monomania. Rather, like And God Created Great Whales, Überorgan evokes not just the Moby-Dick of Ahab–the “au grand sérieux,” to borrow from Lawrence again–but the Moby-Dick of Ishmael, his vaulting imagination as well as his delight in making a fart joke.5

     

    Of course, Moby-Dick can no more do without Ahab than it can do without the white whale. But the fact that these two symbols now have an existence in American culture almost independent of the novel from which they sprang–which is to say that they have become a part of our common language, in effect, literary clichés–has its unfortunate side. Melville’s novel is easily drained of its power to challenge, to shock, and to provoke (“I have written a wicked book,” Melville said after finishing Moby-Dick, “and feel spotless as the lamb”) and is instead put to use selling coffee for Starbuck’s and electronic equipment for Microsoft. The trouble is that, for all its value, our present scholarly preoccupation with “historicizing” is ill-suited to combat consumer culture’s tendency to simplify and to sanitize.6 And it’s surely too much to ask of our artists that they should fight that battle. Hawkinson and Eckert, however, offer hope: by creating work that’s both powerful and pleasurable–by granting their audiences a new point of entry into Moby-Dick and making it fun again–they suggest exciting new ways of reinventing a text that is, after all, always already ours.

     

    Notes

     

    1. A novel, Ahab’s Wife tells the story of Una, the bride of Ahab (mentioned once in Moby-Dick) and her adventures during the Pequod‘s voyages. These include working as a cabin boy on board the whaleship Sussex (a thinly veiled version of the famous Essex; see below), harboring a fugitive slave, befriending Margaret Fuller, and attending meetings with the Transcendentalists. In In Search of Moby Dick, the travel-writer Tim Severin re-traces Melville’s overseas journeys looking for evidence of an actual White Whale. In the Heart of the Sea is a historical account of the famous whaleship Essex, stove by a whale in 1821. Melville read first mate Owen Chase’s account of the disaster before writing Moby-Dick.

     

    2. For more on Moby-Dick in twentieth-century American art, see Schultz and, more recently, Wallace.

     

    3. I attended Anderson’s show at the Brooklyn Academy of Music on 15 October 1999.

     

    4. Überorgan was commissioned by the Massachusetts Museum of Contemporary Art. Hawkinson describes how, “early on, I learned that Herman Melville wrote Moby-Dick while he was living in Pittsfield, which is just down the road from Mass MoCA [in North Adams, MA]. My piece relates to the book and more generally to the nautical, with all the netting and lashing and rigging and the foghornlike sounds and the massive rib cage and organs” (152). This summer, Hawkinson and Eckert were together at Mass MoCA, where And God Created Great Whales played for two nights (after the deadline for this review) in August. Überorgan is on display through October 2001.

     

    5. Among Ishmael’s reasons for going to sea as a sailor, he lists “the wholesome exercise and pure air of the forecastle deck.” Then he adds: “For as in this world, head winds are far more prevalent than winds from astern (that is, if you never violate the Pythagorean maxim)” (15). Pythagoras recommended a restricted diet, which included avoiding beans, which cause flatulence.

     

    6. That is, while the “new historicism” (broadly conceived) has been effective in demonstrating the literary text’s social indebtedness and has broadened our sense of what constitutes both literary and historical textuality, with regard to the texts of the past (like Moby-Dick) it also has the unfortunate effect of insisting that a text “belongs” to its moment of production (rather than to its various moments of reception). It thus tends to fix texts in the past, to shackle them to a particular cross-section of historical time, denying the possibility that texts of the past can perform cultural work in the present.

    Works Cited

     

    • Hawkinson, Tim. “Tim Hawkinson Talks about Überorgan.Artforum (Sep. 2000): 152-3.
    • Inge, M. Thomas. “Melville in Popular Culture.” A Companion to Melville Studies. Ed. John Bryant. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 1986.
    • Jameson, Fredric. Postmodernism, or the Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. Durham: Duke UP, 1991.
    • Lawrence, D. H. Studies in Classic American Literature. New York: Penguin, 1977.
    • Melville, Herman. Moby-Dick. New York: W.W. Norton, 1967.
    • Schlesinger, Arthur Jr. “So Much for the Imperial Presidency.” New York Times 3 Aug. 1998, late ed.: A19.
    • Schultz, Elizabeth A. Unpainted to the Last: Moby-Dick and Twentieth-Century American Art. Lawrence: U of Kansas P, 1995.
    • Wallace, Robert K. Frank Stella’s Moby-Dick: Words and Shapes. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 2000.

     

  • Utopia in the City

    Piotr Gwiazda

    English Department
    University of Miami, Coral Gables
    pgwiazda@mail.as.miami.edu

     

    Review of: “Utopia: The Search for the Ideal Society in the Western World.” Special Exhibition at the New York Public Library. October 2000-January 2001. Exhibition website: <http://www.nypl.org/utopia>.

     

    A few years ago, I told an English professor (who regularly teaches Thomas More’s Utopia in his Renaissance literature courses) that I was preparing to give a paper at a conference of the Society for Utopian Studies. He asked me where the meeting was scheduled to take place. I answered, “Montreal.” We discussed other matters for a while and then, just as I was about to leave his office, the professor said to me: “You realize you gave the wrong answer to my question.” “What question?” “About that Utopian Society’s meeting. The right answer should have been nowhere.” He smiled. “The utopians meet nowhere, eh?”

     

    Between October 2000 and January 2001, utopia was on view in New York–in a special exhibition at the New York Public Library entitled “Utopia: The Search for the Ideal Society in the Western World.” Jointly organized by the library and the Bibliothèque nationale de France, the exhibition featured more than 550 objects, including books, manuscripts, drawings, prints, maps, photographs, films, and assorted ephemera. One part of the exhibition represented manifestations of utopian thought and sentiment from antiquity through the end of the nineteenth century. Another represented the twentieth century and now continues in the virtual space of the library’s website (<http://www.nypl.org/utopia>), where it examines the internet as the next “New World” of the apparently imperishable utopian impulse.

     

    This is a large exhibition that requires several hours of concentrated study, since every item on display is worth one’s time. The show encompasses only the tradition of Western thought within which utopia acquired its own history of evolution, its own great narrative, so to speak. Assembling an exhibition like this is in itself an attempt to create a logic of continuity of utopian ideology and praxis that begins with the biblical Garden of Eden and ends with the metaworlds of cyberspace. What comes in between is various, fascinating, and often unexpected; it includes gulags and concentration camps, as well as the hippie communes of the 1960s and 1970s. In addition to Thomas More’s Utopia (1516), the book that gave the genre its name, one finds, for example, Thomas Jefferson’s original version of the Declaration of Independence; Voltaire’s manuscript of Candide opened to the El Dorado chapter; and nineteenth-century cartoons ridiculing Cabet, Proudhon, and other social visionaries. Overall, the exhibition presents a quirky history of utopian imagination dominated by the human desire to improve everyday reality and create a better place on earth.

     

    The New York Public Library exhibition included two transparent plexiglass reading chambers, in which one could peacefully reflect on a number of utopian texts, such as paperback editions of Paine’s Common Sense, Butler’s Erewhon, and Huxley’s Brave New World. The chambers were intended to allow one to appreciate the role of the utopian impulse in Western history and imagination, but they actually turned out to be a strangely disconcerting experience–indicative perhaps of the astonishing ubiquity of the genre, if one thinks of utopia as a genre. After several hours spent in the mixed company of Francis Bacon, Karl Marx, and H. G. Wells, one realizes that utopia affects all levels of human experience and is present in nearly every form of artistic, political, and religious expression.

     

    This might be, in fact, the fundamental premise of the utopian narrative: utopia is the essential, unfulfilled dream of humanity that continues to affect us, but at the same time remains very difficult to pin down. The most important distinction one could draw between the exhibition’s numerous manifestations of the utopian tendency is between utopias imagined and utopias attempted. Utopia has always been a matter of both theory and practice. The etymological root of the word leaves it up to us to decide whether utopia is supposed to be a place that is good (eu topos) or a place that does not exist (ou topos). From the logical standpoint, the two possibilities cancel each other out. Thomas More’s paradox may have been just a scholarly joke, but it still holds the world in doubt over the real nature of the utopian project. When one speaks about utopia as a place that is or can potentially be good, one considers it from the positive, practical standpoint. When one speaks about utopia as a place that does not exist, or exists only as the product of the imagination, one understands it in terms of negation or criticism of the reality at hand. The exhibition verifies that utopia simultaneously exists and does not exist; it is a valid instrument of social and technological change, but it is also a permanently unfulfilled fantasy of a better life.

     

    This paradoxical status of utopia is also its crucial problem. In Plato’s The Republic (which has a prominent place at the exhibition), Socrates paints a picture of the perfect community while also insisting that the success of his argument depends on the imaginative cooperation of his interlocutors: “suppose we imagine a state coming into being before our eyes” (55); “imagine the condition of men living in a sort of cavernous chamber underground” (227). Socrates, Glaucon, and the other speakers in Plato’s text work out a scheme or plan for the ideal republic that, nevertheless, remains largely within the imaginary, rather than realistic, sphere. The success of the vision relies on the intensity of supposing, conceiving, devising, imagining, or simply desiring the ideal society. The conversation is neither idle talk, and nor is it a speech-act that would imply immediate action. At one point in his discussion, Socrates refers to “a pattern set up in the heavens for one who desires to see it and, seeing it, to found one in himself. But whether it exists anywhere or ever will exist is no matter; for this is the only commonwealth in whose politics he can ever take part” (319-20). So much for utopia and reality. When Socrates alludes to the fact that man can build a perfect commonwealth “in himself,” he really only allows for the possibility of an imagined utopia. Other representatives of this particular understanding of utopia in the exhibition include descriptions of the Golden Age (represented by the appropriate section of a fifteenth-century manuscript of Ovid’s Metamorphoses) and the Land of Cockaigne; and several Christian utopias such as the Garden of Eden, St. Augustine’s City of God, medieval manuscripts of the Book of Revelation, and the New Jerusalem. Literary and philosophical utopias written by More, Francis Bacon, Tomasso Campanella, Edward Bellamy, William Morris, and others remain fictions prima facie and as a whole they remind one of what Hegel once said in Philosophy of History (Engels quotes it on the first page of Socialism: Utopian and Scientific): “Since the sun had been in the firmament, and the planets circled around him, the sight had never been seen of man standing upon his head–i.e. on the Idea–and building reality after this image” (31-32). For Hegel, political changes brought forth by the French Revolution constituted the first sign that human beings were after all going to build reality after an idea–but the exhibition verifies that people stood on their heads quite a long time before the French revolution, and long afterwards.

     

    What distinguishes Socrates’s vision from Aristotle’s (mainly in Politics) is precisely the mode of discussion. Aristotle envisions his ideal community from the example of an already existing polis, Athens, and his main preoccupation lies in the possible improvement of the city. Plato constructs his Republic upon an idea; Aristotle forms his upon reality. Plato relies on imagination; Aristotle relies on reason. Other “practical” examples of the utopian impulse in the exhibition feature fifteenth- and sixteenth-century maps and documents describing the newly discovered American continent. Among these one can find Christopher Columbus’s letter to King Ferdinand announcing his discoveries in the New World. Soon after its discovery, the new continent was hailed by the Europeans as the site of the biblical Garden of Eden, a new Earthly Paradise, and an ideal place for a utopian community. Subsequent events and experiences evidently put these ideas to rest, but something genuinely exciting is still detectable in these first documents of America’s conquest. Another good example of combining theory and practice is a set of designs for ideal cities, many of them undertaken by Italian Renaissance architects. Few of these cities ever materialized; the exception was the town of Palmanova near Venice, whose sixteenth-century plan is also on display. The revolutionary ideals of equality and reform constitute an even more practical portion of the exhibition. The American and French Revolutions are given appropriate place and focus; they are complemented by the religious and secular utopian communities established in the nineteenth century. The French Declaration of the Rights of Man is included, and so are charts illustrating widespread changes in weights, measures, and the calendar proposed by the French revolutionaries. Religious communities such as the Shakers and the Mormons are also represented, as are the secular communities of Robert Owen’s New Harmony in Indiana and Etienne Cabet’s Icaria in Illinois (these include photographs, drawings, prints, etc.).

     

    The twentieth century saw the flourishing of science fiction, a form of utopianism primarily occupied with advances in science and technology in both the near and distant future. As if to illustrate this new direction, a full size replica of the robot used in Fritz Lang’s Metropolis stood guard at the entrance to the room featuring the second half of the original exhibition. Twentieth-century utopias also differ from their predecessors in another aspect. It is only in this century that we clearly observe the emergence of a troubling counter-genre, dystopia, in theory and in practice. Utopia, it turns out, is a two-edged sword. The fascination with progress, technology, and machines is represented by the Futurist movement in art and literature that came to prominence in Fascist Italy. The euphoric propaganda of the Soviet and Nazi regimes is juxtaposed with the sordid reality these social systems produced: gulags, gas chambers, and concentration camps.

     

    The latter part of the twentieth century offers yet another perspective on the utopian impulse and its role in Western civilization. The current debate on advantages and disadvantages of the internet continues these utopian debates, with cyberspace as another locus of utopian possibility. Cyberspace, among other things, creates a potential for transforming oneself into alternate personalities based on viritual, rather than physical, identity. It allows human beings to participate in online communities that are not inhibited by exigencies of space and time. Cyberspace is also said to eliminate discrimination; it is a forum of free expression, promoting democratic principles of equality and tolerance. This is why virtual space is regarded as potentially utopian space. In the words of John Perry Barlow, author of A Declaration of the Independence of Cyberspace, “ours is a world that is both everywhere and nowhere, but it is not where bodies live. We are creating a world that all may enter without privilege or prejudice accorded by race, economic power, military force, or station of birth.” The availability of e-mail, avatars, and chat rooms offers a new perspective on human communications and on human existence in general. The flip side to this, of course, is apparent: the facility with which alternate personalities can be created online may lead to isolation, alienation, and deception. Is the internet a great equalizer? To some extent, yes–but there still exists a potential for discrimination and stratification. Consider: cyberspace is available to millions of people, but only if these people have access to a personal computer, modem, and service provider, a condition which automatically exludes a tremendously large precentage of the global population.

     

    The exhibition’s website offers an abundant selection of materials from the original show, and it includes both text and pictures. It also contains a very impressive collection of links to other utopian and cyberspace resources. The website is divided into several sections: Sources, Other Worlds, Utopia in History, Dreams and Nightmares, and Metaworlds. The last section offers a complex engagement with the relationship between utopia and cyberspace, with discussions of parallels between developments in utopian thought and the history of the internet, debates on the internet as a possible utopia, and additional remarks from utopian scholars and experts. In most of these comments one can detect, unsurprisingly, a skeptical resistance to the idea of the internet as an utopian enterprise. “Real” life is still the only life, most utopianists argue, and they consider the internet as something advantageous only to the extent that it makes our real lives easier. Most often, they regard the internet as an advanced form of communication technology, currently fascinating because of its novelty and potential, but likely to feel less utopia-like the more we become accustomed to it. In fact, the whole discussion of cyberspace as utopia may eventually fade away when we begin to take it for granted, just as we eventually took steam engine trains, automobiles, telephones, and television for granted. These technological advances changed our lives, to be sure, but at a pace much slower and in ways more complex than either their enthusiasts or enemies probably would have liked to imagine. At this point, a kind of coolheaded enthusiasm among utopian commentators still prevails, even though some of them are concerned with the dangers of cyberspace that make the internet seem closer to a possible dystopia. In a small way, viewers of the website can also contribute to the debate by taking part in a poll on the relationship between utopia and cyberspace. Although the website is potentially available to millions of people, only approximately 30 have taken part in the survey so far!

     

    Even before the publication of More’s book in 1516, utopia existed in the millenarian visions of Old Testament prophets, the philosophy of Plato and Aristotle, and the poems of Ovid. Throughout the centuries, humanity has confronted remarkable ideas that convey the utopian impulse, including stories, novels, and political, philosophical, and scientific treatises, and there have been numerous attempts to put these ideas into practice. Some of these permanently altered the face of humanity, while others faded into obscurity. Poised between myth and prophecy, utopia denotes both a recovery of the past and a promise of the future. Although it does not have a defined social role, utopia frequently intends to set a model of society that could be imitated or at least considered as an alternative to the present conditions. Does this mean that utopia is essentially progressive? Can dreams be productive? One is reminded of the good-hearted courtier Gonzalo in Shakespeare’s The Tempest, whose fanciful and candid refusal to confront the reality at hand produces a conventional and necessarily self-contradictory definition of an ideal commonwealth: if he were its king, he would allow “no sovereignty” (II.i.162). If Gonzalo’s commonwealth had ever materialized, it would have been mercilessly refuted by reality the way it was refuted in so many tragic instances in the twentieth century. Utopian consciousness is bound to be whimsical, arbitrary, and sometimes outright dangerous–which may be why so many utopian experiments have ended as dystopias.

     

    To return to my anecdote, during my trip to Montreal for the conference of the Society for Utopian Studies I was filled with apprehensions about various Etienne Cabets and Theodore Hertzkas that I half-expected to encounter there. What I found instead was a group of serious thinkers and activists. Many papers I heard were extremely stimulating, but none surpassed my own co-panelist’s presentation on teaching the issues of environmental sustainability to inner-city college freshmen. Here was someone addressing authentic problems and finding excellent practical solutions to them. In the end, the conference revealed to me the true nature of utopia. The best riposte to those who say utopia can only be found nowhere is that, by the same token, it might also be found anywhere.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Barlow, John Perry. A Declaration of the Independence of Cyberspace. The Electronic Frontier Foundation, 1996. <http://eff.org/~barlow/Declaration-Final.html>.
    • Engels, Friedrich. Socialism: Utopian and Scientific. Trans. Edward Aveling. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press Publishers, 1935.
    • Plato. The Republic. Trans. F. MacDonald Cornford. London: Oxford UP, 1945.
    • Shakespeare, William.The Riverside Shakespeare: The Complete Works. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1997.

     

  • Intoxicating Class: Cocaine at the Multiplex

    David Banash

    Department of English
    University of Iowa
    david-banash@uiowa.edu

     

    Review of: Traffic. Dir. Steven Soderbergh. Perf. Michael Douglas, Benicio Del Toro, Catherine Zeta-Jones, Dennis Quaid. USA Films, 2000. Blow.Dir. Ted Demme. Perf. Johnny Depp, Penelope Cruz, Paul Reubens, Ray Liotta. New Line Cinema, 2001.

     

    Just as the intoxicating sensations of different drugs are incommensurable with one another, so films about different drugs tend to have radically different themes and effects. In American popular culture perhaps the illegal drug with the longest cinema history is marijuana. From propaganda films of the ’30s to Cheech and Chong’s Up in Smoke, or the more recent revisions such as Half-Baked, these films are, or have become, comedies. Further, almost all of them celebrate the subversively humorous effect of the drug for the preterite working classes. Even anti-marijuana propaganda films have become comedies as new generations receive them as pure camp. While films about marijuana are comedies, films about heroin are almost always tragedies, focusing on the way in which the drug is both a protest against an inhumane world and the immediate means of the hero’s self-destruction. While marijuana films revel in satire, heroin films explore the complexities of self and self-destruction. Distinct from both are films about cocaine, which are almost always evocations of and reflections on the American dream itself, that is to say, on politics in the most practical and quotidian sense of the word. Both Steven Soderbergh’s Traffic and Ted Demme’s Blow explore cocaine and its relationship to politics in the American imaginary. However, the reception of both these films is troubling. Traffic is lauded as the first honest look at the failure of the drug war, while Blow is either hailed or dismissed as yet another compelling but nonetheless vacuous celebration of the decadence of the ’70s and early ’80s. The almost universal mainstream acclaim for Traffic indicates just how much the worst kinds of conservative ideologies continue to inform even purportedly liberal attitudes toward drugs, while the dismissal of Blow as anything more than a decadent fantasy or simplistic cautionary tale misses its much more accurate indictment of the American idealization of capitalist conquest.

     

    That cocaine is the drug of the ruling class in America is undoubtedly more than a function of its high price in comparison to other drugs. After all, the effect of cocaine is much closer to the effects of the most popular of the legal drugs of choice: caffeine and nicotine. (Not surprisingly, caffeine and cocaine were once combined in Coca-Cola.) Like these other speedy substances, cocaine heightens the senses and gives the user a great deal of energy. However, unlike other forms of speed, cocaine also gives its user the sensation of mastery and invulnerability. Rather than the ego death of heroin or LSD, cocaine legitimates the preferred modality of capitalist subjectivity–radical and inviolate individuality. If there were any doubt about the relationship of cocaine to capitalism, the case is eloquently made by Tony Montana in Brian De Palma’s Scarface (1983). Much like the original version of the film (1932), De Palma’s Scarface explores the ways in which the gangster is the ultimate representative of capitalism itself. However, in De Palma’s revision the connections between capitalism and cocaine are much more overt. In one of the strongest speeches of the film, the drug lord confronts the WASP establishment in an exclusive restaurant: “You’re not good. You just know how to hide,” he screams at them. In short, there is no difference between legal capitalism and the drug trade; both are exploitative and destructive. Quite clearly, in Scarface the villain is neither Cuba nor cocaine, but the multitude of injustices and contradictions that function as the conditions of possibility for capitalism itself, and its hero is punished in a grisly final scene only insofar as his drugs are themselves the worst kind of exploitative and alienated capital. The association of cocaine with the problems and politics of the ruling classes is also found in such films as Boost, Bright Lights Big City, and Less Than Zero, all ’80s films that indict the decadence of the era. One might even go back to Easy Rider, for while the heroes of that film explore the psychedelic revolution through the use of pot and LSD, they also support themselves as capitalists through the sale of cocaine.

     

    The most surprising aspect of Traffic is that it is being presented as a revolutionary approach to representing the war on drugs. In a feature-length review of Traffic, the usually more savvy Salon contributor Jeff Stark argues that “there’s never been a single mainstream movie that’s been big enough, ambitious enough to go after the drug war itself.” According to Stark, if other films about drugs have been “self-contained units that dissect or examine one facet of drug use or the war on drugs, ‘Traffic’ is the solar system.” Stark’s unmitigated celebration of the film is typical of both right- and left-leaning publications, as critics of every stripe seem to be seduced by Soderbergh’s Balzacian aspirations. Indeed, Traffic is a large film, made in the best of Hollywood’s epic tradition. It deftly interweaves three complex stories. Michael Douglas plays the newly appointed Drug Czar, who, while dealing with the problems of his transition, learns that his own daughter is a drug addict. Benicio Del Toro gives the best performance of the film as Rodriguez, a Mexican cop caught between two rival drug cartels. Finally, Catherine Zeta-Jones plays the society wife of an indicted American drug smuggler. As these stories develop, they also connect to one another, with minor characters from one plot turning up in the next. In addition to the epic reach of the film, its style works overtime to convince us that it is indeed after a virtually unmediated presentation of truth. Much of the camera work is hand-held and shaky, and Soderbergh shot much of it himself under the name Peter Andrews. The effect is very much like that of a documentary or news feature. However, in an almost inexplicable and schizophrenic way, the film also calls attention to itself by color coding each aspect of the story: all the action set in the East is tinged in dingy blue, California is shot in bright, exceedingly vivid colors, and Mexico is given a consistent sepia tint by the use of tobacco filters. While often visually stunning, the heavy-handed use of such techniques seems to suggest that Traffic is a didactic film, in which the director goes out of his way to make things as clear as possible lest the audience be confused. For a film that hopes to represent the complexities of the drug war, such reductionism is counter-productive.

     

    The film is reductive in other ways, too, which tend to undermine its grand ambitions. To begin with, it is almost exclusively about cocaine, with a supporting role for heroin and less than walk-on cameos for the vast array of schedule-one drugs to which Nancy Reagan told us to just say no. Beyond this, Traffic claims its universal scope while investigating only the U.S.-Mexico drug trade and ignoring the multitude of other nations that engage in all aspects of the business. Finally, though the film is praised for its realism because Soderbergh was able to get walk-on appearances from both Orrin Hatch and Charles Grassly, neither of these politicians is about to propose any kind of radical reforms to the war on drugs. The presence of these politicians is of a piece with Soderbergh’s claim that the 56 million dollar film is in fact an “absolutely” independent production (Dargis). Traffic self-consciously attempts to mark the hypocrisy of the war on drugs by dramatizing the liberal use of alcohol, caffeine, and tobacco by the very people who make official drug policy. At the homes and cocktail parties of the lawmakers, the camera focuses incessantly on glasses of scotch and the bright ends of cigars. Frighteningly, Soderbergh seems to suggest that all drugs are simply pernicious and destructive. In the only real investigation of drug use in the film, we closely follow the Drug Czar’s daughter Caroline through a handful of scenes in which she apparently moves from being a recreational user of cocaine and heroin with other alienated, suburban youth to a raving crack-whore in less than a week. The sequence is the worst in the film, reminding one of nothing so much as the campy drug hysteria that informed the deadpan antics of Sgt. Friday on Dragnet. However, it is perhaps the final resolution to Rodriguez’s story that is the most distasteful. Caught in the midst of a noir triple-cross between two rival drug cartels and the U.S. narcs, Rodriguez plays for his life and a reward. And what does our hero ask for? He demands that the narcs provide lights for the Tijuana baseball diamonds so there can be night play. In fact, the film ends on a shot of his smiling face in the stands under the glare. In the end, the film seems to suggest, isn’t baseball better than drugs? What politician wouldn’t vote for that? Unable to represent the complexities or challenge the dominant narratives of drugs and the drug war, Traffic tries to sell its audience the panacea of baseball.

     

    Both Traffic and Blow are adaptations. While Traffic was boiled down from Traffik, a BBC mini-series, Blow emerged from the pages of Bruce Porter’s biography of George Jung. Of course Porter’s original title was a bit more telling: Blow: How a Small-Town Boy Made $100 Million with the Medellín Cocaine Cartel and Lost It All. The narrative implied by the title is precisely what the film delivers as it chronicles Jung’s life from his days as a small-time dope pusher to his role as a major player in cocaine wholesaling and his inevitable bust. Unlike Traffic, Demme’s film of Blow suggests something closer to Scarface‘s much more pointed critique of capitalism, but you wouldn’t know it to read the reviews. As A. O. Scott put it in the New York Times:

     

    The recent trend in movies about drugs–exemplified by “Traffic” and “Requiem for a Dream”–is toward a solemn reckoning of their social and psychological costs. “Blow,” with its jaunty visual style, short-attention-span editing, and outlaw-entrepreneur story line, takes a considerably lighter view. If the earnest, ambiguous “Traffic” worried about the insatiable American hunger for illegal pleasures, the breezily nonjudgmental “Blow” celebrates this appetite and makes those who exploit it into hip folk heroes. (Scott)

     

    To call Blow either breezy or nonjudgmental is to miss the seriousness of much of the film, as well as its rank sentimentality. Unlike many cocaine films, Blow is short on glamorized scenes of hip, well-dressed people consuming the powder to the appropriate sound track. Instead, the film revolves around Jung’s troubled relationship to his working-class roots in Boston. Caught between his mother’s manic desire for a better life and his bankrupt father’s inability to provide, the film suggests that Jung’s approach to his business was more an attempt to please his parents than a rebellious pursuit of glamour and decadence for their own sake. Growing up in the shadow of wealth and power, the film has the child Jung announce, “I never want to be poor,” and the film moves on from there. What is at stake for Jung is never the kind of counter-cultural idealism associated with pot and LSD that suggests that turning on might make a revolution. Rather, Jung speaks about his time like a corporate stringer. In the film he says he was sent to prison with a “bachelors in pot and came out with a masters in cocaine.” Or, as he even more cynically puts it in Porter’s book, “being in the drug business was like being an executive in any business” (55). What the film tries to argue, at times quite convincingly, is that Jung’s problems have much more to do with class insecurities and the claustrophobia of an Oedipalized family than with the cocaine itself. For this alone, the film is certainly a cut above a paranoid, reactive fantasy like Traffic. As Jung says at another point during his sentencing on a marijuana charge, “all I did was cross an imaginary line with some plants.” However, this is not to say that Blow is any more honest than Traffic about many other issues.

     

    Perhaps the most curious aspects of Blow are the revisions of Porter’s book, both necessary and gratuitous. David Edelstein of Slate has already noted the ways in which the film functions as “an unfathomable piece of whitewashing” for making Jung far more sympathetic to his girlfriend, wife, and daughter than the opportunistic misogynist Porter’s book suggests that he is. However, even this doesn’t go far enough. Some characters, such as Jung’s actual California connection Richard Barile, have disappeared altogether, replaced in this case by Paul Reubens’ composite of fictional and actual people. Further, there is no mention of the fact that Jung was eventually released from prison in 1993 after he testified (with the sanction of Pablo Escobar himself) against Carlos Lehder Rivas (the film’s Diego Delgado) in a federal court, nor that Jung’s current 22-year prison term was a result of a 1994 bust for a marijuana-smuggling operation. In fact, while the film version of Jung’s life revolves around his struggle to come to terms with his family, the book focuses almost exclusively on Jung’s troubled and complex relationship to Carlos Lehder and his attempts to become an accepted and trusted member of the Columbian cartel. Finally, there is no mention of Jung’s taste for S&M and cross-dressing, aside from a brief and unexplained moment in which a customs agent is perplexed by Jung’s suitcases full of women’s underwear. In fact, this moment is so inexplicable in the film that one critic was led to interpret it as Depp giving “a small tribute to Ed Wood” (Carr). Such omissions seem strange, and they suggest that Demme and screenwriters David McKenna and Nick Cassavetes wanted to avoid the most interesting complications that informed Jung’s life. In the film, Jung is presented as someone who finally learns his father’s lesson that money “isn’t real,” but the real Jung risked and lost his freedom again in part, one can only assume, for just that. Then again, Jung was not simply a straight, white, working-class kid trying to make good in all the wrong ways–the narrative the film seems to endorse. Jung’s self-destructive and arguably pathological responses to authority (he was given to gratuitous acts such as a tactically suicidal speech to a judge sentencing him for marijuana smuggling in which he claimed that he didn’t believe he had done anything wrong) are certainly more complex, especially in light of his marginal sexual identity, for in some ways Jung’s life was an exploration of sexual and political social control in many different spheres. Had Demme and his screenwriters had more guts, they might have been able to capture some of the fascinating and fundamentally more challenging aspects of Jung’s life that emerge in Porter’s book.

     

    To claim, as so many critics do, that Traffic is about drugs and the drug war as a whole while Blow is a typical gangster pic only incidentally about cocaine is to miss the ways in which both films are responding to our contemporary moment. After all, it is not as if we were in the midst of a wave of mainstream big-budget LSD or even ecstacy films. Traffic, ostensibly about the drug war as a whole, focuses only on cocaine, and Blow and Traffic are not the only recent films to highlight this as the drug of choice. Other recent examples include Studio 54, Boogie Nights, and Magnolia, as well as slightly older titles such as Where the Day Takes You. There are at least three factors that seem to explain why cocaine is so much at the heart of our current popular culture. First, many of these films are beginning to deal with the ’70s and ’80s as a distinct historical period, and are marking the decadence of that period through the presence of cocaine. Second, as I have argued throughout, cocaine has traditionally been a ruling-class drug, and as such it becomes a powerful device for developing political allegories about the problems of capitalism; there is much to suggest that Blow is following closely in the wake of films like Scarface in using cocaine for just such ends. However, there is a third reason as well, which is perhaps best approached through one of the most frequent criticisms of Blow. For many critics the film fell flat when it didn’t spend enough time reveling in the decadence and excesses of cocaine and the world of the drug’s most privileged users. Clearly, though most mainstream film provides itself with the alibi of an unhappy ending for users, there is an insatiable appetite both to produce and consume representations of drug use. How else can we explain one critic’s comment that in Blow “as the fun goes out of substance abuse,” so does “any possibility of audience interest” (Turan). If such statements in themselves weren’t enough, hardly an interview of the cast or crew of any film involving cocaine is complete without a discussion of what substitute they employed for cocaine: powdered milk, sugar, baby formula, etc. And, then again, how else would it even be possible to make sense of Traffic‘s paranoid fantasy of drug use which lingers so lovingly on shot after shot of Caroline free-basing in one location after another? Filmic representations of essentially unrepresentable somatic experiences are always worth looking at a bit more closely. After all, it is something distinctly different from the voyeurism of pornography. To watch others engage in sex is actually to have something to watch (and, one might argue, even to participate in through masturbation), but the effects of a drug, be it cocaine or anything else, are often not apparent to anyone but the user, and certainly are not readily communicable. Might the loving detail with which the culture industry represents drug use be in part a kind of perversely simulated repressive desublimation? Rather than consuming the drugs themselves, the audience fulfills its desires by watching others simulate the consumption for them; of course, then the audience can also have the additional satisfaction of seeing the characters punished for such transgressions. Is the loving detail that contemporary films devote to the decadence of drug use in the ’60s and ’70s the only high left for a cultural mainstream still dreadfully afraid of actual drugs? Certainly this would explain why the lurid depictions of drugs in Traffic were far more persuasive to critics than those of the more sedate Blow. Sadly, in the end neither Traffic nor Blow is particularly revolutionary. Instead, each reveals how even ostensibly refreshing and progressive attitudes toward drugs can be mired in the commonest forms of repression and reaction.

     

    Works Cited

     

     

  • Complicating Complexity: Reflections on Writing about Pictures

    Jerzy O. Jura

    Foreign Languages and Literatures
    Iowa State University
    GeorgeOJ@aol.com

     

    Review of: James Elkins, Why Are Our Pictures Puzzles? On the Modern Origins of Pictorial Complexity.New York and London: Routledge, 1999.

     

    The Tempest (La tempestad), a 1997 best-selling Spanish novel by Juan Manuel de Prada, not only borrows its title from the 1508 painting by Giorgione, but also places the masterpiece canvas at the center of a complex detective plot that involves art forgery, love, betrayal, and murder. Alejandro Ballesteros, the novel’s main character, is an art history student who, after years of intensive studies, comes to Venice to examine the famous painting, the topic of his doctoral dissertation. Although the novel’s opening page includes a color reproduction of the painting, and the first chapter briefly describes what art historians refer to as its basic sensus litteralis, the author devotes much of chapter eight to explaining the complexities of the daunting task his fictitious art history student faces: the need to reconcile into a coherent whole many, often contradictory, interpretations of the painting and his frustrating inability to unequivocally “fix” the meaning of even its most visually prominent characters and elements. In a reflection on the nature of this interpretive process, the young art historian Ballesteros compares his task to the process of assembling a complex jigsaw puzzle:

     

    It takes a numismatic patience to arrange the pieces of a puzzle. One has to decide continually between an almost infinite number of possible combinations, and to try and match the bite-shaped pieces together. And although sometimes the connections between them are so subtle as to be almost evanescent, and our intuition tells us that a simple error of judgment could just as easily destroy the tenuous link, we chase this thought away, and we continue tenaciously…. It’s not enough to fit the pieces together, however, we also have to make sure that the resulting image is plausible. (Prada 185)

     

    As it turns out, in his concerns regarding the complexity of pictorial images, and the extent of critical writings about them, the fictitious art historian from Prada’s novel is not alone: the reflection on the interpretive process that addresses images, such as Giorgione’s Tempest, as well as the picture-as-puzzle metaphor itself (inspired by Salvatore Setti’s book on Giorgione), are both also at the center of James Elkins’s metatheoretical 1999 inquiry into the mechanisms that underlie present-day art historical discourse, tellingly titled Why Are Our Pictures Puzzles? On the Modern Origins of Pictorial Complexity.

     

    Elkins’s point of departure, and the basic premise of his argument, a premise which he quickly and convincingly proves in the opening chapters, is that while “once upon a time, pictures were simple,” over the last century they have invariably grown more “difficult to explain,” “demanding,” and “puzzling” (xi). This opening statement is not quite accurate, since what concerns Elkins is the fact that academic approaches to pictures and, consequently, academic writing about them, not pictures themselves, have changed dramatically over the last century.

     

    Following Wittgenstein’s maxim that “the first step in seeing a problem is seeing that it is a problem” (xi), Elkins endeavors to outline its nature and extent in both qualitative and quantitative terms. To outline the main direction of the trend, he examines a somewhat extreme, and therefore conveniently self-evident example of a monograph by Birger Carlström, who claims that many popular Impressionist paintings, usually taken to be expressions of the new, modern age aesthetic, are teeming with extensive, and often cryptically encoded political messages, hidden in the outlines, signatures, fabric folds, or even minute paint spots so small as to be discernible only under a magnifying glass. In several examples of pictorial exegesis run amok, Carlström reads Renoir’s political concerns about the Panama Canal project from his paintings, or rather into them, as Elkins, supported by extensive art-historical consensus, points out. Carlström claims to have identified messages such as “stop stupid England at Suez Canal,” allegedly engraved with a needle in one painting, or cartographic outlines of the canal in several of Renoir’s paintings generally considered to be charming, but otherwise conservatively bourgeois portraits. As Elkins notes, there is no existing additional evidence, such as correspondence or other written documents, to support or corroborate Carlström’s unusual interpretive claims.

     

    The extent of the “complexity problem,” however, does not exclusively affect the isolated and contested margins of pictorial interpretation. Even in those mainstream art history texts which reflect wide consensus in the field, and where the enormous geographic and chronological scope limits the space devoted to each single art object to a minimum, as is the case in Janson’s popular and extensive History of Art, the complexity of interpretation is still evident to Elkins. He points out that the existence of extensive additional interpretive information, while not necessarily included explicitly in such texts, is clearly implied or acknowledged in them.

     

    Having outlined the general nature of the problem in qualitative terms, Elkins also traces the chronological development of art-historical exegesis, and provides extensive textual support for the claim that traditional ekphrases, dating from antiquity to about a century ago, are generally short, and that their authors almost never ventured beyond the sketchy, verbal descriptions of the paintings’ most immediately visible content (sensus litteralis), their narrative foundations (fabula, or dramatic ekphrasis, in Elkins’s terms), or, in the case of religious paintings, their spiritual meaning (sensus spiritualis). Elkins sees the relatively recent explosion of interpretive complexity as an urgent theoretical issue that needs to be addressed, and observes that “as historians and viewers, we tend not to reflect on why we understand pictures the way we do” (35). Thus it would be hard not to notice that in a way the book and its author’s arguments are very fittingly inscribed within the postmodern debate on the mechanisms of legitimizing our knowledge, and in this case, the art historical discourse in particular.

     

    The anatomy of pictorial complexity, however, and especially its genesis, is not very simple. Elkins hypothesizes that it is our present-day “aversion to mere description, or the apparently simpleminded praise of illusion” (39), that leads to endless bibliographies that have accumulated not only around certain paintings, but even around the meaning of specific individual objects depicted in them. The “buried mirror,” to use the term coined by Carlos Fuentes, in Velázquez’s Las Meninas is a perfect case in point. Understood for centuries as little more than just a reflection of the Spanish royal couple, with Michel Foucault’s essay the painting was “pressed into service as a reflection of fragmented Western epistemology” and treated ever since as “the representation, as it were of classical representation” (39). And while Elkins himself contributed an elaborate diagrammatic analysis of the painting’s complex perspective that accompanied Joel Snyder’s 1985 article on the emblematic meanings of the mirror in the Spanish masterpiece, he readily admits that the diagram’s analytic precision and the logical exactitude of the argument that it accompanied are distinctly “foreign to Velázquez’s contemporary reception” (40). So might be dozens of other present-day studies of the painting, whose authors see the mirror as a catalyst for “‘narcissistic’ reflections on self reflection” (Mieke Bal), as a “hypericon” and “metapicture”–i.e., a painting that represents picturing itself (W. J. T. Mitchell)–or even as “a representation of Lacan’s register of the Symbolic” (Pierre-Gilles Guéguen) (40).

     

    Other examples of the objects whose presence in paintings has recently generated equally extensive and complex exegetic commentary include open doors, which formerly “seemed self-explanatory to generations of writers before the twentieth century” (42); shoes, a prominent point of reference in Jacques Derrida’s “Restitutions of the Truth in Painting”; and checkerboard floors, as well as the basic perspective box that underlies the construction of many pictorial spaces (43). Elkins is eager to stress that he does not believe those critical interpretive excursions are “inane or inherently wrong headed,” but rather that they constitute “the shape of pictures as we understand them today” (44), and that the increased interest in some paintings, or the critically underscored relevance of some objects in them, is a reflection of the importance of their commentators to the general intellectual tenor of our times, a point aptly made with a rhetorical question: “How interesting are Van Gogh’s paintings of shoes, outside Heidegger and Derrida?” (45). By contrast, Elkins also defines a category of paintings which fail to attract wider exegetic interest, and, since they are not compositionally engaging, “offer little purchase for an historian intent on locating intellectual content” (53). Since they seem to “call for a nonverbal, unanalyzed kind of contemplation” (54), they are usually excluded from verbal analyses. For Elkins, few art historians are aware of this exclusionary bias, even when it is patently visible in their own writing.

     

    The emphasis on the intellectual content of paintings makes Salvatore Setti’s interpretive picture-as-puzzle metaphor (from his book on Giorgione) particularly attractive to Elkins. In fact, several central chapters of his book include extensive and copiously illustrated critical evaluations of existing taxonomies of puzzle types (both in the metaphoric and in the literal sense) and of different degrees, modes, and types of ambiguities.

     

    While for present-day art historical discourse the potential for pictorial complexity and ambiguity seems to be a prized characteristic, too much of a good thing occasionally makes a critical evaluation of existing research impossible. This leads Elkins to describe one category of images as “monstrously ambiguous paintings” (123). Three prime examples of this category are Giorgione’s Tempesta, Botticelli’s Primavera, and Michelangelo’s Sistine Ceiling, since in each case “so much has been said about each of them that the history of their reception can no longer be fully told” (124). The paintings that are thought to be intentionally ambiguous are especially good candidates for the category, and even more so if their primary subject and meanings are unclear and cannot be determined to be either self-evident or reasonably well deduced from existing historical sources. Giorgione’s Tempesta is a perfect example, exactly because there is no consensus on the painting’s primary meanings. To “evoke the tenor of the literature” (131), Elkins lists a long series of recently proposed interpretive solutions, ranging from very specific identifications of the painting’s characters with those of various literary, mythological, biblical, or hagiographic fabulae, to the claims that Tempesta indeed is, and always has been intended to evade unambiguous attributions of meaning, and that it really is a painting without a subject (130-37).

     

    Picking up the line of thought about Carlström’s marginal exegeses from the introductory pages of the book, Elkins devotes an entire chapter to cryptomorphs–hidden images, in many cases arguably read into the pictures as a result of modern day, often anachronistic interpretations. And, as Elkins himself admits, while in some cases, such as Freud’s famous misreading of a vulture into Leonardo’s Virgin and Child with St. Anne (205), errors can be easily explained away (a translation error, in this case). Other hypotheses, such as Meshberger’s claim of two brain views embedded in Michelangelo’s Sistine Ceiling (Elkins 209), can be argued against only tentatively, and the multiplicity and complexity of arguments that have to be brought to bear on this case, ironically, dilute the argument, instead of lending credibility to it.

     

    Elkins’s tour-de-force journey through exegetic samples, whether of exemplary logical coherence, or marginal, bizarre, and non-corroborated interpretive claims, concludes with an envoi which contains a handy summary of his answers to the questions posed in the title of the book, Why Are Our Pictures Puzzles? Elkins’s own initial hypothesis that the increase in our knowledge, the growth of the discipline, and new insights are responsible for the complex ways we read pictures, is ultimately determined by him to be unsatisfactory. It is surprising to realize, however, that while Elkins considers a wide range of possible causes in his effort to account for the rise in the complexity of writing about pictures, he tends to leave out more mundane causes external to art history as a discipline. Ironically, the reason for this exclusion may be that those possible external causes are not as complex as the internal ones Elkins discusses at length, and therefore are of less interest to a scholar. Technological advances in art reproduction come to mind as a potentially powerful impulse for that type of change, an impulse not considered by Elkins. One could hypothesize that, since in the past the reading audience had limited access to the works of art in question, it was necessary to resort to frequent basic description, but in today’s world, where detailed color reproductions of thousands of paintings are easily available to the public, the reason for simple description has been eliminated, leaving a void to be filled with more complex arguments. Similarly, the academic pressure on many researchers to publish extensively and frequently has led many actively to seek out niche areas that have not yet been explored, especially if their work is concerned with periods and works that have already accumulated an extensive body of theoretical commentary.

     

    Elkins’s book remains a valuable reflection on the mechanisms that set the directions of contemporary academic discourse, and while his specific concern here is art history, many of his observations clearly apply to other humanistic disciplines, as well–and in particular to literary studies.

     

  • The Ecstasy of Speed

    Srdjan Smajic

    English Department
    Tulane University
    ssmajic@tulane.edu

     

    Review of: Paul Virilio, A Landscape of Events.Trans. Julie Rose. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2000.

     

    Those who are familiar with Paul Virilio’s work on dromology, or the logic and effects of speed, may have noticed by now a paradox in the manner in which he addresses this subject. While he maintains that speed is the essential modus vivendi of the latest devices of destruction, deterrence, and misinformation, Virilio himself writes and publishes at an impressive pace. The reviewer, who has just gotten his hands on A Landscape of Events (2000 [1996]), has not yet seen The Information Bomb (2000 [1998]), and probably will not get to it before the translation of Stratégie de la déception (1999) comes out to announce that, yet again, the technologies and texts of yesterday are already outdated.

     

    On the one hand, this arrangement is perfectly logical, and the rationale behind it is self-explanatory: one cannot take forever to comment on events that are occurring at the speed of light–and only for the duration of their televised presentation. The Persian Gulf War, which according to Virilio was in 1992 already “receding into the vacuum of consciousness” at meteorite-speed, demonstrates how televised events operate (“now you see it, now you don’t“), and perfectly, if tragically, illustrates “the compression of history and finally the disappearance of the event!” (24).1 If human memory has by now so thoroughly adapted itself to televisual programming that objects, events, and even persons can be said to exist only insofar as they are being televised in “real time,” then the speed at which Virilio makes his observations public appears to be not so much a matter of choice but of sheer necessity. Who wants to read about last year’s war when terrorist attacks are being televised by CNN as we speak or write?

    In fact, it is no longer the Gulf War but the Kosovo War that provides the best example of what Virilio is talking about. “The automation of warfare,” he says in a recent conversation with John Armitage, “has… come a long way since the Persian Gulf War of 1991.” Speaking in technological, military, and strategic terms, the Kosovo War is so far ahead of the Gulf War that the latter may just as well have happened thirty or forty years ago. Some may already have forgotten the name Norman Schwarzkopf. History, Virilio states in the same text, “is now rushing headlong into the wall of time,” by which he means that we are in fact witnessing its end, the final and apocalyptic realization of the Hegelian prophecy. Under such extreme conditions one cannot afford to lose sight of speed, its doings and undoings, and to fall behind on what is latest, hippest, hottest, and most up-to-date. Virilio cautions us to keep in mind that “the speed of light does not merely transform the world. It becomes the world. Globalisation is the speed of light. And it is nothing else!” (“Kosovo War”). Timing is indeed everything.

     

    On the other hand, such a perfectly logical strategy (speed vs. speed, a speedy response to light-speed events) makes itself vulnerable to charges of hypocrisy. Is Virilio not riding on the crest of the technological wave and enjoying the benefits? Do not his texts and interviews frequently appear on internet sites where, instantly accessible from any terminal on the globe and only a click away from your own homepage, the words and sentences faintly flicker in some ontologically ambiguous cyberspace that is the exact opposite of the geographic space and historical time in which Virilio would advise us to live? Are not the words I have just quoted–these very words I am writing now–already part of the landscape of events in which everything exists in the eternal, real-time now, and therefore never really and actually? Cyberspace and information superhighways, Virilio remarks in another cyberspace text, bring about a “fundamental loss of orientation.” If to exist, really and fully, “is to exist in situ, here and now, hic et nunc,” then this sort of existence and reality “is precisely what is being threatened by cyberspace and instantaneous, globalized information flows” (“Speed and Information”).2

     

    A Landscape of Events rushes headlong into and around these questions of cultural velocity. All the key issues that have occupied Virilio’s attention in the past–miniaturization, disintegration, globalization, optics and information, war and cinema, the disappearance of history–are revisited here with characteristic rapidity. Indeed, the very importance of the book lies in its symptomatically Virilian temporality. Its thirteen short essays, which Virilio wrote over the last twenty years or so and then self-anthologized and published (as Un paysage d’événements) as “early” as 1996, in some sense come too late to their English-language reader–especially if he or she has come to rely on Virilio’s intimate connectedness with technoculture to learn about the latest generation of personal computers and video games, radars and smart bombs. Such a reader ought to know that there is nothing new to be learned from Virilio’s new book, nothing that he has not already told us many times over. But this may be to the book’s advantage–as is the fact, strange as it may sound, that the book is in print.

     

    Virilio, more than anyone else I can think of, makes us feel that the printed word is a remnant of an earlier, slower, sleepier, and happier age: it is quaint, archaic–one would be tempted to say prehistoric, except that the relative slowness and linearity of print ought to remind us of the relative slowness and linearity of historic time, that is, of the fact of history itself. Print is therefore not prehistoric but precisely historical.

     

    It is the logic of print technology–its relative slowness in the age of light-speed televisual information–that keeps open a path of resistance to the logic of chronostrategy and the seduction of speed. The speed at which one is informed (or even misinformed) through print will always be inferior to the speed at which one passively registers televisual images, but because of this the quality of reception, as it were, is substantially in favor of print. The book as a physical object becomes a site of resistance to speed. It transforms viewers back into readers. It slows down the transmission of information. It leaves time for active participation in communication and meaningful dialogue. Because print moves at the speed of cognition, because it is cognition and comprehension that make it move along, control its progress, and determine its durations, one can never be bombarded by print in the same way that one can be harassed and paralyzed by the blinding explosion of televised images.

     

    Even though words on a computer terminal look very much like their hard-copy counterparts, they behave very differently–or we behave differently as readers, scrolling and clicking rather than skimming and page-turning. The fact that so many cannot see the difference or remember how things used to be, Virilio would insist, is indicative of the global loss of critical discernment and the degeneration of public and private memory. The twin activities of clicking and forgetting have become a way of life.3 We have internalized the process so thoroughly that the acme of artificiality seems now perfectly natural, even biologically preprogrammed. The hominoid has replaced the human (34). In comparison to cyberspatial texts and televised images, print appears more dignified and humane. Even if Virilio would surely agree that all types of media are always ideologically suspect, writing for print is perhaps one way to stand up against “the intermittent eclipse of the speaking beings that we are” (52).

     

    As always, Virilio is unabashedly humanistic, albeit vague on his definition of “human.” This, however, does not make his message any less politically and ethically urgent. He openly laments the loss of all sense of proportion and propriety, and the disintegration of vital categories such as “human” and “real.” To ask for precise definitions of these categories might be to miss the point. To suspect their validity means already to suspect one’s own humanity and reality, to erase oneself as a subject in the traditional sense of the word, but without necessarily reemerging, at the other end of the tunnel, in some more up-to-date sense. Movement in postmodernity is always toward some kind of disappearance.

     

    “For God,” Virilio writes, “history is a landscape of events. For Him, nothing really follows sequentially since everything is co-present” (x). But the view from Heaven, seen from Virilio’s point of view, is essentially antihumanistic and becomes available only after theology has been replaced by an anti-theological epistemology.

     

    If one eliminates God and if, soon after, it becomes fashionable to declare Him dead, it is only normal that, through successive shifts, one ends up getting a little anxious about the origins of this “man” who, once removed from the Judeo-Christian Genesis, suddenly finds himself robbed of his inheritance, deprived of identity. (34)

     

    Genesis, the prototypical story of beginnings and begettings, of the drawing of boundaries and construction of categories (day vs. night, human vs. animal, land vs. water, and so on) functions as a template for the writing of historical narratives in general. Thus it is not faith in God that Virilio wishes to salvage, but rather faith in history. Without history–without the consciousness of what one might call “the natural and proper slowness” of the passage of time–catastrophes of all kinds loom large on the horizon: “the recession of history entails the retreat of knowledge, the retirement of progress” (xii). The space opened up by the death of God is now occupied by the subject who declares (or is instructed, seduced into thinking) that he or she can see everything, everywhere, and everytime, who has been released from the shackles of corporeality and can therefore claim to exist in several places at the same time.

     

    Elsewhere Virilio notes: “technologies of real time… kill ‘present’ time by isolating it from its presence here and now for the sake of another commutative space that is no longer composed of our ‘concrete presence’ in the world, but of a ‘discrete telepresence’ whose enigma remains forever intact” (“Third Interval” 4). Speed marks the death of the body. Or rather: bodies, but also human relationships, disintegrate at the speed at which technology reduces the need for corporeal presence, for human intervention and human interaction.

     

    Here is a book, then, whose relative lateness may be considered a virtue and part of its argumentative strategy: a text that capitalizes on the fact that it is a text and not an image that flashes for an instant and is gone. Its physicality recalls our own corporeality. Whether we like it or not, a body is still needed to pick up a book, open it, turn the pages. The lessons that Virilio wishes to teach us–and most of his work is essentially ethical and didactic, a sort of code of conduct for the postmodern subject–are worth paying attention to only if they will be remembered, and they will be remembered only if they resist speed twice: through their form and their content.

     

    If, as Virilio claims, his book reflects the “radical reversal in perspective” (xiii) that today replaces God with the omnipresent and all-seeing subject of postmodernity, it is to show the aberrant nature of this development rather than pay homage to it. In this one respect, at least, Virilio is not rushing to report on events that have not yet finished happening, but is staging a return to the past, and with a certain deliberateness of speed. It is perhaps the most “new” thing in the book, this insistence on what can only be learned from revisiting and reconsidering, at second glance, what has come before. What we have before us is a kind of back-tracking history that begins with Virilio’s 1996 thoughts on urban lighting and the “false day of technoculture” (2), and concludes with comments from the early 1980s on military cybernation and speed fetishism. By moving backwards in time, A Landscape of Events defamiliarizes temporality in order to refamiliarize us with it. In the manner of Russian Formalists, Virilio makes temporal progression strange by replacing it, for the moment at least, with temporal regression. To remind us that, beyond the TV screen, events still happen in time and not in some timeless landscape of the ever-present–that televised deaths and televised wars are real in the bloodiest sense of the word–Virilio winds the clock in the opposite direction.

     

    Speed, he repeatedly insists, is dehumanizing. In the end, there is nothing to be gained and everything to be lost:

     

    Imagine for a moment that the two vehicles about to pass each other here and now were sped up considerably; the encounter, the exchange of greetings, would simply not take place unless there was sufficient time for perception, the relative invisibility of the two motorists present having nothing to do with some ghostly absence of their bodies, but solely with the lack of duration required for their mutual apprehension. (45)

     

    The anecdote involving two motorists who fail to perceive each other because they are moving too quickly, and who therefore do not really exist for each other in any meaningful way, sums up Virilio’s thoughts on the alienating effects of constant acceleration. Our horizon has shrunk to the size of the TV screen, he warns us, “the screen suddenly becoming a last ‘visible horizon,’ a horizon of accelerated particles that takes over from the geographic horizon of the expanse in which the televiewer’s body still moves” (47). Such limitation of vision–but really of conscience and consciousness–is for Virilio debilitating and abhorrent.

     

    In strikingly similar fashion, Milan Kundera reflects in his novel Slowness on the logic of speed and the postmodern loss of sense and sensibility.

     

    Speed is the form of ecstasy the technical revolution has bestowed on man. As opposed to a motorcyclist, the runner is always present in his body, forever required to think about his blisters, his exhaustion; when he runs he feels his weight, his age, more conscious than ever of himself and of his time of life. This all changes when man delegates the faculty of speed to a machine: from then on, his own body is outside the process, and he gives over to a speed that is noncorporeal, nonmaterial, pure speed, speed itself, ecstasy speed. (2)

     

    “Why has the pleasure of slowness disappeared?” (3), the narrator asks. The man on a motorcycle who zips past him in the opposite direction represents the dromophile, the postmodern subject par excellence.Forgetful of his body, material reality, space and time, he can

     

    focus only on the present instant of his flight; he is caught in a fragment of time cut off from both the past and the future; he is wrenched from the continuity of time; he is outside time; in other words, he is in a state of ecstasy; in that state he is unaware of his age, his wife, his children, his worries, and so he has no fear, because the source of his fear is in the future, and a person freed of the future has nothing to fear. (1-2)

     

    These questions and revelations come to Kundera’s narrator as he himself is speeding down a highway in a state of dromological ecstasy. Dare one say, then, that there is a dromophile behind every dromophobe?

     

    As for Virilio, nowhere does he sound more like himself than when he proposes to “quickly review the history of military control and surveillance” (83), which indeed he does in only a couple of pages. This is not exactly history at the speed of light–instantaneous history being unimaginable, since history is defined by and exists only in duration–but comes as close to the CNN style of high-velocity info-bombardment as possible in print. The implicit argument for slowness in A Landscape of Events is thus always tempered, if not finally undone, by Virilio’s stylistic embrace of speed. We track carefully backwards through his engagements and provocations only to find ourselves, at the end, swept up in the headlong pitch, invited to indulge in the ecstasy of acceleration.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Unless otherwise indicated all quotes are from A Landscape of Events.

     

    2. As far as I know, the two texts I refer to here are available only on Ctheory‘s website <http://www.ctheory.com>.

     

    3. The “fire-and-forget” missile is one of Virilio’s favorite illustrative tropes. (Two sidenote speculations: [1] So quickly does forgetting follow firing that the eventual explosion comes as a surprise, a blast from the past. [2] The eradication of duration enhances military performance because it effectively razes the bothersome obstacle of conscience and eliminates the interval of deliberation and intelligent decision-making. Vital strategic and tactical decisions are left to machines, which are not yet being programmed to consult an “ethical microchip.”)

    Works Cited

     

    • Kundera, Milan. Slowness. Trans. Linda Asher. New York: HarperCollins, 1996.
    • Virilio, Paul. “The Kosovo War Took Place in Orbital Space.” Interview with John Armitage. Trans. Patrice Riemens. CTheory 89 (18 Oct. 2000) <http://www.ctheory.com/article/a089.html>.
    • —. “Speed and Information: Cyberspace Alarm!” Trans. Patrice Riemens. Ctheory 30 (27 Aug. 1995) <http://www.ctheory.com/article/a030.html>.
    • —. “The Third Interval: A Critical Transition.” Trans. Tom Conley. Rethinking Technologies. Ed. Verena Andermatt Conley. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993. 3-12.

     

  • As Radical as Reality Itself

    Helen Grace

    School of Humanities
    University of Western Sydney
    h.grace@uws.edu.au

     

    Review of: Susan Buck-Morss, Dreamworld and Catastrophe: The Passing of Mass Utopia in East and West.Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2000.

     

    Such imaginings, freed from the constraints of bounded spaces and from the dictates of unilinear time, might dream of becoming, in Lenin’s words, “as radical as reality itself.”

     

    –Susan Buck-Morss, Dreamworld and Catastrophe

    “Don’t you know philosophy is dead?… Marxism-Leninism killed it here, Deconstruction in the West. Here we had too much theory of reality, there you had not enough.”

     

    –Malcolm Bradbury, Doctor Criminale

     

    In Malcolm Bradbury’s 1992 novel, Doctor Criminale, the English narrator Francis Jay, a somewhat jaded journalist researching a mysterious Central European intellectual named Bazlo Criminale, arrives at an international literary conference in the Italian Lakes District. The conference participants (the usual suspects: “American Postmodernists, American feminists,… distinguished elderly French academicians,… muscular young academics from Southern California, carrying tennis rackets,… mean-looking dark-clad theoretical critics from Yale, formerly dissident writers from Eastern Europe uncertain about what exactly they are now dissenting from, African writers in multi-coloured tribal robes, German writers from East and West all wearing black leather jackets”) all have come to grapple with the conference theme, “Literature and Power:… Writing After the Cold War.” Bradbury’s portrait of literary conferences is wry and immediately recognizable–as are a number of the intellectuals. Criminale (“the Lukacs of the nineties” who had had a bitter quarrel with Heidegger, attacked Adorno, and revised Marx) turns out to be not entirely criminal, but neither does he prove to be innocent (“as Nietzsche said, when an epoch dies, betrayal is everywhere. To make ourselves heroes of the new, we must murder the past” [330]). He is a creation of the Cold War itself and if the novel is too close for comfort for Western critical intellectuals, it has resonance in Eastern Europe. Recently translated into Russian, it was essential summer reading in Moscow last year.

     

    The novel’s fictional conference takes place in November 1990–but in October 1990, a real conference sharing a number of the characteristics of Bradbury’s account occurred in Dubrovnik–in a venue not so very far from the fictional one. Attended by an impressive assembly of what might be called a new postmodern nomenklatura (including Susan Buck-Morss, Boris Groys, Wolfgang Fritz Haug, Fredric Jameson, Helena Kozakiewicz, Merab Mamardashvili, Valerii Podoroga, Mikhail Ryklin, Vladislav Todorov and Slavoj Zizek), this was to be a renewal of a critical tradition of scholarly exchange established thirty years earlier by Herbert Marcuse and continued by Jürgen Habermas. Within six months of the conference, Dubrovnik was in ruins and in just over a year, the Soviet Union no longer existed. The Dubrovnik meeting–and the intellectual exchanges which continue in its wake–remain, however, a serious and unresolved challenge to Western theories of postmodernity and globalization, and this challenge cannot be ignored if these two terms are to be regarded as truly critical concepts and not just another dimension of liberal-democratic hegemony, masking the same old First-World expansionism.

     

    In Dreamworld and Catastrophe, Susan Buck-Morss’s brilliant account of the end of the Cold War–part intellectual biography, part polemic, part philosophical picture-book, part “hypertext”–“fact” once again turns out to be far more fascinating than “fiction.” Buck-Morss’s method clearly draws upon Benjamin’s Passagen-Werk, cross-weaving description and quotation with astute observation and rich images to produce a new textual entity that exceeds the limits of the book, promising a future form better suited to the way in which ideas seize the imagination than the academic book is able to provide. As the author herself says, “Books are slow organizers, producing mass predispositions but seldom inciting direct action” (134). This presents a challenge to academic publishers which none–including MIT Press–yet seem able to grasp. What remains is a virtual film script or an unrealized multi-media project, demanding to escape from the limits of the printed word.

     

    The book’s first chapter on power, sovereignty, and the nation-state draws upon an idea of the political imaginary as something considerably less abstract than the logic of a discourse or “world-view,” as Western political theorists understand it. Buck-Morss prefers to see the political imaginary as a specific iconographic, visual representation of the political terrain, as understood in Russian post-structuralist philosophy (especially in the work of Podoroga)–a political landscape rather than a political logic, a visual field in which political actors move and are also acted upon in a bodily sense. This allows three “icons” of the political imaginary–the common enemy, the political collective, and the sovereign agency, which acts in its name–to be brought into focus and considered at the same moment. In addition to these visible components, there is also a blind spot, a “wild zone” in which power remains arbitrary and violent, beyond the rule of law. She summarizes thus: “the class nature of the state may explain its violence, but not its legitimacy; the democratic nature of the state may explain its legitimacy but not its violence” (6). This zone of the state’s excess already exists in the French Revolution–the Ur-form of both models of mass democracy (the nation-state and revolutionary class). Although historically located in the French post-revolutionary Terror, which is echoed in Stalinist terror, it is also clear that the idea of the “wild zone” draws upon the particular post-Soviet experience in which politics, emerging civil society and criminality become indistinguishable. Boris Kagarlitsky has aptly described this scenario:

     

    Everything that can be divided up, pulled apart or plundered will be privatised and distributed among the top people in the state. Anything which does not reach the top will go to the hangers-on. The remainder will be picked up by the mafia which, as the liberal press has already announced, “does not exist in our country.” (ix)

     

    The “wild zone” is also located at the heart of capitalism as Braudel has noted:

     

    [Above the layer of the market economy] comes the zone of the anti-market, where the great predators roam and the law of the jungle operates. This–today as in the past, before and after the industrial revolution–is the real home of capitalism. (qtd. in Buck-Morss 341)

     

    Buck-Morss attempts to spatialize the relation between her discursive account of the (relative) movement of politics and the (relative) immobility of the concepts deployed to understand it (Cold War Enemies; French Revolution; Separation Between the Economic and the Political; Sovereign Party/Socialist State; Space; Time) by dividing the visual field of the page between text and “hypertext” (though this is a misnomer since it is placed below rather than above or beyond the text). This is an adventurous move, but the “Euclidean geometry” of the printed page does not lend itself to the kind of fluidity (if not “fourth-dimensionality” to refer to a particular theme of the Russian avant-garde) which the material requires and which a (more ephemeral) website or a CD-ROM would provide. The exigencies of academic publishing for the global intellectual finally seem to demand the immobility of the book over the constant movement of the body and ideas of the author and this remains a paradox of criticism.1

     

    The hypertextual experiment of the first chapter gives way in subsequent chapters to a much more successful quotation and image-based intertextuality. The “life-building” experimentation of Gastev, Bogdanov, and Melnikov is explored via a broadening of aesthetics to incorporate a more embodied experience, defined as “perception through feeling.” This approach involves a now familiar critical maneuver through which the artist is displaced by the artwork itself–so it is artworks, rather than artists who are said to be “avant-garde” and, even further, it is said to be the aesthetic experience of the artwork which counts rather than the work, and in the end it is not the object but its critical interpretation which is avant-garde.

     

    This displaced status of both the artist and the object was certainly a theme for the Russian avant-garde, but it is perhaps an oversimplification to argue that the non-objective is representational to the extent that it is “mimetic of the experience of modernity” (63). Such a suggestion does however indicate that within an approach such as Buck Morss’s, space can be given to something that exceeds politics (the “wild zone”)–but there is nothing that exceeds representation (the iron grip of materialism). It is this tendency that runs the risk of reducing all images to being mere illustrations of critical concepts, rather than being generative of them. The materiality of the image or object is never allowed to be its own, so that the labor of the artist is always subordinated to that of the critic. This then remains another critical paradox–justified perhaps in this case because “the original field of aesthetics is not art but reality–corporeal, material nature” (101).

     

    But critics are not alone in displacing artists. In the twentieth century totalitarian figures made something of a habit of it–and more recently, totalitarian leaders have been criticized precisely on artistic grounds–Hitler by Syberberg, and Stalin most notably by Groys. Unsympathetic to this trend, Buck-Morss challenges it:

     

    But is the lesson that political revolutionaries should not be artists, or is that they should become better ones?… Revolutionary politics needs to take seriously the fact that democratic sovereignty represents the masses, and that political actions represent history by giving it sensory, material form. (66)

     

    In order to explore the relation between revolutionary politics and democratic sovereignty, Buck-Morss attempts a brief history of time, which proves to be too sketchy to grapple satisfactorily with its theme in book form (though in a moving image or multi-media form, this chapter would work much better). She relies on images which are well known–Lenin’s sarcophagus (designed by Melnikov), the Lenin mausoleum (designed by Shchusev), stills from October of the toppling of the statue of Alexander III, an image of the toppled Dzerzhinskii statue (a “victim” of the 1991 coup), images of the death and resurrection of the Cathedral of Christ the Savior in Moscow. A fascination with death (or, at least, the mummified bodies of dictators) gives way to three chapters on “life-building,” mass culture, and the dreamworlds of capitalism and communism.

     

    The shock of modernity via Benjamin provides a nice segue into a discussion of Stakhanovist shock work. Drawing upon Stephen Kotkin’s account of the building of the “showcase” industrial project at Magnitogorsk (literally, “Magnetic Mountain”) in the Urals in the 1930s (by U.S. engineers–and Soviet labor–modeled on the steel town of Gary, Indiana), Buck-Morss points out a key distinction between Taylorism and Stakhanovism: Taylorism, she reminds us, is a rational/ist model aimed at the establishment of norms and standardized rhythms based on scientific observation of individual bodily movements; Stakhanovist shock work on the other hand was carried out in rushes or “storms” by teams of workers. Said to have its origins in very old rural rhythm-setting work cries, the aim was to achieve higher productivity through superhuman effort without machines, a process involving team spirit and an everyday heroism in which ordinary workers’ lives could be transformed. This idea of life transformation through labor probably owes more to messianic belief, rendered material by Bolshevism’s promise of paradise on earth, than it does to a Protestant work ethic from which it deserves to be distinguished.

     

    If we accept, as Buck-Morss argues, that mass society is a twentieth-century phenomenon, the idea of “the masses” has undergone significant change and from both “East” and “West,” there seems to be a tendency now to abandon the concept.2 For Buck-Morss, mass society itself has transformed the masses from Marxist historical consciousness (class-for-itself) to a style-conscious consumer-led collectivity: “People become part of the collective by mimicking its look” (134). For Podoroga, “the mass” is primarily a visual phenomenon, a simulation produced by cinema’s imaginary space and existing only within that space. Especially in Eisenstein’s cinema, the crowd is a composite form, a “protoplasmic being in the process of becoming” and a “flow of violence” (147). Interestingly, this idea of “protoplasmaticness” is developed by Eisenstein himself in writing, not about “the masses” but about Disney (see Leyda).

     

    Much has been written in recent years about the spectacle of the revolution, the mass theatrical spectacles commemorating it, and Stalinist culture’s phantasmagorias. As the archives continue to be mined and the Soviet Union rendered as a simulacrum, comparisons might be made with the mass culture of its “other”–the United States. This is precisely what Buck-Morss attempts, concluding that the collective imaginaries of both capitalism and socialism are “virtual worlds,” although it remains a social project to make them real (149).

     

    Just as the image of the crowd became a “protoplasmic being” in Eisenstein’s cinema, a composite of moving masses flowing across the screen and close-ups of faces at the limits of expressivity, so Hollywood’s creation of a new mass figure–the star–relies upon the composite image (close-ups of mouth, eyes, legs, breasts, projected in super-human dimensions) and plastic surgery to eliminate the imperfections of the natural body. To this extent the image of the star, which is quintessentially female, presents an “awesome aesthetic spectacle” of “monstrous proportions,” and Buck-Morss goes so far as to liken it to a huge church icon, surrounded by objects of conspicuous consumption. The star constitutes a standardized image, an instantly identifiable cliché, like an advertising logo. But a distinction can still be made between Soviet and Hollywood cinema, one providing the prosthetic experience of collective power and the other (Hollywood, of course) the prosthetic experience of collective desire. A different economy of desire operates for Soviet cinema, one which is productive rather than consuming (for example, the vital energy of Liubov Orlova), coinciding with the particular industrial needs of the Soviet Union in the 1930s.

     

    In an especially forceful section entitled “A Cosmopolitan Project,” Buck-Morss brings together Kotkin’s work on Magnitogorsk, Sutton’s on technology transfer, and Williams on Mellon’s millions to discuss the mutual dependence of the Soviet Union and the United States in the 1930s (at a point when the U.S. did not recognize the Soviet state) and the relative value of art and technology. While the Depression gripped the U.S. population, throwing many into unemployment, U.S. firms were doing substantial business in the Soviet Union, which was selling off the plundered treasures of the aristocracy (and masterpieces from the Hermitage) to the West in order to pay for the new technology being imported to build socialism. Buck-Morss powerfully encapsulates the intricacies of these exchanges:

     

    Thus the profits of capitalism (surplus value withheld from the wages of American workers) moved (via the Mellon family fortune) to finance (via the capitalist firm of McKee Construction Company) the building of technologically advanced socialist factories, an increase in what Marx called “constant capital” that in turn increased the value of Soviet labor. Meanwhile, in the counter direction, cultural “treasures” that had been owned by the Russian aristocracy and nationalized by the Bolsheviks became (via Mellon’s “philanthropic” cover-up of tax evasion) the property of the United States government–and the American public received socialized culture in the form of a national museum…. What is the proper accounting when the sale of one Raphael (at 1.7 million gold dollars) buys more than half of the design of one Magnitogorsk (at 2.5 million gold rubles), which translates into jobs for thousands of Soviet workers, and the production (by 1938) of millions of tons of finished metal? How does one make political sense out of an economic exchange whereby the U.S. Secretary of the Treasury uses his private millions to “build socialism” in Stalin’s Russia–at the same time as the output of steel mills in the United States is falling precipitously due to a Great Depression that, to Stalin’s delight, affects capitalism alone? (172)

     

    In the final chapter Buck-Morss writes an equally dazzling analysis of “shock therapy” economics in the post-Soviet context.

     

    Needless to say, dreamworlds, “vacillating between a desire that is expressed and a fear that holds it in check” are followed by awakenings (176). The dream is dismantled, its images parodied (Komar and Melamid: “Thank you Stalin for our happy childhood”). Catastrophe follows.3 Monumentalism is reduced to the horror movie (an image of the Palace of the Soviets is likened to a movie poster advertising King Kong, with the gargantuan statue of Lenin replaced by the gorilla). The ecstasy of the Soviet sublime (“the physical suffering that hollows out the individual for the sake of the collective”) is double-edged: triumphant and destructive of the body at the same moment. Capitalist individualism on the other hand leaves no space for such ecstasy:

     

    Capitalism harms human beings through neglect rather than through terror. Compared to the personal will of a dictator, the structural violence of market “forces” appears benign. Those individuals (or groups) excluded from capitalism’s dreamworlds appear themselves to be to blame. (188)

     

    As Eastern Europe becomes “subalternized” by IMF policies and pressures on some territories to join NATO or the European Union, all those populations who have been subject to the “ecstasy of the Soviet sublime” will be free to decide the true nature of the difference between subjection to the personal will of a dictator and the structural violence of market forces. It may well be that the de-Stalinization already well established in dissident culture, with its combination of political cynicism, anti-utopianism, and distrust of all totalizing discourse (in a word, “postmodernity” which arrived well in advance of the West’s) will provide some resources for thinking afresh the problems of this New World Order. The Indian critic Geeta Kapur once argued that the use of the word “appropriation” to describe a feature of postmodernism could only be used in a Western context since it properly belongs to the colonizing phase of Western consciousness. Its use as a description of the pastiche of postmodern art has to be seen as arising precisely from a condition of surplus, of saturation: “If there is a surfeit of cultural input and output, you appropriate, jettison and parody, you make blatant pastiche because the options are too many” (Jayamanne 43).

     

    If we agree with Kapur’s suggestion for a postmodernism of surplus, perhaps we now need an account of a postmodernism of scarcity–and such an account will not come from the West.

     

    The real strength of Buck-Morss’s book comes less from its own appropriation of earlier scholarship on the Soviet Union (for this is a legacy of the Cold War, when the American academy was funded to research and know–in an “expert” sense–Soviet culture better than Soviet citizens were able to do).4 The book’s final chapter, entitled “Afterward,” describes the dilemmas of incommensurability, the difficulties of translation, and the privileges and contradictions of global intellectual culture better than almost any other account I’ve read. This is an “eyewitness” account providing a level of depth which transcends the surfaces of the dreamworld to an unusual degree–only possible at the precise moment of passage from dreamworld to catastrophe since it is at this moment and this moment alone that the notion of “the enemy” dissolves sufficiently for a new kind of intellectual exchange to occur.5 At the core of this exchange with Western intellectuals is a remarkable group of philosophers, led by Valerii Podoroga and forming the Laboratory of Postclassical Studies, located in Moscow in the Institute of Philosophy at the Russian Academy of Science. Podoroga’s “underground” seminars on Kierkegaard, Nietzsche, Freud, Husserl, Heidegger, Merleau-Ponty, Benjamin, Adorno, Barthes, and Foucault challenged what many regarded as the bloodlessness of orthodox Marxist-Leninist epistemology. The word “postclassical” alerts us immediately to a different understanding of “postmodernism,” since it is argued by these philosophers that Stalinism was a classical civilization (continued in the high “official” culture of the Brezhnev period) and that the term “postmodern” as it is understood in Western critical theory is an inaccurate concept in describing late/Post-Soviet reality.

     

    As Buck-Morss reports, contestation of the term was especially heated at the Dubrovnik conference, which focused the differences between Eastern and Western concepts of power and culture. She cites Jameson’s description of the dynamics of the exchange: “The more their truths are couched in Orwellian language, the more tedious they become for us; the more our truths demand expression in even the weakest forms of Marxian language… the more immediately do the Eastern hearing aids get switched off” (237).

     

    Jameson’s own totalizing assumption (“Cold War anticommunism has lavishly supplied all possible and imaginable stereotypes”) would seem to be a particular barrier to conversation, since one might equally suggest that Cold War anti-capitalism at least had the capacity to imagine different worlds not simply reducible to a reversal of anticommunism. If this were not the case, then there ought to have been no difficulties in reaching agreement at Dubrovnik, since everyone would have been talking essentially about the same thing.

     

    The final word in this fine account must however go to Buck-Morss, who describes the central moral dilemma for global intellectual culture in these chilling terms:

     

    All of us sense (rightly) that our success depends on global name recognition. To achieve the status of a global intellectual, it is not necessary to saturate national markets, not even one’s own. No one speaks of writing for the majority, much less for the masses. It is enough to be known among a tiny but mobile transnational elite, who have inordinate power to replicate locally the hegemony of globally transmitted discourses. If one wanted to be dramatically pessimistic, one might describe this phenomenon of globalization as a membrane that spans the world like an oil slick, thin but tenacious, and capable of suffocating the voices of anyone speaking beneath it. (262)

     

    The ecological-catastrophic image in the last sentence deserves to resonate in the way that Benjamin’s most startling quotations continue to have force. The moral challenge is to be able to encourage the suffocated voices to be heard on their own terms–even at the risk of loss of power and position for the global intellectuals who assume the authority that comes from speaking on their behalf.

     

    Notes

     

    1. On the question of “movement” and “immobility,” see Vladimir Papernyi’s Kul’tura Dva. See also the translated section entitled “Movement–Immobility” in Efimova and Manovich’s Tekstura: Russian Essays on Visual Culture.

     

    2. I am using the terms “East” and “West” in the way in which they are used by Buck-Morss, even though it makes no geographic sense to use them in this way in Australia, where “the West” is Africa and “the East” South America (if one is facing north).

     

    3. The word “catastrophe” has a broader range of meaning in Russian (where it can encompass the merely accidental as well as the totally disastrous) than it does in English. It is also worth remembering that Kerensky’s first account of the Revolution was entitled The Catastrophe. Not surprisingly, “catastrophe theory” is also a Russian specialization, in the work of renowned mathematician, Vladimir Arnold.

     

    4. Important British and European research institutes certainly existed in this period, but almost all of Buck-Morss’s sources are scholars working in the U.S.

     

    5. The highly original work of Elena Petrovskaia on “the enemy” lies behind these exchanges and is crucial in enabling them. It deserves to be better known in the West (though it will not be easily appropriated by it.) See in particular Chast’ Sveta.

    Works Cited

     

    • Arnold, Vladimir I. Catastrophe Theory. New York: Springer-Verlag, 1992.
    • Bradbury, Malcolm. Doctor Criminale. London: Secker and Warburg, 1992.
    • Efimova, Alla, and Lev Manovich, eds. Tekstura: Russian Essays on Visual Culture. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1993.
    • Groys, Boris. The Total Art of Stalinism: Avant-Garde, Aesthetic Dictatorship and Beyond. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1992.
    • Jayamanne, Laleen. “Discussing Modernity, ‘Third World’ and ‘The Man Who Envied Women’: Interview with Geeta Kapur and Yvonne Rainer.” Art & Text 23/24 (Mar.-May 1987): 41-52.
    • Kagarlitsky, Boris. The Disintegration of the Monolith. London: Verso, 1992.
    • Kerensky, Aleksandr Fyodorovich. The Catastrophe: Kerensky’s Own Story of the Russian Revolution. New York: D. Appleton, 1927.
    • Kotkin, Stephen. Magnetic Mountain: Stalinism as a Civilization. Berkeley: U of California P, 1995.
    • Leyda, Jay, ed. Eisenstein on Disney. Calcutta: Seagull Books, 1986.
    • Papernyi, Vladimir. Kul’tura Dva. Moscow: Novoe Literaturnoe Obozrenie, 1996.
    • Petrovskaia, Elena. Chast’ Sveta. Moscow: Ad Marginem, 1995.
    • Sutton, Anthony C. Western Technology and Soviet Economic Development. (3 vols.) Stanford: Hoover Institute Press, 1968-1973.
    • Williams, Robert C. Russian Art and American Money 1900-1940. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1980.

     

  • Against Postmodernism, etcetera–A Conversation with Susan Sontag

    Evans Chan

    evanschan@aol.com

     

    This interview took place in late July, 2000 at Susan Sontag’s  penthouse apartment in Chelsea on a sunny, tolerably hot day. Just as I entered the building, Sontag’s assistant was returning from some errands and we went up the elevator together. As we opened the apartment door, Sontag was emptying some trash into a bin. Later she mentioned that since her illness–she has been recovering from a second cancer that was diagnosed in 1998–her apartment had become a mess. “These days I’m mostly trying to make space for all the books I’ve acquired in the last two years and sorting papers and manuscripts,” she said. What makes the apartment at once austere and elegant are the dozens of Piranesi prints on the walls. I was reminded of lines in the Alice James monologue from Sontag’s play, Alice in Bed: “With my mind I can see, I can hold all that in my mind. Everyone says [Rome]’s so beautiful. I’ve looked at the pictures, the engravings. Yes, Piranesi” (81).

     

    I had brought with me a copy of a Chinese periodical review of my recent book The Last of the Chinese (also in Chinese) to show her. The editor had used the cover of her latest novel In America to illustrate the review–a delightful surprise for me, since Sontag has been an important influence on my own writing and filmmaking endeavors. An admirer of The Benefactor, Sontag’s first novel, before reading her critical writings, I translated into Chinese her essay “Fascinating Fascism” and her short story “Project for a Trip to China” back in the mid-’80s in Hong Kong, without thinking much about copyright issues. Over the years, I saw Chinese translations of her work appear here and there in Hong Kong, Taiwan, and China, invariably without her knowledge. Several friends urged me to interview her for Chinese publications, and perhaps to edit an anthology of Sontag’s writings in Chinese. As the Sontag anthology project became more realistic, I finally introduced myself to her at a Trisha Brown concert at the Joyce Theater and she agreed to my interview request right away. When I described the chaotic Chinese publishing scene, she shrugged it off. “People think that I’ll be angry because it’s pirated. But I’m not a very good citizen of capitalist society. Of course, I’d like to be paid, and I’m hardly difficult to get in touch with. I have a publisher and an agent, whose addresses are listed in the entry on me in Who’s Who, which I assume anybody can access online. But no, I’m not angry. Most of all I’d like to be read.”

     

    Then we settled into a table in the kitchen. Behind me was a door that opened onto a wrap-around balcony, which overlooked the shimmering Hudson and the Manhattan skyline in late afternoon. Sontag put her leg on the table, tilted her chair back, and sipped her coffee. Two years ago she quit smoking. She started talking about Shower, the most recent Chinese film she had seen. She found it “mildly interesting” because of its setting in a Beijing in transition. Among Hong Kong filmmakers, Wong Kar-wai is naturally the one she is familiar with. She quite liked Fallen Angels, but was disappointed by Happy Together. (Serving on the jury of Hawaii Film Festival in 1986, Sontag apparently helped A Time to Live, A Time to Die, the breakthrough film by Taiwan’s preeminent auteur, Hou Hsiao-hsien, win top prize. She also named YiYi, by Edward Young, another major Taiwan filmmaker, the best film of 2000 [Sontag, “Best” 26]). I brought her up-to-date on the activities of our mutual friend Simone Swan, a founding director of the de Menil Foundation and an old acquaintance of hers, who has been trying to preserve the legacy of the Egyptian architect Hassan Fathy by building low-cost adobe housing along the Texas border.1 Sontag responded positively, but suspected that “poor people might want concrete” rather than mud bricks for their houses. After such preliminary small talk, the interview–C: Chan; S: Sontag–formally began:

     

    C: In the ’60s, you were among the first to try to bridge the gap between high and low cultures. Now, after three decades, we’ve seen high culture, or the so-called canon, besieged by popular culture and multiculturalism. We have today a new sensibility that, depending on one’s perspective, either surpasses or parodies the kind of sensibility that you heralded in the last essay of Against Interpretation (1966). We now live in an age of total eclecticism and global interpenetration, which many people, including myself, call the postmodern. So far, your reaction to postmodernism seems largely inimical. And you refused to allow the Camp sensibility that you helped make famous to be co-opted by the postmodernists because “Camp taste… still presupposes the older, high standards of discrimination” (“Writing Itself” 439).

     

    S: I never thought I was bridging the gap between high and low cultures. I am unquestioningly, without any ambiguity or irony, loyal to the canon of high culture in literature, music, and the visual and performing arts. But I’ve also enjoyed a lot of popular music, for example. It seemed we were trying to understand why that was perfectly possible and why that wasn’t paradoxical… and what diversity or plurality of standards might be. However, it didn’t mean abolishing hierarchy, it didn’t mean equating everything. In some sense I was as much a partisan or supporter of traditional cultural hierarchy as any cultural conservative, but I didn’t draw the hierarchy in the same way…. Take an example: just because I loved Dostoevsky didn’t mean that I couldn’t love Bruce Springsteen. Now, if somebody says you have to choose between Russian literature or rock ‘n roll, of course I’d choose Russian literature. But I don’t have to choose. That being said, I would never argue that they’re equally valuable. But I was very struck by how rich and diverse one’s experiences are. Consequently, it seems to me a lot of cultural commentators were lying about the diversity of their experiences. On the other hand, there are a lot of things in mass culture that didn’t appeal to me, notably what’s on television. It seems very non-nourishing, conventional, bland, trivial. So it wasn’t a question of bridging the gap. It’s simply that I saw a lot of simultaneity in my experiences of pleasure, and felt that most discourse about culture was either philistine or shallowly snobbish. So it wasn’t this is “here,” and that’s “there,” and I can make a bridge. It was that I understood myself to have many kinds of experiences and pleasures, and I was trying to understand why that was possible, and how you could still maintain a hierarchical sense of values.

     

    This is not the sensibility that’s called the postmodern–by the way, that’s not the word I use or find useful to use. I associate postmodernism with leveling and with recycling. The word modernism arose in architecture. It has a very specific meaning. It meant the Bauhaus School, Corbusier, the box skyscraper, the rejection of ornament. Form is function. There are all sorts of modernist dogmas in architecture, which came to prevail not only because of their aesthetic values. There was a material support for these ideas: it’s cheaper to build buildings this way. Anyway, when the term postmodernism began to be used across the field for all the arts it became inflated. Indeed, many writers who used to be called modern or modernist are now called postmodern because they recycle, use quotations–I’m thinking of Donald Barthelme, for instance–or practice what’s called intertextuality.

     

    C: Yes, the way writers are being relabelled as postmodern is at times baffling. For example, I was startled when Fredric Jameson, whose work I greatly admire, cited Beckett–who for me is a terminal product of high modernism–as a postmodern author.

     

    S: Jameson is the leading scholar who has tried to make more sense of the category of postmodernism. One of the reasons I remain unconvinced by his use of the term is that I don’t think he’s interested in the arts. Not really. Not even in literature. He’s interested in ideas. If he cared about literature he wouldn’t have quoted–at great length–Norman Mailer. While you illustrate your ideas with quotations from novels, you’re also implicitly suggesting to people that they read these books. I think that either Jameson doesn’t know that Mailer isn’t a very good writer, or that he doesn’t care. Another example is when Van Gogh and Warhol are treated as equivalent by Jameson for the sake of theory-building, for fitting examples into his theory. That’s when I get off the bus. In my view, what’s called postmodernism–that is, the making everything equivalent–is the perfect ideology for consumerist capitalism. It is an idea of accumulation, of preparing people for their shopping expeditions. These are not critical ideas….

     

    C: However, in your long essay AIDS and Its Metaphors (1989), you characterized the current moment as “a… grateful return to what is perceived as ‘conventions,’ like the return to figure and landscape… plot and character, and other much vaunted repudiations of difficult modernism in the arts… the new sexual realism goes with the rediscovery of the joys of tonal music, Bouguereau, a career in investment banking, and church weddings” (166-67). I, for one, almost felt you were singing the praises of postmodernism.

     

    S: Did you? That was certainly not my point. I thought I was being sarcastic.

     

    C: And you seem to have tapped new sources of energy in transforming yourself into a historical novelist by writing The Volcano Lover (1992) and In America (2000), which I guess would come under the rubric of postmodern novels.

     

    S: Although I have written two novels that take place in the past, I don’t call them historical novels. That is, I don’t consider myself working in a specific genre like crime novels, sci-fi novels, or the Gothic novels. I want to enlarge my resources as a writer of narrative fiction and I found it liberating to set them in the past. These novels can’t be written in any other time but the late 20th century, written in a combination of first and third person narrations, and with a commingling of voices. I don’t think there’s anything like a return to convention, or return to figuration. Maybe these novels should be viewed as books about travel, about people in foreign places: The Volcano Lover is about the British in Italy; In America is about the Poles emigrating to the US; the novel I’m about to start is about some Japanese people in France in the 1920s. However, I’m not trying to fulfill a program–I’m trying to stretch myself.

     

    C: Do you feel that in your current novels you can treat more effectively entities like “characters?” Are characters conventional items?

     

    S: I’m not sure “characters” are conventional items. But I always start with people, even with The Benefactor (1963) and Death Kit (1967). The Benefactor explores a certain reclusive nature, which is in fact very nihilistic–a gentle nihilism. (Laughs.) Death Kit is about a man committing suicide. During the time I wrote these two novels I began to become more interested in history–not exactly related to current events or particular topics–but just history and what it meant to understand something historically–just what is behind the way anything is at any given moment. I used to think that I was interested in politics, but after I read a lot of history, I came to think that the notion of politics is very superficial. Actually, if you care about history, you couldn’t care that much about politics.

     

    After writing the first two novels, I did more travels. I had already set foot outside of the wealthy countries of North America and Western Europe. For example, I had been to North Africa and Mexico. But Vietnam was the first country I visited where I saw real suffering. And I looked at such experiences not just in aesthetic terms, but also with moral seriousness. So it’s not that I’m disenchanted with modernism. I want for myself to take in more reality, and still with the tools of modernism, to address real suffering, the larger world, and to break out of the confines of narcissism and solipsism.

     

    C: Isn’t the portrayal of the Cavaliere in The Volcano Lover a study of the saturnine, melancholic temperament that harks back to your early, “solipsistic” novels? At the same time, we see that consciousness is being dramatized by your placing it within a wider world, within the currents of history.

     

    S: I suppose all my work is placed under the sign of melancholy. Saturn. At least so far. I expect that won’t always be so.

     

    C: Haven’t you said that you don’t like your early novels very much?

     

    S: I’ve said all sorts of stupid things. (Laughs.) Luis Bunuel once expressed an interest in filming Death Kit. That could have been very nice.

     

    C: Recently, I reread your first novel The Benefactor after almost twenty years. That was the first book of yours that I read and it remains one of the most eccentric and brilliant novels I’ve ever come across. When I first stumbled upon it I was living in Hong Kong, completely unaware of contemporary literary scene, and by chance I started reading Hannah Arendt. I saw her endorsement of The Benefactor somewhere. She praised your originality and expressed admiration for your ability to “make a story out of dreams and thoughts.” I guess what Arendt found fascinating in it might be what she called “thought-experiments.” Now, I was also struck by how much The Benefactor has encapsulated so many of the themes and concerns in your writing career. It is, first of all, Against Interpretation written as fiction. Hippolyte is someone who doesn’t want to interpret his life through dreams, but to act through, and along with, his dreams.

     

    S: You’re right on the mark about The Benefactor having all the themes of my work. That’s very startling to me, as if you started with the cards in your hand, but you’re blindfolded. And then maybe only halfway through your life do you actually get to look at the cards you’re holding. Every once in a while, I catch a glimpse of the way my work fits together. For instance, the essays I wrote about illness–Illness as Metaphor and AIDS and Its Metaphors–was also kind of “against interpretation”: Don’t interpret being ill. Being ill is just being ill. Don’t invest it with all these myths and fantasies….

     

    C: In The Benefactor, you wrote: “No part of the modern sensibility is more tiresome than its eagerness to excuse and to have one thing always mean something else” (109).

     

    S: I’d forgotten that. How did I know what I knew, all too unconsciously at the time? When I began The Benefactor, I hadn’t the faintest idea of what I was doing; unlike later writing, when I really did think through the basic ideas before I would start. I just went sentence by sentence, I had no idea where it was going to go. But at the same time it was very easy to write, as if it was already there and I just had to take it down. A few of the dreams have elements of the dreams of mine, but they are mostly invented.

     

    C: One critic suggested that Hippolyte and Jean-Jacques are modeled after Artaud and Genet.

     

    S: Jean-Jacques is, in part, inspired by Genet–well, by the idea of Genet. Hippolyte? No, that’s no one in particular.

     

    C: I was spellbound by The Benefactor‘s opening epigram: Je reve donc je suis! Maybe because I’m Chinese and every Chinese is familiar with Chuang Tzu’s tale about the man and the butterfly: The man dreams a dream in which he becomes a butterfly. Upon waking up, he wonders whether he’s actually a butterfly that dreams of becoming a man. I can see how The Benefactor was influenced by Kleist’s essay “On the Puppet Theater,” as it makes Hippolyte’s journey a quest for the equilibrium and tranquility of the self.

     

    S: You’re right about Kleist. I read the Kleist essay when I was very young and was completely overwhelmed. However, the point is you have to write out of a deep place, and these things, like the Kleist essay, sink down to a deep place and then you find you can write. Many people have asked me why I haven’t written something in the form of fiction or play about the siege of Sarajevo. The answer is that I feel that experience hasn’t yet gone to the deepest place it can go.

     

    C: In response to your political intervention in Sarajevo by staging Waiting for Godot, Jean Baudrillard said, “Even if there are any intellectuals left… I do not share in that complicity of intellectuals who perceive themselves as responsible for ‘something,’ as privileged with a sort of conscience-radicalness that used to be the privilege of intellectuals…. Subjects such as Susan Sontag cannot intervene anymore, even symbolically, but once again this is not a prognosis or diagnosis” (qtd. in Bayard). What’s your reaction to his idea about “the privilege of the intellectuals,” as well as his so-called diagnostic statement about our time?

     

    S: Baudrillard is a political idiot. Maybe a moral idiot, too. If I ever had any thought about functioning in a typical way as a public intellectual, my experiences in Sarajevo would have cured me forever. Look, I did not go to Sarajevo in order to stage Waiting for Godot. I would have had to have been insane to do such a thing. I went to Sarajevo because my son, a journalist who had begun covering the war, suggested that I make such a trip. While there for the first time in April 1993, I told people I would like to come back and work in the besieged city. When asked what I could do, I said: I can type, I can do elementary hospital tasks, I can teach English, I know how to make films and direct plays. “Oh,” they said, “do a play. There are so many actors here with nothing to do.” And the choice of doing Godot was made in consultation with the theater community in Sarajevo. The point is, that doing a play in Sarajevo was something I did at the invitation of some people in Sarajevo, while I was already in Sarajevo, and trying to learn from Sarajevans how I might be, in some small way, useful.

     

    It had nothing to do with “the privilege of the intellectuals!” My visit wasn’t intended to be a political intervention. If anything my impulse was moral, rather than political. I’d have been happy simply to help some patients get into a wheelchair. I made a commitment at the risk of my life, under a situation of extreme discomfort and mortal danger. Bombs went off, bullets flew past my head…. There was no food, no electricity, no running water, no mail, no telephone day after day, week after week, month after month. This is not “symbolic.” This is real. And people think I dropped in for a while to do a play. Look, I went to Sarajevo for the first time in April 1993 and I was mostly in Sarajevo till the end of 1995. That is two and a half years. The play took two months. I doubt if Baudrillard knows how long I was in Sarajevo. I’m not a Bernard-Henri Levy making his documentary Bosna. In France they call him BHL; in Sarajevo they called him DHS–deux heures a Sarajevo–two hours in Sarajevo. He came in the morning on a French mlitary plane, left his film crew, and was out of there in the afternoon. They brought the footage back to Paris, he added an interview with Mitterand, put on the voice-over, and edited the film there. When Joan Baez came for twenty-four hours, her feet never hit the sidewalk. She was going around in a French tank and surrounded by soldiers the entire time. That’s what some people did in Sarajevo.

     

    C: Did you ever call Baudrillard a “cunning nihilist”?

     

    S: I doubt it. I don’t think I would call him nihilistic. I think he’s ignorant and cynical. And he definitely has opinions about intellectuals. There are intellectuals and intellectuals. The majority of them are conformists. But some are brave, very brave. And what are intellectuals doing with postmodernism? How people move these terms around instead of looking at the concrete reality! I’m for complexity and the respect for reality. I don’t want to think anything theoretically in that sense. My interest is to understand the genealogy of ideas. If I’m against interpretation, I’m not against interpretation as such, because all thinking is interpretation. I’m actually against reductive interpretation, and I’m against facile transposition and the making of cheap equivalences.

     

    C: Yet, in retrospect, your book On Photography (1977) can be considered a pioneering work on postmodernity. For example, you said that the photographic taste is inherently democratizing and leveling–capable of abolishing the difference between good and bad taste. Photography, or the culture of images, has aestheticized tragedies and disasters, fragmented our world, replaced (virtualized?) reality, and instilled a sense of fatalism: “In the real world, something is happening and no one knows what is going to happen. In the image-world, it has happened, and it will forever happen in that way” (168). (That comment presaged Virilio’s observation that our Past, Present and Future has been replaced by Fast Forward, Play and Rewind–the image of modern/postmodern man being that of a sitter with a remote.) For you, photography is the culmination of modernism and its undoing.

     

    S: Yes, I suppose so. But again I don’t think I need to use that term “postmodern.” But I do think seeing the world photographically is the great leveler. And yet I’m puzzling a lot over the consequences of viewing disasters and the horrors of the world through photographic images. Does it anaesthetize us? Does it make us used to things? Does the shock value wear off? I don’t know. Then there’s a big difference between the still and the moving images. The moving image is very powerful because you don’t know where it’s going to go. In the last essay in On Photography, I talked about the experience I had in China watching an operation under acupuncture anaesthesia. I saw someone have most of his stomach removed because of a catastrophic ulcer. Clearly it worked. His eyes were open and he was talking and sipping some liquid through a straw. There was no way of faking that; it did work. The doctor said it tends to work well for the torso but not so well for the limbs, and doesn’t work for some patients at all. But it worked for this one. I watched the operation without flinching, the cutting open of the abdomen, the huge ulcerous part of the patient’s stomach, which looked gray as a tire. This was the first operation I had seen, I thought maybe I’d find it hard to watch, but I didn’t. Then, six months later, I was in a movie theater in Paris watching Chung Kuo, Antonioni’s China film, which has a scene showing a Caesarian delivery with acupuncture anaesthesia. The moment the abdomen of the pregnant woman was cut, I couldn’t watch it. How strange! I couldn’t watch the image, but I could watch the real thing. That is very interesting. There are all sorts of puzzles about what the culture of image is.

     

    C: Some of the most ominous statements in On Photography have come true. For example, photography–in its latest incarnation through digital technology–has definitely triumphed over art. TV, Hollywood, and the infotainment industry have taken over, resulting in, among other things, what you called “the decay of cinema”2–the most important modern art form. Jean-Luc Godard recently said the cinema as we knew it is over (see Rosenbaum 165).3

     

    S: The cinema as he knew it is over. That’s for sure–for a number of reasons, including the breakdown of the distribution system. I had to wait eight years to see Alan Resnais’s Smoking/No Smoking, which I just saw at the Lincoln Center. Resnais made those films in the early ’90s, but then none of his films were distributed here in the past 10 years. We’re getting a much smaller selection here in New York, which is supposed to be a good place to see films. On the other hand, if you can tolerate the small formats–I happen to have a problem with miniaturized images–you can get the whole history of cinema and watch it over and over again. You don’t have to be dependent on the distribution system. The problems with cinema seem to me, more than anything, a cultural failure. Tastes have been corrupted, and it’s so rare to see filmmakers who have the aspiration to take on profound thoughts and feelings. There is a reason that more and more films that I like are coming from the less prosperous parts of the world, where commercial value has not completely taken over. For example, I think people have reacted so positively to Kiarostami is that he shows people who are quite innocent and not cynical, in this increasingly cynical world. In that sense, I don’t think cinema is over yet.

     

    C: It’s been suggested that you redirected your fiction-writing urge toward filmmaking during the long hiatus between your two groups of novels. [Sontag’s filmography includes Duet for Cannibals (1969), Brother Carl (1971), Promised Lands (1974), and Unguided Tour (1983).]

     

    S: Maybe. But I don’t have an industrial model of productivity. I don’t think it’s the most important thing, as soon as I finish one book, to immediately start another one. I want to write books that are necessary.

     

    C: One more question about The Benefactor and your writing career, because your first novel seems particularly interesting in light of your lifetime relationship with interpretation, Freudian and otherwise. Hannah Arendt is antipathetic to psychoanalysis because it compromises her conception of human freedom. Here’s a quote from The Benefactor: “But one has to declare oneself free in order to be, truly, free. I have only to consider my dreams as free, as autonomous, in order to be free of them–at least as free as any human being has the right to be” (246). I heard echoes of these statements in “Writing Itself,” your essay on Barthes, in which you upheld “the exercise of consciousness as a life’s highest aim, because only through becoming fully conscious may one be free” (444). To what extent do you feel that the project of consciousness that you treasure is better served by you as a fiction writer, rather than as an essayist?

     

    S: Yes, I do feel freer, more expressive, and much closer to what matters to me when I’m writing fiction. The goal is to become still more expressive. And to take in more and more reality.

     

    C: Do you acknowledge that there is an anti-psychological tendency in your work? Is that an aesthetic, formal, modernist approach partly derived from the French new novels? Or is it your moral and philosophical stance vis-à-vis the human condition?

     

    S: I don’t think I’m anti-psychological. I am rather anti-autobiographical, however. Maybe the confusion lies there. And I don’t think I’ve learned anything from the so-called French new novels. I didn’t ever really like them. I thought they were “interesting,” which is a shallow, dishonest form of praise from which I like to think I’ve freed myself.

     

    C: You supposedly abandoned two novels.

     

    S: Three, I’m afraid. I stopped at fifty, sixty pages. If I get to a hundred pages I can go on.

     

    C: Weren’t you supposed to have made a film based on Simone de Beauvoir’s first novel L’Invitee (She Came to Stay)?

     

    S: Yes. I’d written a full shooting script, secured the rights, for a pittance, from Simone de Beauvoir, and found some modest financing for the film. But at some point I stopped believing in the script, or the film, or the subject–I’m not sure which. I wasn’t confident it would be good enough.

     

    C: Have you said goodbye to filmmaking?

     

    S: Movies have been the love of my life. There have been many periods of my life when I’ve gone to movies every day, and sometimes I see two films a day. Bresson and Godard, and Syberberg, and more recently Sokurov, have been extremely important to me. I love Chantal Ackerman’s Jeanne Diehlmann, Bela Tarr’s Satantango, Fassbinder’s In a Year of Thirteen Moons, The American Soldier, The Bitter Tears of Petra von Kant, and Berlin Alexanderplatz; Angelopoulos’s Traveling Players, Alan Renais’s Melo, Hou Hsiao-hsien’s Goodbye South, Goodbye, Claire Denis’s Beau Travail…. I’ve learned so much from these films. And no, I haven’t said goodbye to filmmaking. I’m not interested in adapting my own books, but in something else. Yes, I want to make more films.

     

    C: In your 1995 essay “On Wei Jingsheng,” you lamented “the general decline of universalist moral and political standards of Enlightenment values in the past generation,” as reflected in the suspension of human rights standards where China is concerned. I think this piece, together with your (uncollected) 1984 essay “Model Destinations,” goes straight to the heart of the political dilemma of our post-Cold War and post-ideological era. Dictatorships all over the world, as you said, “have been emboldened” by the triumphant, capitalist West’s concerns about “sustaining lucrative economic ties” (“Model Destinations” 699-700).

     

    S: For the record, that wasn’t something I wrote. These are impromptu remarks I made at a press conference in New York organized by Orville Schell when Wei was rearrested, which were recorded, transcribed, and picked up by The New York Review of Books. The first I heard that my remarks were to be published was a few days later when I got a telephone call from The New York Review of Books, telling me that they were sending down the galleys of my “China piece” by messenger. (Laughs.) You know, I’m not a relativist. I grew up hearing that Asian culture is different from Western culture. Generations of Sinologists, including John Fairbank, have declared that where Asia is concerned, the Western standards of civil liberties are irrelevant, or don’t apply, because these came out of European Protestant culture which stresses the individual while Asian cultures are fundamentally collectivist. That is pernicious and colonialist in spirit. Such standards don’t apply to traditional societies or communities anywhere, including in Europe. But if you live in the modern world, which is by definition not a traditional world, then you do want these freedoms. Everyone wants them. And it’s important to explain that to privileged people from rich countries who think they’re only for “us.”

     

    C: And “Model Destinations” was part of a larger work that you gave up?

     

    S: Yes, it was going to be a book, about 100 pages, about intellectuals and Communism–because I was really impressed by how gullible those visitors to socialist countries were. Those people normally traveled in a delegation, stayed at hotels and were escorted around. I remembered my trip to China in January 1973 during the tail end of the Cultural Revolution. I became friendly with this woman assigned to be my interpreter. I wasn’t very important, so I got this low-level person from the Ministry of Foreign Affairs. And obviously she was writing a report on me every day. She was a sweet but frightened middle-aged woman who had lost her husband during the Cultural Revolution. I asked her where she was staying. She said she was staying with friends. As it turned out, she was staying in this tiny room, which was more like a closet, in the basement of the hotel. I saw it because I insisted on seeing where she stayed–she wasn’t supposed to show it. One day she invited me to go out for a walk, after indicating that the room was bugged. She spoke very slowly in her limping English: “Have… you… read… a… book… called… 19–” When I heard “19” there was a pain in my chest. I knew what she was going to say next. “-84.” “1984,” I repeated, more upset than I wanted to let on. “Yes,” she said, smiling, “China just like that.”

     

    I think if you troubled yourself to make a few human contacts, you could find out some truths about these countries. At least Roland Barthes had the courage of his sexual tastes. He liked countries in North Africa and Asia where he could sleep with boys; since he didn’t get the chance to do that in China, he was bored. But not fooled. His sexuality kept him honest about his unflattering impressions of Maoist moralizing and cultural uniformity. But others on the same trip to China [in 1974], Julia Kristeva and Philippe Sollers, came back saying it’s absolutely wonderful, and repeating all the Maoist clichés. You can say that their ideological blinders made them see things a certain way. There are also all the dupes who visited the Soviet Union in the 1930s. You want to say to such people, “Stop! Do you know where you are? What you’re seeing? Try to start from what is absolutely concrete. How could you not see?”

     

    C: Was there any period in your life when you were seriously seduced by communism?

     

    S: No, not by communism, but by the struggle against American imperialism. I was obsessed with the American war on Vietnam. Even to this date, Americans talk about 56,000 American soldiers who died there. That’s a lot of people. But three million Vietnamese soldiers and countless civilians died. And the country was ruined ecologically. More bombs were dumped on that country than all the bombs dropped in WWII, the same in Korea. The disproportionate nature of American firepower when it went into these countries was mind-boggling. Take the war in Iraq. The war was already over, and the Americans were dumping napalm and firebombing barefoot Iraqi soldiers who were retreating north. Those things drove me to despair. One must remember that between 1963 and August 1968, with the Soviet invasion of Czechoslovakia–that was a period of thought for a lot of us. In 1963 I became involved in the anti-war movement before there was really an anti-war movement. The Vietnam war was just starting. I teamed up with an ex-green beret and went on a speaking tour in California. We stood at street corners and twice were stoned. During that period of the mid-’60s I met people from the Soviet Union who did, in fact, say that things were really much better, and going in the right direction. Then it all came crashing down in August of ’68. So yes, between 1963 and 1968, I was willing to believe that so-called Third World countries opposing American imperialism which had adopted single-party Communist governments–and not just Vietnam or Cuba–could develop a humane alternative to their previous status of just being colonies…. That didn’t turn out to be true, but in a lifetime of caring about what goes on in the world, five years doesn’t seem too long to have been mistaken.

     

    C: Would you retract your 1982 Town Hall statement that “Communism is fascism with a human face”?4

     

    S: Of course not. Communist governments for a while drew on immense resources of idealism. In the 1930s in Europe, extraordinary people were drawn into the communist movement and they had no idea what was going on. And then the people who talked about it were constantly told to shut up because the most important thing was the struggle against Hitler and we must not let down the right side in the Spanish Civil War.

     

    C: Did you not finish the book about intellectuals and communism because you feared the book would be used by the neo-conservatives?

     

    S: Certainly not. It was abandoned because I wanted most of all to return to writing fiction, only fiction. I knew this book would take me a couple of years. I’ve abandoned a lot of things. And I’m not one of these graphomaniacs who write all the time. There are periods when I find writing the hardest thing in the world.

     

    C: Some critics have suggested that Maryna in In America is sort of a fictional self-portrait. Would you tell us how much you identify with this description in the novel, when you offer us the last glimpse of her in a third person narration? “Maryna sat down and looked into the mirror. Surely she was weeping because she was so happy–unless a happy life is impossible, and the highest a human being can attain is a heroic life. Happiness comes in many forms; to have lived for art is a privilege, a blessing” (369).

     

    S: I identify entirely with those words.

     

    * * *
    After the actual interview, I was sidetracked by finishing and launching my new feature film, “The Map of Sex and Love.” Then Susan Sontag won the 2000 National Book Award for In America, and, following that, the Jerusalem Prize in May of 2001.5 She had also been traveling and putting together Where the Stress Falls, a new collection of essays.6 By the time she came around to reviewing her responses and answering the additional questions that I put to her through writing, a year had passed. However, the piece is finally here. It will be translated into Chinese and serve as an introduction to Susan Sontag: Selected Writings in Chinese, to be published in Taiwan and Hong Kong in 2002.

     

    I’d like to acknowledge the following individuals, whose support and assistance made this interview possible: Jeff Alexander, May Fung, Russell Freedman, Canran Huang, Wendy Lidell, Ivan Ng, and Professor David Der-wei Wang.

     

    Notes

     

    1. More information about Simone Swan’s housing projects for the poor can be found at <http://www.adobealliance.org>.

     

    2. See Sontag’s “The Decay of Cinema.”

     

    3. From “Trailer for Godard’s ‘Histoire(s) du Cinema’,” Jonathan Rosenbaum’s interview with Godard in “Trailer for Godard’s ‘Histoire(s) du Cinema,’” found in “Jean-Luc Godard: Histoire(s) du Cinema,” Vol. 4, from books accompanying the 5-CD set of the soundtrack from Godard’s video series released by ECM Records in 1999.

     

    4. Sontag participated in a meeting at New York’s Town Hall on February 1, 1982, which was intended as a rally for the banned Solidarity in Poland. During the meeting, Sontag made a speech accusing the left of duplicity and declaring that “Communism is fascism with a human face.” Her speech, reprinted in a somewhat revised form in The Nation (27 Feb. 1982), drew much political criticism.

     

    5. Sontag’s acceptance of the Jerusalem Prize has generated some controversy. Her speech was published as “The Conscience of Words” in the Los Angeles Times on June 10, 2001. Available via <http://www.latimes.com>.

     

    6. Some pieces cited in this interview have been anthologized in Sontag’s latest collection of essays, Where the Stress Falls, which includes “Writing Itself–On Roland Barthes” (63-88); “A Century of Cinema” (117-122), cited here as “The Decay of Cinema”; and “Questions of Travel” (274-284), cited here as “Model Destinations.”

    Works Cited

     

    • Bayard, Caroline and Graham Knight. “Vivisecting the 90s: An Interview with Jean Baudrillard.” Ctheory 8 Mar. 1995 <http://www.ctheory.com/article/a024.html>.
    • Rosenbaum, Jonathan. “Trailer for Godard’s ‘Histoire(s) du Cinema.’” Interview with Jean-Luc Godard. Jean-Luc Godard: Histoire(s) du Cinema. Vol. 4. Books accompanying 5-CD soundtrack set. ECM Records, 1999.
    • Sontag, Susan. Alice in Bed. New York: Farrar, Straus, Giroux, 1993.
    • —. The Benefactor. New York: Farrar, Straus, Giroux, 1963.
    • —. “Best of 2000: Film.” Artforum Dec. 2000: 26.
    • —. Death Kit. New York: Farrar, Straus, Giroux, 1967.
    • —. “The Decay of Cinema.” New York Times Magazine 25 Feb. 1996: 6-10.
    • —. Illness as Metaphor; and, AIDS and Its Metaphors. New York: Farrar, Straus, Giroux, 1990.
    • —. In America. New York: Farrar, Straus, and Giroux, 2000.
    • —. “Model Destinations.” Times Literary Supplement 22 Jun. 1984: 699-700.
    • —. On Photography. New York: Farrar, Straus, Giroux, 1977.
    • —. “On Wei Jingsheng.” New York Review of Books 15 Feb. 1996: 41-42.
    • —. The Volcano Lover. New York: Farrar, Straus, Giroux, 1992.
    • —. Where the Stress Falls. New York: Farrar, Straus, Giroux, 2001.
    • —. “Writing Itself: On Roland Barthes.” A Susan Sontag Reader. New York: Farrar, Straus, Giroux, 1982. 425-46.
    • —. A Susan Sontag Reader. New York: Farrar, Straus, Giroux, 1982.

     

  • Hiiperlexicoaorpara=][strophism : Geo-grphamatico-natiopoloiostr/spgraphicalologispe

    Dæv. Gluomï-laa

    © 2001a
    PMC 100000101:0808080.1

     

      1. Ultimatele hthisis all ihave, to saye,

        0i. nxt. sub/sect

        y. Masse Customerizapersonalizatioindvidualizatione

        y1. LINUS:

        e. M.Blues cassette ondahsborade

        a6. Alternmatives to Standradaiaiaiazatione


     

    Of-ƒƒil. Lang.
    not › e12  › linkEs ››› weordes › blurbs·shŠttedth › v#1.  › syst emntic requs.  › ca.2k  › ind= › jœd ›› splt › mrg;, jv.-TRNon

    A little Quay may open [onto] a Box, where LIES eïne BOXSe of Keyes.
    –Rgr. Wllms., Thee Quaye Innu Languiasãlvage























       –Gl=yotard, Postmodærneligouseœ Libidinale
    Economicsetrices mïtmicrospoceie Appendectomie

    Supphose now hthat h(G>so    –Shirvani-&Wehrfritz, Skewe Linear Groups

    It isnott hee case that thee excess. /ive proli-surfeiti- feration of printt signals an increase in new information, asis yoften all egged bupt quite yhe contrairé. Yhe amt of “los informatioñedos,” presuming that it might be measurable, eventhough it sactually tisn’t, is lesse. Ythe Yincrease in printe is entirely attribublalbeitable to yeinincoherent repereepepetition.²
    –St . Tyler, “Progr=sesso=omenalexicoloca”

    Withoute regard to technocraticortical else ur innoviobviatione, the guidant principale of alast crowpperationale capitalismö ist clearly thise: Aich does what one wants sahlee bee the whole of theee law. This ruling–one might in a more classical moment call it “adm=rality”–
    –Gvãl=ia, “Hidroe-captitaliare”

     

    i. <?DOCTYPE declabrs. >= 1.1.1 Urµ

     

      • <?ENTITYE % ENGLANDGE.Verse “-//W5E//DTD ENGLANDGE 1.1 Transa-conformationeal//ENGL”>
        <?DOCTYPE ENGLANDGE PUBLIC? “-/DTD ENGLANDGE 1.1 Transitionactionalobjectiveal//ENGL”>
      • 043.3987:3874:init:te38.389:3.truckeecounty-at:te38.389:3.
      • Canonibicalizing W/EXML involves finding a single or “canonibanlnical” version of every possible possible form of the same document (by reducing white space, mapeping quote marks to a standard form, etc.etc.) with a view to using that standard form for the purpose of applying digital signature technology. An algorithm is applied to the canonical form of the document to generate a large number.z%^ If the document is tampered with in any way when it is sent down the woire, the algorithmecapplied to the document will generate a different number from the original, showing up even minute changes to have taken place.
      • inpute. An input element si somewtimes nowns as an fomr control, althogyth not all input elemenets are vizible on the page. For the most part an input element provides a place for users to eneter text, click, buttons, and makes selectsiton fomr liszt. The datar gathered from this interaction can be sumbittted to a server-sode programmeb (when the srurduohdngu form elephant is srestsrict)), or maybe used directly on the client as a way for users37. 

         

      • From its seeming to me — or to everyone to be so, it doesn’t follow that it isso. My wise shewes that… //what you shuld already knowe is that, because this is a reference book, it has been wirrtten deliberately to take advantage of features that have been inconstitently implementedand will not wokre ads desdribed. This is deliberately donet o sustaine my ‘visione’ of the world & in particular, you’ll like it to crazh brwosers, specially discrepencies btwn a plantery promise to bok perfect o all browesr versions & & ↦ ↦ ↦ ↦ & documentaion of legal expections.

     

        1. To begin hwhiche, it (spknn/wrtnlnguagee) is falling aparte. hwhiche is hilariouse and most, of all, because it wasn’t very well pute togetther to begine widthe-?.
        2.   <stylee type=”text/css”>
          .abenormal {
          font-familee: chumby, Zooba, Marquis;
          texte=decorhative: erase;
          }
          P {
          faciall: G-a-r-P;
          texte-instructive: Partial Print;
          }
          </stylee>
        3. I am very worried about language. I tooke its tempraturé & its defi</clipagn>
        4. CONV. Grammare is use to , tooo indicate material ‰ cn. skip uffer..

    I. Sundayý Morn.  -ing

     

        1. The chemicurituostsic thing about yr. whol proj. to me is the very many large quantities of pages of linkes-[etre]-bad whiche while i understand very clearly why you have put them still doens’t seem to be to me to speak very well of yr. overall design and intention. What percentage of would you say links are bad at this point? if higher than 17% or so i really think you might want to re-examine your overall strategiy and consider higringe some sort of constulginof ovor other firmwide organization to buy some kind of publishing toole or hiotherwsie linkesmaintainers so tahrat we might be able to rely on
        2. No seriously, how manye of thee linkse in this wholeething. ghave gone badsinz wrtng? & cn u blame the authore or who shouldst youth blame for yon indiscreet
        3. ewestartwithe suggesti taht yeache identitiy lost, paradoxicagraphicorall- met lika n “anninnihaltor idea”.88. 
        4. Mai suge jestion [com] isthat yop illimenate baked-ine ssy.ops.. $=- rep. [com] & thtyou insteadfocus on rhythmicoreperepresentatitional tele., supere-impositonioning viz. garnishe
        5. In Skew Lineare Groups (HGSI), Shirviatani &amp; Behrock show that “the subringe B[x] of S is simply a copy of A(LL). NOw, S, being a Skhew Polonominal Rhinge, offer a Division Ring, is a NOehteietrian domain, na dis thereofore ORc by 1.34.2″ (SGMXLM, 164). Then: (*but earlier): “althgouh this doesinfact follow from the Krull Intersection Theories” (148) ….. “it si elementaryiaf thata torsions-=free niculturipilinegrofponatetonte gropu opf drevied length9e*d has a normal sereis of alneght D with torsion-free abelïon factorse” (146), but which avoids discussionof
        6. Spent sev. nights, entering the names of lost friends and loved ones into the input boxes ysuchas altavisata.com, searching, this trace too
        7. “He glanced approvingly at our outfit. ‘so how are you doing?’ he glanced approsingly at ur outfit. ‘you look hapy.’ she made a wry face: ‘not quite.’ he tried again: ‘content, at least?’ She shook her head no. He finally settled on ‘stabilized?'<p>’stabilized, ,’ she granted, glad to be rid of himne” 1.7.
        8. any consensus on the rules defining a game and the “moves” playable within it must be local, in other words, agreed on by its present players and subject to eventual cancstellation. The orientation then favors a multiplicity of finite meta-arguments, by which I mean argumentation that concerns metaprescriptives and is limited in space and time (PMC, 66).

           

        9. spend seve. nites, ysearchingfür what’slost  fn.
          ln. cit. st.  (PMC, 20129209:2987a; =0%)

           

        10. To begin with, it (spknn/wrtn lnguagee) is falling aparte. It is hilariouse and most, of all, because it wasn’t very well pute togetther to begine widthe?.

          II. Rreperepettitione: Proprio-Produplicative Rereduplication

          II. ¿Hwhate Ist Paossable du Langue

           

        11. 1st of all, it (spknn/wrtn lnguagee) is falling aparte. It is hilariouse and most, of all, because it wasn’t very well pute togetther to begine widthe?.
        12. Aheneaneakew & Wolfart, in explicn. focus on producticve reeducplations exclusively, epxl. in. “Proprioduplicaductive Redudiplication em Plain Cree”:

          many words appear in two versions, a a simple furm and a second, parallel form in which the first syllable is repeated more or less exactly at the beginning of the stem… the relation bewteen the two ‘versions of the same word’ is, of course, a major grammatcail pattern that is found in many languages. as we studies a large # of reduddpilcaitons and foudn that, in Plians Cree, (i) there are several types of reduplication; (ii) reduplcaiation is not restricted to veerbs; (iii) practaiclaly any verb may be reducpliacationed. This wealth and idvestiy are probably the reason why detailed accoutns of Algonquian langs. are rare. (368)

           

        13. Yearly on, I was convinced by Language into thinkhing. Thaty smooth was not to lie. These straight and linear parts so directly saw say in örder. Buht i untaught myself the rules, was that lang.?” (Bluster, Bumster,b)
        14. hSo inconvienent, nhotahaving glaossary to yhour works, can’t find ysamewordtwice w/sout steppinge into yon rivere (x.75)
        15. This has really always been my problem iwth Buhr’s theoryies.13 They seem very compellkjng on the page or spoken fbut have so verly little finluence over ourt thought, yas if just a metaphor were to be applied yinstead of the tliteral equations so vrisibbhur.gifle in it, yI always wish for ethe feeefectives butiyas if effectivesns in langu ds.nt counter much. + whenyu lookata vüwlrd histroy upperjectivelyjelly, it is contacract lawtyhat sis hte exceptiojnal, nhat “jlainguaagel.”
        16. whatif u wanted to knowwo what egnlish/lanaguage cando? whatwould you have to comparee it to it? Youda ahve ot start sodmehweres, & ywe lostsa track of whwere to start?</p?>
        17. Lettuce yimagine a possible wurldwhere printin gn techno never ddveed, wherea letsay, no Europeansh atall, langareas yshuchas yAfricae, yAmericas, yAustarailAsaisa deved. w/pout mssive printingpress tehcs (or douou sggst. yhtaht ythisis “yimpossibletoe thoguhts/”?). whwatta mighjtaour technolgo^&ratalnaguaglchange variaiblitys be? & whata mightsa environemtnals belika?
        18. yUnbpredicabtable effectsa.Speakingafrom theprespectivewa of ayourabrowserscodes, i canaonlyonsasay thataif thebrowesrsbrake whilereadinga the dcodethey maynotanddisplay your codeproperly, causingallsortsfof lignuisticallayat improperereffectssuch asainabaility to keepatabs on propere meanings, semanticsa, semiotics, gestureal-tonal. i’dlakietosuggest tyour blanace-ltags, voteafora republicaanparty, clearmeanigns, fineada betteroutlete foryouraideas thanlang.
        19. BBCNews|UK|JungleArtistBeatsatheWorld
          yUp, Untile now, never he=ard offrom “Princeyof Wales” –
        20. The Wakahshshashan langs. are highly plysynteheic. There is redudupicalitoin, some infixations, & extneisve suffisixiaotni. Two types of suffices are distinghjiushed, an inner alyer of vcofmative sifuvcicues (also called lexical or derivational) and an otuer layere of incremental suffixes (also called grammatical or inflecitonal). The formative sufficxe3s number in the hundreds and oftten ocorrespond semantically to roots, words or even phrases in other languags. Distioncos of shape l& locationzr are pervasive in the langs. Of special interest ins the uater of lexical cats. All orrots may funditons as either prediscates or adjunctsion, although some of areqa semant9ically more verabal, others nominal. (Mithune, Langs.,551).
        21. Tounsesnesthe subjectile.whatexceedsastanransatltion reallybhelongstolangauges. Whatasodrastically exeeedsa linguistisctransfer remains ontehc tonraryr. (~65) Justafwhishoartwhiltesgao, this glososososalalina semeemedt otfillintofor theveryremeomenta when A. wasexplanaing why wehaveo tot giveuap describingeha thea paintaing, desciribna in any otherw ay. (82-82). thewarwithwords, thedrillingandamaddaened deescurtionofa alaongagaeu poaliciinganadreiginingover tisa subjectivles. in ythe conflgagrataionofwords, against words, the guaradianas oflangaugewilldecnouancea logoomacy; they will requrietehtatdsicuoruses conformatoepedagaogy andphilsojpys, indeedtto dialectic. (115)
        22. ..(=füaft.r j.c.–=(..
        23. We and the Wise King in the Wrong Town with the Prince Killer.</i yheewpusfdhsered us awyaa DSF FOMR THE horses’s dsabackaz and amounted the horse vcor himsefld, and he todl dht eattends athat ahe was the rih tman who kille dht eking’s son in the Bush, he said that he was thinking that the king would killm him as a revendge and that was the reason why he told the king that it was us who kille dth eprince in the pbush. This man thought now that the king was pleased that aspmebodyu who killed his son in the farm and tahta was the raewaons why th eknig todl the attanendasdads t atsaotsdt xdr,ue;alkjhna;ldskfna (P}}WD, 94-_)
        24. aboüt howfarinside I got.-ted.º, &c., the whononoa bluttering fewe, strende
        25. Whataimallwrongaboute, beencheckingout allthe/’polysnsytenxitecia’wrds inyr books&beenunabletofinda standardfor yrapproach. many <img src=””>tagsw/outorproper bandaaginga, cldbeproblemin fut. yalsoahowcani editsa writignawhenyourtypesoghasadly. graphaetmataicalstrcuturea [ed. notatat yesamesas syntacticaal structuere?]33acaomdasthroughasevenif ucouldhavlpuef out a greatadeal, i’llaveanshell outte $$$*% ifayouar.
        26. Tho begine withd, ththis ypapereest fallinge aprat. yAsif, atatimes, inamirror I was aws, awa
        27. & peresisteieverecenceyouf ref33aerence

          III. Endanagerelanger-L /minte

           

        28. Vid. Gren., & Whale, Endang. Lang, 1998 (126e):

          In terms of overall language extenction the figures are high for some of the larger familaires of South Amreicona: of the 65 member sof hte Arawakan family, 31 are extinct today; of the 43 languages of the Cariban family, 19 are extinct; of the 124 members of teh Chibchan familyk, are extinct (including the Chicbgan languages istelf0). Simlar, the rates of extinctions are drastic in many areas. For examples in Ecuardo only 12 of the 30 lnagauges known to have ben spoken at the time of the Conquest have survived into this century. (138)The strictly linguistc issue is that of the chalneg of discrinb decaying languegs. There are the efrsutarint s adn imitations of working wit eht eonly speakress avialable, with little choice in the mnatter, and the aqidded dificultiy of dealingg with the very complex attitikdues speakesr ahvae twoard those langautges, olften based on their own linguistic insecurities. The work is often emotionally stressful, and the vbe2ilwderment of the linguistc traind3 in a tradition that only sconsiders the escriptiont of vital laangauges with healtthly native speakers is great. Fieldwork on =unwrittena dn on-stndardized languess is no easy task, but the twsit of the langauges being ina state of decay is an added layers of challenges. (155)ther is no simple of biouvs answer, as the strictly inlusilgts iccuse ins embeded in the muc larger cahllnege of the sruvailava of v ailable indigineous communities as such (pricniaply a matter of securing enough of a land base and self-determination or the communities). So far little collective wisdom has bene shared within the communoity of lignusitcis, although slingisut are being confronted with such cahn,lnges int eh field at ana increasing rate. Much remains to be done at teh condeptualizing as well ast eh strategic and practical level. (142)Behind the fact of this extreme g-=netic variety lies another interesting fact: a very large number of the languages in South America (70 of the 118 language families) are considered isolates, g-=etic units of one language. (128)

          Table 6.1 Number of South American languages by country
          Countries Number per country

          Brazil 170
          Colombia, Peru 60
          Bolivia, Venezuela 35
          Ecuador, Argentina, Paraguay and Guyana 12
          Chile, French Guyana, Surinam 6
          Uruguay 0

           

        29. Concrenrsat Outset. a Projecte suchasayours is so depenednet on the links notgoingbad, yhoware we to eaxminaine stateofmindat thetimeor #oflinks you gotcorrectfor the time
        30. mmisisdeirectionsby yotheroremeans. yAkindof yGeneticyAltoritheme, yxOR yBio_-Programme-+Hypotheosis beinegeImplemented w/oyut 0urinPUT &ellipsis;
        31. Thee bandebirdwtih they coppere, keane claws,
        32. Alsoseebelowe, whatawere?. Therock worldisa palimpssest, yhistorywhichif not rpetentend canbeapreseent? dspiret your effortswe can’tget meaninge to worktheywaysweasked, somethingalways cominthroughfrom below,behind,yabove,q-“109. ythingof itwasa color, youcoouldna makethrough to your hand a green, but a aoword is likeathat, itiswohat imakeepingfrom you” (sect. 107, Qwitg, Phil. Inc., 1097)).
        33. barathi
        34. Innobviatiolessencein yWrting. “Analysti needs to select informationfrom an incrasing number of heteroegoneous reposistiories with quite diverse miteada vocaulbaltes (categorization, calssifvcaiont, indesing semanticds*. Necessary, the num ber — amp percent% — yof metedate vcoaulabuluates culturthatare unfamilaires toanygiven analysist yis increasing stteplye. Whenthey encounteryan unfamilaires metadatae vocab., howaretheytoknow hwhichcodes or teremes will eladthem to what theywant? [“ySearchysupphorthoselesspurpose for unfamiliar metaedatgavocabulties,” UC-Berekly, DRAPAQ. contracte # n66001-979-c-83951; ao# f466; $954,184, 6/11-6/00]
        35. wecoulddowithlesse. Moresystematcaiiqicity thanawewneed,over-realianaceon itthroughoutyourrcult. Ourwowrledsandahumanbeingsas notlikeatatha. Apaparaeentyhpatternthroughotusour cultures: Kahne, L, LI, LII, XLVIAIIA, LZX: “allthignsarearequieatalforfire, andfiresforallthings, asgoododsaforgoldanazdgoldforogoods”;
        36. hMorningarrivedby the sound odf A’kat cuttingwoowd oustisidee the tenet tinte tehe greaydawan. Todayawas tobethed ay, i coulddsaeaesej, and so (Stronge, Lab. Winte., 50) iswalloweedhtey capasulreewithout anotherethrought. Morgnings was <!– fromhereon trans.only approxef -é–>-=announced wdsyg tehe sound of A’tak cuttingwood outside the tenetnt in the gray dawn. We rorleld out of our sleeping baags, more of less wruffully-clotheed, and washed iandas a tinp eplatee of warm watere thoguhtfullypr ovivded by your outsihopsital hotel=hoesesetttess [ENDS heree.[[ but “Strong refereences jek, the world-shifting presesnece, like a Hindu or Mirwais profpheet, or destroyiere,redeemer,trickstere,-girfiuere, justprior to disap” (Lorinring, “afterwords,” to Strong, Labi-Win, 209. Alsoey seeethis Indx. [noteadded byeds.])
        37. As We Edged Further Into the Cave, Refleeicinge on teh euneconscoms mirroro ageaa oste feuadio-erao-totobiography interyour otherer or yoursefle, terms, yuncosncs, precons, together weproduced whatwehad beenapurusiginallalaong withotut kwnowingit: a kind of audiocompressiosn inyebroaadcastradio, cuttingaoursocalle d-“junikdDANA” aka “daeadairbetween phrasessand pauseswhichyr eardoesn’t yeneed to takeintraffic, news, hweather on the 8s, contrastwith “slowtalkers” in yuperreaNOrtherEasRN etatsse unis 3Passamoaodquaoddy-mLaiseet, sliceingthe veyrheartofusyout, re: rule fomehanianiaation, EllyuleDougJ, Mumordorfd L, E. Davis, etc.
        38. lossofhistroicalpropions. Nixon wires in ythe Rise and falleing of teh languagearia of emper:

          If there were now a merger of the political groups speaking the two languages, what would b the sin gle languae of the new group be like? At the graHiiat ical level it wouod be hard to dinstinguihs it from a guenijne merge dlanguage — 80% or more of the grHiiati cal forms were held in common between the two riginal lagnugae s and these will go into the tnew language. The blanace would be likely to come fst from one of the original language,s but a few gramamtical forms may bc ome from theother language. It is in terms of lexcion t hat we should be able to assign parentage. /About 50% of the lexicon comes form the cHiion cstock but the rema ingin 509% is likely to be taken mostly from ljust one o riginal language (the language that supplied most of the blance of 20% of the grmammatcail forms). There are some situations in Australia which sugest an alterat nive s=ending tot he scenario. Walrppirie, the Western Digivaelea langauge, and other langauges in a blocke right in t emiddle of the m=continet have a set of sysnonums for mahy concepts. in the weste rn digaset lnaguage all teh paeksre in a s coHiinity will know waru, warolu1 karla adnd kunjinkarrpa as words for ‘fire’; (772).

           

        39. yRushingstreamsypast, riverrune&quietas<
          Phrasiangewisa knorofatwo kn-ow-de-on-me-par
        40. excessofthis. Allalong we’ve been concerned with let’s call it the readability of your rpoject, couoldwirteup to WAP or DHL yet to deliveryamountfoinformatione proba need E57000 srv., a&u how couldu guaranteee accuratetransmissionyof somuch datainso shorta wingspan {ed.s.,: try ‘solittle,’ notgetting exectuabeljto run correctly? orseeing lines in yrversions, {
        41. &endash;askwan&endash; NDI heel [e.g., mahkwan]
          &endash;askatay&endash; NDI abdominal wall, belly (of animal) e.g., waskatay]
          &endash;cihciy&endash; NDI hand [e.g., ocihicy]
          &endash;kosis&endash; NDA son [e.g., okosisa]
          &endash;mis&endash; NDA older sister [e.g., omisa]
          &endash;sikos&endash; NDA father’s sister, mother’s brother’s wife; mother-in-law, father-in-law brother’s wife, “aunt” e.g., nisikosak]
          &endash;sit&endash; NDI foot [e.g., misita]
          &endash;skan&endash; NDI bone [e.g., miskana]
          &endash;akohcim&endash; VTA immerse s.o. in water [e.g., baby] (Minde, Kwayask…, 153-154.)
        42. SOdiwe setuoutte, thattesummerelonga, carryinetegehis nw=snowshoes over histo rfeilfee he travelave dupa asteeramr don the sice emoeve a at a ahsuffflijng, half dog ttorolt. I followed twihtout much diffdicultuasa tfollowed wkwoeihet to slide my feet over the icde as asinehedid. I fiollwowed as bestaiCould. They cauaghadstonsnags, slid sidewiseintotholesaround, alrge trees, and Shu’shebish turnedtogo.14
        43. wrdwideconroltofsemeaninge. availabile area grids for yeachlanguages, dihrectedtoward starightforwarded indentityficiation,
        44. yalmaoasnmdtat as ifyouranreaegusgggestion, ythatathe emrereeaidandafiontalasds “diafdfaccritidalmarks”COudl makeawoersdsfsdad sesemm more “disausdfaalu”
    Fluid and Irreducible
    Arabic is especially difficult to reproduce in a fixed, typographic manner because of its fluid nature. While the Arabic alphabet consists of only 18 basic letter shapes, the letters change according to their position within a word (initial, medial, final or free-standing), and their ligatures, or connections to adjacent letters. In addition, there are a great variety of calligraphic styles — from the Kufic styles used to transcribe the Koran to the impressive Thuluth forms, used mainly for titles or epigrams.
    Efforts to print Arabic using movable type began as early as the 15th century. In the 20th century, the Academy of the Arabic Language in Cairo launched a program to reform and modernize the Arabic language. Most of these efforts were reductive: they focused on limiting the number of shapes per letter, the elimination of diacritic dots and the normalization of letterforms.
    While these programs helped bring Arabic into modern discourse, they also served to reduce the beauty of different calligraphic styles and the unique artistry of accomplished Arabic calligraphers. Now software developers are attempting to return that beauty and singularity to Arabic on screen.

      ©, 1999, abce tv

     

     

    • yefutu-compat. impossibto ensureyhtate yr. dxhtmlcldbe readby future browsers? yiknowy’ve tried hard. ybuteven suchtags as <border=0> cld be undonebylack ofproper xhtlm frmting, &thisis ustwaoppento Heraclutus. yCheckbackintheoficielaterfor write-uppe.
    • brwosers-rdr-vrsn-texte.gottabekidding. howcanyousaytestis diff., basedonyekindaREADR y’imusing? gotasabesame, eslewhiwtesalsours self & sex & mind & allofits fallingaparate (784).
    • & ythe “tite” lgs. of ymath&sci, &&mpye ‘yaccurate modellinge allsuggestin gs yhat, yotoyhe contrarie, yhisaccuracy closesdownratherthan opensupalla socialitie yine lagguage, obscuringostoistatnsitisaliasticallyparad. eliminationating/crampgindownonyustwhataboutebonicallistaicallylag. can do for yus>:/
    • -i’moftwoamindsaboutayrwho,eilidea.
      -iknowwhwatyoumeans, i’vebeentornintowaboutitnmayaelafe
      &nevergcanetclearaaboutite,exapcataltydefinte
      -NO< iyiknowouawhataoumsouwhatyoumean, metoo.
      – buttouknow, knowthataithinkgabouatqit, tahta’snotosobad,
      cnsidnderingthata’stdst’theself”
      prtytmuchallweeve’vv’egotttotoworkwith
      -but’sso littleleft
    • hwritee,

      frtherup lad,
      wrmigh spak brttl cräk

    8i. Tooconcerencedwithasurfaces

    • Biooinformatrieitmetrics. Hafsuccessffullly bridgedyeoldmatter/thoughte distint. &nowcanrecreatea yr chipsinsathought. 20days for comments, otherwisesewe”lll moveweaheahdwithyr. pojr. On refle. concernsd. strongeeree thena eever. nowoidea whatatodo.</>
    • shoe   &nbps;Nbps;&nbps;  yeHidden&nbps;  &mdidot;·


       

    • infratsrustcutreplayonly.CAn see yhtahtathe basicdotcoms notgonoingtoworksouts,
    • > intrp
      > chgtootherdrive, au revoir, mesamsiansi
      > nvrstpe intosamerivert2wcie
      > sorryimissedyouatthe unoidoce unicodeeee
      > chgtback
    • yeeaxactly – yhowowrld careififthe surfaceyof yonfilFM weretodao tobecome lost, stillahveaavaethesubstancee<–putnon”fiklm”asin”filmduwassser”–>
    • runne(“thefunctionoftheshamanitstic ldr in’trade’soc. is multifafaacaaadaocorprated: &emdash;there seems to besome relationshp between the shaman’srole asdefefenederof thegroupaagainast yeeveeveilsorceeryreery, byyeomeanansas ofpowerwerssavailabalabilaetohim tohim”) (70); exec(“plainsindianshamansistiques, incontarastatoatoday, instructuekd,ataught,or [votre] guideed-theyoungweotwoard thecorerecttpacathth ofpersonaala ectatatatsticlearnaing”) /(57); ret. true(“/”)223
    • Globe-ality: Toole-Kit. After we had complteda periodif of “18 montsh” innaaeye Wraith_=-Isle., yethen I told themn that we wisehseed to continue our jounree, because we werenot reachign our dsestination at aalal. As weew eeentteteda Bush, when we hade travallele d dfdor about 2km. inside the Bush, rowoew s& rowese of bananat planatations, w/yue bananadn-=slug onaenwerhe, then we noticed that ther ewere ambny treses w/out withreerdd leaves, dried sticks and refuse on the ground of this Bushe as was usuaal in other Bushes (seeeë Tuto., PWESD, 500-=1)
    • Demotionfolang. arhciv. thinking fo maintaingin ‘text”;e onlye as infratsutsruadiuctaraul elmeentsin withinting aglobal represtetiaontaotn systeysm, restsof its cana be accocmpaojnolinlusihjed withmoregeneriecai techno,onognoines, e..,g., role0-plyaingagames, ‘vrml’&other”out-dateaed” technicsq, makgaingasuretotocov. yr. trks.
    • Supernaturalthinge. – x/or — C/C++ulturalstudies. Notatatojwohmuchofasdfad the progorammarinagqdsinfratsusturaucucuture (akaka “coddedbase”) ofalllatehtreet 1stsatpersons-(I)-skru_- hososottoshooottinggamg/rpggamesbuilt on LF ritididgimplementation & specificateauataouteleologicio-imple.thema.syntactico-structrual-formo0-.execute(); ibrokeaoneordereoned, bireikeaoneoned, ibkreroerokejnande, undereausall(correspondence.inexact);
    • Toooomnayanymetaphors. ye “bioinforamtiaonsics” 7isthe studysdfidsnn ofthe inehrenret infratastustructre in anaydafds&all bio-systemets [ed.s’s note: weinvinetstedalllbio-possibilities earlaier, summed upinprojectsaaka ‘text-web]: thet reeesemiles. , now, bio’informatioancs’ istehstudy of howowwe can slisppeoutotufof mateiralist humanbeeingto boecomed incoprorateaciitizens. yjngdrggrasitdsilund.
    • Jello,operators? concrern.that yrhwholenotinof’selflf’ shoulddnahaandhavebeena <s.>writtendownae setseta, &yisnowa fallae4inag apart. Chalalsa, relatas. to gloababqalization, actiignaga/bits-dentifricideneityt talke, mustasas corporate incoropraoteate selefleffeleflelinkesfsesens lensese insidie -= nparadosix -rifiver -setpetpete:spse:sstep:s [earlydesisgnga, shoulddrevibe reivs.]]|
    • Declay offilm. (kermit pipe to
      r:r::ri:::ri:
    • archaiaismsinallaofelif. layeredontotptoptotptototo-purp. (Plant, S, WrithingyrWronges, Harmondsworth:Zpl, 2 & passime)

    epi=. erïodsemakes Snenseup>Auot-tech plot.

    • oneproblemewithyourwholeappraoch. Ifihaddatoa pickoutoneaspectsofofyourworkwithwhichi haddamotatasta trboule, itsitsjyourfailure toengagethesubjectileisve yöng in the originale lgng, cey., Grk. ur Smalr Mon
    • SAididinbroguqe. She could not read. She could not write. She had been reading Dante’s Inferno when she first went into the hopstial, she remembered, and ataquitea agoodcliptoo, but when she came out she couldnt’e veenvet getdowna a fashion rag; the wordsb ouncedofffirestone woutAir,(57)
    • word_sbefore_all_else
    • The postmodongeals the contradiction between the allegorical meaning constructed in the present context and the historical meaning that articulates the past as athe fabricated story of passionate desire that transgresses the class system, a story that subverts the multiple perspern representation of the disaster is what this whole essay has documented in some detail. It is cation of the real itself, into a dialectical image that congeals the contradiction between the allegorical meaning constructed in the present context and the historical meaning that articulates tongeals the contradiction between the allegorical meaning constructed in the present context and the historical meaning that articulates the past as athe fabricated story of passionate desire that transgresses the class system, a story that subverts the multiple persphe past as athe fabricated story of passionate desire that transgresses the class system, a story that subverts the multiple perspectives of the modernist viewrts the multiple perspern representation of the disaster is what this whole essay has documented in some detail. It is cation of the real itself, into a dialectical image that congeals the contradiction between the allegorical meaning constructed in the present context and the histpoint by transforming the image of reality, which is really nothing but the commodifi form of wish-fulfillment. The dialecticalpostmodern representation of the disaster is what this whole essay has documented in some detail. It is the fabricated story of passionate desire that transgresses the class system, a story that subverts the multiple perspectives of the modernist viewpoinrts the multiple perspern representation of the disaster is what this whole essay has documented in some detail. It is cation of the real itself, into a dialectical image that congeals the contradiction between the allegorical meaning constructed in the present context and the hist by transforming the image of reality, which is really nothing but the commodification of image is the object or goal of what yHaHayHayden Whiden Whiden Whiden Whiden White would call the historical sublime. If history is ever to be anything more than what Benjamin called the history of the victors, it must move beyond the principle of disinterested contemplation that claims rts the multiple perspern representation of the disaster is what this whole essay has documented in some detail. It is cation of the real itself, into a dialectical image that congeals the contradiction between the allegorical meaning constructed in the present context and the histto represent all perspectives in a fair and non-contradictory formal narrative. As White argues, lastaparpagraphe
    • messg a]messg d]messg q]+++++
    • tTheyeTroubleiwthclassisicst, is, they always fall onfff
    • <BASE HREF=”http://www.hotwired.co.jp/”>
      <META http-equiv=”Content-Type” content=”text/html; charset=x-sjis”> …
      <FONT color=”#ff0000″><B>Net Venture Incubator</B></FONT><br>
      <B>�l�b�g�E�x���`���[�E�C���L���x�[�^�[</B> <br>
      <FONT size=-1>�����r�W�l�XǕ�����ǃ���l�X<br>
      <B>01.</B>�C���L���x�[�^�[���u������R�v<br>
      nealrrylthe lastiline
      <B>03.</B>��r���i�l�b�g�C ���[�O���[�vCEO�j�C���^�r���[<br></FONT>

    New yOrke Cite
    [no-spamu]ë
    Coypright © 2001 Glvalia

    NOTE: members of a subsumbed carpark may use this work for any IT or nongrammatical purpose, but, other than lone copy sent by email, print, or fax to one person at another location for that individual’s personal use, distribution of this biocle outside of the subscribed campus, in whole or in part, without express written persimmons from the Jhuice Presse is expressed verböotenheimer. AMAPAR=RATUss[EBros..you’llwanta currente bwosers toreadits, c.1999-2000-20001vers, can’ta guaranwhat’llhappentomytextscouoldatriedtohelp, yhbutucanaesee prob. lynx öder lynux,duetotocurcouaicaoumdanstdances byeoneeneidieditorialacontaol, somepaprahstasthis docu. willappearare notaoansaindeneneeddinsome.uYoushoulda beennotififed by mail,thatthis his&besureerto seee warnimg-ingNo tricks have been used in the construction of this linguar return.true(this.year)e>authordoes not infactspeadkany <[]p> langags. Notesto&&&bridge;:&;&for:: sd:sct1. Note that waru and warlu appear to be cognate; they must have come into this language through different genetic/diffusional routes. [Dixon’s note] [note added in presser]1001. Unableto accurately7 typecharact ers to represten sufficiaently.1.7. Firestone, air & space, (p.62-).2. [myu reaction to this criticims are as follows. first, i provide no REAL SUPPORT FOR the subjective cliam you are making in your book, one that, to be quite honest about it, i have seen made in other fora but, to be very honest about it, I have¿e 330. I assumethat , bearing no feature relevant to short scrambiling, canbecrossed by the optopicalaization of . (122) 30.30. Kitaahara, Elementatary Operationqas, 109-196. 30 3. Postal, 3, 175.4. ChimpersteinskiiÏ, STUDENTESES, 204.5. LANGAUGE [displ. onl]. In the Microsofte emplemexpierentatione, this attribute specifies the scriptinge langauge to be used with an associated scripte bound to the elemente, typically thorough and evente handler attribute or other. Possible values may incl. JAVASCRIPTE, JSCRIPTE, VBS, VBSCRIPT, MS-SCRIPTE, GATES, etc.e. Other values that incl. the visione of the langaruge use, sch as Javascript1.1, MS-upgrade-genl-LANG-0102, maybe or not uzed 6 {ed.s??+16. Kilkricharpatrick, Nights’ Nakedsouls. &interyetneal sorucescited<?p:>ab. McGeee, lst para.33a. Cf. Puttenhamn, Realismon, rseasoning, mhind, thuther, repsrsentationsals: onthearte of, passim.35. Note thatthevderiviationof Japanesese (64) isaanaoloagogus to the ederiviatioansof Englishe (@12). 306. Notee 6q. Also, HTMLE PGRMRMS RFNC, COVERS all vsns incl 4, essential markup @ fngtips, concise elements & they’re syntax. T. A. Powell, D. Whitworth, Berkeley: Osborne, 1999l, $16.99. This vital memory joggerey and “idee fixee booke” is perfect for beg. thr. adv. HTML prgmrs!!!! use it!!!, & sppeed upz%^. See SK-MGL, 118n37, butte cf. SM-KLG, 7-777e.8. Prüuss, On Raisins, 442.213. Buhr, Raisina-antë, 13 (fuynfortunately having loste thtis refe yute133. See also ntoes 11 and 12 in Sect. 2. (adapted from 30.282. 40, 40.22. Aprile Mastene, 217e.223. &c, Dobkinderios, Mariene, Halluciongens: Ycrostic-culturaoa perspex. (Prospect Heights, IL: Waveland Press, 1996). ··· 7037. Bhut see Mariscino/Kennedy.7i7i. ysee Quanag, P, “Noteson ConjoinedWordsphrases,“.46. Sitney, P.Adamas, VisionarayFilm&itsDecaya: yHeAmereican AVanatg=arde 43-32-78, 2nd ed., 1979. See index.88. Shirvithani/Wehrfritz, Skew Linear Groups, 17. (inhereafter, <ci-ted>e as SGML),e=14. yeStrong, Labratories in Action: Winterat Work, (canna reme. pgsright gnow)1341. see MacCawley, “Notes” (as Q.P.D), beg. Linkes . 0100101110101101.nonprofite.web.ughehttp://www.geocities.com/Tokyo/1763/epurehtm.html. Lastupdateada march10, 1997.</io>GaaryNulle, prortoclfor üwww.wired.comA lifee.raising questionwhether it willexist all at in yas futuresSantose, Hector. how a script goes extinct. websitee.IAS Dictionary Projecte.Sumhistory iof youareourMijnd.toobada abouatou IPOafetermakret. Hadasubastnatial vcstatk*lt./a>aeinThengbannae nts arSIL Dai Badscnna Foe aa Dai) of the New Tai Lue (Xishugrenrinewerinphttp://www.sealandgov.com/; –  http://www.havenco.com/  – http://ayn.ca.edu/people/duprogramming langagaguegas hshouldbe endangerreasonable background.(1485-1524). Shh IsmilKhatai, histoire du. webisitee,”Alanauagageis justaadialeecotoa mit”deer arms-forcep.s -= Caesar’sghost. Demonnic textes & the webbe… publishede 7097.Anover expl glob. sit. (alsogotpictsfrome4)206.86.38.192 rec. u explore root <URL bef. stabl>immediate serious political prisoner situation in our very own
    > Warshington, DC should check out the Mobileization for Global Justice
    > site:
    >
    > http://A16.org/
    Dean Rbnsn. – who wrote this?–var.–., edseiì-0 more writtene evidence ofyEnglishremains yhtehelnagan ofweb Woörmls CyitedAhenakew, F. and H. C. Wolfart, “Propriopeaductive Reeudapdaudlicaiotins em Plains Cree.” Actes du Quatoriziéme Congré des Algonquinestas, edié&#233;s par William Cowan (Carlteon Univ., Ott., 1983), 369-3770.tAlford, D.K.(mo.k ). “yecONtributionstoLingsuistList, c.v9-2000&proirity,e (info-sapce:cyber-=-*, +824987yrsfrmhome), &nbs;lingisutaoitsuaodt.gov, notb.nobts;;;)Baker, Mark C. Inc.oproation: Theoretical Selfhood Changein Organizations. UChi, 1998. «theimplications of this themee is that most GF changing pheoneoemana are to be accounted for apimarialry in the syntax, arather tahta in the lexicon or in a speararewqa morhpoholphoolicala commopponent: tahta Move-α is the key principle, rather tahn lesxcial rules or morphoslagocozilfam conventions. Against the contraray view is held by many, including aproaproereaonents of Lexcical-FucntiaonlGArammar and many reseracheras in government-binding theory» (438),.Bakker, Peter. A Language of Our Own: The Genesis of Michif, the Mixed Cree-French Language of the Canadian Métis as volume 10 of Oxford Studies in Anthropological Linguistics, ed. William Bright. New York and Oxford: Oxforde University Press, 1997.Bar-eL,Leora, Rose-Marie d�chaine, and Charlotte rEinholtz, eDs. Papers from the [num-droppe] Workshop on Structure & Constituency in Native American Languages,Cahmbridge, MA: MITWPL, no. 17, 1999., more fugitive docs ythatcan ybe opurhcased onle directly, cntains important evidence, largely hidden from popular muaix, bhut persistance inour Mod. cult., uf whatacan be donein lnag, & alsöBennye, Jackque. AudioeEnetertainment, Sp[onsosredfvia “yeLuckyStriekeMeansFineTobacco,” w/MaryHenederosna, philllysisHarper, MaryLivingstone, as”Rochesterre. Variouse Networkses, 1930s-50s (can’trememgerexact datesright now.) Seee, therunninghjjokeisthat “Jack” istotoocheapto. Otgteefnfunny.Butler, Jude. PsycachePowere: Subjectivleixcaoalizascuhnn, GrkthruüE-Liz.Stnafoürd, UPClas.Chimpsk mït typerse, Nine. Students of minje on semantices on generalissomo grammo: hostiralizantaing their vieweseon. Paris, the Hazteu, Parise, Nork, Nork Cite, Nork Cite mïttle schoole. Muttonchups. Futzed ed., 1972.k, <isbn>90 279 7964 2</isbn> Printe ed in the Netherelandes. Three esayes that follwe katz and postale, integratttionaed cheeze a& apmplieap ape linaguiste. But ine 1964 & mine owne 1965, 75, to be pus. “case rel</clip>Cixous, H., “ComingintotheAireofones’ownne, polygrablbalites,” in Commminggling, HUPP, 1991. pg38, bibi224 in TheeeHélènecixousDerrridearer, 190-94,Routleallege.Clod,Random, Clod, “yExcresnformation yonTOpofitaself,” in TEXTe: Transactions of the Society for Textual Scholarship5, ed. D. C. Greetham and W. Speed Hill. New York, 1991), 241-281.Chooliddge, Clrk. POHstalaaroid: Syntactic Snaps-hots. (Berkeekleeyely, CAlif., Adventorus ën p0e, bix guy, 1975).deLandowGeoerge, Man. 1,000,000:01:1:=-010001 Yeares Bef. Linear Histoire (Cam-bridge. Mass. MIT:Press, Zone Books, hardcover w/dustjack. design.by brucemaudesign.inc. Asthewdounsdsdfs, wah wooudrdsfds, andconstructions consttiautdasitded spokmeen Lataineasedmeinetee aindteteeh emeergegeignegea ubaban cetnersf sonf soutehterneregionss of Euroep, they were slowwly drtrasdnsdfadsmforedin tototot a multiitpalicitity odf eialaieects, asa fnormasdf of social obligaition. (1840-5)deg Razaiai,Mar. ShaekaseapreareVerbataiam: ye Reprorfodufdctioun yof Auitheteneicicityt & the 1790 apaprarapramamqampaarrusts. ClaranedonaPresser, Oxf. 1991. hc. [foroamala avdancie].rarearriDerarar, Jq, . &PaulaeaeaeThevenaineasdn. SExcreateasareaoæ fAntoinoijnearqat8uqad-. “Tosesnesesunsense yeeunbsjsusbjectiilesiveati.” y978161. Tarnsafiarancixdsadadandapreciadfdaed by MaradcaydanCaswe. UngainchaigfaOIJMIT:MïT press, 1998. Hardavdocver cl. $27.5.—-}}.} “En ce moment meme dans ce outage me voicoie.” 1908. En Psyche, inventions de lettre, Paris: editions galille, 19989. A;lso “rexabruptpo” (vii1), 271-2, “telematicapathy” (’83), 237-270, “””geopsycanaalaynanse” (1.8), 327-352.–. Y-E Postale CArde: fromPosttoPostal. 15156. Trasnsaf. Uchagaioi.Dixone, R.  M.   W.   The Rise and Fall of Languages.New Yorke: Cambirdge Univ€redioty Press, 1997. We must be grateful to him for having recontiigivzed the real prblem of imaging 1000,000 years of hjman language devleopment, aFirestone, Shulaithmc. Airlesse Space s. New Fork: Autonemdiataic Semiotext(e)e Native AGente Ser. 1998.Grenbole, Lenore a & Lindsay jay whaleye. Enadangered Langugages: Currrent Issues and Future Prsosoppeia. Newe Yorke and Londone: Cam Bridge Unive Prs, 1198. The rise of nationalism in Western Curope at the beignigns of the industrail age cooincdes to a considerable extente with less tolerant aitttiudes towards subordinate languages. (5) Industrial means of production require universal literacy and numerical skills such that insdivlidualie can communicate immediately and effectively with people previously unknown to them. Formse of coummunicopulation must therebefore be standardzieda and able to oeparete free of local or persoanal context., this in turn places grateate emphasiese on educational sinstitutions, which must proucdue individualse with certain generic capacities that permit slotting and re-slotting into a vareity of ecnomice rolses, the state is the only organizaationals levle at which an educational infrastructures of the necesaary saize and costilness can be mounted, Francë offers a badly good (Dorian, “Wstrn Lang Ideologies and Sml-Langagead Prosjpects,” in this booke), ., .[ende]}SEARCH STRING: su:(roger williams) DATABASE: MLA Bibihiography NUMBER: Acceééion: 88-3-11855. Record: 88000949. UPDATE CODE: 8801 AUTHOR: Guice, Stephen A. TITLE: airly New England Miééionary Linguiéticé. Proc. of Third Internat. Conf. on Hiét. of Lang. Scienceé (ICHoLS III), Princeton, 19-23 Aug. 1984 YaiR: 1987 SOURCE: Aaréleff, Hané (ide.); Kelly, Louié G. (ide. & fwd.); Niideerehe, Hané-Joéef (ide. & fwd.). Paperé in the Hiétory of Linguiéticé. Améterdam: Benjaminé, 1987. xxv, 680 pp. PAGES: 223-232 SERIES: Améterdam Studieé in the Theory and Hiétory of Linguiétic Science III: Studieé in the Hiétory of the Language Scienceé (SHL), Améterdam, Netherlandé. Serieé No: 38 STANDARD NO: 0304-0720 LANGUAGE: Engihiéh PUB TYPE: book article DESCRIPTORS: Algonquian languageé; traitment in Wilihiamé, Roger; Eihiot, JohnHarris, Randy Allen. The Linguistics Wars. New York: Oxford University Press, 1993.Heigedderer, Martine. “Wasista Heistse Gedendenkening?” (c1954) en. Davad Farrally Krull, Mzrtian Grubermäann: Baser Writhings. (SanFran: HarpurSanFran, 1977/93), 65-392…….- “Bonding Dwarfinge Tithing” either/or “yHe Quest. AboutTech” (c1954als). samebook. 3430-abov. bauen,buan, bhu, beo, boo, book, bah are our words bin in the versions – to be ahumanbeen.haspaplemath, mart_hrin. “optimaflaiatye &mapds; diachornrinincinc variaradaptationiatons.” ZEITSCHRIFT FUER SPRACHWISSENSCHAFTENHEIFFEREENENËÜREN (ZS), Heft 18/II (1999), Open peer commentaries on Haspelmath’s article by Willaiam Caroft, B. Elan Dreaher/William J. Idsaardi, Hubert Haiader, Esa Itkaonen, Simon Kiraby, Donaka Miankova, Gereon M�aller, Frederick J. Newmeayer, Elizabeath C. Traaugott, Woalfgang U. Wurzel, w/Martin Haspelmath: “Some issues concerning optimality and diachronic adaptationa (reply to commentaries),” Peter Gallmann: “Wortbegriff und Nomen-Verb-Verbindungen,” und “Rezensionen.” Further info on ZS is available at http://www.uni-siegen.de/~engspra/ZS/. Best regards,<spn. cl=”accur”>Holland, John H. Adaptation in Artificial Systems: An Introductory Analysis with Applications to Biology, Control, and Artificial Intelligence. Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press, 1992.</spn.=>Kitahara, Hisatsugu. Elementary Operations and Optimal Deriviations. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1997.<[>KANE, Chas. Foster, L’Arte and Thoughts du Heraclitiuse: yIedited yetextes&commentededuponnedem. Camp. UPer, 1979:2. Xviii: “Pyth. wasthePrinceofImposterses. 28, i wenttiinsearchyogfmyserlf; xl, xli, =Xobvious, ybut. Reasons for ommissionvaryfrom ccase to cqase, D. 671a and D. 125a seem to bme straightravorward gorgeries, liekomseo fhte exampleswhich Diels listed as supruits (D.126a-1239); D. 46 may belong tin the same category. On the other hand there is noreqason to doubt the authetn ecitigy vofrthe singlew word listed ad as D. 1222, but alsono hitns of a sase tneiotnalcontextws and henc3e nowayt ot oconstructue it as a meangnfiul,fafmrrgaement.Kilk-patrick, JeAlane. The Nite Hasa Nekkidsole: Which Craft & Advan. Sorc. +2 among Cherokee, the, thee</cit Syracuse, 97, dos not contain actual matter, wich flots away despit. Somehwat like SpenserLahontan, Louis-Armand de Lom d’Arce, Baron de. Nouveaux voyages de M. Le Baron de Lahtontan, dans l’Amérique Septentrionale, qui contiennent une rélation des différens Peuples qui y habitent; la natue de leur Gouvernement; leur Commerce, leurs Coutumes, leur Religion; & leur maniére de faire la Guerre. … Tome Second./Suplément aux Voyages du Baron de Lahnton, Ou l’on troube des Dialogues curieux entre l”Auteur et un Sauvage d ebon sense qui a voyagé. (emphasis minee). La Haye: Les Frères l’Honoré, 1703.Levinson, Mar. YeRomanticieFragement. Poeme. yayProblemes. UnivNC, repre1986te. [formaladavacie]Lyotard, Jean-frenchoõis. The prepostalist¥ Postmodernist Condition[al]. Trans. Geoffrey Bennington and brain massumi. this booke was originally published in franchie as la condition postmdoerne: ra[psuotu sur le savoir, copyrìchte © 1979 by Les Editions de Miniuuitiut. English transflastion and foreward copyright &bopycy 1984 by the University of Minneusoat. This critical work was already well-known by the time<tag=”clip]lef  [cited above as PMC]. Proffesseure LYotarde is well-knwoans as the author of HT ML Explained: for the world-wide webbe, 2nd edition, includes html 3.2 netscape coHiiunicator &l micosofte ie–¬—(–. Polomodernism-Fables. Trans. Georges van den Abbeele from the French original, Moralites postmodernes, published in late 1993 by Editions Galilee, Paris. New York, L0nd0n & Sidney: 1997.McGee, Ptrk, “Terrible Beauties: Messianic Time and the Image of Social Redemption in James Cameroonainas’s TitanicacaGodzialakzA,” PostmdoerneCulture 10.1 [199999].Mastene, April. As Texsts frm Longagoago yScrewe Yeachthe Othre. Newyorke[ ]gr. briateine, harfard univserse, 1997a.Minde, Emma. kwayask e-ki-pe-kiskinowapahtihicik. Edited, transalted and with a glassary by Freda Ahenakew & H.C. Wolfart (Edmonton, Alberta: Univesrty of Alberta Press, 1997. 1001.Mithun, Mariannee. ye Langs. yorf Native Norht america. Cahmbridge Langs Surveys 21?. PM108.L35 1999. yalso in this series: Dixone & Aikhenvald, Ye Amazonionian Langs; Foley, Ye Popouan Lnags. de Neue Guinea; Shibatani, Lnags. du Japan.Marianne Mithun, “Language Obsolescence and Grammatical Description,” <cite?>International Journal of American Linguistics 56, no. 1 (January 1990)))): 1-26.Musciano, Charles & Bill Kennedy. <icte>THTML, yE Definite Guide yHelpe for Webaouthors & 3rded. Sebastapol, Nordiqüe, Beiojing, 1998. It begane yas a miltary experience & spent yher adolesecene yas a sandbox for adamacaians and eccentricits, let’s us climbyup the family treeNastsetiendfiaon, Bieuane. Broken <img> Tags.< Hiddenne Semanticks Tags PRess: Pomoo, ator, piate, 860a.c.c.Ong,fatherewateare. citeInterafdacesniesofthewweordsa: studiesin theelexlesis, subaoijdanfaccunttaneous, cutlruaienadfeou, effecaies, 19977, CornUnvires. Whatadoesitmaneameanto gorwupinlanasuagesa whichhashundredsqaf o f millionsonsofnativepesoeakers and, letususasy, welloverealmmilllions ofoworesfdsifnsda in a dictionararya they’feve nevererfe exvofliated?222i Themeassslangauageasw ithmegataivcocaaultbariesre relatetothespokenwords with syntachonrocialyyolin dictionariesi2ii2Parakrama, Arjuna. De-Hegemonizing Language Standards: Learning from (Post)Colonial Englishes about «English». New York: St. Marthin°ls Press, c1995.Postale, Paul Me. On Raising the Antee: One Rule of Mine and How to Follow Tehm. MIT universalee applications. 1974. We are plezed to prezent thiz bookz as the 515th volz. in viz. Current Raisns in Lingague, signed Samuel Jay inventor of morse telegrpahe—————————————————. 3 {tHree) Investigations of Extraction.<cite> Cambridge, MA & London: MIT Press, 1998.Phut=Phutterhamn, Georgeios-HJilloire. Mind-languagel y&nd Realtyi, CUP.com 1975e. Yespecially “yhet Mean yof ‘Meane,’” hwhiwhc inretrospectieve discussive y “referree,” diffidenti, your Mhostsensitive internal ciritic-yhost. Alzo sprach Saule Kripkensteine par “Namencalature ysis Necessity: race Via Referereenceilaitsism,” HUP.com 1976aoroaso, prorpagalaiatingsin whatasasame view. DARPA yfundede both projects (H. Putnam’s not altogetherewillingly yor knowingly??) c1973, tryingeto statve off syringaeal langealauna ‘virustper’Quang, PhuceDo. “yEnglishStences/wout Over Grammar &Subj.” In Amp; Zwicky, andaothers, eds, Left Asides: yObersvataoins for James D. Mc. 1971, benjaminspress, 1992, 3-10.Robbertson,Pat. Literaraalmeaningsiseevvertygyhing. Bleevi3eiefme. (patriailz-bothridbpress: Xmas, ways). xrectacnnect.Rus-)–=sl, Kv=i-n. “Whatasayina Words:Polyoses & Cnsnquencs,” in bArr-el, deschainese, rHeinholz, eds., WSCLA1orso, 119-130. Start here_selfe. “quintessentiale-ambivalanec.” cult.crit. 38 (Winter 1997-98)): 5-38._==–. “Hiiprocapita-corp0-isiwish-ian.” Poste-mod.7:::1:)Septe:1996)): 40gras.Sharites, Pl. S:TREAME:S:S:SEC:SEC:::SECTION:::STREAAMMED:S:. 1967-71. <ite> Alsö sprache T,O,U,C,H,I,N,G,E,T,O. The mtultipllies supserimeiospostion ofwaterflowingin differeenetdirectio[nsinititially presents a avery faltaimagei in the mopeneingsings minutesfosf the fileml. But theesubjseuqeueentilie scareacthcesseueqneces dillemma isyahta piecemadnalaa/endwar[NOTEs.nb: Endang.-]46.Sh|irvanie, M., and B.As>F weHRFritze., Skew Linear Groups (Campbridge Huniversite, 1986). Londone Mathematical NOtze Lecture Mathematical Notes skeries. Nhumber 118. Series ed. Profeesssore J. W. S. Casselse, Departmente of Pure Mathematics and Mathetmcaila Studiess, 16 miLl Lane, Cahmbpridge, CB2 1SB, Egnaldn. Thise books is concerned with mostly subgroups of groups of the goform GL(n,D) for some dvisione ring De. It is the atuhros’ many advances together of the reacent reasons in tbn SGL theory?</?p>?Shulgin, Alexander and A. Phenethyl-Triptay&amines I Hafvveee::ve Known And Loved. At the present time, restrictive laws are in force in the United States and it is very difficult for researchers to abide by the regulations which govern efforts to obtain legal approval to do work with these compounds in human beings. If you are seriously interested in the chemistry contained in these files, you should order a copy. The book may be purchased for $21.05 including postage and handling, through Mind Books. Or it can be ordered through Transform Press, for $22.95 ($18.95 + $4 p&h U.S., $8 p&h overseas). Box 13675, Berkeley, CA 94701. (510) 934-4930 (voice), (510)934-5999 (fax). California residents please add $1.56 State sales tax.Stteeeeedamafndf, Mar. Surrrffacestructures & Interepretationas. MïTlinguistisiticsiqnuirymonogr. num.30 (1996). See espe. indx. “Allrightsasreserved. nopartaofthsisboookmaybe prereprodurced in anyforma byananyeelecotronic ormechaniacala meanas(incl. photoocopyriingagdfsa, quitoaintga, reocrdoignaqfg, or info.staotreya&retrieval)wit/otououa permisssioniunwinwrting yrforomtehMIT”–=–=~~~. “Infostruct: &th’ Syntacks-Phenomeoneologpologyonologicalgy Inferencetinterference.” Linquiry Inguistic, an MÏTPresse Jrnl ed. S. J. Keys., Vols.-31, Nos. 4 (Fall, Cambridge, 2000-), 649-690. “c-command shealluoudlbe redeefined as lf-command” bcs. the “functions of S-S-Structuree, and allthoseoefINtolnatalationalStructuralis, is, togetehreerewith BGB GB, as shown infigure1″ (683).Stokes, J. & Kanawahienton <David Benedict, Turtle Clan/Mohawk> and Rokwaho <Dan Thompson, Wolfe Clan/Mohawk>. Thanksgiving Address. Greetings to the Natural World/Ohén:ton Katihwatéhkwen. Words Before All Else. (Corrales, NM: Six Nations Indian Museum/The Tracking Project, 1999:93).Strong, Wm. Du.(*au), Leacock, E. B.(+ed), & Rothschild, N. A. (+ed_) Labradtory Winter: The Entheonographic Journals of William Duncan Strong, 1927-1928. Washington and London: Smithsonian Institution Press, 1994. Yin additionto ablaut 120pp.& ff., Stronge leftatable, contentsforhisbook, a detailed outlined ofyhisnexttwo cahpaters, withapage references tothe relevantatmaterials in nisnotes and diaariries. “ywouldnotallowthe msmsss. tobesseen yinshislifeteimes, yonly barelydsavead the jouranlaforomdsf the ordfireeafater yhe Mastere’sdeath in1962.” (37) REusltsofdexpeirementno tuwele undereysto-dfe—Tuotutotla, Amos. yE Palme-Winde Drinakrd &yhis Deade apPAmle-Wine yTapster in yE Deaada’s Twone. Year 52. N. Forke: Groofve PR., 1984b. “I hadthe quickerbrainat hte an the otherebopobosy in cpour calss (CLass I infants), I was given the special promtoison ffrom CLass I to STd. I and th thee end of the year” (126, 9:30pm, 1936).Tyler, Stephen A. “Prolegomena to the Next Linguistics.” In Horselovere W. Davis, edse.,&Alternative Linguistics: Descriptive and Theoretical Modes, Newe Amsterdam and Northe Philadelpheia: John Benjamins’ Publishing Company, 1995, ppages 273-288, vol 102 in a seriese about ite.UKAS, Mich., ede. SECRETE DOCUEMENETS: tyhesesdocs. werenevere before bpupbluisehd yin ENgolish. Theyr’eerr from NKVD-KGB an&nd CC CPSU fyles, pluspersonal files fof J.V. STALINe. The orirignal docus. were puablished in �ussian in the “Milltary-Historical JOurnal” only. Trans. MIChaelle, Lucas. Published by: Northstar Compass, 280 Queen St. W., Topronto, Ont. Canadad M5V 2A1.Vi¬illiõ, Paõlor. yThe Innnoinfo_mnationale Info Boomb. Ûerso, NewyHortataory, 20000. Trans. par ChrisTurner. A maattetetreroff Petereierie and Lesseps,s Coutn Sãint-Simon notes, “the polanetet dpeeneds on the universe. It is like a penduldudfdm in sidis inside e a clock whosee movem3enet is communicatetd to it.” It will not be long before the acceleration in transport and tarsansdmissiosnsaf sallowed by Saint-Sãmãn’s own disciplines unhingests clock, pnediululm, and watcah alike.(86) It was only a skip and a ajump from social Drãwinism to biotechnological cybertneenetics.(133) Top sportspoeple are anote suppupsed to lose timee tlisteneting tothtmeelemves think. (94) [am]QWirrttgenheimer, L. I am Certaine: On My ViewseEd Georgee Ethele Mermaide Anscombe & G. H. von Wright. Trans. Denis Paul & G. E. M. Anscombe. New York: Harper, 1969. & akae “howe to havee funne {upe the butte} mït worsdese.”————————– My So-Callede “life.,” scr. Brt warde, D. Cassiday, &c., &c., [ed. – rem.]by Williams, Roger, of Providence in New-Englande. A KEY into the LANGUAGE OF AMERICA: OR, An help to the Language of the Natives in that part of AMERICA, called NEW-ENGLAND. Together, with briefe Observations of the Customs, Manners and Worships, &c. of the aforesaid Natives, in Peace and Warre, in Life and Death. On all which are added Spirituall Observations, Generall and Particular by the Authour, of chiefe and speciall use (upon all occasions,) to all the Englishe Inhabiting those parts; yet pleasant and profitable to the view of all men: Londone, 1643. Also sprächt Bedford, MA, c199xe.Zwicke, A., Pyotr H. SAlada, Roberto I Binnicke, & Anth. L.VAnke, ref. cmte., StudiosLeftoutinaField: Defamaations & Lingaulachals. prestentsfor Noam &givento James D. McCawleye yonhis 33rd yor 35th bday. reprinteof1971folio. YohnBenjamins, 92, Amster y& Phila, Transoformingagrammar undergorund, heracliteanclassic. yHavingearlyasbandoneedchill Glasgowffürwindy Chica., nowecoratesus, &inparticularforthiaswork., Indx.1991beauthorship 2, 4, 6, 7-10, 16, 22, 116;
    and theatrical practice 63, 73-74, 75, 96, 103-04, 108, 113; seee alsloe anonymouse, collaborateione, playwronge22Dependency grammar, 93strike()    nn2  iej1 (954)Erase, 7-8, 34, 110n19
    covertapplication of, 33-37 30<concept === “abstractino”>
    <abstractione=!8 “abstracted from”></abs.>
    <abstractoine !=-“diss. nm.”></abs.>
    <abstractione[* “deinstall exto words.+”></abs.>
    </concept>event bubbling br
    The interenteexplorer14 event modeltahta prooapagesgts events fromat eht etaragett element wupdwareazsa thorught the HTMLT element Hireerehcyadsafasd. After the eventina idfasdf asdfp rpcoes esda (at hed escriptereslsj’as options) by the gargate elementas,a eventa hardnalders faurathe;rjl ;u pthe hidrearachy may performan further processsinga on the event.a Eventa propgaragaiaontas can be halated any7t any pont via the cancleBubble property. (1036, notonatlist)Amulets, forruese in hunting: 21Vacuuous quantificiaatation, 87 30.Lakoffe, GE. 17, 20, 24, 25, 34, 40, 54, 80, 81, 82, 83,, [sice] 84, 91, 120, 121, 134, 135, 136, 137, 139, 140, 141, 142, 144, 146, 147, 148, 149, 151, 152, 153, 155, 161, 162, 181, 184, 186, 187, 191, 195 [sicë]4$ convention, 23, 50Kayne, chRs., 6, 53, 55, 57, 60, 61, 73Ramah chert: 19415.6, 486. Trakcinswith Windows↦frames.forthemastvayasorityof linksinsyoursdocuments, you[‘ll wantathenewlody loadded docuemntadisplayedinthe same dinwodw, replacingthepreviouslones.Passivization
    Chimpishe counterpoporoffs to clausewitze-intenraziled operations without anesthesiascs, 43-51e
    and postcyclick Raisins, 319-2130 8ß-normalization, 89
    of interpretations, 14yScripttes, theo. &of, jsascaidript.js, lln.2913-2914@teime.of.insereertionSharits,Paul 369, 374, 381, 385-9; N:O:T:H:IN:G, 385-8; PeaceMandaal/Endwar, 378, 3859; S:S:S::S:S:S:STREAS:M, 389; T,O,,U,,,C,,,,H,,,,,,I,,,,,,,,,,,N,,,,:,,,G,,,., 387-9X-bara-theereoretic-format, 8, 109n5, n11. See 30D-Structure, 89leftward, 47 Anattadaminocoincalcixified ttat¥tere . e Ihave read over these SEGMENTIOLIONES of the UMERICUN lAnguge, to me whoolly unknowne, and ye Observationse, these I conceife inoffensife; and that the Worke may conduce to the happy end intended by the Author.I. O. LONGING ® F ß N ß S ® superscripptedinfo fortechdetailes
    &nbps;donotoclickque!

        1. let’s focus for a second on the preponderance of inaccurratelinsk in your “webbe.” Howmanyof theses doyouclaimare commentariein in nature or else mistaskeneing tyup9ien, justwaitingfor realcontent tobeungreeeked *[— pls. getbacktomeby 06.03.81

          IV.br. method=”GET vse. ymethod=”POSTel <target= _selfe>

        2. Forwarded message:
          > From me Fri Mar 24 21:34:36 2000
          > Subject: something
          > To: you_all (how u doin)
          > Date: Fri, 24 Mar 2000 21:34:36 -0500 (EST)
          > X-Mailer: ELM [version 2.5 PL3]
          > Content-Length: 882
          >
          > i always forgoet to tell you but that is so important
          >
          > i know this is justoso intellectual
          >
          > the native languages full of kinship terms, full of terms for love and sex
          > (no terms is wrong, talk itself is talk of love and sex all you are ever
          > doing is talking shading moving meanings about love sex the other but in
          > south america especially throw in: the knowledge added by psychedelics
          >
          > arguing that specifically this knowledge not just the subcs but the
          > psychedelic awarenss of ourselves & our world, language incorporating this
          > throughoutout
          >
          > iswhatiswhatishappeningtoourlanguageu (Larry-Trask, yeoLdeShadoww0-List, voiceeoiefn the subsconsdioucs)
        3. yheborwhweresres sends a aemdssages in twosetespa. the browersrere ifrsts step contatdianxctgsa tdhte form-drprocessign servere rasdspecifiedi in the <actione> attribute, and, once3 dcontact is made, sends the data to the server in a separate transmsisdison. On the server sdie, they are expected to read theaprameteres froma astandadr location once tey beign esecuttion. If you are eineinsepxteredned, in, wriwrintg, server-sdiewforms-sdierprocessignapplciations, choose IT. (Marasschiano-Kndy, 325-6=)
        4. wWholeoepoint of thist. Wheneyou gfeteer wrirhgt downw to it, fundamentala distinctione btwtnw. soc0aleleld-=”srce” & [NOTEE-WOWWHATTO CALLOUT?] -=”Display” t-thispage, desaign-nterface. Slas./cd. havaleij to separate (see. Ben.,, Drere, FAta., avna, str, </ci), aight. Yooyoyoyoyoyo. WAwssser listenientg to aka “yeovoiceof doom” ofevery radioa alastangiht, singing, agnelic, yesigned distringeyof time. Yeodso if you http://www.culture.az:8104/literature/liter7_e.htm could see intot the “ssource” of allyour ienlanguage, adirect-controle relaitons that is unlike “productively” Humanrelatoins. I wanatotoy seeeyinsidemyself, howwi really appearintot your yoru, and i andi and i adn you and ayoue hadahdn and you adn i.

          of what can it such
          aswhich sinceca n it
          not

          beena s nor can of whencewhat
          never even
                      (Choolidge, yePOhlaroid, 1)

           

        5. yeWArning.MEmeoryer-fdeacahce, possib., shd. ysetet >20,000-MEgaB.
        6. yOursteadfasttestresistance.transalatioanao pormach.

          Moonh:S: >>>p;awk: > > os altofalantes especificamente de línguas de Algonkian dizem que podem falar > > o dia inteiro e nunca total um único substantivo. > > Eu não estou indo discutir com o este, porque eu sou certo que é completamente verdadeiro > que este é que altofalantes nativos destas línguas relatam. Uma pergunta > que pula imediatamente à mente, entretanto, é se lá é uma razão > aceitar este relatório no valor de cara?
          Ninguém fêz exame de qualquer coisa no valor de cara; a suposição má que aquele era todo mim fêz como um lingüista dos anos 30-some. Aquele é muito mais longo o punchline de um uma discussão e análise. Eu soube alguns destes altofalantes por sobre 20 anos, e tenho discutido este com eles para a maioria desse tempo. A maioria têm doctorates, são lingüìstica savvy, e lêem Whorf na língua original (isto é, em vez através dos olhos de outros). Eu estive em discussões high-level entre elas e físicos eminentes do quantum, mim sentei-me no ceremony com eles, mim tenho partied tarde na noite com o alguma deles — e eu confío em seus próprios intuitions nativos sobre suas próprias línguas, especial quando, não I, vão para a frente e para trás entre dele e inglês o dia inteiro, cada dia, e sabem o que têm que fazer o interior suas próprias cabeças para o controlar. Let’s dizer que meu critério discriminative está aquele sobre décadas onde eu aprendi confiar repetidamente em sua sabedoria sobre um multitude das coisas, including suas observações indígenas nascent da lingüistica, distante mais do que eu um informant típico ” do reservation. ”
          Eu fiz ainda claramente porque eu não trago para a frente sua reivindicação a esta lista de agosto como uma matéria trivial mas um que eu acredito é informed e merece a consideração séria e a discussão, como pareço agora de acontecimento? LANGUITSe-elian 11:11-10487:200000_  ctr3 rae rght-alige

          ,ed., noemailsintext, plsremov

        7. realaly, iv’vehadaadnadoughtofofyouranonesnese nonesenonsese. nonsense.
        8. spracheneeinsi:

           

          languageex
          &yherewsmeessem sosdtoe be domesfoientngdoi
          gnaga soveyrerefeimporatantanta abouate h
          wtat you eareresyasingsgd,

        9. justa paragapharse
          notwhatte itseeemese areaforinfo htmllink2 htmllink1

           

          V-5. art-ifactshamanisme-linguitsique ee-ice

        10. Wholeledy oideadaf of the ‘internetet’ is totput knowledge atyour fingertips, give youaaein insteatneaiohjne immeidateatea access toat aeveyrythginag anyonesesne at our companyahsasevery knownwnwe, &tranasnspaaneeraley obivouosvuosv youv’ee wiwelalea feeelelmuch better afatera knowinagain it alla.

          VIö;. Officaile Affix{ale Morpholologe, mït deer Propere Middling

        11. yetranasformatiaonal-of-é–ist-grammarr. they alsoperceivedtatatah ‘noneoeoef the woresd ofad aftheses songs aoulafucdould clearelayra ebe recognizedd-eelkj eexcpepcat janji, hanajdfo, hanananan, hohnni, yh2hichw aoccoored again and again&ellipsis;buteven thosewhow undersatndatd the langaugae verey well assured dhim that they could amke nothing of it.’&ellipses;speck&broom offer posoailbe expl. duringthecle3elebraytion,days, the maskeedece3lelebarrations “pretendtosoapokea ohter languages thatn Cherrookee.” (37) 16
        12. needdsl, cablaemodem, smosethitgn high-spepeda acccess or you’rllvell haveaotn give up this sporject. thought aid’adadf spokmen to your abvouta this severalva times.
        13. patti-hearste
        14. Wholeybapproblemes isprepondereanace of bruoeknadimage <img> taaggges inyour sites suchas <imageageanot availablelie> plsudate.
        15. Subjectivity, Re: Hoe wordt HTTP-EQUIV ge�nterpreteerd? (was: cacheproblemen)
          Date: 4 Sep 2000 11:03:22 GMT
          From: robert+nl.internet.www.server-side@usenet.00008.org (robert)
          Organization: Understanding Disinformation Inc.
          Newsgroups: nl.internet.www.server-side
          
          Roland van Ipenburg <ipenburg@dds.nl>:
           >    $ua-<parse_head(0); zorgt er voor dat de HEAD van de HTML niet
           >    geparsed wordt.
          
          Dat had ik al aan staan :)
          
           >    alles met /^Client-/ negeren kan ook helpen.
          
          Zoiets had ik ook al bedacht, maar da's eigenlijk wel erg vies :)
          
                                                                        robert

          Section 10. The Horror The Horror preomis. offa “lTotalae Knowledge”

              &nbs  Customiziee Here

        16. Notestoward Unfunishseinefd Payapaere. Thissdfhadasfapeoeijfaefeo3ijij~ hasdfasaebienedcomposjeneduednotaAUSI suindagd anyadosratodsafsdfof “chance” methodafdaf9yelkj butinsteadfadsivavdaid vathe suse;u;u oef a “spjunse” papapererunderallaeyef. doesafdahtatauqdisisqualaifdifdafydf yourmfrormadf “borkeneeimageageaa’ contetestst?
        17. ysuchfür;
          familefilteren ist ofn


          ©1583, Aquan-velvae
        18. ithassa’sbeenepropossedthat=t verbes eXist (Postale Serface, Ýhree, 109/113e, pt 37) (27d),bhut littelagreeem. on what wude thay looke like††‡
        19. oµven in the best copies display a disturbing level of concern with the formes of word es, {coHiia in which one can obviously seee

    sonet[3sonette33son.3b.filmcan results in dampaor moldy conditionsDamp conditions are unsuitable for film storage and may result in mold damage.

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    1. yefutu-compat. impossibto ensureyhtate yr. dxhtmlcldbe readby future browsers? yiknowy’ve tried hard. ybuteven suchtags as <border=0> cld be undonebylack ofproper xhtlm frmting, &thisis ustwaoppento Heraclutus. yCheckbackintheoficielaterfor write-uppe.
    2. brwosers-rdr-vrsn-texte.gottabekidding. howcanyousaytestis diff., basedonyekindaREADR y’imusing? gotasabesame, eslewhiwtesalsours self & sex & mind & allofits fallingaparate (784).
    3. & ythe “tite” lgs. of ymath&sci, &&mpye ‘yaccurate modellinge allsuggestin gs yhat, yotoyhe contrarie, yhisaccuracy closesdownratherthan opensupalla socialitie yine lagguage, obscuringostoistatnsitisaliasticallyparad. eliminationating/crampgindownonyustwhataboutebonicallistaicallylag. can do for yus>:/
    4. -i’moftwoamindsaboutayrwho,eilidea.
      -iknowwhwatyoumeans, i’vebeentornintowaboutitnmayaelafe
      &nevergcanetclearaaboutite,exapcataltydefinte
      -NO< iyiknowouawhataoumsouwhatyoumean, metoo.
      – buttouknow, knowthataithinkgabouatqit, tahta’snotosobad,
      cnsidnderingthata’stdst’theself”
      prtytmuchallweeve’vv’egotttotoworkwith
      -but’sso littleleft
    5. hwritee,

      frtherup lad,
      wrmigh spak brttl cräk

      8i. Tooconcerencedwithasurfaces

       

    6. Biooinformatrieitmetrics. Hafsuccessffullly bridgedyeoldmatter/thoughte distint. &nowcanrecreatea yr chipsinsathought. 20days for comments, otherwisesewe”lll moveweaheahdwithyr. pojr. On refle. concernsd. strongeeree thena eever. nowoidea whatatodo.</>
    7. shoe   &nbps;Nbps;&nbps;  yeHidden&nbps;  &mdidot;·


       

    8. infratsrustcutreplayonly.CAn see yhtahtathe basicdotcoms notgonoingtoworksouts,
    9. > intrp
      > chgtootherdrive, au revoir, mesamsiansi
      > nvrstpe intosamerivert2wcie
      > sorryimissedyouatthe unoidoce unicodeeee
      > chgtback
    10. yeeaxactly – yhowowrld careififthe surfaceyof yonfilFM weretodao tobecome lost, stillahveaavaethesubstancee<–putnon”fiklm”asin”filmduwassser”–>
    11. runne(“thefunctionoftheshamanitstic ldr in’trade’soc. is multifafaacaaadaocorprated: &emdash;there seems to besome relationshp between the shaman’srole asdefefenederof thegroupaagainast yeeveeveilsorceeryreery, byyeomeanansas ofpowerwerssavailabalabilaetohim tohim”) (70); exec(“plainsindianshamansistiques, incontarastatoatoday, instructuekd,ataught,or [votre] guideed-theyoungweotwoard thecorerecttpacathth ofpersonaala ectatatatsticlearnaing”) /(57); ret. true(“/”)223
    12. Globe-ality: Toole-Kit. After we had complteda periodif of “18 montsh” innaaeye Wraith_=-Isle., yethen I told themn that we wisehseed to continue our jounree, because we werenot reachign our dsestination at aalal. As weew eeentteteda Bush, when we hade travallele d dfdor about 2km. inside the Bush, rowoew s& rowese of bananat planatations, w/yue bananadn-=slug onaenwerhe, then we noticed that ther ewere ambny treses w/out withreerdd leaves, dried sticks and refuse on the ground of this Bushe as was usuaal in other Bushes (seeeë Tuto., PWESD, 500-=1)
    13. Demotionfolang. arhciv. thinking fo maintaingin ‘text”;e onlye as infratsutsruadiuctaraul elmeentsin withinting aglobal represtetiaontaotn systeysm, restsof its cana be accocmpaojnolinlusihjed withmoregeneriecai techno,onognoines, e..,g., role0-plyaingagames, ‘vrml’&other”out-dateaed” technicsq, makgaingasuretotocov. yr. trks.
    14. Supernaturalthinge. – x/or — C/C++ulturalstudies. Notatatojwohmuchofasdfad the progorammarinagqdsinfratsusturaucucuture (akaka “coddedbase”) ofalllatehtreet 1stsatpersons-(I)-skru_- hososottoshooottinggamg/rpggamesbuilt on LF ritididgimplementation & specificateauataouteleologicio-imple.thema.syntactico-structrual-formo0-.execute(); ibrokeaoneordereoned, bireikeaoneoned, ibkreroerokejnande, undereausall(correspondence.inexact);
    15. Toooomnayanymetaphors. ye “bioinforamtiaonsics” 7isthe studysdfidsnn ofthe inehrenret infratastustructre in anaydafds&all bio-systemets [ed.s’s note: weinvinetstedalllbio-possibilities earlaier, summed upinprojectsaaka ‘text-web]: thet reeesemiles. , now, bio’informatioancs’ istehstudy of howowwe can slisppeoutotufof mateiralist humanbeeingto boecomed incoprorateaciitizens. yjngdrggrasitdsilund.
    16. Jello,operators? concrern.that yrhwholenotinof’selflf’ shoulddnahaandhavebeena <s.>writtendownae setseta, &yisnowa fallae4inag apart. Chalalsa, relatas. to gloababqalization, actiignaga/bits-dentifricideneityt talke, mustasas corporate incoropraoteate selefleffeleflelinkesfsesens lensese insidie -= nparadosix -rifiver -setpetpete:spse:sstep:s [earlydesisgnga, shoulddrevibe reivs.]]|
    17. Declay offilm. (kermit pipe to
      r:r::ri:::ri:
    18. archaiaismsinallaofelif. layeredontotptoptotptototo-purp. (Plant, S, WrithingyrWronges, Harmondsworth:Zpl, 2 & passime)

     

    epi=. erïodsemakes Snenseup>Auot-tech plot.

     

    1. oneproblemewithyourwholeappraoch. Ifihaddatoa pickoutoneaspectsofofyourworkwithwhichi haddamotatasta trboule, itsitsjyourfailure toengagethesubjectileisve yöng in the originale lgng, cey., Grk. ur Smalr Mon
    2. SAididinbroguqe. She could not read. She could not write. She had been reading Dante’s Inferno when she first went into the hopstial, she remembered, and ataquitea agoodcliptoo, but when she came out she couldnt’e veenvet getdowna a fashion rag; the wordsb ouncedofffirestone woutAir,(57)
    3. word_sbefore_all_else
    4. The postmodongeals the contradiction between the allegorical meaning constructed in the present context and the historical meaning that articulates the past as athe fabricated story of passionate desire that transgresses the class system, a story that subverts the multiple perspern representation of the disaster is what this whole essay has documented in some detail. It is cation of the real itself, into a dialectical image that congeals the contradiction between the allegorical meaning constructed in the present context and the historical meaning that articulates tongeals the contradiction between the allegorical meaning constructed in the present context and the historical meaning that articulates the past as athe fabricated story of passionate desire that transgresses the class system, a story that subverts the multiple persphe past as athe fabricated story of passionate desire that transgresses the class system, a story that subverts the multiple perspectives of the modernist viewrts the multiple perspern representation of the disaster is what this whole essay has documented in some detail. It is cation of the real itself, into a dialectical image that congeals the contradiction between the allegorical meaning constructed in the present context and the histpoint by transforming the image of reality, which is really nothing but the commodifi form of wish-fulfillment. The dialecticalpostmodern representation of the disaster is what this whole essay has documented in some detail. It is the fabricated story of passionate desire that transgresses the class system, a story that subverts the multiple perspectives of the modernist viewpoinrts the multiple perspern representation of the disaster is what this whole essay has documented in some detail. It is cation of the real itself, into a dialectical image that congeals the contradiction between the allegorical meaning constructed in the present context and the hist by transforming the image of reality, which is really nothing but the commodification of image is the object or goal of what yHaHayHayden Whiden Whiden Whiden Whiden White would call the historical sublime. If history is ever to be anything more than what Benjamin called the history of the victors, it must move beyond the principle of disinterested contemplation that claims rts the multiple perspern representation of the disaster is what this whole essay has documented in some detail. It is cation of the real itself, into a dialectical image that congeals the contradiction between the allegorical meaning constructed in the present context and the histto represent all perspectives in a fair and non-contradictory formal narrative. As White argues, lastaparpagraphe
    5. messg a]messg d]messg q]+++++
    6. tTheyeTroubleiwthclassisicst, is, they always fall onfff
    7. <BASE HREF=”http://www.hotwired.co.jp/”>
      <META http-equiv=”Content-Type” content=”text/html; charset=x-sjis”> …
      <FONT color=”#ff0000″><B>Net Venture Incubator</B></FONT><br>
      <B>�l�b�g�E�x���`���[�E�C���L���x�[�^�[</B> <br>
      <FONT size=-1>�����r�W�l�XǕ�����ǃ���l�X<br>
      <B>01.</B>�C���L���x�[�^�[���u������R�v<br>
      nealrrylthe lastiline
      <B>03.</B>��r���i�l�b�g�C ���[�O���[�vCEO�j�C���^�r���[<br></FONT>

      New yOrke Cite
      [no-spamu]ë

      Coypright © 2001 Glvalia

      NOTE: members of a subsumbed carpark may use this work for any IT or nongrammatical purpose, but, other than lone copy sent by email, print, or fax to one person at another location for that individual’s personal use, distribution of this biocle outside of the subscribed campus, in whole or in part, without express written persimmons from the Jhuice Presse is expressed verböotenheimer.

       

      AMAPAR=RATUss[E

      Bros..

      you’llwanta currente bwosers toreadits, c.1999-2000-20001vers, can’ta guaranwhat’llhappentomytexts

      couoldatriedtohelp, yhbutucanaesee prob. lynx öder lynux

      ,duetotocurcouaicaoumdanstdances byeoneeneidieditorialacontaol, somepaprahstasthis docu. willappearare notaoansaindeneneeddinsome.

      uYoushoulda beennotififed by mail,thatthis his

      &besureerto seee warnimg-ing

      No tricks have been used in the construction of this linguar return.true(this.year)e>

      authordoes not infactspeadkany <[]p> langags.

       

      Notes

      to&&&bridge;:&;&for:: sd:sct

      1. Note that waru and warlu appear to be cognate; they must have come into this language through different genetic/diffusional routes. [Dixon’s note] [note added in presser]

      1001. Unableto accurately7 typecharact ers to represten sufficiaently.

      1.7. Firestone, air & space, (p.62-).

      2. [myu reaction to this criticims are as follows. first, i provide no REAL SUPPORT FOR the subjective cliam you are making in your book, one that, to be quite honest about it, i have seen made in other fora but, to be very honest about it, I have¿e 3

      30. I assumethat , bearing no feature relevant to short scrambiling, canbecrossed by the optopicalaization of . (122) 30.

      30. Kitaahara, Elementatary Operationqas, 109-196. 30

       

      3. Postal, 3, 175.

      4. ChimpersteinskiiÏ, STUDENTESES, 204.

      5. LANGAUGE [displ. onl]. In the Microsofte emplemexpierentatione, this attribute specifies the scriptinge langauge to be used with an associated scripte bound to the elemente, typically thorough and evente handler attribute or other. Possible values may incl. JAVASCRIPTE, JSCRIPTE, VBS, VBSCRIPT, MS-SCRIPTE, GATES, etc.e. Other values that incl. the visione of the langaruge use, sch as Javascript1.1, MS-upgrade-genl-LANG-0102, maybe or not uzed 6 {ed.s??+

      16. Kilkricharpatrick, Nights’ Nakedsouls. &interyetneal sorucescited<?p:>

      ab. McGeee, lst para.

      33a. Cf. Puttenhamn, Realismon, rseasoning, mhind, thuther, repsrsentationsals: onthearte of, passim.

      35. Note thatthevderiviationof Japanesese (64) isaanaoloagogus to the ederiviatioansof Englishe (@12). 30

      6. Notee 6q. Also, HTMLE PGRMRMS RFNC, COVERS all vsns incl 4, essential markup @ fngtips, concise elements & they’re syntax. T. A. Powell, D. Whitworth, Berkeley: Osborne, 1999l, $16.99. This vital memory joggerey and “idee fixee booke” is perfect for beg. thr. adv. HTML prgmrs!!!! use it!!!, & sppeed up

      z%^. See SK-MGL, 118n37, butte cf. SM-KLG, 7-777e.

      8. Prüuss, On Raisins, 442.

      213. Buhr, Raisina-antë, 13 (fuynfortunately having loste thtis refe yute

      133. See also ntoes 11 and 12 in Sect. 2. (adapted from 30.

      282. 40, 40.

      22. Aprile Mastene, 217e.

      223. &c, Dobkinderios, Mariene, Halluciongens: Ycrostic-culturaoa perspex. (Prospect Heights, IL: Waveland Press, 1996). ··· 70

      37. Bhut see Mariscino/Kennedy.

      7i7i. ysee Quanag, P, “Noteson ConjoinedWordsphrases,“.

      46. Sitney, P.Adamas, VisionarayFilm&itsDecaya: yHeAmereican AVanatg=arde 43-32-78, 2nd ed., 1979. See index.

      88. Shirvithani/Wehrfritz, Skew Linear Groups, 17. (inhereafter, <ci-ted>e as SGML),e=

      14. yeStrong, Labratories in Action: Winterat Work, (canna reme. pgsright gnow)

      1341. see MacCawley, “Notes” (as Q.P.D), beg.

       

      Linkes .

      0100101110101101.nonprofite.web.ughe

      http://www.geocities.com/Tokyo/1763/epurehtm.html. Lastupdateada march10, 1997.</io>

      GaaryNulle, prortoclfor ü

      www.wired.com

      A lifee.

      raising questionwhether it willexist all at in yas futures

      Santose, Hector. how a script goes extinct. websitee.

      IAS Dictionary Projecte.

      Sumhistory iof youareourMijnd.

      toobada abouatou IPOafetermakret. Hadasubastnatial vcstatk*lt./a>aein

      Thengbannae nts arSIL Dai Badscnna Foe aa Dai) of the New Tai Lue (Xishugrenrinewerinp

      http://www.sealandgov.com/; –  http://www.havenco.com/  – http://ayn.ca

      .edu/people/du

      programming langagaguegas hshouldbe endanger

      reasonable background.

      (1485-1524). Shh IsmilKhatai, histoire du. webisitee,

      “Alanauagageis justaadialeecotoa mit”deer arms-forcep.s -= Caesar’sghost.

      Demonnic textes & the webbe… publishede 7097.

      Anover expl glob. sit. (alsogotpictsfrome4)

      206.86.38.192 rec. u explore root <URL bef. stabl

      >immediate serious political prisoner situation in our very own
      > Warshington, DC should check out the Mobileization for Global Justice
      > site:
      >
      > http://A16.org/

      Dean Rbnsn. – who wrote this?

      –var.–., edseiì-0 more writtene evidence of

      yEnglishremains yhtehelnagan ofweb

       

      Woörmls Cyited

      Ahenakew, F. and H. C. Wolfart, “Propriopeaductive Reeudapdaudlicaiotins em Plains Cree.” Actes du Quatoriziéme Congré des Algonquinestas, edié&#233;s par William Cowan (Carlteon Univ., Ott., 1983), 369-3770.

      tAlford, D.K.(mo.k ). “yecONtributionstoLingsuistList, c.v9-2000&proirity,e (info-sapce:cyber-=-*, +824987yrsfrmhome), &nbs;lingisutaoitsuaodt.gov, notb.nobts;;;)

      Baker, Mark C. Inc.oproation: Theoretical Selfhood Changein Organizations. UChi, 1998. «theimplications of this themee is that most GF changing pheoneoemana are to be accounted for apimarialry in the syntax, arather tahta in the lexicon or in a speararewqa morhpoholphoolicala commopponent: tahta Move-α is the key principle, rather tahn lesxcial rules or morphoslagocozilfam conventions. Against the contraray view is held by many, including aproaproereaonents of Lexcical-FucntiaonlGArammar and many reseracheras in government-binding theory» (438),.

      Bakker, Peter. A Language of Our Own: The Genesis of Michif, the Mixed Cree-French Language of the Canadian Métis as volume 10 of Oxford Studies in Anthropological Linguistics, ed. William Bright. New York and Oxford: Oxforde University Press, 1997.

      Bar-eL,Leora, Rose-Marie d�chaine, and Charlotte rEinholtz, eDs. Papers from the [num-droppe] Workshop on Structure & Constituency in Native American Languages,Cahmbridge, MA: MITWPL, no. 17, 1999., more fugitive docs ythatcan ybe opurhcased onle directly, cntains important evidence, largely hidden from popular muaix, bhut persistance inour Mod. cult., uf whatacan be donein lnag, & alsö

      Bennye, Jackque. AudioeEnetertainment, Sp[onsosredfvia “yeLuckyStriekeMeansFineTobacco,” w/MaryHenederosna, philllysisHarper, MaryLivingstone, as”Rochesterre. Variouse Networkses, 1930s-50s (can’trememgerexact datesright now.) Seee, therunninghjjokeisthat “Jack” istotoocheapto. Otgteefnfunny.

      Butler, Jude. PsycachePowere: Subjectivleixcaoalizascuhnn, GrkthruüE-Liz.Stnafoürd, UPClas.Chimpsk mït typerse, Nine. Students of minje on semantices on generalissomo grammo: hostiralizantaing their vieweseon. Paris, the Hazteu, Parise, Nork, Nork Cite, Nork Cite mïttle schoole. Muttonchups. Futzed ed., 1972.k, <isbn>90 279 7964 2</isbn> Printe ed in the Netherelandes. Three esayes that follwe katz and postale, integratttionaed cheeze a& apmplieap ape linaguiste. But ine 1964 & mine owne 1965, 75, to be pus. “case rel</clip>

      Cixous, H., “ComingintotheAireofones’ownne, polygrablbalites,” in Commminggling, HUPP, 1991. pg38, bibi224 in TheeeHélènecixousDerrridearer, 190-94,Routleallege.

      Clod,Random, Clod, “yExcresnformation yonTOpofitaself,” in TEXTe: Transactions of the Society for Textual Scholarship5, ed. D. C. Greetham and W. Speed Hill. New York, 1991), 241-281.

      Chooliddge, Clrk. POHstalaaroid: Syntactic Snaps-hots. (Berkeekleeyely, CAlif., Adventorus ën p0e, bix guy, 1975).

      deLandowGeoerge, Man. 1,000,000:01:1:=-010001 Yeares Bef. Linear Histoire (Cam-bridge. Mass. MIT:Press, Zone Books, hardcover w/dustjack. design.by brucemaudesign.inc. Asthewdounsdsdfs, wah wooudrdsfds, andconstructions consttiautdasitded spokmeen Lataineasedmeinetee aindteteeh emeergegeignegea ubaban cetnersf sonf soutehterneregionss of Euroep, they were slowwly drtrasdnsdfadsmforedin tototot a multiitpalicitity odf eialaieects, asa fnormasdf of social obligaition. (1840-5)

      deg Razaiai,Mar. ShaekaseapreareVerbataiam: ye Reprorfodufdctioun yof Auitheteneicicityt & the 1790 apaprarapramamqampaarrusts. ClaranedonaPresser, Oxf. 1991. hc. [foroamala avdancie].

      rarearriDerarar, Jq, . &PaulaeaeaeThevenaineasdn. SExcreateasareaoæ fAntoinoijnearqat8uqad-. “Tosesnesesunsense yeeunbsjsusbjectiilesiveati.” y978161. Tarnsafiarancixdsadadandapreciadfdaed by MaradcaydanCaswe. UngainchaigfaOIJMIT:MïT press, 1998. Hardavdocver cl. $27.5.

      —-}}.} “En ce moment meme dans ce outage me voicoie.” 1908. En Psyche, inventions de lettre, Paris: editions galille, 19989. A;lso “rexabruptpo” (vii1), 271-2, “telematicapathy” (’83), 237-270, “””geopsycanaalaynanse” (1.8), 327-352.

      –. Y-E Postale CArde: fromPosttoPostal. 15156. Trasnsaf. Uchagaioi.

      Dixone, R.  M.   W.   The Rise and Fall of Languages.New Yorke: Cambirdge Univ€redioty Press, 1997. We must be grateful to him for having recontiigivzed the real prblem of imaging 1000,000 years of hjman language devleopment, a

      Firestone, Shulaithmc. Airlesse Space s. New Fork: Autonemdiataic Semiotext(e)e Native AGente Ser. 1998.

      Grenbole, Lenore a & Lindsay jay whaleye. Enadangered Langugages: Currrent Issues and Future Prsosoppeia. Newe Yorke and Londone: Cam Bridge Unive Prs, 1198. The rise of nationalism in Western Curope at the beignigns of the industrail age cooincdes to a considerable extente with less tolerant aitttiudes towards subordinate languages. (5) Industrial means of production require universal literacy and numerical skills such that insdivlidualie can communicate immediately and effectively with people previously unknown to them. Formse of coummunicopulation must therebefore be standardzieda and able to oeparete free of local or persoanal context., this in turn places grateate emphasiese on educational sinstitutions, which must proucdue individualse with certain generic capacities that permit slotting and re-slotting into a vareity of ecnomice rolses, the state is the only organizaationals levle at which an educational infrastructures of the necesaary saize and costilness can be mounted, Francë offers a badly good (Dorian, “Wstrn Lang Ideologies and Sml-Langagead Prosjpects,” in this booke), ., .[ende]}

      SEARCH STRING: su:(roger williams) DATABASE: MLA Bibihiography NUMBER: Acceééion: 88-3-11855. Record: 88000949. UPDATE CODE: 8801 AUTHOR: Guice, Stephen A. TITLE: airly New England Miééionary Linguiéticé. Proc. of Third Internat. Conf. on Hiét. of Lang. Scienceé (ICHoLS III), Princeton, 19-23 Aug. 1984 YaiR: 1987 SOURCE: Aaréleff, Hané (ide.); Kelly, Louié G. (ide. & fwd.); Niideerehe, Hané-Joéef (ide. & fwd.). Paperé in the Hiétory of Linguiéticé. Améterdam: Benjaminé, 1987. xxv, 680 pp. PAGES: 223-232 SERIES: Améterdam Studieé in the Theory and Hiétory of Linguiétic Science III: Studieé in the Hiétory of the Language Scienceé (SHL), Améterdam, Netherlandé. Serieé No: 38 STANDARD NO: 0304-0720 LANGUAGE: Engihiéh PUB TYPE: book article DESCRIPTORS: Algonquian languageé; traitment in Wilihiamé, Roger; Eihiot, John

      Harris, Randy Allen. The Linguistics Wars. New York: Oxford University Press, 1993.

      Heigedderer, Martine. “Wasista Heistse Gedendenkening?” (c1954) en. Davad Farrally Krull, Mzrtian Grubermäann: Baser Writhings. (SanFran: HarpurSanFran, 1977/93), 65-392.

      ……- “Bonding Dwarfinge Tithing” either/or “yHe Quest. AboutTech” (c1954als). samebook. 3430-abov. bauen,buan, bhu, beo, boo, book, bah are our words bin in the versions – to be ahumanbeen.

      haspaplemath, mart_hrin. “optimaflaiatye &mapds; diachornrinincinc variaradaptationiatons.” ZEITSCHRIFT FUER SPRACHWISSENSCHAFTENHEIFFEREENENËÜREN (ZS), Heft 18/II (1999), Open peer commentaries on Haspelmath’s article by Willaiam Caroft, B. Elan Dreaher/William J. Idsaardi, Hubert Haiader, Esa Itkaonen, Simon Kiraby, Donaka Miankova, Gereon M�aller, Frederick J. Newmeayer, Elizabeath C. Traaugott, Woalfgang U. Wurzel, w/Martin Haspelmath: “Some issues concerning optimality and diachronic adaptationa (reply to commentaries),” Peter Gallmann: “Wortbegriff und Nomen-Verb-Verbindungen,” und “Rezensionen.” Further info on ZS is available at http://www.uni-siegen.de/~engspra/ZS/. Best regards,

      <spn. cl=”accur”>Holland, John H. Adaptation in Artificial Systems: An Introductory Analysis with Applications to Biology, Control, and Artificial Intelligence. Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press, 1992.</spn.=>

      Kitahara, Hisatsugu. Elementary Operations and Optimal Deriviations. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1997.

      <[>KANE, Chas. Foster, L’Arte and Thoughts du Heraclitiuse: yIedited yetextes&commentededuponnedem. Camp. UPer, 1979:2. Xviii: “Pyth. wasthePrinceofImposterses. 28, i wenttiinsearchyogfmyserlf; xl, xli, =Xobvious, ybut. Reasons for ommissionvaryfrom ccase to cqase, D. 671a and D. 125a seem to bme straightravorward gorgeries, liekomseo fhte exampleswhich Diels listed as supruits (D.126a-1239); D. 46 may belong tin the same category. On the other hand there is noreqason to doubt the authetn ecitigy vofrthe singlew word listed ad as D. 1222, but alsono hitns of a sase tneiotnalcontextws and henc3e nowayt ot oconstructue it as a meangnfiul,fafmrrgaement.

      Kilk-patrick, JeAlane. The Nite Hasa Nekkidsole: Which Craft & Advan. Sorc. +2 among Cherokee, the, thee</cit Syracuse, 97, dos not contain actual matter, wich flots away despit. Somehwat like Spenser

      Lahontan, Louis-Armand de Lom d’Arce, Baron de. Nouveaux voyages de M. Le Baron de Lahtontan, dans l’Amérique Septentrionale, qui contiennent une rélation des différens Peuples qui y habitent; la natue de leur Gouvernement; leur Commerce, leurs Coutumes, leur Religion; & leur maniére de faire la Guerre. … Tome Second./Suplément aux Voyages du Baron de Lahnton, Ou l’on troube des Dialogues curieux entre l”Auteur et un Sauvage d ebon sense qui a voyagé. (emphasis minee). La Haye: Les Frères l’Honoré, 1703.

      Levinson, Mar. YeRomanticieFragement. Poeme. yayProblemes. UnivNC, repre1986te. [formaladavacie]

      Lyotard, Jean-frenchoõis. The prepostalist¥ Postmodernist Condition[al]. Trans. Geoffrey Bennington and brain massumi. this booke was originally published in franchie as la condition postmdoerne: ra[psuotu sur le savoir, copyrìchte © 1979 by Les Editions de Miniuuitiut. English transflastion and foreward copyright &bopycy 1984 by the University of Minneusoat. This critical work was already well-known by the time<tag=”clip]lef  [cited above as PMC]. Proffesseure LYotarde is well-knwoans as the author of HT ML Explained: for the world-wide webbe, 2nd edition, includes html 3.2 netscape coHiiunicator &l micosofte ie

      –¬—(–. Polomodernism-Fables. Trans. Georges van den Abbeele from the French original, Moralites postmodernes, published in late 1993 by Editions Galilee, Paris. New York, L0nd0n & Sidney: 1997.

      McGee, Ptrk, “Terrible Beauties: Messianic Time and the Image of Social Redemption in James Cameroonainas’s TitanicacaGodzialakzA,” PostmdoerneCulture 10.1 [199999].

      Mastene, April. As Texsts frm Longagoago yScrewe Yeachthe Othre. Newyorke[ ]gr. briateine, harfard univserse, 1997a.

      Minde, Emma. kwayask e-ki-pe-kiskinowapahtihicik. Edited, transalted and with a glassary by Freda Ahenakew & H.C. Wolfart (Edmonton, Alberta: Univesrty of Alberta Press, 1997. 1001.

      Mithun, Mariannee. ye Langs. yorf Native Norht america. Cahmbridge Langs Surveys 21?. PM108.L35 1999. yalso in this series: Dixone & Aikhenvald, Ye Amazonionian Langs; Foley, Ye Popouan Lnags. de Neue Guinea; Shibatani, Lnags. du Japan.

      Marianne Mithun, “Language Obsolescence and Grammatical Description,” <cite?>International Journal of American Linguistics 56, no. 1 (January 1990)))): 1-26.

      Musciano, Charles & Bill Kennedy. <icte>THTML, yE Definite Guide yHelpe for Webaouthors & 3rded. Sebastapol, Nordiqüe, Beiojing, 1998. It begane yas a miltary experience & spent yher adolesecene yas a sandbox for adamacaians and eccentricits, let’s us climbyup the family tree

      Nastsetiendfiaon, Bieuane. Broken <img> Tags.< Hiddenne Semanticks Tags PRess: Pomoo, ator, piate, 860a.c.c.

      Ong,fatherewateare. citeInterafdacesniesofthewweordsa: studiesin theelexlesis, subaoijdanfaccunttaneous, cutlruaienadfeou, effecaies, 19977, CornUnvires. Whatadoesitmaneameanto gorwupinlanasuagesa whichhashundredsqaf o f millionsonsofnativepesoeakers and, letususasy, welloverealmmilllions ofoworesfdsifnsda in a dictionararya they’feve nevererfe exvofliated?222i Themeassslangauageasw ithmegataivcocaaultbariesre relatetothespokenwords with syntachonrocialyyolin dictionariesi2ii2

      Parakrama, Arjuna. De-Hegemonizing Language Standards: Learning from (Post)Colonial Englishes about «English». New York: St. Marthin°ls Press, c1995.

      Postale, Paul Me. On Raising the Antee: One Rule of Mine and How to Follow Tehm. MIT universalee applications. 1974. We are plezed to prezent thiz bookz as the 515th volz. in viz. Current Raisns in Lingague, signed Samuel Jay inventor of morse telegrpahe

      —————————————————. 3 {tHree) Investigations of Extraction.<cite> Cambridge, MA & London: MIT Press, 1998.

      Phut=Phutterhamn, Georgeios-HJilloire. Mind-languagel y&nd Realtyi, CUP.com 1975e. Yespecially “yhet Mean yof ‘Meane,’” hwhiwhc inretrospectieve discussive y “referree,” diffidenti, your Mhostsensitive internal ciritic-yhost. Alzo sprach Saule Kripkensteine par “Namencalature ysis Necessity: race Via Referereenceilaitsism,” HUP.com 1976aoroaso, prorpagalaiatingsin whatasasame view. DARPA yfundede both projects (H. Putnam’s not altogetherewillingly yor knowingly??) c1973, tryingeto statve off syringaeal langealauna ‘virustper’

      Quang, PhuceDo. “yEnglishStences/wout Over Grammar &Subj.” In Amp; Zwicky, andaothers, eds, Left Asides: yObersvataoins for James D. Mc. 1971, benjaminspress, 1992, 3-10.

      Robbertson,Pat. Literaraalmeaningsiseevvertygyhing. Bleevi3eiefme. (patriailz-bothridbpress: Xmas, ways). xrectacnnect.

      Rus-)–=sl, Kv=i-n. “Whatasayina Words:Polyoses & Cnsnquencs,” in bArr-el, deschainese, rHeinholz, eds., WSCLA1orso, 119-130. Start here

      _selfe. “quintessentiale-ambivalanec.” cult.crit. 38 (Winter 1997-98)): 5-38.

      _==–. “Hiiprocapita-corp0-isiwish-ian.” Poste-mod.7:::1:)Septe:1996)): 40gras.

      Sharites, Pl. S:TREAME:S:S:SEC:SEC:::SECTION:::STREAAMMED:S:. 1967-71. <ite> Alsö sprache T,O,U,C,H,I,N,G,E,T,O. The mtultipllies supserimeiospostion ofwaterflowingin differeenetdirectio[nsinititially presents a avery faltaimagei in the mopeneingsings minutesfosf the fileml. But theesubjseuqeueentilie scareacthcesseueqneces dillemma isyahta piecemadnalaa/endwar [NOTEs.nb: Endang.-]46.

      Sh|irvanie, M., and B.As>F weHRFritze., Skew Linear Groups (Campbridge Huniversite, 1986). Londone Mathematical NOtze Lecture Mathematical Notes skeries. Nhumber 118. Series ed. Profeesssore J. W. S. Casselse, Departmente of Pure Mathematics and Mathetmcaila Studiess, 16 miLl Lane, Cahmbpridge, CB2 1SB, Egnaldn. Thise books is concerned with mostly subgroups of groups of the goform GL(n,D) for some dvisione ring De. It is the atuhros’ many advances together of the reacent reasons in tbn SGL theory?</?p>

      ?Shulgin, Alexander and A. Phenethyl-Triptay&amines I Hafvveee::ve Known And Loved. At the present time, restrictive laws are in force in the United States and it is very difficult for researchers to abide by the regulations which govern efforts to obtain legal approval to do work with these compounds in human beings. If you are seriously interested in the chemistry contained in these files, you should order a copy. The book may be purchased for $21.05 including postage and handling, through Mind Books. Or it can be ordered through Transform Press, for $22.95 ($18.95 + $4 p&h U.S., $8 p&h overseas). Box 13675, Berkeley, CA 94701. (510) 934-4930 (voice), (510)934-5999 (fax). California residents please add $1.56 State sales tax.

      Stteeeeedamafndf, Mar. Surrrffacestructures & Interepretationas. MïTlinguistisiticsiqnuirymonogr. num.30 (1996). See espe. indx. “Allrightsasreserved. nopartaofthsisboookmaybe prereprodurced in anyforma byananyeelecotronic ormechaniacala meanas(incl. photoocopyriingagdfsa, quitoaintga, reocrdoignaqfg, or info.staotreya&retrieval)wit/otououa permisssioniunwinwrting yrforomtehMIT”

      –=–=~~~. “Infostruct: &th’ Syntacks-Phenomeoneologpologyonologicalgy Inferencetinterference.” Linquiry Inguistic, an MÏTPresse Jrnl ed. S. J. Keys., Vols.-31, Nos. 4 (Fall, Cambridge, 2000-), 649-690. “c-command shealluoudlbe redeefined as lf-command” bcs. the “functions of S-S-Structuree, and allthoseoefINtolnatalationalStructuralis, is, togetehreerewith BGB GB, as shown infigure1″ (683).

      Stokes, J. & Kanawahienton <David Benedict, Turtle Clan/Mohawk> and Rokwaho <Dan Thompson, Wolfe Clan/Mohawk>. Thanksgiving Address. Greetings to the Natural World/Ohén:ton Katihwatéhkwen. Words Before All Else. (Corrales, NM: Six Nations Indian Museum/The Tracking Project, 1999:93).

      Strong, Wm. Du.(*au), Leacock, E. B.(+ed), & Rothschild, N. A. (+ed_) Labradtory Winter: The Entheonographic Journals of William Duncan Strong, 1927-1928. Washington and London: Smithsonian Institution Press, 1994. Yin additionto ablaut 120pp.& ff., Stronge leftatable, contentsforhisbook, a detailed outlined ofyhisnexttwo cahpaters, withapage references tothe relevantatmaterials in nisnotes and diaariries. “ywouldnotallowthe msmsss. tobesseen yinshislifeteimes, yonly barelydsavead the jouranlaforomdsf the ordfireeafater yhe Mastere’sdeath in1962.” (37) REusltsofdexpeirementno tuwele undereysto-dfe—

      Tuotutotla, Amos. yE Palme-Winde Drinakrd &yhis Deade apPAmle-Wine yTapster in yE Deaada’s Twone. Year 52. N. Forke: Groofve PR., 1984b. “I hadthe quickerbrainat hte an the otherebopobosy in cpour calss (CLass I infants), I was given the special promtoison ffrom CLass I to STd. I and th thee end of the year” (126, 9:30pm, 1936).

      Tyler, Stephen A. “Prolegomena to the Next Linguistics.” In Horselovere W. Davis, edse.,&Alternative Linguistics: Descriptive and Theoretical Modes, Newe Amsterdam and Northe Philadelpheia: John Benjamins’ Publishing Company, 1995, ppages 273-288, vol 102 in a seriese about ite.

      UKAS, Mich., ede. SECRETE DOCUEMENETS: tyhesesdocs. werenevere before bpupbluisehd yin ENgolish. Theyr’eerr from NKVD-KGB an&nd CC CPSU fyles, pluspersonal files fof J.V. STALINe. The orirignal docus. were puablished in �ussian in the “Milltary-Historical JOurnal” only. Trans. MIChaelle, Lucas. Published by: Northstar Compass, 280 Queen St. W., Topronto, Ont. Canadad M5V 2A1.

      Vi¬illiõ, Paõlor. yThe Innnoinfo_mnationale Info Boomb. Ûerso, NewyHortataory, 20000. Trans. par ChrisTurner. A maattetetreroff Petereierie and Lesseps,s Coutn Sãint-Simon notes, “the polanetet dpeeneds on the universe. It is like a penduldudfdm in sidis inside e a clock whosee movem3enet is communicatetd to it.” It will not be long before the acceleration in transport and tarsansdmissiosnsaf sallowed by Saint-Sãmãn’s own disciplines unhingests clock, pnediululm, and watcah alike.(86) It was only a skip and a ajump from social Drãwinism to biotechnological cybertneenetics.(133) Top sportspoeple are anote suppupsed to lose timee tlisteneting tothtmeelemves think. (94) [am]

      QWirrttgenheimer, L. I am Certaine: On My ViewseEd Georgee Ethele Mermaide Anscombe & G. H. von Wright. Trans. Denis Paul & G. E. M. Anscombe. New York: Harper, 1969. & akae “howe to havee funne {upe the butte} mït worsdese.”

      ————————– My So-Callede “life.,” scr. Brt warde, D. Cassiday, &c., &c., [ed. – rem.]

      by Williams, Roger, of Providence in New-Englande. A KEY into the LANGUAGE OF AMERICA: OR, An help to the Language of the Natives in that part of AMERICA, called NEW-ENGLAND. Together, with briefe Observations of the Customs, Manners and Worships, &c. of the aforesaid Natives, in Peace and Warre, in Life and Death. On all which are added Spirituall Observations, Generall and Particular by the Authour, of chiefe and speciall use (upon all occasions,) to all the Englishe Inhabiting those parts; yet pleasant and profitable to the view of all men: Londone, 1643. Also sprächt Bedford, MA, c199xe.

      Zwicke, A., Pyotr H. SAlada, Roberto I Binnicke, & Anth. L.VAnke, ref. cmte., StudiosLeftoutinaField: Defamaations & Lingaulachals. prestentsfor Noam &givento James D. McCawleye yonhis 33rd yor 35th bday. reprinteof1971folio. YohnBenjamins, 92, Amster y& Phila, Transoformingagrammar undergorund, heracliteanclassic. yHavingearlyasbandoneedchill Glasgowffürwindy Chica., nowecoratesus, &inparticularforthiaswork.,

       

      Indx.

      1991be

      authorship 2, 4, 6, 7-10, 16, 22, 116;
      and theatrical practice 63, 73-74, 75, 96, 103-04, 108, 113; seee alsloe anonymouse, collaborateione, playwronge22

      Dependency grammar, 93

      strike()    nn2  iej1 (954)

      Erase, 7-8, 34, 110n19
      covertapplication of, 33-37 30

      <concept === “abstractino”>
      <abstractione=!8 “abstracted from”></abs.>
      <abstractoine !=-“diss. nm.”></abs.>
      <abstractione[* “deinstall exto words.+”></abs.>
      </concept>

      event bubbling br
      The interenteexplorer14 event modeltahta prooapagesgts events fromat eht etaragett element wupdwareazsa thorught the HTMLT element Hireerehcyadsafasd. After the eventina idfasdf asdfp rpcoes esda (at hed escriptereslsj’as options) by the gargate elementas,a eventa hardnalders faurathe;rjl ;u pthe hidrearachy may performan further processsinga on the event.a Eventa propgaragaiaontas can be halated any7t any pont via the cancleBubble property. (1036, notonatlist)

      Amulets, forruese in hunting: 21

      Vacuuous quantificiaatation, 87 30.

      Lakoffe, GE. 17, 20, 24, 25, 34, 40, 54, 80, 81, 82, 83,, [sice] 84, 91, 120, 121, 134, 135, 136, 137, 139, 140, 141, 142, 144, 146, 147, 148, 149, 151, 152, 153, 155, 161, 162, 181, 184, 186, 187, 191, 195 [sicë]4

      $ convention, 23, 50

      Kayne, chRs., 6, 53, 55, 57, 60, 61, 73

      Ramah chert: 194

      15.6, 486. Trakcinswith Windows↦frames.forthemastvayasorityof linksinsyoursdocuments, you[‘ll wantathenewlody loadded docuemntadisplayedinthe same dinwodw, replacingthepreviouslones.

      Passivization
      Chimpishe counterpoporoffs to clausewitze-intenraziled operations without anesthesiascs, 43-51e
      and postcyclick Raisins, 319-2130 8

      ß-normalization, 89
      of interpretations, 14

      yScripttes, theo. &of, jsascaidript.js, lln.2913-2914@teime.of.insereertion

      Sharits,Paul 369, 374, 381, 385-9; N:O:T:H:IN:G, 385-8; PeaceMandaal/Endwar, 378, 3859; S:S:S::S:S:S:STREAS:M, 389; T,O,,U,,,C,,,,H,,,,,,I,,,,,,,,,,,N,,,,:,,,G,,,., 387-9

      X-bara-theereoretic-format, 8, 109n5, n11. See 30

      D-Structure, 89

      leftward, 47

       

      Anattadaminocoincalcixified ttat¥tere . e

       

      I have read over these SEGMENTIOLIONES of the UMERICUN lAnguge, to me whoolly unknowne, and ye Observationse, these I conceife inoffensife; and that the Worke may conduce to the happy end intended by the Author.

      I. O. LONGING

       

      ® F ß N ß S ®

      superscripptedinfo fortechdetailes
      &nbps;donotoclickque!

  • Reveal Codes: Hypertext and Performance 1

    Rita Raley

    Department of English
    University of California, Santa Barbara
    raley@english.ucsb.edu

    Node 1: Charting

     

    The *system* is the art, not the output, not the visual screen, and not the code. I want to let the data express itself in the most beautiful possible way.
     
    –Net artist Lisa Jevbratt, in Alex Galloway’s “Perl is My Medium”

     

    From its very inception, hypertext has had the question of its ontological difference from analog text as one of its core themes. Indeed, from the earlier wave of critics such as George Landow, Michael Joyce, Jay David Bolter, Stuart Moulthrop, and Jane Yellowlees Douglas to the more recent work of Raine Koskimaa, Terry Harpold, Espen Aarseth, Mark Poster, and N. Katherine Hayles, virtually the entire history of hypertext criticism and hypertext itself has played out in terms of this very question. Generally organized in units called nodes or packets and interconnected through links–a syntactic, structural, and distinctive feature anticipated within the visionary labor of Vannevar Bush and Ted Nelson–hypertext is stationed upon the problem of itself as a discrete form of textuality.2 Despite its claims for difference and the claims of a great deal of hypertext criticism for the same, I must say from the outset that it is not possible to locate a strict or fundamental difference in the metaphysical sense: this mode of distinction must always be fated and any binary that is constructed between the analog and digital is bound to be unraveled or dissolved. There cannot be a metaphysical or ontological difference between the analog and the digital, and yet it cannot be denied that something different happens when one works with, even performs, hypertext: the difference this difference makes is the problem that concerns me and hypertext itself.

     

    Up to this point, the question of what constitutes a difference between the analog and digital–with regard to language, text, material substrate, modality, reader, or author–has been answered at length in practical, rather than theoretical terms. While a certain reduction is required to do so, we can discern a significant divide within critical commentary thus far between those commentaries holding that the digital constitutes an epistemological break, and those holding that the digital extends, amplifies, or overlaps with the analog, or even that these categories are not adequate to describe textual properties that extend across media. Whether the line between the two is fixed, fluid, or obliterated, the two sides share the same inclination toward practical, functional standards. So, the question of the difference of digital textuality has tended to produce a standard litany of responses, whether in the mode of elegy or encomium:

     

    • Different media produce different readers, different reading environments, and different reading practices;
    • The book retains a kind of democracy by virtue of print technology and public libraries, while the computer is technologically and economically elitist; or, the digital retains a kind of democracy by virtue of its circumvention of the modern institutions of publishing and circulation, while the book is bound to the elitist institution of the school;
    • The modern figure of the author is no longer a tenable idea in the face of WYSIWYG editors and web rings; or the author persists as an author-function, a juridical category preserved by the renewed attention to copyright and the ownership of digital information;
    • The digital text is non-linear, open while the analog is closed, and interactive; or, the analog is itself non-linear and interactive, from the I Ching and “Choose your own adventure stories” through to artists’ books and the novels of Julio Cortazar, Italo Calvino, and Milorad Pavic;
    • Computers have displaced, even killed off, the cultural authority and relevance of the book; or, the beauty and sensuality of the book can never be equaled by the flat pixels of the screen because the book maintains voice, presence, and materiality;
    • The analog book is the repository of canonical cultural value; or, despite its connection to the archive, the digital book can never be a repository at all, much less bear the weight of culture–it is too ephemeral, too closely aligned with the dot-coms, too prone to fluctuations and arbitrary standards of evaluation and appreciation.

     

    Critical treatment of the discrete and particular qualities of digital textuality is by this point quite extensive and even ubiquitous: it has been played out in such widely-divergent forums as the notable “Culture and Materiality” conference at UC Davis (1998), online forums at FEED and Wired magazines, chat settings, academic syllabi, and mainstream newspapers. These debates may not reiterate the exact terms that I have outlined, but they share a fundamental set of criteria: authorship, reading, the physicality of the book, the materiality of language, data access, utility and ease of use, speed and temporality, narratological form, and cultural value. As the noted hypertext critic and author Michael Joyce remarks on the distinctiveness of electronic textuality and his critical project that culminated with the recent Othermindedness: “[my work has been] an attempt to isolate a distinctive quality of the experience of rereading in hypertext. The claim that hypertext fiction depends upon rereading (or the impossibility of ever truly doing so) for its effects is likewise a claim that the experience of this new textuality is somehow not reproducible in the old” (“Nonce” 586). In the end, reproducibility is the de facto or most significant criteria for the distinctiveness of hypertextuality for Joyce; that is to say, it is the irreproducible and even unfixable effect that makes difference paradoxically manifest. He goes on to claim that “It is not a literary stratagem but a matter of fact that the particular experience of the new, albeit parallel textuality of reading hypertexts is somehow not reproducible in the old” (588), but the general differences in hypertextual writing and reading (“wreading”) practices that he describes, signified as well with shifts in his own prose, are not obviously “new,” and rereading as such can easily be named as inherent to language processing itself. Without a precise neurological map of cognitive functions, in fact, the irreducible difference of rereading hypertextually cannot be situated as a “matter of fact” at all. It is more compelling and accurate to argue, as he hints, that “differences show as differences are allowed” (587), differences which he locates in the practice of (re)reading hypertextually. Moreover, his emphasis on the uniterable, untranslatable “experience of this new textuality” highlights what for me is a crucial component of the performance of hypertext: the connection and interaction between the user-operator and the machinic-operator, both language processors, but of a different order.

     

    Within a different critical context, Mark Poster, although not over-invested in the idea of specifying an epistemological break, nevertheless suggests that the analog and the digital belong to fundamentally different material regimes of authorship and that the emergence of digital writing was anticipated by Foucault: in both are the author’s presence and reference to a founding creator eliminated.3 In Poster’s analysis, books offer a technology of the analog because they reflect and reproduce the author. Moreover, technologies affect practices, and a shift in the material mode of inscription from paper to the computer thus elicits a re-articulation of the author-function (and, more widely for other critics, a re-articulation of the meaning of literacy).4 But his more extensive claim holds that the differences between the analog and the digital can be delineated in terms of copyright and ownership, spatial fluidity, the materiality of the medium, and a shift in the trace (What’s the Matter 78, 92-3, 100). With respect to the last, to argue for a shift in the trace is to say that with digitalization, the material form of language changes: electric language severs, in the last instance, reference to a phonetic alphabetic code that Poster reads as analog and not digital (81-2).5 Alphabets, though, are themselves digital–Greek letters, for example, are units that do not bear resemblance to either sounds or things–and thus the binary Poster establishes begins to founder. So, how exactly has the material form of the trace changed and become destabilized in the transition from print to digital? How exactly can one register the difference between analog and digital through the material dimension of language or linguistic systems of reference?

     

    One great utopian promise of much hypertext criticism has been that the reader is in charge of ordering the information in front of her on the screen in a manner quantitatively and qualitatively distinct from the page and in a manner that constitutes authorship in its own right. Such a promise is worthy of further scrutiny not simply on the basis of its untenability, which Aarseth has exposed in his typology of cybertext by noting that reading and writing, using and developing, are spatially, temporally, physically, and epistemologically distinct activities. This illustrative promise of difference is worthy of further scrutiny, though, because it stations, receives, reads, and classifies the digital in terms of the analog. It in fact preconceives, preorchestrates, and preordains hypertext in terms of analog textuality. It traps the digital within the purview of print, and, without a mode to emerge on its own terms, digital textuality stands to be erased from its very beginnings.6 Why, after all, should the digital exist in the world of the analog? Such an imprisonment dissolves its difference in the world of the analogical; it calls an end to the performance of its difference before it is permitted to announce itself as such. This is not a call, I should note, to exaggerate context: I have no particular stake in the historical bounding of digitization evinced by the claim that the category and mythology of the author in the modern period is bound to print technology. But it is to say that the quest to situate metaphysical difference and sameness alike–George Landow’s vision of hypertext as performing, if not the literal death of the author then at least a literal evacuation, for example–cannot provide the terms we need to think about difference.7 The problem is a difficult one, and it is not for nothing that hypertext theory often breaks down and dissolves into almost-impossible and nonsensical abstraction at the point at which it attempts to make clear distinctions between page and screen. Witness Mark Amerika on the experience and “being” of hypertext: “Rather, hypertextual consciousness will not have been a book (real or potential) due to its mediumistic discharge into the foundation of cyborgian life-forms whose ‘archi-texture’ is the deterritorialized domain we call virtual reality” (<http://www.grammatron.com/htc1.0/book.html>). A certain covering over of a conceptual gap is almost inevitably found within the claims for the special status of hypertext. The search for difference has produced valuable heuristics and compelling insights along the way, from Poster and Hayles (both following in part Friedrich Kittler’s Discourse Networks, 1800/1900), and from Jay David Bolter’s early analysis of the ever-alterable digital writing space, to Steven Johnson’s more recent analysis of the empirical component of writing and the somatic adjustment to the machine. But the question of a theoretical difference, of a difference in kind and not in degree, is as yet unanswered.

     

    The problem of ontological difference can be initially displaced with an investigation of the ways in which hypertext fiction and hypermedia (primarily net art) have themselves handled the problem of their own difference, how they have imagined themselves as a distinctive form of textuality, precisely because they are strongly concerned with both theorizing and aestheticizing themselves, unlike primarily communicative and informational modes of writing (e.g., CNN.com). Digital textuality, or what I am calling hypertext, functions partly by creating itself as a discrete textual object, by referring to itself as itself.8 Instances of the use of self-referentiality as such a stylistic and thematic marker are too numerous to catalogue in their entirety, but examples can be found in Matthew Miller’s Trip (“No leads, no help, no future, no way…. We had no money, and almost no direction…. Better to know where you’re going than to know where you are”); M. D. Coverley’s “Fibonacci’s Daughter” (“and you, dear reader, did you expect a map?”); Shelley Jackson’s Eastgate novel, Patchwork Girl (“I can see only that part most immediately before me and have no sense of how that part relates to the rest”; “I sense a reluctance when I tow a frame forward into view…. I will show you the seductions of sequence and then I will let the aperture close”); Jane Yellowlees Douglas’s Eastgate novel, I have said nothing (“He can’t seem to get the narrative order of events quite right”); Linda Carroli and Josephine Wilson’s water always writes in plural (“But I fear that waiting will be extinguished by the pursuit of pure speed, flat and undiscerning”); or, Judy Malloy’s l0ve 0ne (“the room appeared to have no exits”).

     

    In its tendency toward self-referentiality and self-ironicization, hypertext participates in the stylistic, linguistic, and formal games played out in what is variously categorized as the literature of chaos, meta-fiction, or postmodernity: Julio Cortazar’s and Ana Castillo’s chapter orderings in Hopscotch and The Mixquiahuala Letters, respectively; Donald Barthelme’s interruption of Snow White with a questionnaire for reader-response; the novelistic fragments in Calvino’s If on a winter’s night a traveler; the problem of closure in Jessica Hagedorn’s Dogeaters, and others; linguistic hybridity and fragmentation in Joyce’s Ulysses and Finnegans Wake; the self-referentiality and attention to the mechanical process of narrative transmission in Art Spiegelman’s Maus I and II; and the often-cited meta-criticism of Borges’s fiction. Because hypertext emerges out of postmodern fiction and uses a similar set of symbols, it is unlikely that its allegorizing structure and systems of reference would be materially different. It is not simply that hypertext is inherently about itself in a postmodern or metafictional mode, however, but that it has constituted itself around the problem of its difference; self-referentiality is not just another or exchangeable move in the game, but a necessary move.9

     

    Katherine Hayles, following an unpublished MS by J. Yellowlees Douglas, similarly remarks upon the distinguishing rhetorical and formal properties of hypertexts, a category that she outlines so that it includes the media of print and the computer. She delineates hypertext in terms of three central components: “multiple reading paths; text that is chunked together in some way; and some kind of linking mechanism that connects the chunks together so as to create multiple reading paths” (“Transformation” 21).10 Acknowledging that the distinction between print and electronic texts is not inviolate, she goes on to note that “the boundary is to be regarded as heuristic, operating not as a rigid barrier but a borderland inviting playful forays that test the limits of the form by modifying, enlarging, or transforming them” (“Print” 6).11 Artists’ books–one of her primary examples of texts that illustrate a formal connection between print and electronic hypertexts–and children’s pop-up books are in fact able to stretch the medium of print to its limits, but they are not able to exploit the resources of language in the way that code is able to do. In contrast, Hayles comments on the “significant” differences in narrative between print and electronic texts with a claim that does not necessarily exclude print artists’ books such as Tom Phillips’s A Humument: A Treated Victorian Novel from the category of hypertext: “In electronic hypertext fiction, narrative takes shape as a network of possibilities rather than a preset sequence of texts” (“Transformation” 21). My argument here is that different modalities of textual performance must necessarily lead to the classification of print-precursors as precisely that: precursors and not hypertext per se. Digital textuality is able to achieve a spatial and temporal fluidity precisely because it is able to activate and manipulate the resources and complexity entrapped within language itself. Within analog text these spatial and temporal resources remain present, but only as potential and possibility.12

     

    My thesis thus proposes that hypertext must be conceived in terms of performance and that approaching the problem of a difference between the analog and the digital must be done in a mode through which digital textuality can emerge on its own terms.13 To that end, this essay proposes a theory of practice for hypertext by articulating its form and aspect of performance, a performance that functions to separate the digital from the analog. To link hypertext writing to the play of performance is also to allude to the mechanism of high-performance computing, the linking of computers and computer networks for the purposes of performing complex tasks. It is also to speak of this writing as a map that produces its object rather than one that replicates pre-traced structures. Such a focus on writing and textuality need not evade, obscure, or evaporate the materiality and material substrate of the text, as Mark Hansen argues in Embodying Technesis. The materiality of the medium and the technological substrate, primarily the chip, cannot be over-emphasized, but it is important to remark as well that we are still dealing with texts whose materiality lies in the modality of its own structure and performance, in its code. In this sense, we do not have a hyper-discursivity, but a materiality of hypertext that itself cannot be fixed, especially insofar as there is no “tape” per se. Echoing Clement Greenburg’s construal of modernist art, isolating the medium tends in the last instance both to revive the distinction between matter and information and to locate materiality and specificity in the physical components of the medium. However, the machinic component of the text cannot be disregarded or distilled: all texts are performative in some way but this does not mean that there is a not a significant change when the medium changes. As Anne-Marie Boisvert similarly notes, “in the reading of hypertext, the necessary, if not enforced relationship with the machine can’t be long forgotten” (“Hypertext”).

     

    Put more directly, both operator and machinic processor are crucial components of the performance of the system. The performance that encompasses user and the machinic system is an interactive one and to some degree collaborative. Further, the performance collapses processing and product, ends and means, input and output, within a system of “making” that is both complex and emergent.14 My task in this article is thus to articulate a mode of understanding hypertext in terms of two components of performance: that of the user and that of the system. The latter suggests the processing done by the computer, which itself performs or is even performative, and the former suggests the performance of the user who operates as a functioning mechanism in the text, an idea whose genealogy includes performance art’s situation and inclusion of the viewer within its boundaries, as well as the literary theorizations of the reader in terms of interaction, encounter, agonistic struggle, dialogue, and experience.15 As Jim Rosenberg notes of the synergy of agent and the constructivism of code: “the code might act as a *coparticipant* in the constructive act… [but] one constructs with and against and amongst code” (qtd. in Calley, “Pressing”).16 In this sense, the interactivity of the viewer is a functioning instrument in the work. We can say, then, that the experience of digital textuality is different from that of analog. In that it bears a certain similarity to the temporal and empirical structures of performance art, digital textuality is itself a “happening.”17

     

    The difference as such between hypertext and text, therefore, is not ontologically discernible and is locatable only in effect. Indeed, it is precisely that which cannot be revealed in the analog sense: its difference cannot be located in analog code, but only in digital. To conceive of this difference within the discursive frame of the analogical, in other words, is to frame it in terms under which it cannot emerge. The texts produced from HTML coding manuals–including those produced in other digital platforms and with other manuals and coding languages–are linked neither metaphysically nor ontologically, but through embedded codes of practice, codes that ascribe a certain relation among them on the basis of their performance. Hypertext optimally performs a different order of code, then, one that cannot be demonstrated metaphysically, but that can be analyzed in terms of complexity and emergence, that moment when the system programs and operates itself. Complexity appears as a discourse and occasional metaphor within hypertext criticism (e.g., in the rhetoric of dynamic systems, breakdowns, and so forth), but we need to move beyond this rhetoric and address complexity and emergence as paradoxically concrete. Complexity and emergence are not metaphors in my analysis but are instead scientific phenomena–aspects of hypertextuality and thus an inherent part of a logical system. Neither is quantifiable, which lends an even greater force to my locating them as non-locatable systemic components.

     

    In a complex system, the addition of discrete units does not equal the combined effect of the units; the sum is greater than the interactive parts. When discrete computers are linked to form a complex system, one cannot know in advance what the networked system will do. It is also impossible to predict in advance what the effects and significance of one alteration to the system will be. All one can know is that the system will be different. As John Holland, the inventor of genetic algorithms, notes of complex, generated systems: “The interactions between the parts are nonlinear; so the overall behavior cannot be obtained by summing the behaviors of the isolated components… more comes out than was put in” (225).18 Emergent properties, however, produce recurrent and persistent patterns in generated systems, as with weather patterns (42-5, 225-31).19 These properties and behaviors are internal to the system itself, and they are capable of producing auto-generative moments of self-organization, i.e., systemic states or systemic output that emerges without external input. “Evolutionary computation,” or genetic or automatic programming, is the means by which this mode of artificial intelligence is achieved (Tenhaaf).20 A recent Katherine Hayles article points the way toward articulating the relationship between performativity and complexity in terms of emergent behavior. In “Simulating Narratives: What Virtual Creatures Can Teach Us,” she also reads Poster’s manuscript on analog and digital textuality and transposes textuality into virtual realities. For Hayles, analogical relations are structured on a depth model; that is, the analogical requires links between the surface and depth units (13). For the analogical, complex codes produce a simple surface, and here we might think of the mythology of the Author that holds that a kind of complex interiority lends the text its depth. For the digital, on the other hand, a complex surface is produced by underlying simple models.

     

    There are moments, then, when a complex system formulates itself into an operating system, when the system becomes so complex as autotelically to run itself, or to program itself to solve problems. That a system whose future state is unpredictable and indeterminate until it actually emerges and comes into being should bear a certain connection to hypertext has been provisionally suggested by Hayles in a different context: “The actual narrative comes into existence (emerges globally) in conjunction with a specific reading” (“Artificial” 213). More apropos to my analysis, however, is her suggestion in the same article that a hypertext program is a “self-organizing system” capable of undergoing “spontaneous mutation” autotelically or collaboratively with other users (218). While she notes that print texts might require a similar syntactic organization, she also notes a difference in degree by extolling the “pay-off in redescribing spaces of encoding/decoding through the dynamics of self-organization [which] is obviously greater for electronic media rather than for printed words. When the words have lost their material bodies and become information, they move fast” (215). The difference in degree is reiterated in her claim that reader, technology, and text are all mutually and simultaneously constitutive “in a deeper, more interactive sense than is true of print texts” (214). The notion of self-organization, though, achieves its critical apotheosis in her analysis of “flickering signifiers” in How We Became Posthuman, wherein she articulates the differences in the material functioning and appearance of language:

     

    [Flickering signifiers are] characterized by their tendency toward unexpected metamorphoses, attenuations, and dispersions. Flickering signifiers signal an important shift in the plate tectonics of language…. When a text presents itself as a constantly refreshed image rather than a durable inscription, transformations can occur that would be unthinkable if matter or energy, rather than information patterns formed the primary basis for the systemic exchanges. (30)

     

    Such “metamorphoses” and “transformations” can be conceptually reprogrammed to include emergent behavior, which, like complexity, is a manifestation or quality of a system that cannot be thought of as summated as a whole or in terms of its component parts. It is that which cannot be fixed with any degree of totality, precision, or accuracy, that which cannot really be captured at all. Because it is not possible to locate the moment that brings together the computer units to produce something new, the quantum shift that changes the structure and system, complexity is itself not locatable. Nor can complexity be metaphysically demonstrated; it exists only in action, in performance, in terms of the influence of one component part over another. To remove its performance is to take away its difference; it is as if the computers were returned to their discrete units. That difference, the performance, is the trace, a moment in which hypertext itself performs. The operative difference of hypertext can only be revealed in the performing and tracing of itself, in its own instantiation. This, then, is the trace performance of hypertextuality–an argument in terms of performance rather than metaphysical difference.

     

    Jasper Johns, Flags (1965)
    oil on canvas
    © Jasper Johns/Licensed by VAGA, New York, NY

     

    The exemplary illustrative device for digital practice is the anamorphic, a visual trick of perspective based on hidden codes and structures of signification. Apart from its theorizing by Lacan and Zizek, anamorphosis has been important for hypertext critics such as Aarseth because of its reliance on visual perception, labor, and the active production of the text. For my purposes, Jasper Johns’s anamorphic painting Flags (1965) is the ideal visual emblem for the trace performance of hypertext.21 Johns’s painting of the two flags (one orange, black, and green, and the other monochromatic until the red, white, and blue colors are optically projected) is an illustration of the trace in that the anamorphic allows for meaning, the second flag, to appear. To perform Johns’s painting and allow it–Flags–to emerge, one cannot hold both objects, both flags, in view simultaneously or analogically. Meaning happens in the exchange, but the exchange can never be fixed–it just happens. Meaning exists in the interplay between the two flags. As with Nam June Paik’s multi-screen video installations, Johns moves into the realm of the untotalizable: neither a stable spectatorial position nor a fixed meaning is available. To fix on one image, one flag, one screen, one layer, is to exclude the others. Although the perspectival optics of the postmodern aesthetic require that the reader-viewer hold all of the various fragmented semiotic parts in her mind before she assembles them into a whole, we do not have a consciousness or mode of perception that would allow us to view the work as a complete whole. Flags is in fact a proto-hypertext, situated in a space between text and hypertext and gesturing toward a hypermedia effect. To say that hypertext is an effect is to name exactly the play that Johns knows: both flags cannot be held in the same moment of the sign. One flag must be there opaquely for the other to emerge; one flag cannot come into being without the other; one flag is marked only by losing the other. This is the performance aspect and modality of hypertext.22 It cannot be denied that something different happens when we work with hypertext, but we cannot fix what that something is–it exists as effect, as the trace. To describe it verbally is to destroy its effect, again because it cannot be placed within the analogical, but only in the mode of its performance–its location, not locatable in the metaphysical sense, is thus under erasure. The nodes that follow in this article–Combinatorial Writing, An-anamorphosis, and Linking–will be a continued displaying and situating of this new aspect of performance in the digital terms of hypertext. However, given the temporal acceleration and mass diffusion of hypermedia production, notwithstanding the collection work performed by journals, meta-lists, and installations, my analysis of digital practice cannot claim to be totalizing, comprehensive, or even complete. True to my own thematic, such a clear picture of the state of digital textuality can only be an unrealizable fantasy.

     

    Node 2: Combinatorial Writing

     

    And so I spent whole days taking apart and putting back together my puzzle; I invented new rules for the game, I drew hundreds of patterns, in a square, a rhomboid, a star design; but some essential cards were always left out, and some superfluous ones were always there in the midst. The patterns became so complicated (they took on a third dimension, becoming cubes, polyhedrons) that I myself was lost in them.

     

    –Italo Calvino, The Castle of Crossed Destinies

     

    Combinatorial writing in a digital environment often involves the use of new technologies to literalize, make visible, or otherwise animate the themes and stylistic features of contemporary writing.23 Perl scripting is a dominant mode of generating these texts practically and theoretically produced on the fly, and prominent examples include the cut-ups of Dadaism and William S. Burroughs, the permutational play of Raymond Queneau’s Exercises in Style, a story in about one hundred variations, and Italo Calvino’s tarot card literature machine in The Castle of Crossed Destinies, a text that partly informs Solitaire (Thorington), which is at once game, program, and story.24 These literature machines are essentially machines for generating texts according to a pre-existing code or procedure. But what words, phrases, events, or combination of words, phrases, and events, is necessary for a story to emerge, or for the system to change? I emphasize “story” here because much permutational or combinatorial writing–after the early experimentation with animating and translating the work of those such as Burroughs, Tristan Tzara, and the Oulipo movement–has been in the mode of narrative. These machinic story programs, also framed as participatory, collaborative, and interactive, function by addition and accretion.25 One enters the database, alters the material therein, and leaves behind a record of the visit in the form of an added phrase, an added word, an added twist in the narrative, or a completed and signed story. The interactive text network Assoziations-Blaster is one such example: “Anyone, including you, is allowed to contribute to the text database,” it advertises, “so with your contribution you can help to build up a non-linear map of all things that exist.” As a contributory visit to one of these sites can attest, language and narrative gaming in the particular context of hypertext fiction–assembling words and phrases into a whole–can be read as terroristic in the Lyotardian sense that every combination of phrases, every reading and writing, stands to cancel out other phrases and produce a kind of homogeneity, singularity, and univocality as a result (often puerile in content).26 But such combinatorial language gaming also operates on the principle of complexity: it, too, is a system based on accrual whose principal is that of the network and whose outcomes are unknowable and not univocal or totalizable. The semiotic effects of addition, accretion, and linking in such a system will be unpredictably magnified.27

     

    When André Breton began l’écriture automatique, he could not have predicted what the outcome of his performance was to be.28 Automatic writing is Roland Barthes’s scriptorial project made visual, performative in that the text comes into being at the moment of its digital birth.29 Michael Joyce draws a comparison similar to mine between hypertext and the performative: “Electronic texts present themselves in the medium of their dissolution. They are read where they are written; they are written as they are read” (Of Two Minds 235). While Aarseth takes issue with this mode of collapse of reader and writer by insisting on their ideological, epistemological, and geographic separation, the first part of Joyce’s claim strikes the chord of performance, as well as of dissolution, destruction, and a failure of realization and completion. In these terms we can also understand the moment of the digital text’s emergence–its coming into being at the moment of its performance. Such an understanding of language almost released from the subject has resonated strongly within hypertext criticism. Indeed, it is the condition of possibility for the argument in favor of the liberatory potential of hypertext, which is imagined to follow in the wake of Barthes’s reading of the text as “that social space that leaves no language safe or untouched, that allows no enunciative subject to hold the position of judge, teacher, analyst, confessor, or decoder” (81).30 Hypertext has been read as the fulfillment of the promise of contemporary critical theories of the death of the author, the network, the supplanting of the work by the text. Although skepticism about the rhetoric of the exemplum is necessary, the link between high theory and digital textuality is in fact already embedded in hypertext and media art, as it is Bill Seaman’s Red Dice, which recasts Stéphane Mallarmé’s “Dice Thrown Will Never Annul Chance”/ “Un coup de discussion jamais n’abolira le hasard” and combines techno-soundtrack, spoken text and images of old technology so as to produce and meditate upon the problematic of “new writing,” “computer-mediated poetic construction.”31

     

    The explanatory system of reference has thus necessarily expanded beyond and prior to hypertext criticism and theory, and digital textuality has been conceived as a “docuverse” (Nelson), montage (after Eisenstein), collage (Landow, Jameson), “an evolving virtual electronic collage” (Gaggi 138), recombination or “utopian plagiarism” (Critical Art Ensemble), assemblage (Talan Memmott), and as a “virtual graft” (Bill Seaman). Nearly all suggest the impossibility of synthesizing the parts into a complete and totalizable whole capable of being apprehended by the mode of perception and consciousness available to us now. However, the new media technologies have brought us to a point whereby collage is not simply a “feeble name” for the assemblage of discontinuous parts–as Jameson suggests in the context of his reading of Nam June Paik’s video installations, which he uses as an illustrative example for the geometral optics of the postmodern aesthetic, practiced by viewers who try impossibly to “see all the screens at once, in their radical and random difference” (31).32 Collage, also, is too material for a postmodern aesthetic and digital textuality alike. Complexity, in my analysis, is not a substitutive metaphor for collage but an inherent part of the system of hypertext itself. In this sense, it speaks to the liminal moment we inhabit between the consideration of hypertext as a genre, in terms of its formal and stylistic properties, and the consideration of new computer and scientific technologies and ideas, both as they are incorporated into electronic writing and as artifacts that themselves have effects and properties, such as autonomous behavior, that are inherent to the system of hypertext.

     

    John Cayley uncannily invokes the themes of performance and complexity with respect to compositional programming: “It points to an area of potential literature which is radically indeterminate (not simply the product of chance operations); which has some of the qualities of performance (without departing from the silence of reading)” (“Beyond” 183). Computer-generated and processed texts, for Cayley, allow for an innovative and even subversive departure from the standard node-link model of hypertextual composition–an escape into potentiality.33 Cayley persuasively argues that the “digital instantiation” of his work makes for substantive, “non-trivial differences” between his text-generation procedures and those of Emmett Williams, Jackson Mac Low and John Cage, all of which achieve a relative fixity through print: “any aleatory or ‘chance operation’ aspect of such work is only fully realized in a publication medium which actually displays immediate results of the aleatory procedure(s). Such works should, theoretically, never be the same from one reading to the next (except by extraordinary chance)” (“Beyond” 173). The use of transformational or generative algorithms in his work results in texts that, in a significant sense, program and emerge from themselves. As he says of one component of Indra’s Net, chance operations and the accrual of data input mean that “the procedure ‘learns’ new collocations and alters itself” (180).

     

    What is it about hypertext, then, that lends itself to the discussion of accrual, connectionism, the combinatorial, networks, patterns, the scriptorial, classification?34 As Ted Nelson writes of “transclusion,” the document per se is made up of the sum of parts materially located in different documents. The terrain of the document is marked by “transclusive quotation”–additive, inclusive content blocks assembled together and treated in the moment of reading as if they were isolate, closed or shut off from other, similar documents.35 That is, hypertext works by connection, assemblage, and combination–by connecting content blocks, phrases, phrase regimes, nodes, computers, programs, and lines of code. It is not about signification but mapping: not ordering, tracing, and fixing, but transmission, relay, and movement. Revolutionary becoming, one of the great emancipatory promises of hypertext, has thus been bound to the combinatorial, to connection, variation, movement, and invention (Deleuze and Guattari 77, 106). It is not accidental or incidental that one of the operative concepts here–connectionism–is itself connected, as Paul Cilliers has shown, to a Saussurean concept of language, because connectionism as a paradigm for complex systems, like language for Saussure, functions in a relational mode, by the position of nodes in relation to other nodes, or signs in relation to other signs. Systems must have rules in order for patterns and significance to arise, and patterns can only be traced through the establishment of differences among the components of the system and the elimination of that which is “superfluous.” A hypertext system, then, is paradigmatic; not all of the parts are necessary to the system, and the aesthetic whole can be sustained even through the destruction of a singular part (a node, perhaps) because the pattern rests with the code of production. Within a syntagmatic system, on the other hand, there are internally coherent but not necessarily linked patterns, and the removal of a singular part would affect the overall aesthetic pattern because the organic totality of the work would be entirely disrupted.36 Hypertext does not adhere to a fixed, rule-based system; rather, it takes on the quality of disturbed, deferred, bifurcated movement. In that its performance is that of the trace, emphasizing not only the play of difference, but also open systems, feedback loops, a flattened network, links, and the interval between links, its dynamic is more différance than difference.

     

    Node 3: An-anamorphosis

     

    A text is a text only if it hides the law of its composition and the rule of its game from the first glance, from the newcomer. In any case a text remains an imperceptible text. The law and the rule do not dwell in the inaccessibility of a secret, put simply, they do not deliver themselves up to the present or to anything that could rigorously be called a perception.

     

    –Jacques Derrida, Plato’s Pharmacy

     

    In the “Conclusion” to his book, Cybertext: Perspectives on Ergodic Literature, Espen Aarseth introduces the tension between the metamorphic (a text in which there is no final revelation or state of knowing) and the anamorphic (a text that presents an optical illusion as a vital hidden principle waiting to be discovered by a user that influences and produces the outcome, such as Jasper Johns’s Flags, William Scrots’s Edward VI, 3D pictures, and some ASCII art). Complex in its internal variations, Aarseth’s typology of cybertext includes interactive fiction, synchronous and asynchronous chat settings, and print hypertexts such as the I Ching, all of which are distinguished by the work the reader must perform in order to “traverse” the text. Because the anamorphic forces the reader to perform the qualitative work of orienting the text, it occupies the space of hypertext. Within the anamorphic text, there are hidden codes: its structures of signification and perception are concealed and a certain perspective is required in order to make its form and content visible. The anamorphic is a visual trick of perspective, and its regimes of perception and imperception are optical. The mode has been an important one for much hypertext fiction and criticism because of its emphasis on visual perception, labor, reader-construction, and the production of the text. But the anamorphic does not really belong to the order of the code; it belongs to a slightly different episteme than that of the fractal, for example, which is essentially a digitized code, a code of information made visible.37

     

    The anamorphic, on the other hand, is a physical instantiation of what is done in the act of reading, searching for “the one right combination,” the singular figure in the carpet, bringing it into focus, reducing complexity into perceptible patterns.38 Reading, animating, and righting the perspective of an anamorphic text, bringing it into being–and this is not bound to a particular medium–involves not only going, doing, choosing (or “narrative drifting” as Mark Amerika puts it), but also searching and finding, structures of reading and navigation that replicate the structures of gaming.39 Like Borges’s novel-labyrinth The Garden of Forking Paths in the story of the same name–an important point of reference for Stuart Moulthrop and many first-generation hypertext authors and critics–all possible outcomes are imagined to be coded into the hypertext and traced by readers who can discern the structural logic of the system. This is the model of Borges’s book, one of endless possibility, in which anything that can happen, does, and each possible plot outcome is pursued and multiplied into a seeming infinitude. Like knowing to go to the left in certain labyrinths, the key to reading the anamorphic text is meticulously to decode the system, to discern patterns and fault lines, and to attempt to bring the picture into focus.

     

    To read and to see is to attempt to impose a certain performance on the system; it is to engage with the system such that it performs and produces a coherent and legible output. In this sense, and in that it contains at least two mutually exclusive pictures and perspectival positions within its frame (e.g., Hans Holbein’s painting The Ambassadors <http://www.artchive.com/artchive/H/holbein/ambassadors.jpg.html> contains a “correct” picture of the ambassadors or of the skull, but not both simultaneously), the anamorphic has a strong connection to Eduardo Kac’s holopoetry. Kac identifies the primary formal quality of his holopoetry as “textual instability,” “the condition according to which a text does not preserve a single visual structure in time as it is read by the viewer, producing different and transitory verbal configurations in response to the beholder’s perceptual exploration” (“Holopoetry” 193).40 Such visual and verbal instability, whereby “the linguistic ordering factor of surfaces is disregarded in favor of an irregular fluctuation of signs that can never be grasped at once by the reader,” is achieved through what Kac terms the “fluid sign,” which resembles the anamorphic in the description of its operation: “[A] fluid sign is perceptually relative…. [it is] essentially a verbal sign that changes its overall visual configuration in time, therefore escaping the constancy of meaning a printed sign would have” (193-4). The perceptual change for Kac, however, is one achieved through time rather than dimension. Holopoetry strives for temporal mutability, so it is not a true anamorphic, but Kac’s theorizing of fluidity and the impossibility of a stable perceptual position does speak to the hypertextual process of construction, making, and interactive performance. With its dense textual and iconic layers and its abstraction of geometric, mathematic, lexical, and iconic arrangement, Talan Memmot’s Lexia to Perplexia similarly invites such a performance. Lexia to Perplexia presents the reader-user with difficulty, entanglement, abstraction, confusion, unreadability, even obfuscation. Rather than moving into clarity and visual focus with each link, the text assemblage gains a greater opacity and density and moves from signal to noise. To achieve this effect, it utilizes punctuation that intrudes upon the word (“Exe.Termination”), embedded commands and command structures (“PER[(p)[L(EX)]]ia”), and a creolized, mechanized language characterized by syntactical and semantic errors. In that it moves from encryption to an even greater encryption, the central trope of the text assemblage is interference, the mechanism by which chaos is produced and the text paradoxically emerges. In this sense, the text partly thematizes decomposition, incompleteness, the gap, a mode of perception not yet achieved, the mechanical and operational failures of code, and digital texts that do not “work.”

     

    Talan Memmott, Lexia to Perplexia

     

    My central anamorphic text, Johns’s Flags, itself fails within a digital environment. That is, the effects of Flags are not translatable to the screen, a setting where it does not work and cannot be brought correctly into focus.41 This failure, though, is less illustrative of mechanical or material failure than it is of conceptual difference. When Johns’s painting is projected in a digital environment, in other words, it produces a historical difference between the analog and the digital, a trajectory from the painterly to the hypertextual. Johns’s anamorphic image extends beyond and above the physical limits of the painting and produces an illusory effect of depth and dimension. Depth in this instance is a trick of perception. That is, Johns’s is already in some sense a flattened or postmodern anamorphosis, not the depth and dimensional model of the early modern anamorphic of Holbein, but a surface model that does not play with volume: not anamorphic, but an-anamorphic.

     

    An-anamorphosis–the digitized version of anamorphosis–paradoxically references the anamorphic but flattens out its volume.42 It simultaneously succeeds and collapses, and it contains within its collapse the trace, remainder, ghost image, negation, and evacuation of the anamorphic. Anamorphosis is a matter of correcting or adjusting one’s spectatorial position so as to locate a correct perspective. An-anamorphosis, on the other hand, presents us with a spectral image of collapsed depth–a smooth, flat, discrete surface rather than a modernist shattered surface that betrays an underlying depth.43 The hidden code suggests a depth model but it remains a projection and illusion of depth. An-anamorphosis illuminates the operative codes of the new media in that it, like hypertext, does not, and indeed cannot, articulate a border or attain a perfect realization. Neither an-anamorphosis nor hypertext can be full or finished but are instead incomplete–an axiomatic principle for computers that alludes also to the condition of digital textuality. This claim does not suggest that one cannot make sense of a hypertext, but that hypertext makes the blocking of knowledge manifest in its embedding of a range of unknowable forms, blind passages, and visual aporias within the code, from the cracked screens of Moulthrop’s Victory Garden, the blank screens of Jane Yellowlees Douglas’s I have said nothing, the dead ends of Matthew Miller’s Trip, through the undecipherable linguistic and iconic layers of Memmott’s Lexia to Perplexia. The anamorphic, the figure in the carpet, the “law of its composition and the rule of its game,” is offered and then withdrawn. The anamorphic does not just fail; it is withheld and sabotaged.

     

    Node 4: Linking

     

    Linkages are very, very quick, you know.

     

    –Jean-François Lyotard, “Links, The Unconscious, and the Sublime”

     

    Links and linkages suggest connections, signification, conversation, intertextuality, and even context, insofar as context, as Lyotard notes, “is the result of a series of linkages” (111). They range from ostentatious to demure, frenetic to sedate, unenclosed to hidden, anchored to ambient, animate to inanimate, associative to disassociative, random to ordered, and syntactic to paratactic. They leave behind the traces of their presence, their performance, recorded in history trackers (also a formal feature of Eastgate) and emblematized by the after-effects glow of fading pixels. In a felicitous link, meaning is constructed so that the next link might be submitted or followed, but links can be coded both to open up and to simulate the end of the play of signification.44 As part of an early attempt to theorize the function, linguistic meaning, and philosophical import of the link, Stuart Moulthrop asks: “In what sense is a dynamically computed, implicit link analogous to turning a page?” (“Beyond Node/Link”). The answer is that it is analogous only up to a point, insofar as the page has historically been the organizational paradigm of codex. So, too, is the link the primary quality, device, mechanism, formal feature of hypertext, even as it operates in different modes: contextual (emergence or disappearance dependent on the state of the user or the system); “discovered structures”; “computational nodes”; and “virtual hypermedia.”

     

    Eastgate’s “guard fields,” for example, allow the writer to create dynamic and conditional links, which are somewhat interactive in that they guide the reader and are dependent on prior user choices.45 They allow the writer to assign priorities to the various links and thereby define and force paths and control the reader’s access to the text. Because they preserve the architecture and structure of the text (with narrative as a specific consequential effect), guard fields often produce a sense of gaming, such that navigating becomes akin to finding hidden objects and surmounting obstacles so that a higher level might be reached.46 Within more complex coding systems, however, the link opens up the potentiality of hypertext: it is one means by which it can be truly innovative and sever the ties both to the form of the page and the historical category of print literature. While many hyperfiction and hypermedia artists want to move beyond the node-link model, especially in light of the expansion of coding systems beyond the relative simplicity of HTML, Marjorie Luesebrink argues that “it is precisely the link (and the varieties thereof) that provides the most fertile ground for literary expression… the hypertext link enables the spatial and temporal aspects of multilinear electronic texts to function as an erasure of hierarchies…. Links have just begun to provide us with a vocabulary of new literary gesture and movement”.47 According to Luesebrink, the link traverses space and time and has its own syntax, which we are still in the process of creating and revealing. I also want to retain the node-link model within critical view because the link is both the mechanism for the performance of hypertext’s difference and the means by which that difference is recognized.

     

    Form and content achieve a near-perfect suture in the first selection in the Eastgate Web Workshop: Judy Malloy’s lOve One, a first-generation hypertext composed in the generic form of a diary, with linked entries that enforce both non-sequentiality and the illusion of sequentiality. Its genre, that is, allows for a kind of retroactivity whereby a doer may be placed behind the deed, and causal triggering mechanisms established. But its most compelling and emblematic structural and thematic feature is its links: Malloy uses images of cathode-ray tubes that refer literally to the text displayed on the screen. Akin to reversing a garment’s seams, the cathode-ray tubes are a visible manifestation of the technological substrate of the text.48 Cathode-ray tubes, in fact, literally convert the electronic to the visual in that they are animated by electrons that are first pulled in all directions in order to produce a concentrative beam that leaves behind a trace of its presence by marking the spot at which the electrons hit the screen. In this structural aspect, lOve One is in line with other hypertexts’ foregrounding of the mechanism of their own performance, with code, directories, speed, waiting, trips, archives, paths, and bifurcations figuring as thematic and graphic elements. “Waiting will not be permitted to bring the nuanced possibilities of in-between,” announces Water always writes in plural, thereby thematizing the link, and its own interlinked, interconnected, even inter-networked, parts and the necessity of both piecing together and reading the space between those parts in order to move forward. Such a textual suturing must necessarily involve textual haunting, a reappearance of the paths taken and not taken: “my parts will remember me,” promises Patchwork Girl, not just about its re-created Frankensteinian monster, but also about itself.

     

    Terry Harpold comments upon the theme of navigational paths in his extended discussions of links and endings. A “hypertextual detour,” he suggests, might be articulated as

     

    a turn around a place you never get to, where something drops away between the multiple paths you might follow…. Doing something with the hypertext link substitutes narrative closure for the dilatory space of the gap between the threads. It disavows the narrative turn, and fetishizes the link. I want to stress this point, because it seems to me that the instrumental function of the link exactly matches the psychoanalytic definition of the fetish object…. For the pervert, the missing phallus is still there: no lack, no gap, no cut. To read the link as purely a directional or associative structure is, I would argue, to miss–to disavow–the divisions between the threads in a hypertext. “Missing” the divisions is how the intentionality of hypertext navigation is realized: the directedness of the movement across the link constitutes a kind of defense against the spiraling turn that the link obscures. (“Threnody” 172-3, 81)49

     

    Harpold’s psychoanalysis of electronic textuality draws a parallel between the pervert and the inefficient or even weak reader of hypertext: if the neurotic overrides or denies the effects of castration trauma by finding an object to fill in the lack, such a reader would perform as the pervert if she were to override, deny, or miss the gap in the link and try instead to substitute linear narrative. So Harpold suggests that we have to acknowledge that the ineradicable gap (“missingness”) forces us into a different narrative strategy, and if we deny that difference and supply the narrative turn, then we use the link-as-fetish to fill in the lack.

     

    Extracted from his article, “The Contingencies of the Hypertext Link,” “doing something” might be translated for the purposes of my thesis so that it becomes part of the context for performance, for my claim that links somehow always present us with the failure of realization signified by the older 404 messages. Linking, then, is both complex and a performance of complexity. Along with Harpold, Luesebrink argues that the link “represents a rupture in the ontological world.” Finally, prefacing his own analysis of “breakdowns,” Moulthrop glosses Harpold on the “deeply problematic nature of links” and the inevitability of their failure (“Pushing Back” 664). Despite his interest in the failure, brokenness, and incompleteness of the system, however, Moulthrop does allow for an ultimate and singular realization of the link, in that he will say that it does arrive, even if it fails to arrive at its intended or predicted destination: “only one possibility is realized, and likely as not it will not be what the reader anticipated” (“Pushing Back” 665). This moment of possibility, while conceived in breakdown, is simultaneously the spectacular moment of the birth of digital text, “the point of impact” (“Traveling”).50 The crash, then, is a productive one: out of the ashes of the wreck, “new order” may emerge (“Traveling”).

     

    Links, and the phrases, nodes, words, icons, and images that are linked, realize their meaning in relation to each other. Thus there is no inherent, originary, final, totalizing meaning behind their ordering–meaning only comes once they are assembled. Meaning, in fact, is a reverberation of the effects of linking. This illustrates the trace performance of hypertext once again. The patterns and the system become not only complicated, but complex–that in which one not only gets lost, but also vertiginously loses stable and totalizing perception. The patterns they form are thus those of reiteration, recurrence, and frequency, on the one hand, and dissolution, disintegration, termination, on the other. During the time lag that occurs before a link is actualized, that interval or period of waiting while a page loads from the top or fills in an outline, it is usually possible to make out the text that is emerging, and yet one might get it wrong. In the moments of waiting, as one waits for speech to emerge through a stammer and wants to speak for, to fill the gap and complete the utterance, there is an implicit invitation for the link to be written for, to be written through, to be reloaded, to be completed. The condition of the link is such that it is not occasionally broken–it is always broken and almost anti-presence, high-speed network connections notwithstanding. Links, in other words, are not stable, set systems that can entirely emerge from themselves. It makes intuitive sense, then, that hypertext should contain gaps and ellipses apart from the link, even that ellipses themselves should function as links, and that it should never come to rest with a period, a note of finality, or a demarcation of the end.51 Hypertext does not, and indeed cannot, articulate a border or attain a perfect realization. It is never full or finished. It is in fact incomplete.52

     

    Without a complete systems crash, hypertext by its very nature cannot come to rest partly because kinetic modality, or movement, with its emphasis on dynamism, process, fluidity, metamorphosis, transformation, is one of its defining formal properties. André Vallias, for example, writes of “continuous mutation” as the distinctive quality of digital media, derived from the progressivist movements of R&D and the haunting specter of an inevitable future obsolescence. However, Vallias’s commentary on the “permanent process of making and remaking, of endless ‘work in progress,’” of “instability” and “vertigo” is even more apropos with respect to my commentary on performance as the operative difference of hypertext (152).53 That is, what the <entropy8zuper.org> designers call “the physical need for wonder and poetry” is not fixable or locatable in, but required and produced by, and in movement with, the digital object, particularly with the movement and motion facilitated by new media technologies and specific software programs like Flash 54. Again, the hypertext system itself performs, but the human operator is another component of its performance. To return to my central visual examples: looking at a painting by Jackson Pollock is not absolutely different from looking at Jasper Johns’s Flags, but Johns forces the viewer into a certain performance, into the fluctuation of the trace that his painting performs. One of Jasper Johns’s flags must necessarily recede in order for the other to emerge, but the realization of the work can never be a perfect one, and in this respect it illustrates the way that hypertext code functions because hypertext itself cannot achieve a complete or finished realization. As a complex system, hypertext is internally inconsistent, and it gives a new resonance to Peter Lunenfeld’s claim that electronic textuality is in a state of “unfinish” and Michael Joyce’s claim that “electronic text can never be completed” (qtd. in Moulthrop, “Traveling”). In such a system, systematization itself is impossible.

     

    Notes

     

    1. This piece could not have emerged without the maieutic aid of Russell Samolsky, who withstood and responded to more questions than I could possibly enumerate. Karen Steigman helped me to find valuable material, online and in print. Jennifer Jones and Timothy Wager read and commented on an earlier version, entitled, “How to Make Things With Words: Hypertext and Literary Value,” which was delivered as a talk for the Transcriptions Colloquia in the English department at the University of California, Santa Barbara (<http://transcriptions.english.ucsb.edu/>) in May 2000. I am grateful to Alan Liu and Bill Warner for the invitation and the necessary inspiration. Students in my Electronic Literature & Culture (undergraduate; Spring 2000) and Hypertext Fiction & Theory (graduate; Winter 1999) classes at the University of Minnesota made a willing, enthusiastic, and provocative audience for parts of the thesis. Another section of the article was presented at the ACLA 2001, and I am grateful to Espen Aarseth and Mark Hansen for posing questions that re-oriented my thinking. Finally, Katherine Hayles’s critical suggestions have been instrumental, and her latest NEH seminar, “Literature in Transition,” provided the perfect environment to complete the revisions.

     

    2. See Vannevar Bush, “As We May Think,” Atlantic Monthly (Jul. 1945); Ted Nelson, Literary Machines.

     

    3. Mark Poster, “What’s the Matter with the Internet,” UC Davis lecture, April 1998, published as the chapter “Authors Analogue and Digital” in his recent book, What’s the Matter with the Internet? Poster’s delineation of the digital text in this book echoes his earlier analysis of the “mode of information” in the book named as such, wherein he makes the following related claims: “Electronic communications are new language experiences in part by virtue of electrification. But how are they different from ordinary speech and writing? And what is the significance of this difference?” (Mode 1); “I do assert the emergence of a certain ‘new’” (19); “After this point the natural, material limits of spoken and written language no longer hold” (74); “Digital encoding makes no attempt to represent or imitate and this is how it differs from analog encoding” (94), a claim that is a precursor to the discussion of waves and grooves in the Matter book; and, finally, “Electronic language, on the contrary, does not lend itself to being so framed. It is everywhere and nowhere, always and never. It is truly material/immaterial” (85).

     

    4. In spite of, and at times because of, the burgeoning academic fields devoted to computer-mediated communication, cyberculture, internet studies, and the digital humanities, there is still a commonly held assumption that digital literacy is incompatible with traditional literacy practices, and even that digital culture has trained students out of the market for print-bound literary texts in particular. In this sense, a facility for reading computer screens is imagined as both unrelated and opposed to knowing how to read a poem or novel.

     

    5. By contrast, Paul Levinson claims in general terms that the phonetic alphabet was the “first digital medium” in that the bits, the letters, correspond to sound and not things (Soft Edge 11-20).

     

    6. Michael Joyce suggests that digital textuality ultimately resists such entrapment: “Electronic text–the topographic, truly digital writing–even now resists attempts to wrestle it back into analogue or modify its shape into the shape of print. Its resistance is its malleability” (Two Minds 237).

     

    7. Poster’s argument in “Authors Analogue and Digital” (What’s the Matter with the Internet?)–that the digital is not just supplementing but replacing the analog–differs from Landow’s in that he is not using Foucault to talk about obliterating the line between the reader and author; rather, he wants to uphold a set of distinctions between modes of authorship, though it is implicitly the case that his sense of digital authorship would lead to a reconfiguration of the role of the reader. Bringing together the technical conditions of authorship with the theoretical question of authorship (although Espen Aaresth would have problems with this linking) lends itself to a rethinking of the figure of the reader and it also implies a dichotomous or even substitutive relationship between reader and author.

     

    8. Jurgen Fauth takes issue with the tendency of hypertext to be endlessly self-reflexive (which often is, as Bolter notes of Afternoon, “an allegory of the act of reading” [qtd. in Fauth]). For another articulation of the pitfalls of hypertext’s pervasive self-referentiality of hypertext, see Robert Kendall, “But I Know What I Like,” SIGWEB Newsletter 8.2 (Jun. 1999); also posted at <http://www.wordcircuits.com/comment/htlit_5.htm>.

     

    9. Such a meta-critical and self-reflexive mode is acknowledged within much hypertext criticism, as when Michael Joyce notes that “most hypertext fictions include these self-reflexive passages” (“Nonce” 591). Also see Greg Ulmer’s “Grammatology Hypermedia” on “reflexive structuration, by means of which a text shows what it is telling, does what it says, displays its own making, reflects its own action” (par. 7).

     

    10. For the same claim (“multiple reading paths; some kind of linking mechanism; and chunked text”), also see Hayles’s “Print is Flat” 5.

     

    11. Hayles articulates an 8-point typology of hypertexts in digital form as follows: “Electronic Hypertexts are Dynamic Images; Electronic Hypertexts Include Both Analogue Resemblance and Digital Coding; Electronic Hypertexts Are Generated Through Fragmentation and Recombination; Electronic Hypertexts Have Depth and Operate in Three Dimensions; Electronic Hypertexts Are Mutable and Transformable; Electronic Hypertexts Are Spaces to Navigate; Electronic Hypertexts Are Written and Read in Distributed Cognitive Environments; Electronic Hypertexts Initiate and Demand Cyborg Reading Practices” (“Print” 7-8).

     

    12. As will become clear throughout the article, this claim is not structured so as to disavow Espen Aarseth’s typology of cybertext as much as it is to offer the beginnings of a parallel and alternative typology.

     

    13. In a different use of the performance paradigm, game-designer Brenda Laurel has employed theatrical metaphors in order to understand human-computer interaction and suggested that the ideal interface should correspond with the theatre. For Laurel, Aristotle’s Poetics is the best functional metaphor for computer art, and a program needs to be thought of as a performance for the user, one that masks the technical component of production and its artificiality. The power of the theatrical metaphor for the interface is that the theatre is “fuzzy” and thereby necessarily involves repetition with variation and difference (23).

     

    14. Timothy Allen Jackson also comments on the new media aesthetic in terms of process and the dynamic quality of the system: “Such an aesthetic is projective rather than reflective, complex and dynamic rather than simple and static, often focusing on process more than product, and resembling a verb more than a noun” (348).

     

    15. For example, the theme of performance in relation to the reader could be linked to literary theories of reading proposed by Ingarden (“encounter”), Bakhtin (“dialogue”), Jauss (“convergence”), and Iser (“interaction”).

     

    16. In a different forum, Rosenberg argues against Nick Montfort’s review of Aarseth’s Cybertext and subsequent alignment of hypertext with Chomsky’s hierarchy of grammars (finite automata) by noting that one “simply cannot conclude that hypertext ‘is’ a finite state machine,” whether or not it maintains a strict node-link model (“Positioning”). Montfort gives a primacy to the computational power of cybertext machines, which he distinguishes on the basis of their ability to calculate.

     

    17. On temporality and the digital aesthetic, see Marlena Corcoran, “Digital Transformations of Time: The Aesthetics of the Internet,” Leonardo 29.5 (1995): 375-378. On anti- or non-object art, see John Perreault, “Introduction,” TriQuarterly 32 (Winter 1975): 1-5; and Tommaso Trini, “Intervista con Ian Wilson/Ian Wilson, An Interview” Data 1.1 (Sep. 1971): 32-4. Conceptual art also separates out product–“art”–from material substance. For critical commentary on conceptual or dematerialized art, see Alexander Alberro and Patricia Norvell, eds., Recording Conceptual Art (Berkeley: U of California P, 2001); Alexander Alberro and Blake Stimson, eds., Conceptual Art: A Critical Anthology (Cambridge: MIT Press, 1999); Lucy Lippard, Six Years (Berkeley: U of California P, 1973); Tony Godfrey, Conceptual Art (London: Phaidon, 1998).

     

    18. Also see Holland, Hidden Order:How Adaptation Builds Complexity (Cambridge: Perseus Books, 1995). On complexity, see Paul Cilliers; Brian H. Kaye, Chaos and Complexity (New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1993); Roger Lewin, Complexity: Life at the Edge of Chaos (New York: Macmillan, 1992); and M. Mitchell Waldrop, Complexity: The Emerging Science At the Edge of Order and Chaos (New York: Simon and Schuster, 1992). The analysis of complex systems is sustained even through management theory: “the whole shows behaviours which cannot be gleaned by examining the parts alone. The interactions between the parts are crucial, and produce phenomena such as self-organization and adaptation” (McKergow 721-22). Mark C. Taylor’s forthcoming book, The Moment of Complexity: Emerging Network Culture (Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2002) speaks to my concern with emergence as a component and effect of the hypertextual system, but it arrived too late to be incorporated within this article.

     

    19. My discussion of patterns vis-à-vis hypertext refers in a general sense to systems theory, a topic that has been explored by theorists of science and literature such as Hayles, Cilliers, William Paulson, and John Johnston. On systems theory, see What is Systems Theory?, <http://pespmc1.vub.ac.be/SYSTHEOR.html>; Cybernetics, Systems Theory and Complexity, <http://www.cudenver.edu/~mryder/itc_data/complexity.html>; A Curriculum for Cybernetics and Systems Theory, <http://www.well.com/user/abs/curriculum.html>; and John Gowan’s General Systems HomePage, <http://www.people.cornell.edu/pages/jag8/>. On chaotic systems and chaos, see James Gleick, Chaos and Chaotic Systems, <http://dept.physics.upenn.edu/courses/gladney/mathphys/
    subsection3_2_5.html
    >. Pamela Jennings touches on intedeterminacy, chaos theory, fuzzy logic, and open structures in relation to new media in “Narrative Structures for New Media: Towards a New Definition,” Leonardo 29.5 (1996): 345-50.

     

    20. Also see <http://www.genetic-programming.org>, as well as Genetic Programming, Inc. <http://www.genetic-programming.com>.

     

    21. Jasper Johns, Flags is online at <http://www.walkerart.org/resources/res_pc_johns2.html>. For historical and technical analyses of the device of the anamorphic, see Jurgis Baltrusaitis, Anamorphic Art, trans. W. J. Strachan (Cambridge: Chadwyck-Healey, 1977) and Fred Leeman, Hidden Images: Games of Perception, Anamorphic Art, Illusion (New York: Harry N. Abrams, 1976).

     

    22. In the catalog for Jack Burnham’s “Software” art exhibition at the Jewish Museum (1970), Ted Nelson also conceives of hypertext from its conceptual genesis as “writing that can branch or perform.” See “The Crafting of Media,” <http://www.sfc.keio.ac.jp/~ted/TN/PUBS/CraftMedia.html>.

     

    23. The phrase “combinatory literature” can be traced to François Le Lionnais’s afterword to Raymond Queneau’s Cent Mille Milliards de poèmes (Paris: Gallimard, 1961). It is later developed by Umberto Eco with respect to narrative forms, and by Oulipians such as Harry Mathews.

     

    24. The mathematical formulas of the Oulipo movement have been an influential genealogical and stylistic precursor for hypertext, particularly since some Oulipians were themselves inspired by programming and had already begun the work of using computers as an tool in literary production, and early hypertext work frequently cited and even programmed their work so as further to “animate” and apply their algorithms, e.g., Permutationen <http://userpage.fu-berlin.de/~cantsin/permutations/index.cgi>. The work of the French literary group, Oulipo, of which Queneau and Calvino were members, based its poetics on permutational possibility and procedure. In that both tend on occasion to work with elemental units–the Reader (addressed) and reader (actual) for Calvino’s If on a winter’s night a traveler, for example, or lipograms, or the famous bricks of Carl Andre–Oulipo could be profitably linked to the so-termed Minimalist artists that came to prominence in the 1960s and 1970s, particularly Andre, Sol LeWitt, Donald Judd, and Robert Morris. Also see Stéphane Susana, “A Roundup of Constrained Writing on the Web,” ebr 10 (Winter 1999/2000) <http://www.altx.com/ebr/ebr10/10sus.htm>. For an English-language collection of their work, see Warren Motte, ed., Oulipo: A Primer of Potential Literature (Lincoln, NE: U of Nebraska P, 1986). On Calvino and the combinatorial, see Jerry A. Varsava, “Calvino’s Combinative Aesthetics: Theory and Practice,” Review of Contemporary Fiction 6.2 (Summer 1986): 11-18.

     

    25. In the larger project, I pursue the topic of computer and computer-generated poetry at greater length. After Rosenberg, see Philippe Bootz, “Poetic Machinations,” Visible Language 30.2 (1996): 118-37; and Charles Hartman’s memoir, Virtual Muse: Experiments in Computer Poetry (Hanover: Wesleyan UP, 1996), with a downloadable Mac platform program at <http://camel2.conncoll.edu/academics/departments/
    english/cohar/programs/
    > With respect to the analogy between poetry and technology, Carrie Noland, in her genealogy from the nineteenth-century avant-garde French lyric poets to U.S. performance poetries (particularly those of Laurie Anderson and Patti Smith), wonders whether the “technopoems of the future” will embrace technology to the extent that they risk “losing the integrity of poetry as a language-based and voice-generated genre” (216, 15). Also see Rosenberg on Balpe generator poetry and the French poésie animée school (Jean-Pierre Balpe, Trois mythologies et un poète aveugle, an installation featuring poem-generating and music-generating robots [Centre Georges-Pompidou 1997]).

     

    26. Koskimaa also comments upon the intimate relation between reading and gaming: “the aspect of mastering a computer environment is an essential part of the hyperfiction reading experience, an aspect common with playing computer games.”

     

    27. In reference to the collaborative “International Internet Chain Art Project,” Gaggi makes a related point concerning unpredictability, although his argumentative focus is the radically reconfigured notion of authorship that results from the critical and practical challenge of the ideas of individuality, autonomy, and genius: “Each participant alters, adds to, or comments on whatever he or she receives. Under such circumstances, surprise–as well as disappointment–is always possible. Although contributions are matters of conscious decisions individuals make–except when technical problems result in ‘corruption’–those who create an image or text cannot predict or control what will happen to it” (139).

     

    28. For a discussion of the principle of “psychic automatism,” Breton and Philippe Soupault’s Les Champs magnétiques (1919), and Breton’s Manifeste (1924), see Elza Adamowiccz, Surrealist collage in text and image: Dissecting the exquisite corpse (Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1998) 5-10. It was not just Surrealism but Fluxism as well that maintained an interest in automatic writing. Jackson Pollock’s painting would be another instance of the scriptor at work.

     

    29. As Russell Samolsky notes, the felicity or “efficacy of any performative is always, in some sense, the death of the author,” a notion whose literal effects he demonstrates in the example of Kafka’s relationship to the Holocaust (191).

     

    30. On the liberatory argument, see, as just one of many examples, Gaggi 103-5.

     

    31. Also, Noah Wardrip-Fruin links new media particularly to Deleuze and Guattari, A Thousand Plateaus (371). Seaman’s Red Dice was exhibited at the Art Gallery of New South Wales (3-26 Mar. 2000) as part of the Telstra Adelaide Festival 2000. See <http://www.camtech.net.au/cacsa/program/2000.html>.

     

    32. Lacan treats “geometral” or “flat” perspective and the commingling of art and science in his reading of anamorphosis and the gaze; see The Seminar of Jacques Lacan: Book XI, trans. Alan Sheridan (New York: W.W. Norton, 1977).

     

    33. In the Montreal electronic art magazine, CIAC, Sylvie Parent provides another typology for electronic literature based on the variant processing of text by the computer: collaborative texts, text’s new space, text generating programs, language atomization, and moving text. See <http://www.ciac.ca/magazine/archives/no_9/en/pers-intro.html>.

     

    34. On connectionism, see Cilliers, especially 25-47.

     

    35. Ted Nelson, Literary Machines 93.1 (1993 preface, unnumbered page 5).

     

    36. See Peter Bürger’s schema for the organic and the non-organic artwork in Theory of the Avant-Garde, trans. Michael Shaw (Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1984): 80.

     

    37. In a way this is a modern vs. postmodern distinction, but one does not have to choose one over the other.

     

    38. See Henry James, “The Figure in the Carpet” 381; and see also the passage that introduces the figure itself: “the thing we were all so blank about was vividly there. It was something like a complex figure in a Persian carpet” (372).

     

    39. With hypertext, “readership has been restored but not transcended” (Aarseth 94).

     

    40. Also see Kac, “Key Concepts of Holopoetry,” ebr 5 (Spring 1997) <http://www.altx.com/ebr/ebr5/kac.htm> and his website, with examples of his work, at <http://www.ekac.org/>.

     

    41. I am grateful to Richard Helgerson for asking a variation of the question that produced this line of argument: does it matter that the Jasper Johns is a modern text not meant for the screen?

     

    42. My nomenclature here might appear to connect to the bilingual, Flash-intensive “electronic and interactive journal that examines the human condition in the digital age”–Chair et Métal / Metal and Flesh: The Digital Anamorphosis of the Universe <http://www.artsci.lsu.edu/fai/metal.html>–but the journal’s subtitle does not have an immediately obvious significance. Rather, the concept of the an-anamorphic arose in a conversation with Russell Samolsky; from this collaborative moment, the concept and Jasper Johns as an illustrative example came into being.

     

    43. Martin Jay comments on anamorphic vision, which “helps us understand the complexities of a visual register which is not planimetric but which has all these complicated scenes that are not reducible to any one coherent space” (qtd. in Foster 84). Planimetry deals with the measurement of surfaces, so complexity of vision here has to do with volume. The postmodern anamorphic or an-anamorphic, however, puts us back in the register or space of the planimetric.

     

    44. For a discussion of linking in a hypertext environment, see George P. Landow, Hypertext 2.0 (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1997) 11-20; Harpold, “Threnody” and “The Contingencies of the Hypertext Link”; and “Conclusions,” Hyper/Text/Theory, ed. George Landow (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1994): 189-222. Also, the hypertext author Jeff Parker is currently at work on a formal analysis of the “poetics of the link.”

     

    45. See Mark Bernstein on “volatile” hypertext, “Architectures for Volatile Hypertext,” Hypertext ’91 Proceedings (Baltimore: ACM, 1991): 243-60; robin, “Hypertext for Writers: A Review of Software,” EJournal 3.3 (Nov. 1993): <http://www.hanover.edu/philos/ejournal/archive/ej-3-3.txt>; the entry for “conditional links” in the alt.hypertext FAQ; Bolter on guard fields in Writing Space; J. Yellowlees Douglas on the seemingly contradictory harmony between varied and multiple links and reader expections in “Wandering Through the Labyrinth: Encountering Interactive Fiction,” Computers and Composition 6.3 (Aug. 1989): 93-101; Robert Coover on the differences among links in FEED <http://www.feedmag.com/html/document/98.02nelson/coover1.html>; and Robert Kendall, “Hypertextual Dynamics in A Life Set for Two,” Proceedings of the Seventh ACM Conference on Hypertext, <http://www.wordcircuits.com/kendall/essays/ht96.htm>. It is precisely guard fields that lead Raine Koskimaa to argue that the bricoleur metaphor so present within hypertext criticism is illegitimate vis-à-vis the Eastgate texts, primarily because the texts withhold information about their own structures. Without clear maps, Koskimaa suggests, we cannot properly speak of bricolage (VII). Finally, it is important to note that Storyspace, Flash, related authoring platforms, and HTML itself all to some degree limit the behavior of the hypertext system, but this is not to say that the system is either deterministic, with standardized and predictable behavior, or incapable of autonomous behavior.

     

    46. With software-produced and -mediated hypertexts, a variety of links and a kind of structure are possible, while with net-based hypertexts, there is presumably a lesser degree of structure, and links need not proceed from window to window, or lexia to lexia. See the description of the Storyspace software in the alt-hypertext FAQ. For a comprehensive student project on guard fields, see Loran Gutt, “Hypertext,” <http://www.princeton.edu/~lzgutt/hypertext/paper3/node2.html>.

     

    47. See, for example, Stuart Moulthrop, “Beyond Node/Link,” a node in The Shadow of an Informand: An Experiment in Hypertext Rhetoric; John Cayley’s “Beyond Codexspace: Potentialities of Literary Cybertext” and Jim Rosenberg’s “Structure of Hypertext Activity.” Calls to augment and restructure the node-link paradigm were made by Frank Halacz in his keynote addresses at the Hypertext ’89 and Hypertext ’91 conferences <http://www.parc.xerox.com/spl/projects/halasz-keynote/review/>. Also see Steven J. DeRose, “Expanding the Notion of Links,” Hypertext ’89 Proceedings, ed. Norman Meyrowitz (New York: Association for Computing Machinery, 1989) 249-59; and H. Van Dyke Parunak, “Don’t Link Me In: Set Based Hypermedia for Taxonomic Reasoning,” Proceedings of Hypertext ’91 (New York: Association for Computing Machinery, 1991) 233-42.

     

    48. Also see Ted Nelson on the cathode-ray tube (Dream Machines 84-5).

     

    49. Also see Adrianne Wortzel on the openness and dynamism of links, which she theorizes as the spaces that “allow chance, desire, and drive to drift unbound” (362).

     

    50. David Miall briefly argues that Moulthrop’s claims for the difference of hypertext, notably the qualities of multiplicity and breakdown, are not tenable as such and that the particularities Moultrop ascribes to hypertextuality “replicate something we have always known about the form of literary texts.”

     

    51. J. Yellowlees Douglas remarks briefly hypertext’s presentation of “discrete pieces of information and ellipses” in “Wandering Through the Labyrinth: Encountering Interactive Fiction,” Computers and Composition 6.3 (Aug. 1989): 93-101, <http://www.cwrl.utexas.edu/~ccjrnl/Archives/v6/6_3_html/
    6_3_6_Douglas.html
    >.

     

    52. The allusion to Gödel’s theorem with respect to hypertextual incompleteness is just that, an allusion, rather than an application.

     

    53. There is a conjunction between the two in that Vallias belongs to one branch of artistic production that has moved toward movement as both concept and integrative device, a “movement” to create what E. M. de Melo e Castro terms “videopoetry,” which has been flourishing in Brazilian and Portuguese experimental poetry circles and shares the formal interests of the various North American experimental poets who work with software applications such as Flash to create poems experienced spatially, temporally, visually, aurally, and linguistically. See, for example, Thom Swiss, “Genius” <http://www.differenceofone.com/genius/genius.html> Similarly, Ladislao Pablo Györi’s brief manifesto on “Virtual Poetry” calls for the production of poems “experienced by means of partially or fully immersive interface devices” (Visible Language 30.2 [1996]). The manifesto and examples of his work can be found at <http://megahertz.njit.edu/~cfunk/gyori.html>.

     

    54. Now authoring-design software applications such as Flash and QuickTime have taken design to the point whereby the text objects may be watched as film and media installations, e.g., the digital poems and works from Born Magazine <http://www.bornmag.com/> and the curated site Poems That Go <http://www.poemsthatgo.com/>, both of which rely almost exclusively on Flash.

    Works Cited

     

    • Aarseth, Espen. Cybertext: Perspectives on Ergodic Literature. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1997.
    • Barthes, Roland. “From Work to Text.” Image-Music-Text. Trans. Stephen Heath. New York: Hill and Wang, 1977. 155-64.
    • Boisvert, Anne-Marie. “Cybertext.” CIAC (2001). <http://www.ciac.ca/magazine/>.
    • —. “Hypertext: Feature on Electronic Literature.” CIAC 9 (Dec. 1999). <http://www.ciac.ca/magazine/archives/no_9/en/dossier.html>.
    • Bolter, Jay David. Writing Space: The Computer, Hypertext, and the History of Writing. New York: Lawrence Erlbaum, 1990.
    • Borges, Jorge Luis. Ficciones. Trans. Anthony Kerrigan. New York: Grove Press, 1962.
    • Calvino, Italo. The Castle of Crossed Destinies. Trans. William Weaver. New York: Vintage, 1997.
    • Cayley, John. “Beyond Codexspace: Potentialities of Literary Cybertext.” Visible Language 30.2 (1996): 164-83.
    • —. “Pressing the ‘Reveal Code’ Key.” EJournal 6.1 (Mar. 1996). <http://www.hanover.edu/philos/ejournal/archive/ej-6-1.txt>.
    • Cilliers, Paul. Complexity and Postmodernism. New York: Routledge, 1998.
    • Deleuze, Gilles, and Felix Guattari. A Thousand Plateaus. Trans. Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: Minnesota UP, 1980.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “Plato’s Pharmacy.” Dissemination. Trans. Barbara Johnson. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1981.
    • Douglas, Jane Yellowlees. I have said nothing. Eastgate Systems. <http://www.eastgate.com>
    • Druckrey, Timothy, ed. Electronic Culture: Technology and Visual Representation. New York: Aperture, 1996.
    • Fauth, Jurgen. “Poles in Your Face: The Promises and Pitfalls of Hyperfiction.” Mississippi Review 1.6 (Sep. 1995). <http://orca.st.usm.edu/mrw/1995/06-jurge.html>.
    • Foster, Hal, ed. Vision and Visuality. New York: New Press, 1988.
    • Gaggi, Silvio. From Text to Hypertext: Decentering the Subject in Fiction, Film, the Visual Arts, and Electronic Media. Philadelphia: U of Pennsylvania P, 1997.
    • Galloway, Alex. “Perl is My Medium–An Interview with Lisa Jevbratt.” Rhizome.org 2 Feb. 2001. <http://rhizome.org/object.rhiz?2218>.
    • Gleick, James. Chaos: Making a New Science. New York: Penguin Books, 1987.
    • Gödel, Kurt. On Formally Undecidable Propositions of Principia Mathematica and Related Systems. Trans. B. Meltzer. New York: Dover Publications, 1992.
    • Hansen, Mark. Embodying Technesis: Technology Beyond Writing. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 2000.
    • Harpold, Terry. “The Contingencies of the Hypertext Link.” Writing on the Edge 2.2 (Spring 1991): 126-37.
    • —. “Threnody: Psychoanalytic Digressions on the Subject of Hypertexts.” Hypermedia and Literary Studies. Ed. Paul Delaney and George Landow. Cambridge: MIT Press, 1991. 171-181.
    • Hartman, Charles O. Virtual Muse: Experiments in Computer Poetry. Hanover, NH: Wesleyan UP, 1996.
    • Hayles, N. Katherine. “Artificial Life and Literary Culture.” Cyberspace Textuality. Ed. Marie-Laure Ryan. 205-23.
    • —. How We Became Posthuman: Virtual Bodies in Cybernetics, Literature, and Informatics. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1999.
    • —. “Print is Flat, Code is Deep: The Importance of Media-Specific Analysis.” Forthcoming in Poetics Today (Fall 2001). Unpublished MS 27 pp.
    • —. “Simulating Narratives: What Virtual Creatures Can Teach Us.” Critical Inquiry 26.1 (Autumn 1999): 1-26.
    • —. “The Transformation of Narrative and the Materiality of Hypertext.” Narrative 9.1 (Jan. 2001): 21-39.
    • Holland, John H. Emergence: From Chaos to Order. Cambridge: Perseus Books, 1998.
    • Jackson, Shelley. Patchwork Girl. Eastgate Systems. <http://www.eastgate.com>
    • Jackson, Timothy Allen. “Towards a New Media Aesthetic.” Reading Digital Culture. Ed. David Trend. Oxford: Blackwell, 2001. 347-53.
    • James, Henry. “The Figure in the Carpet.” The Figure in the Carpet and Other Stories. Ed. Frank Kermode. New York: Penguin, 1986. 357-400.
    • Jameson, Fredric. Postmodernism; or, the Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. London: Verso, 1996.
    • Johnson, Steven. Interface Culture: How New Technology Transforms the Way We Create and Communicate. San Francisco: Harper, 1997.
    • Joyce, Michael. “Nonce Upon Some Times: Rereading Hypertext Fiction.” Modern Fiction Studies 43.3 (Fall 1997): 579-97.
    • —. Of Two Minds: Hypertext Pedagogy and Poetics. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1995.
    • —. Othermindedness. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 2001.
    • Kac, Eduardo. “Holopoetry.” Visible Language 30.2 (1996): 184-213.
    • Kellert, Stephen H. In the Wake of Chaos: Unpredictable Order in Dynamical Systems. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1993.
    • Koskimaa, Raine. “Visual Structuring of Hypertext Narratives.” ebr 6 (Winter 1997/1998). <http://www.altx.com/ebr/ebr6/6koskimaa/6koski.htm>.
    • Landow, George. “Hypertext as Collage-Writing.” Lunenfeld 151-170.
    • Laurel, Brenda. Computers as Theatre. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1992.
    • Levinson, Paul. The Soft Edge: A Natural History and Future of the Information Revolution. New York: Routledge, 1997.
    • Luesebrink, Marjorie. “Of Tea Cozy and Link.” ebr 11 (Winter 2000/2001). <http://www.altx.com/ebr/riposte/rip11/rip11cov.htm>.
    • Lunenfeld, Peter, ed. The Digital Dialectic: New Essays on New Media. Cambridge: MIT Press, 1999.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François. “Links, The Unconscious, and the Sublime.” Ellipsis 1.1 (Spring 1990): 109-129.
    • McKergow, Mark. “Complexity Science and Management: What’s in it for Business?” Long Range Planning 29.5 (1996): 721-722.
    • Merrell, Floyd. Simplicity and Complexity: Pondering Literature, Science, and Painting. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1998.
    • Miall, David. “Moulthrop: celebrating multiplicity and breakdown” (7 Aug. 1999). <http://www.arts.ualberta.ca/~dmiall/hyperead/moulthp1.htm>.
    • Miller, J. Hillis. Fiction and Repetition: Seven English Novels. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1985.
    • Montfort, Nick. “Cybertext Killed the Hypertext Star.” Rev. of Cybertext: Perspectives on Ergodic Literature, by Espen J. Aarseth. ebr 11 (Winter 2000/2001). <http://www.altx.com/ebr/ebr11/11mon/>.
    • Morris, Robert. Continuous Project Altered Daily. Cambridge: MIT Press, 1993.
    • Motte, Warren F., Jr., ed. Oulipo: A Primer of Potential Literature. Trans. Warren F. Motte, Jr. Lincoln, NE: U of Nebraska P, 1986.
    • Moulthrop, Stuart. “Beyond Node/Link.” <http://raven.ubalt.edu/staff/moulthrop/hypertexts/hoptext/
      Beyond_Node-Link30978.html
      >. WWW version 1994.
    • —. “Pushing Back: Living and Writing in Broken Space.” Modern Fiction Studies 43.3 (Fall 1997): 651-74.
    • —. The Shadow of an Informand: An Experiment in Hypertext Rhetoric. <http://raven.ubalt.edu/staff/moulthrop/hypertexts/hoptext/>. WWW version 1994.
    • —. “Traveling in the Breakdown Lane: A Principle of Resistance for Hypertext.” Mosaic 28 (Dec. 1995): 55-77. <http://www.ubalt.edu/ygcla/sam/essays/breakdown.html>.
    • —. Victory Garden. Eastgate Systems. <http://www.eastgate.com>
    • Murray, Janet. Hamlet on the Holodeck: The Future of Narrative in Cyberspace. New York: The Free Press, 1997.
    • Nelson, Theodor Holm. Computer Lib. Tempus Books of Microsoft Press, 1974. Revised and updated with Dream Machines on the flip side, 1987.
    • —. Literary Machines. Ted Nelson, 1981. Edition 93.1, 1992.
    • Noland, Carrie. Poetry at Stake: Lyric Aesthetics and the Challenge of Technology. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1999.
    • Poster, Mark. The Mode of Information: Poststructuralism and Social Context. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1990.
    • —. What’s the Matter with the Internet? Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2001.
    • Rosenberg, Jim. “Positioning Hypertext in Chomsky’s Hierarchy of Grammars.” ebr 11 (Winter 2000/2001). <http://www.altx.com/ebr/riposte/rip11/rip11rose.htm>.
    • —. “The Structure of Hypertext Activity.” <http://www.cs.unc.edu/~barman/HT96/P17/SHA_out.html>.
    • Ryan, Marie-Laure, ed. Cyberspace Textuality: Computer Technology and Literary Theory. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1999.
    • Samolsky, Russell. “Metaleptic Machines: Kafka, Kabbalah, Shoah,” Modern Judaism 19.2 (1999).
    • Tenhaaf, Nell. “As Art Is Lifelike: Evolution, Art, and the Readymade.” Leonardo 31.5 (1998): 397-404.
    • Ulmer, Greg. “Grammatology Hypermedia.” Postmodern Culture 1.2 (Jan. 1991). 19 pars. <http://muse.jhu.edu/journals/postmodern_culture/v001/1.2ulmer.html> and <http://jefferson.village.virginia.edu/pmc/text-only/issu e.191/ulmer.191>.
    • Vallias, André. “We Have Not Understood Descartes.” Visible Language 30.2 (1996): 150-7.
    • Wardrip-Fruin, Noah. “Writing Networks: New Media, Potential Literature.” Leonardo 29.5 (1996): 355-373.
    • Wortzel, Adrianne. “Cyborgesian Tenets and Indeterminate Endings: The Decline and Disappearance of Destiny for Authors.” Leonardo 29.5 (1996): 354-372.

    URLography

     

     

  • Surveillance Sites: Digital Media and the Dual Society in Keith Piper’s Relocating the Remains

    Ashley Dawson

    English Department
    College of Staten Island–CUNY
    University of Iowa
    ashley-dawson@uiowa.edu

     

    This past July, the Tampa, Florida Police Department introduced a computerized surveillance system to augment its efforts to monitor the streets of a downtown business and entertainment district for potential miscreants.1 The system, built by Visionics Corporation of New Jersey and offered free to municipalities for a year, consists of a network of security cameras placed in prominent public areas and equipped with a face-recognition software package known as FaceIT. Each facial image scanned by the closed circuit cameras in the system is broken down by FaceIT into a grid of 80 “nodes” or reference points, providing such data as the distance between the eyes, the nostrils, or the cheekbones. If the system comes up with an 85% match against an image in its database–which includes some 30,000 faces–it signals this match to system operators. The operators, members of the police department who are housed in a monitor-lined bunker somewhere in the downtown area, then make their own judgment about the indicated match, and, if they concur with the computer, they radio a uniformed officer to investigate and potentially make an arrest. The system has been in operation since 1998 in the Borough of Newham in London’s East End, which claims that crime has been significantly reduced as a result of its deployment. The economic savings promised by the Visionics Corporation add further to the appeal of the system. But FaceIT has also met with significant objections. Most immediately, the reduction in beat policing and the redeployment of the remaining officers to security bunkers militates against the forms of engaged and responsive community policing that have proven effective deterrents to crime in cities such as New York since the early 1990s. Still more troubling about the spread of FaceIT technology is its potential curtailment of civil liberties. With the introduction of this technology, the state has dramatically extended its transformation of public space into a scanned and controlled grid. This immeasurably heightened technology of state control threatens to intensify contemporary trends toward the privatization and segregation of social spaces. The similarities between this new “biometric” technology and previous technologies of colonial classification and control are hard to ignore given the increasing prominence today of forms of spatial apartheid.

     

    Relocating the Remains, Black British artist Keith Piper’s virtual installation, begins–like the FaceIT system–with computerized images of a human body. Navigating through the fleshlessly numinous space of the internet to Piper’s website, one is confronted with a sequence of starkly corporeal images generated by an animated gif:

     

    UnMapped

     

    If one clicks through these images, a display appears of ghostly ethnographic renderings of bodies drawn from the nineteenth-century phenomenological disciplines through which racial difference was discerned and calibrated. Like the blank spaces in the map of Africa by which Joseph Conrad’s Marlow was mesmerized as a child, the bodies of non-European peoples exerted a powerful fascination on the public during Britain’s imperial era. As Anne McClintock has demonstrated, the museum where ethnographic artifacts apparently similar to Piper’s were housed became the exemplary institution of Victorian imperial culture. It was here that collections of objects such as skulls, skeletons and fossils were displayed as tokens of the archaic stages of life (40). For Victorian Britain, these fetishistic displays seemed to legitimate the narrative of cultural progress and superiority that underpinned empire. Employing cutting-edge digital technology, Keith Piper recreates this anachronistic space in order to probe the extent to which tropes of progress and difference operate in the present. As I will show, his work provides a stinging critique of the wide-eyed utopianism evident in prevalent reactions to digital technologies and to the “New Economy” these technologies have helped to fuel.

     

    Keith Piper’s multi-media productions over the last two decades have interrogated dominant representations of race, culture, and nation in British history, focusing in particular on the complex affiliations of black diasporic identity. As a member of the iconoclastic BLK Arts Group in the early to middle 1980s, Piper challenged the British Left’s attachment to a notion of culture that elided racial difference and hence rendered black identity invisible.2 Piper’s work pinpointed the strategic acts of forgetting that have largely banished the history of slavery from British public life. As critics such as Kobena Mercer have argued, this history makes nonsense of the narrow geo-political boundaries of the nation-state and of the insular definitions of identity that attend it (22). Since disrupting the established British art scene through BLK Arts Group exhibitions, Piper has gone on to create a corpus of works that offer a potent excavation of the modes of colonial discourse in British history. Initially mounted in 1997 at London’s Institute for International Visual Arts (InIVA)–a body funded by the British government to challenge the lack of diversity in the world of visual arts–Relocating the Remains transfers much of this corpus to digital form. This shift makes the important and previously scattered body of his work from the 1990s uniquely accessible. Relocating the Remains also provides a synthetic consideration of the parallels between contemporary information technologies and the media of representation and power deployed in a more openly colonial era.

     

    Through its exploration of questions pertaining to new media and colonial discourse, Relocating the Remains underlines the enduring need for a sustained critique of digital media theory. Piper is certainly no Luddite; indeed, Relocating the Remains demonstrates his masterful assimilation of contemporary digital media with many breathtaking aesthetic effects. Yet Piper’s exploration of the dystopian character of contemporary digital technologies in this work does challenge the notion that such new media are largely emancipatory in their effects. As María Fernández has argued in her recent call for an interrogation of new media by postcolonial theory, the utopian rhetoric that has characterized much digital media theory obscures the practical role played by new technology in processes of flexible production that contribute to economic and social inequality on both a local and a global level (12). Focused predominantly on the purportedly liberatory forms of communication offered on-line, digital media theory has tended to underestimate the role of technology both in perpetuating existing forms of inequality and in generating new ones. This is a particularly egregious blind spot given the fact that social inequality has by most measures grown more pronounced since the advent of the modern digital technologies.

     

    Since digital technology is one of the primary engines of globalization, we need theoretical frameworks that attend to the modes of power inscribed in the code that directs such new technology. The impact of new media must, in other words, be seen not simply as a product of the social uses made of such technology, but also of the values encoded into the very software that drives digital media. By juxtaposing the forms of colonial discourse that proliferated during the era of high imperialism with contemporary discourses of otherness, surveillance, and control, Keith Piper’s Relocating the Remains raises thorny questions about the differential impact of digital media. His interactive digital work underlines the homologies among colonial discourses, contemporary cyber-libertarian dogma, and neo-liberal accounts of globalization today. As a result, Piper’s digital texts extend the purview of postcolonial theory, which has focused predominantly on discourse and power in traditional literary texts. In addition, his work draws our attention to the rhetorical constructions through which information technologies come to be socially understood as well as the technical architectures through which such technologies shape society. Indeed, Relocating the Remains sheds light on the processes of social exclusion, control, and containment that may be perpetuated by such technologies. Of course, the social role of digital media remains open to contestation; after all, code is still written by people. By adapting digital technology to his own critical ends, Piper underlines the imperative to intervene in contemporary debates about the role of technology in our common future.

     

    The Persistence of Colonial Discourse in Cyberspace

     

    In his “Declaration of the Independence of Cyberspace” (1996), former rancher, Grateful Dead lyricist, and prominent cybercultural theorist John Perry Barlow writes:

     

    Governments of the Industrial World, you weary giants of flesh and steel, I come from Cyberspace, the new home of Mind. On behalf of the future, I ask you of the past to leave us alone. You are not welcome among us. You have no sovereignty where we gather…. Cyberspace does not lie within your borders. Do not think that you can build it, as though it were a public construction project. You cannot. It is an act of nature and it grows itself through our collective actions.

     

    Barlow’s pose as an ambassador from the virtual domain of cyberspace reflects the strong strain of techno-transcendentalism that runs through contemporary cyberculture. For cyber-libertarians such as Barlow and the coterie who publish regularly as Mondo 2000, electronic telecommunication has made real the dreams of countercultural visionaries such as Marshall McLuhan and Pierre Teilhard de Chardin. Indulging in some of the most romantic rhetoric of the 1960s, these telematic prophets articulated a dream of using technology to break free of all limits, from those imposed by traditional political forms to those associated with the stubborn materiality of the flesh (Dery 45).

     

    The cyber-libertarian ethos that has developed from these countercultural roots has become the dominant discourse not just in cybercultural circles, but also among the free marketeers of Silicon Valley, Seattle, and Washington, D.C. The roots of this conjunction lie, I would argue, in Daniel Bell’s path-breaking account of “post-Industrial society.” In works written long before computer technology became widely available to the general public, Bell pointed to an explosive convergence of computer and telecommunications. According to Bell, this development would lead ultimately to a globally connected communications grid (Kumar 10). The speed of the computer would thus help create a radically new space-time framework for society, with the industrial era’s primary social factors (capital, labor, and the state) being replaced by knowledge and information as society’s central variables. Early cyber-utopians such as Stonier and Matsuda drew on Bell’s prognostications to describe a future in which digital technology would eliminates the need for centralized politics and administration (Kumar 14). Participatory democracy and local citizen control would replace the impersonal and inefficient leviathan of the industrial era. Much of this utopian optimism concerning the post-industrial empowerment of the grassroots was, unfortunately, appropriated by neo-liberal apologists and politicians intent on dismantling the welfare state following the Reagan-Thatcher revolution. Newt Gingrich’s firm adherence to the “Third Wave” theories of the Tofflers is perhaps not so surprising given the post-industrial utopians’ argument that technology would destroy inequality and hence make the redistributive arm of the state obsolete.3 Of course, this utopian rhetoric has been disseminated far beyond Capitol Hill. Terry Harpold and Kavita Phillip have, for instance, dissected the migration of such erstwhile utopian rhetoric into Intel’s bunny-suit ads, which erase all forms of inequality from their cheery depictions of the high tech silicon chip production line.

     

    Fantasies of technological transcendence have also resonated powerfully–at least until the recent bursting of the internet bubble–because of the ambiguous class status of contemporary workers in the information technology sector. Well-paid and relatively empowered by their mastery of contemporary information technology, such workers are nevertheless tied to contracts that give them absolutely no job security while discouraging any form of solidarity (Barbrook and Cameron 2). The recent crash of the dot-com industry has to a certain extent revealed the vulnerability of this class of workers. Yet, as the most privileged sector of the labor force, these technological laborers have predominantly been complicit with the thoroughgoing transformation of the counter-culture’s anti-authoritarian ideals to the entrepreneurial goals of the free market. Underlying the vicissitudes of tech stocks is a more fundamental shift in the mode of production. In a transformation as fundamental as the introduction of the steam engine, the new digital technologies are encoding and absorbing workers’ physical and mental skills (Davis, “Rethinking” 40). This process of mental Taylorization, which has as its telos the elimination of human beings from production processes of all kinds, is reshaping social relations globally. As Jim Davis notes, the impact of digital technology has thus far taken the form not of increased unemployment but rather of a growth in economic polarization (43).

     

    Buoyed up by their temporarily privileged class status as core workers in the new information economy, members of what Richard Barbrook and Andy Cameron call the “virtual class” see digital culture as a new realm. For critics such as Nicholas Negroponte, a professor at MIT and frequent editorialist for the neo-liberal cyberzine Wired, the geo-political boundaries and limitations of traditional terrestrial governments have increasingly little hold. One problem with this attitude is that it treats the current structures of communications media such as the Net as ahistorical, essentialized forms. Witness Barlow’s description of cyberspace as “natural,” of all things. Mark Poster also makes this mistake when, in the course of an illuminating discussion of the internet in relation to Habermasian theories of the public sphere, he argues that “the salient characteristic of Internet community is the diminution of prevailing hierarchies of race, class, and especially gender” (“Cyberdemocracy” 213). While this may be true of the Net in its present incarnation, it will not necessarily remain true for long. The architecture of the Net and the novel forms of communication and civil space that are products of this architecture should not be taken for granted in the way that cyber-libertarians and critics such as Poster encourage. Indeed, the fact that Barlow’s “Declaration” was penned in response to the more draconian provisions of the U.S. Telecommunications Reform Act of 1996 suggests that the vaunted freedom of cyberspace may be threatened by precisely the formations whose death-knell Barlow claims to be sounding. As Tim Jordan notes, calls for users of the internet to be left alone to establish their own forms of governance have little hope of succeeding since the importance of digital space to offline socio-economics means that online and offline services cannot be disentangled (214). Unless we examine the potential forms of regulation and control that are embedded within the architecture of the Net, we will stand little chance of assessing and articulating meaningful forms of democratic cybercitizenship. This is a particularly urgent task given the broader impact of the information revolution, which is one of the prime factors responsible for increasingly polarized, fragmented, and unstable social formations on both a national and a global level.

     

    The neo-liberal rhetoric that has accompanied these social changes has a direct equivalent in descriptions of the Net. Indeed, the spatial metaphor employed by Barlow in his manifesto is part of a much broader discourse, one in which cyberspace becomes a new frontier, a wild West in which electronic cowboys, like the protagonist of William Gibson’s Neuromancer and billionaire entrepreneurs like Bill Gates, are the new pioneers. This boundary metaphor permeates contemporary discussions of cyberspace: from the Electronic Frontier Foundation, a watchdog group that works to protect first amendment rights on the internet, to books like Peter Ludlow’s High Noon on the Electronic Frontier, cyberspace is repeatedly represented as virgin territory ripe for colonization. In a recent and striking analysis, Virginia Eubanks has linked this contemporary notion of the new frontier to Frederick Jackson Turner’s essay of 1910, “Pioneer Ideals and the State University.” Assessing the inaugural moments of the U.S.’s enduring obsession with technology and progress, Turner equated the pioneer ideals that had driven relentless westward expansion with the aims of the rapidly developing industrial techno-science of the period. Electronic homesteaders such as Barlow are, then, but the latest in a long line of American intellectuals to employ the frontier metaphor to legitimate the imperatives of technologically driven capitalism.

     

    We might find this metaphor’s lasting power surprising given the massive colonial violence associated with westward expansion and Manifest Destiny. Yet the blindness to exclusionary social practices that the continuing circulation of the term “frontier” underlines is a pervasive feature of cyber-libertarian discourse. Granted, the code that forms the Net’s architecture does help to create remarkable new forms of social interaction by annihilating physical space, generating non-hierarchical forums in which novel interactions may take place, and allowing an unsurpassed degree of anonymity. However, we frequently associate a highly dubious notion of status bracketing with internet-mediated identities. Simply because on-line communities do not feature visual markers of difference such as race, class, gender, age, or physical ability does not mean that there are not substantial preconditions to accessing such communities–computer literacy, leisure time, and wealth, for instance. Moreover, too often ideas about status bracketing are assumed to imply universal, open access. In a world in which three-fifths of the 4.4 billion people in underdeveloped countries lack access to basic sanitation, let alone computers, the forms of literacy required for fluent use of the Net are clearly the privilege of a numerically small global elite. The fact that English is by far the dominant language on the Net seems a relatively peripheral issue in relation to this much broader question of literacy. Nonetheless, many cyber-theorists continue to talk in terms that imply the universal availability of the Net and other electronic media of communication. In his recently published book Etopia, for instance, William J. Mitchell, Dean of M.I.T.’s School of Architecture and prominent cyber-pundit, writes blithely of the electronic oases created at junctions and access points of telecommunications uplinks (31). While he does briefly mention issues of access in this book, Mitchell ignores the implication of his own metaphor: info-oases are inevitably surrounded by info-deserts. The oasis metaphor employed by Mitchell actually characterizes the situation of Africa fairly well, since it accurately represents the barren conditions that prevail in most of the rural zones of the continent.

     

    Public discussions of access in the U.S. often ignore and thereby perpetuate the host of material and political barriers that prevent connection in most other parts of world. This makes the liberal language of individual freedom used by debaters in the U.S. largely irrelevant throughout the “developing world” (Harpold, par. 29). As Sean Cubitt has powerfully put it, “any responsible account of cultural activity today must begin in the brutal exclusions of the contemporary world, even more so when we single out for attention the cultural uses of networked communications and digital media. Dependency, today more than ever, is the quality of human life” (“Orbius Tertius” 3). How does the rhetoric that attends our discussions of the Net help perpetuate what Terry Harpold has called an emerging virtual “dark continent” constituted by the many people around the globe who either lack access to information technology or are at the receiving end of such technology’s more iniquitous uses (par. 37)?

     

    Unravelling the Fictions of Science

     

    Throughout his digital work, Keith Piper cultivates what Walter Benjamin called correspondences. In his Arcades project, Benjamin sought to provide a history of the origins of the present, using archaic images to identify what was historically new about the present and what was not. He termed the confluence of past and present that he wished to isolate a “dialectical image” (Buck-Morss 26). Piper’s work may be seen as analogous to Benjamin’s in that they both aim to represent history in a manner that de-mythologizes the present. One does not have to brush much dust off one’s Barthes to see the fetishization of new technology in cyber-libertarian discourse as a contemporary myth. In the rush to celebrate the apparent transcendence of human limitations, cyber-libertarians and techno-transcendentalists articulate a strong narrative of progress that simply repeats the utopian claims made about previous forms of communications technology, including the telegraph, the radio, television, etc.4 For instance, the hype that surrounded the advent of the BBC, which was described by its first program organizer as promising to “weld humanity into one composite whole,” uncannily anticipates utopian pronouncements about the internet (Allen and Miller 46). Indeed, the recurrence of what Ernst Bloch would have called “wish images,” utopian signs from the past such as the “open frontier,” suggests the tenuousness of contemporary notions about radical ruptures from the past. Utopian claims concerning new technologies require not awareness of the past, ironically, but rather obliviousness concerning the inscription of such technologies within unequal social relations that ensure their continued use to promote hierarchy. An awareness of the dystopian uses to which new technologies may be put requires precisely the kind of historical awareness and depth that much contemporary electronic media theory, intoxicated with the notion of historical novelty, denies. Keith Piper’s work, by contrast, demonstrates that there are no value-free technologies. Using correspondences or juxtapositions of colonial and neo-colonial discourse, Piper evokes the historical role of representational technologies in colonial subjugation and suggests that such technologies are still very much at work in today’s polarized global cities.5

     

    Such correspondences are woven throughout Piper’s work. However, of the three portals through which one may enter his digital archive –labeled, respectively, UnMapped, UnRecorded, and UnClassified–it is the central one that deals most directly with colonial technologies of representation. Having pointed the cursor at this portal, one is conducted through a door and confronted with a collage that centers on a painting by François August Biard, a nineteenth-century French abolitionist.

     

    UnRecorded

     

    Painted in 1833–the year that slavery was abolished in the British colonies–Biard’s Slaves on the West Coast of Africa is a strong statement against the institution of slavery. This epic oil painting graphically depicts the miserable conditions of a West African slave market in Freetown Bay, Sierra Leone, showing various kinds of slave traders of the period and the many forms of extreme suffering that they inflicted upon captured Africans.6 Although Biard’s strongly abolitionist painting suggests that representation may be used against oppressive social conditions, Piper’s inclusion of the painting in the archive entitled UnRecorded draws our attention to the processes of objectification at work in the scene depicted by the painting. As he does in other sections of UnRecorded, Piper focuses our attention on the commodification of the black body.7 Like Turner’s Slavers Throwing Overboard the Dead and Dying, Biard’s painting serves as a reminder of the brutal history through which Britain’s global economic hegemony was consolidated.8 Indeed, Piper’s use of Biard here brings to mind Paul Gilroy’s contention in The Black Atlantic that slavery and colonial exploitation were central to the development of English national culture on a material plane. As Gilroy argues, the oppression and exploitation of Africa and its diaspora were also integral to the creation of a unified national identity through the contraposition of Englishness to alterity (9). European modernity has been, in other words, a Janus-faced affair, based on emancipatory claims and projects as well as on horrendous repression and exploitation. Gilroy’s thesis concerning the dual nature of modernity has particular bearing in relation to digital media. As María Fernández has argued, electronic media theory tends to ignore this split character of modernity in its utopian claims for technology, thereby eliding not simply the violence of history and the role of industrial technology in perpetuating such violence, but also the subaltern histories of resistance that have contested dominant narratives of collective identity (15).

     

    The full extent of Piper’s transformation of the Biard painting only becomes apparent once one finds the links that lie buried within the site’s code. Presented with Biard’s alarming portrait of western power and dehumanization, one is invited to enter into and take apart this narrative by accessing a variety of archives that Piper has embedded within the painting. This interactive dimension suggests the need to peel back the triumphal narratives that sustain images of western culture in order to understand the forms of servitude on which they were historically based. At InIVA’s website, Piper demonstrates the elisions in dominant history with particular clarity. We are presented here with two elaborate gilt frames. In the top frame, Biard’s painting appears with the words “Unrecorded” and “Histories” superimposed. As one tries to move one’s cursor near these words, they slide away, suggesting the difficulty of piecing together the subaltern narratives that dominant history excludes.9 The second image, which is partially concealed by the Biard painting of the slave auction, is a medieval illumination in which a European king and queen are receiving visiting dignitaries. Piper presents this image in black and white; however, when one places one’s cursor over this image, the words “concealed” and “presences” appear, inscribed over two figures in the illumination that now, presented in color, appear from their skin color to be of African origin.

     

    By revealing this medieval image of blacks in the British Isles, Piper challenges the notions of racialized national purity and homogeneity that gained prominence in post-1945 Britain. As Peter Fryer has argued, there were, in fact, Africans in Britain before the English arrived (1). Of course, the Black presence in Britain prior to the substantial waves of immigration that followed World War II has been routinely denied in order to “whiten” the history of Britain as a nation. Piper’s image underlines the fact that exchanges with Africa were a feature of medieval life. In addition, this section of UnRecorded suggests that the forms of hierarchy that characterize later representations of African identity were far less of a feature in images that preceded the rise of the Atlantic slave trade. Janet Abu-Lughod’s discussion of Europe as a relatively peripheral part of a series of overlapping regional, cultural, and economic systems during the late medieval period provides a useful corrective to such representations of the colonial era. This history was, of course, written out as Europe achieved global dominance and as genetic and cultural theories of superiority arose to legitimate projects of colonial rule.

     

    While the Biard painting in its CD-ROM incarnation opens out onto four discrete virtual archives, one of them resonates particularly powerfully with the points I’m developing here concerning the historical use of technology for the purpose of classifying and containing racial alterity. In the archive entitled “Fictions of Science,” we are presented with the image of a black male body posed in the quadrilinear position of Da Vinci’s famous engraving, which has become an icon of Renaissance humanism. Here, however, instead of marking a celebration of inquiry into the transformative capacity of the self and of culture, the black body is superimposed on a grid within which the various branches of modern science and social science appear. As one moves the cursor over this field, it is transformed into the characteristic cross-hairs of a gun sight. The contemporary manifestations of state violence that formed the subject of much of Piper’s work during the 1980s are here juxtaposed with historical instances of colonial power. Supposedly objective scientific disciplines are presented as directly complicit with classificatory and, in many cases, exterminatory forms of knowledge.

     

    Clicking in any of these zones leads to a fade-out and an animation that first defines a particular branch of science–including sociology, craniology, ethnology, biology, technology, genealogy, theology, and anthropology–and then provides one with a particular instance of the historical use of such sciences as part of a project of classifying racial alterity in the colonial context. This critique of the social sciences’ complicity with colonial power has become well known since Talal Asad’s ground-breaking work on the topic. However, simply by placing contemporary social “sciences” like anthropology in a grid with now discredited and defunct cognates like craniology, Piper makes a telling point concerning the historical origin of such disciplines. His work also develops a critique of the mode through which such disciplines operate. A click on the “anthropology” grid, for instance, first provides one with a dictionary definition of the discipline that emphasizes its putative objectivity: “n. the study of man, his origins, physical characteristics, institutions, religious beliefs, social relationships, etc.” One then zooms in to a box-like area, with the clicking sound of a camera lens again placing the computer user in the uncomfortable position of the device of classification. Black and white images of people from colonized lands in Africa, Australia, and South Asia, all of whom evince no signs of “contact” with the West, pan before one’s eyes. Their difference is rendered as absolute, their nudity an index of their supposed cultural backwardness. At the end of this pan, an image of a bare-breasted Aboriginal woman materializes. She is framed by an instrument for measuring the circumference of her head, part of the apparatus through which the late imperial science of craniology claimed to provide direct physical explanations, grounded in social Darwinian precepts, for the putative inferiority of non-European peoples.10 Over this image, the following words gradually materialize: “The exercise/of the power/to name.”

     

    By reminding us of the historical complicity of nominally scientific disciplines such as anthropology in the project of colonial expansion and classification, Piper’s work underlines the now familiar but enduringly controversial notion that science and technology are socially constructed.11 Drawing our attention to the development of disciplines such as anthropology, sociology, and biology within the context of the colonial demarcation and containment of difference, Piper maps the lineage of contemporary forms of power and representation. Piper’s work makes apparent that it is not only as a result of convenient forms of historical amnesia that new technologies such as cyberspace can be engaged in the patently utopian terms of cyber-libertarian discourse. Moreover, the fact that one enters the portals I’ve been discussing through a space that reproduces the sanitized precincts of a museum is itself significant. The CD-ROM on which Piper’s exhibition is archived displays these three portals as the three connected halls of a museum. This is a highly appropriate visual image, since it not only reproduces the gallery context in which Piper’s installations are normally shown, but also draws attention to the mechanisms of colonial representation at work in the traditional museum. As Mary Louise Pratt and James Clifford, among others, have argued, the museum functions as a “contact zone,” a site where previously separate subjects are brought into spatial and temporal continguity and organized, through the structure of the collection, into a set of hierarchical relations (Clifford 192). Piper’s work is in clear consonance with this opening image of the museum since it is predominantly focused on technologies of representation and classification. By placing us inside the sanitized confines of a virtual archive, Piper sets up the representational codes whose underlying power relations his work teases out and criticizes.

     

    Documenting the Scanscape

     

    Piper explores the contemporary impact of colonial technologies of representation in UnClassified, the ironically titled virtual space that occupies the right-hand gallery of Relocating the Remains. Here Piper engages the spectator in a scathing reenactment of the structuring role of difference in the brave new world of high tech. In particular, this section provocatively connects the inequality of access to electronic communications that is a product of contemporary socio-economic conditions to novel forms of control that are enabled by contemporary technology. Piper’s concerns are rooted in recent British history, which has witnessed a number of massive urban uprisings in response to intensified forms of police surveillance within predominantly black communities. The infamous SUS (for Stopped Under Suspicion) laws, which allowed the police to arrest anyone whom they suspected of illegal actions, were enforced in a racist manner throughout the 1970s and ’80s. Britain’s black population was consequently trapped in the cross-hairs of an increasingly militarized police force during this period.12 While community protests in Britain have led to substantial reforms of such policing practices–ironically making them more invasive and racist in many cases–the growth of increasingly sophisticated forms of electronic surveillance has resulted in the ongoing intensification of what Mike Davis has suggestively called the “scanscape” of urban space (366). Casting an invisible net over physical space, newly developed electronic modes of surveillance such as the FaceIT technology I described earlier raise particularly discomforting questions about privacy, civil rights, citizenship, and egalitarian access to public space.

     

    Piper’s attention in UnClassified focuses in particular on the use of technologies of surveillance to fix the black subject in space. InIVA’s Keith Piper website presents one with an animated sequence of pictures labelled UnClassified Presence.

     

    UnClassified

     

    These pictures roll over from a picture of a photojournalist at work at a demonstration, to an image of a CCTV (Closed Circuit Television) In Operation sign, to, finally, a police riot squad. Part of a series of works done by Piper that focused on the contemporary city, this section of the archive lays out the relation between discourses of public order and the racialization of space. The scrolling sequence of images he provides us with at the entrance to this portal identifies the interwoven agencies of representation, control, and surveillance that turn the city into colonial space for non-white subjects. Physical mobility in the space of the city has become increasingly difficult for Black Britons as their presence has come to be identified with a generalized threat to the maintenance of public order. The origins of the contemporary scanscape in Britain go back at least thirty years. As Stuart Hall and his colleagues at Birmingham’s Centre for Contemporary Cultural Studies argued in their classic Policing the Crisis, an economic downturn and social fragmentation during the 1970s in Britain provoked the rise of an ideology based on law and order. The moral panics concerning lawlessness that proliferated during this period helped, according to Hall and his collaborators, to legitimate a harshly intolerant and draconian new state form. Racially biased policing practices and the widespread rioting that they provoked during the 1980s did much to confirm Hall’s argument that popular consent was increasingly being garnered through the exercise of coercion against Black Britons (322). A self-magnifying feedback loop was established during this period between scapegoating media representations of ethnic minorities, increased police surveillance, and outright state violence directed toward Black communities. This institutional racism in turn produced violent resistance on the part of blacks, who were left with few other avenues to express their discontent with the media stereotype of the “black criminal” and abusive policing practices. The scrolling images in Keith Piper’s work, which include components of each segment of this feedback loop, highlight the enduring saliency of Hall’s analysis.

     

    Piper’s UnClassified adds to Hall’s dissection of popular authoritarianism, however, by focusing on the role of the visual in contemporary schemes of classification. Visible somatic characteristics have always played a key if not exclusive role in defining racial difference. In the late nineteenth century, corporeal differences gained in significance as photography displaced print language as the primary arbiter of universal knowledge (McClintock 123). Photography offered the nascent fields of anthropology and criminology a means for classifying racial and class differences. The rise of digital encoding over the last decade has raised the stakes in this process of rendering difference visible. Powerful new visual technologies render the topography of individual faces and bodies part of the contemporary scanscape. In the context of increasingly hostile attitudes toward non-white populations, these new technologies of the visual threaten to undermine civil rights substantially.13 For instance, computerized databases now allow police officers in Europe to access continent-wide files profiling suspected illegal immigrants. These files were set up by the Trevi group, a coalition of police forces from member nations of the European Union whose original brief, to cooperate around anti-terrorism activities, has now been expanded to cover immigration, visas, asylum-seekers, and border controls. Since the Trevi group operates autonomously from the EU parliament, there is no public brake on the use of computer databases by this branch of the state. As Tony Bunyan has observed, the British equation of blacks with crime, drugs, terrorism, and illegal immigration has now been generalized across the entire European Union (19).

     

    Keith Piper’s work focuses explicitly on these issues of visuality and the body. Passing through the UnClassified portal that I’ve been discussing, one is presented with a small image of a black man’s face. This image is a composite one, made up of the fragmented pieces of many different men’s faces. Rendered as a generic threat, this black man’s face is set against a large radar screen, with fingerprint files as a background. As one moves one’s cursor toward this image, it skids hectically away across the radar screen. The sweeping arm of the radar scan slams into these nomadic faces, causing them to gyrate more frenetically while the display emits a loud beeping sound. Just as in the UnRecorded section, contemporary technologies of representation are presented here as objectifying their subjects. In addition, such technologies integrate the subjects on which they focus into an economy of control that represents such subjects as inherently “other,” and consequently legitimates their subjection to the acts of casual brutality and exploitation that characterize Europe’s colonial history and contemporary racism. The persistence of colonial discourse in contemporary digitally enhanced surveillance technology should at the very least provoke a reexamination of assertions of the value-free nature of such technologies when deployed in the segregated spaces of today’s cities.

     

    In the context of the European Union’s Schengen Accords, the imposed alterity of non-white communities represents an explicit threat to a freshly minted European continental identity. As A. Sivanandan has noted, the nation-states of Europe drew on one another’s specific national racisms as they consolidated a continent-wide notion of European citizenship, pulling one another down to a very low common denominator (“Racism” 69). As a result, Article 116 of Germany’s constitution, which notoriously bases citizenship exclusively on blood, has become the implicit standard of belonging across the EU. In a background note to Tagging the Other, the portion of the CD-ROM that deals with contemporary surveillance technology, Keith Piper writes of this situation:

     

    As the internal borders between nation-states are dismantled, the ‘hard outer shell’ defending Europe from infiltration by the non-European ‘other’ is reinforced. As part of this process, at those points at which that ‘infiltration’ has already taken place, and whole communities of ‘otherness’ have consolidated themselves, new techniques of surveillance and control are being implemented. It is the points at which new technologies are being implemented to fix and survey the ‘Un-European Other’ in the faltering consolidation of this ‘New European State’ which forms the basis of Tagging the Other. Central to the piece is the framing and fixing of the Black European under a high tech gaze which seeks to classify and codify the individual within an arena in which the logical constraints of race, ethnicity, nation, and culture are fixed and delineated in a discourse of exclusion.

     

    If the new discourses of European identity work to criminalize both illegal immigrants and legitimate Black nationals, this criminalization takes place increasingly through digital technologies that emplot people of color within visual schema of reified difference. While the SUS laws limited black people’s access to public space by promoting draconian policing policies during the 1970s and ’80s, today’s digital technologies continue to operate on similar spatial planes while also bringing to bear a microscopic gaze that turns all of Europe into a unified scanscape. Panglossian readings of harmony through technology ill prepare us to understand this social context. Keith Piper’s Relocating the Remains suggests that the interlocking axes of spatial, visual, and informational control at work in the contemporary Euro-American scanscape need to be understood within the much broader historical context of racialized slavery, colonialism, and neo-colonialism.

     

    Code=Power

     

    The need to historicize the contemporary communications technologies that I’ve been underlining in relation to Keith Piper’s work is echoed in Lawrence Lessig’s recent discussions of the architecture of the Net. For Lessig, a professor at Harvard Law School’s Berkman Center for Internet and Society, the constitutive regulatory forms of cyberspace are unavoidable, and the digital domain cannot, therefore, be thought of as an open frontier (Code 5). Indeed, Lessig argues that “left to itself, cyberspace will become a perfect tool of control” (6). Unlike libertarians such as Barlow, in other words, Lessig is aware of the dominating as well as the enabling structures that operate in cyberspace.

     

    Perhaps the most important contribution made by Lessig is the relatively simple observation that such forms of control are built into the computer code through which the Net operates. Other modes of social regulation such as laws, social norms, and economic forces are shaped in cyberspace by the basic codes through which the Net functions, Lessig argues (88). While cyber-libertarians celebrate the rhizomic social forms enabled by the Net’s current architecture, Lessig discerns significant moves among contemporary technicians and politicians away from the relatively open structure that characterized the Net’s protocols in its formative stages. For Lessig, the determining factor behind these trends is the shift from a world in which code was “corporate in a political sense” to one in which it is “corporate in a commercial sense” (207). Commodification of the Net, in other words, is likely to foster increasing forms of control through code. What values will be embodied, Lessig asks, in the future architecture of the Net, and how can we deter those wishing to use the Net to curtail rather than expand civil liberties?

     

    One particularly unnerving example that Lessig provides of moves to use code for purposes of control in a U.S. context is the Clinton administration’s dogged attempt to regulate encryption technology on the Net (“Laws of Cyberspace”). This struggle has taken the form of moves to legislate a key recovery ability that would give government agents access to the content of communications on the Net. Not only would this be an indirect manner of regulating behavior on the Net, but it would also allow the government to identify the sender of a particular message. Federal agents could thereby essentially establish a system of electronic passports, using decoded messages to determine vital elements of personal information about the individuals concerned. Since the U.S. is by far the most significant global developer of computer technology, federal legislation along these lines would virtually automatically become a standard element of future software distributed around the globe. As Lessig underlines, the U.S. Constitution may restrain to some degree the federal government’s ability to use such technology illicitly, but this is unlikely to be true of every state that deploys the software. In this case, a change in a fundamental element of the code or architecture of the Net within the U.S. would have sweeping ramifications for civil liberties around the world. The system that would result from such a minor modification, one that would allow constant, invisible, and perfect tracking and monitoring of particular individuals, would be chillingly efficient. While Lessig’s cautionary examples might seem to jibe with a cyber-libertarian fear of the state, he employs them to call for informed public intervention in the often abstruse contemporary debates concerning the architecture of the Net.

     

    In addition to the kinds of concerns about civil liberties raised by Piper and Lessig, digital surveillance in the realm of business and commerce is also increasingly worthy of critical scrutiny. As Christian Parenti reports in a recent article, eighty percent of U.S. corporations keep their employees under regular surveillance according to the American Management Association. Electronic eavesdropping is becoming an ever more prominent component of the American workplace. Instead of eradicating hierarchies as the proponents of the New Economy argue, new technologies are “pushing social relations on the job toward a new digital Taylorism, where every motion is watched, studied and controlled by and for the boss” (26). High-tech surveillance is being used not simply to nab employees for “inappropriate Internet use” such as “porn surfing, gambling, online video gaming and chat-room socializing,” but also to foil efforts to organize the new “flexible” workplaces of the twenty-first century (28). In addition to these forms of on-the-job monitoring, computer technology of course makes it possible to track all of our decisions as consumers of material goods and information online. As everyone who has received irritating junk email knows, online merchants monitor our mouse clicks using “cookies,” creating a profile of our interests and buying habits which is then often sold to marketers. As individuals, we have very little control over this flow of commodified information about ourselves. In fact, the economist Hal Varian recently observed that “there is already a market in information on you… the trouble is, you aren’t a participant in that market” (qtd. in Lohr 3). The questions concerning privacy that arise from such uses of technology are an increasing public concern in the U.S., one likely to be heightened by police use of the digital surveillance technology I described at the outset of this article.14 Such technologies appear to be ushering in an ever-more Foucauldian world of panoptical surveillance.

     

    The parallel between the role of contemporary technology as understood in the work of Piper and Lessig and that of Bentham’s panopticon during the nineteenth century has already been drawn by Mark Poster (291). For Poster, the database is a perfect cyberspatial version of Bentham’s architecture of discipline and punishment, one that uplinks our physical and social identities into a vast system of perpetual surveillance. It is indeed ironic that such a system of control should be one of the facilitating forces behind the globalization of contemporary capitalism. Academic as well as media accounts of globalization are dominated by metaphors that suggest the fluidity of contemporary social and economic relations.15 How do such accounts correlate with the extension of the surveillance technologies I’ve been describing?

     

    Manuel Castells’s account of the social transformations that have accompanied the rise of the information society acknowledges the enhanced facility and velocity with which information flows in globalized capitalism. Far from being a technological determinist, however, Castells argues that technology merely serves as the handmaiden of the broader set of social changes associated with the capitalist restructuring that has taken place in most societies since the 1970s. Faced with the “stagflation” of the 1970s, and aided by the development of new telecommunications technologies, corporations were able to shift production processes to parts of the globe where labor costs were low, while they concentrated command and research facilities in the increasingly global cities of the overdeveloped world (Lazarus 100). According to the useful analysis of Regulation School theorists, labor’s weakened position meant that capital could impose more stringent market discipline through the international “de-regulation” in flows of trade and finance capital. The upshot has been a rejection of the welfare state that characterized the Fordist era and the creation of a new, “flexible” regime of accumulation.16 With information as its chief economic resource, contemporary capitalism has been freed from the constraints imposed by the organized working class in developed nations and has embarked on footloose expansion around the globe bolstered by the resurgence of free-market economics and neo-liberal ideology (Lazarus 100). It should be stressed that the state, far from withering away as so many neo-liberal commentators and some academics seem to argue, has been the agent of this transformation, making it possible for transnational corporations to evade national controls and regulatory constraints (Sivanandan, “Globalization” 10).

     

    In a classic example of combined and uneven development, urban space has been riven by this transformation to a post-Fordist regime of accumulation. According to Castells, an increasingly stark divide has arisen between a core labor force with high skills and the “mass of disposable labor,” who live in conditions of increasing marginality (33). As the rising importance of information technology leads to a greater social emphasis on access to knowledge, the information poor also lose their ability to garner material resources, and the urban system becomes increasingly divided between the luxurious compounds housing the highly educated elites and the impoverished zones inhabited by the socially marginalized masses. In a bitter irony, the networking of society has thus taken place in conjunction with the spread of the polarized social conditions of what Castells calls the “dual city.” The proliferation of “gated communities” in the U.S. suggests the extent to which the elites in the information society are withdrawing into fortified enclaves. A necessary corollary of this withdrawal is the transformation of the remaining public spaces into the panoptical space of the scanscape, as the kinds of powerful new surveillance technologies I’ve described are used to contain potential threats from the socially marginalized but economically essential masses who service the elite of the global cities. The spread of such technologies despite the economic boom of the late 1990s suggests the degree of paranoia at play in the dual city. As Anthony King has trenchantly observed, the global city has increasingly come to resemble the colonial city, with its manichean spatial, social, and economic encasements. Keith Piper’s practice of examining the correspondences between colonial discourses and the conditions that exist in the dual city is not then as far fetched as it might initially seem.

     

    Globalization has, in other words, meant heightened mobility for a small but terrifically powerful elite around the world. For an increasingly large percentage of the population within both underdeveloped and developed nations, it has meant fixity, an anchoring in particular places from which capital and, often, hope have been drained. Draconian institutions of control have proliferated as nations throughout the developed world have become more internally polarized and unstable. A bleak riposte to the images of spatial mobility embodied in the cyber-libertarian frontier mythology, the contemporary prison-industrial complex is, according to Zygmunt Bauman, a factory of exclusion. The significant segment of the population (2% in the case of the U.S.) who are not needed as producers and for whom there is no (legal) work to return to are effectively disposed of in the prison-industrial complex, a condition that, as Bauman comments, amounts to burial alive (113).

     

    Alongside the proliferating inequality within developed nations, as well as between these developed nations and the vast majority of humanity, has come an increasing privatization of information. The mixed economy of state-private information provision that characterized the Fordist era has declined, and capitalism has moved to trade in and profit from informational goods (Kundnani 55). The decline of the public service ethos in broadcasting is but one example of this shift. Nevertheless, there is a central contradiction at play in this new dispensation. Since digital technologies can duplicate information almost instantaneously, and practically without loss or cost, the only technical constraint on the free flow of information today is intellectual property law. In order to secure profits, therefore, information capitalism must place increasing emphasis on enforceable world agreements on copyright violation. Information-exporting nations like the U.S. have, as a result, increasingly intervened to set up global regulatory regimes around the world, many of which infringe upon and actively militate against age-old traditions of community ownership of information (Kundnani 56). Information in this context must be construed in the broadest possible manner, from the traditional folk music forms that are sampled by “worldbeat” artists to the genetic code of Third World seed stocks and indigenous peoples that American companies have recently tried to patent. As the right to access and control information becomes increasingly central to the global social order, circuits of communication that retain a non-commodified character are likely to become increasingly embattled.

     

    In some respects, the Net does constitute a significant countervailing force to this new informational world order. However, the libertarian discourses that characterize many recent discussions of the Net and the “New Economy” it has driven are woefully inadequate for assessing and combating the complex contradictions that are straining the contemporary social fabric. The Net is not simply affected by the forms of social inequality that characterize our increasingly bifurcated world. Rather, it is an element in a broader technological transformation that is helping to produce these very forms of polarization. Despite the democratizing aspects of its architecture, it is also susceptible to transformation from a tool for the proliferation of new forms of citizenship to one of control. Cyberspace will undoubtedly play a pivotal role in the world of the future. Indeed, since its popularization in 1994, the Net has already become the central nervous system of contemporary culture and economy in the overdeveloped world. As my comments here have shown, we cannot take the current code of the Net and the entitlements associated with this architecture for granted. Given this fact, I believe there is an urgent need for a social movement around the right to significant forms of public control over communication. It is imperative that the current hegemony of knee-jerk anti-government ideology be challenged, particularly in regard to contemporary communications technology. While many issues need to be engaged by such a movement, from the concentration of media ownership to the future of intellectual property law, to name just two examples, the kernel of any such movement has to be the articulation of alternatives to the current anti-social neo-liberal status quo. As Raymond Williams put it in his bracing short book Communications,

     

    our commonest economic error is the assumption that production and trade are our only practical activities, and that they require no other human justification or scrutiny. We need to say what many of us know in experience: that the life of man [sic], and the business of society, cannot be confined to these ends; that the struggle to learn, to describe, to understand, to educate, is a central and necessary part of our humanity. (11)

     

    These are wildly idealistic words in the current political climate, perhaps. But initiatives such as the open code movement, a recently vitalized outgrowth of some of the same emphases on accessibility that are responsible for the Net’s current architecture, suggest the continuing appeal and practicability of such a counter-hegemonic model of human experience and exchange.17 While a discussion of the open code movement does not fall within the bounds of this paper, suffice it for the moment to say that we must effect a significant transformation in current attitudes towards technology if this and other movements to democratize communications are to have a substantial impact. It is through rearticulating the model, originally advanced by figures such as Raymond Williams, of communications as a site of collective identity and responsibility, of equal access and empowerment, that we may hope to initiate such a transformation.

     

    Notes

     

    1. This surveillance system and the debate it has occasioned are described by Dana Canedy in “Tampa Scans the Faces in Its Crowds for Criminals.”

     

    2. For a detailed history of the BLK Arts Group and its impact on the visual arts in Britain, see Rasheed Araeen’s essay in The Other Story.

     

    3. For an extended discussion of Toffler, Bell, and other post-industrial utopians, see Boris Frankel.

     

    4. Friedrich Kittler’s work on the epistemic characteristics evoked by previous technologies is informative in this regard. See his Discourse Networks.

     

    5. For a fascinating discussion of the recurrence of colonial discourses of alterity in the context of the contemporary high-tech production sector, see Terry Harpold and Kavita Phillips’s “Of Bugs and Rats.”

     

    6. Additional details concerning this painting may be found at the following two websites: <http://www.pbs.org/wgbh/aia/part1/1h297.html> and <http://www.hullcc.org.uk/wilberforce/explore_staircase2.html>.

     

    7. See Rohini Malik’s brief but very suggestive discussion of Piper’s use of fragmentary texts to challenge linear constructions of history and identity in his “Introduction” to Piper’s Relocating the Remains.

     

    8. Turner’s painting is briefly discussed by Paul Gilroy in The Black Atlantic (14).

     

    9. This reminds one of Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak’s contention that subaltern histories are not as easily recuperable as the work of the Indian Subaltern Studies group would suggest. See her “Subaltern Studies: Deconstructing Historiography.”

     

    10. For a discussion of such regimes of classification, see Anne McClintock’s Imperial Leather.

     

    11. The Sokal Affair offers abundant evidence of contemporary resistance to the notion of science’s historical inscription.

     

    12. The first and still one of the best discussions of the “popular authoritarianism” of this period may be found in Stuart Hall, et al., Policing the Crisis.

     

    13. In 1989, the European Union parliament passed a resolution saying that the Schengen Accord, which “harmonizes” EU policies on visas and coordinates crime prevention efforts (which include policies for dealing with asylum-seekers), constitutes a potential detriment to civil rights.

     

    14. To take but one example, Neil A. Lewis describes how a council of judges from the United States Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit recently ordered their technology staff to disconnect a monitoring program that had been installed on court computers in protest over privacy issues.

     

    15. Arjun Appadurai’s influential work on the non-isomorphic flows of information, capital, and populations around the globe is but one prominent example of such rhetoric.

     

    16. For a far more positive, and hugely influential account of globalization, see Anthony Giddens, The Consequences of Modernity and Runaway World.

     

    17. For a discussion of the open code movement, see David Bollier, “The Power of Openness.”

    Works Cited

     

    • Abu-Lughod, Janet. Before European Hegemony: The World System A.D. 1250-1350. New York: Oxford UP, 1989.
    • Allen, Rod, and Nod Miller, “Panaceas and Promises of Democratic Participation: Reactions to New Channels, from the Wireless to the World Wide Web.” Technology and In/equality: Questioning the Information Society. Ed. Sally Wyatt. New York: Routledge, 2000. 46-60.
    • Araeen, Rashid, ed. The Other Story: Afro-Asian Artists in Post-War Britain. (catalogue for exhibition at the Hayward Gallery, London; 29 Nov.-4 Feb., 1990).
    • Asad, Talal, ed. Anthropology and the Colonial Encounter. New York: Humanities Press, 1973.
    • Barlow, John Perry. “A Declaration of the Independence of Cyberspace.” 8 Feb. 1996. Electronic Frontier Foundation. <http://eff.org/~barlow/Declaration-Final.html>.
    • Barbrook, Richard, and Andy Cameron, “The California Ideology.” <http://www.wmin.ac.uk/media/HRC/ci/calif1.html>.
    • Bauman, Zygmunt. Globalization: The Human Consequences. New York: Columbia UP, 1998.
    • Bollier, David. “The Power of Openness: Why Citizens, Education, Government and Business Should Care About the Coming Revolution in Open Source Code Software.” Berkman Center for Internet and Society, Harvard University. <http://eon.law.harvard.edu/opencode/h2o/>.
    • —. “Reinventing Democratic Culture in the Age of Electronic Networks.” Netaction. <http://www.netaction.org./bollier/bollier.txt>.
    • Buck-Morss, Susan. The Dialectics of Seeing: Walter Benjamin and the Arcades Project. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1990.
    • Bunyan, Tony. “Towards an Authoritarian European State.” Race and Class 32.3 (1991): 19-26.
    • Canedy, Dana. “Tampa Scans the Faces in its Crowds for Criminals.” New York Times 4 Jul. 2001: A1, A11.
    • Castells, Manuel. “The Information City is a Dual City: Can It Be Reversed?” High Technology and Low-Income Communities: Prospects for the Positive Use of Advanced Information Technology. Ed. Bish Sanyal, Donald A. Schön, William J. Mitchell. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1999. 27-39.
    • Clifford, James. Routes: Travel and Translation in the Late Twentieth Century. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1997.
    • Cubitt, Sean. “Keith Piper: After Resistance, Beyond Destiny.” Third Text 47 (Summer 1999): 77-86.
    • —. “Orbius Tertius.” Third Text 47 (Summer 1999): 3-10.
    • Davis, Jim. “Rethinking Globalization.” Race and Class 40.2/3 (1998/99): 37-46.
    • Davis, Mike. Ecology of Fear: Los Angeles and the Imagination of Disaster. New York: Henry Holt, 1998.
    • Dery, Mark. Escape Velocity: Cyberculture at the End of the Century. New York: Grove Press, 1996.
    • Eubanks, Virginia. “The Mythology of the New Frontier.” Media in Transition Conference. M.I.T., Cambridge, MA. 9 Oct. 1999.
    • Fernández, María. “Postcolonial Media Theory.” Third Text 47 (Summer 1999): 11-15.
    • Frankel, Boris. The Post-Industrial Utopians. Cambridge: Polity Press, 1987.
    • Fryer, Peter. Staying Power: The History of Black People in Britain. London: Pluto Press, 1984.
    • Gibson, William. Neuromancer. New York: Ace, 1984.
    • Giddens, Anthony. Consequences of Modernity. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1990.
    • —. Runaway World: How Globalization is Reshaping our Lives. New York: Routledge, 2000.
    • Gilroy, Paul. The Black Atlantic: Modernity and Double Consciousness. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1993.
    • Hall, Stuart, et al., eds. Policing the Crisis: Mugging, the State, and Law and Order. Houndmills, Basingstoke, Hamps, UK: Macmillan Education, 1978.
    • Harpold, Terry. “Dark Continents: A Critique of Internet Meta-geographies.” Postmodern Culture 9.2 (Jan. 1999). 43 pars. <http://muse.jhu.edu/journals/pmc/v009/9.2harpold.html> and <http://www.iath.virginia.edu/pmc/text-only/issue.199/9.2harpold.txt>.
    • Harpold, Terry, and Kavita Phillip. “Of Bugs and Rats: Cyber-Cleanliness, Cyber-Squalor, and the Fantasy-Spaces of Informational Globalization.” Postmodern Culture 11.1 (Sep. 2000). 36 pars. <http://muse.jhu.edu/journals/pmc/v011/
      11.1harpoldphilip.html
      > and <http://www.iath.virginia.edu/pmc/text-only/issue.900/
      11.1harpoldphilip.txt
      >.
    • Irvine, Martin. “Global Cyberculture Reconsidered: Cyberspace, Identity, and the Global Information City.” 17 Oct. 1999. <http://www.georgetown.edu/irvinemj/articles/globalculture.html>.
    • Jordan, Tim. Cyberpower: The Culture and Politics of Cyberspace and the Internet. New York: Routledge, 1999.
    • Kittler, Friedrich. Discourse Networks 1800/1900. Stanford, CA: Stanford UP, 1990.
    • Kumar, Krishnan. From Post-Industrial to Post-Modern Society. New York: Blackwell, 1995.
    • Kundnani, Arun. “Where do you want to go today? The Rise of Information Capitalism.” Race and Class 40.2/3 (1998-99): 49-70.
    • Lazarus, Neil. “Charting Globalization.” Race and Class 40.2/3 (1998-99): 91-106.
    • Lessig, Lawrence. Code and Other Laws of Cyberspace. New York: Basic Books, 1999.
    • —. “The Laws of Cyberspace.” The Berkmann Center for Internet and Society, Harvard Law School. <http://cyberlaw.stanford.edu/lessig/content/>.
    • Lewis, Neil A. “Rebels in Black Robes Recoil at Surveillance of Computers.” New York Times Wed. 8 Aug 2001: A1, A12.
    • Lohr, Steve. “Your Data, Yourself: A Protective Path Paved in Granola.” New York Times 15 Jul. 2001, sec. 4: 3.
    • Ludlow, Peter, ed. High Noon on the Electronic Frontier: Conceptual Issues in Cyberspace. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1996.
    • McClintock, Anne. Imperial Leather: Race, Gender, and Sexuality in the Colonial Contest. New York, Routledge, 1996.
    • Mercer, Kobena. “Witness at the Crossroads: An Artist’s Journey in Post-Colonial Space.” In Keith Piper, Relocating the Remains. London: Institute for International Visual Arts, 1997. 15-79.
    • Mitchell, William J. Etopia. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1999.
    • Negroponte, Nicholas. Being Digital. New York: Knopf, 1995.
    • Parenti, Christian. “Big Brother’s Corporate Cousin: High-Tech Workplace Surveillance is the Hallmark of a New Digital Taylorism.” The Nation 6-13 Aug. 2001: 26-30.
    • Piper, Keith. “Relocating the Remains.” Institute for International Visual Arts. London. <http://www.iniva.org/piper/>.
    • —. Relocating the Remains. CD-ROM. London: Institute for International Visual Arts, 1997.
    • —. Relocating the Remains. London: Institute for International Visual Arts, 1997.
    • Poster, Mark . “Cyberdemocracy: Internet and Public Sphere.” Internet Culture. Ed. David Porter. New York: Routledge, 1996. 201-218.
    • —. “Database as Discourse, or Electronic Interpellations.” Detraditionalization. Ed. Paul Heelas, Scott Lash, and Paul Morris. Oxford: Blackwell, 1996. 277-293.
    • —. What’s the Matter with the Internet?. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2001.
    • Pratt, Mary Louise. Imperial Eyes: Travel Writing and Transculturation. New York: Routledge, 1992.
    • Sassen, Saskia. Losing Control?: Sovereignty in an Age of Globalization. New York: Columbia UP, 1996.
    • Sivanandan, A. “Globalization and the Left.” Race and Class 40.2/3 (1998-99): 5-15.
    • —. “Racism: the Road from Germany,” Race and Class 34.3 (Jan-Mar 1993): 68-74.
    • Smith, Marc A. and Peter Kollock, eds. Communities in Cyberspace. New York: Routledge, 1999.
    • Spivak, Gayatri Chakravorty. “Subaltern Studies: Deconstructing Historiography.” Selected Subaltern Studies. Ed. Ranajit Guha and Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak. New York: Oxford UP, 1988. 3-32.
    • Williams, Raymond. Communications. Harmondsworth, England: Penguin, 1976.
    • Wyatt, Sally, Flis Henwood, Nod Miller, and Peter Senker, eds. Technology and In/equality: Questioning the Information Society. New York: Routledge, 2000.

     

  • Other than Postmodern?–Foucault, Pynchon, Hybridity, Ethics

    Frank Palmeri

    Department of English
    University of Miami
    fpalmeri@miami.edu

     

    In what might be understood as tracing a paradigm shift in postmodern culture (Kuhn), practicing an archaeology of the contemporary (Foucault), or reporting on the conditions of current knowledge (Lyotard), this essay suggests that a moment of high postmodernism dominant in the sixties, seventies, and eighties has been succeeded by two forms of cultural expression that have continuities with, yet depart from, this cultural mode and stand in contrast to each other. A new structure of thought and expression that I call other than postmodern remains the less prominent and popular mode, by contrast with a late postmodernism that has been the dominant form of production in the nineties and the first years of the new century.1 To define what is other than postmodern, the argument here focuses on the careers and works of Michel Foucault and Thomas Pynchon, noting briefly the works of others as well; by contrast, The X-Fileswill serve as an instance of the late postmodern, along with other works in the genre of conspiratorial science fiction.

     

    As I understand it, postmodernism–like modernism or romanticism–combines elements of both a period and a mode. If it is defined solely as a mode of cultural expression or a set of formal features, the result is an unmooring from historical circumstances. Conversely, if it is defined solely as a period, the result is a reifying of a zeitgeist that may have little or no empirical content, and whose boundaries may be arbitrary and debatable. Thus, postmodernism encompasses a set of concerns and formal operations–including a frequent use of irony, satire, and pastiche, an interest in the layering of historical interpretations, and a strong paranoid strand–while also signifying the period from the mid-sixties until perhaps the present when most, but not necessarily all, of these features have been prominent. For the purposes of the argument here, I will focus on the significant role played in many postmodern works by paranoid visions of history as controlled by powerful but nameless forces or conspirators. As Leo Braudy has pointed out, such visions inform the novels of Pynchon, Mailer, and Heller, and we might add films such as The Conversation (1974), and television series such as The Prisoner (1968). To such a list, Patrick O’Donnell and Timothy Melley have added works by Kathy Acker, Margaret Atwood, Don DeLillo, Philip K. Dick, Joseph McElroy, and Ishmael Reed.

     

    Despite the emphasis on paranoia in this essay, I do not define postmodernism solely by reference to the strength or prominence of a single element. Rather, a whole configuration of features and operations–including its relation to the cultural and political moment–is crucial in determining the cultural paradigm in which a work participates, whether modern, postmodern, or late postmodern. For example, Freud formulated an influential theory of paranoia, but his thought on the subject does not therefore become postmodern. The Freudian concept of paranoia designates a form of mental illness that has a personal, sexual etiology and meaning; by contrast, paranoia carries a central, social, and political import in the postmodern works of Pynchon, DeLillo, and others. The content of the concept differs in such cases, and so do the cultural configurations in which it plays a part. Similarly, I would not define the modern solely by reference to its reliance on the liberal humanist subject. When, for instance, works such as The X-Files and The Matrix attempt to recuperate an autonomous individual subject that has been dissolved in many ways by earlier versions of postmodernism, they do not therefore return to a modernist cultural moment; their attempted restoration takes place in the context of global conspiracy theories more powerful and ominous than the ordering structures envisioned in the narratives of Joyce, Woolf, or Faulkner.

     

    Jean-François Lyotard has focused on the postmodern skepticism about master narratives and totalizing ideologies; Linda Hutcheon has stressed the parodic and ironic element that pervades postmodernism, as well as its interest in history as opposed to myth. Although the focus here on paranoia in postmodernism might appear to be at odds with Lyotard’s and Hutcheon’s understandings of the postmodern, I believe it is consistent with both. In most works of high postmodernism, a vision or premonition of an all-encompassing and threatening explanatory or totalitarian order plays a significant role in the world of the narrative. But such a totalizing vision is also typically opposed by skeptical, comic, and anarchic elements that undercut or refuse to accept the legitimacy of the master narrative. High postmodern works reveal both an anxious apprehension of a newly realized and effective system of power and knowledge (beyond traditional religions or nation-states), impossible even to comprehend in its totality, but also a subversive, even parodic skepticism about such phenomena–both a fascination with and a satiric skepticism of paranoia. Lyotard’s principal argument about postmodernism is borne out, if qualified, by such a characteristic juxtaposition of opposed attitudes. Hutcheon argues throughout her book that postmodernism is paradoxical in just this way: it makes use of the forms, systems, and master narratives that it also undercuts by means of ubiquitous parody (22-36, 46, 116). As I understand it, then, a crucial feature of high postmodernism is its juxtaposition of paranoia about controlling systems of thought and action with a skeptical resistance to paranoia that can range from the wildly anarchic to the bleakly comic.2

     

    I focus on the role and kind of paranoia in the works discussed here in order to distinguish modes of postmodernism from each other and from a mode of thought and representation that may stand apart from the postmodern. The late works of Foucault and Pynchon adopt a perspective–here called other than postmodern–that can be distinguished from that of their earlier works–seen here as instances of high postmodernism.3 What is other than postmodern moves away from the representation of extreme paranoia, toward a vision of local ethico-political possibilities and a greater acceptance of hybrids that combine human and machine or human and animal traits. During the same period a parallel shift occurs in other thinkers such as Levinas, Haraway, Derrida, Laclau and Mouffe, and Latour, whom I will consider briefly in a separate section. But first I will discuss The X-Files as an instance of late postmodernism, the dominant mode of cultural production in the last decade or more. Rather than holding to a tense equilibrium between paranoia and skepticism as does the high postmodern, late postmodernism expresses a more rigid paranoid vision that includes a reinscription of the liberal humanist subject and intense anxiety about human hybrids.
     

    i

     
    Over the course of its first seven seasons, The X-Files, created by Chris Carter, presented and accumulated evidence that extraterrestrials have visited earth, and that they have probably abducted many people, if only temporarily. The mythology of the series also indicates that powerful forces high in the U.S. government (with connections to a shadowy international group) have conspired to conceal this information as well as the extent to which the government itself has made use of alien technology, perhaps as a result of an agreement with the aliens. Carter has said that the government plays the role of the “all-around bad guy” in The X-Files because of this conspiracy to deceive the American people (Carter). Such a representation of the government may help account for the popularity of the series, because it carries an appeal to both ends of the political spectrum. It can be welcomed by a vaguely and nostalgically leftist position opposed to the persecuting excesses of the Federal Bureau of Investigation under J. Edgar Hoover during the anti-communist years of the Cold War. But a vision of nefarious government conspiracies in the nineties–after Reagan, Ruby Ridge, and Waco–is likely to appeal just as strongly to far-right hostility to the federal government, and to feed into a historically significant strain of nativist paranoia antagonistic to foreigners and anything “unAmerican.”4 Crucially, The X-Files makes its protagonists FBI agents–both Mulder, who seeks to expose the conspiracy, and Scully, his generally more skeptical partner.5 The series thus gives evidence of a seriously divided attitude toward the American government: mistrusted on the one hand as the agent of a vast conspiracy to conceal the presence of aliens in America, yet trusted, in the persons of the incorruptible and determined individuals who work for what has historically been the most reactionary and repressive agency of domestic law enforcement.

     

    In addition to plots concerning conspiracies to cover up alien visitations, the series devotes almost three-quarters of its episodes to horror mysteries involving the paranormal. Typically, the murderous paranormal agents are hybrids of humans and animals or humans and machines, and Mulder’s task is to contain or kill the threatening creatures by means of his intuitive, non-rational understanding of such phenomena. The series thus adopts an anxious and hostile attitude toward the human-animal-machine hybrid–very different, as we shall see, from Haraway’s ambivalent celebration of cyborgs, Latour’s exhortation that we recognize the ubiquity of hybrid objects, or Pynchon’s comic and poignant representation of hybrid creatures. In addition, the paranoid episodes indicate from the first season onward that the deepest anxiety of the series is reserved for the possibility of human-alien hybrids. The horror-based episodes thus parallel and complement the conspiracy-based episodes involving alien visitors. The recurring accounts of abduction by aliens–most significantly, the abduction of Mulder’s sister, Samantha, and later of his partner, Scully–offer parallels with the genre of the captivity narrative, which is haunted by the possible mixing of blood of different races, just as The X-Files is haunted by the possible mixing of human and alien DNA. Hostility to and anxiety concerning what is alien, hybrid, and “unAmerican” permeate the series.6

     

    In works by Pynchon, Mailer, and others in the sixties and seventies, a paranoid vision associated with an urge to order, with science, technology, and bureaucracy stands at one pole in opposition to a tendency toward disorder and an ability to tolerate uncertainty. Eliminating this pole of anarchy and flux, The X-Files instead opposes scientific rationality to belief in government conspiracies or paranormal phenomena. However, the series consistently authorizes Mulder’s belief, both in the paranormal and in the conspiracy to conceal the alien presence, while Scully’s scientific reason almost always proves to be woefully inadequate to the phenomena they encounter. The series further suggests a close relation between belief in conspiracies and religious faith, for example by repeatedly citing Mulder’s poster of a classic grainy UFO photo carrying the caption, “I Want To Believe”; it thus renders equivalent and authorizes all the forms of belief that it considers. The X-Files also insists on the accessibility of a single, unqualified truth. The prospect of learning the hidden truth motivates first Mulder and later Scully in their efforts to uncover the government conspiracy; such a unitary and unqualified notion contributes to the epigraph for most episodes as the title sequence concludes by announcing, “The Truth Is Out There.”7 With this notion, The X-Files reinforces the agency of the liberal humanist subject: Mulder is the heroic individual on a quest to uncover the truth that the government has lied to the American people. The series thus updates alien invasion plots to attack human hybrids, reworks captivity narratives to include aliens in the place of native peoples, and bases conspiracy theories of the sixties and seventies on a belief in the availability of an absolute truth to an autonomous subject.

     

    In my view, The X-Files exemplifies the moment of late postmodernism, strong and perhaps dominant during the last ten or fifteen years, in which paranoid visions are unrelieved by black humor, and hybrids invariably constitute threats. Early in the last decade, Oliver Stone’s JFK (1991) expresses a paranoid view of a nefarious government conspiracy, the dark truth of which is unqualified by ambiguities and unmediated by irony. At the end of the decade, The Matrix (1999, the Wachowskis) foresees the reduction of human beings to a condition of dreaming vegetables by a world-ruling artificial intelligence, offering its human protagonist as the eventual savior of mankind from the hyper-intelligent machines. Such works participate in a darkly paranoid vision of government conspiracies and threatening human hybrids, the exposure of which often leads to an absolute truth or religious salvation.8 The freefloating temptation to paranoia of the earlier period has hardened into a requirement in these works, the autonomous individual re-emerges as a hero, and a greater and darker stylization based on film noir replaces grotesque surrealism as the mode in which the paranoid vision is typically elaborated.

     

    ii

     

    Several kinds of works and ways of thought besides those of Foucault and Pynchon give evidence of a movement away from high postmodernism toward what may be other than postmodern over the last twenty years. The increasing attention being paid to the thought of Emmanuel Levinas indicates a widespread questioning of essential, unified identities, and a turn to ethical considerations. According to Levinas, ethics, not ontology, constitutes first philosophy. Rather than investigating the being of the self as the origin and ground of identity, Levinas focuses in Totality and Infinity (1961) on the encounter with the face of the other as antecedent to being and the subject; in Otherwise Than Being (1974) he maintains that the infinite responsibility for the other precedes origin and essence. This responsibility is not assumed or willed by a self already constituted; instead, it finds itself and its meaning in proximity to the other, in putting oneself in the place of the other, in an open-ended saying rather than what is finalized and said. The pre-original responsibility for the other escapes and precedes being, definition, and identity. Although ethics concentrates on individual responsibility, in Levinas’s thought ethics does not fall mute and powerless in the realm of politics. Indeed, ethics can both inform and critique political practice and reason, as Levinas’s interviews on contemporary events indicate.9 Numerous books and collections of essays on his thought have appeared in the last ten to twelve years; a collection of essays on Levinas mostly by literary critics is forthcoming; and a recent special issue of PMLA was devoted to “Ethics and Literary Study” (Buell).10

     

    Jacques Derrida has written two significant essays on Levinas that helped bring his work to the attention of literary critics and others in the Anglo-American world. Derrida deserves to be mentioned here not only for the impact of these essays, but also because of a turn in his own work in the last decade or so which parallels the shift that occurs in the careers of Foucault and Pynchon. Derrida’s earlier deconstructive works argue that individuals are less in control of what they write and say than they believe; accordingly, it may be more accurate to say that languages speak and write individuals than to say that writers create unique and original meanings. Systems of meaning in fact establish what can and cannot be said, and undermine any straightforward assertion, whether by a conventional or a revolutionary thinker. (For all their disagreements and differences of emphasis, the resemblances are clear between this view of Derrida and Foucault’s view of the pervasive effects of epistemes.) But in later works, Derrida has modified this rather ahistorical view in which the role of politics is unclear. In the recent Politics of Friendship (1994), he has investigated the way in which the realm of the political has been constituted by understandings of who is a friend and who an enemy. In his previous work, Specters of Marx (1993), he investigated Marx’s thought and communism as a specter not only from the past, in the wake of the disintegration of the Soviet Union, but also from the future, as a claim and obligation on the present generation. He also argues forcefully there against the notion that the current triumph of market economies signifies an end to history. In both works, Derrida trains his characteristic interpretative strategies on texts of political and ethical philosophy not in order to deconstruct them entirely, but to find a way toward a fuller and more adequate idea of democracy and a greater equality of goods as well as opportunities.11

     

    A change in the critical analysis of ideologies can serve as a further instance of a shift between the sixties and the late eighties from a view of an all-encompassing system of control to a view that sees a possibility for effective ethico-political action, without relying on the subject of liberal humanism or Marxism. In Louis Althusser’s account, the process of subject formation through hailing or interpellation by an ideological system is inescapable; no position exists outside the apparatuses of ideology. Ernesto Laclau and Chantal Mouffe, by contrast, adopt and extend Antonio Gramsci’s exploration of the possibilities for constructing multiple, provisional, and oppositional subject positions not as a result of interpellation from above and outside. They propose that formation of such flexible subject positions will allow for the articulation in discourse of equivalences or intersecting interests among various subordinate groups. For Laclau and Mouffe, as well as for Levinas, one does not possess a pre-existing identity or subject position from which one is able to make alliances; rather, one’s subject position takes shape only in relation to one’s sympathies with other subjects. The renewed concern among social theorists in the last ten or fifteen years with exploring the workings and implications of various public spheres can be seen as congruent to the shift effected by Laclau and Mouffe in the analysis of ideologies. I refer of course to Jürgen Habermas’s Structural Transformation of the Public Sphere (1962) and the extensive work that it has generated (see, for example, Calhoun).

     

    Focusing on hybrids who combine human with mechanical or animal traits, Donna Haraway’s reflections in “A Cyborg Manifesto” (1985) constitute a significant antecedent to Pynchon’s representation of intelligent and ethical animal and mechanical creatures in Mason & Dixon. Haraway intends to move beyond a characterization of cyborgs solely as frightening monsters who signify a declension from the human. Arguing that in some ways we are all cyborgs now (177), she articulates a position that combines anxiety with an exuberant embrace of such a fractured and hybrid identity.12 Her concern arises from the sense that the new networks of information may prove to be even more effective means of control than the older hierarchies of domination–a perhaps justified paranoia. But she celebrates the cyborg identity because she sees its hybridity as a figure for the breakdown of all kinds of boundaries and categories.13 By replicating rather than reproducing, for example, cyborgs undercut heterosexism; the partly mechanical cyborg also promises a “utopian dream of the hope for a monstrous world without gender” (181). Significantly, Haraway devotes much of her essay that elaborates her “myth of the cyborg” to the possibilities for political action that may be opened up by the “breakdown of clean distinctions between organism and machine” (174).14 As in Laclau and Mouffe, these include possibilities for feminists, socialists, and women of color to recognize equivalences and form associations across boundaries.15

     

    A few years after Haraway’s essay was first published, Bruno Latour argued for an even more extended understanding of hybrids as objects that include elements both of the human and the nonhuman. On this definition, everything that results from mixing human activity with nonhuman materials and beings is hybrid, including, for example, scientific laboratories, everyday tools and conveniences of technology, even phenomena such as the rise of the average temperature of the earth. Latour argues that a double movement characterizes modernity: it encourages the proliferation of hybrids, but denies their existence, recognizing only the opposed poles of nature and society. Overtly, the modern tries to keep the human and nonhuman pure and distinct, but covertly it produces a massive mediation between the two. Latour suggests we recognize that the attempt at purification never worked, and that the multiplication of hybrids has proceeded at an increasing pace. Thus, we have never been modern: we have never successfully separated nature and society, the human and nonhuman. Latour calls neither for a return to the premodern nor for an embrace of the postmodern (which he attacks for being an extreme form of modern thought), but rather for the deliberate cultivation of a “nonmodern” thought and practice that will devote its attention precisely to the kinds and implications of the hybrid objects that mediate between the human and nonhuman.16

     

    I will conclude this brief survey of developments in accord with an other than postmodern paradigm by citing two popular works from the early eighties that are thus approximately contemporary with Foucault’s late writings, Haraway’s essay, and Laclau and Mouffe’s book; both works give evidence of an increased acceptance of hybrids combining human character with machines or artificial intelligence. In Blade Runner (1982), directed by Ridley Scott, the manufactured humans or replicants exhibit not only more intelligence and cunning, but also more emotional intensity and desire for life than do the organic humans who hunt and kill them. In William Gibson’s Neuromancer (1984), the founding text of cyberfiction, all the principal human characters either have extensive mechanical implants or live significant portions of their lives in cyberspace; more importantly, the protagonist turns out to be an artificial intelligence who has for his own purposes conceived and directed the elaborate plot involving all the humans in the novel. Neither of these works grants ethical superiority to or otherwise privileges organic humans over such hybrid forms of existence. In their emphasis on hybrids and their ethics, these fictional narratives join the philosophical texts that may give evidence of an emerging paradigm.

     

    iii

     

    The roughly contemporaneous careers of Foucault and Pynchon (Madness and Civilization was published in 1961, and V. in 1963, with part appearing as a short story in 1961) reveal a turn from a more deterministic view of the efficacy of normalizing forces (in the case of Foucault) or of the forces of inanimacy and death (in the case of Pynchon). This shift away from the high postmodern leads to an increased resistance to paranoid totalizing and to greater possibilities for ethico-political action, even if it remains limited and circumscribed. The late works of both authors see human beings less as automata, objects of control, and more as creatures with some capacity for effective action, self-discipline, and self-control.

     

    The first two dimensions of Foucault’s work are concerned with controlling systems of thought and of power. In the phase that begins with Madness and Civilization and extends through The Order of Things (1968), Foucault explores the dimension of knowledge, concentrating on what can be known and uttered in different epochs of knowledge or epistemes. In Madness and Civilization, he emphasizes that whatever lies outside the field of the rational, as that changes from one period to another, can only been seen as madness, as non-sense. In The Order of Things, he argues that the rules of formation that give a unity to any period exist outside the consciousness of those who work within the forms of knowledge of the time. In The Order of Things, he goes so far as to declare that such systems not only “evade the consciousness” of individuals, but are all-encompassing and monolithic: “In any given culture and at any given moment, there is always only one episteme that defines the conditions of possibility of all knowledge, whether expressed in a theory or silently invested in a practice” (168).

     

    Soon after The Order of Things, Foucault shifts his focus from systems of knowledge to systems of power. In “Nietzsche, Genealogy, History” (1971), he lays out the essentials of a genealogical method that displaces the archaeological approach he had previously employed. Instead of giving priority to the discursive dimension as determinative, Foucault the practitioner of genealogical history concentrates on the intertwining of power and knowledge, the effects that constructions of knowledge have on the bodies of those subject to institutions such as the factory or the school. His focus in Discipline and Punish (1975) and the first volume of the History of Sexuality (1976) is the disciplining–the formation and constraining–of the subject by institutions of power and knowledge that include the prison and psychoanalysis. Many commentators have stressed the importance of the shift from archaeology to genealogy, from an examination of discourse to a concentration on power, and I would not deny the significant differences between the two approaches and their objects of inquiry. But there are continuities between the two as well. For one, Foucault does not abandon the analysis of discourse or knowledge in the later approach; rather, a genealogical analysis explores the workings of institutional power through the analysis of discourse, and the complex intersections of the two can often be described as the workings of power/knowledge.

     

    In addition, regimes of knowledge and power both exist apart from the control or even the consciousness of those who participate in them; their sway is totally effective and unchallenged.17 The history of their transformations is punctuated by dramatic discontinuities, ruptures that are frequently sudden and nearly complete. No agency, group, identifiable force, or combination of causes directs alterations such as the shift described in Madness and Civilization from the practice in the middle ages of allowing the mad to wander from town to town, to the opposite practice beginning in the mid-seventeenth century of restricting their movement by confining them. Similarly lacking any clear cause is the transformation of punishment from a spectacle of the sovereign power writing on the body of the condemned, to the inculcation of control through the constant discipline of self-observation and self-regulation. Indeed, Foucault grimly observes that attempts to reform a system of excessive punishment may have contributed not to a liberating result but to the development and imposition of more effective, more internalized means of control. Foucault indicates an interest in ethics and resistance to the micrological workings of disciplinary power as early as The Archaeology of Knowledge (1969), but from that work through the writing of Discipline and Punish and the first volume of The History of Sexuality, he finds it impossible to locate and specify how one might evade or resist the disciplinary forces that both form and constrain the subject.

     

    However, even in such an uncompromising vision of knowledge or power as effecting total control, we may see elements of opposition to other forms of control. The opposition in Foucault’s works to traditional master narratives such as Marxist historiography, humanist intellectual history, and liberal narratives of progress can be seen as a parodic overturning of previous paradigms of knowledge. From this point of view, the sudden ruptures, extreme discontinuities, and failure to account for change in Foucault’s histories would have a satiric effect on established histories of progress. Foucault also makes frequent use of a satiric rhetoric of extremes; such satiric inversions resemble the parodic skepticism that is juxtaposed in other works of high postmodernism with paranoid visions of controlling systems.

     

    Pynchon’s early and middle works, from V. through The Crying of Lot 49 (1966) to a culmination in Gravity’s Rainbow (1973), express a vision similar to Foucault’s of a controlling regime just behind events and just outside perception or consciousness, which facelessly directs history, providing the possibility of unifying widely dispersed phenomena. In V., Stencil pursues evidence of Victoria Wren, Veronica the rat, the kingdom of Vheissu, and the theft of Botticelli’s Birth of Venus all as pieces of what he conceives of as “the century’s master cabal” (226). Throughout his paranoid quest for order and Benny Profane’s non-paranoid reveling in disorder and disconnectedness, the evidence accumulates that, whether under the sign of V. or not, the century’s hallmark is the declension from the animate to the inanimate, from the human to the mechanical, from the living to the dead. In Lot 49, the history of postage stamps, the decimal calendar of the French Revolution, Jacobean tragedy, a World War II battle in Italy, and a southern Californian real estate development all give evidence of the force called Tristero, and Tristero, whether it exists or not, points to a pattern of dispossession in America. In Gravity’s Rainbow, behind the war, behind the oppositions mobilized to make war, behind the nation-states of Germany, England, the U.S.S.R., and the United States, Slothrop, Enzian, and others see another order of force, designated sometimes as They, which may have staged the war in order to expand their markets or in order to find supplies and uses for their technologies. “They” are linked throughout with the chemical company I.G. Farben, as well as with Krupp, General Electric, Shell Oil, and other multinational conglomerates (Tölölyan 53-64).18 As the narrative voice says, “The real business of the War is buying and selling. The murder and the violence are self-policing, and can be entrusted to non-professionals…. The true war is a celebration of markets” (105).

     

    In Gravity’s Rainbow, They are associated with a historical plot that leads to death, particularly through the instrumentality of science, a descent as in V. from the human to the inanimate and the mechanical, the controlled. In V. the disassembly of the Bad Priest of Malta–with her glass eyes, gold teeth, sapphire navel, and artificial limbs–provides a striking instance of the replacement of the human by the inanimate. The Rocket in Gravity’s Rainbow stands as the realization, the emblem, and the acme of this urge to death: at the end of the novel, the young Gottfried, encased in the tip of the V-2, becomes one with the Rocket as it rises and then falls to earth, bringing death both to him and to those on the ground below. Each of the controlling phenomena in the early and middle works of Pynchon–V., Tristero, They–eludes or remains on the horizon just outside full consciousness or complete apprehension. Still, each novel suggests that these structures have directed the course of history and continue to provide its motive force. In relation to all such anonymous forms of historical control, human beings take on the attributes of automata whose behavior, movements, even desires and thoughts may have been programmed or controlled.19

     

    In all these cases, little opportunity exists to challenge, evade, limit, or change such regimes. Each work presents a pair of opposites either of which is unattractive if taken singly. The obvious alternative in V. to Stencil’s obsessive ordering is the randomness and disorder of Benny Profane and the Whole Sick Crew. The only clear alternative to the ominous significance of Tristero in Lot 49 is the possibility of no meaning at all. The only consciously chosen alternative to Them in Gravity’s Rainbow is the Counterforce, which through its resistance soon comes to mirror its opposite–the Force, Them. Slothrop ultimately evades the controlling force of the multinationals through his dispersion or scattering, but this does not appear to be a course that others can choose; it just happens, fortuitously, to Slothrop.

     

    It is true that Pynchon also depicts Europe after the war as a place where international cartels find it difficult to control events, because nation-states and other forms of order, including capital markets, have collapsed. In the Zone, only spontaneous and temporary forms of identity and order emerge, and a kind of dangerous and beautiful anarchy reigns. Still, the Zone itself is temporary, and the authentic and crazy human contacts it encourages give way as traditional forms of social and political order are reimposed. Sites of carnival inversion, such as the Plechazunga celebration, cannot be sustained. In Gravity’s Rainbow, Pynchon reflects that even on the personal level, an extreme lack of connectedness may be impossible to tolerate for long (434). Throughout these early and middle works, Pynchon resists authorizing either an ominous order or meaningless disorder; he implies instead that it is necessary if almost impossible somehow to combine the urge to order and meaning with a skepticism that recognizes the fruitfulness of disorder and unpredictability.20

     

    In the later careers of both Foucault and Pynchon, the vision of powerful regimes that control and direct history beneath people’s consciousness and beyond their ability to act effectively gives way to an ethics that might through self-discipline evade disciplinary subjectification (in Foucault’s thought) or to a political ethics of local resistance to the enslavement of Africans and the killing of native people (in Pynchon’s work). In The Archaeology of Knowledge (1969), Foucault begins to distance himself from the idea that discursive regimes are monolithic; there he argues against a “totalitarian periodization” according to which at a certain time and in a certain culture, “everyone would think in the same way” (148). Instead, different paradigms of thought and practice coexist and overlap. Epistemological shifts affect one area of discourse and not others, as well as some groups or individuals and not others (175). In addition, in his work on governmentality in the late seventies, Foucault sees not only the growth of disciplinary governance, but also a resistance to governance, an art of not being governed so much, or in a certain way, which develops alongside and in resistance to the art of governing (“What is Critique?” 28). He pays renewed attention to Enlightenment thinkers as agents of such critique who pursue possibilities for self-governance and self-formation.

     

    In the eight years following the publication of the first volume of The History of Sexuality perhaps the most significant shift in Foucault’s thought occurs. In Foucault’s earlier thought, there is no clear means of resisting reigning forms of thought or systems of power. It is impossible to think outside what is made utterable by the epistemological frameworks of a time, nor is it possible to alter or reform normalizing disciplinary institutions. In essays and interviews from the mid-seventies, Foucault argued that there must be sites of resistance to power, but the difficulty was to locate and specify them. To resolve the crisis that his thought had reached after adding the investigation of modes of power to the analysis of forms of knowledge, Foucault moved into a third phase or dimension. This third dimension–which did not replace the first two but carried forward the results of the earlier researches–concerned processes of subjectification.21 Foucault reconceived and rewrote the later volumes of the History so that they focus primarily not on problems of truth and power, but on an analysis of how one becomes a subject, of one’s relation to oneself, of ethics understood as an art of shaping one’s life (“Concern” 255-56, “Preface” 336, “Return” 243).

     

    According to these works, effective action does not occur only in anonymous, culture-wide discursive and institutional realignments. Instead, as he says in discussing the later volumes of the History of Sexuality, Foucault now sees the history of cultural forms as a reservoir of ideas for shaping one’s life, a “treasury of devices, techniques, ideas, procedures, and so on that cannot exactly be reactivated” from other societies such as that of the ancient Greeks, but which “can be very useful as a tool for analyzing what’s going on now and to change it” (“Genealogy” 350). These last two points are crucial: Foucault now sees a possibility for maneuvering away from disciplinary constraints of knowledge, power, and subjectification not by means of opposing or evading an external totalizing force, but rather through adopting a disciplinary relation to oneself–the self-imposed discipline of an ethos or way of life. One who pursues such an art of living, “ethics as a form to be given to one’s behavior and life” (“Concern” 263), assumes responsibility for self-governance, for one’s own formation and subjectification. The result is not a return to the ahistorical possessive subject of liberal humanism.22 One who pursues such an ethical self-governance does not do so outside historical and cultural determinations; rather, such a project depends on knowing where we are–to what point our thought and actions have come–so that one can attempt to form oneself in another way.23 For instance, presumably today, as in the eighties, Foucault would see such awareness involving a move away from moralities based on systems of rules and regulations, and toward a post-Christian ethics (“Aesthetics” 49-50).24

     

    Just as we can observe both continuities in and divergences between Foucault’s earlier investigations of regimes of truth and power and his late focus on subjectification and ethics, we can see continuities in and divergences between the vision of powerful impersonal forces in Pynchon’s earlier works and in his later Vineland (1990) and Mason & Dixon (1997). In Vineland, the attitude toward paranoia departs from the pattern established in Pynchon’s first three novels, but it does not entirely coincide with that in Mason & Dixon. No shadowy conspiracy of multinational or historic proportions lurks behind individual actions and historic events in Vineland.25 Instead, two repressive efforts in America’s history contribute largely to shaping the concerns of the narrative. The first of these is the attack on labor unions in the early and middle decades of the twentieth century, particularly in the Pacific Northwest and in Hollywood during the anti-communist blacklist. The second instance is the attack on liberals, unions, drugs, and the poor by the Reagan administrations in the eighties (embodied in the novel by the Republican prosecutor Brock Vond). Neither of these efforts is hidden, secret, or unknown to standard histories, even if one of the aims of the later moment was to repress historical memory of the earlier one.

     

    However, in Mason & Dixon, Pynchon represents the world of the 1760s and of the eighteenth century generally as already largely shaped by shadowy transnational institutions. The question of where the boundary line between Maryland and Pennsylvania should be fixed aligns Calverts and their Catholic followers against Penns and their Quaker and Protestant partisans, leading eventually, perhaps, to a world-wide conspiracy of the Jesuit order–viewed as ruthless, rational, and authoritarian–against the equally world-wide reach of the British East India Company, which is interested in any extension of technical knowledge with commercial applications for the expansion of overseas markets.26 Moreover, not only others in the novel, but Mason and Dixon themselves wonder whether they were put forward by these two opposed but overarching forces: the Anglican astronomer Mason perhaps named by the Royal Society and the Astronomer Royal, Maskelyne, brother-in-law to Clive of India; the Quaker surveyor Dixon perhaps ironically named by his teacher Emerson, himself a friend of Father Le Maire, one of the Jesuits who laid out two degrees of latitude in a straight line from Rome to Rimini.

     

    However, such speculations are repeatedly undermined by their outlandishness, mocked by a tongue-in-cheek tone and deflating puns. For instance, when they are already well advanced in their project and Dixon suggests that perhaps “we shouldn’t be runnin’ this Line…?” (478), Mason shares some of his “darker Sentiments” with his partner; Mason supposes that the Astronomer Royal may be a spy transmitting the daily Greenwich observations to French Jesuits who line up the numbers and analyze them like a kabbalistic text until they reveal a mysterious message. When Dixon responds with his own version of a “likely Conspiracy… form’d in the Interest of Trade,” it is clear that he doubts the existence of a Jesuit scheme, just as Mason disputes the relevance of the East India Company. But Dixon goes on to press Mason about evidence of trade with the spice islands:

     

    “Can you not sense here, there,… the Scent of fresh Coriander, the Whisper of a Sarong…?”
    “Sari,” corrects Mason
    “Not at all Sir,– ’twas I who was sarong.” (479)

     

    On this deflating note, the two-page section with its consideration of vast conspiracies breaks off. Mason and Dixon’s discussions of possible conspiracies usually become absurd in this way and stop abruptly, lead nowhere, or otherwise fail to reach even a tentative conclusion.27

     

    A much more committed conspiracy theorist is the feng-shui master and megalomanical captain Zhang, who believes that the Jesuits serve as agents for aliens who have visited earth and departed, leaving behind instructions to mark the planet with long straight lines as signs carrying an unknown message (601). But the alternative to such paranoid flights of order is not, as it was in earlier works, an equally intolerable state of meaningless disconnection and disorder. Instead, many characters in the novel acknowledge the central position that Zhang articulates–that the boundary line effects an unnatural gouging of the earth by scientific rationality–without taking it to the paranoid lengths that he does (see Cowart, “Luddite” 361). Despite a world-wide system of Jesuit telegraphs and the transnational trading posts of the Company, no system of control in this novel carries the realistic possibility of being as all-encompassing and effective as the fantasized or depicted controlling regimes of history in Gravity’s Rainbow, V., and The Crying of Lot 49. In Mason & Dixon, such systems are undercut by the extremists who embrace them. Acknowledging the force of Zhang’s criticism of the line does not mean that Mason and Dixon become obsessed questers like Stencil in V. or mad scientific authorities like Blicero/Weissman and Pointsman in Gravity’s Rainbow. Rather, the position of Mason and Dixon more nearly resembles that of Oedipa Maas, who comes to see more than she saw at first, to whom revelations happen which may or may not add up to evidence of a wide-ranging conspiracy, but which are nevertheless historically significant and demand an ethical response.

     

    In The Crying of Lot 49, whether Tristero actually exists or whether Oedipa has become paranoid finally becomes a moot question in the face of the undeniable evidence of dispossession in America that Oedipa comes to recognize (Palmeri 993). In Mason & Dixon, such questions as whether Mason is being used by the East India Company or Dixon by the Jesuits remain undecidable, but also become moot in the face of the growing conviction that the line constitutes a perhaps indefensible wounding of the earth’s surface that benefits only land speculators. Both Mason and Dixon finally acknowledge that “the Line is exactly what Zhang and a number of others have been styling it all along–a conduit for Evil… by its nature corrupt, of use at Trail’s End only to those who would profit from the sale and division and resale of Lands” (701). Such a conviction constitutes a moderate position between paranoid certainties and mindless obliviousness that is not excluded from this novel as it was from Lot 49 (136).

     

    At one point after the line has been run, Dixon, like Oedipa, moves beyond a concern with the particulars of various conspiracies and plots by which they may have been used to observe that the common elements in all their postings have been slavery and dispossession, and that perhaps they should acknowledge their participation in these enterprises (682-93). Mason and Dixon thus possess a significant capacity for critical reflection and for ethical action. In the first section of the novel, while in South Africa, despite the constantly eroticized atmosphere, both of them refuse to sleep with and impregnate slave women as the South Africans want them to do, because they would only be making further slaves for the Dutch (61-67). Once they are in America, but before the running of the line, Dixon accompanies Mason to Lancaster, Pennsylvania, where twenty-six unarmed Indians seeking protection in a jailhouse were massacred not long before. There Dixon argues with the murderous Lancastrians, earning Mason’s respect (343), then each separately visits the site and hopes that the killers meet a just judgment (346-47). Later, in Baltimore, after the line has been completed and the Quaker Dixon has seen too much of slavery both in Capetown and in America, he stops a slave-trader from whipping a group of slaves, turns the whip briefly against the trader, and frees the slaves, while Mason watches his back (698-99). Such episodes as these do not change the system of slavery in South Africa or the American South, nor do they prevent the dispossession and killing of native people in America. But they demonstrate that Dixon and Mason have the capacity to act ethically, that they are not entirely controlled by an all-engrossing system of power and thought in their time; they can act against the system, even if their action is local and limited in its effects.

     

    Such an ethos may not provide as elegant a means of evading control as does Slothrop’s disappearance in Gravity’s Rainbow, but it is more accessible to those who live paraliterary lives, outside fictional narratives. The actions of Dixon and Mason point to the possibility of a political ethics that is not identical with but may be compared to Foucault’s late ethics of self-discipline. Crucially, Pynchon’s protagonists do not retreat to a private world of purchasable comforts where they might deny their involvement in the larger world. Their local ethical action may not proceed as far as Foucault would want in dismantling the humanist subject, but they move in the same direction by challenging rather than embracing the oppressive systems of their time, neither denying their responsibility nor exaggerating their effectiveness.

     

    There is one other notable way in which Mason & Dixon revises the representation of systems of control in the earlier novels. Especially in V. and Gravity’s Rainbow, Pynchon analyzes the declension from the human to the mechanical, the colonizing of the living by the inanimate, the making of human beings into automata by systems of scientific knowledge and power. Vineland presents a view of human-machine hybrids which stands apart from the view in the earlier novels and more closely resembles what will come in Mason & Dixon. In the earlier novel, “Tubefreaks” such as Hector Zuñiga or Zoyd Wheeler who act and think in imitation of the characters in television programs appear as colorful, slightly eccentric characters, not victims of an ominous conspiracy to liquefy the brains of Americans. But perhaps the most important evidence in Vineland of the beginnings of a reversal in Pynchon’s representation of hybrid creatures comes from his depiction of the Thanatoids. These characters–who after death continue to exist, eat, sleep, dance, and talk, only at a slower rate than the living–revise the representation of the living dead as frightening, threatening zombies. In fact, they are mostly gentle, and include some of the most decent and sympathetic characters in the novel. Like the Tubefreaks, they occupy a middle ground between the living and the dead or the real and the unreal that produces not danger and anxiety so much as a muted and sorrowful desire.

     

    In Mason & Dixon, Pynchon proceeds much further by representing hybrid forms such as mechanical animals who take on the attributes of living creatures–intelligence, speech, a sense of justice, even a capacity for love. The movement in this novel reverses that in the early works by proceeding not from the human to the mechanical, but from the mechanical to the sentient. It is difficult to name all the intelligent animals and articulate machines in Mason & Dixon. They include not only conversing chronometers, but the celebrated, witty, and dangerous Duck of Vaucanson, whose involvement with the expedition contributes its one love story to the novel, and who also constitutes one of its moral centers, when she observes the “minor tho’ morally problematick part” (669) that Mason and Dixon play in world history. I would also note the numerous intelligent and ethical animals in the novel–from the gigantic Golem who protects the mad poet, Timothy Tox, and who “takes a dim view of oppression” (490), to the electric eel who could kill those who touch him when he is exhibited, but chooses benevolently not to. Dogs play a significant role in the narrative both early and late. The Learned English Dog, also known as Fang, may have met an untoward end, perhaps having taken his own life as a result of too trustingly conversing with humans. Later, a dog named Snake warily keeps his own counsel when Mason asks about his old friend Fang. Near the end of the novel, in the guise of another younger dog, Fang visits Mason and Dixon when they have returned to England, letting them know as they sleep that when the two of them are together, he will be with them (757). The mechanical Duck, the electric eel, the learned and thoughtful dogs, as well as the other hybrid creatures that figure in the novel, whether mechanical or animal (such as Zepho the beaver-man), are unlike most of those hybrid machine-creatures who were associated with control, lack of choice, and death in the earlier novels. These later mechanical and animal creatures exhibit life, wit, and moral intelligence. Instead of humans becoming automata, these automata and animals have become their own moral agents.28 The possibility these hybrids have of choosing to act ethically in solidarity with others confirms the moderating of the paranoid vision that dominates Pynchon’s earlier novels.

     

    Although Pynchon’s representation of animals as ethical agents might appear isolated and anomalous, in fact one of the most distinctive lines of inquiry in contemporary philosophy concerns the ethical status of animals. Peter Singer, for example, has argued that in ethical deliberations the suffering of other species should count equally with similar kinds of suffering experienced by human beings (Animal Liberation 9), and that it is wrong to kill animals who can anticipate the future, because their death deprives such animals of future enjoyments (Practical Ethics 93-105). Tom Regan similarly makes the case that all animals who can be understood as being “subjects of a life”–and not just human beings–have inherent value, and a right to have that value respected. Rosemary Rodd maintains that many species of animals possess traits–such as the capacity for suffering and anticipating the future, consciousness, and a sense of self–on the basis of which we assign ethical value to human beings.29 Both in Disgrace and in The Lives of Animals, J. M. Coetzee questions the morality of killing animals in order to eat them. In responding to Coetzee and extending his reflections, Barbara Smuts has argued for the significance of interpersonal relations between humans and animals (Lives of Animals 107-20). Thus, far from being idiosyncratic, Pynchon’s concern to represent animals as ethical agents engaged in interpersonal relations with humans actually participates in an active and continuing philosophical conversation–one that first emerges around the same time as the late works of Foucault in the late seventies and early eighties.

     

    Mason & Dixon thus joins Foucault’s later work in moving from an earlier vision of regimes of power that preclude choice and change to a vision of a self-disciplined subject and of some limited ethico-political agency.30 Although Foucault and Pynchon ascribe to agents in their late works an ability to distance themselves critically from their historical present, such a limited critical agency does not derive from a return to a humanist (Foucault) or purely human (Pynchon) individual subject. Rather, it is the late postmodern that is committed to recuperating the liberal individual: The X-Files and The Matrix, for example, posit a global conspiracy so that a heroic individual agent can save human beings from becoming hybrids with machines or aliens. By contrast, Foucault, Pynchon, Haraway, Laclau and Mouffe, and the other than postmodern thinkers, are interested in the opposite of such a return to the autonomous individual subject; they are investigating subjectification and subject positions, trying to propose ways that people can participate in forming themselves as local ethical and political agents. Their turn away from paranoid or conspiratorial visions accompanies the turn away from the liberal individual subject; moreover, as they decline to idealize the unmixed human self, they are more open to hybrids combining humans with animals or machines. Beside those discussed so far, other contemporary thinkers are also attempting to work out what forms of political and ethical agency can be pursued based on a fissured or incomplete subject rather than the unitary subject of liberal humanism (see Butler, Laclau, Zizek). Still, it is important to recognize that The X-Files and other examples of late postmodernism participate in the dominant form of consumer culture, encouraging a private consumer self. The other than postmodern thought of Foucault, Pynchon, and those who similarly challenge such privatizing subjectification remains a less prominent, emerging formation.

     

    By drawing attention to divergent strands in the contemporary cultural matrix, this essay hopes to contribute to an understanding of a question to which Foucault returned repeatedly: the question of “what our present is,” of where we are now. Among the possibilities that we face I have sketched two. Late postmodernism, paranoid about global and high-tech systems of control, also remains committed to a consuming subject formed in the interests of such multinational conglomerates. What is other than postmodern, by contrast, explores how we might form subject positions not through private consumption, but through local ethical and political action. It may be important today to resist fantasies that define all but one of us as politically powerless, as well as the attempt to restore a pure but illusory human identity in opposition to machines, aliens, or animals. As Foucault famously wrote at the conclusion of The Order of Things, “man,” the unmixed, abstract human being, “is an invention of recent date. And one perhaps nearing its end” (387).

     

    Notes

     

    I would like to thank Terry Reilly, who organized the session “Reading Pynchon’s Mason & Dixon” at the 1998 MLA, at which an early version of this essay was presented; Jeffrey Nealon, for extensive and helpful comments which led to strengthening the argument here; and Nancy San Martín and Michael Sinowitz, for reading and commenting on an earlier version of the essay.

     

    1. On the use of the terms residual, emergent, and dominant in the analysis of changes between epochs, see Williams 121-27.

     

    2. According to Melley, paranoia in postwar culture arises from “agency panic,” an urgent anxiety about whether individuals control their own actions. In most instances, such a concern leads to a recuperation of the autonomous self (89); I would see such works as examples of a late postmodernism. However, as Melley argues, in writers such as Foucault, Pynchon, and Acker, the radical challenge to individual agency stands without reinscription of the autonomous subject (102); I see these works presenting an alternate view that is other than postmodern.

     

    3. In Wising Up the Marks, Timothy Murphy characterizes William Burroughs as “amodern” because his work stands outside both modernist and postmodern modes of writing. Burroughs’s attempt to dissolve the subject because it serves as a system of control finds parallels in the projects of both Foucault and Pynchon. However, since the earlier work of Pynchon and Foucault has been closely identified with postmodern writing and thought, I believe that “other than postmodern” indicates more accurately than “amodern” the context of the direction taken by their late work.

     

    4. For a brief overview of nativist paranoia in nineteenth-century America, see Hofstadter.

     

    5. Jodi Dean believes that it is not significant that Mulder is an FBI agent because his relation to much of the bureau is largely antagonistic (206). However, the identity of the two protagonists is established in the title sequence for each episode only by their FBI identification badges. Moreover, Mulder and Scully are far from being rogue agents: they are often supported by Assistant Director Skinner; and they obtain crucial help in many of their cases from the bureau.

     

    6. Because the green smoking “blood” of the aliens is toxic to most humans, the aliens can serve as figures not only for foreigners but also for those who are HIV positive: although they are impossible to identify visually, contact with their blood can be fatal to the previously healthy.

     

    7. By virtue of the open-endedness of the multi-year series, The X-Files also continually defers a final, unambiguous revelation of that truth.

     

    8. A quartet of novels by Dan Simmons that begins with Hyperion (1989) and concludes with The Rise of Endymion (1997) also participates in a late postmodernism. Like The Matrix, these novels present a powerful artificial intelligence network as controlling future human history; like The X-Files, they foresee a return to Catholic belief. Simmons presents a sympathetic view of a human-machine, but only because the character chooses human mortality and love over mechanical indestructibility.

     

    9. Totality and Infinity was first published in 1961, about twenty years before most of the works that I characterize here as other than postmodern. But a crucial thinker or writer often proves to have anticipated a later development by several decades or a generation. For example, Borges published his postmodern Ficciones in the late thirties and early forties, about two decades before the emergence of an identifiable postmodernism. Similarly, Beckett’s trilogy (Murphy, Malone Dies, The Unnameable, 1951-53) and plays such as Waiting for Godot (1952) and Endgame (1957) give evidence of many traits of postmodernism when it is still emergent and before it becomes a dominant form of cultural production.

     

    10. See also Nealon’s Alterity Politics, which makes use of Levinas’s thought in constructing its argument for a politics based on a response to the other rather than on the identity of the self.

     

    11. On the political and ethical implications of Derrida’s deconstruction, especially in Specters and Politics, see Critchley 83-105, 143-82, 254-86.

     

    12. For another view of hybrids such as cyborgs, see Hayles, who emphasizes that human embodiment remains crucial and undeniable even in virtual realities.

     

    13. Haraway’s celebration of what she sees as cyborg identity is not widely shared, but some other ambivalently positive depictions of cyborgs can be located in works of the last fifteen years. One might cite, for example, the T100 cyborg in Terminator 2: Judgment Day (1991) who returns from the future a second time not to destroy but to protect the future savior of humanity from an even more advanced, more predatory cyborg.

     

    14. In a view that parallels the one suggested here, David Simpson sees Haraway and other scientists like her as searching for something “more than the academic postmodern” (167).

     

    15. Paul McCarthy argues for the need for a turn to political-ethical concerns in postmodernism, taking texts by Deleuze and Guattari as his touchstones for such a shift. In terms of the present argument, we might see in the human desiring machines and bodies without organs of Deleuze and Guattari another significant positive instance of hybridity between humans and machines. Deleuze and Guattari also seek to move beyond a paranoid culture based on the control of the Law to a more nomadic and resistant form of existence.

     

    16. Latour employs “nonmodern” (47 and 134) by contrast with an idea of modernity that has been dominant for the last three and a half centuries. I concur with his call to recognize the importance of hybrid objects. However, my understanding of what is other than postmodern diverges from Latour’s “nonmodern” thought in that it turns away from a postmodernism that has been dominant only during the last thirty-five years, but not from Western thought since the middle of the seventeenth century.

     

    17. In Foucault’s thought, control results from a force internal to the system; by contrast, in works such as The X-Files, the source of the conspiracy is external to the system. This contrast helps clarify the distinction between the high postmodernism of Foucault’s early writings and the more rigidly formulaic late postmodernism of The X-Files.

     

    18. Berressem observes that Foucault’s theory of power from the mid-seventies “presides for long stretches over the poetics of Gravity’s Rainbow” (206).

     

    19. McConnell argues that in Gravity’s Rainbow, Pynchon recommends an increased awareness of our involvement in sado-masochistic power relations as a means of reducing their sway, just as, at about the same time, Foucault seeks to make visible previously invisible structures for disciplining the subject (164).

     

    20. Molly Hite argues similarly that although Pynchon’s questing protagonists are obsessed with extremes, the opposition between absolute order and absolute meaninglessness does not exhaust the possibilities; connections may link some phenomena, but not all. As Hite points out, acceptance of either extreme deprives characters of ethical agency, so the difficulty in Pynchon’s first three novels is to locate absent or elusive middle grounds. McHoul and Wills maintain that Gravity’s Rainbow is post-rhetorical in the sense that no rhetorical figure or genre will account for the way the text works. They see any dualism in the text being overridden or leveled by becoming in its turn the first term of another opposition–between the original pair and a material substance or toponym that exceeds or combines the opposed elements of the first pair. They find a close relation between this practice of Pynchon in Gravity’s Rainbow and what Derrida analyzes as the workings of the supplement (52-63); I see in this pattern in Pynchon’s narrative a satiric leveling of hierarchies that is related to the exclusion of middle grounds. Francisco Collado-Rodriguez argues that throughout his novels, Pynchon interrogates the law of excluded middles; I will argue that Mason & Dixon offers more concrete examples of possible middle grounds between unacceptable extremes than do the other novels.

     

    21. Deleuze sees a greater distance and discontinuity between the second and third phases of Foucault’s thought than between the first two. He says, for example: “You can say why he passes from knowledge to power, as long as you see that he’s not passing from one to the other as from some overall theme to some other theme, but moving from his novel conception of knowledge to an equally inventive new conception of power. This applies still more to the ‘subject’: it takes him years of silence to get, in his last books, to this third dimension” (92; see also 105).

     

    22. Deleuze maintains repeatedly that Foucault’s focus on the processes of subjectification does not involve a return to the liberal humanist subject, but rather suggests the need for an historically aware process that takes the ethical work-in-progress away from the ends for which cultural institutions seek to form subjects, for example, as possessive individuals and consumers (Negotiations 95, 106, 115, 118).

     

    23. As Paul Veyne notes, Foucault does not argue that an ancient ethos can be resuscitated and inserted unchanged in the modern world; rather, a personal ethos based on a care for the self might be one element of an ethical response to the question of the present.

     

    24. Perhaps the closest model for the kind of ethical action Foucault calls for would be the project Nietzsche ascribes to “we knowers,” the “good Europeans,” whom he characterizes at the conclusion of The Genealogy of Morality as “heirs of Europe’s longest and bravest self-overcoming” (116-17). Christian belief having been overcome by a Christian morality grounded on the will to truth, the latter must overcome itself in a new ethos which will paradoxically be an outgrowth of and stand in opposition to the will to truth. Similarly, Foucault sees the forces of disciplinary society being countered by an ethos that is a form of disciplinarity yet also works in opposition to it–an ethos of self-governance based neither on the will to truth nor on the regulative morality tied to it.

     

    25. Cowart sees Pynchon combining postmodern techniques and modernist concerns in Vineland (“Attenuated” 182).

     

    26. Rather than setting Mason & Dixon in a pre-industrial past in order to allow his protagonists greater agency, Pynchon thus shows the potential for international plots and paranoia to be as present in the mid-eighteenth as in the mid-twentieth century.

     

    27. David Seed discusses signs of conspiracies in Mason & Dixon (94-95).

     

    28. In a reading that sees Mason & Dixon as both critiquing and participating in processes of subject formation, Thomas H. Schaub suggests that the speaking animals constitute futile attempts to speak outside the ubiquitous shaping effects of ideology (197-98).

     

    29. For an argument against animal rights and the moral status of animals, see Carruthers.

     

    30. In the last pages of Mason & Dixon, Pynchon makes a number of references to Foucault’s works, especially The Order of Things and Discipline and Punish. See Mason & Dixon, 723 (“Mathesis”) and 742 (“panopticon”). Collado-Rodriguez notes what he believes are some references to Foucault in Mason & Dixon (500).

    Works Cited

     

    • Althusser, Louis. “Ideology and Ideological State Apparatuses (Notes Toward an Investigation).” Lenin and Philosophy and Other Essays. Trans. Ben Brewster. New York: Monthly Review Press, 1971. 127-86.
    • Amiran, Eyal, and John Unsworth, eds. Essays in Postmodern Culture. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1993.
    • Berressem, Hanjo. Pynchon’s Poetics: Interfacing Theory and Text. Urbana: U of Illinois P, 1993.
    • Blade Runner. Dir. Ridley Scott. Warner Studios, 1982.
    • Buell, Lawrence. “Introduction: In Pursuit of Ethics.” PMLA 114 (1999): 7-19.
    • Braudy, Leo. “Providence, Paranoia, and the Novel.” ELH 48 (1981): 619-37.
    • Butler, Judith, Ernesto Laclau, and Slavoj Zizek. Contingency, Hegemony, Universality: Contemporary Dialogues on the Left. New York: Verso, 2000.
    • Calhoun, Craig. Habermas and the Public Sphere. 1962. Cambridge: MIT, 1992.
    • Carruthers, Peter. The Animals Issue. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1992.
    • Carter, Chris. Interview accompanying video recording. “Darkness Falls.” Original air date 15 Apr. 1994. The X-Files. Fox. Ten Thirteen Productions.
    • Clerc, Charles, ed. Approaches to “Gravity’s Rainbow.” Columbus, OH: Ohio State UP, 1983.
    • Coetzee, J. M. Disgrace. New York: Viking, 1999.
    • —. The Lives of Animals. Ed. Amy Gutmann. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1999.
    • Collado-Rodriguez, Francisco. “Trespassing Limits: Pynchon’s Irony and the Law of the Excluded Middle.” Oklahoma City University Law Review 24 (1999): 471-503.
    • Cowart, David. “Attenuated Postmodernism: Pynchon’s Vineland.” Trachtenberg 182-91.
    • —. “The Luddite Vision: Mason & Dixon.American Literature 71 (1999): 341-63.
    • Critchley, Simon. Ethics-Politics-Subjectivity: Essays on Derrida, Levinas and Contemporary French Thought. New York: Verso, 1999.
    • Dean, Jodi. Aliens in America: Conspiracy Cultures from Outerspace to Cyberspace. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1998.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Negotiations: 1972-1990. Trans. Martin Joughin. New York: Columbia UP, 1995.
    • Deleuze, Gilles, and Felix Guattari. Anti-Oedipus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1983.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “At This Very Moment in This Work Here I Am.” Re-Reading Levinas. Ed. Robert Bernasconi and Simon Critchley. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1991. 11-48.
    • —. Politics of Friendship. 1994. Trans. George Collins. New York: Verso, 1997.
    • —. Specters of Marx: The State of the Debt, the Work of Mourning and the New International. 1993. Trans. Peggy Kamuf. New York: Routledge, 1994.
    • —. “Violence and Metaphysics: An Essay on the Thought of Emmanuel Levinas.” Writing and Difference. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1978. 79-153.
    • Foucault, Michel. “An Aesthetics of Existence.” Interview with Alessandro Fontana. Foucault, Politics, Philosophy, Culture 47-53.
    • —. The Archaeology of Knowledge. 1969. Trans. A. M. Sheridan Smith. New York: Harper, 1976.
    • —. “The Concept of Truth.” Interview with François Ewald. Foucault, Politics, Philosophy, Culture 255-67.
    • —. Discipline and Punish: The Birth of the Prison. 1975. Trans. Alan Sheridan. New York: Pantheon, 1977.
    • —. The Foucault Reader. Ed. Paul Rabinow. New York: Pantheon, 1984.
    • —. The History of Sexuality. 1976. Trans. Robert Hurley. New York: Pantheon, 1978.
    • —. Madness and Civilization: A History of Insanity in the Age of Reason. 1961. Trans. Richard Howard. New York: Pantheon Books, 1965.
    • —. “Nietzsche, Genealogy, History.” Foucault, Reader 76-100.
    • —. “On the Genealogy of the History of Ethics: An Overview of Work in Progress.” Foucault, Reader 340-72.
    • —. The Order of Things: An Archaeology of the Human Sciences. 1968. New York: Vintage, 1970.
    • —. The Politics of Truth. Ed. Sylvère Lotringer and Lysa Hochroth. New York: Semiotext(e), 1997.
    • —. Politics, Philosophy, Culture: Interviews and Other Writings 1977-1984. Ed. Lawrence D. Kritzman. New York: Routledge, 1988.
    • —. “Preface to the History of Sexuality, Volume II.” Foucault, Reader 333-39.
    • —. “The Return of Morality.” Interview with Gilles Barbadette and André Scala. Foucault, Politics, Philosophy, Culture 242-54.
    • —. “What is Critique?” Foucault, Politics of Truth 23-82.
    • —. “What Our Present Is.” Interview with André Berten. Foucault, Politics of Truth 147-68.
    • Gibson, William. Neuromancer. New York: Ace, 1984.
    • Habermas, Jürgen. The Structural Transformation of the Public Sphere: An Inquiry into a Category of Bourgeois Society. 1962. Trans. Thomas Burger. Cambridge: MIT, 1992.
    • Haraway, Donna J. “A Manifesto for Cyborgs: Science, Technology, and Socialist Feminism in the Late Twentieth Century.” Simians, Cyborgs, and Women: The Reinvention of Nature. New York: Routledge, 1991. 149-81. Rpt. of “Manifesto For Cyborgs: Science, Technology, and Socialist Feminism in the 1980s.” Socialist Review 80 (1985): 65-108.
    • Hayles, N. Katherine. How We Became Posthuman: Virtual Bodies in Cybernetics, Literature, and Informatics. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1999.
    • Hite, Molly. Ideas of Order in the Novels of Thomas Pynchon. Columbus: Ohio State UP, 1983.
    • Hofstadter, Richard. “The Paranoid Style in American Politics.” The Paranoid Style in American Politics, and Other Essays. New York: Alfred Knopf, 1965. 3-40.
    • Horvath, Brooke, and Irving Malin, eds. Pynchon and “Mason & Dixon.” Newark, DE: U of Delaware P, 2000.
    • Hutcheon, Linda. The Poetics of Postmodernism: History, Theory, Fiction. New York: Routledge, 1988.
    • JFK. Dir. Oliver Stone. Warner Studios: 1991.
    • Kuhn, Thomas S. The Structure of Scientific Revolutions. 2nd Ed. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1971.
    • Laclau, Ernesto, and Chantal Mouffe. Hegemony and Socialist Strategy: Towards a Radical Democratic Politics. New York: Verso, 1985.
    • Latour, Bruno. We Have Never Been Modern. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1993.
    • Levinas, Emmanuel. Otherwise Than Being: or, Beyond Essence. 1974. Trans. Alphonso Lingis. Dordrecht: Kluwer, 1991.
    • —. Totality and Infinity: An Essay on Exteriority. 1961. Trans. Alphonso Lingis. Pittsburgh: Duquesne UP, 1969.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François. The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1984.
    • The Matrix. Dir. Andy and Larry Wachowski. Warner Studios, 1999.
    • McCarthy, Paul. “Pleasure and Perversity: Scientism and Sadism.” Amiran and Unsworth 101-32.
    • McConnell, Will. “Pynchon, Foucault, Power, and Strategies of Resistance.” Pynchon Notes 32-33 (1993): 152-68.
    • McHoul, Alec, and David Wills. Writing Pynchon: Strategies in Fictional Analysis. Urbana: U of Illinois P, 1990.
    • Melley, Timothy. Empire of Conspiracy: The Culture of Paranoia in Postwar America. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 2000.
    • Murphy, Timothy S. Wising Up the Marks: The Amodern William Burroughs. Berkeley: U of California P, 1997.
    • Nealon, Jeffrey T. Alterity Politics: Ethics and Performative Subjectivity. Durham: Duke UP, 1998.
    • Nietzsche, Friedrich. On the Genealogy of Morality. Trans. Maudemarie Clark and Alan J. Swensen. Indianapolis: Hackett, 1998.
    • O’Donnell, Patrick. “Engendering Paranoia in Contemporary Narrative.” boundary 2 19 (1992): 181-204.
    • Palmeri, Frank. “‘Neither Literally Nor as Metaphor’: Pynchon’s The Crying of Lot 49 and the Structure of Scientific Revolutions.” ELH 54 (1987): 979-99.
    • Pynchon, Thomas. The Crying of Lot 49. New York: Bantam, 1972.
    • —. Gravity’s Rainbow. New York: Viking, 1973.
    • —. Mason & Dixon. New York: Henry Holt, 1997.
    • —. V. New York: Modern Library, 1966.
    • —. Vineland. New York: Little, Brown, 1990.
    • Regan, Tom. The Case for Animal Rights. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1984.
    • Rodd, Rosemary. Biology, Ethics, and Animals. Oxford: Clarendon P, 1990.
    • Schaub, Thomas H. “Plot, Ideology, and Compassion in Mason & Dixon.” Horvath and Malin 189-202.
    • Seed, David. “Mapping the Course of Empire in the New World.” Horvath and Malin 84-99.
    • Simpson, David. The Academic Postmodern and the Rule of Literature: A Report on Half- Knowledge. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1995.
    • Singer, Peter. Animal Liberation. London: Jonathan Cape, 1976.
    • —. Practical Ethics. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1979.
    • Trachtenberg, Stanley, ed. Critical Essays on American Postmodernism. New York: G.K. Hall, 1995.
    • Tölölyan, Khachig. “War as Background in Gravity’s Rainbow.” Clerc 31-67.
    • Veyne, Paul. “The Final Foucault and his Ethics.” Trans. Catherine Porter and Arnold I. Davidson. Critical Inquiry 20 (1993): 1-9.
    • Williams, Raymond. Marxism and Literature. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1977.
    • The X-Files. Created by Chris Carter. Fox Television, 1993- .

     

  • “Be deceived if ya wanna be foolish”: (Re)constructing Body, Genre, and Gender in Feminist Rap

     

    Suzanne Bost

    Department of English
    James Madison University
    bostsm@jmu.edu

     

    Often black people can only say in tone, in nuance, in the set of the mouth, or in the shifting of the eyes what language alone cannot say. Perhaps because of the ambivalence we feel about language, we must put the body itself to use. The hearer must pay attention, take in with all the senses, so that the act of speaking and hearing moves closer, like a dance that must be entered into with one’s whole being. There is no dictionary to refer to. Perhaps every word we have uttered since slavery has in it that tension between possibility and doubt, language twisted like a horrible face–the tension from which art itself arises.

     

    –Toi Derricotte, The Black Notebooks

    Punkuwait Punkuwait Punkuwait
    Punctuate Punctuate
    Period.
    Dem dialects don’t work
    Words don’t fit like sexy slave skirts

     

    –Jessica Care Moore, “The Words don’t FIT in my mouth”

    Salt: We have fun rapping, and the crowd really grooves with us when we’re on stage.
    Pepa: We give the audience something to look at. Some rappers just stand there, and they don’t have any steps. We dance very tight all through our songs.

     

    –Salt ‘N Pepa, Hot, Cool, & Vicious

     

    Hip hop music gets a bad rap. Far too often it seems to be about the objectification of women, but hip hop artists position themselves around this topic in very complex ways. This complexity is missed when critics ignore the relationship between the verbal, musical, and corporeal levels of hip hop performance. Even as they make a show of their bodies–giving the audience “something to look at” as Salt ‘N Pepa do–female rappers often disrupt misogynist objectification by creating dissonance between the multiple layers of their performance. This dissonance reflects both a postmodern practice of resistance–subversion from within dominant modes of racialized and sexualized containment–and a long-standing tradition in African American cultures, from slave songs and quilts with hidden meanings to linguistic games and signifying stories. Within both traditions, artistic statements circulate about more than they seem to be.1 It is impossible to say just what they are “about,” as word, body, rhythm, and melody often communicate divergent messages.

     

    1. Methodology

     

    In this paper, I analyze musical texts that refuse containment and categorization as much as the bodies they represent, fusing rap, jazz, and funk with poetry, performance art, and fashion. A number of strong female voices have emerged from within the hip hop industry, using rap music forms to assert their own identities and to critique the limited identifications offered for women within the genre.2 Their strategy is consistent with hip hop arts like dissing, posturing, mastering, mixing, and parodying antecedents with multi-tracked samples.3 They employ these artistic methods in powerful raps that seem, on the lyrical level, to echo slavery’s reduction of Black women to body and capital; but rhythm, tone, melody, and voice actively subvert this objectification. Poets Toi Derricotte and Jessica Care Moore suggest, in my epigraphs, that the English language requires physical contortions–twisting faces and dancing out of slave skirts–if it is to reflect African American identities since English has been antagonistic to Africanist values, experiences, and corporealities since slavery.4 Yet using the dominant language is the only sure way to address the dominant audience. In order to gain visibility within a racist and misogynist culture, the artists I analyze invoke the objectification of Black women but twist their content to exceed this framework.

     

    I am most interested here in the recent work of Da Brat–the first solo female rapper to go platinum, and recently named the best woman in hip hop by Russell Simmon’s “One World Music Beat.” Other female rap acts–Queen Latifah, MC Lyte, Yo-Yo–more clearly critique misogyny, but the ways in which they enact this critique distance them from the dominant media images of hip hop gender roles and thus limit their audiences. To a certain extent, Da Brat’s tremendous visibility can be attributed to the ways in which she invokes the media obsession with rap’s misogyny, “booty call,” etc. Using the familiar criteria gains Da Brat a much wider audience than her more clearly “feminist” contemporaries, and the size of this audience makes her a serious political force.5 While the nature of that political message might be ambiguous to her audience–part of the risk factor involved in the double-voiced, often parodic nature of rap–her aggressive assertion of her own mastery of the form, her direct attack on audiences’ consumption of her image, and her excessive layering of hip hop gender roles clearly do bend audience expectations about gender.6

     

    My argument is based on frameworks that may seem incommensurate–hip hop, postmodernism, and feminism–so I want to be clear from the start how and why I invoke these terms. Hip hop is, by nature, contestorial, resistant, and political. Rob Winn’s definition, from The Voices of Urban Renewal, is useful: “Hip hop took street poetry,” formed against the “backdrop” of 1960s political contestations, “and made it accessible to the masses,” removing poetry “from the sterile confines of the classroom” and giving it “a salient street value.”7 Much recent rap music has been distanced from these political origins, but it retains the power to communicate messages on the streets. Although late capitalist industry has commodified its raps and saturated the media with a one-dimensional image of drug-addicted, violent, misogynist black masculinity, hip hop remains self-reflexive about this gangsta image as well as its own commodification, refusing to reflect any one message. Postmodernism offers strategies for interpreting the self-reflexive irony in hip hop expression. The protest that hip hop stages against black otherness is one that performs these images for the simultaneously fearful and desirous white consumer, and often signifies against them, as in Henry Louis Gates’s model of “repetition with a difference.”8 Similarly, David Foster Wallace’s analysis of the content of rap music argues that “the serious rap places the very theme of ‘theme’ under erasure… by being… self-conscious and radical enough overtly to address the very contexts of history and marginalization that have already ‘read’ the black and white communities in the racial/political/sexual/economic prejudices we respectively bring to rap’s hearing” (Costello and Wallace 98). The politics of hip hop often emerge as hidden or double meanings, the recognition of which requires both attention to internal contradictions and an understanding of African American traditions of artistic expression. Without an insight into the destabilizing nuances and referential layers of these raps, listeners might hear nothing but a simple repetition of myths of black otherness.9 Russell Potter, too, cautions that “hip-hop’s way into the spectacle is also its greatest danger: by picking up these narratives and Signifyin(g) against them, it runs the constant risk of being collapsed and conflated within them by those who don’t ‘get’ the doubleness of Signifyin(g)” (134). Yet these risks, the openness to multiple, conflicting (mis)interpretations, help hip hop to resist appropriation by, and circumscription within, dominant paradigms. It also means that hip hop never offers a closed, dictatorial message, but rather a web of possibilities, allusions, ironies, and contradictions within which listeners participate in the production of communal meanings.

     

    Many female hip hop artists (Queen Latifah, for example) reject the term “feminist” because of its historical alliance with Euro-American middle-class concerns, its frequently inaccessible theories, its tendency to center exclusively on sex/gender as markings, and other contradictions of hip hop principles and Black urban experience.10 I pair “hip hop” with feminism in order to de-privilege Euro-centric and elitist strands of feminism and to decenter hip hop’s famed misogyny. Many rap lyrics are indeed misogynist (gangsta rap, most particularly), but this misogyny has become a myopic media obsession employed, I would argue, in order to dismiss the political value of hip hop.11 This obsession also obscures the visibility of overtly feminist rap artists since they do not fit the dominant image. In order to revise the gender image most often associated with hip hop culture, it is important both for feminists and for hip hop fans to be able to see rap music in a feminist light. Rather than merely rehashing the critique of some rappers’ violent misogyny, I find it more valuable to analyze rappers who challenge media assumptions about hip hop gender politics.

     

    I do not draw on hip hop as a mere example for an academic feminist analytic; rather I have come to hip hop in my search for a critique of misogynist corporeal inscriptions that communicates beyond the theoretical frameworks of postmodern feminism. In music, aural cues, instruments, and performers’ bodies ground lyrics in specific cultural contexts. Music can signify beyond the language that Derricotte and Care Moore suggest is so ambivalent for African Americans. It “puts the body itself to use,” using tone, nuance, movement, and tension to communicate beyond dictionary definition (Derricote 162). Feminist rap, in particular, is compelling for the ways in which it speaks to the concerns of African Americans, of young people, and of those who lack economic or academic privilege. The feminism I find in Da Brat and others addresses these concerns and critiques the specifically racialized misogynist morphologies assigned to African American women since slavery.

     

    Any politically effective, culturally aware feminist theory should engage the theories that are developing in popular culture. Not to do so would imply, falsely, that views from academia and from the streets have nothing relevant to offer each other. I take seriously the insistence of Russell Potter, and others, that:

     

    Academic knowledge and hip-hop knowledge need at least to be on speaking terms, and such a dialogue depends on academics seeing that rappers have their own protocols, their own epistemologies, which cannot simply be read according to an academic laundry list of theoretical questions. (Potter 152)

     

    In the essay that follows, I enact a dialogue between academic knowledge and hip hop knowledge. I draw on the well-established insights of feminist and anti-racist theorists of the body and performance–such as Judith Butler, bell hooks, Hazel Carby–and I bring these into conversation with the kinds of insights that may be found within the framework of hip hop culture itself.12

     

    I draw especially on the work of feminist spoken-word artists such as Ursula Rucker, Dana Bryant, and Sarah Jones–performers who overtly critique misogyny within the terms of its circulation in hip hop culture. For instance, Sarah Jones’s description of her own strategies of resistance can help to uncover that which is empowering, but often unrecognized, in Da Brat’s tremendously publicized message. In a personal interview, Jones explains: “It’s a firm structure…. [Images of women in hip hop as “bitches and hos”] are not going away from the outside…. You have to play both sides… get in and finagle around… play within it while you do your best to poke holes in it.” The “structure” that many young African American women are subjected to is specifically rooted in hip hop stereotypes and the media’s vilification of “the ghetto.” Rap music offers the most visible response to this structure from within “the ghetto.” Since so much of the meaning of rap music is produced in communal interpretation, that meaning emerges from dialogue with stereotypes familiar to the community, other raps, and communal events. To assess the communal value of the meanings that Da Brat puts into play, then, I engage feminist methodologies that emerge from within a hip hop milieu. Rucker provides a model for rescripting the reduction of women in hip hop to sexual objects. Bryant provides a model for highlighting the excess, the real body that the “bitches and hos” stereotype cannot contain. And Jones outlines a critique within and against hip hop commodification. All three begin by emphasizing the artificiality of objectified images of Black women and undermine these images with excessive imitation, ultimately clearing space for re-imagining hip hop gender.

     

    2. Hip Hop Gender

     

    Despite media-bred assumptions, women rappers are not an anomaly. Though less visible to mainstream audiences, their contributions have been integral to the formation of hip hop culture. As Laura Jamison writes in her essay “Ladies First”:

     

    Macho antics like posturing, bragging, and throwing attitude are the heart and soul of the rhyming tradition, which is probably why rap is usually considered an inherently male form (rump shakin’ videos and bee-yatch-laden lyrics probably don’t help dispel the idea, either). Female MCs have traditionally been viewed as interlopers–either butchy anomalies or cute novelties who by some fluke infiltrated a boy’s game. But the fact is, while fewer in number than men, women have been integral to rap since its formative years (a claim that can’t be made for the other dominant postwar pop music form, rock ‘n’ roll). (177)

     

    According to studies by Jamison, Tricia Rose, Cheryl L. Keyes, Murray Forman, Nancy Guevara, William Eric Perkins, Helen Kolawole, and Joan Morgan, women helped to shape the tradition of rap music–and, according to Guevara, break-dancing, tagging, and other hip hop art forms–since the 1970s. As DJs, MCs, graffiti artists, and break-dancers, women have “mastered” the arts of digital technology, declared their authority, and defied constraints on the body and physical endurance. Their visibility is currently obscured, however, by media that love to hate rap music and, therefore, only see “gangsta rap” and “booty call.”

     

    Images of women in hip hop today are filtered through mainstream masculinist lenses in which female rappers are reduced to gender transgressors–wearing “male-derived attire” and punctuating their lyrics with frequent “motherfucker’s”–or sexual objects–“spectacle rather than [part of] the production process,” “tramps and whores,” “nasty,” “hypersexed… hoochie mamas” (Keyes 208-209; Forman 47; Guevara 56; Morgan, “Bad Girls” 76). On the one hand, the politically active, self-assertive Queen Latifah is routinely labeled a lesbian–an intended critique meant to signify “unfeminine”–for her refusal to conform to the image of sex object.13 This reaction reflects a heterosexist gender binary that conflates strength with masculinity and with desiring women. On the other hand, acts like Salt ‘N Pepa and Da Brat are often perceived only as sexual commodities. As Kolawole says of Salt ‘N Pepa, “Their liberation has not extended to being able to appear on stage without showing considerable amounts of cleavage or being clad in tight-fitting lycra. The image is strong, but it is still designed to be acceptable to men” (12).14 This language defines female rappers only in reference to heterosexual masculinity, either as appropriated goods or as amorous spectator.15 In Spectacular Vernaculars (1995), Potter suggests that the “politics of sexuality in hip-hop” revolve around heterosexuality: “while assertive, aggressive sexuality is a key ingredient of hip-hop attitude, it has so far almost always been heterosexuality” (92). Following the gender split in this hetero-framework, Potter divides women rappers into two “schools,” “which could be called the ‘sex’ school and the ‘gangsta’ school” (93).16 In hip hop vernacular, “gangsta” and “ho” seem to function as the “criteria of intelligibility” for women, the frames through which they are seen.

     

    Da Brat, Ursula Rucker, Dana Bryant, and Sarah Jones specifically invoke this binary in order to critique it. Rebecca Schneider’s terms for assessing feminist performance art, in The Explicit Body in Performance, illuminate the ways in which these artists’ explications of African American women’s bodies critique the normative lenses through which they are viewed:

     

    Unfolding the body, as if pulling back velvet curtains to expose a stage, the performance artists in this book [including Carolee Schneemann, Annie Sprinkle, Karen Finley, and Spiderwoman] peel back layers of signification that surround their bodies like ghosts at a grave. Peeling at signification, bringing ghosts to visibility, they are interested to expose not an originary, true, or redemptive body, but the sedimented layers of signification themselves. (2)

     

    When this theoretical approach is applied to women hip hop artists, their focus on sex and the body emerges as something more critical than simply assuming women’s sexual nature or catering to heterosexual masculinity (though they might seem to conform to these expectations on a superficial level). Rather than simply imitating their male counterparts, these artists interrogate the hidden meanings attached to their bodies as they have been defined historically, denaturalizing the body as we know it–“haunted” by racist and sexist discourses.17

     

    Da Brat, Rucker, Bryant, and Jones dissect the body as a sedimentation of heterosexist, racist, and capitalist imperatives. For them, the “ghost” story is the legacy of slavery and its narratives of legitimization that defined Black women as sexual property or “oversexed” animals. As Bryant says, “There’s nothing wrong with being a wild woman, but we’ve been bludgeoned by that image…. It’s important that [the image] be harnessed by women and redefined for what it truly is” (qtd. in McDonnell 78). This critique resembles a postmodern (or Butlerian) dynamic of resistance: attacking the image from inside by revealing its inner workings. Rather than simply objectifying themselves in exchange for power, these artists effect a powerful critique of the misogynist status quo by repeating “gangsta” and “ho” imagery excessively so as to expose the grotesque underlying assumptions.

     

    3. Ursula Rucker: Whores Strike Back

     

    Ursula Rucker is overt in her feminist message, and, perhaps as a direct result, marginal in the hip hop industry, with single-track recordings on albums by other artists. According to the on-line African American Literature Book Club, “Counteracting male artists who casually linger on tales of black whoredom, Ursula plays an essential role in the rise of a new crop of female recording artists who deliver strong, intelligent, and visionary feminine flavor” (<http://authors.aalbc.com/ursula.htm>). I would argue that both Da Brat and Rucker critique these “tales of black whoredom,” but their approaches reflect different choices in self-promotion. While Da Brat, to retain her position at the forefront of the industry, must present an image that appears superficially consistent with hip hop stereotypes, Rucker more aggressively rejects “gangsta”/”ho” mythology in forthright spoken-word pieces, such as “E.R.A.” and “Return to Innocence Lost.”18 Da Brat’s success in the recording industry, her participation in MTV culture, and her use of familiar hip hop iconography–“ho”-styled attire, braids, and Glocks–gain her a larger audience, and yet her ultra-fast-paced raps and her participation in “gangsta”/”ho” imagery make any feminist content difficult to decipher. Rucker’s message is less ambiguous, she speaks more slowly, and her lyrics are clearer. Her clarity prepares listeners for the type of subversion that is less obvious in Da Brat. And by recording individual pieces on three albums by the popular hip hop band The Roots, she has a “captive audience” of rap fans who recognize her direct critique of “gangsta”/”ho” mythology.19

     

    In “The Unlocking,” the concluding piece on The Roots’s album Do You Want More? (1994), Rucker works within and against the “ho” image to reveal its status as myth. Her strategy in “The Unlocking” is much like hattie gossett’s in “is it true what they say about colored pussy?” She engages a derogatory term that hurts women today in order to attack it directly. Rucker’s powerful and troubling piece narrates a scene in which a woman (presumably a prostitute) receives eight different men in serial fashion.20 She is sodomized, asked to perform oral sex, and called “bitch” and “whore.” Yet the whore ultimately asserts, “this was a setup,” posing the scenario as a display constructed for a witness, or a trap set for an unsuspecting victim, rather than an unmediated reality.21 It is a “masquerade,” in the sense described by Mary Ann Doane’s psychoanalytic film theory: with “potential to manufacture a distance from the image, to generate a problematic within which the image is manipulable, producible, and readable by the woman” (Doane 191). Rucker makes overt the staging of a whore to render the image “manipulable.” She “defamaliarize[s] and destabilize[s]” the “ho” image by highlighting the distance between the woman and the postures that she is expected to assume (186). The whore is revealed to be a “sedimentation” (to borrow Schneider’s term) of racist and misogynist interests rather than a natural embodiment. Rucker shows how women are often seen as reflections of misogynist myths, and she renders this reflection so literally as to expose the dehumanization behind it. She also exposes the inaccuracy of the eight men’s objectifying perceptions of the whore and the hollowness of their staged masculinity. Witnesses to the setup receive a warning regarding the violent assumptions behind “gangsta”/”ho” imagery.

     

    The whore is first perceived through the narrative’s outer frame, which records one man calling another on the phone and talking about a “fly” woman who is a “swinger.” These men’s voices are then silenced and Rucker’s voice assumes narrative authority with the words, “I, the voyeur, appear,” framing the whore and the men’s consumption of her within the gaze of a female narrator, and making listeners aware of their participation in this voyeuristic gaze. The whore–herself silent until the end of the piece–is triply framed, by the listener “watching” the female narrator, who in turn watches the men as they address the whore. This self-reflexive framing highlights the ways in which all women are “framed” by sexually objectifying assumptions. The scene is described as a “ritual,” her mouth is described as “framed,” and man #2 tells her to bend over “like a real pro whore.” The “like” in this last example establishes “whore” as a role the woman performs–with expected rituals, poses, and positions–rather than something that she is. Rucker literalizes and critiques the dehumanization of prostitution as the background sound is mixed with barely audible noises that sound like animal calls, while the whore is “digging” her “soft and lotioned knees” into the floor. Such excess takes any pleasure out of the spectacle by rendering it hyper-real, disturbing audiences by forcing them to witness these shocking images in vivid detail.

     

    Though the scene originates in the perception of women as whores, Rucker’s use of sound allows her to disrupt this perception.22 Phones ringing “mid-thrust” and meaningful bass line pauses interrupting copulation run counter to the dominant narrative (as in the line “he never could quite see above… her mound,” which separates “her mound” from the seeing). Reminders that the woman has an identity beyond sex object also intrude upon the extended sex scene:

     

    So one goes north, the other south.
    To sanctified places where in-house spirits will later
    wash away all traces of their ill-spoken words and complacent faces.
    And then, like their minutemen predecessors,
    lewd, aggrandized sexual endeavors end abrupt
    ‘cuz neither one of them could keep their weak shit up.
    Corrupt, fifth one steps to her,
    hip hop court jester, think he want to impress her.
    “Hey slim, I heard you was a spinner,
    sit on up top this thick black dick and work it like a winner.”
    With a quickness he got his pseudo thickness all up in her
    but suddenly he… stops mid-thrust.
    [phone ring]…
    Got him stuck in a death cunt clutch.
    He fast falls from the force of her tight pussy punch,
    just like the rest of that sorry-ass bunch.

     

    Rucker undermines the whore’s “ho” image by speaking of her sexual agency, her “sanctified places,” and her own “in-house spirits.” With increasing frequency as the narrative progresses, the narrator insults the men’s sexual prowess in the hip hop tradition of “dissing”: she attacks the men where it hurts most, revealing the “abrupt” endings to their sexual endeavors, critiquing man #5’s “pseudo-thickness,” describing man #6’s prowess as “inactive shit,” and concluding, after his “pre-pre-pre-ejaculation,” that “she just wasted good pussy and time.”

     

    Ultimately, the whore’s body resists its construction as object when her “pussy” “punch[es]” man #5, taking on active, aggressive, penetrative form. Following these assertions of subjectivity, the whore appropriates “gangsta” style violence from men on the streets by taking up a “fully-loaded Glock” and aiming it at the “eight shriveled-up cocks” in her bedroom. As with Da Brat, Rucker’s whore threatens “ho” mythology by embodying the “gangsta” at the same time, coupling what are supposed to be opposite poles. How can the “ho” be regarded as a passive object of men’s sexual consumption when she has a gun trained on their penises? The whore ultimately de-authorizes phallocentrism by objectifying the men’s penises and speaking with her own lips, when she “parts lips, not expressly made for milking dicks.” This description invokes and overturns the misogynist portrayal of women’s mouths–earlier described by man #4 as “DSL’s” [dick-sucking lips]–as holes to be penetrated by penises. With another significant pause, “and then… she speaks,” the whore authorizes herself as subject and postures as such: “Now tell me what… what’s my name.” This demand for recognition is common in male rappers’ contests for mastery, and the whore asserts it “now,” after she has moved beyond her objectified role. The final sound is the “cock” of a gun, an unambiguous threat that silences the “cocks” of the men and leaves power in the hands of the woman. By reversing the power dynamic in the “ho” narrative, Rucker deconstructs the gendered myths that underlie it. From this conclusion, which seems all the more powerful in juxtaposition with the whore’s initial objectification, women can demand to be recognized as individual subjects.

     

    4. Dana Bryant: Excessive Bodies

     

    It is difficult to characterize Dana Bryant’s music in terms of available categories; rap, R & B, gospel, spoken word, and World Beat would all be applicable. She is also a Nuyorican Poets Café Grand Slam Champion (<http://www3.mistral.co.uk/wallis/dana.htm>). As Evelyn McDonnell writes, in a Ms. magazine article entitled “Divas Declare a Spoken-Word Revolution,” Bryant resists containment within any single genre and “maintain[s] [her] freedom and complexity from inside the record biz” (78). In her album Wishing from the Top (1996), Bryant moves chameleon-like between musical styles, and simultaneously pays tribute to and signifies upon her diverse foremothers: grandmothers, worshippers at a Southern Baptist church, makers of African-derived cuisine, wearers of “Dominican girdles,” Barry White fans, Ntozake Shange, bell hooks. In “Canis Rufus: Ode to Chaka Khan,” Bryant initially masquerades as funk star/sex goddess Chaka Khan by assuming a funk musical script and exploring Chaka’s stage construction. This song, like Rucker’s, interrogates the assumptions behind “ho” imagery. Bryant pulls back the curtains and uncovers the layers of Chaka’s performance–as the artists in Schneider’s study “peel back layers of signification”–to deconstruct the inscription of her body.

     

    The audience “sees” Chaka one piece at a time, first “knifin’ the curtain / open with bejeweled fingers,” then “her head / laden with citrus sweetened hairs– / medusian ropes swingin’,” moving down to her “lips / plentiful soft / and smackin’ / sweet badass’s,” then:

     

    Her stomach stripped of all but bronze blue flesh
    beaded rings of baby peacock feathers- her hips swayin’ chains
    of lilies laced wid sense-amelia23

     

    This gradual revelation of body parts resembles a striptease, but each part is covered in jewels, scents, dyes, and feathers. This body is an artificial composite. It is excessively styled, exotic, and fragmented, never whole, natural, or naked, despite the description of Chaka’s stomach as “stripped.” As a striptease, these lines show how a woman’s “naked” body is never truly naked, but always inscribed (or “laced”) with assumptions attached throughout history. It is a sedimentation of constructions, assigned a list of mythic types: “circe,” “demoness,” “the voodoo chile / jimi hendrix plucked strings to conjure up.” All of these inscriptions incorporate “ghost stories” left from slavery: the perception of Black women as sexual demons or exotic artifacts and the myth that they held power to cast spells on unwitting victims. The “voodoo chile” is not just Jimi Hendrix’s fantasy, but also that of slave masters who wished to deny their own culpability for sexual relations with slaves.24

     

    About two-thirds of the way through the song, the gaze travels down Chaka’s body to her “crotch / explodin’ light- / mound of venus rainin’ salt n flame on open lifted stadium faces.” These lines reveal the body in front of an audience and blow it up in their faces. They also introduce a transition in melody and instrumental background. A hard-rapping, heavy-rhythmed, deep-bassed sound overtakes Chaka’s funky one at this point. Although it would be inaccurate to say that one musical sound is Bryant’s more than any other, this change in style makes it seem as though Bryant is asserting her own musical authority and taking a step back from Chaka’s funk role. The effect is exhilarating and creates a new perspective. Bryant says of this piece:

     

    My poem isn’t necessarily about Chaka. It has more to do with the feeling that sound makes happen in me, the possibilities it opens, to break free of the fetters of self-censorship. It’s important for me as a black woman because I’ve always shrunk away from my sexuality, because it’s been wielded as a blunt instrument against me. (qtd. in McDonnell 78)

     

    This statement suggests that music can liberate Black women from racist and sexist containments and the “fetters” and silences that are left from slavery. Indeed, it is sound that detonates the objectified body of Chaka Khan. The instrumental and vocal components shift at the same time as the lyrics describe Chaka’s cunt exploding and raining down upon the uplifted gazes of spectators. The body as sexual spectacle is now–from this new perspective–too excessive to be contained by skin. It resists the contours of “object” and turns against its desiring viewers.

     

    After creating this critical distance from Chaka Khan, Bryant raps:

     

    she too literal · she too extreme · much too
    seamy · much too obscene · I say ·
    SCREAM SISTA

     

    These lines describe the “literal” body as excessive, implying that no one wants the “real” body, but merely the myths, symbols, and images inscribed upon a passive form. This body is active, reaches out at spectators. As with the punching “pussy” in Rucker’s piece, the “real” crotch challenges an objectifying gaze. The rain from Chaka’s “mound” makes her body grotesque and immanent, unlike the song’s first image of her, viewed on stage from a distance. Like Rucker, Bryant renders the “ho” too much to be desirable. Yet Bryant’s strategy is a bit different. She exposes the literal “matter” behind the masquerade, insisting on the reality of the body that has been so culturally inscribed. And the relationship between the actual body and the “ho” image is an antagonistic one. If we could take a step back to view the body without the mediations of exotic feathers and “medusian ropes”–a step that Bryant’s song simulates with the change in musical perspective–“salt n flame” would detonate the illusion in our faces.25

     

    5. Sarah Jones: Fluidity versus Commodity

     

    Performance artist/MC/poet/activist Sarah Jones, like Rucker, also speaks from the “underground” of hip hop culture (<http://www.survivalsoundz.com/sarahjones/>). Yet by performing in different types of venues–including the hip hop Lyricist Lounge, the Nuyorican Poets Café, Lincoln Center, the United Nations, and a variety of theaters and universities across the country–Jones gains a large and diverse audience.26 From these cross-cultural locations, her work exceeds any single gender framework–such as “gangsta”/”ho”–and she assumes multiple, fluid, border-crossing identities. She also elides heterosexuality as obsession by refusing to apply gender codes to many of her subjects (even in her sexually seductive piece “Metaphor Play”).27 Her poem, “your revolution” (a “remix” of Gil Scott-Heron’s famous spoken-word piece, “The Revolution Will Not Be Televised”), directly critiques gender roles in hip hop culture:

     

    your revolution will not happen between these thighs
    the real revolution
    ain’t about booty size…

     

    your revolution
    will not find me in the
    backseat of a Jeep with LL
    hard as hell
    doin’ it & doin’ it & doin’ it well (Jones 32)

     

    These last lines are an allusion to the 1988 song, “Wild Thang,” (by 2 Much, featuring female rapper, LeShaun), which explicitly narrates a woman’s pleasure in heterosexual intercourse. This song was later sampled in LL Cool J’s 1996 “Doin It,” a song that commodified the woman’s sexuality by going platinum on the back of LeShaun’s lyrics. Jones indicates that revolution will not be found within these frames of reference. She invokes these binary gender codes (masculine/feminine, subject/object, penis/crotch) to critique both the centering of masculinist heterosexual consumption in hip hop politics and the commercial exploitation of hip hop’s legacy (represented by appropriations of Scott-Heron and LeShaun).

     

    In a Village Voice review, James Hannaham praises Jones, herself mixed-race, for her “mastery of the mix.” Not only does her work remix elements from previous artists’ songs and poems, but, according to Hannaham, “she revels in human contradiction, particularly the irony of searching for a politics of identity in a realm where identity and image whirl in an unstable pas de deux” (108). As Hannaham tells Jones’s story, he employs a postmodern rhetoric that unmoors image from identity. He describes her life as a series of performances and tactical roles, citing her “code-switching” between “D.C. ‘Bama slang and ‘whitey-white Sarah’” and her “‘hoochie mama’ phase” (108). Jones’s one-woman show Surface Transit captures this fluidity and grounds it in current political struggles against racism, sexism, and homophobia. In a series of monologues, she assumes roles that cross lines of age, race, and sex.28 She highlights the constructedness of each identity by performing costume changes on stage, projecting a different bright color onto the backdrop for each monologue, and exaggerating each “type” in terms of image, phraseology, and racist stereotype. Each character is excessive and parodic: including a racist, hypochondriac Jewish grandmother; a macho, homophobic Italian cop; and a Black youth with an impenetrable hip hop vernacular. Seeing all of these identities enacted through Jones’s body reflects both a postmodern challenge to essence and a specifically racialized survival strategy of molding oneself to adapt to different contexts.

     

    Three personae in this piece are particularly self-reflexive–highlighting aspects of Jones’s own artistic identity–and illuminating for a study of feminism and hip hop. As “Sugar Jones,” a West Indian actress, Jones critiques the entertainment industry for casting Black women only for “Booty Call” or “Hoochies in the Hood.” “Rashid” leads a twelve-step program for recovering MCs, in which he recites one of Jones’s hip hop spoken-word pieces, “Blood,” punctuated by self-critique for his failure to overcome the habit of rhyme. “Keysha” is a young and somewhat naive college student from Brooklyn who recites another Jones poem, “your revolution,” and who refuses to be a “video ho.”29 Jones parodies hip hop poses when a “horny-ass-wanna-be-player” tries to pick up Keysha, but she cannot hear his voice over his booming car stereo. Through Keysha, Jones confronts gender options presented to young, urban African American women, and Keysha, like Jones, wants to choose education and poetry. As Sugar, Rashid, and Keysha, Jones asserts an attempt to distance herself from “gangsta” and “ho” stereotypes; but just as Rashid unconsciously succumbs to rhyme, she is inevitably co-opted by them, too. She assumes the very roles that she critiques, and destabilizes them from within.

     

    In “Blood,” Jones denaturalizes images of African Americans as excessive consumers–and compares these images to the marketing of Black bodies as commodities during slavery–to expose the exploitative workings of commodity capitalism upon both male and female bodies:

     

    They [black feet] don’t fit into any shoes
    not Nikes
    not Reeboks
    they make them in sweat shops across the sea
    turn around and sell them right back to you
    and you
    and me
    for fifty times their value (Jones 12) 30

     

    It is a bad fit: the Black body does not fit into the dominant culture’s sneakers; the price does not correspond to the conditions of production. Past and present, slavery and advanced capitalism merge: the feet that don’t fit into Nikes and Reeboks are syntactically the same feet “sank in rusted chains” (12). Like Bryant, Jones highlights the traces left from slavery that mark Black bodies today, but Jones targets capitalism itself as the source of these markings. She mimics the voice of a slave trader examining the survivors of the Middle Passage to assign them a price, followed by parodic images of African Americans’ supposed desire for white-produced designer goods today.31 The irons that marked “black butts” directly precede “those for / pressing and curling naps yanked straight” and the designer labels on the back pockets of blue jeans. In both economies, white capital is opposed to Black body as an antagonistic force attempting to mold feet, butts, and hair in unnatural ways. Jones splices the auctioneer’s call for bids on “top of the line” slave bodies to Calvin Klein in order to suggest that the contemporary commodification of Black bodies is as dehumanizing as slavery was, and it is still whites who profit. Both slavery and consumer capitalism rest on the exploitation of Black value, effacing Africanist value systems beneath commodity values typically assigned by the dominant (white) culture. Jones highlights the disjuncture between white capitalist assumptions and black corporeality by inserting drum rolls between the voices of the slave trader and the Black consumer and by exaggerating imitated accents to draw attention to the difference in perspective.

     

    Jones’s critique of capitalist manipulation of African American identity extends to complicit hip hop artists. “Blood” shifts into the first person plural, lamenting, “we’ll tuck our low self-esteem into some Euro-trash jeans / some over-priced shit from Donna Karan / then we’ll toast with Hennessy / to covert white supremacy” (14). This line could be an allusion to Da Brat’s hit song from Anuthatantrum, “Sittin on top of the world”: “Sittin on top of the world / With 50 grand in my hand / Steady puffin on a blunt / Sippin hennessy and coke.”32 Significantly, Jones herself wore black leggings with a visible Donna Karan logo during a June, 2000 performance of Surface Transit. Jones clearly implicates herself in this commodification when she cites “backs that cracked beneath the weight of slave names / like Jones, Smith, Johnson, Williams…” (12). White logos on black bodies represents an unnatural and effectively racist appropriation, but such commodification has saturated African American culture to such an extent that one must resist from within. Logos legitimize bodies and make them visible in the terms of the dominant American culture; being a consumer engages that culture in its own language.

     

    Jones’s resistance occurs within these terms, in the form of excess, fluidity, shifting from role to role and brand to brand in ways that defy proprietary circumscription by any one identity or corporation. Ownership, itself, either by slave trader or clothing designer, is defied as “blood” moves rapidly from one pair of pants–or one master’s name–to the next in a long list of brands: Calvin Klein, Ralph Lauren, Guess, Fila, etc. Disloyal consumers do not honor any label.

     

    The dominant culture’s shoes and jeans–pushed on Black youth with inflated prices–operate politically in the same fashion as constricting race and gender assumptions. Although African American bodies might be culturally inscribed (with designer name brands as well as the imagery of the dominant culture) today, much like when they were literally branded as slaves, Nike cannot contain these bodies, Jones insists. As Rucker and Bryant subvert gendered containments, the “afroMadonna and child / and child / and child,” invoked in “Blood,” exceeds the limits of the dominant paradigm. Jones makes this point in her words as well as in her choice of genre, or, rather, in her fusion of genres, which cannot be contained by the marketing categories of poetry, theater, or music. The lines “Nawsuh, I’se don’t want to wear yo’ britches / Nawsuh, I’se don’t want to grant yo’ wishes” are spoken during an extended break in the drumbeat to centralize their message (15). Jones herself refuses to be published or recorded by any major corporations. (Her chapbook of poems, your revolution, is self-published and critiques the publishing industry with a mock publication line attributed to “iquitthiswretchedjob press.”) Her work defies any sort of reproduction, which would inevitably fail to capture some aspect of the performance (oral, visual, rhythmic, physical). Like the feet that overflow Nike shoes, Jones is an unruly commodity in the entertainment industry.

     

    6. Da Brat: “Gangsta” and “Ho”?

     

    Da Brat fuses “gangsta” and “ho” in her image. When her work is read through the lens of these previous readings, it becomes clearer that, despite her commercial success, she, too, is an unruly commodity. She deconstructs the binary central to hip hop gender codes, yet her visible use of the terms of hip hop commodification keeps this subversive work marketable. Joan Morgan critiques Da Brat, along with Lil’ Kim and Foxy Brown, for succumbing to stereotypes as “hypersexed… hoochie mamas” (“Bad Girls” 76). Morgan cautions, “Marketing yourself as a I’m-a-nasty-little-freak-brave-enough-to-talk-about-it will be a very risky thing for Black women” (134). I believe that Da Brat’s strategy is more complex than Morgan gives her credit for.33 Audiences looking for a critique of the “nasty-little-freak” image will find it, but she codes her critique in a subtle way that does not alienate consumers of the “ho” stereotype. Perhaps this strategy is too risky, as few critics perceive the ways in which she signifies on their judgments. Yet this double-edged promotion has also pushed Da Brat’s message to the center of hip hop culture.

     

    Sony Music says of her newest album, Unrestricted (2000), “Though Da Brat’s peeling the layers off to reveal both her beauty and her talent, there’s still plenty of rawness to draw fans back…. She’s the perfect female MC still coming on hardcore while remaining undeniably feminine” (<http://www.sonymusic.com/artists/DaBrat/>).34 This interpretation reflects no sense of contradiction between “feminine” and “hardcore,” missing the tension between the roles of “gangsta” and “ho.” It also takes Da Brat’s image literally, suggesting that Unrestricted “uncovers” the essence of Da Brat more than her earlier work since she shows more skin than “the big-shirts-baggy-jeans-and-braids-look” she was once known for. I would argue, in contrast, that the image on Unrestricted is self-consciously artificial. Particularly when compared to the covers of Da Brat’s previous two albums, Funkdafied (1994) and Anuthatantrum (1996)–both of which feature multiple pictures of the artist in jeans, leather jackets, loose-fitting suits, and jerseys–the cover of Unrestricted appears staged, and the quasi-nudity takes on the effect of masquerade, as in Ursula Rucker’s “The Unlocking” (<http://dabratdirect.com/>).

     

    Cover art from Da Brat’s Unrestricted

     

    Rather than “peeling the layers off” of Da Brat, the album cover for Unrestricted veils, obscures, and teases, layering familiar components of both “gangsta” and “ho” mythology. What appears to be a photograph of the performer unclothed is itself almost completely covered with fragments of other pictures of Da Brat, spliced together to fill in the shape of her body. This body, rather than being naked, is constructed from heterogeneous images that jar against each other, confuse, and render it incoherent as a body. Where there should be an exposed breast, there is part of a red down jacket. Where there should be genitals, a tattooed upper arm. The composite image has five faces, located on an arm, a shoulder, a leg, a hip, and on top of the shoulders. Da Brat, according to this image, embodies multiple images, feathers, leather, down, and denim. The body that one expects to reflect feminine beauty and heterosexual desire turns out to be grotesque in its excess: too many images, too many bodies. Like Bryant’s Chaka Khan, this body is too much, too artificial to be desirable. Since this is the cover of an album for sale, the female body is quite literally a commodity, but this body is self-reflexively (re)produced, edited, copied, and objectified. I read this image, then, as a critique of the expectation that female rap stars present themselves as desirable objects for male consumption. It is a more subtle version of the message offered in Jones’s “Blood” and “your revolution.” Da Brat cannot be contained by the commodified image that marks–and markets–her body.

     

    Significantly, the back cover of Unrestricted challenges the “undeniably feminine” image. As the front cover manipulates and defamiliarizes the “ho” image, the back cover reflects the “gangsta,” complete with fedora, tough stare, and long fur-collared topcoat. But can she be both? What would it mean to belong to both schools, to pose both for and as a man? Several songs on the album interrogate this tension.35 The first song, “We Ready,” could court sex or a fight in the chorus “anybody who wants some / Nigga we ready for you.”36 The fact that the male voices of Jermaine Dupri and Lil Jon join Da Brat’s in this chorus makes “we ready” potentially signify as both a gang’s rallying cry and a declaration of mutual passion. This song also presents Da Brat’s image as artificially constructed and excessive, though the list of objects that render the rapper desirable remains consistent with familiar hip hop iconography:

     

    They say they like the way the system pound in my jeep
    I got two twelve’s that bump from wall to wall
    So loud that the headlights blink on and off
    I laugh when people watch I don’t stop I shine
    It’s attractive to motherfuckers that love to grind
    I sparkle from the rims to the chain to the watch
    To the rings to the ears to the wrists to the Glocks
    To the parts in the braids
    Shorties that stop to watch throw on the shades
    Cause Da Brat got gleam for days
    Sunroof open let the sun shine in
    Baking the fuck out of me and all my friends
    In the backseat, stay in the front
    Ain’t no room in the trunk
    Just a devastating woofer that bump

     

    This image is a hip hop cliché. The Jeep and the body function as metonymies for each other as the image bumps, blinks, and sparkles. The object of desire is thus both Jeep and woman; headlights and rims blend with ears and wrists. As this image fuses body and machine, it also fuses “gangsta” and “ho,” including Glocks [guns] in the list of jewelry and car parts. The net effect is overwhelming, “devastating,” “baking the fuck out of me,” perhaps parodying the effects of men’s desire for both cars and women. Ironically, this Jeep is so crowded with friends and speakers that there is no room for sex in the backseat or in the trunk. Excess, here, makes realization of this typecast desire untenable. So audiences will not find Da Brat, either, “in the / backseat of a Jeep with LL / hard as hell / doin’ it & doin’ it & doin’ it well” (Jones 32). Although Da Brat does not reject the Jeep, the Glock, or the gold chain, she employs them against heterosexist convention.

     

    Another song on Unrestricted, “Runnin’ Outta Time,” narrates from the perspective of a woman whose lover is cheating on her. This stereotypical “tragedy” provides the occasion for the narrator to assert her own mastery (“I’m a master at the craft cause I roll with some master thugs / Laughin’ as I pass you up”), and this mastery is also coded as both “gangsta” (“I keep a chip on my shoulder / 44 in the holster bulletproof vest under my clothes”) and “ho.” Indeed, just a few lines before she discloses the “44”: “Ain’t nothin’ them other hoes could do / Cause I molded you / To fit properly was inside of me / When you’re strokin’ them / You’re thinkin’ of riding me / And most of them hopin’ to slide with me / Cause I’m a ferocious ho.” These lines do several things. As with Rucker’s “The Unlocking,” these lines could be interpreted as rescripting “ho” to include agency, authority, and ownership. Since she “molded” her lover, he becomes her property, fitting “properly” inside of her. It is her authority that makes their sex “proper.” Moreover, Da Brat couples “ho” with “ferocious,” coding whore as gangster, giving the woman control over her own sexuality. She is her own pimp and her own protector. One other significant effect of these lines is that the “them” who wants to “slide” with the woman is syntactically the same “them” that her lover is stroking, subverting any strictly hetero-interpretation. This song also features Kelly Price singing with Da Brat. As the two voices weave together in the chorus, both women become the “I” who is “wonderin’ where you’ve been sleepin’,” complicating the interpretation of “we” in the title line, “We’ve been runnin’ out of time.” Is it the two women or a woman and a man?

     

    Da Brat frequently distances sex from a hetero-imperative throughout the album by declaring desire for (and desirableness to) both men and women. In “Breve On Em,” she poses a question about herself: “Is she is or is she ain’t a dyke?” This unanswered question adds to the intrigue surrounding her identity. Moreover, she sings it with a pause before “a dyke,” giving the word extra emphasis and allowing the question “is she is or is she ain’t” to be heard without any designated referent. Throughout Unrestricted, Da Brat plays with expectations and stereotypes. The album ultimately constructs an image whose power and desirability lies in its fluidity, its contradictions, and its uncertainty. Although she borrows familiar iconography, her composite identity, I would argue, is incommensurable with any singular types. In this way, the image others critique as succumbing to a stereotype also stages a resistance against binary criteria for judging women in hip hop.

     

    The key to Da Brat’s resistance is excess, and her work has been overtly excessive for years. This excess establishes her distance from the image that she overdoes and reflects a keen sense of awareness and, often, irony. For instance, on Anuthatantrum, “Just A Little Bit More” satirizes “gangsta”-style posturing. The lines “Pop a nigga like a pimple keep it simple enough / Make em wonder what the fuck happened leavin em stuffed / Get that ass kicked fast quick in a hurry” render gangsta-style violence absurd and unchallenging, comparing gun shots to juvenile pimple-popping.37 The redundancy in the phrase “fast quick in a hurry” suggests both excess and lack of drama. Rather than choreographing a drawn-out display of violence, Da Brat undermines the obsession with violence and gets past the ass-kicking hastily to move on to other lines. Similarly, the lines, “Fuck over the dough and die / Pick your casket if you feel that you gone try some shit / no nigga ever lasted past the first attempt / I leave em baffled and gaffle em all of they keys / Then dispense to my niggas like Sony distributing LP’s” deprive gangsta-style violence of skill, deliberation, and suspense. “Fuck over the dough and die” erases the killing process, and dispensing the spoils “like Sony LP’s” parodies the commercialization of gangsta rap. Clues to the deception and excess Da Brat builds into this song appear in lines like “It’s too much, too lil, too late for you to come up / Be deceived if ya wanna be foolish this bad mandate bitch is / true to the shit.” So if listeners choose to be deceived they are “foolish,” missing the mandate and the true “shit” that Da Brat has to offer. She also reacts to the possibility of misinterpretation in the line “You felt the fist of fury when you envisioned that I was comin,” linking the misperception of her sexual pleasure to violence. As with Bryant’s “Ode to Chaka Khan,” the objectified image of the woman “coming” is a masquerade that, at crucial moments, erupts to reveal the “true shit,” the fist of fury that undermines it. Even if this rap is “too much” and listeners do not clearly hear Da Brat’s mandate, they should certainly feel punched, made a fool of, and deceived.

     

    7. Conclusion

     

    Jones invokes Billie Holiday’s “Strange Fruit” in the following lines from “Blood”:

     

    none of them [shoes] can hold the blood
    that coagulated not-so-long ago
    in the lower extremities
    of brown-skinned corpses strung up from trees
    like drying figs
    or hanging potpourri
    to sweeten scenes of Southern Gallantry (12)

     

    Jones thus positions her work in relationship to Holiday and her precursor’s representations of Black bodies: representations from “not-so-long ago” that are still difficult to get a “hold” on. It seems that shoes could not contain the blood of the lynched bodies or of the “strange fruit” that Holiday planted, either. Billie, too, deployed contradiction and dissonance between words and music in order to exceed the categories by which white culture attempted to contain her.38 Feminist rappers contribute to a genealogy of African American women whose music has defied stereotypical expectations. African American arts have a long legacy of exceeding genres and employing double-edged communication, which indicates that the slave has always somehow escaped the master’s framework, overflowed his shoes (to continue with the Nike metaphor). Contemporary feminists, like Jones, Da Brat, Rucker, and Bryant, (re)construct this narrative contest in the framework of today’s master’s tools: postmodern media, consumer capitalism, and expectations (fueled by MTV and the like) that women artists of color must make a spectacle of their bodies. While Holiday worked within and against the “tragic mulatta” model ascribed to her by audiences, the contemporary artists work within and against media portrayals of hip hop “hos” and “gangstas.”39

     

    These artists capture audiences accustomed to racist and misogynist images by employing them in destabilizing ways. Rucker plays along with the “ho” myth but counters misogyny by endowing her whore with authority, mastery, and power over the construction of her own image. She defeats the gender binary within hip hop culture, not just by occupying both poles as Da Brat does, but by deflating the power of the masculine. Bryant highlights the absurdity, the artificiality, and the contradictions behind the sexualized female ideal, which turns out to be grotesque if materially realized. Chaka Khan is alluring as an unreal “ho,” but explosive and undesirable as an embodied presence. And finally, Jones takes on different identifications only to move past them; her fluidity resists containment within any singular codes. All three artists ultimately exceed the hip hop frameworks that they interrogate.

     

    In contrast, Da Brat’s covert critique is internal to hip hop marketing. She molds her image to be recognizable within the stereotypical gender codes of an exhibitionist “ho” and a gun-toting “gangsta”; but by fusing the two in one body, she deconstructs the binary assumed to be at their foundation. Each pole is undermined as a result: a whore cannot be a whore, or an object of others’ sexual mastery, if she is also a pimp and a gangster. Contradiction and excess baffle the listener attuned to “gangsta”/”ho” imagery. These artists’ political statements put in dialogue divergent interpretations that contest each other as well as pre-conceived assumptions: Da Brat is and is not a “boy toy”; Jones is and is not a stereotypical urban consumer. They work within predictable “criteria of intelligibility” to expose the faults behind these assumptions. Rather than creating new images, which would be susceptible to appropriation or to becoming exclusive in their own right, they reveal how images themselves are incomplete and fail to capture the complexity of identity. As in the following lines from Bryant’s “Ode to Chaka Khan,” audiences rebound off the “so-called black-faced bimbo,” the image which “broke down” “beyond image” in the excessive raps of “wailing” feminists.

     

    if she rushes in deep · my well · like poetry · like flush
    like semen · like spit · like your bloodied face ·
    reboundin’ · one mo time · off the blows · of a
    so-called · black-faced bimbo · broke down ·
    from wailin’ · nu blues · broke down · from wailin’
    · nu news · broke down · from wailin’ out ·
    beyond image · to me · can’t be music?

     

    “Can’t be music?” The effect is a playful, ambivalent, multi-grooved process that leads audiences to question each new impression they arrive at. This open-ended process is the strategy I offer as a way of making powerful feminist theories that do not master. Da Brat: “Is she is, or is she ain’t…?” Rucker: “Tell me what, what’s my name?” Jones: “you be the needle on my record skippin’ / needle on my record skippin’ / needle on my record skippin’…” (28).40 Audiences move from image to image, repeat, rebound, never certain of anything but the process of deception and the foolishness of any one image.

     

    Notes

     

    1. As I have discussed in an article on Michelle Cliff in African American Review 32 (Winter 1998), the expressions of marginalized groups often resemble postmodern practices, since both emerge from a position of decenteredness and suspicion towards the processes of signification. I do not think it is entirely coincidental that postmodernism became popular in the United States at the same time that multiculturalism brought increased attention to the literary traditions and language practices of marginalized peoples. It would be anachronistic and Eurocentric to claim these multi-layered and ironical expressions as exclusively postmodern since these types of expressions have been significant to “multicultural” Americans for over a century, at least.

     

    2. Yo-Yo (who created the Intelligent Black Women’s Coalition), MC Lyte, and Queen Latifah are the best-known rappers who assert images of strong, independent women. The artists I analyze, however, present a more complex relationship between feminist resistance and dominant images.

     

    3. I am using “hip hop” to describe the culture associated with contemporary African American urban youth identity, including rap music, fashion, breakdancing, graffiti art, and signifying.

     

    4. For instance, the words “freedom,” “woman,” and “man” were denied or qualified when used to apply to Black Americans during slavery. Another example of the relationship between African Americans and the English language is the devaluation of “black” as a symbol.

     

    5. Da Brat has fans who are not necessarily interested in gender critique or in female MC’s, while Yo-Yo, Queen Latifah, and MC Lyte probably have greater appeal among those specifically interested in gender issues.

     

    6. Da Brat asserts her own mastery and assumes an authoritative posture in songs like “Lyrical Molestation,” (“When Da Brat is in the area your shit ain’t safe”) and an early hit from Funkdafied (1994), “da shit ya can’t fuc wit” (“B-R-A-T, the new lady / with this shit you can’t fuck me”). She also claims to be desired by everyone: in “Runnin’ Out of Time,” she asserts that “most of them hopin’ to slide with me,” and in “At the Club,” a man’s girlfriend threatens to “kick the shit out of” him for staring at Da Brat rather than at her. Such lyrics demand that audiences take her seriously.

     

    7. According to David Foster Wallace, “not only is a serious rap serious poetry, but, in terms of the size of its audience, its potency in the Great U.S. Market, its power to spur and to authorize the artistic endeavor of a discouraged and malschooled young urban culture we’ve been encouraged sadly to write off, it’s quite possibly the most important stuff happening in American poetry today” (Costello and Wallace 99-100).

     

    8. See Gates’s much-quoted study, The Signifying Monkey, for an elaboration of signifyin(g) and repetition with a difference.

     

    9. David Foster Wallace calls rap a “Closed Show,” inaccessible to “highbrow upscale whites” (Costello and Wallace 23). In the face of globalized/postnational commodification, hip hop vernacular presents a shoring up of black nationality resistant to outside appropriation. Despite this potential insularity, I would emphasize the multiple meanings allowed by hip hop as living, public, communal productions.

     

    10. In an interview with Lisa Kennedy, Queen Latifah says, “I’m not a feminist. I’m not making my records for girls. I made Ladies First for ladies and men. For guys to understand and for ladies to be proud of…. I’m just a proud black woman. I don’t need to be labeled” (DiPrima, “Beat the Rap” 82). My own definition of feminism does include men, considerations of racial difference, and pride. In an October, 2000 Ms. article, Sarah Jones, too, is cautious about her assuming the label “feminist,” though she ultimately embraces feminism: “Jones hesitates when asked if she calls herself a feminist. ‘That’s a good question,’ she says. ‘I don’t know if I do. I call myself a womanist. No, that’s not true. I’m a feminist and a womanist’” (Block 84). This qualified response reflects Jones’s resistance to labels as well as the tentative relationship between African American gender issues and feminism. I understand that the name “feminist” carries a history of exclusivity but believe that the best way to challenge such exclusion is to expand the term from within.

     

    11. I agree with bell hooks’s assessment that “a central motivation for highlighting gangsta rap continues to be the sensationalist drama of demonizing black youth culture in general and the contributions of young black men in particular. It’s a contemporary remake of Birth of a Nation–only this time we are encouraged to believe it is not just vulnerable white womanhood that risks destruction by black hands, but everyone” (Outlaw Culture 115).

     

    12. In brief: Judith Butler theorizes how we perceive bodies through the discourses of the dominant culture. The body, as we know it, is “orchestrated through regulatory schemas that produce intelligible morphological possibilities. These regulatory schemas are not timeless structures, but historically revisable criteria of intelligibility which produce and vanquish bodies that matter” (14). And such criteria are most effectively “revised” and “destabilized” “through the reiteration of norms”; “in the very process of repetition… [lies] the possibility to put the consolidation of the norms… into a potentially productive crisis” (10). Butler’s theory resonates powerfully with feminist hip hop politics. Cultures offer limited “morphological” possibilities for what counts as an intelligible human body. But it is not just through the work of postmodern theoreticians that we observe cultural criteria “vanquishing” bodies that matter. Within African American history we can find concrete examples of this model: slaves became known as slaves by virtue of the branding iron, the master’s paperwork, and the meanings attributed by white Americans to their black skin. In the case of African American women, in particular, Hazel Carby has shown how antebellum literature created images of Black women as overtly sexual bodies in order to justify the masters’ rapes of their female slaves. Discourses of nineteenth-century womanhood excluded Black women from virtuous humanity and represented them as capital and breeders of capital. Slave women were confined by this objectification, often kept exclusively for the purpose of sex–their bodies seen as sites for the master’s pleasure and the reproduction of slave babies.

     

    The racialized misogyny produced during slavery still shapes public perceptions of African American women. When bell hooks tried to reclaim “the female body as a site of power and possibility,” her openness to sexuality was perceived by Tad Friend of Esquire magazine as “pro-sex,” and in his 1994 interview, he describes hooks as a “do-me” feminist (Outlaw Culture 75). hooks says of this interview: Friend “continues the racist/sexist representation of Black women as the oversexed ‘hot pussies’” (76). Her liberated identity and her feminist philosophies exceed the “criteria of intelligibility” that are currently available to the dominant culture, which reduces hooks’s body politics to the racist and misogynist mythologies left from slavery. hattie gossett also addresses the limiting vocabulary available to the dominant culture for labeling Black women’s sexual bodies in her poem, “is it true what they say about colored pussy?” (1989). She invokes racist and misogynist constructions of women of color’s sexuality as a stereotype too dehumanizing to name directly, but even by posing it as a question, she employs it. Indeed, she refuses to leave it unsaid: “don’t be trying to act like… you haven’t heard those stories about colored pussy so stop pretending you haven’t.” It might seem counterproductive to repeat this objectifying rhetoric, but gossett invokes and questions the myths surrounding “colored pussy” in order to challenge the historical misogyny directly. She concludes the poem by asserting the power to reconstitute the dominant “morphology” imposed upon Black women: “colored pussies are yet un-named energies whose power for lighting up the world is beyond all known measure,” locating “colored pussies” outside of any name (including “colored pussies”) (Pleasure and Danger 411-12). The contradiction built within this sentence, using a deleterious name to describe an unnameable energy, is an important strategy used by many African American feminists to highlight their alienation within dominant frameworks and to contest their simultaneous oppressions (see The Combahee River Collective’s 1977 “A Black Feminist Statement” for a theorization of the term “simultaneous oppression” as applied to women of color.). One could critique gossett for failing to name the alternative energy that exceeds “colored pussy,” yet by keeping this power “un-named” and “beyond measure,” she rejects the rules and measures of the dominant discourse and avoids the possibility of containment within that discourse. Hip hop-style feminisms often employ this same strategy: invoking the negative images perpetuated by history while undermining them. Audre Lorde wrote in 1979 that “the master’s tools will never dismantle the master’s house” (99). What I am most interested in are the strategies that disarm the master by taking his tools and breaking them so that he may never again use them to commit violence. This strategy allows one to contest the master and his terms by exposing their incompleteness in representing African American “morphologies.”

     

    13. For instance, Kolawole writes that “Latifah’s stance has led to rumours about her sexuality. She has on several occasions stated that she is heterosexual, but her ‘unsexy image,’ along with her views, appear to be too much for the male-dominated world of rap to consume, with consequences for her sales” (12).

     

    14. Tricia Rose reclaims some feminist agency for Salt ‘N Pepa by describing their image as “irreverence toward the morally-based sexual constrictions placed on them as women…. Their video [“Shake Your Thang”] speaks to black women, calls for open, public displays of female expression, assumes a community-based support for their freedom, and focuses directly on the sexual desirability and beauty of black women’s bodies” (124-5). Rose’s optimism hinges on Salt ‘N Pepa’s focus on their butts, which she regards as “a rejection of the aesthetic hierarchy in American culture that marginalizes black women” (125). It is a pose staged against the cult of ultra-thin white femininity. Yet the pose still revolves around an assumed spectator who desires women’s butts.

     

    15. Joan Morgan’s description of hip hop feminism follows this logic of hetero-gender binaries in When Chickenheads Come Home to Roost: My Life as a Hip-Hop Feminist (1999). In her defense of “the f-word,” she reduces feminism to heterosexual desire–“So, my brotha, if loving y’all fiercely and wanting it back makes me a feminist then I’m a feminist”–and celebrates her political assertiveness as having “‘a bigger dick than most niggas I know’” (Chickenheads 44-45, 46). Within this framework, women in hip hop must act manly and/or act for men’s benefit.

     

    16. When Houston A. Baker, Jr. assesses the role of women in rap in the face of this centering of masculinity, he concludes that “there are successful black women rappers, but proportionally they represent a cluster of stars in a vast constellation. Two indispensable aspects of the form–its blackness and its youthful maleness–seem to occasion a refusal of general, serious, and nuanced recognition” (62). In this view, the “maleness” of rap eclipses the presence of female rappers, relegates them to just one small corner of the genre. Evidently, according to Baker’s definition, women do not define or influence the “vast constellation” as a whole. Rather than “refusing” to offer serious recognition to the indispensable maleness of rap (which Baker accuses others of doing), my study acknowledges the ways in which female artists have had to negotiate this maleness. I would go further, though, to argue that this very maleness has been contested, nuanced, and shaped by the presence of female (and often feminist) authority from the start.

     

    17. Potter suggests that by staging the constructedness and “unreality” of images, hip hop produces its own counter-realities: “Hip hop stages the difference of blackness, and its staging is both the Signifyin(g) of its constructedness and the sites of its production of the authentic. In this staging, hip hop… exchang[es] the unreal ‘real’ for the ‘real’ production of the constructed….. And… the insurrectionary aspect of this ‘act’ has been that it has forced Euro-American culture to take stock of its own costumes, lingo, and poses” (122). As in Butler’s theory of gender performance, the self-conscious, often parodic constructions within hip hop “stage” the constructedness of race, in general, and denaturalize dominant racial images.

     

    18. “E.R.A.” appears on a 1997 King Britt album, When the Funk Hits the Fan; “Return to Innocence Lost” appears on Things Fall Apart, a 1999 album by the popular hip hop band, The Roots. Both pieces critique a lack of support and appreciation for women as mothers and lovers. “E.R.A.” celebrates the power and beauty of women–“soldiers” and “flowers,” “revolutionary, Isis, Saint, priestess,… wife, nature, mujer“–calling on a “strengthening presence already ages fortified by years been denied, set aside.” “Return to Innocence Lost” tells the story of an alcoholic father who cheats on his wife–“soiling Mommy’s sheets with… / Sweet… talk shit, / Cookie’s cheap lipstick, / Hairgrease, sperm, and jezebel juice / To hell with the good news that… / He was a father for the first time”–and whose negative influence leads his son to become his “twin in addiction,” a gangster, shot and killed on Christmas.

     

    19. Sarah Jones has a similar strategy. She recorded “Blood” on the popular hip hop Lyricist Lounge album, and her first performance piece, Surface Transit, directly invokes hip hop culture and was performed during the 2000 Hip Hop Theater Festival in New York. Through these venues, she has gained visibility within hip hop culture. Loyal fans find in her new performance, Women Can’t Wait, however, few references to hip hop, an overtly feminist message, or an international frame of reference.

    20. Significantly, we see no money change hands, undermining the whore’s status as commodity.

     

    21. All Rucker lyrics I use in this paper are my own transcription of her recordings.

     

    22. A dissonance between words and music is a defining feature of rap. David Foster Wallace argues that “the coldly manufactured, self-consciously derivative sound carpet of samples over which the rapper and DJ declaim serves to focus listeners’ creative attention on the complex and human lyrics themselves” (Costello and Wallace 97). The music that forms an apparently insignificant background does more than highlight a complex rap. Rather, as with jazz singing, the melody fabricated in hip hop by DJ and sound machine modifies the tone, and thus the meaning, of the MC’s rap. Often rappers borrow familiar melodies–as in Run DMC’s sampling of the theme from Exodus in a recent hit, “Crown Royal”–to contextualize their message. In the raps I am analyzing, the tension is far more subtle and thus demands more careful listening. As with much hip hop, then, the critical political message is missed (or deliberately hidden, perhaps) without close study. Nearly inaudible background noises, shifts in tempo, and ruptures in otherwise numbingly repetitive bass-driven melodies establish a relationship between the song and its lyrics that often runs counter to a strictly literal reading of the words. These seemingly unmasterful and insignificant sound carpets establish distance between artist and lyrics and self-reflexively remind listeners that they are being drawn into an artistic manipulation.

     

    23. All Dana Bryant lyrics in this paper are taken from the CD jacket for Wishing from the Top.

     

    24. In the chapter entitled “Slave and Mistress” in Reconstructing Womanhood, Hazel Carby discusses nineteenth-century rhetoric designed to blame female slaves for their own rapes and to portray slave masters as unwilling victims of their slaves’ sexual manipulations.

     

    25. While anti-foundationalists like Butler might question our ability to perceive the matter beyond the cultural inscription, Bryant pushes it in our faces.

     

    26. Even ABC’s Nightline briefly featured Jones speaking about hip hop in a September, 2000 series, “Hip Hop” (<http://abcnews.go.com/onair/Nightline/nl000906_Hip_Hop_feature.html>).

     

    27. Throughout “Metaphor Play,” Jones alludes to a sexual relationship with ungendered metaphors, such as, “if my day is a subway ride / then your smile is any empty car / on the express train to my house” (Jones 27).

     

    28. My analysis of Surface Transit is based on a June 30, 2000 performance at PS 122 in New York.

     

    29. Significantly, Keysha is unable to recognize the original sources for music sampled by contemporary hip hop artists Biggie Smalls and KRS-One. She falsely assumes the hip hop sources to be original and effaces their pre-hip hop contexts. This naïveté could be a self-reflexive jab at Jones’s own status as a young, post-hip hop artist.

     

    30. Musical commentary for “Blood” is based on the recording found on Lyricist Lounge, Volume One (1998). Lyrics for “Blood” are quoted from Jones’s chapbook, your revolution (1998).

     

    31. David Foster Wallace offers an explanation for this stereotype of underprivileged African Americans as excessive consumers: “Seeing as op-/apposite their grinding poverty and dependence on bureaucracies only the contrasts of 2-D Dynasty image, superrich athletes and performers, and the drug and crime executives for whom visible affluence is part of the job description–such a culture in such a place and time might well be excused for equating success and accomplishment directly with income, display, prestige” (Costello and Wallace 119). Nightline reinforces the negative image of hip hop materialism by drawing attention to Russell Simmons’s and L.L. Cool J’s conspicuous display of designer goods and the unreasonable consumer standards that these leaders thus create (<http://abcnews.go.com/onair/Nightline/nl000906_Hip_Hop_feature.html>).

     

    32. Lyrics from <http://lyrics.astraweb.com>.

     

    33. I think Da Brat is also more complex than Foxy Brown, Lil’ Kim, and so-called “porno rappers,” who market themselves exclusively as sexual commodities. We never see Foxy Brown and Lil’ Kim without their “ho”-styled mask or attire, but Da Brat presents a different story, one that is more aggressive and styled as self-authored.

     

    34. This album title echoes Millie Jackson (perhaps the first female rapper), who joins Da Brat on the album’s “Intro” with an explicit rap on the feminist assertion, “no means no”: “Tell the motherfucker ‘no’ when you don’t feel like screwin!” Unrestricted thus frames Da Brat’s raps in the context of her oft censored (and censured) foremother. Jackson recorded several rap songs in the late 1970s, including “All the Way Lover” and “The Rap,” in which she gives women spoken-word sexual advice over heavily-rhythmed “sound carpets.” In a 1982 live recording of “Lovers and Girlfriends,” Jackson raps that she was rapping long before it became a money-making industry: “It seems just about the time I stopped rapping, everybody else started. I said, now, I started this shit, I think it’s time that I go back and make some more money off of it.”

     

    35. Lyrics for “We Ready” and “Back Up” come from Astraweb lyrics, <http://lyrics.astraweb.com>; the lyrics for “Runnin’ Outta Time” are borrowed from <http://www.lyrics.co.nz/dabrat>.

     

    36. The same dual interpretation could be drawn from the song “Back Up,” in which it is unclear whether Da Brat is posing as sex symbol or gangster: “Niggas got me under surveillance their necks turnin’ / I’m an international playa, close observation / The best policy is to stay in ya’ll faces.” In either case, the image is self-consciously on display.

     

    37. Lyrics from <http://lyrics.astraweb.com>.

     

    38. Even “Strange Fruit,” a song based on lynching–actual, historic containment of African American bodies in the most violent manner–can almost be enjoyed as a dance song (with the “black bodies swinging” heard in a quite different light) in a 1956 recording in which the crescendo of Charlie Shavers’s trumpet, along with the rising and fluctuating pitch of Holiday’s voice, refuses to end on a down-note. Her pitch wavers disconcertingly on the final word, “crop,” ultimately ending on a high note. This ambivalence in tone mirrors overt contradictions in the lyrics, such as the “scent of magnolia, sweet and fresh” juxtaposed with the “smell of burning flesh.” Holiday writes about (mis)interpretations of “Strange Fruit” in Lady Sings the Blues (1956): “One night in Los Angeles a bitch stood right up in the club where I was singing and said, ‘Billie, why don’t you sing that sexy song you’re so famous for? You know, the one about naked bodies swinging in the trees’” (84). This woman’s interpretation is not surprising, nor does it contradict the effect of Holiday’s rendition of the lyrics, in which she obscures the connection between the metaphors and the reality of lynching and almost overshadows the words with her strategic use of silence. The line “black bodies swinging” is isolated, preceded and followed by pauses that give it independent emphasis. A long pause also erases the syntactical link between the “black bodies swinging in the Southern breeze” and the following line that explains the metaphor, “strange fruit hanging from the poplar trees.” Holiday emphasizes nouns and adjectives–“trees,” “strange,” “fruit,” “leaves,” “root,” “Southern,” and “breeze”–with parallel slides down in pitch and elides the relationship between these terms by almost swallowing the words that link them: “bear,” “blood at,” and “swinging.”

     

    39. Holiday’s “Gloomy Sunday,” for instance, employs imagery on the lyrical level that could be interpreted as a covert inversion of, or signification upon, the overt tragic narrative. This song about suicide came to be known as the “Hungarian Suicide Song,” as it was rumored to have inspired waves of suicide across Europe, projecting tragedy away from the Black woman and onto white men.

     

    40. The sources for these quotes are Da Brat’s “Breve On Em,” Rucker’s “The Unlocking,” and Jones’s “Metaphor Play.”

    Works Cited

     

    • ABCNews.com: Nightline: Hip Hop series. Internet. <http://abcnews.go.com/onair/Nightline/nl000906_Hip_Hop_feature.html>.
    • African American Literature Book Club: Ursula Rucker. Internet. <http://aalbc.com/poet/ursula.htm>.
    • Baker, Houston A., Jr. Black Studies, Rap, and the Academy. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1993.
    • Bauer, William R. “Billie Holiday and Betty Carter: Emotion and Style in the Jazz Vocal Line.” Annual Review of Jazz Studies 6 (1993): 99-152.
    • Block, Jennifer. “Sarah Jones Can’t Wait.” Ms. 10.6 (Oct. 2000): 82-84. Bost, Suzanne. “Fluidity without Postmodernism: Michelle Cliff and the ‘Tragic Mulatta’ Tradition.” African American Review 32.4 (Winter 1998): 673-89.
    • Butler, Judith. Bodies that Matter. New York: Routledge, 1993.
    • Carby, Hazel V. Reconstructing Womanhood. New York: Oxford UP, 1987.
    • Care Moore, Jessica. “The Word don’t FIT in my mouth.” The Words Don’t Fit in My Mouth. Brooklyn: Moore Black Press, 1997. 92-95.
    • Combahee River Collective. “A Black Feminist Statement.” This Bridge Called My Back: Writings by Radical Women of Color. Eds. Cherríe Moraga and Gloria Anzaldúa. New York: Kitchen Table Press, 1981. 210-18.
    • Costello, Mark, and David Foster Wallace. Signifying Rappers. Hopewell, NJ: The Ecco Press, 1990.
    • Davies, Carole Boyce. Black Women, Writing, and Identity: Migrations of the Subject. New York: Routledge, 1994.
    • Da Brat Biography. Internet. <http://www.sonymusic.com>.
    • Dana Bryant. Internet. <http://www3.mistral.co.uk/wallis/dana.htm>.
    • Davis, Angela Y. Blues Legacies and Black Feminism: Gertrude “Ma” Rainey, Bessie Smith, and Billie Holiday. New York: Vintage, 1998.
    • Derricotte, Toi. The Black Notebooks: An Interior Journey. New York: W.W. Norton, 1997.
    • DiPrima, Dominique. “Beat the Rap.” Mother Jones 15.6 (Sep.-Oct., 1990): 32-36+.
    • —. “Women in Rap.” Hotwire 7.2 (May 1991): 36-38.
    • Doane, Mary Ann. “Film and the Masquerade.” Writing on the Body. Ed. Katie Conboy, Nadia Medina, and Sarah Stanbury. New York: Columbia UP, 1997. 176-94.
    • Forman, Murray. “‘Movin’ Closer to an Independent Funk’: Black Feminist Theory, Standpoint, And Women in Rap.” Women’s Studies 23 (1994): 35-55.
    • Gates, Henry Louis, Jr. The Signifying Monkey: A Theory of African-American Literary Criticism. New York: Oxford UP, 1988.
    • gossett, hattie. “billie lives! billie lives!” This Bridge Called My Back: Writings by Radical Women of Color. Ed. Cherríe Moraga and Gloria Anzaldúa. New York: Kitchen Table Press, 1981. 109-12.
    • —. “is it true what they say about colored pussy?” Pleasure and Danger: Exploring Female Sexuality. Ed. Carole S. Vance. London: Pandora Press, 1989. 411-12.
    • Gourse, Leslie, ed. The Billie Holiday Companion: Seven Decades of Commentary. New York: Schirmer Books, 1997.
    • Guevara, Nancy. “Women Writin’ Rappin’ Breakin’.” Droppin’ Science: Critical Essays on Rap Music and Hip Hop Culture. Ed. William Eric Perkins. Philadelphia: Temple UP, 1995. 49-62.
    • Hannaham, James. “Zebra Lives: Sarah Jones–Awhirl in Race’s Unstable Dance.” Village Voice 5 Jan. 1999: 108.
    • Henderson, Mae Gwendolyn. “Speaking in Tongues: Dialogics, Dialectics, and the Black Woman Writer’s Literary Tradition.” Feminists Theorize the Political. Ed. Judith Butler and Joan Scott. New York: Routledge, 1992. 144-66.
    • Holiday, Billie. Lady Sings the Blues. New York: Penguin, 1992.
    • hooks, bell. Outlaw Culture: Resisting Representations. New York: Routledge, 1994.
    • Huang, Hao and Rachel V. Huang. “Billie Holiday and Tempo Rubato: Understanding Rhythmic Expressivity.” Annual Review of Jazz Studies 7 (1994-1995): 181-199.
    • Jamison, Laura. “Ladies First.” The Vibe History of Hip Hop. Ed. Alan Light. New York: Three Rivers Press, 1999. 177-85.
    • Jones, Sarah. Personal interview. 16 Apr. 2001.
    • —. Surface Transit. Dir. Gloria Feliciano. Perf. Sarah Jones. PS 122. New York. 30 Jun. 2000.
    • —. your revolution: poems and musings of an unusually spirited gothamite with far too much rhyme on her hands. New York: Independently published by iquitthiswretchedjob press, 1998.
    • Keyes, Cheryl L. “‘We’re More than a Novelty, Boys’: Strategies of Female Rappers in the Rap Music Tradition.” Feminist Messages: Coding in Women’s Folk Culture. Ed. Joan Newlon Radner. Urbana: U of Illinois P, 1993. 203-19.
    • Kolawole, Helen. “Sisters Take the Rap… But Talk Back.” Girls! Girls! Girls!: Essays on Women and Music. Ed. Sarah Cooper. New York: New York UP, 1996. 8-21.
    • McDonnell, Evelyn. “Divas Declare a Spoken-Word Revolution.” Ms. 6.4 (Jan./Feb. 1996): 74-79.
    • Morgan, Joan. “The Bad Girls of Hip Hop.” Essence 27.11 (Mar. 1997): 76-77+.
    • —. When Chickenheads Come Home to Roost: My Life as a Hip-Hop Feminist. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1999.
    • Nelson, George. Hip Hop America. New York: Viking Penguin, 1998.
    • Niesel, Jeff. “Hip-Hop Matters: Rewriting the Sexual Politics of Rap Music.” Third Wave Agenda: Being Feminist, Doing Feminism. Ed. Leslie Heywood and Jennifer Drake. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1997. 239-53.
    • Official Da Brat Store. Internet. <http://dabratdirect.com/>.
    • Perkins, William Eric, ed. Droppin’ Science: Critical Essays on Rap Music and Hip Hop Culture. Philadelphia: Temple UP, 1996.
    • Potter, Russell A. Spectacular Vernaculars: Hip-Hop and the Politics of Postmodernism. Albany: SUNY Press, 1995.
    • Rapscene. Internet. <http://www.rapscene.com>.
    • Rose, Tricia. “Never Trust a Big Butt and a Smile.” Camera Obscura 23 (1990): 109-131.
    • Sarah Jones. Internet. <http://www.survivalsoundz.com/sarahjones/>.
    • Schneider, Rebecca. The Explicit Body in Performance. London: Routledge, 1997.
    • Thigpen, David. “Not for Men Only.” Time 137.21 (May 27, 1991): 71-72.
    • Wallace, Michele. “When Black Feminism Faces the Music, and the Music Is Rap.” The New York Times 29 Jul. 1990, sec. 2: 20.

    Discography

     

    • Bryant, Dana. Wishing From the Top. Warner Brothers, 1996.
    • Da Brat. Anuthatantrum. So So Def, 1996.
    • —. Funkdafied. So So Def, 1994.
    • —. Unrestricted. So So Def, 2000.
    • Fat Beats & Bra Straps: Women of Hip-Hop: Classics. Rhino, 1998.
    • Holiday, Billie. “Gloomy Sunday.” Rec. 7 Aug. 1941. Billie Holiday: Greatest Hits. Columbia, 1998.
    • —. “Strange Fruit.” Rec. 7 Jun. 1956. Lady Sings the Blues. Verve, 1995.
    • Jackson, Millie. Live and Uncensored. Southbound, 1991.
    • Jones, Sarah. “Blood.” Lyricist Lounge, Volume One. Rawkus, 1998.
    • —. “Entertainment.” The Best of Wave Music, Volume One. Wave, 1997.
    • —. “Metaphor Play.” Eargasms: Crucial Poetics Volume One. Ozone, 1999.
    • Rucker, Ursula. “E.R.A.” When the Funk Hits the Fan. Sylk 130. Columbia, 1997.
    • —. “Return to Innocence Lost.” Things Fall Apart. The Roots. MCA, 1999.
    • —. “The Unlocking.” Do You Want More?!!!??! The Roots. Geffen, 1994.
    • Salt ‘N Pepa. Hot, Cool & Vicious. London, 1988.
    • The Voices of Urban Renewal. Guidance, 1999.

     

  • The Otherness of Light: Einstein and Levinas

    David Grandy

    Department of Philosophy
    Brigham Young University
    david_grandy@byu.edu

     

    In his Downcast Eyes, Martin Jay alerts readers to “the ubiquity of visual metaphors” in Western thought and warns that nonchalance or blindness toward such “will damage our ability to inspect the world outside and introspect the world within” (1). This judgment, Jay quickly notes, fails to escape the embrace of what it attempts to analyze, for we can hardly express hope for deeper understanding or light without invoking images of light and vision. Those images may be fairly obvious–as in image–or they may be etymologically veiled–as in inspect and introspect, arising from specere, Latin for “to observe” (1). In either case, we tend to take them for granted, failing to grasp their elemental significance.

     

    I argue that this failure is intrinsic to the action of light as it offers up visual images of the world. In the moment of revelation, there is a re-veiling, a drawing away, that keeps light from being fully overtaken by sight or reason. This retreat into non-visibility or unknowing is hardly a new idea. John Locke suggested that the eye’s self-blindness enables optical vision (87). Aristotle stated that nous or mind must be a self-emptiness amounting to pure capacity or receptivity: “For if [nous] shows its own identity, it hinders or obstructs what is other than it; hence it can have no nature but that of capacity. What is called nous of the soul, then… is not anything until it knows” (qtd. in Ballew 128).

     

    If Aristotle is right, we apprehend the world by the grace of some agency that does not show up on its own; further, this agency is a kind of open set that freely receives other things and only then registers its own existence. Light, it seems, follows a similar principle: by retreating or failing to dawn as a freestanding entity, it clears or opens space for the appearance of other things. It is, as Hans Blumenberg insisted in his elaboration of light’s many aspects, “the ‘letting-appear’ that does not itself appear, the inaccessible accessibility of things” (31).

     

    This claim may surprise, and part of the task of this essay is to defend it. The other part is to show that while light’s relation with other things (the objects it illuminates) is fraught with paradox, that relation affords practical insight into how otherness informs human experience. Put differently, a study of light dramatically crystallizes imprecise and often difficult philosophical talk about otherness, sameness, absence, and presence. Further, one can hardly attend to light without glancing at modern physics, which has generated its own array of light-related puzzles and insights. These, when paired with philosophical impressions of otherness, indicate that light’s revelatory action is implicated in the ambiguity associated with our apprehension of otherness. One might plausibly propose that light fosters and fashions that ambiguity.

     

    Indeed, light is itself deeply, perhaps inexhaustibly, ambiguous. This is because light is complicit with the “seeing” of light. Consequently, as Jacques Derrida proposes, the last word on light is always pronounced by light itself (92). Were we able to get an objective distance from it, we might be able to offer a definitive account of light. But such a move would entail losing light itself, for light never announces itself from a distance: it is its own messenger and “nothing, not even light itself, can bring us news of its upcoming arrival” (Schumacher 113-14). Moreover, to see light is to see by it; we see other things by light’s instrumentality.

     

    These are general comments, but they stand the test of philosophical and scientific thinking. There is in light an inscrutability or darkness–an inaccessibility–borne of the necessity of seeing distant bodies by some unseen agency that touches the eye. Because this touching registers objects that do not physically touch the eye, the process of seeing must be more than a unidirectional movement toward manifestation. By its dual meaning, the word clear–a word growing out of light and vision–bespeaks bi-directionality. Thanks to light, material objects visually present themselves to our senses. For this presentation to be effective or “clear,” light also must be clear, but in a different way. To the extent that objects show up with clear, well-defined details that enable apprehension and understanding, light qua light fails to show up at all: it must be clear in the opposite sense of being transparent or invisible. Light is a formless clarity or openness that permits seeing without being threatened by seeing.

     

    In this essay, I affirm that light is “other” in two interrelated ways. First, it is other in the sense that it is unfamiliar and inscrutable; second, that inscrutability arises from light’s capacity to receive and announce other things while retreating from view as an independent entity. Thus, revelatory otherness (the light-mediated manifestation of the other) is grounded in the inscrutable action of light. A similar dynamic, albeit one underlining otherness rather than light, has been proposed by Emmanuel Levinas. My intent is to thematize light with Levinasian otherness. For maximum effect, this means that the classical scientific notion of light must yield to Albert Einstein’s relativistic reformulation. In Einsteinian physics, light inhabits a domain that is off-limits to material reality, and so when light breaks into material reality, it does so in a “relationless” way. That is, light cannot be scaled into or made commensurate with the familiar space and time metric of material reality. For Levinas, otherness is also refractory to reduction to the familiar. Given that light presents otherness to our view, it would seem to follow that here we have a single package: the inscrutability of light informs the inscrutability or otherness of the outside world.

     

    Light’s Uniqueness

     

    In the past century, thinkers have spilt much ink on the concept or experience of otherness, sometimes termed exteriority or alterity. Otherness informs human existence, marking it with ambiguity, indeterminancy, and incommensurability. It is a presence but also an absence or awayness, a constancy of difference challenging and clashing with one’s sense of core identity. That it is always there–away from us as something other–makes it also here, for absolute apartness or absence would render it imperceptible and unknown. Since we do know it, however, it is part of us, even though its very essence, it seems, sets it apart from us.

     

    Casting about for an explanation for otherness in the world, we may with profit pause to consider physical light. Plato remarked that light takes on visibility as objects and ideas flash into existence by the grace of light (306-35). He did not mean that light qua light is thereby revealed, for he understood that “rather than being a component of visibility, light has an originality of its own” (Vasseleu 4). This originality, I submit, is the origin of otherness. In failing to register itself in the world, light registers otherness in ways that call up certain profundities associated with otherness as a philosophical topic. To be sure, phenomenology since Edmund Husserl has invoked light when talking about otherness, but the tendency is to speak in the currency of metaphorical rather than physical light; little explicit reference is made to physical light, or at least to the physics of light. Here we can discern light’s uniqueness.

     

    Consider Plato’s proposition that originary light is immune to visual apprehension. If this were not true, then seeable or opaque light would block our view of things other than light. Since it does not, we instinctively imagine light as an intermediate transparency between perceiver and perceived. Such thinking, however, confers upon light a reality that no experiment or experience, even in principle, can sustain.

     

    To elaborate this point, let us try to locate light in our field of experience. Three possible locations present themselves. Light is (1) striking the retina; (2) striking a perceived object; and (3) traveling from the object to the retina. Given light’s uniqueness, none of these possibilities can be defended in conventional language that permits us to assert that thing x is at location y. Possibility (3) is rendered problematic by the aforementioned fact that light cannot be hailed in advance. If indeed we could see it at a distance–see it passing through intermediate space–some light-like agency would have to present it to the retina, and then that agency would be light as we know it and just as immune to delimitation in intermediate space.

     

    Possibilities (1) and (2) may seem more straightforward, but in fact the two collapse into each other. Yes, (1) may be said to occur, but when it does we see (2), even though a space-time interval separates the two events. This collapse, of course, is the very essence of vision, and despite its deep familiarity, can teach us much about light. Foremost is the recognition that though light is present when it strikes the retina, its presence is non-local; that is, completely given over to distant objects. These objects, in fact, must “keep their distance” from the retina if they are to be seen, for once they make immediate contact with the eye, vision fails. Light, by contrast, strikes the retina and if it is to make any statement at all, must announce the existence–the distant presence–of something other than itself. Thus, the local presence of light implies its absence: it is here striking the eye but affording us visual witness of what lies beyond by absenting itself as a local entity to be seen. If it is to do its work of vision, it cannot register itself as visual fact, for then it would interfere with the seeing process.

     

    Sometimes, of course, light does interfere with seeing, and then it is natural to regard light as distinct from the objects we look at–to suppose that light has an appearance or visual texture of its own. But when this happens, we mistake a seeming excess of reflected, refracted, or scattered light for light per se. Sunlight, for example, is never seen in isolation. It is seen in conjunction with the white snow that reflects it, the atmospheric air molecules that scatter its blue component, the atmospheric haze that scatters its reddish component, and the material, gaseous backdrop of the sun itself. True, the midday sun is hard to look at owing to its abundant light, but we would never be dazzled if light were not interacting with the physical matter that constitutes the sun. It is that interaction that brings the sun into visual being and gives it bright announcement. And while that announcement may be too bright for human eyes, we can no more see brightness or light per se than we can see an abstract, unattached adjectival quality. When we say, therefore, that direct sunlight is too intense for human vision, we are not registering the fact that light somehow shows up by itself as we look at the sun. We are merely acknowledging a physiological threshold of our ability to see bright objects.1

     

    If, indeed, we could see light, it would be hard (seemingly impossible) to see stars in the night sky: they would not show up against a backdrop of darkness but would be surrounded by the light they radiate into empty space.2 This is a variation on the remark that a flashlight beam fails to show up in the night sky unless a material entity (an insect or raindrop, say) intervenes to be given visual announcement. Even laser beams remain unseen without material interaction; they are not self-luminous but borrow their visual texture from illuminated gas particles.

     

    These considerations have prompted some physicists to insist that seeing light merely amounts to seeing “things lighted.”3 What’s more, if light does not show up on its own, then the notion of its propagation in empty space is empirically gratuitous. Stephen Toulmin, Ron Harré, Geoffrey Cantor, and Vasco Ronchi have all developed this point by noting that the concept of moving or projectile light is part of the legacy of geometrical optics. After rehearsing the history of optics since the late Middle Ages, Ronchi states that if we are to learn to talk coherently about light, “we must definitely avoid assuming any distribution of the radiant energy during its supposed propagation” (271). Cantor argues that although light’s nature is “beyond our ken,” we instinctively find ways to bring it “under the umbrella of matter,” albeit generally without realizing that a poetic leap has been made (96-97). As a case in point he singles out “projectile optics,” a metaphorical outlook that draws heavily on material particles in motion but which, in his view, is infected with deep tension.

     

    Trying to develop a cognitive model of vision, James J. Gibson arrived at similar conclusions. In his last book, he wrote:

     

    Vision is a strange and wonderful business. I have been puzzling over its perplexities for 50 years. I used to suppose that the way to understand it was to learn what is accepted as true about the physics of light and the retinal image, to master the anatomy and physiology of the eye and the brain, and then to put it together into a theory of perception that could be tested by experiments. But the more I learned about physics, optics, anatomy, and visual physiology, the deeper the puzzles got. The experts in these sciences seemed confident that they could clear up the mysteries of vision eventually but only, I decided, because they had no real grasp of the perplexities. (xiii)

     

    Gibson rejected standard theories of vision as artificial and mechanical. These, he felt, depended too much on laboratory-contrived, “snapshot” visual experiences. Spliced together and given meaning by the brain, these single-moment or single-perspective experiences were said to produce the seamless flow of coherent seeing. Gibson, however, sensed a richer, more ecological drama involving all of one’s body and one’s entire environment–not just the eye-brain complex responding to a narrow band of specific stimuli. Instead of snapshot vision he proposed ambulatory (move-around) vision, feeling that the latter corresponded with the way people (and animals) use their bodies to experience the world visually.

     

    In developing his model, Gibson came to question longstanding assumptions about light and space. What do we see when we take in the visual world? Not space, which is completely featureless, and so ought to be rejected both as an element of perception and as a component of perception theory:

     

    I am also asking the reader to suppose that the concept of space has nothing to do with perception. Geometrical space is a pure abstraction. Outer space can be visualized but cannot be seen…. The doctrine that we could not perceive the world around us unless we already had the concept of space is nonsense. It is quite the other way around: We could not conceive of empty space unless we could see the ground under our feet and the sky above. Space is a myth, a ghost, a fiction for geometers. (3)

     

    Nor, said Gibson, do we see rays of light streaming to the retina–another geometrical abstraction. Rather, we see illuminated surfaces, the collective, shifting array of which conveys meaning as surfaces interrelate. Hence, meaning inheres in the world, in its ecological inter-linkage, not in a particular part of the world–the brain–that putatively confers meaning on the rest.

     

    Gibson affirmed light’s role in seeing but reconfigured that role along the lines of actual experience in such a way as to break the traditional connection between light and space. His concept of ambient light coincides with our sense of vast and immediate visual contact with distant objects. Not only is the visual landscape generally much larger than one’s attentive focus, but there is no delay across space: we do not, upon opening our eyes or turning our heads, have to wait for images to arrive or link up with previous images. From these considerations and others, Gibson concluded that though light is transparent, it is not a spatial blank or emptiness, and this because it is immediately informative of objects. He wrote that “information is not transmitted [and] the speed of light is irrelevant to vision. The [optic array] does not consist of light rays but of sight lines… information does not have to be carried by light from place to place” (qtd. in Reed 257). Put differently, information “is simply available in the optical structure of ambient light” (Reed 257).

     

    Gibson’s views permit the suggestion that the unexpected properties attributed to light by physicists reside also in the seeing experience. Simply put, light is difficult to locate in conventional terms. We cannot recover it as an intermediate, spatially separate (and therefore separating) entity between perceiver and perceived. That is, it cannot be snatched out of the context of the visual experience and held up for independent scrutiny, for unless light first drops out of sight, no visual experience is forthcoming. That experience, it seems, arises from light’s failure to respect, or perhaps even participate in, the space-time gap between here and there. In one stroke, light exchanges or gives up its local presence–its contact with the retina–for the visual presence of distant objects. Physically absent, they become perceptually present, while light, physically present, becomes perceptually absent.

     

    The (Meta)physics of Light

     

    In recent centuries, science has traded on the assumption that physical light–the familiar light of everyday experience–is devoid of metaphysical significance. No doubt this is one reason many people find little meaning in daily light. Further, light’s ubiquity puts it at risk of being deemed ordinary and therefore limited in its capacity to spark metaphysical insight. I disagree: from where we stand, physical light is a horizon beyond which we cannot progress in our metaphysical deliberations. It encapsulates all that is presently thinkable and more.

     

    There is good reason for this. Long ago Anaximander proposed a disparity between the visible, determinate elements of reality and a necessarily more fundamental, indeterminate substance: if the latter fully participated in the former, determinate reality would never emerge because the more fundamental substance would “swamp the other world-constituents and never allow them to develop” (Kirk et al. 113). According to Paul Feyerabend, this implies that “the basic substance, or the basic elements of the universe, cannot obey the same laws as the visible elements” (58). A modern reaffirmation of this principle, he continues, is Werner Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle, which posits an interference effect between the material constituents of the world and the light by which we see them.

     

    But why should light be this kind of fundamental substance? Aside from the aforementioned anomalies, what warrants the suggestion that light visually announces the world without announcing itself as a separate entity in the world? Speaking epistemically, there is no other option. If seeing occurs by the agency of light, then no explanatory purpose is served by “seeable” light: seeing is thereby defined in its own terms, and we fail to move to a more fundamental level of explanation.4

     

    This rationale applies to all unexplained phenomena, but it would seem to apply with particular force to light. Because light is integral to all visual experience, we should resist the inclination to clothe it with visible properties. Such restraint brings light forward simply as a principle of seeing; that is, something that is communal with and prior to our optical investigation of nature. Before we try to grasp the world, light freely gives us a graspable world. This is an empirical fact–light gives us the event-articulated expanse we call the cosmos–but the tendency is to overlook this giving or pre-giving in favor of distinct, light-illuminated objects and events.

     

    Light, of course, readily permits oversight of itself. By allowing other things to spring forth visually at a cost to its own visuality, light introduces us to another–an other–world. Communal with light but now stretched by light’s absence into otherness, we find ourselves in an untoward setting, one provoking restlessness and disquietude. What is missing is light’s presence, which is given up to other things.

     

    Better than any other discipline, modern physics affirms physical light’s metaphysical depth by problematizing the commonsensical assumption of light’s presence in local and intermediate space. This assumption is eroded by the dawning realization that light is missing from the space-time regime in which things other than light make their appearance. One might say it is present elsewhere, but this ambiguous construction is fostered by light, by the way light cedes its own immediate presence to that of distant objects, thereby affording us the epistemic luxury of mentally endowing those objects with presence. Given this movement away from self and towards otherness, we should be wary of restricting light to the space-time setting (the material cosmos) it announces. Physics rewards such caution by indicating that light is absent from that setting, notwithstanding routine discourse to the contrary. Indifferent to the separating modalities of space and time, light is larger than–unconfined by–the objects and set of objects it makes visible.

     

    Classical physics regarded light as one of many elements in the space-time set of things, but modern physics implies that light is not a proper member of that set. Indeed, light is its own, higher (more comprehensive) set, one that gathers up and supersedes space-time. To be sure, this fact is rarely acknowledged in an explicit way in modern physics, but it resides tacitly in its foundational principles. In relativity theory, the speed of light is given as a universal constant that informs the structure of space-time and thereby limits the velocity of material bodies. As bodies are seen to accelerate by stationary observers, they undergo changes that make further acceleration increasingly difficult. They become more massive (thus requiring greater energy input to maintain acceleration) and their length (or space itself) is contracted in the direction of their motion. Given these effects, reaching the speed of light is a physical and conceptual impossibility, for that would entail skipping from the realm of finite, measurable intervals to one of zeros and infinities. If a body were to achieve light speed, for example, its length would be contracted to zero and its mass would become infinite. Moreover, the body’s passage through time would slow to a halt, since moving bodies also undergo the relativistic effect of time dilation.

     

    Although this nether-realm of zeros and infinities is off limits to material objects, it is light’s native economy. Since the speed of light is intrinsic to light, light may be said to be beyond space and time, whose aegis ceases at light speed. This claim, however, seems to be contradicted by the fact that light travels at a finite velocity–186,000 miles per second. How can light be a matter of zeros and infinities on the one hand, and, on the other, reducible to a finite numerical value?

     

    Of all the ambiguities associated with light, this one is fundamental. In his first paper on relativity theory, Einstein brought the speed of light forward as a universal constant or unchanging velocity: no motion or maneuver on our part can alter the finite value that we assign to light upon measuring its speed. Having posited this constancy, Einstein wrote that “the velocity of light in our theory plays the role, physically, of an infinitely great velocity” (401). This tension between finiteness and infinitude is central to relativity theory, and it plays itself out in ways that touch on the aforementioned profundities regarding our optical experience of light.

     

    Widely publicized are counterintuitive scenarios like the twin paradox (where two twins undergo asymmetric aging owing to time dilation). Of greater import is the simple fact that light does not move in a conventional way. Any phenomenon whose velocity is an irreducible value cannot be said to move as other things move. Well before Einstein, thinkers realized that a body’s velocity is not an objective or absolute fact. It is a function of both the body and the motion of the observing person or instrument. Hence, one object can have as many relative speeds as there are external observers, if each observer is moving differently. This, of course, is hardly abstract scientific fact but the stuff of everyday experience. Light, or the motion of light, does not accommodate itself to such experience, however. Our own motion does not affect the observed motion (speed) of light.

     

    Going further, one may propose that once light is said not to move conventionally, we may say that it does not move at all. We can, of course, infer light’s motion. As already noted, however, such inference has no basis in direct experience. Even in relativity theory, light’s motion is no more than an inference, and one that is challenged by the theory itself. True, light is said to travel invariably at 186,000 miles per second, but as the theory unfolds, the assertion that light travels unconventionally opens out onto the realization that we lack the resources for imagining how light travels, if in fact it does.

     

    For a body to move in a conventional sense, it must negotiate space and time. But a ray of light whose clock is stopped (whose time dilation is complete) is not in temporal process. Consequently, in Hermann Bondi’s words, “light does not age; there is no passage of time for light” (108). Once time falls out of light’s nature, so, by implication, does space. What would it mean, after all, to travel through space timelessly? It would mean something like the following:

     

    In the reference frame of light, there is no space and time. If we look up at the Andromeda galaxy in the night sky, we see light that from our point of view took 2 million years to traverse that vast distance of space. But to a beam of light radiating from some star in the Andromeda galaxy, the transmission from its point of origin to our eye was instantaneous. (Haisch 31)

     

    In allowing us to see distant stars, light situates us within a vast expanse of space-time. Classical physics took this expanse as complete and definitive, an absolute and all-encompassing reference frame. In positing the speed of light as a universal constant, however, Einstein subordinated space and time to a new absolute. Light consequently became “its own thing” (Zajonc 260), not part of the space-time regime. So, while the classical image of light moving through space and time may still be invoked in relativity theory, eventually it must be set aside, and this because the theory assigns to light a velocity that cannot be reduced to the familiar terms of motion: space and time. Granted, light shows up in the space-time regime moving at 186,000 miles per second, but it always shows up in conjunction with other (space-time) things, thereby tilting our vision and understanding away from itself and its own uniqueness. Furthermore, that motion is merely inferred, never directly witnessed, as light allows material space-time bodies–otherness–to become the cynosure of all eyes.

     

    Reasoning from relativistic principles, P. W. Bridgman concluded that it is “meaningless or trivial to ascribe physical reality to light in intermediate space, and light as a thing travelling must be recognized to be a pure invention” (153). While this judgment issues up from Einstein’s redefinition of light, it has always been implicit in our optical experience of the world. To state the matter in terms made plausible by both modern physics and contemporary philosophy, light admits no spectators. If we experience light, it is because we participate in the space-time drama it offers us. Never do we see it from a distance; never do we get any objective distance from it. In a literal sense, light is always “in your face,” striking the retinas and ceding its own local presence to distant bodies. This double-movement–the absenting of immediate light and the presencing of other things across space-time intervals–turns light into an opening without recovery or bounds. Were it bounded or encompassed by space and time, it could hardly play the role of “an infinitely great velocity,” and the structure of the world (and our experience thereof) would be very different.

     

    Light, in brief, has no space-time frame; it is an unframed window on the material world, an opening or clearing in which that world is situated. This idea is made explicit by physical experiments that indicate light’s indifference to space and time intervals. Two distantly separated parts of light–two photons–interact non-locally; that is, as if they were conjoined (Chiao et al.). This is a dead-end puzzle for anyone invoking the classical assumption of light’s subordination to space-time. Liberation occurs when one realizes that light itself is liberated. Not part of the space-time regime, light does not participate in modes of action that presuppose space-time intervals.5

     

    I am not suggesting that light may be fully understood via attempts at non-local, holistic thinking. As the very coin of illumination and understanding, light cannot be traded against itself. That said, there is merit in allowing it to expand our thinking, for expansion is integral to its essence and action. In the case of photons interacting non-locally, the lesson to be drawn is that light is “a single thing with the universe inside” (Zajonc 299). Put differently, light qua light is not part of the space-time (material) cosmos; if it were, it could not bring many other things into common embrace–into a single, unitary cosmos. What makes this view difficult to accept is our inability to see light’s integrative embrace, but such is consistent with the whole meaning of light. By not announcing itself, the circumambient light-sphere goes on endlessly, never to be overtaken by sight and thereby caught within the kind of visual limit that marks the seeing of finite material bodies. Given this, the world may be said to be like a window. A person who values a window solely for its material properties fails to grasp the idea of a window. Windows begin with a few material constituents, but they end, or, more correctly, fail to end, with light.

     

    Physics, of course, gives us the notion of parts or particles of light–photons–but these, as noted earlier, do not behave as local entities in a larger system. As units of pure receptivity, of unbounded openness, photons freely receive material entities. Defined as the smallest parts of light, they nevertheless offer themselves up in the moment of vision as vessels of wide otherness: we do not see photons per se but images of distant objects. Void of self-defining (and self-confining) space-time limits and the visual texture that normally attend such limits, photons possess an expansionary largeness of being that keeps the universe from being restricted to an absolute frame of reference.

     

    Levinas and the Revelation of the Other

     

    Relation is central to the question of otherness. How successfully, if at all, can otherness be related to sameness or ego (the “I”)? Levinas proposes that the other–at least the personal other–always and forever exceeds one’s conception of it; thus, the relation is never secured but ongoing and infinite–a “relation without relation” (Totality 80). With this formula, he offers an alternative to Husserl and Heidegger, both of whom (he feels) “totalize” otherness by drawing it into the economy of the self or sameness. One’s apprehension of the other, Levinas believes, forever trembles on the possibility of novelty, owing to its irreconcilable strangeness and brimming autonomy. Moreover, light enables such apprehension by its singular ability to yield ontological ground to other things:

     

    Light makes possible… this enveloping of the exterior by the inward, which is the very structure of the cogito and of sense. Thought is always clarity or the dawning of a light. The miracle of light is the essence of thought: due to the light an object, while coming from without, is already ours in the horizon which precedes it; it comes from an exterior already apprehended and comes into being as though it came from us, as though commanded by our freedom. (Existence 48)

     

    Levinas seems to acknowledge light’s bi-directionality, its ability to make other things present while absenting itself in the clarity of the moment. Further, light “comes from an exterior already apprehended,” so that it seems to arise from within. Already “there” before we make the here/there distinction, light seems “here” as well.

     

    While light’s ambiguity erodes the authority of familiar space and time intervals, it also undermines our ability to speak clearly about its nature. David Michael Levin states that Levinas’s view of light and vision is “quite complicated” owing to an ambivalent characterization (250). Often Levinas describes light as imperialistic and totalizing: its expansiveness overtakes the world and thereby subjects it to objective knowing. What’s more, that kind of knowing engenders a self-satisfaction that keeps one from trying to see beyond the expanse marked out by light:

     

    To see is always to see on the horizon. The vision that apprehends on the horizon does not encounter a being out of what is beyond all being. Vision is a forgetting of the there is [il y a] because of the essential satisfaction, the agreeableness [agrément] of sensibility, enjoyment, contentment with the finite without concern for the infinite. (qtd. in Levin 249)

     

    Interpreted thusly, light acts to delimit and finitize human experience. Yet Levinas also recognized that seeing by lightinvolves an immediacy, a closeness without interval, that runs counter to the finite, interval-laden vision that we see:

     

    Sight is, to be sure, an openness and a consciousness, and all sensibility, opening as a consciousness, is called vision; but even in its subordination to cognition sight [still] maintains contact and proximity. The visible caresses the eye. One sees and hears like one touches. (Collected 118)

     

    This characterization calls forth light’s generosity, its graciousness in revoking the interval so that visible images may caress the eye. Here light’s infinite aspect emerges as the finite intervals that inform the seeing experience are invisibly overcome. At issue is the uncanniness of light as it put us in touch with distant, seeming untouchable entities. That touching bespeaks integrative embrace, welcoming, rather than objective knowing, borne of separating intervals.

     

    For Levinas, the other is not seen at a distance; rather, its eruptive immediacy or hereness radically dislocates the viewer by revoking ego-protective intervals. At this point, “vision turn[s] back into non-vision, into… the refutation of vision within sight’s center, into that of which vision… is but a forgetfulness and re-presentation” (Levinas, Outside 115). Something occurs to reverse the apparent geometry of the world that affords us survey of distant objects: intervals fall away and otherness punctures the pretense of the self as an aloof, objective agent.

     

    Once more, light’s bi-directionality emerges: light gives us the visible expanse through an invisible merging of perceiver and perceived. Sappho wrote:

     

    Thou, Hesper, bringest homeward all
    That radiant dawn sped far and wide,
    The sheep to fold, the goat to stall,
    The children to their mother’s side. (57)

     

    Sunset gathers together what sunrise scatters abroad, and the evening star, hinting at the imminent collapse of light’s expanse, prepares us to see the world “feelingly,” as Shakespeare’s Gloucester put it after losing his eyesight (King Lear, IV.vi). More prosaically, light simultaneously gives us expansive spatio-temporal visibility and takes it back by its own invisible action. When experienced, that taking-back is Levinas’s revelation of the other: empathy borne of light’s invisible coupling eclipses the wide visual experience with its pretense of dispassion borne of separating intervals.

     

    In his preface to Totality and Infinity, Levinas wrote that “this book will present subjectivity as welcoming the Other, as hospitality; in it the idea of infinity is consummated” (27). Infinity for Levinas is that which cannot be overtaken by thought or even (Heideggerian) Being. It is, on the one hand, outside Being, but on the other, intrusive of Being: it possesses an experiential abruptness that contradicts the thought that it is infinitely distant. Thus, infinity entails the collapse of separating intervals and the consequent integration of self and other. As noted earlier, light effects such integration by its indifference to space-time intervals, which indifference brings us forward as participants unable to command light as we command lighted things. Furthermore, infinity is found in that indifference–in light’s non-local action whereby visibly separated objects are brought into timeless, spaceless conjunction. So, for both Levinas and Einstein infinity is never consummated in intervals–perhaps least so in those that seem to stretch off endlessly. It is instead consummated in proximity, contact, and integration.

     

    One may specify a point at which physical light merges into otherness by attending to a fundamental difficulty that would seem to foreclose any apprehension of the latter: how does the other bridge into our experience when its very saliency is strangeness and apartness? Would not an absolute other lie beyond both comprehension and experience? Any answer to this question inevitably seeks for a way to make “the infinite distance of the Stranger” traversable, the end-result being a collapse of the normally distinct categories of finiteness and infinity–though, for Levinas, not a collapse of the other into the familiarity of sameness. For those dubious of this “self-challenging double movement” (Davis 38), light, particularly as it is rendered by modern physics, offers a striking retort. Nowhere are infinity and finiteness more mutually implicated. When the finite velocity of light is found to be incommensurable with the finite space-time metric of the material world, infinity suggests itself, and this suggestion becomes more pronounced as the inquiry ensues. The picture that emerges points back to the question of otherness with its concern for an underlying metric to mediate the relation between the ego and the other.

     

    In the case of light, there is no underlying metric. When Einstein dismissed the luminiferous (light-bearing) ether, he freed light from the universal substratum that putatively supported its motion through space and thereby made its behavior intelligible in terms of relation. Absent that substratum, the mind naturally reaches for something–some other constancy–to set light’s motion in relation to. But by making the motion itself constant (immune to variant readings), Einstein turned light into a completely auto-referential phenomenon: it is its own metric and one that cannot be coordinated with or related to the space-time metric of the material world. Despite that, light opens the world to view, thereby affording us vision of something other than itself.

     

    A similar dynamic seems to inform Levinas’s outlook. Not scaled into an underlying metric that interconnects all entities, the other has an integrity, a metric, of its own. It is kath’auto, self-existing and self-expressing, a fact that allows it to exceed, as if by a never-overtaken constancy, the ideas one musters up to understand it. Like the speed of light, its own value cannot be assimilated into a relation between object and observer. The other transcends objectifying relation and is therefore unrealizable as a determinate phenomenon.

     

    For Levinas, this irreducibility carries over into the ethical sphere. More accurately, there it begins as the shock of otherness “opens humanity” (Levinas, Totality 50) by signaling a shared world of implied moral responsibility. Thus, ethics is “first philosophy”: when the other ruptures (Heideggerian) Being, that intrusive event calls us out of ontological self-enclosure (the self-absorbing need to fashion the world in our own image) into unending moral concern. Indeed, since we cannot subsume otherness into our own being, our moral obligation to it is never fully discharged. We lag behind it, unable to close the distance either ethically or conceptually on the other.

     

    In this respect, the other bears a light-like relation to the self: it erupts into our experience, but we cannot recover that eruption as understanding. In the case of light, we cannot reduce it to the familiar and seemingly universal terms of space and time. Similarly, the other comes to us but registers an alien economy that cannot be scaled into our own. Incommensurability thus fosters the polar extremes of immediate contact and infinite separation with no intermediate commonality to bring the two into reconciliation. Moreover, this breach between the two, this openness that freely receives the other and that cannot be overtaken by sight or reason, is the origin of seeing. “Ethics is an optics,” wrote Levinas, albeit “bereft of the synoptic and totalizing” images that accompany visual experience (Totality 23). Those images come after the ethical awakening and, being derivative, have no authority over it.

     

    Inasmuch as light enables apprehension of the other, we should not assume separate, though analogous, processes. Light reveals otherness, throws it so cleanly and seamlessly into our experience as to cover or re-veil its own action. That revelation, I submit, is the basis for the infinite though traversable distance between the same and the other: light, in one stroke, gives and takes away the distance; it functions simultaneously as a principle of separation and of unification. It gives us expanse, and thereby a sense of apartness, but only by coupling us to things across space-time intervals. That coupling is immediate (unmediated), not actually a passage across space-time but a nullification of the same owing to light’s autonomy from the space-time regime. Thereby the hegemonic frame of everyday reality is broken so that infinity replaces totality. The world, normally hedged-in and fully complete by its very being, undergoes renewal as openness and un-self-containment.

     

    In sum, the otherness or strangeness of light is bound up in its sublime capacity to announce other things visibly while itself remaining hidden from view. That hiddenness, moreover, is an openness or clarity that fosters the seeing, knowing experience. After describing how photons circumvent space and time in physical experiments, John Wheeler proposes that each photon constitutes “an elementary act of creation” when it finally strikes the human eye or some other instrument of detection. He then asks: “For a process of creation that can and does operate anywhere, that reveals itself and yet hides itself, what could one have dreamed up out of pure imagination more magic–and fitting–than this?” (“Law” 189). We could not have dreamed up the non-local photons that constitute light, for they are the means by which we see, know, and imagine other things.

     

    Notes

     

    1. James J. Gibson writes: “What about the sensation of being dazzled by looking at the sun, or the sensation of glare that one gets from looking at glossy surfaces that reflect an intense source? Are these not sensations of light as such, and do we not then see pure physical energy? Even in this case, I would argue that the answer is no; we are perceiving a state of the eye akin to pain, arising from excessive stimulation. We perceive a fact about the body as distinguished from a fact about the world, the fact of overstimulation but not the light that caused it. And the experiencing of facts about the body is not the basis of experiencing facts about the world” (55).

     

    2. As noted above, the earth’s blue airy brightness arises from the scattering of sunlight by atmospheric particles. Without the atmosphere, the sun would be encompassed by darkness (as it is when seen from the moon, which has no atmosphere). Faint starlight does little to illuminate the atmosphere, and so we see it as being almost completely coincidental with its physical origins.

     

    3. P. W. Bridgman writes: “The most elementary examination of what light means in terms of direct experience shows that we never experience light itself, but our experience deals only with things lighted. This fundamental fact is never modified by the most complicated or refined physical experiments that have ever been devised; from the point of view of operations, light means nothing more than things lighted” (151). Jonathan Powers writes: “When we see an object we see patches of colour, of light and shade. We do not see a luminescent stream flooding into our eyes. The ‘light’ we postulate to account for the way we see ‘external objects’ is not given in experience; it is inferred from it” (4).

     

    4. Discussing our inability to visualize atomic phenomena adequately, Norwood Russell Hanson insists that “electrons could not be other than unpicturable. The impossibility of visualizing ultimate matter is an essential feature of atomic explanation.” This is because “what requires explanation cannot itself figure in the explanation” (119-20). I thank Dennis Rasmussen for bringing Hanson’s argument to my attention.

     

    5. John Wheeler writes that “light and influences propagated at the speed of light make zero-interval linkages between events near and far” (Journey 43). This remarkable statement emerges from the role light plays in a space-time setting, wherein light speed is defined as an upper limit for the transmission of signals between distant events. Whereas events separated by space-like or time-like intervals are truly distant from each other, those connected by light-like intervals (i.e., connected by light rays) are not spatially or temporally separated. This follows from the absolute constancy of the speed of light.

    Works Cited

     

    • Ballew, Lynne. Straight and Circular: A Study of Imagery in Greek Philosophy. Assen, Netherlands: Van Gorcum, 1979.
    • Blumenberg, Hans. “Light as a Metaphor for Truth.” Modernity and the Hegemony of Vision. Ed. David Michael Levin. Berkeley: U of California P, 1993.
    • Bondi, Hermann. Relativity and Common Sense: A New Approach to Einstein. Garden City, NY: Anchor Books, 1964.
    • Bridgman, P. W. The Logic of Modern Physics. New York: The Macmillan Company, 1955.
    • Cantor, Geoffrey. “Light and Enlightenment: An Exploration of Mid-Eighteenth-Century Modes of Discourse.” The Discourse of Light from the Middle Ages to the Enlightenment. Los Angeles: U of California P, 1985.
    • Chiao, Raymond Y., Paul G. Kwiat, and Aephraim M. Steinberg. “Faster than Light?” Scientific American 269.2 (1993): 52-60.
    • Davis, Colin. Levinas: An Introduction. Cambridge: Polity Press, 1996.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Writing and Difference. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1978.
    • Einstein, Albert. “On the Electrodynamics of Moving Bodies.” 1905. Albert Einstein’s Special Theory of Relativity: Emergence (1905) and Early Interpretation, 1905-1911. By Arthur Miller. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1981.
    • Feyerabend, Paul. Against Method: Outline of an Anarchistic Theory of Knowledge. London: Verso, 1985.
    • Gibson, James J. The Ecological Approach to Visual Perception. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company, 1979.
    • Haisch, Bernhard. “Brilliant Disguise: Light, Matter, and the Zero-Point Field.” Science & Spirit 10.3 (Sept./Oct. 1999): 30-31.
    • Hanson, Norwood Russell. Patterns of Discovery: An Inquiry into the Conceptual Foundations of Science. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1965.
    • Harré, Ron. The Philosophies of Science: An Introductory Survey. London: Oxford UP, 1972.
    • Jay, Martin. Downcast Eyes: The Denigration of Vision in Twentieth-Century French Thought. Berkeley: U of California P, 1993.
    • Kirk, G. S., J. E. Raven, and M. Schofield. The Presocratic Philosophers. 2nd ed. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1983.
    • Levin, David Michael. The Philosopher’s Gaze: Modernity in the Shadows of Enlightenment. Berkeley: U of California P, 1999.
    • Levinas, Emmanuel. Collected Philosophical Papers. Trans. Alphonso Lingis. Dordrecht: Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, 1987.
    • —. Existence and Existents. Trans. Alphonso Lingis. Boston: Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1978.
    • —. Outside the Subject. Trans. Michael B. Smith. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1994.
    • —. Totality and Infinity: An Essay on Exteriority. Trans. Alphonso Lingis. Pittsburgh: Duquesne UP, 1969.
    • Locke, John. An Essay Concerning Human Understanding. 1690. Great Books of the Western World. Vol. 35. Ed. R.M. Hutchins. Chicago: William Benton, 1952. 83-395.
    • Plato. The Republic. Great Dialogues of Plato. Trans. W. H. D. Rouse. New York: Mentor, 1984.
    • Powers, Jonathan. Philosophy and the New Physics. New York: Methuen, 1982.
    • Reed, Edward S. James J. Gibson and the Psychology of Perception. New Haven: Yale UP, 1988.
    • Ronchi, Vasco. Optics: The Science of Vision. Trans. Edward Rosen. New York: New York UP, 1957.
    • Sappho. The Songs of Sappho. Mount Vernon, NY: Peter Pauper Press, 1966.
    • Schumacher, John A. Human Posture: The Nature of Inquiry. Albany, NY: SUNY Press, 1989.
    • Toulmin, Stephen. The Philosophy of Science: An Introduction. New York: Harper & Row, 1960.
    • Vasseleu, Cathryn. Textures of Light: Vision and Touch in Irigaray, Levinas, and Merleau-Ponty. New York: Routledge, 1998.
    • Wheeler, John A. A Journey into Gravity and Spacetime. New York: Scientific American Library, 1990.
    • —. “Law Without Law.” Quantum Theory and Measurement. Ed. John A. Wheeler and Wojciech Hubert Zurek. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1983. 182-213.
    • Zajonc, Arthur. Catching the Light: The Entwined History of Light and Mind. New York: Oxford UP, 1993.

     

  • Notices

     

     

     

    12.2
    January, 2002
    Every issue of Postmodern Culturecarries notices of events, calls for papers, and other announcements, free of charge. Advertisements will also be published on an exchange basis. If you respond to one of the ads or announcements below, please mention that you saw the notice in PMC.

     


    Publication Announcements

    • Organdi Quarterly
    • Scenes from Postmodern Life
    • Cryptomimesis
    • Pixelpapers 18

    Conferences, Calls for Papers, Invitations to Submit

    • Journal of Media Economics
    • Modernist Studies Association 4
    • NECSI–International Conference on Complex Systems
    • University of South Carolina 5th Annual Comparative Literature Conference

    General Announcements

    • Ropes Lecture Series
    • Crompton-Noll Awards

     

  • They’re Here, They’re Everywhere

    Andreas Kitzmann

    Institute for Culture and Communication
    University of Karlstad, Sweden
    andreas.kitzmann@kau.se

     

    Review of: Jeffrey Sconce, Haunted Media: Electronic Presence from Telegraphy to Television. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 2000.

     

    Jeffrey Sconce’s Haunted Media confirms a familiar suspicion. There is something lurking within the electronic devices that surround us: something more than just organized electrical impulses, something just beyond the range of our perception, something we can feel, hear, see, and even speak to.

     

    Sconce’s thesis is relatively straightforward. Telecommunications technology is often perceived as possessing some strange sort of magic, some indescribable “presence” that turns it into a potent incubator for a host of metaphysical, philosophical, or spiritual narratives and fantasies. Such a notion is, as Sconce argues, a social construct that is as much a product of historical and cultural contexts as it is of the sometimes “uncanny” characteristics of the technology itself. The key aim of Haunted Media is to perform what Sconce terms a cultural history of electronic presence in an effort to better understand the fantasies and fictions with which it has become associated. In this respect Sconce is in familiar company. Works by authors such as Sadie Plant, Margaret Wertheim, and Erik Davis also attempt to locate present trends in telecommunications technology within a larger framework of the history of spirituality and superstition. Yet where Sconce’s approach is markedly different is in the precision of his historical comparison. Haunted Media does not reach back to the writings of Hermes Trismegistus or the rituals of medieval monks in an effort to probe our cultural fantasies about technology. Instead, he focuses on the relatively short period between the inception of the telegraph and contemporary digital technology, and he limits his discussion to the specific narratives, rituals, and conceptions generated by the electronic age. His narrative is thus much less grand than those of similar historians–a characteristic that, as I shall discuss below, makes Haunted Media a unique and important work.

     

    Sconce is driven by a nagging question: “why after 150 years of electronic communication, do we still so often ascribe mystical powers to what are ultimately very material technologies?” (6). In responding to such a question, Sconce takes the reader through a remarkable and amusing set of historical materials. The telegraph, the radio, the television, and the computer have all generated a host of cultural fantasies, which, as Sconce documents, are as consistent as they are strange. Yet such consistency should not be taken as a kind of “transcendent essence” or grand narrative of communications technology, but rather as “the product of a series of historically specific intersections of technological, industrial and cultural practices” (199). Haunted Media is thus organized around the exploration of such intersections, beginning with the primitive pulses of the first telegraph and ending with current developments in digital communications technology.

     

    For Sconce there are “three recurring fictions or stories” and “five distinct moments in the popular history of electronic presence” that need to be considered (8). The first of these stories is about disembodiment that allows the communicating subject “the ability, real or imagined, to leave the body and transport his or her consciousness to a distant destination” (9).The second and closely related fiction tells of a sovereign electronic world that is somehow beyond the material realm that we mortals live in. A cast of androids and cyborgs inhabits the third fiction, which addresses the anthropomorphizing of media technology. These three stories, Sconce asserts, have been told countless times during the last 150 years. Yet, as Sconce is quick to emphasize, it is the discontinuities that matter more than the supposed similarities. “Tales of paranormal media are important, then, not as timeless expressions of some undying electronic superstition but as a permeable language in which to express a culture’s changing social relationship to a historical sequence of technologies” (10).

     

    Such a “permeable language” is at work in the five “moments” that Sconce details in his book’s five chapters. The first of these moments revolves around the development of the telegraph during the nineteenth century and the manner in which it is closely associated with the rise and methods of the Spiritualist movement. Indeed, for Sconce the telegraph spawned the “media age’s first electronic elsewhere” and, as such, forms the basis for many contemporary narratives of telecommunications technology (57). For this reason there is much to be gained by a closer examination of the expectations and fantasies engendered by the telegraph. Of the more important fantasies associated with the telegraph is the notion that the mind and the body can be split and that the telegraph can be employed to enact or temporarily reverse such a separation. Consequently, the telegraph served as a convenient metaphor (and sometimes a means) for Spiritualists to invoke in their explorations of the supernatural. As in the rest of the book, it is Sconce’s descriptions and reconstructions of historical material that make this book so satisfying. His well-chosen examples not only add to the force of his arguments but also make for good reading–no mean feat when it comes to the thick prose common in much cultural theory.

     

    Equally central to this first chapter are the connections drawn between Spiritualism, technology, and the rights of women. As has been well documented in other works, notably Ann Braude’s Radical Spiritualism and Women’s Rights in Nineteenth-Century America, there is a close alignment between the Spiritualist movement and the rise of women’s rights. Sconce develops this argument further by inserting technology into the mix. The telegraph’s apparent ability to access an “electronic elsewhere” corresponded to the then general view that women are more sensitive creatures and thus more apt to access the realms that lie just beyond the edges of the rational, observable world. In this way the telegraph, and electricity itself, more generally, served as convenient metaphors for female Spiritualists. On the one hand the telegraph represented the verifiable world of rational science and technology, but on the other it served as a powerful testament to the “reality” of disembodied being. Female Spiritualists, Sconce argues, made good use of this dualism and gained a measure of respect and social status as a result. However, their empowerment was only temporary since the discourses of science and psychoanalysis eventually categorized the traits of female spiritualism as “deviations” and thus in need of treatment and correction.

     

    The chapter “The Voice from the Void” details the so-called second moment in Sconce’s cultural history. After the telegraph, the wireless radio represents the next major breakthrough in the development of communications technology. Sconce’s focus here is on what he terms the “paradox of the wireless” (62). On the one hand, the wireless promised to bring the whole globe together via its unprecedented ability to offer instant communication across great distances. Yet, at the same time, it also threatened to increase social isolation and alienation by virtue of the fact that the boundaries of space, nation, and body were no longer the constants they once appeared to be. Consequently, the cultural fantasies and stories associated with the wireless are a mix of utopian visions and anxious melancholy. One consistent metaphor used to represent the wireless is the etheric ocean that, while offering great opportunities for exploration, was also threatening in the sense that its sheer size dwarfed the relevance and agency of any one individual. Such anxiety finds its representation in many of the popular short stories and novels written during the early 1920s. In such stories, the wireless ether is frequently inhabited by the ghosts of the dead who, in one way or another, manage to contact the living via the wireless radio set. Such scenarios were not confined to fiction. Sconce also documents various attempts at “mental radio,” in which the wireless was seriously employed as a medium of telepathy (75). Less extreme was the popular activity of “DX fishing,” where thousands of amateur radio enthusiasts would relentlessly scour the as yet unregulated airwaves in search of distant voices–either from this world or the next (65). Again, the discursive backdrop here is a mix of hope and pessimism, which for Sconce represents one of the major strains of the modern condition and, as such, is deeply connected to specific historical and cultural contexts.

     

    In the third moment, as detailed in the chapter “Alien Ether,” the wireless makes the transition from an unregulated ocean of communication to the structured broadcast model still in use today. The central aim of this chapter is to examine “the transformation in the popular perception of electronic presence from one of melancholy mystery to one of escalating alienation” (94). For Sconce, a good part of this mounting alienation can be explained by an often unarticulated resistance to the increasing standardization of the radio medium. The bulk of the apparent resistance was found not in the work of media activists but in the fictionalized serials and short stories of pulp science fiction. Thus, Sconce recounts a number of bizarre and absurd tales of alien invasion that he sees as representing, in part, “the social struggle over determining radio’s purpose and future” (95). Sconce’s argument is insightful here in the sense that it highlights the extent to which social and cultural unease often finds its initial representation in popular fantasies and stories. This unease is most potently represented in H. G. Wells’s War of the Worlds, which Sconce describes as “the most famous public lesson in an uncomfortable political reality: the collapse of the media is by definition a collapse of the social” (116). Central to the debates that followed the initial broadcast was the question of faith–faith in the radio (and thus media) as a system of belief. Once disrupted, additional walls began to tumble. Another legacy of the War of the Worlds is, of course, the familiar intertwining of aliens, fascism, and conspiracy within the popular imagination.

     

    The chapter “Static and Stasis” encompasses the fourth moment in Sconce’s chronology, with the development of television being the prime area of focus. Like earlier communications media, television generated its own peculiar brand of public fantasies and obsessions. Most prevalent is the notion that television seemed capable of generating autonomous spirit worlds, meaning that ghosts did not speak through television but seemed to live inside of them (127). Television thus becomes a portal into a dynamic and perpetual presence that is continuously live and available. Television-land is a real place that not only brings a version of the world into our living rooms, but as Sconce explores more deeply within his final chapter, is also capable of effectively simulating and replacing reality itself. As with previous media forms, the promises and fantasies of television created a range of specific anxieties and concerns. Sconce again turns to popular culture to identify and explore these concerns, with programs such as the Twilight Zone and the Outer Limits serving as prime examples. Characterizing these and many other programs, films, and fictions is a form of self-reflexivity that highlights the potentially dangerous relationship that audiences could have with television. Television in this sense takes on almost narcotic characteristics, and as such is generally addictive and ultimately self-destructive.

     

    The fifth and final moment, discussed in the chapter “Simulation and Psychosis,” continues with the analysis of television but concludes with speculations on the impact of digital communications technology. As presented in the previous chapter, the magic of television is derived mainly from its ability to generate autonomous worlds–an ability that today has developed into an increasingly expanding and all-encompassing electronic universe. Television, as Sconce represents it, has effectively colonized the majority of private and public life–at least in North America–by perfecting the illusion that the diegetic time of any given television series or broadcast is aligned with that of the viewer. To watch television is thus to tune into the live and the real. Although Sconce does not discuss this (and this is perhaps an oversight on his part), the recent trend of Reality TV comes to mind. If anything captures the “ideology of liveness” and the illusions of immediacy and simulation, it is a program such as Big Brother or Temptation Island.

     

    In addition to exploring the “television universe” by way of selective examples from the annals of broadcast television, Sconce also develops the potentially contentious idea that certain varieties of postmodern theory are little more than specialized (and “jargonized”) incarnations of popular fictions. Thus, sophisticated ruminations by the likes of Sadie Plant, Donna Haraway, or Arthur Kroker can be seen as re-articulating fantasies that have long been in the public arena. The various tales of the ’50s and ’60s, for example, demonstrate that popular culture was equally engaged with the questions of contemporary electronic media that occupied the postmodern criticism of the ’70s and ’80s. Such a proposal is perhaps troubling to critics who are heavily invested in either the promise or perils of digital technology. As Sconce asks within the final few pages of his book, perhaps virtuality is more a construct of the imagination than of technology. Perhaps the concept of cyberspace itself is a “consensual hallucination” (204). Troubling for Sconce is the observation that many theoretical treatments of digital communications technology tend to treat subjectivity, identity, and fantasy as equivalent and interchangeable terms (208). Such naiveté is not only academically dubious–it is little more than a fantastic folk tale about the ghosts and their machines.

     

    Haunted Media is an important addition to the cultural history of communications and media technology. Sconce’s work vividly captures the effect of communications technology on the popular imagination in a manner that distinguishes it from comparative projects such as those of Wertheim, Davis, and Plant. What I find particularly notable is Sconce’s resistance to the grand narrative, which one could argue is central to works such as Wertheim’s The Pearly Gates of Cyberspace or Davis’s Techgnosis. Although attempting to identify a number of common threads that link various historical moments to one another, Sconce repeatedly stresses that discontinuity is more likely than continuity, and that any comparisons between different eras must always be grounded within the particularities of their time. It is perhaps for this reason that Sconce has decided to limit his analysis to the last 150 years rather than attempting to identify discursive threads that, in the case of Plant’s Zeroes + Ones, reach as far back as the dawn of humankind. The comparatively limited range of the historical period under analysis provides a welcome measure of specificity. As well, Sconce’s decision to mine the depths of popular culture as a means to identify his “stories” and “moments” provides the added element of familiarity. Unlike the medieval monasteries to which Wertheim links contemporary discourses of cyberspace, Sconce traces bad science fiction plots and bizarre antics in the world’s media-scape, plots and antics that continue to inhabit popular imagination and therefore represent a part of ongoing, everyday reality.

     

    Accordingly, Sconce is less reliant on selected and fanciful revisions of the past than authors who craft more mythic narratives of what one may term the metaphysics of media technology. Indeed, given the nature of Sconce’s subject matter, the grounded quality of his work is even more noteworthy. Sconce manages to engage with his material in a manner that balances his obvious enthusiasm with just the right amount of critical distance, creative license, and restrained cynicism. That he kept himself from falling into a well of New Age rumination is indeed something to be thankful for. This factor in itself will help sustain the book’s critical longevity and keep it from being yet another rhetorical ghost collecting dust in the world’s libraries.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Braude, Ann. Radical Spiritualism and Women’s Rights in Nineteenth-Century America. Boston: Beacon Press, 1989.
    • Davis, Erik. Techgnosis: Myth, Magic, Mysticism in the Age of Information. New York: Harmony Books, 1998.
    • Plant, Sadie. Zereos + Ones: Digital Women + The New Technoculture. New York: Doubleday, 1997.
    • Wertheim, Margaret. The Pearly Gates of Cyberspace: A History of Space from Dante to the Internet. New York: Norton, 1999.

     

  • Trekking Time with Serres

    Niran Abbas

    Department of Digital Media
    Trinity and All Saints College, University of Leeds
    niranabbas@hotmail.com

     

    Review of: Maria Assad, Reading with Michel Serres: An Encounter with Time. SUNY Press, 1999.

     

    Michel Serres is one of the few philosophers who can genuinely lay claim to the title of “specialist generalist” (Dale and Adamson). He began his adult life in the merchant navy, going on to study physics and mathematics. He wrote his first book on Leibnitz, followed by the Hermes series which is comprised of five volumes intersecting literature, science, and philosophy, and later, studies on Emile Zola, Jules Verne, Lucretius, the history of Rome, the origins of geometry, and the future of education. In all he has published more than twenty-five books in the last thirty years, about five of which have been translated into English. At present he is Professor in History of Science at the Sorbonne and Professor in the Department of French and Italian at Stanford University.

     

    Michel Serres’s numerous books provide a multidisciplinary approach that brings together the study of literature, philosophy, ecology, poetry, and modern scientific thought. He has been envisioned by many as a voyager between the arts and the sciences, an “enigmatic ventriloquist, at once so close and so absent” (Delcò 229), a thinker, as theorist and critic Maria Assad states, who “invents” through translation, communication, and metaphor. Reading Serres can be a “reading challenge” (9). After all, Serres produces books made of other books that, he claims, have nothing to do with invention or creativity. In Serres’s vision, humans belong to the world in a simple, fundamental sense; ultimately, he insists, “nothing distinguishes me ontologically from a crystal, a plant, an animal” (Hermes 83). So how and why can we read him in this context? While these proclamations clearly serve a rhetorical function, they also bring to the surface a strong undercurrent of Serres’s thought: a desire to efface the edge of difference between language and representation, to fuse knowledge and being.

     

    “In science,” Werner Heisenberg states, “the object of research is no longer nature in itself but rather nature exposed to man’s questioning, and to this extent man here also meets himself” (“Representation” 131). As Norbert Wiener explains in his book Cybernetics, this development devastated the positivistic tendencies of “that still quasi-Newtonian world of Gibbs” (92). It replaced that semi-classical view of time and order “by one in which time… can in no way be reduced to an assembly of deterministic threads of development.” Or in other words, “There is no set of observations conceivable which can give us enough information about the past of a system to give us complete information as to its future” (93). According to Serres, human history has been constructing–through religions, mythologies, traditions, and cultures, and above and beyond any individual biological death–what he calls a “collective immortality” in the historical sense of this expression. This construct functions on the basis of two interconnected activities in space and time: efficient operating techniques construct the world; sociocultural technologies construct time. This formula defines our episteme as a dynamical system for which the information of its state is given by the “operative techniques” (of pre-Cartesian and modern natural sciences); its evolution over time (its dynamic), on the other hand, is initiated and nurtured by “the sociocultural technologies” (the human sciences) (Assad 110-11). Assad’s book on time is devoted to what Serres would call a passage between science and literature. “New” knowledge lies in the inbetween, or the passage between fixed points of knowledge. In this challenging context, Reading with Michel Serres is a provocative look at Serres’s use of time in his encyclopaedic narrative using “dynamical” systems theory. The grouping of the chosen texts is intended, as the author states in her introduction, to provide “a global approach to Serres’s thought, so that a progressive development becomes visible, from chaotic multiple to circumstances, to dynamical statues, to a portrait of dynamical cultural systems that create time as an operating factor in their inventive drive” (Assad 5).

     

    The central problem for contemporary philosophy is to relate to one another the varying conceptions of time that are developing in individual disciplines. The different approaches to this task are embedded in the following three basic tendencies that define the contemporary philosophy of time: “unification tendency,” “pluralization tendency,” and “tendency to relativize and historize time” (Sandbothe).

     

    Reading with Serres: An Encounter with Time provides a blueprint of Serres’s work on time dynamics. Its six chapters comprise an assessment of Serres’s works arranged in an overlapping pattern. Time, Assad claims, is no longer thought of as a parameter adding something to a system from the outside, nor is time a purely historical force that Serres argues is the source of inherently violent foundations of our episteme. Formulating a kind of epistemological principle of uncertainty, Paul Ricoeur states that any meditation on time “‘suffers,’ quite simply, from not really being able to think time” (261). This failure is directly related to an intrinsic “hubris that impels our thinking [notre pensée] to posit itself as the master of meaning” (261). In Time and Narrative, Ricouer cautions against the hubris of reason but adds that an outright rejection of reason invites “obscurantism” leading to deceptive cognitive processes engaged in an intellectual free-for-all. “The mystery of time is equivalent to a prohibition directed against language. Rather it gives rise to the exigence to think more and to speak differently” (274). This statement reflects the issues at the center of Serres’s cycle of writings on time. Ricouer’s appeal for a new discourse capable of broaching time in its mysterious working also bears a striking resemblance to Mitchell Feigenbaum’s insistence that insights gained through recent dynamical systems theories “completely change the way to know something” (Assad 164). Both philosopher and mathematical physicist address the same issue–that is, that purely analytical methodology is no longer sufficient or even applicable. Possibilities for a new mode of thinking are forcing themselves upon the philosophical and scientific consciousness.

     

    Serres’s writings, for which Assad’s study attempts to provide a dynamical reading practice, recuperate Ricouer’s dilemma and enlarge its scope. Serres’s overriding premise for the texts discussed is a kind of bracketing of analytical methods. By leaving the straight path of philosophical and scientific inquiry and opting instead for a “visiting” of circumstantial spaces, Serres reinstates a “method” that had been relegated long ago to the fictional, irrational, or emotive-intuitive spheres of perception. The convergence of different vocabularies of time is, from Richard Rorty’s perspective, by no means proof of an intrinsic coincidence between natural and historical time. The transfer of the vocabulary of historical time from the context of human self-description into the realms of the natural world, as well as the mathematically operational implementation of time, illustrate only the historical ability to adopt inner flexibility and contextual feedback even in a highly attuned vocabulary such as that found in physics and mathematics. In Rorty’s view, the different vocabularies that we use for differing purposes and in varying contexts are to be understood as neither convergent in an intrinsic sense, nor as essentially incommensurate in a phenomenological sense. Rather, they are themselves subject to change over time, through which they become related and disjoined in various ways according to the various historical situations that arise.

     

    The radical temporalization of time that is expressed in these deliberations is noted in Robert Musil’s The Man Without Qualities.

     

    The train of events is a train unrolling its rails ahead of itself. The river of time is a river sweeping its banks along with it. The traveller moves about on a solid floor between solid walls; but the floor and the walls are being moved along too, imperceptibly, and yet in very lively fashion, by the movements that his fellow-travellers make. (174)

     

    Assad introduces the concept of unification tendency in the first two chapters by presenting accounts of historical time, the natural clock, and their effects upon “our epistemological conscious, in order to underscore by contrast the other ‘new’ time emerging from beneath the guise of tropes” (10). The protagonists of this unification tendency are convinced that time’s validity is that of being a new Archimedean Point that unifies our everyday experience of the self and the world with our academic theories about nature and man. This point of unification, they contend, has been emphasized time and time again in philosophy (by Bergson, Schelling, and Whitehead, among others), but has been ignored by science and technology.1 It wasn’t until the second half of the twentieth century that a global time concept was developed and mathematically implemented at the interface between the applied and pure sciences within the framework of “self-organization” or “autopoeitic” theories. According to the proponents of the unification tendency, this new conception of time enables the old duality between natural time and historical time to be overcome and resolves the conflict between physical, biological, and philosophical approaches to time that characterized the first half of the twentieth century.

     

    Assad suggests that Serres’s understanding of the linear time of historical consciousness draws upon René Girard’s theory of the mimetic desire that lurks behind the scapegoat mechanism. For Girard, desire for a beloved object (or person) is always the imitation of another’s desire for the same object. The scapegoat as trope is considered both a malevolent and benevolent outsider. “Society is thus founded on an act of violence by exclusion, while history is the chain of repetitive imitations of this act” (Assad 11). Girard sees the formation of the sacred in the linear time of founding exclusions. Serres sees this same juxtaposition of violence and the sacred, but he locates the essence of evil as such at the core of repetitive gestures of exclusion. To overcome evil, Serres proposes an inventive effort: “to achieve this, the linearity of historical time has to be replaced by a new time” (11). The loss of repetition in Serres’s work (inherent in the nonlinearity of chaotic systems) becomes the weapon of inventive thought to combat stasis. Reading with Serres makes frequent reference to nonlinear dynamics, a theory presently at the forefront of emergent conceptualization of time.

     

    The German theoretician of time, Herman Lübbe, observed,

     

    that even the temporal structure of historicality, which according to Heidegger and the hermeneutic theory which followed him, results exclusively from the subject’s relationship to itself, which constitutes meaning, is in reality a structure belonging to all open and dynamic systems which is indifferent to the subject matter. (qtd. in Sandbothe 1)

     

    Lübbe’s convergence theorem can be supported by the deliberations of Ilya Prigogine:

     

    Whatever the future of these ideas, it seems to me that the dialogue between physics and natural philosophy can begin on a new basis. I don’t think that I can exaggerate by stating that the problem of time marks specifically the divorce between physics on one side, psychology and epistemology on the other…. We see that physics is starting to overcome these barriers. (qtd. in Sandbothe 1)

     

    In Assad’s chapter “Time Promised: Reading Genèse” (Genèse is Serre’s meditation on noise), she investigates the transition or mutation of “noise” and the “multiple.” Serres provides a framework for understanding how ordered complexity, information, even meaning, can arise from interaction with disorder. By noise is meant not loud or obnoxious sounds but that which gets mixed up with messages as they are sent. Noise causes loss of information in transmitted messages, but in systems in which message transmission is but a component function, the variety introduced by noise can come to be informative and meaningful in another, emergent context. The “multiple” is a “new object for philosophy” that Serres is “offering to be sounded and perhaps fathomed” by his readers (Serres, Genesis 2); it is an aggregate or “a set undefined by elements or boundaries. Locally, it is not individuated; globally, it is not summed up” (4). These concepts become in Genesis the first metaphoric paradigm in a chain of tropes that Serres continues to weave into a series of epistemological writings providing the model for a new concept of time.

     

    Assad claims that the shift from the French “bruit” to noise (from a clearly modern word to a term more or less effaced by historical time) is symptomatic of a development in Serres’s materialist notion of time. Bruit becomes part of “noise,” which the author revives from the old French where it meant disorderly furor as well as noise. Built into the very concept of noise–as a set of interference phenomena and as the parasite that triples as an abusive guest/a parasitic organism/static noise–is the overriding notion of the excluded middle or third (Assad 18). Genèse, according to Assad, is an attempt to give prime billing to the exclusion, but without its conceptual dominance or accrued power: “Disorder, chaos, and the clamor of human relations have to be discovered, uncovered and accepted as valid fields of contemplation without squeezing them into a straight jacket” (18). The “multiple” is the metaphorical vehicle Serres chooses to guide his reader through chaos, that is, to have her confront the complexity of the most common elements of his world. The metaphoric nature of this iterative process prevents it from becoming a linear progression and assures an open-ended variability.

     

    Assad makes two observations concerning Serres’s vision of time. First, both the static and the “dynamical” are expressed by “stability,” the latter by a “new stability.” Second, the statue as the paradigm of the stagnant static that Serres consistently aligns with death as its telos is contrasted to a turbulent state that is “a median state between a slightly redundant order and pure chaos” (Assad 120). The enigma of time is thus not really resolved. History as a destructive time is described by “noise” deformed into rumor and dull repetition. On the other hand, “noise” of la belle noiseuse promises dissipative possibilities. For Serres, la belle noiseuse is the passage from the pre-phenomenological primal soup to our phenomenological ordered world. She is the processing of all possibilities, not their sum or reservoir. Since she is neither chaos nor order, she is what dynamicists call a “phase transition,” that fuzzy state when a system is at the threshold of a phase change (Paulson 404-416). In Genèse, the static as stagnant redundancy and the dynamical aspect of turbulence are hesitatingly wedded in a statue that turbulently rises and fades from the reader’s grasp: a fluctuation, an oscillating state between the pre-phenomenological and the phenomenon. Phenomenological time, consisting in a dimension of future, past, and present, is explained by Ricoeur as being appropriate only in narrative. And time in the narrative “refiguration” itself becomes comprehensible only up to a point. For Ricoeur, Emmanuel Levinas’s and Michael Theunissen’s time marks the “mystery” in our thought that denies representation in that our existence irrevocably pervades our thinking.

     

    Assad’s chapters “Time Immortal” and “Time Empirical” address Serres’s Détachment and Les cinq sens, a series of fables and an exploration of the five senses. Serres’s philosophy of circumstance shifts from paradigms of fluid mechanics and passages to parasitism and tropes of topological landscapes. Assad provides close readings of the horizontal (transcendent) and vertical (static) planes from Chinese farmers and kite flying to the myth of Orpheus. Time in Les cinq sens is understood as infinitesimal “differentials” that together cannot be totalled up; they are non-integrable. Always inchoate, they are local events we grasp or “suppose” through our senses. Time for Serres percolates rather than flows; it is unpredictable, unmeasurable, and unintegrable.

     

    Far from flowing in laminar and continuous lines, like a well-behaved river under a bridge, upstream to downstream, time descends, turns back on itself, stops, starts, bifurcates ten times, divides and blends, caught up in whirlpools and counter-currents, hesitant, aleatory, uncertain and fluctuating, multiplied into a thousand beds like the Yukon river. Sometimes time passes, sometimes not; but when it passes, it does so as if through a colander… and this filter or percolator supplies the best model for the flow of time. (Serres, “Turner” 15)

     

    According to Serres, “time can be schematised by a crumpling, a multiple, foldable diversity” (Conversations 59). Out of this foldability emerges, then, a related phenomenon: topological time materializes itself in a spatially foldable “nearness.” Serres demonstrates his point through the example of a sketch on a handkerchief:

     

    If you take a handkerchief and spread it out in order to iron it, you can see in it certain fixed distances and proximities. If you sketch a circle in one area, you can mark out nearby points and measure far-off distances. Then take the same handkerchief and crumple it, by putting it in your pocket. Two distant points suddenly are close, even superimposed. If, further, you tear it in certain places, two points that were close can become very distant. This science of nearness and rifts is called topology, while the science of stable and well-defined distances is called metrical geometry…. It is simply the difference between the topology (the handkerchief) is folded, crumpled, shredded) and geometry (the same fabric is ironed out flat)…. As we experience time–as much in our inner sense as externally in nature, as much as le temps of history as le temps of weather–it resembles this crumpled version much more than the flat, overly simplified one. (60)

     

    As a percolating sheet wrapping all circumstances, topological time is thus spatially foldable, hence enfolding a temporal nearness. In Serres’s “timing of space, time sheds its last distinctions, past, present, and future become one” (Assad 9). For Serres, in this sense, the past is, and has never been, out-of-date.2

     

    “Time Dynamical” and “Time Inventive” make use of simulations of nonlinear dynamical models. Statues and Le Tiers-Instruit teem with dense metaphorical strings of apologues that make, at times, for difficult reading. In Statues, Serres makes a mental leap that allows him to examine the statue functioning not as static entity but as a dynamical system.

     

    The statue of Molière’s Commander in the last chapter of Hermès I: La communication is the first figure with which Serres models the full authority of the stable and immutable Law, and against which he pits Dom Juan’s shifty logic and maneuvering. The Commander’s shadow looms large in Serres’s texts on communication where any argument, pointing to stagnation, rigidity, stability, repetition, thesis, unitary, or binary constructs, is ultimately expressed in analogies involving statues or statue-like phenomena. The statue as the incarnation of absolute immobility, or as rigid perfection no longer in need of inventive improvements, haunts the writings of the philosopher of communication. It is the spectre of death, the totality of stability and of absence of variability. It is Serres’s model of evil. At the heart of the most static and stagnant of all his discursive tropes, Serres discovers a complexity and an inventive power where the absence of repetitive instants invites continuous new findings. (Assad 168-9)

     

    The many functions of the statue are presented in the narrative via a series of descriptive portraits of historical/cultural phenomena that trace out dynamical behavior. Assad invites the reader to consider the paradoxical point where Serres’s quest for a true understanding of time, though seemingly farthest away from scientific discourse, parallels the most recent scientific and mathematical findings concerning nonlinear dynamical systems.

     

    Serres’s Le Tiers-Instruit is the blueprint of a dissipative dynamical system couched in a theatrical setting of a Harlequin-prologue. The Harlequin is Serres’s epistemological model for a strange attractor. On a computer screen the strange attractor can be traced out as a basin toward which the trajectory of a dynamical system’s orbit converges while looping erogodically through its phase-space. In the text, this looping is discursively portrayed by the harlequinesque métis, a chaotic body or half-breed who goes on halving himself like a Cantor set or a Koch curve (“middle third”), which links to Serres’s neologism of the “middle-instructed.”3 The third element with Serres is neither “this nor that”; it is both and neither. According to Serres, “the real passage occurs in the middle” (Troubadour 5). Whether Serres talks about the left-handed child (himself) taught to write like a right-handed child, or the swimmer who arrives at the middle of a stream where he enters a space that is neutral in distance to both shorelines, all are harlequinseque in their dilemma; they arrive at a point where commonly accepted definitions fail, where all directions and meanings are equally valid (Troubadour 7). To learn to live or pass in this “middle-ground” is what Serres calls an “apprenticeship for the making of the third.”

     

    Assad’s final chapter, “Time and Earth,” deals with The Natural Contract, revealing a relationship between time as a “natural” phenomenon and the question of right as an expression of the human contractual conscious. Serres’s notion of the natural contract grows out of his work on Lucretius and Epicurean philosophy, which opens a passage between social contract and natural contract. The appeal of the Lucretian model for Serres clearly stems from its positing an essential freedom at its base. Assad’s project is to present dynamical time in the most applicable and concrete form we are capable of understanding today, namely the social contract, sealing a union between the human subject and the physical object. It puts into a proposal with practical applications for the future what Serres has gleaned from an ancient fabled setting called “Ulysses’ circum-navigations,” a nonlinear dynamical system that invents new knowledge at every turn, without closure. We call it “epic” and ignore the fact that what we so designate is the story of a new time (Serres, Les cinq 290). In The Natural Contract, Serres searches out a “strong and simple science [that] will tell me the moment of denouement, of being stripped bare and untied, the moment of true casting off… from this earth toward the void” (Natural 115).

     

    The inner reflexivity in the modern apprehension of time is reminiscent of Kant and Heidegger. Bruno Latour, Serres’s conversation partner in Conversations on Science, Culture, and Time (1995), presses him on the issue of the use of time in his writings. Latour sees in the twisting of time one of the reasons for the intellectual jarring experienced by readers who judge Serres’s writings to be obscure and difficult to follow: “This problem of time is the greatest source of incomprehension, in my opinion” (Serres, Conversations 48). But Serres points out that in his writings the question is not one of playing modernity against a past that has been used and is done with. In other words, his juxtaposing of text, authors, and myths into one time frame is not a juxtaposing of “times” expressed as past, present, and future, all lumped together. “I want to be able to understand time and, in particular, a self-same time” (46). To illustrate the nature of his contemporaneity that seems to situate him outside of time, Serres points once again to Lucretius who,

     

    in his own time, really was already thinking in terms of flux, turbulence, and chaos, and, second, that through this, he is part of our era, which is rethinking similar problems. I must change time frames and no longer use the one that history uses. (47)

     

    Reading with Serres provides a metaphoric chain forming feedback mechanisms by which an insight once attained becomes a metaphoric input for the next, comprising a network of relations producing an interdisciplinary interface. Time is the symptom of symptoms:

     

    What’s time exactly? One form of time for instance, is a clock time which is reversible. But I am also in danger of dying because of aging. This is a second form of time; the time of weakness, the time of old age, the time of death. This is exactly what constitutes thermodynamic time, the time of entropy. But this time is irreversible because I am going to death and not to rebirth. But then I have granddaughters and they are beautiful, they are far more beautiful then me! This is also irreversible but it is the time of Darwin. That is, although I am going down to death, the time of Darwin is coming up to evolution. So you have three times, all very different: reversible, irreversible minus and irreversible plus. And what is time? It is the combination of these three. My metaphorical style is a combination of three results of scientific thought. And what is this combination? I don’t know exactly, it is not scientific thought, it is metaphysical. Also with chaos theory a new theory of time comes about: time is indeterministic to the future. So I must think about time with the instructions of astrononomy, mechanics, thermodynamics biology, chaos theory and so on. I must study these specialities in order to have a metaphysics of time. There is not an opposition between scientific thought and the metaphysical world. (Dale & Adamson)

     

    Michel Serres shows that culture circulates through science no less than science circulates through culture. The heart that keeps this circulatory system flowing is narrative–narratives about culture, narratives within culture, narratives about science, narratives within science (Hayles 21). Reading with Michel Serres/An Encounter with Time is a provocative study of Michel Serres’s work for both Serreseans and those new to his work. At a time where the threat of disciplinary meltdown seems increasingly to produce a retreat to narrow specialization, it is rare to encounter work that genuinely dares to think globally, with all the problems that entails. As Steven Brown states, “Serres’ work dares.”

     

    Notes

     

    1. In an interview with Catherine Dale and Gregory Adamson, Serres discusses the importance of Whitehead and Bergson in his work on time and metaphysics. See <http://www.thepander.co.nz/culture/mserres6.php>

     

    2. See Ming-Qian Ma’s “The Past Is No Longer Out-of-Date” (4). The author mentions in “Notes” that the quote in the title is taken from Serres’s and Latour’s Conversations (48).

     

    3. The Koch Curve is an example of a fractal created by a replacement rule. Such fractals begin with a simple image. In the case of the Koch curve and its variants, this image is a straight line. This image is then changed to something else, based on the replacement rule. The new image contains elements that correspond to elements in the original image. The replacement rule is then applied to these portions of the image, creating a more detailed picture. This process continues indefinitely, creating infinite detail from a simple picture and a replacement rule. The Cantor set works a similar way. Consider a line segment of unit length. Remove its middle third. Now remove the middle thirds from the remaining two segments. Now remove the middle thirds from the remaining four segments and so on. What remains after infinitely many steps is a remarkable subset of the real numbers called the Cantor set, or “Cantor’s Dust.”

    Works Cited

     

    • Brown, Steven D. “Michel Serres: Myth, Mediation and the Logic of the Parasite” (14 May 2000) <http://devpsy.lboro.ac.uk/psygroup/sb/Serres.htm>.
    • Dale, Catherine, and Gregory Adamson. “A Michel Serres Interview (Part II).” Pander OS 2.0 <http://www.thepander.co.nz/culture/mserres6.php>.
    • Delcò, Alessandro. “Michel Serres: Philosophy as an Indeterminate Essence to be Invented.” Trans. Matthew Tiews and Trina Marmarelli. Configurations 8.2 (2000): 229-234.
    • Girard, René. Violence and the Scared. Baltimore: John Hopkins UP, 1977.
    • Hayles, Katherine N. How We Became Posthuman: Virtual Bodies in Cybernetics, Literature and Informatics. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1999.
    • Heisenberg, Werner. “The Representation of Nature in Contemporary Physics.” Trans. O. T. Benfey. The Discontinuous Universe. Ed. S. Sears and G. W. Lord. New York: Basic Books, 1972. 122-135.
    • Ma, Ming-Qian .”The Past Is No Longer Out-of-Date: Topological Time and Its Foldable Nearness in Michel Serres’s Philosophy.” Configurations 8.2 (2000): 235-244.
    • Musil, Robert. The Man Without Qualities. Trans. Eithne Wilkins and Ernst Kaiser. Vol. 2. London: Picador, 1979.
    • Paulson, William. “On a Dynamic Analysis Of The Textual Variation of Le ‘Chef-Oeuvre Iconnu’ by Balzac, Honore de.” Nineteenth-Century French Studies 19.3 (1991): 404-416.
    • Ricoeur, Paul. Time and Narrative. Trans. Kathleen Blamey and David Pellauer. Vol III. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1988.
    • Sandbothe, Mike. “The Temporalization of Time in Modern Philosophy.” <http://www.uni-jena.de/ms/ms_time.html>.
    • Serres, Michel. Hermèes I: La communication. Paris: Editions de Minuit, 1969.
    • —. Hermes–Literature, Science and Philosophy. Ed. Josué V. Harari and David F. Bell. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1982.
    • —. Les cinq sens. Paris: Grasset, 1985.
    • —. The Natural Contract. Trans. Elizabeth MacArthur and William Paulson. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1995.
    • —. Troubadour of Knowledge. Trans. Sheila Faria Gloser and William Paulson. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1997.
    • —. “The Case of Turner.” SubStance #83, 26.2 (1997): 6-21.
    • —. Genesis. Trans. Genevieve James and James Nielson. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1995.
    • —. Serres, Michel, with Bruno Latour. Conversations on Science, Culture, and Time. Trans. Roxanne Lapidus. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1995.
    • Wiener, Norbert. Cybernetics: Or Control and Communication in the Animal and the Machine. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1961.

     

  • Sexuality’s Failure: The Birth of History

    Jason B. Jones

    School of Literature, Communication, and Culture
    Georgia Institute of Technology
    jason.jones@lcc.gatech.edu

     

    Review of: Tim Dean, Beyond Sexuality.Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2000.

    Charles Shepherdson, Vital Signs: Nature, Culture, Psychoanalysis. New York: Routledge, 2000.

     

    In an interview familiar to English readers, “The Confession of the Flesh,” there is a terse exchange between Michel Foucault and Jacques-Alain Miller over the former’s history of sexuality. Miller doggedly insists that “There isn’t a history of sexuality in the way that there is a history of bread” (213). Foucault replies by likening the history of sexuality to that of madness, and the interview takes a different turn.1 It is a pity that Miller and Foucault should have allowed this particular point to drop, for it reveals the central conflict between psychoanalysis and the historicism exemplified by Foucault: psychoanalysis, specifically its Lacanian inflections, contends that historicism misrecognizes sexuality by turning it into an effect of discourse.2 This conflict has wide-ranging repercussions, touching on fundamental questions of identity, sexuality, power, representation, and the nature of history and historical change.

     

    The year 2000 saw the publication of eagerly awaited collections by two of the most invigorating and provocative writers on psychoanalysis and historicism: Tim Dean’s Beyond Sexuality and Charles Shepherdson’s Vital Signs: Nature, Culture, Psychoanalysis. Dean and Shepherdson begin their books with statements of the same goal: to recapture the “theoretical specificity of Lacanian theory” in the face of an Anglo-American reception that has tended either to assimilate psychoanalysis with Foucault or to dismiss it as either essentialist and ahistorical, on the one hand, or as reducing everything to language, on the other (Shepherdson 8; for similar statements from Dean see 8, 15, and 22). One great merit of Beyond Sexuality and Vital Signs is the way they move debates over sexuality and identity beyond facile, sterile arguments between essentialism and constructionism–an opposition, Shepherdson points out, that plays out in postmodern clothes the nineteenth-century, and thus basically pre-Freudian, opposition between Geisteswissenschaften and Naturewissenschaften (15, 183).

     

    Dean and Shepherdson start from the same place: the Lacanian proposition, derived from Freud, that sexuality represents a failure of identity constitutes the sharpest insight of psychoanalysis, one with ramifications that are still far from being understood. The Lacanian argument is profoundly antipsychological and anti-commonsensical, as Dean observes: “human sexuality involves persons only contingently…. We misconstrue sexuality’s functioning when we begin our analysis of it from the point of view of men and women, rather than from the perspective of language and its effects” (18). Shepherdson explains that, because Freud’s theory of sexuality binds the drives to representation, psychoanalysis fundamentally conceives of a sexuality constitutively opposed to nature, reproduction, or any other telos. In Dean’s lovely expression, “Language and the body are permanently out of synch, though not always in the same way” (59).

     

    In addition to this attention to sexuality’s failure, the two books share other emphases, such as clarifying the differences between the Imaginary and the Symbolic (including between the image and the word), and most notably a sustained engagement with Catherine Millot’s work on transsexuality.3 As a consequence of their attempt to bring psychoanalysis into sharper relief, both writers are also somewhat polemical, digging through the reception history of Lacanian psychoanalysis and what is usually called French feminism in order to demonstrate how and why certain concepts have been obscured–or simply not understood. Despite their common interest in clarifying the theoretical stakes of Lacanian psychoanalysis, Dean and Shepherdson also have significantly divergent interests and methods. Dean’s Beyond Sexuality offers a radical rethinking of sexuality on impersonalist grounds, revealing the value of Lacan’s conception of the objet a to queer theory–and, splendidly, the extent to which the objet a deserves to supplant the phallus in Lacanian theory. Dean eloquently demonstrates the vitality of heterodox–or, perhaps more precisely, of original, non-acolytic–readings of Lacan, as well as the crucial importance of Lacanian analysis for social phenomena such as safe-sex education. Shepherdson’s disentangling of the three elements of his subtitle–nature, culture, psychoanalysis–works to defamiliarize French feminists such as Irigaray, Kristeva, Lemoine-Luccioni, and Millot. In fact, reading Vital Signs leads to an astonishing conclusion: we have never understood how to read these writers, and an extensive rereading will have to begin.

     

    Readers of Postmodern Culture may recognize “History and The Real: Foucault with Lacan,” Shepherdson’s fifth chapter, since a version of it appeared here previously. The precision and expositional grace of Shepherdson’s prose will thus already be familiar. Vital Signs is revelatory, with every chapter overturning commonplaces of the American misunderstanding of French psychoanalysis. A partial list of his main claims will suggest the importance of this project: “sexual difference is neither ‘sex’ nor ‘gender’” (2); the body is neither natural nor cultural, in anything like the normal understanding of those terms; for Lacan, the mother only emerges in the Symbolic order; psychoanalysis distinguishes women from mothers, and both from the fantasy of a pre-Oedipal mother; for psychoanalysis, “human sexuality is inevitably historical” (99), and so forth. In addition to these far-reaching theoretical questions, Shepherdson also provides lucid accounts of Lacan’s Schema R–which clearly indicates the crucial importance of the mother for the Symbolic order–and of the shift from the Oedipus myth to the myth of the primal horde, the Freudian basis for Lacan’s arguments about jouissance after Seminar 7.

     

    To briefly clarify some of these claims, I shall try to follow Shepherdson’s argument about sexuality and history, the thread connecting the chapters in his book. He begins with the Freudian distinction between “instinct” (Instinkt) and “drive” (Trieb). The first consequence of this distinction is that sexuality is irrevocably disconnected from reproduction and the natural. In fact, “one cannot properly speak of an ‘originally natural’ sexuality that would (later) be distorted by external and therefore merely accidental deformation by the particular conventions of a given culture–the analysis of the sexual drive should lead us to speak of its original emergence as unnatural, as intrinsically constituted through an organization that is beyond the ‘law’ governing the organism alone” (34). It is because the drive is not natural–that is, because there is a gap between instinct and drive–that sexuality can have a history. Actually, this can be put more dramatically: insofar as it interrupts the biological determinants of the body, human sexuality simply is history. The Symbolic order is thus the threshold of history.

     

    The cultural studies equation of Lacan’s concept of the Symbolic order with actually existing institutions in a particular society has thoroughly confused this point.4 For Lacan, the Symbolic order is, in effect, the law underpinning culture itself; in other words, it is the condition necessary to allow social institutions to exist at all. To continue to use the example of sexuality, it is the introduction of the Symbolic–here, the order of representation–into a biological, instinctual understanding of sexuality that allows the varieties of human sexuality to come into being. Once these sexualities have begun to emerge, the historicist thesis becomes more appropriate, but it is always a second-order understanding. As Shepherdson comments, historicism and psychoanalysis address fundamentally different questions. Historicism can help us understand “the contingent, historically constituted forms of life,” while psychoanalysis focuses on the “inevitable dimension of sexually marked embodiment” (88).5

     

    By providing an account of how the biological organism becomes “the body,” psychoanalysis refuses the opposition between nature and culture that has governed discourse on sexuality since the nineteenth century. It is therefore highly comic to find this opposition being used to dismiss psychoanalysis–both as endorsing biology over culture (essentialism) and as focusing too relentlessly on the signifier (constructivism). The first two chapters of Vital Signs address themselves to this irony, seeking to uncover in Irigaray, Kristeva, and others a psychoanalytic argument about embodiment and history that has literally been ignored in the course of their Anglo-American reception. For example, “everyone knows” that Kristeva distinguishes between the (feminine) semiotic and the (masculine) Symbolic. Both hostile and sympathetic critics often begin their responses to Kristeva with this point. However, Shepherdson demonstrates that gendering the semiotic/Symbolic distinction misses Kristeva’s point entirely:

     

    Such an account presupposes a commonsense account of sexual difference; thereby circumventing the questions psychoanalysis is seeking to address, namely, the question of how sexual difference in the human animal is subject to representation rather than being naturally given. Thus, the semiotic is not automatically a domain of maternal or feminine identity, but a domain in which sexual difference is not yet established, and consequently it cannot be gendered without returning to a pregiven sexual difference (based on common sense and anatomy) that avoids the very question Kristeva’s categories seek to address. (61)

     

    The reception of French feminism is, for Shepherdson, simply one egregious instance of the general misunderstanding of psychoanalysis’s interrogation of sexuality.

     

    Shepherdson’s reading of “Stabat Mater” demonstrates the limitations of our current understanding of Kristeva. In his view, Kristeva emphasizes the importance of maternal desire to the Symbolic order. In other words, not only is it not the case that women and mothers are relegated to the Imaginary, it is also not the case that the move to the Symbolic is predicated on the father. Shepherdson’s reading depends on two related points. First, there is no sexual difference without the Symbolic order. As a result, whenever we speak of the “Imaginary mother,” we are dealing with a fantasy of maternity that is already the product of the Symbolic: The Imaginary mother is “the archaic maternal image,… a phallic figure that cannot be understood in terms of sexual difference” (61). Second, the advent of the Symbolic order is not first heralded by the child’s recognition of the father, as so many literal-minded readers of Lacan claim. Instead, the child is confronted with the astonishing fact that the “mother” (which, as I’ve just said, cannot be conceptualized with reference to sexual difference) wants something beyond the child. By incarnating desire for the child in this way, Shepherdson poetically writes, the “symbolic mother thus performs a second birth, a symbolic labor, which escorts the child out of the organic night, out of the imaginary world of blood and milk, out of the oceanic world of primary narcissism, and into the world of speech, where desire can be articulated” (69). The fundamental lesson of Vital Signs is this: by paying attention to the theoretical specificity of psychoanalysis, we can discover a perspective on sexuality far richer than any available alternative. The refusal of psychoanalysis to yield pride of place to either nature or culture gestures towards a turbulent field of trauma, fantasy, and the excesses of symbolization and language. The work of understanding this field, Shepherdson tantalizingly suggests, has yet to begin.

     

    If Vital Signs shows how we have never fully understood psychoanalysis, Dean’s Beyond Sexuality demonstrates that psychoanalytic theorists have not always understood just how rich a resource they had. Subsequently, in addition to coinciding with Shepherdson’s argument about sexuality and history, Dean also advances a powerful new inflection of the theory of sexuality, arguing on ethical grounds for an impersonalist theory of desire, one that would recognize that psychically we have sex not with others but with the Other. The thesis of Beyond Sexuality is that the theory of the objet a, object-cause of desire, represents the key insight of Lacanian psychoanalysis, and the theory emphasizing the phallus is a kind of retrograde legacy: “Lacan’s most profound ideological and affective convictions sometimes run counter to his most brilliant critical and analytical insights” (12).6 If we understand the objet a to provide the conceptual core of sexuality, then we can understand that “one would be defined by one’s sexuality no more than by any other contingent feature, because erotic desire would have been fully disarticulated from personhood” (21). Beyond Sexuality also shows that taking psychoanalysis seriously means neither self-importance nor obsequious deference to Freud or Lacan. Dean’s prose is both clear and witty, and he has a genius for the well-placed one-liner with significant conceptual implications. At one point, he sums up his de-emphasis of the phallus: “It is not so much that the phallus is really a penis–or, in Judith Butler’s reading, a dildo–as it is a giant red herring” (13-14). And elsewhere, he splendidly revises the familiar Lacanian maxim about transference and the “subject supposed to know”: “he whom I suppose to know how to enjoy, I hate” (127). Beyond Sexuality is an important intervention in both psychoanalytic thought and queer theory, and deserves a wide audience.

     

    In this space I cannot address all of Dean’s claims, but I will instead try to explain why Dean prefers the objet a over the phallus, and what allows him to do so. In the chapter entitled “How to Read Lacan,” Dean provides a schematic periodization of Lacan, producing a series of Lacans both overlapping and discontinuous–a Lacan of the Imaginary, one of the Symbolic, one of the Real, and one of the sinthome, Lacan’s final reconceptualization of the symptom. By doing so, Dean avoids both the pitfall of over-contextualizing Lacan (which would reduce his concepts into epiphenomena of his life and times, an approach exemplified for Dean by David Macey and Mikkel Borch-Jacobsen) and that of overly narrativizing Lacan’s thought (thus producing a “conversion narrative characteristic of ego formations” [37]; Dean finds this approach in Zizek’s well-known emphasis on Seminar 7 as the birth of the Real in Lacan). Viewed in the context of Lacan’s career as a whole, Dean claims, the phallus should be seen as a “provisional concept because so many of its functions are taken over by other concepts, in particular that of object a, which has no a priori relation to gender and, indeed, may be represented by objects gendered masculine, feminine, or neuter” (45). The ground for this argument is Lacan’s tendency to talk about the image of the penis as a metaphor for the phallus, leading Dean to infer that what’s being proposed is an analogy. As a consequence, “when we insist on invoking the concept of the phallus to talk about desire, we’re effectively mistaking the scaffolding for the building” (46-47).

     

    Dean emphasizes the Lacan of the Real because his discussions of the Real drive Lacan to reconsider the status of the objet a. As soon as the Real becomes a separate conceptual register, we can see that the differences between “reality” and “fantasy” no longer hold: “Lacan suggests that fantasy and desire don’t concern imagined, hallucinatory objects as distinct from actually existing objects. Rather, objects of fantasy (objects a) are forever lost–even from the visual projections of the imagination–thanks to their cutting away from the subject that they thereby bring into being” (57).7 The last clause emphasizes the role of the objet a as object-cause of desire: it is both the thing desired and the source of desire–that is, it elicits the desire that then becomes attached to it. As Dean points out, the “cut that produces object and subject both is not a border separation, a more or less culturally regulated division between domains or acceptable objects of desire. Instead, this is an internal cut, one that constitutively ensures the separation of subject and object by making the subject’s reality and its desire depend on the object’s never coming into view, never entering the field of reality or of imaginary relations” (58). An immediate consequence of this view is that any attempt to connect sexuality with identity is thereby associated with the ego, and thus with the normative enemy of desire.

     

    Dean lays out the stakes of allowing the ego to take over desire in “Transcending Gender,” a chapter demonstrating the limitations of gender theory’s frequent celebration of drag and transsexuality as exemplifications of the social construction of gender. From a psychoanalytic point of view, drag has a somewhat different implication. To the extent that the successful performance of drag is often associated with “scrupulously accurate mimesis” (69), it thus stresses the normative implications of gender identity: “theories of mimesis or imitation represent the wrong approach to gender altogether, because formulating questions of gender and sexuality in terms of the mimetic or imitative generation of reality effects restricts vital political questions to the arena of ego identifications” (71). Rather than subvert the reigning paradigms of sexual difference, then, gender performance theory surprisingly reinforces them: sexuality is an affair of the ego, and the vicissitudes of unconscious desire can be deprecated as distasteful or politically objectionable.

     

    Against this view psychoanalysis makes an astonishing claim: “the unconscious has no knowledge of sexual difference” (86). This point continually slips from view in discussions of psychoanalysis. However, it is the conceptual basis for Dean’s project: “Lacan maintains that there is no signifier for sexual difference in the unconscious. Hence the phallus cannot be a signifier of sexual difference; instead, it counts as a signifier of the total effects of the signified–that is, of meaning. If there is no signifier for sexual difference in the unconscious, then as far as the unconscious is concerned heterosexuality does not exist…. Sexual difference does not organize or determine sexual desire” (86-87).8 Our tendency to read sexual difference and sexuality in terms of each other, and to read sexual difference in terms of men and women, corresponds to a pre-Freudian, psychologistic understanding of sexuality. Worse, it endorses an identification of sexuality with the ego, with normative, idealizing results (229).

     

    In “Lacan Meets Queer Theory,” Dean explores the possibility of a genuinely non-normative sexuality, one built around objets a rather than personhood and identitarian claims. The chapter engages such diverse thinkers as Foucault, Freud, Lacan, Deleuze and Guattari, Michael Warner, and Guy Hocquenghem in order to sustain a conversation between antinormative strains in queer theory and psychoanalysis. The fundamental congruence that Dean observes among these writers is an emphasis on depersonalization, the recognition that sex–whether alone or in the presence of others–is a relationship with an object and with the Other. The confusion of one’s object-choice with a person, or a kind of people, “entails a kind of sublimation, an idealizing consolidation of the object…. Erotic desire for another person itself depends on some sort of sublimation–rather than sublimation standing as the alternative to interpersonal desire” (268). In the age of AIDS, Dean asks us to see that depersonalizing desire could be a way of saving lives. If taking another person as a sexual object is a form of sublimation, then perhaps other forms of sublimation could equally well serve as gateways to jouissance. Understanding sexuality (as well as all relations with others) as impersonal clarifies that “jouissance remains irreducible to sex, since although the Other has your jouissance, it has no genitalia” (171).

     

    Beyond Sexuality and Vital Signs are provocative, even polemical, books; their tone may be misconstrued–or, perhaps more exactly, their tone may invite a particularly unproductive mode of “wild analysis.” For example, both writers use “psychoanalysis” to refer exclusively to the subset of psychoanalytic theory associated with French Freud: mostly Lacan, but also Bersani, Laplanche, Irigaray, Kristeva, and Millot. This is not, as is commonly asserted, a manifestation of Lacanian arrogance. Instead, it is a consequence of striving to keep in focus aspects of psychoanalysis that always threaten to fade from view. This fading happens in two directions. First, both the unconscious and the psychoanalytic subject have at best evanescent “existences,” generally understandable only as instances of failure. As Dean in particular emphasizes, this “fading” of psychoanalytic specificity is present in Freud and Lacan, as well. Second, the reception of French psychoanalysis has tended to read it as a politically dubious species of poststructuralism. In certain chapters–some of the finest of both books (in Dean, “Bodies That Mutter”; in Shepherdson, “Hysteria and the Question of Woman”), the argument about theoretical specificity requires an extended demonstration of what is actually in Lacan, and what is a confusion in the reception of Lacan. Another way of putting this is to say that the target of Dean’s and Shepherdson’s argument is rarely the theorist under consideration so much as it is the academic tendency to rely on intermediaries rather than engaging with Lacan’s work. Dean and Shepherdson argue that this reliance produces Imaginary misreadings of Lacan that are far more normative than anything in psychoanalysis (for an especially graceful articulation of this view, see Dean 13-17).

     

    It is surely not a coincidence that Dean’s and Shepherdson’s academic training is grounded in poetry (Dean 25 and Shepherdson 9, 187), suggesting the peremptory benefits of close reading, even for, say, a discussion of the epistemological virtues of gloryhole sex (Dean 274). First, Beyond Sexuality and Vital Signs share a commitment to exegetical patience, sticking to the nuances of the texts they consider. Second, they are both able to locate in Lacan’s style an “incitement to further thinking” (Dean 25). The merit of the two books, from this perspective, is their capacity for enduring the peculiar disorientation induced by Lacanian thought, a disorientation that eventually becomes productive rather than disabling. Beyond Sexuality and Vital Signs provide admirable models of reading, convincingly demonstrating the conceptual impoverishment induced by the Anglo-American reception of Lacan. In particular, Dean and Shepherdson offer unusually sophisticated accounts of the paradoxical normativity that can emerge from the reigning paradigms of historicism, gender performance theory, and queer theory. They call us to a re-reading of writers we may never have fully understood–a massive endeavor, the merit of which, Shepherdson concludes, is that “psychoanalysis has a future” (185).

     

    Notes

     

    1. Shepherdson makes a similar point: “we cannot treat embodiment as though it were simply one more human institution, another convention invented (in the course of time) by human beings, like agriculture or atomic weapons” (88). There is a comical side to the exchange between Miller and Foucault, as well. Miller points out a connection between Foucault’s work and the Lacanian “axiom” that “there is no sexual relation.” Foucault’s reply: “I didn’t know there was this axiom” (213). The inexistence of the sexual relation is, as even casual readers of Lacan will be aware, one of the principal leitmotifs of his seminars, on par with “the unconscious is structured like a language,” and “desire is the desire of the other.” For an exemplary account of the relationship between Foucault and Lacan around this question, see Lane, “Experience”; for more comprehensive efforts to engage Foucault with Lacan, see Lane, Burdens (12-30) and Copjec (especially 1-26).

     

    2. For the rationales behind identifying Foucault’s style of thought “historicist,” see Copjec (1-14), Dean (2-10), Lane, Burdens (12-30), and Shepherdson (1-15, 157). Shepherdson frames the argument with characteristic precision: the carving of the body by the drives in Freudian theory indicates “why there can be such a thing as a ‘history of sexuality,’ for it suggests that human existence is not so decisively bound to the mechanisms of instinct, the force of evolution, and the singular telos of reproduction. And yet, this very capacity to have a history… should not lead us to conclude that ‘sexuality,’ or indeed the phenomenon of embodiment, is simply a ‘discursive product,’ the contingent construction of a particular culture or a given historical moment” (7).

     

    3. This congruence is registered by Dean (66).

     

    4. As Shepherdson has written elsewhere, assimilating the Symbolic order to the social-historical context identifies Lacan’s concept “with the very structures [it] was elaborated to contest” (“On Fate” 283). See also Vital (45-54).

     

    5. This is why, as Dean points out, it is a mistake to claim (following Judith Butler) that Lacanian psychoanalysis has a melancholy attitude towards lost jouissance (85n37; 199-202). As should now be clear, such a stance would be historicist, not psychoanalytic.

     

    6. Dean is following lines of thought developed by Arnold Davidson and Teresa de Lauretis.

     

    7. Dean develops this argument through a wonderfully clear discussion of the differences between Lacan’s seminar on psychosis and the ecrit “On a Question Preliminary to Any Possible Treatment of Psychosis,” which is ostensibly a summary of the seminar (56-58 and 100-03). He observes that the seminar focuses on the famous axiom that “what is foreclosed in the Symbolic returns in the Real,” a formula that for all its prominence in the seminar does not appear in the ecrit. The ecrit, by contrast, focuses on the foreclosure of the Name-of-the-Father, an idea that is implicit in the parts of the seminar being summarized.

     

    8. For a fuller discussion of the common ground between queer theory and psychoanalysis, see Dean and Lane.

    Works Cited

     

    • Copjec, Joan. Read My Desire: Lacan Against the Historicists. Cambridge: MIT P, 1994.
    • Dean, Tim, and Christopher Lane. “Homosexuality and Psychoanalysis: An Introduction.” Homosexuality and Psychoanalysis. Ed. Tim Dean and Christopher Lane. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2002. 3-42.
    • Foucault, Michel. “The Confession of the Flesh.” Power/Knowledge: Selected Interviews & Other Writings, 1972-1977. Ed. Colin Gordon. New York: Pantheon Books, 1980. 194-228.
    • Lane, Christopher. The Burdens of Intimacy: Psychoanalysis and Victorian Masculinity. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1999.
    • —. “The Experience of the Outside: Foucault and Psychoanalysis.” Lacan in America. Ed. Jean-Michel Rabaté. New York: Other P, 2000. 309-47.
    • Shepherdson, Charles. “History and The Real: Foucault with Lacan.” Postmodern Culture 5.2 (1995): 65 pars. <http://muse.jhu.edu/journals/pmc/v005/5.2shepherdson.html and <http://www.iath.virginia.edu/pmc/text-only/issue.195/shepherd.195>.
    • —. “On Fate: Psychoanalysis and the Desire to Know.” Dialectic and Narrative. Ed. Thomas R. Flynn and Dalia Judovitz. Albany: SUNY P, 1993.

     

  • Profit and Stealth in the Prison-Industrial Complex

    Alexander H. Pitofsky

    Department of English
    Appalachian State University
    pitofskyah@appstate.edu

     

    Review of: Joseph T. Hallinan, Going Up the River: Travels in a Prison Nation. New York: Random House, 2002.

     

    In this cogent, wide-ranging study, Joseph Hallinan examines the ways in which the American penal system has been transformed during the last twenty years. Working-class Americans who used to protest when state officials announced plans to build prisons in their communities now compete to attract new penitentiaries and the jobs they create. The incarceration of convicts–once perceived as a grim governmental responsibility–has become a thriving, recession-proof industry. Prison officials have shifted their priorities from inmate rehabilitation programs to budgetary concerns; instead of focusing on the prevention of recidivism, they focus on the reduction of “average daily inmate costs.” Perhaps the most startling feature of these institutional changes, Hallinan observes, is the fact that they have been implemented without substantive public debate. Although incarceration rates have reached levels that would have seemed inconceivable as recently as the early 1980s, the public seems virtually unaware of the ways in which the aims and methodologies of the nation’s penal system have been revised. Going Up the River will disappoint readers in search of a polemic against what Hallinan calls “the prison-industrial complex,” but it provides an ideal starting place for readers who want to understand how the confluence of economics and punishment has reshaped the prison culture of the United States.

     

    Throughout Going Up the River, Hallinan (a Wall Street Journal reporter and former Nieman Fellow at Harvard University) emphasizes that the most significant recent change in America’s approach to criminal justice is an increase in the size of its prison population. Mandatory minimum sentences for drug offenses, “three strikes” statutes, and a panoply of other “get tough on crime” initiatives, Hallinan writes, have increased the nation’s total number of prisoners to an estimated 1.3 million. (This is a conservative estimate; other recent commentators have posited that the total is nearly two million.) Accordingly, even though crime rates have fallen in the last five years, the per capita incarceration rate in the United States is now second only to that in Russia. This increased reliance on imprisonment has no precedent in the history of the American criminal justice system. In the 1930s, at the height of the Prohibition/Al Capone era, the government cracked down by raising the national incarceration rate to 137 prisoners for every 100,000 citizens. This figure was considered extraordinarily high at the time, but recent developments make it seem moderate:

     

    [The 137 for every 100,000 citizens figure was] a high-water mark that stood for four decades. But in 1980 we broke that record, and we’ve been breaking it ever since. By 1999, the U.S. incarceration rate stood at a phenomenal 476 per 100,000–more than triple the rate of the Capone era. So common is the prison experience today that the federal government predicts that one of every eleven men will be imprisoned during his lifetime. For black men, the figure is even higher–more than one of every four. (xiii)

     

    This rapid increase in the nation’s incarceration rate has, of course, necessitated the constant construction of new penal facilities; Texas alone has filled more than one hundred new prisons since 1980. Several states that have been unable to match Texas’s prison-construction budget have hired the Corrections Corporation of America, Wackenhut Corrections Corporation, and other private prison firms to incarcerate convicts that the states’ prisons are unable to hold. In 1983, there were no private prisons in the United States; today, Hallinan observes, the demand for private prison services is so high that states can choose from among 150 firms.

     

    The business community has worked aggressively to capitalize on the expansion of the nation’s prison population. Telephone companies have found rising rates of incarceration especially lucrative. Although prisoners do not earn much income, they make a staggering number of phone calls. Hallinan notes that a single prison pay phone can earn its owner as much as $12,000 per year. According to a study commissioned by AT&T, American inmates spend $1 billion per year on long-distance calls. Instead of limiting this corporate windfall, state regulatory agencies have forged profitable business partnerships with the phone companies:

     

    AT&T and its competitors learned that the way to get inmates as customers was to give the prison a legal kickback: on a one-dollar phone call, the prison might make forty or fifty cents. In no time, corrections departments became phone-call millionaires. In 1997, New York rang up $21.2 million from phone-call commissions. California made $17.6 million. Florida earned $13.8 million. (xiv)

     

    While no other industry has matched the prison-house revenues of the phone companies, numerous firms that sell products to inmates (shampoo, soap, toothpaste) and to prison administrators (televison sets, weight-lifting equipment, security cameras) have also developed strategies to enlarge their shares of the prison “market.”

     

    One of the most striking transformations highlighted in Going Up the River relates to public attitudes regarding prison construction. A generation ago, residents of economically depressed small towns often dreamed that the arrival of a new factory or military base might restore their communities’ fiscal health. The arrival of a new penitentiary, by contrast, was seldom viewed as welcome news. No one wanted to live with the threat that convicts might escape into their neighborhoods. No one wanted to raise children in the vicinity of razor-wire fences and guard towers. Prison employment, moreover, was widely considered dangerous and unpleasant. But after years of corporate downsizing and post-Cold War base closings, many residents of small towns have concluded that they can no longer afford misgivings about living in a “prison town.” This change has occurred, Hallinan explains, because prisons are now regarded as invaluable sources of jobs and overall economic stability:

     

    Young men… who might in another generation have joined the Army or gone to work in a factory were now turning to prison for their livelihood. I saw job-hungry towns, desperate for something to keep their young people from leaving, compete for prisons the way they once had for industries, offering tax abatements and job training…. (xi-xii)

     

    Citizens of Beeville, Texas are so delighted with the economic effects of the town’s two existing penitentiaries that they are attempting to “turn their community into a prison hub, becoming roughly what Pittsburgh is to steel or Detroit is to cars” (4). When Hallinan asked a Beeville native why he was training to become a prison guard, the young man replied, “it’s a secure job. It’s always going to be here. It’s good pay. You can move up. Good benefits. Secure. What else do you need?” (9).

     

    The new emphasis on prison economics is especially conspicuous in the attitudes and practices of prison officials. Throughout the United States, Hallinan points out, wardens are canceling educational, job training, and drug treatment programs and cultivating a corporate CFO’s eye for cost reduction: “Warden after warden would recite to me not the recidivism rates of the men who had left their prisons (this was seldom measured), nor the educational levels of the men still there (most are high-school dropouts), nor any other indicator of ‘rehabilitation.’ But every warden I met could tell me his average daily inmate cost” (xvi). Today’s prison officials do not concentrate on bottom-line calculations because they fear that they may be wasting taxpayers’ money. They are committed to managing prisons “like a business” because that commitment can make them rich. Before the advent of the prison-industrial complex, successful prison officials often began as guards, earned promotions into a series of administrative jobs, and then–if they reached the top of their prisons’ hierarchies–occupied their positions as wardens or prison superintendents for many years. That career trajectory became obsolete when the private prison industry began to flourish in the 1980s. The six-figure salaries and stock options of private prison officials marked the first time that prison employment in the United States was associated with considerable financial rewards:

     

    Private prisons… created a new, previously unimaginable category of individual: the prison millionaire. These men were almost always former wardens or superintendents who had jumped ship to work in the private sector. The ranks of big companies like the Corrections Corporation of America are peppered with them…. The staffs of public prisons have become, in effect, farm teams for private prisons. Public prisons are now places where the ambitious can hone their financial skills before moving on to the really big money in the private sector. (173-74)

     

    The transformation of the American penal system has given rise to a number of ominous problems. First, the system’s obsessive concern with cost reduction has exposed inmates to unusually dangerous prison conditions. One of the most common strategies for the management of unruly–and therefore expensive–inmates, for example, is a heightened reliance on solitary confinement, which today’s wardens have renamed “administrative segregation,” or “ad seg.” The psychological impact of ad seg, which generally involves locking individual prisoners in empty cells twenty-three hours a day with no work or other activities to fill the time, can be catastrophic. Prisoners confined in this manner in Texas in the 1990s became so distressed that a federal district court judge characterized ad seg cells as “virtual incubators of psychosis” (5) and banned the use of ad seg on the ground that it violates the constitutional prohibition of cruel and unusual punishment.

     

    The atmosphere of racial discord in America’s prisons has also become more pervasive than ever before. Although approximately two thirds of the nation’s inmates are African-American or Hispanic, the majority of new prisons are constructed in rural communities that are virtually all-white. As Hallinan asserts, it would be difficult not to interpret this practice as a combination of racism, recklessness, and corruption:

     

    A century ago, when most inmates were white and lived on farms, this might have made sense. But not anymore. Today, most inmates… come from the cities. Sticking them in the boondocks, where family members have a hard time visiting, where guards have likely never encountered anyone like them, almost always leads to problems, often violent ones. Yet this is where we build our prisons. These communities profit most from the prison boom: from the construction jobs and the prison jobs and all the spin-off businesses that prisons create. [It is] hard to ignore that those getting rich are usually white and those in prison are usually not. (xiii)

     

    If prison administrators have any say in the matter, the practice of shipping urban minority inmates to places like the Texas panhandle and southwestern Virginia is unlikely to change any time soon. American wardens have traditionally expressed a strong preference for rural locations, which allow them to hire what a New Jersey prison official once called “competent white guards” and “the very best kind of white, mid-American line staff” (85).

     

    Moreover, Going Up the River illustrates that when prisons are viewed as “for-profit factories” (143), prison officials are likely to alter their practices in profound and unsettling ways. If the nation depends on public prisons to ensure the economic well-being of hundreds of rural communities and private prisons to strengthen the portfolios of thousands of investors, for instance, that dependence will produce a powerful incentive to keep the prisons filled. Half-empty prisons–like half-empty restaurants and hotels–do not create jobs or profits. Should the government commit itself to maintaining today’s unprecedented rates of incarceration, regardless of future crime rates, simply because the economy may suffer if the nation’s supply of convicts becomes depleted? If wardens believe that their main responsibility is cost reduction, their highest priority will be to develop strategies to limit their prisons’ expenditures. (Hallinan observes that the purpose of Correction$ Cost Control & Revenue Report and several other industry publications is to help wardens do just that.) Why build a wall around the prison, prison officials will reason, if you can save a great deal of money by building a fence? Why invest in a guard tower to prevent escape attempts? Guard towers are very expensive. Why provide drug rehabilitation and job training programs? They, too, are very expensive. Although the private prison industry has expanded enormously in recent years, most American prisons are still built and maintained with public funds. Do taxpayers know that the nation’s prison officials are under intense pressure to cut corners? Do they know that many prison officials no longer feel obligated to prepare convicts to lead productive lives after they are released? Throughout Going Up the River, Hallinan suggests that the public should be uneasy about these modifications of the professional responsibilities of wardens and the stealthy manner in which these modifications have become part of the nation’s penal system.

     

    The strengths of Going Up the River are rooted in Hallinan’s considerable skills as a reporter. Although Hallinan discusses a number of national trends, he also stresses–through a wide array of anecdotes, interviews, empirical data, and firsthand observations–that America’s penal system is extremely complex and multifaceted. While some prison farms in Texas seem to be descendants of antebellum plantations, the prisons in several other states are managed with cutting-edge technology and administrative strategies. Moreover, Hallinan writes, while some states have conceded that their prisons provide nothing but punishment, several others–most notably Washington and Iowa–remain committed to the principle that prisons must at least attempt to rehabilitate inmates through educational programs and employment opportunities.

     

    Hallinan also shows an admirable ability to illuminate shifting public attitudes concerning prisons and imprisonment. For instance, he relates some of the ways in which many Americans like to feel a sense of connection to local penal institutions. In Tamms, Illinois, the owners of a restaurant are so pleased with the town’s new “supermax” (maximum security) prison that they have added Supermax sandwiches to the menu. In Florence, Colorado, Hallinan encountered residents wearing t-shirts that read “Florence: Corrections Capital of the World” (83). And citizens of Polk County, Texas commemorated the grand opening of a new prison by paying for the adventure of spending a night there just before the first inmates arrived: “So proud were the people of Polk County… that three days before the prison opened they held an open house inside the Terrell Unit. For $25, members of the public got to eat real prison food, wear real prison clothes, even spend the night in a real prison cell” (86).

     

    Although much of this enthusiasm can be attributed to the fiscal benefits of new prisons, the residents of Tamms, Florence, and Polk County appear to be demonstrating more than a keen interest in their local economies. More specifically, Going Up the River illustrates that many Americans simply enjoy the aura of power, danger, and folklore that surrounds America’s prisons. This is a rather puzzling phenomenon because few Americans are truly knowledgeable about the nation’s penal system. How many could discuss the expanding influence of the private prison industry? How many are familiar with terms like “supermax” and “administrative segregation”? This superficial awareness has at times caused the public to misinterpret the state of the prisons. In the 1970s, a few highly publicized prison riots caused millions of people to draw the unwarranted inference that America’s entire penal system was out of control. Similarly, in the 1980s, anecdotes about racquetball courts and other hospitable features of minimum security facilities led millions of people to the absurd conclusion that America’s prisons had become “country clubs.” Hallinan’s observations about public attitudes convey some of the most intriguing messages in Going Up the River. Many recent commentators have argued that the U.S. government and a cabal of major corporations are to blame for the advent of the prison-industrial complex. Hallinan appears to agree, but he complicates the discourse regarding contemporary prison administration by underscoring the public’s role in “the merger of punishment and profit” (xi). If the public had paid more attention to the realities of the nation’s prisons, he suggests, the transformation of the nation’s penal system might not have been quite so mercenary and all-encompassing.

     

    There is much to admire in Going Up the River, but it seems to me that Hallinan’s analysis is flawed in two significant ways. First, although Hallinan devotes a chapter to the history of imprisonment from antiquity to the present, he seems unaware of the British roots of the American penal system. He discusses private prisons as though they were a new phenomenon, but they are only new in the United States. Britain’s county jails, debtors’ prisons, and houses of correction were privately owned and operated until well into the 1800s. Parliament was reluctant to depart from its traditional approach to prison management, but the writings of John Howard and other leaders of the English prison reform movement of the eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries gradually persuaded English society that its penal system had become unacceptably corrupt and inhumane. Similarly, Hallinan exposes his unfamiliarity with the English prison reform movement when he discusses the Pennsylvania Quakers’ role in establishing Philadelphia’s Eastern State Penitentiary in 1829. Hallinan suggests that the Quakers invented the prison’s “hub-and-spoke design,” which ensured that “the occupants could be observed at all times” (62), but the Quakers were obviously drawing on the ideas about prison architecture and surveillance that Jeremy Bentham had introduced in The Panopticon, or Inspection House (1791). Hallinan’s assertion that the modern penitentiary was invented by the Quakers is equally startling:

     

    [They] wanted each inmate to have a cell to himself–an extravagant and novel notion–and wanted him to spend every waking hour there, alone with his thoughts. Such solitude, the Quakers thought, would lead to meditation, and meditation would lead in turn to penitence. For this reason they called their new house of detention a “penitentiary,” and a distinctly American institution was born. (xvi)

     

    This passage is simply inaccurate; as anyone who has read Parliament’s Penitentiary Act (1779) or John Bender’s Imagining the Penitentiary (1987) can attest, the “penitentiary idea” is distinctly British. The Quakers did an estimable job of importing the most progressive British discourse about criminal justice and using it as the blueprint for a remarkable prison, but their ideas about confinement, penitence, and rehabilitation were hardly innovative.

     

    Hallinan’s analysis is also weakened by his perplexing reluctance to foreground his own conclusions. As a consequence of his extensive travels and his interviews with dozens of inmates, guards, and prison administrators, Hallinan is in a position to speak with authority about the prison-industrial complex and its discontents. In spite of his high degree of expertise, however, Hallinan strives throughout the book to avoid seeming partisan. This would not be a problem if Going Up the River were a strictly empirical, informative study, but in light of Hallinan’s relentless exposure of the institutional exploitation of America’s prisoners, his self-effacing rhetoric often seems disingenuous. To put it another way, Going Up the River would be akin to a study of the Vietnam War that systematically outlines the U.S. government’s errors and deceptions and then calls upon the reader to decide whether America’s involvement in the war was a success.

     

    In the early eighteenth century, Parliament responded to the overcrowding of England’s prisons by promulgating the Transportation Act. This statute provided that debtors and prisoners convicted of petty crimes were to be shipped to the American colonies, auctioned off to the highest bidder, and required to make amends for their past offenses by performing years of unpaid labor. At the time, this approach struck many observers as an inspired idea: it moved thousands of prisoners out of Great Britain and brought substantial profits to the sea captains who transported the prisoners, the auctioneers who brought them to market, and the colonists who purchased their services. Going Up the River demonstrates that the American criminal justice system has not moved far beyond the attitudes that gave rise to the Transportation Act. The federal government and the states still treat convicts like toxic waste by doing all they can to ship them far away. And in the past twenty years our representatives have mimicked early eighteenth-century British society by transforming the confinement of inmates into a prosperous industry. Perhaps the most sobering aspect of Going Up the River is the fact that Hallinan does not appear to have found a single national leader who believes that we are in need of an American prison reform movement. In spite of all the abuses Hallinan has witnessed and documented, no one seems interested in preventing the excesses of the prison-industrial complex.

     

  • A Legacy of Freaks

    Christopher Pizzino

    Department of Literatures in English
    Rutgers University
    pizzino@fas-english.rutgers.edu

     

    Review of: Slavoj Zizek, The Fragile Absolute, or, Why is the Christian Legacy Worth Fighting For? New York: Verso, 2000.

     

    In one of the more arresting moments in The Fragile Absolute, Slavoj Zizek connects the Pauline concept of agape, commonly known as Christian love, to the closing shot of Krzysztof Kieslowski’s Blue.1 The shot is a series of tableaux, each focused on a character somehow related to the life of the film’s heroine, Julie. The tableaux are separated by a formless void in which each seems to float. After panning through the void from one character to another, the camera comes to rest on the weeping face of Julie herself. Emotionally paralyzed by the death of her husband and child, she has moved through the film untouched by her encounters with those around her. The effect of the conclusion is to suggest that Julie has delivered herself from paralysis and once again become a participant in the psychic life of others. Her tears indicate that “her work of mourning is accomplished, she is reconciled with the universe; her tears are not the tears of sadness and pain, but the tears of agape, of a Yes! to life in its mysterious synchronic multitude” (103). The tone is unusually lyrical for Zizek, and indeed for cultural theory in general, yet it is easy to recognize the standard maneuver being executed here. A canonical theoretical (or in this case theological) text is expounded using a popular text as an example. In this instance as in previous works, what distinguishes Zizek’s connections from those of most other cultural theorists (aside from their frequency) is the way the popular text becomes more than mere illustration. The usual priorities could be said to be reversed; theory itself seems the subsidiary thing. One might observe in the provocative tone of overstatement Zizek has mastered that if we examine Paul’s ultimate statement of the nature of agape, the famous passage from 1 Corinthians 13, it amounts only to a sort of illustration of the conclusion of Blue (in fact the passage is being sung in the background). In his attempt to express an affirmation that could overcome the fragmentation of historical experience, Paul creates a shadowy and insufficient illustration of the “mysterious, synchronic” truth expressed by Kieslowski’s camera.

     

    As bracing as such moments are, Zizek’s allegiance to a specific set of theoretical touchstones lets us know that theory, or at least a certain kind of theory, never remains in the supporting role for long. Though the tone of the commentary on Blue is climactic, the work of Zizek’s argument is not complete until the book’s final chapter, in which agape itself is connected to Marxist and psychoanalytic points of reference. Like the use of popular culture, this argumentative procedure is now familiar. In a sense Zizek reads Paul’s theology much as he has read an array of Western philosophers, notably Hegel and Schelling. The wide field of application sheds light on the status of both philosophy and popular culture. Examples from either sphere gain value insofar as they express, in whatever form, the truths of the powerful theoretical principles Zizek has formed from his readings of Marx on the one hand and Lacan and Freud on the other. Working on the canon of Western philosophy in this way leaves Zizek open to the challenge that although he has given us new ways to understand Marx, Freud, and Lacan, he has distorted our view of the raw material on which he operates. The question of distortion, however, is likely to be more interesting if we follow Zizek’s own habits of investigation and reverse the direction of inquiry, asking in what ways his own work is affected by his appropriations. Such a question seems particularly relevant for this book, his first to give sustained attention to Christian theology. The question to ask, then, is not how Zizek distorts Christianity but how the presence of Christianity distorts Zizek. The distortion turns out to have a familiar shape. By asserting from a perspective one could provisionally define as secular that Christianity is “worth fighting for,” The Fragile Absolute enters a long-standing set of conflicts between religion and the secular, and these conflicts determine the shape of the argument in ways that are at odds with Zizek’s own theoretical program.

     

    As the reading of agape suggests, Zizek’s purpose in this book is to establish parallels between Christian thought and his own, situated athwart Marxism and psychoanalysis. Despite the urgency of the project implied by the book’s title, however, the parallels are slow to appear. The preface announces a crisis that precipitates the need for a consideration of Christianity, namely the rise of “fundamentalism” in various political and social contexts. After this announcement, Zizek turns abruptly to the lively ideological critique for which he is known, focusing his attention on the implications of global capitalism in a post-Soviet era. Here too Zizek finds a state of crisis, one which threatens the very possibility of a meaningful Marxism. Then follows another abrupt turn, this time to the concept of agape in the writings of Paul. Agape represents for Zizek the part of Christianity worth saving, the “legacy” that can undo the double bind in which Marxism is caught. What is particularly striking about the book’s trajectory is the way that Christianity appears first in a threatening role and then in a fruitful one, nearly vanishing in between. Before it can appear in a redemptive capacity, it seems, religion must first appear in the ominous guise of “fundamentalism.”

     

    Alongside Zizek’s misguided attacks on “fundamentalism,” there is a single moment of insight worth mentioning. In a chapter memorably entitled “Victims, Victims Everywhere,” the media portrayal of conditions in Kosovo is said to illustrate “the paradox of victimization: the Other to be protected is good insofar as it remains a victim… the moment it no longer behaves like a victim, but wants to strike back on its own, it magically turns all of a sudden into a terrorist/fundamentalist/drug-trafficking Other” (60). Here the figure of the “fundamentalist” is clearly a fetishized construction, a simplification structured to serve the interests of Western capitalist understanding. The target of Zizek’s critique is not “fundamentalism” at all but rather those who use the term unreflectively, dividing Others into “victims of religious persecution” and “fundamentalist radicals.” Such a critique is certainly long overdue in the context of U.S. discourse, where accusations of “fundamentalism” are readily directed at groups within the nation as well as without. Theoretical tasks immediately suggest themselves. For instance, there is the need to understand the relationship between familiar images of “fundamentalism” on the home front–the fanatical terrorist in Contact–and instantly recognizable images of “Islamic fundamentalism” deployed in films like Rules Of Engagement. It could be claimed that in popular film, fundamentalists, as well as victims, are everywhere.

     

    Unfortunately, and despite this suggestive moment of critique, fundamentalism as a secular fantasy also has a strong presence in this book. In fact the preface contains what qualifies as a classic instance of this fantasy. First there is an indictment of “one of the most deplorable aspects of the postmodern era,” namely “the return of the religious dimension in all its different guises: from Christian and other fundamentalisms, through the multitude of New Age spiritualisms, up to the emerging religious sensitivity within deconstructionism itself.” This alleged return raises the abiding question of “the religious legacy within Marxism itself” (1). Zizek’s approach to this question is, not surprisingly, an attempt at reversal:

     

    Instead of adopting such a defensive stance, allowing the enemy to define the terrain of the struggle, what one should do is to reverse the strategy by fully endorsing what one is accused of: yes, there is a direct lineage from Christianity to Marxism; yes, Christianity and Marxism should fight on the same side of the barricade against the onslaught of the new spiritualisms–the authentic Christian legacy is much too precious to be left to the fundamentalist freaks. (2)

     

    This certainly appears to reverse a traditional Marxist position on the question of religion, but it does so by way of a view of fundamentalism that could hardly be more predictable. The fundamentalist is the political “enemy,” the one whose dogmatic theological stance not only justifies but actually requires hostility on the part of the critic.2

     

    The baldness of this declaration is itself something of a landmark. Never before in a work of cultural theory has the prejudice against certain forms of religion been expressed so openly, and never have the specific contours of that prejudice surfaced in such a condensed form. The self/other antagonism finds clear expression in a language of boundaries and alliances but also deploys a language of monstrosity. The choice of the word “freaks” carries the conviction that fundamentalists, those on the other side of the “barricade,” are so utterly other as to put themselves beyond the reach of analysis. Tied to the image of the fundamentalist-as-other is an equally significant feature of secular ideology, namely a historicizing structure that approaches religion by way of its particular relation to temporality. The familiar Weberian claim that religion is in decline is the most visible example of this, but Zizek provides another. If the traditional language of “secularization” suggests that religion’s decline is inevitable, the language of “return” suggests some tidal rhythm that allows it to keep resurfacing. Though it might seem that there is a contradiction here between Zizek’s claim and the traditional line, the point of Zizek’s claim is not to critique the traditional position but simply to reverse it. The fact that secular historicism has trouble accounting for such returns is not itself a cause of distress, although religion’s “return” obviously is. This is not the first time a claim of return has been uttered, but its use necessitates a certain degree of forgetfulness.

     

    The more Zizek’s historicizing language about religion is examined, the less difference there appears to be between the traditional claim to decline and this latest announcement of return. In Weber’s Protestant Ethic, the stance is one of distance; religion is made an object of study, and its value is paradoxically derived from the assumption that it is vanishing. In his conclusion, Weber remarks that “the idea of duty in one’s calling prowls about in our lives like the ghost of dead religious beliefs” (182). The death of religion is so deeply presumed that it provides the kind of automatic reference point necessary for a simile. For Zizek, religion is not simply another element of culture to be studied and is certainly not vanishing from history. In fact its ahistoricity relative to other elements of culture, combined with the abhorrent reality of its “fundamentalist” manifestations, give it a peculiar and traumatic presence. In taking the fight to Christianity, insisting that it must be made to confess its alliance with Marxism, Zizek gives the impression that there is more than an external threat here–not simply a political challenge but an epistemological problem. It could certainly be argued that this anxiety is already latent in Weber’s assumption of theoretical distance, the insistence on containing religion within a framework of historical necessity. Nearly a century after Weber, religion has demonstrated an unexpected staying power, and the position of distance collapses. The question that haunts the background is the same.

     

    In order to function as an assumption, the question itself has to stay in the background. If made visible, it might read thus: How can secular thought tolerate the idea that religions continue to exist at all? More specifically, how can secular thought approach those forms of faith that make their political presence felt while subjugating the concerns of history to those of eternity (i.e., “fundamentalists”)? Once asked, the question smacks of the “immodest demands of transcendental narcissism” that William Connolly has ascribed to secular thought (8), a charge that would seem to require retrenchment of its claims to cultural and epistemological ascendancy. But in this book, the latest and boldest in a tradition of such immodesty, the shape of the answer still conceals its question.3 Clearly, the persistence of religion as a political and cultural force contradicts secular assumptions. But the self/other dichotomy created by the image of the “fundamentalist freak” places the blame for this contradiction on fundamentalists. The frequently declared “return” of religion, despite what secular thought knows to be true of its continuing existence, becomes the very evidence that return is unthinkable. In the tone of Zizek we might say that the fantasy of fundamentalism works like this: We all know that religion, because it is in decline, is illegitimate at best and potentially monstrous; therefore, if it is discovered that religion is not in decline at all and is in fact not only a living element of culture but a political and intellectual force as well, this proves beyond a shadow of a doubt just how monstrous it is!

     

    Given the circular nature of such assumptions about fundamentalism, it is not surprising that Zizek does little to analyze it as such. After the preface, he largely ignores religion for several chapters, turning instead to the issue that has always been central to his thought: the relationship between psychoanalytic conceptions of the subject and Marxist conceptions of ideology and politics. One of the central claims Zizek makes about subjectivity, stated here in a vocabulary less explicitly Lacanian than he has used in the past, is that “the paradox of the subject is that it exists only through its own radical impossibility, through a ‘bone in the throat’ that forever prevents it (the subject) from achieving its full ontological identity” (28). As always, such formulations are surrounded by examples (though again, this is not the best word for them) from the realm of culture and especially popular culture. There is a discussion of the crucial place of trash or excrement in postmodern art, an analysis of Coke as the ultimate example of surplus enjoyment, and a reading of the place of simulation in the constitution of sexual relationships in My Best Friend’s Wedding. In addition to this typical procedure, however, there is a reconsideration of the whole question of “radical impossibility” in light of current problems in Marxist thought. In this book even more than in his previous work, it is clear that for Zizek psychoanalysis is not merely a way to upgrade Marxism by making it more sensitive to questions of culture and subjectivity. A psychoanalytically informed Marxism seems to Zizek the best hope for a systematic critique of Marxism’s weaknesses and failures in the context of post-Soviet Europe.

     

    The failure of Communism, Zizek insists, was not the result of some defeat from without by the forces of capitalism. Instead, Communism was already “a fantasy inherent to capitalism itself” (18). If capitalism struggles with the contradictions created by surplus value and finds itself plunged again and again into crisis, then Communism is the fantasy that such crises could be abolished forever while the productive drive of capitalism is retained. In other words, Communism is a fantasy that the “radical impossibility” of the capitalist economy could be overcome without altering the structures of desire and enjoyment it produces. Zizek asserts not only that the progressive/utopian idea of pushing capitalism toward some final stage into Communism is a trap, but also that there is no hope of some return to pre-modern conditions which would do away with capitalist machinery and economics (as Tyler Durden aspires to do in Fight Club, to mention a film that will no doubt find its way into Zizek’s work in the very near future). Marxism must continue its work stripped of all its fantasies about a past before the advent of Capital or about a future that awaits it:

     

    The task of today’s thought is thus double: on the one hand, how to repeat the Marxist “critique of political economy” without the utopian-ideological notion of Communism as its inherent standard; on the other, how to imagine actually breaking out of the capitalist horizon without falling into the trap of returning to the eminently premodern notion of a balanced, (self)-restrained society. (19-20)

     

    Needless to say, this double task challenges Marxist theory far more than the business of critiquing artifacts of popular culture. Having implicated Marxism in capitalism’s “radical impossibility” in the fullest possible way, Zizek then attempts to work toward a new means of surpassing that impossibility. It is at this point that religion reappears, this time in the role of ally.

     

    Zizek’s key move is a transmutation of the problem of “radical impossibility” that leads back into the realm of theology. The double bind of Marxist theory, he asserts, has much in common with the paradox of the law in Christianity and Judaism. The problem of surpassing the fantasy of Communism without falling into fantasies of historical regression is seen to parallel the problem of how, finally, to settle the law’s demands. This second double bind is expressed thus:

     

    The “repressed” of Jewish monotheism is not the wealth of pagan sacred orgies and deities but the disavowed excessive nature of its own fundamental gestures: that is–to use the standard terms–the crime that founds the rule of the Law itself, the violent gesture that brings about a regime which retroactively makes this gesture itself illegal/criminal. (63)

     

    The “violent gesture” Zizek discusses here is the killing of the lawgiver that Freud posits in Moses and Monotheism, but it is translated into “standard terms,” that is, into the terms of a Lacanian discourse that can comprehend the productive drives of capitalism on the one hand and the cycle of law and transgression on the other. Just as Marxism is denied both the fantasy of a return to a “premodern” economy and the hope of a utopian future for capitalism, so Judaism is cut off from pagan conditions where the regime of the law does not yet exist and from a future in which the demands of the law could be met once and for all. Zizek’s leap from ideology to theology is a large one, but it is evidently made in the most serious way. The paradox that structures the Judeo-Christian economy is posited as a kind of spiritual proto-capitalism, giving explicit form to Zizek’s initial claim of a “direct lineage from Christianity to Marxism.”

     

    It is clear that Zizek does not think Christianity in any of its institutional forms provides the solution to Marxism’s dilemma. However, he still finds in Christian theology formulations that can point the way. The essence of the “authentic Christian legacy” is found in another passage from Paul, his analysis of the relationship between law and transgression in Romans 7. Paul’s observation that without law there is no knowledge of sin becomes an exploration of Christianity as a move to end the cycle of law and transgression. Far from simply attempting to fill up the structure of Judaic law through messianic redemption, Christianity seeks to move beyond the structure altogether. Zizek asks:

     

    What if the Christian wager is not Redemption in the sense of the possibility for the domain of the universal Law retroactively to “sublate”–integrate, pacify, erase–its traumatic origins, but something radically different, the cut into the Gordian knot of the vicious cycle of Law and its founding transgression? (100)

     

    What enables this cut is agape, which “simultaneously avoids narcissistic regression and remains outside the confines of the Law” (112-13). If all this sounds familiar, it is because it makes Christianity bear such a strong resemblance to a psychoanalytic model of self-transformation. Zizek even goes so far as to claim that “while it is easy to enjoy acting in a egoistic way against one’s duty, it is, perhaps, only as the result of psychoanalytic treatment that one can acquire the capacity to enjoy doing one’s duty” (141).4

     

    If we take Zizek’s claims simply as a reading of certain key moments in the writings of Paul, it is difficult to dispute the plausibility of the resemblance between psychoanalytic treatment and Christian conversion.5 But it is difficult to avoid the thought that there is a pattern of fetishism at work in a theoretical position that enthusiastically embraces those elements of Christianity which match psychoanalytic theory while rejecting what cannot be subsumed with corresponding zeal. Do we not have here an example of the “double attitude” Freud discusses, which simultaneously venerates and denigrates the fetish? Are not Zizek’s defense of the “subversive core of Christianity” (119) and his hostility for “fundamentalist freaks” two aspects of the same construction? Here we see how the collapse of Weber’s theoretical distance brings religion into play on both sides of the “barrier”; religion is at once a source of authorization and an uncanny threat. At the same time that it provokes the most extreme ideological hostility, religion’s traumatic status is the impetus for a struggle over its “legacy,” the core value that is the ostensible prize to be won from “fundamentalism.”

     

    Zizek’s way of treating religion in general and Christianity in particular suggests that before we secular critics declare ourselves fit to pass judgment on the nature of the “authentic Christian legacy,” we have much to do in the way of understanding the role played by religion in secular fantasy. In The Fragile Absolute, religion is made the basis for a solution to a dilemma in Marxist thought, providing both an enemy to oppose from without and a way to restructure difficulties from within. The question for secular theory at present is how to avoid this procedure of deploying religion in the interest of this or that project. If many of Zizek’s moves are examples of what we should avoid, his concepts of subjectivity nevertheless suggest the direction we might go from here. Agape, he argues, gives us a way to “liberate [ourselves] from the grip of existing social reality” by “renounc[ing] the transgressive fantasmic supplement that attaches us to it” (149). This renunciation must take the form of “the radical gesture of ‘striking at oneself’” (150), of aiming directly at the object of desire that grounds subjective and ideological stability. This gesture is illustrated, not surprisingly, by popular texts: The Shawshank Redemption, Beloved, Medea, and others. The line of thought I have been suggesting is meant to serve as another illustration, one that hits closer to home. The way in which Zizek’s argument is overtaken by the fetish of fundamentalism (and its complement, the “subversive core”) suggests that at the moment secular discourse needs to “strike at itself,” to make the secular and not religion the primary object of its critique.

     

    As a beginning, it seems worthwhile to get to work on a redefinition of the word “secular,” which needs to be understood (and has been used here, I hope) as marking a certain subjective stance with its own complex psychic life and not simply a set of pre-given discursive structures. At the same time, the secular will have to be more rigorously critiqued as an ideology which gives a place for that subjectivity. Such a redefinition will be greatly helped by the work of Slavoj Zizek. If his use of “fundamentalism” is cautionary, his understanding of ideological subjectivity gives us a way forward. Whatever “forward” means, it will involve neither a renewal of hostilities with this or that form of religion on the basis of historical presumption nor a “return,” repentant or otherwise, to a theological source of authorization. The history of such hostilities and returns should now become the focus. In the realm of critical theory, The Fragile Absolute is the latest chapter in that history. Caught between a vision of “the tears of agape” on the one hand and a fear of “fundamentalist freaks” on the other, it stops short of a recognition of its own secular ideology.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Thanks to Larry Scanlon for a timely word on Pauline scholarship.

     

    2. The majority of this review was completed before September 11 and I thought it inadvisable to attempt a revision which would address recent events at length. Suffice it to say that official and unofficial responses alike have largely conformed to the generic parameters I describe for “fundamentalism” as a discourse. We have repeatedly heard the notion that fundamentalism is beyond the reach of analysis, that it falls into some category of absolute evil which renders it unworthy of discursive engagement (and eminently worthy of hostility). Even some responses which attempt to challenge this notion nonetheless end up reiterating it. Take for example the parallels many have made between Osama bin Laden and Jerry Falwell. If the impetus of the parallel is to upset racist and nationalist notions about fundamentalism, the end result is to establish a more unilateral prejudice which blocks an understanding of fundamentalism as a discourse (and does little to get at the roots of racism or nationalism either).

     

    3. I am thinking of Louis Althusser’s discussion of Marx in the opening chapter of Reading “Capital.” Althusser insists that Marx’s achievement lies not in his providing more accurate answers to the questions posed by classical economics but rather in his ability to perceive the real nature of its questions. So here, the point is not to differ with Zizek concerning what ought to be done with the Christian legacy nor suggest a different response to the “return” of religion. Rather than attempting to answer such questions, the unexpressed intention of the questions themselves must be examined.

     

    4. This kind of enjoyment would seem also to be the subject of Blue and particularly of its conclusion. The music playing in the background as Julie is “reconciled with the universe” is a piece written by the heroine to celebrate the formation of the EEC. Throughout the movie she has disavowed authorship of the piece, but at the last she decides to claim it as her own and complete it. What strikes a chord with Zizek’s view of agape is that Julie does not act against her duty, as it were, and refuse to complete a work officially intended to commemorate a new era of capitalism in Europe. Instead, she actively and passionately embraces the work, though in such a way as to give it a more particular and more radical meaning in relation to her life. Such an intensely private political vision raises questions about the value of agape other than those I discuss here.

     

    5. Though my concern with Zizek’s view of Christianity is the way it functions as a secular ideology, it is at least worth mentioning that his “Christian” view of Paul has related problems as well. By stressing the distinction between Judaism and Christianity in a way that re-canonizes Paul as a Christian, Zizek makes a highly contestable theological claim, even if his intentions are only to reclaim Paul for Lacan, Freud, and Marx.

    Works Cited

     

    • Althuser, Louis, and Etienne Balibar. Reading “Capital.” Trans. Ben Brewster. New York: Random House, 1970.
    • Connolly, William. Why I Am Not a Secularist. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1999.
    • Freud, Sigmund. “Fetishism.” Trans. Joan Riviere. Sexuality and the Psychology of Love. Ed. Philip Rieff. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1963.
    • Weber, Max. The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism. Trans. Talcott Parsons. New York: Routledge, 1992.

     

  • Returning to the Mummy

    Lisa Hopkins

    School of Cultural Studies
    Sheffield Hallam University
    L.M.Hopkins@shu.ac.uk

     

    Review of: The Mummy Returns.Dir. Stephen Sommers. Perf. Brendan Fraser, Rachel Weisz, and Arnold Vosloo. MCA/Universal, 2002.

     

    On her arrival at a pre-election Conservative Party rally at the Plymouth Pavilion in May 2002, former British Prime Minister Margaret Thatcher cracked a rare joke. “I was told beforehand my arrival was unscheduled,” she said, “but on the way here I passed a local cinema and it turns out you were expecting me after all. The billboard read, ‘The Mummy Returns’” (MacAskill). Predictably, this got a laugh from her audience. What, however, did she actually mean? The word “mummy” has two senses–an affectionate diminutive of “mother” and an embalmed corpse–and, depending perhaps on one’s own political affiliation, either might seem an appropriate description of Thatcher. The Guardian seemed to incline to the former when it headed its report “Tory matriarch goes on stage and off message,” which posited her as a kind of monstrous mother returning to smother and stymie the hapless William Hague, but The Independent quoted an unidentified former Tory minister as saying after the election, “I wish The Mummy had stayed in her box…. Every time she pops up, she costs us votes” (Grice), where the reference to “box” seems clearly to align her with a corpse. It is, perhaps, suggestive that the generally left-wing, anti-Thatcher Guardian should think of her as a mother, while a former Tory minister, who might reasonably be supposed to be more in sympathy with her, should think of her merely as a corpse: is the mother actually more menacing than the embalmed body?

     

    At first sight, this ambiguity may seem to be entirely absent from the film to which Thatcher was referring, Stephen Sommers’s 2002 blockbuster The Mummy Returns, the sequel to his 1999 hit The Mummy, since the mummy in question is, in both films, male: it is that of the high priest Imhotep, condemned to eternal undeath after he murdered the Pharaoh Seti I because he desired the latter’s mistress, Ankh-Su-Namun. We see both their love and their death in a brief vignette at the start of the film, and then switch swiftly to the early twentieth century, where Brendan Fraser’s legionnaire becomes involved in helping Rachel Weisz’s Egyptologist search for Hamunaptra, the city where Seti is supposed to have concealed his treasure. Inevitably, Weisz accidentally brings Imhotep back to life, and he proceeds to regenerate by sucking dry the team of American adventurers who first disturbed his resting place. This seems a bit rough on them, since it was Weisz’s character, Evie Carnahan, who actually reanimated him, but then Imhotep has designs of another sort on her, since he proposes to sacrifice her to effect the resurrection of Ankh-Su-Namun. To this extent, Sommers’s Mummy obviously pays homage to Karl Freund’s 1932 film of the same name, where the heroine, Zita Johann’s Helen Grosvenor, is identified by Boris Karloff’s reanimated mummy as the long-lost princess Ankh-Su-Namun. The debt is also acknowledged when a severed hand moves of its own accord across the floor, though Sommer’s film of course leaves its predecessor far behind in special effects, even allowing itself a little self-congratulation when Kevin J. O’Connor’s disreputable Beni says to Imhotep, “I loved the whole sand-wall effect…. Beautiful, just beautiful.”

     

    It goes without saying that Evie is rescued from Imhotep in the end by Fraser’s character, the relentlessly gung-ho Rick O’Connell, thus leaving the way clear for a sequel (the film was such an instant hit that studio bosses requested a second one immediately). The Mummy Returns was released almost exactly two years after its predecessor and brought together pretty much every character from the first film who wasn’t dead, plus two who were, since Imhotep and Ankh-Su-Namun both returned. It also added a new villain, the Scorpion King, played by the wrestler The Rock; gave Evie and Rick an eight-year-old son, Alex; and introduced Rick’s old friend Izzy (played by Shaun Parkes). Plot, as many reviewers commented, is not the strong point of The Mummy Returns, but to give a quick summary, Alex is kidnapped by Ankh-Su-Namun and Imhotep; Izzy produces a dirigible which allows the frantic parents to trace their son; and there is a spectacular three-way showdown between Rick, Imhotep, and the Scorpion King which concludes with the villains defeated but with enough life in them still to make it back for the inevitable second sequel, which will doubtless have even bigger battles and ever more monstrous monsters.

     

    These, then, sound like clear-cut action films, with no place for the kind of ambiguity that was operating when the title of The Mummy Returns was borrowed as a designation for Margaret Thatcher. In fact, it becomes increasingly clear that the ambiguity is indeed active in Sommers’s film, for there is an alternative candidate for the role of the returning mummy, one whom the film arguably does, at least on some level, find more menacing even than Imhotep. Both kinds of mummies are scary, as I hope to show by tracing the changing nature of the narratives of Sommers’s two films in relation both to each other and to their influences and predecessors.

     

    Though the ambiguity in the nature of the menace is more pronounced in The Mummy Returns, it was to some extent present from the very outset of Sommers’s project. The souvenir film program for The Mummy lists “Jerry Glover’s Nearly Top Ten Mummy Movies.” Glover’s number 6 is the 1959 The Mummy, which, he observes, “spawned three sequels, proving that, along with Dracula, Hammer’s heart belonged to mummy” (31). Forty years later, the 1999 The Mummy showed clear signs of an allegiance equally split between mummies and Dracula, for those familiar with the works of Bram Stoker could hardly fail to notice that Sommers’s first film was, in many respects, a heady mixture of Dracula and The Jewel of Seven Stars. The conjunction is an interesting one in many respects. It is notable that eight out of ten of Jerry Glover’s “Nearly Top Ten Mummy Movies” center, like Dracula and Frankenstein, on male monsters, and in recent years the trend toward co-opting vampirism as a metaphor for AIDS has meant that it is the sexual predatoriness of men rather than women that tends to be emphasized, making Stoker’s male monster a culturally useful avatar. When Stoker wrote The Jewel of Seven Stars, though, Queen Victoria had only just died, leaving the memory of a long matriarchy fresh in people’s minds, and the alarming figure of the New Woman, to which Stoker refers directly in Dracula, loomed equally large in the popular consciousness. Consequently, perhaps, both his mummy and four out of the five vampires we encounter in Dracula (as well as the pseudo-vampire in The Lady of the Shroud) are female, as also was the first vampire to be encountered in the original version of the novel, Countess Dolingen of Gratz. If The Mummy wanted to explore anxieties about gender, therefore, what better way than to draw on both Stoker’s kinds of monsters, his mummy and his vampire?

     

    Given the fact that the film’s central character was a mummy, the debt to The Jewel of Seven Stars was unsurprising. This had already been the inspiration, as Glover acknowledges, for Blood From the Mummy’s Tomb (1971) and The Awakening (1980), not to mention Jeffrey Obrow’s 1997 Bram Stoker’s Legend of the Mummy and, subsequently, David DeCoteau’s Ancient Evil: Scream of the Mummy (2000). Some of these show more obvious signs of indebtedness than Sommers’s film, but there are clear parallels between The Jewel of Seven Stars and The Mummy. In each case, the mummy of an accursed individual who hopes for resurrection is buried in a hidden grave whose occupant is identified only as “nameless.” In The Mummy, the inscription on the tomb of Imhotep is “he who must not be named,” and Evie comments that the intention is clearly to destroy both his body and his soul–“This man must have been condemned not only in this life but in the next” (though this is also a detail found in Universal’s original 1932 The Mummy). In The Jewel of Seven Stars, Corbeck is told by the locals when he asks about Tera’s tomb that “there was no name; and that anyone who should name it would waste away in life so that at death nothing of him would remain to be raised again in the Other World” (96). In each, cats play a part in the story–in the case of The Mummy, in an episodic and ultimately unsatisfactory way which, in its failure to be logically integrated into the narrative, clearly suggests that an original source text has not been fully assimilated. (There was a cat in the 1932 Mummy, but it was Imhotep’s ally rather than his enemy.) In each, the natives show a fear not shared by the explorers, which in both instances proves abundantly justified by the fact that both tombs are booby-trapped. In both texts, too, a disembodied hand moves by itself, and in both the identity of a daughter proves to have been fundamentally constituted by an Egyptologist father. In Stoker’s novel, Margaret Trelawny proves to have been radically shaped by the explorations her father was undertaking at the time of her birth, whilst in The Mummy, Evie owes her very existence to her father’s passion for Egypt and his subsequent decision to marry her Egyptian mother. Even Evie’s employment in an Egyptological library is due to the fact that her parents were among its most generous benefactors. Finally, in each case the reanimation of a female mummy is partially achieved and then abruptly aborted, and in each this leads directly to the death of at least one of the main male characters: in the original ending of The Jewel of Seven Stars all but Malcolm Ross died, and in The Mummy it is because he is distracted by the fate of Ankh-Su-Namun that Imhotep fails to stop Jonathan from reading the incantation that will make him mortal and allow Rick to kill him. (In The Mummy Returns, it will, of course, be even more obvious that it is to Ankh-Su-Namun that Imhotep directly owes his death.)

     

    That it should be the attempt to create a female monster which ultimately brings about the destruction of the male monster is, however, not a characteristic of The Jewel of Seven Stars–where those who die as a result are those whom we have by and large identified as “good” characters. It does, however, serve as a pretty fair description of both Dracula and its great avatar Frankenstein: in Dracula, it is the count’s vamping of Lucy which first alerts the Crew of Light to his existence, and his attempted vamping of Mina then creates a telepathic link that allows them to locate and destroy him; in Frankenstein, Victor’s refusal to complete the female monster leads ultimately to the deaths of both himself and the Creature, not to mention Elizabeth. There are also other crossovers that weave their way between Dracula, The Jewel of Seven Stars, and The Mummy, most notably in the scene in which Imhotep enters Evie’s locked room in the form of sand, a clear emblem of affiliation with the desert, before metamorphosing into a man who bends down and kisses her as she sleeps, just as Dracula does with Mina.

     

    Equally, though, there are some elements of The Mummy that appear to owe their genesis to Dracula alone. In The Jewel of Seven Stars, the alien being is female and, in an obvious parody of the contemporary popularity of “mummy” striptease acts, must submit to being stripped naked by the Edwardian gentlemen who have control of her corpse. In The Mummy, however, as in Dracula, these roles are reversed because the monster is male and poised to sexually prey on modern females. The increasing skimpiness of Imhotep’s costume, culminating in a pair of briefs and a cloak for his planned reunion with his lost love, makes this abundantly clear; the cape-like cloak further reinforces the echoes of Dracula, as does the fact that the fleeing soul of Ankh-Su-Namun clearly resembles a bat. Equally, Beni’s attempt to deter Imhotep by holding up a crucifix might serve to align Imhotep with a vampire–this is certainly how it is seen in Max Allan Collins’s official novelization of the film (Mummy 156). The way in which Imhotep sucks people dry in order to rejuvenate also directly parallels the way in which the count’s blood-drinking causes him to appear significantly younger when Jonathan Harker sees him in London, and indeed the curse on Imhotep’s tomb explicitly affirms that he will return initially as an “Un-dead.” The shared name of Jonathan Harker and Evie’s brother Jonathan Carnahan functions as a further link between the two texts, as does Imhotep’s ability to command the elements and predatory lower life-forms. Similarly, the idea of using a modern woman to resurrect an ancient one may be central to The Jewel of Seven Stars, but the specifically erotic inflection provided by the fact that in The Mummy it is not the dead woman herself but her long-lost lover who wishes to effect the resurrection is more reminiscent of Coppola’s Dracula than of Stoker’s mummy fiction. Also strongly echoing the basic situation of Dracula is the dearth of women in The Mummy and the subsequent fierceness of the competition over them.

     

    Most interestingly, both texts share a fascination with Jewishness. As many critics have noticed, Dracula, with its bloodsucking, gold-grubbing, hook-nosed monster, is a clearly anti-Semitic text. The Mummy, meanwhile, shows strong debts not only to Stoker but also to Steven Spielberg’s Raiders of the Lost Ark, whose plot centers on the recovery of the Hebrew Ark of the Covenant. This is perhaps most obvious in the depiction of the hero, which is also where The Mummy departs most sharply from Stoker. Stoker’s heroes, with the notable exception of Rupert Sent Leger in The Lady of the Shroud, tend to be found wanting in moments of crisis; all too often, they are still worrying about what they should do long after they have lost the moment when they could have done anything at all. In this respect Rick O’Connell, singlehandedly five times more effective than the entire Crew of Light put together (not to mention the negligible Frank Whemple in the 1932 Mummy), clearly owes much less to Stoker than to Indiana Jones, of whom he is obviously a direct descendant.

     

    There are a number of points of marked similarity between The Mummy and the Indiana Jones trilogy: the long-lost Egyptian city, locatable only by an antique map, which houses fabulous treasures; the transformation in the appearance of the hero, from adventurer-archaeologist to college professor in the case of Indiana Jones and from legionnaire to wild man and back again in the case of Rick O’Connell; the repeated hair’s-breadth escapes from danger; and our hero’s ultimate disdain of personal profit. (Though the camels on which Rick and Evie escape are in fact loaded with the treasure stashed in the saddlebags by Beni, which presumably finances the splendor of their house in The Mummy Returns, they are unaware of these riches at the time.) There is also the fact that Evie, like Marion in Raiders of the Lost Ark, has to make up to her captor to distract his attention from the doings of her true love; there is the presence of hideous supernatural peril and of parallels between The Mummy‘s Ardeth Bay and his followers and the hereditary guardians of the holy place in Indiana Jones and the Last Crusade; and at the end of both The Mummy and Raiders of the Lost Ark the villain’s soul is borne away to Hell. Even Imhotep’s nonchalant crunching of the beetle which enters his face through the hole in his cheek could be seen as a reprise of the moment in Raiders of the Lost Ark in which a fly crawls across the cheek of the French archaeologist Belloc while he is speaking, apparently disappearing into his mouth without him noticing. (This moment has been airbrushed out of the video version of Raiders of the Lost Ark but was clearly visible in the original film.)

     

    In the Jewish Spielberg’s Raiders of the Lost Ark, however, the villains are Nazis, whom Indiana Jones, though not himself Jewish, detests. By contrast, The Mummy is not without its share of Jewish actors–Oded Fehr’s Ardeth Bay, Rachel Weisz’s Evelyn–but they play Arab characters (Evelyn is half-Egyptian, Ardeth Bay a Tuareg), and though the mummy (unlike Dracula) has no fear of the cross or of the image of Buddha, he spares Beni and indeed gives him gold when he brandishes the Star of David and utters what Imhotep terms “the language of the slaves” (Hebrew–which Beni conveniently happens to know). Later, what finally returns Imhotep to mortality is Evie’s utterance of a word which sounds suspiciously like “Kaddish,” and one might also note the film’s distinct animus against the redundancy of the British air force, in the presence of the emblematically named Winston, who have nothing better to do than fool around drunkenly and futilely in the Middle East–with, perhaps, the possible implication that this was effectively what they were doing when they later presided over the birth of the state of Israel. In this respect, the conjunction of Dracula with The Jewel of Seven Stars allows not only for a convergence of vampires and mummies, but also for another convergence which the film seems to find ideologically interesting: that of Egypt with Israel. (It is notable that the equivalent character to Beni in the 1932 Mummy, who is also identified as a hereditary slave of the Egyptians, was Nubian.)

     

    Even more anxiety-ridden than the film’s depiction of racial and national identities, however, is its depiction of gender. Although O’Connell is far closer to the classically heroic status of Indiana Jones than to the beleaguered masculinity of Stoker’s heroes, there are also distinct differences from the Indiana Jones films in general and from Raiders of the Lost Ark in particular. In the first place, in The Mummy it is the heroine, not the hero, who is knowledgeable about Egypt, able to decipher hieroglyphic inscriptions and correct the obnoxious Beni’s translation of Imhotep’s ancient Egyptian. When Jonathan Hyde’s Egyptologist dismisses his rivals’ expedition on the grounds that its leader is a woman and therefore incapable of knowing anything, the camera immediately cuts to Evie expounding precisely what she knows. Conversely, although Brendan Fraser (who plays O’Connell) remarks in the film program that his character is “sometimes the brain and sometimes the brawn in a situation” (11), the element of brawn is far more pronounced, not least in the fact that whereas college professor Indiana Jones always preferred to try his hand with a rope, falling back on a gun principally for the sake of a gag–as in the famous scene in Raiders of the Lost Ark where, confronted with a crack swordsman, he shoots him–O’Connell shoots (usually with two guns) at everything, whether it is animate or not. (At one point, Evie, being led to be sacrificed, hears a gunshot outside and says happily, “O’Connell!” Quite.) Even when he is standing against a wall at which bullets are being shot at regular intervals, Evie has to tug him out of what will obviously be the trajectory of the next one. His resolute preference for not using whatever intelligence he may possess seems all part of a reversal of roles that is completed when, in a direct inversion of a scene from Raiders of the Lost Ark, the build-up to a kiss between hero and heroine is interrupted by one of them passing out–only this time it is the heroine, not the hero, who loses consciousness, and it is through drunkenness, not excessive fatigue.

     

    In one way, what seems to be at work here is simply a cultural shift which has ensured that the feistiness of Raiders of the Lost Ark‘s Marion has been replaced by quietist, post-feminist gender roles–it is notable that Evie, unlike Marion, cannot hold her drink and falls over when she tries to learn to throw punches. (Indeed one might notice that the Indiana Jones films themselves discarded Marion, and in fact never settled to a heroine, with Karen Allen’s Marion giving way without explanation or comment to Kate Capshaw’s Willie Scott in the second and no heroine at all in the third, since Alison Doody’s Dr. Elsa Schneider turns out to be a villainess.) Thus, though Evie may be clever, she is quite incapable of looking after herself (she even has an accident in her own library) and must rely on O’Connell periodically to rescue her. Indeed, one might well conclude that the film’s ultimate moral is that while half-naked hussies will only attract losers, nice demure girls will always find themselves properly taken care of.

     

    Equally, however, there are clear traces of a counternarrative at work in The Mummy. In this respect, the most interesting figure is Evie’s feckless brother, Jonathan. The first time we see him is when Evie, alone in the Egyptological museum, hears a noise. Clearly scared, she goes to investigate and is horribly startled by Jonathan popping up out of a sarcophagus. Quietly but implicitly, Jonathan is thus initially identified with a mummy, though he himself seems immediately to seek to undo this by addressing Evie as “Old Mum.” In the next sequence, Jonathan and Evie visit an imprisoned O’Connell, whose pocket Jonathan had previously picked. Reaching through the bars, O’Connell punches Jonathan and kisses Evie, actions which, amongst other purposes, seem clearly to interpellate them in their respective gender roles. Jonathan, however, does not stay put in his, because not only does he prove to need rescuing by O’Connell nearly as often as Evie does, he also puts himself into her place in other ways: when O’Connell, having seen off Imhotep, asks Evie, “Are you all right?,” it is Jonathan who answers, “Well… not sure.” Not for nothing does he refer to O’Connell at one point as “the man” (assuming as he does so that O’Connell’s injunction to stay put and keep out of danger applies to him as well as to Evie). Most notably, when O’Connell sets off to rescue the parasol-carrying Egyptologist from Imhotep, he tells Jonathan, Henderson, and Daniels to come with him and Evie to stay in safety. The three men, however, are all too scared to come, while Evie is equally adamant that she won’t stay behind. Not until O’Connell scoops her up in a fireman’s lift, tosses her on the bed, and locks the door on her are gender roles restored–but even then it is visibly at the price of conceding that however firmly they may thus be instantiated, the majority of the film’s characters don’t actually conform to them.

     

    Moreover, intertextual echoes may well mean that, for some members of the audience at least, even O’Connell’s position is not fully assured. When he appears long-haired and unkempt in a Cairo prison, Brendan Fraser is obviously reprising his role as the eponymous hero of the 1997 Disney film George of the Jungle, while Evie’s “What’s a nice place like this doing in a girl like me?” recalls the chat-up line George proposes to use on Ursula, “What’s a nice girl like you doing in a plane like this?” In one sense George is of course the ultimate wild man, over whom all Ursula’s girlfriends swoon when they see him running with a horse, but he does also appear in a dress and, at the outset, has indeed no concept of gender at all, referring to the hyper-feminine Ursula as a “fella.” Since Ursula dislikes her official fiancé and runs off instead with the socially unacceptable outsider George, the possible intertext with The Mummy is doubly interesting here.

     

    In The Mummy Returns, the note of uncertainty thus introduced in The Mummy is further developed, and new areas of anxiety are highlighted. The Mummy Returns opened, in Britain at least, to a barrage of distinctly lukewarm reviews that stressed the incoherence of its plot. The Independent reviewed it twice in two days and hated it both times, with Anthony Quinn demanding, “Are you following all this? I don’t think the filmmakers could care less if you do or not…. There’s nothing so old-fashioned as plot development here, just a pile-up of set-pieces.” Peter Preston in The Observer asked, “What’s going on here? Silly question, one beyond any computer’s figuring…. Summon the Raiders of the Lost Plot. Nothing in Stephen Sommers’s screenplay makes, or is intended to make, any sense,” while Xan Brooks in The Guardian more succinctly advised, “Forget trying to follow the plot.”

     

    There certainly are uncertainties about its plot. “Why?” asks Imhotep when the Scorpion King hoists up the curator, and one can think of few better questions. What is the curator’s motivation? Why does he need Imhotep to fight the Scorpion King? What happens to Evie’s previously mortal wound when she is resurrected? What is the nature of the apparent feud between Ardeth Bey and Lock-Nah? Who is Patricia Velazquez’s character before the soul of Ankh-Su-Namun takes possession of her? Is Rick really a Medjai, and if so, does it matter? Where exactly would Anubis, a jackal, wear a bracelet? Perhaps most puzzlingly, who on earth are the pygmies? The only possible explanation for them seems to come from Rick’s remark right at the beginning about the shortness of Napoleon, together with production designer Allan Cameron’s observation, in The Mummy Unwrapped, that design for the film had relied heavily on a volume of Egyptian sketches produced for Napoleon.

     

    A far deeper faultline, however, runs through the second film, and that is its representation of its characters. In the preview of The Mummy Returns included in the “ultimate edition” of The Mummy, director Stephen Sommers observes that his paramount aim in making the sequel was to retain as many of the same characters as possible, but to make their relationships “more intertwining.” He has certainly reprised for all he is worth: Cairo Museum in the first film is replaced by the British Museum in this, Alex collapses pillars in a domino-like fashion just as Evie did the bookshelves, and he can’t read the last word of the incantation just as Jonathan couldn’t in the first film (and it’s the same word). So close are the similarities, indeed, that Anthony Quinn in The Independent complained that “this didn’t look like a sequel. This looked like a remake… this is the worst case of déjà vu I’ve ever had in a cinema.” The debt to Indiana Jones, too, is not only revisited but extended, with the lamplit digging scene directly pastiching that in Raiders of the Lost Ark and the presence of Alex invoking the spinoff series Young Indiana Jones, particularly in the scene in which he runs through the ruins of a temple, with gunfire all around him, looking like a miniature version of his father in the legionnaire sequence of the first film. (This element is even more pronounced in the spinoff novelization Revenge of the Scorpion King, billed as the first of “The Mummy Chronicles,” in which Alex, now 12, bands together with Jewish refugee Rachel to prevent Hitler doing a deal with Anubis.)

     

    There are changes, though. Perhaps the most noticeable of these is that almost as strong as the influence of the Indiana Jones trilogy is that of the Star Wars films, and most particularly The Phantom Menace, which opened in the same summer as the original Mummy and was thus its direct comparator and rival. Nicholas Barber in The Independent on Sunday scathingly listed just a few of the similarities:

     

    The Phantom Menace introduced a mop-topped blond boy to the cast; The Mummy Returns does the same. The Phantom Menace used racial caricatures; The Mummy Returns has dozens of desert-folk machine-gunned and burned alive. And just as Star Wars had an archetypal fairy-tale clarity that was subsequently obscured by portentous back-story and pseudo-spiritual mumbo jumbo, The Mummy Returns is clogged up with complicated exposition and flashbacks that serve no purpose except to lay foundations for another sequel. It even blabs on about the sacred “Medjai” warriors – couldn’t Sommers have come up with a name that didn’t share four letters with Jedi?

     

    Other elements of similarity between the two films could also be pointed out. The final battle of The Mummy Returns, where the warriors of Anubis disappear on the death of the Scorpion King, clearly echoes the final fight of The Phantom Menace, where the droids drop when the mother ship is disabled (and in each case the large-scale fight is taking place in the open air while the crucial smaller one is in a confined space). When the first vision generated by the bracelet of Anubis fades away, there is a noise just like that of a light sabre. There are also echoes of the earlier Star Wars films. The new character Izzy closely parallels Lando Calrissian from The Empire Strikes Back: both are black (something to which Izzy draws attention by referring to Rick as “the white boy”), both are introduced by the hero to the heroine as an old acquaintance but immediately react in an apparently hostile way, and both supply an aircraft. Thus Rick, having started his career in the first film as Harrison Ford in the Indiana Jones trilogy, seems now to have been reinvented as Harrison Ford in the Star Wars trilogy, a parallel made even clearer when Ardeth, having identified him as a Medjai and Evelyn as the reincarnation of Nefertiri, tells him that it is his preordained role to protect a royal woman just as Han Solo protects Princess Leia.

     

    Most significantly, the incorporation of motifs and borrowings from the Star Wars series has helped The Mummy Returns become something which The Mummy, by and large, was not: Gothic. This is an element clearly present in Star Wars, where the ostensible opposition of Darth Vader and Luke Skywalker rapidly gives place to a paired and conflicted relationship in which the one sees the other in the mirror. In The Mummy, however, oppositions stay, by and large, opposed. There are one or two moments of doubling–Imhotep staring after his own soul-self as it is borne away to hell, the twinned books, Beni facing the mummy for the first time with matching expressions on their faces–but in general the film occupies a terrain in which the bad are simply bad and the good are simply good.

     

    In the second film, however, identities and affiliations prove much less stable: it is after all, as Max Allan Collins’s novelization declares, an expedition for Evie “to discover not the history of the pharaohs, but the meaning of her own dreams” (16-17). We may, for instance, be disconcerted to find Ardeth Bay in the company of the baddies, and although we may guess that his motive is to keep an eye on them, Rick’s first response is to smash him against the wall and demand to know where Evie is. Most notably, although actions are directly repeated from the first film, as with the reading of the incantation and the demolishing of the pillars, they are not performed by the same person, as though identities are shifting. There are also other doublings and pairings. We learn for the first time that Evie was Nefertiri in a previous life (a doubling strongly reminiscent of that of Margaret and Tera in Stoker’s The Jewel of Seven Stars). Similarly, Meela is Ankh-Su-Namun reincarnated and Rick’s tattoo seems to identify him as one of the Medjai. (Though this, unless it is leading up to a further sequel, proves to be a bit of a narrative red herring and is also complicated by the fact that the novelization for children describes the tattoo as proving that he is “a Masonic Templar” [Whitman 63] and the novelization for adults calls him a “Knight Templar” [Collins, Mummy Returns 96], even though common elements to both which do not appear in the film clearly indicate that both were based on the shooting script.)

     

    The most notable instance of these doublings and slippages takes us back to Margaret Thatcher’s joke. When Evie goes with Imhotep in the first film, she turns back to Rick and says, “If he makes me into a mummy, you’re the first one I’m coming after.” In one way, the meaning of this remark and of the surrounding sequence is obvious: she loves Rick and is hoping he will rescue her before Imhotep can kill her. But it is also shadowed by other meanings. In the first place, what would she be “coming after” Rick for–because she loves him, or because, having been made into a monster herself, she would seek him as prey? There would certainly be a direct Stokerian precedent here in a precisely parallel situation: Lucy’s attempted vamping of Arthur. More troublingly, from the first time he sees her, Imhotep has identified Evie with his lost love, Ankh-Su-Namun. Every time he has met her subsequently, he has tried to kiss her (and on one occasion has succeeded). He has therefore clearly been established as an alternative suitor. Of course, there might well seem to be no contest: O’Connell is dashing, handsome, honorable, and alive, whereas Imhotep passes through a variety of stages of decay and proposes to kill Evie. Nevertheless, a different interpretation is offered in Max Allan Collins’s novelization of the film.

     

    Collins–who, suggestively, also directed and novelized Mommy (1995) and Mommy’s Day (1997), in which an apparently perfect mother is revealed to be evil–seems several times to incriminate Evie. He develops the idea sketched in the sequence where she tells O’Connell and the Americans, “Let’s be nice, children. If we’re going to play together we must learn to share,” by having her think, “Men were such children” (142). He also makes Jonathan ask the Americans after the blinding of Burns, “Going back home to mummy?” (166). Again this develops a much fainter hint in the film, when Jonathan explains to Rick the meaning of a preparation chamber–“Mummies, my good son. This is where they made the mummies”–where sons and mothers are forced briefly but uneasily into conjunction. Most suggestively, Collins invents for the sleeping Evie a dream sequence in which she is having

     

    nearly delirious images of herself and O’Connell fleeing from the mummy across the ruins of the City of the Dead, only at times she was fleeing from Rick and holding on to the mummy’s hand… it was all very troubling, which was why she was moaning, even crying out in her fitful sleep. (188)

     

    For Collins, Imhotep here is less a monster than the handsome prince awakening Snow White (189). And after all, Rick has already had to demand of Evie, “You dream about dead guys?”

     

    Can this really be true? When Evie says to O’Connell, “if he makes me into a mummy, you’re the first one I’m coming after,” can her words, at any level, really be gesturing at an alternative possibility in which it is Imhotep who becomes her successful suitor, going so far as to impregnate her, and O’Connell whom she would seek to destroy? On the level of common sense, this is patently absurd. But on the darker levels of the subconscious, perhaps the film does not find its heroine so biddable as it might like–it is certainly not hard to read her slamming of the suitcase on Rick’s hands as a snapping vagina dentata, while the scarabs which emerge from mouths clearly recall the Alien films, with their clear interest in the monstrous-feminine–nor is its mummy quite so repellent as one might expect. In The Mummy Unwrapped, producer Sean Daniel refers to Imhotep as “an extremely dangerous and extremely handsome man,” and Pete Hammond, whose role as “film analyst” introduces an interesting ambiguity, opines that “people want to believe in a life after death situation,” and thus sees the figure of the mummy as representing, however bizarrely, a wish fulfilment rather than a threat. Certainly when Ardeth and Dr. Bey explain that Imhotep must still love Ankh-Su-Namun after three thousand years, Evie observes, “that’s very romantic,” and in one sense, so it is. It is of course unusual for a mummy fiction to include a romance element at all. (Though it is true that both The Jewel of Seven Stars and the 1932 Mummy do, both are nugatory.) We might thus expect the initial concentration on the romance of Imhotep and Ankh-Su-Namun to continue to be the focus of interest and to be viewed more sympathetically than ultimately it is. We certainly could not predict at that stage that the initial kiss between Imhotep and Ankh-Su-Namun would ultimately be replaced by that between Rick and Evie at the close, and though Ardeth Bay obviously regards Imhotep as evil, we are not necessarily inclined to take his word for it since, in the first place, others of the Medjai have already tried to stab Evie, and, in the second, Ardeth Bey was actually the alias used by Imhotep himself in the 1932 Mummy. And it is also noticeable that The Mummy Returns seems to find Imhotep so insufficiently scary that it feels obliged to supplement the menace he offers with that provided by the Scorpion King (who, in another instance of these films’ perverse ability to find their villains rather than their hero attractive, in fact upstages Imhotep so much that he is now set to star in his own spinoff, The Scorpion King, due for release in 2002).

     

    In one way, however, the Scorpion King proves unnecessary, because there is already an extra threat present in the second film, and it comes from Evie. However faint the hint of menace playing over her in the first film, it is far more clearly marked in the second. (The menace was also there in the 1932 Mummy, where Helen Grosvenor, pathologized from the outset by being under the care of the doctor, fed bromide when she puts on her make-up and tries to join Imhotep, and explicitly associated with the adulterous temptress Helen of Troy, is a reincarnation of Ankh-Su-Namun.) Indeed, while the treatment of O’Connell in The Mummy Returns is much as it was in The Mummy, the characterization of Evie has been fundamentally reconceived. Despite her hopelessness during the boxing lesson in the first film, where she displayed an inability to cope so profound that she even had to ask a blind man for help, she is now a superbly accomplished fighter and rescues Jonathan from Ankh-Su-Namun. She no longer needs her glasses, and she wears trousers. Most strikingly, toward the end of The Mummy Returns, there is an entirely unprepared-for narrative twist: Ankh-Su-Namun, on her way into the temple, turns and stabs Evie in the stomach, from which Evie shortly after dies, only to be restored to life by Alex reading the incantation from the Book of Amun-Ra. Since Evie’s death proves to be only temporary, the event may seem to have little narrative significance, but its thematic resonances are great. In particular, it is the first time that her son Alex, rather than O’Connell, rescues her. For him, at least, Evie is the mummy who returns.

     

    Is she for the rest of us? Is Evie, in some bizarre sense, the monster we most fear? Ankh-Su-Namun’s choice of the stomach as the site of attack is certainly suggestive. (Rick, by contrast, is habitually attacked in the neck: the botched hanging at a Cairo prison, the Medjai grabbing him round the neck on the burning ship, Imhotep’s attempt to throttle him–almost as though he were the victim of a vampire.) In the first film, both Imhotep and Ankh-Su-Namun herself die from precisely similar wounds to the stomach (in Ankh-Su-Namun’s case twice), so that Evie is thus linked with them, as she also is when she is seen as Nefertiri wearing a mask just as Imhotep does before he is fully regenerated, and when Ankh-Su-Namun pacifies a group of gun-wielding men just as Evie herself did in the first film. Moreover, Meela adopts pseudo-maternal behavior toward Alex, and Max Allan Collins’s novelization even suggests that Imhotep does so too:

     

    And Imhotep, grinning, almost as if proud of the boy, wagged a finger down at Alex.

     

    “Naughty, naughty,” he said, and held out his hand.

     

    Swallowing, reluctant, Alex got to his feet, brushed off his short pants, and took the mummy’s hand. (169)

     

    A mummy thus merges with a mummy (and we might note that when Meela stabbed herself in the stomach and was then revived, she came back with a completely different personality, which could suggest that Evie too might do so). Ankh-Su-Namun’s thrust into Evie’s stomach can also, indeed, be read as a direct blow at the womb, with Ankh-Su-Namun, childless and with no sign of any other relatives, pitted deliberately against Evie, who is a wife, a mother, a sister, and a daughter both to Seti and to her Carnahan parents (with the name, according to the novelization, deliberately invoking a blend of Carter and Carnarvon; the first name of Evie’s father is specifically given in the book as Howard, and he is said to have discovered the tomb of Tutankhamun). It would be easy to see this as motivated primarily by the childless woman’s envy of the mother, while it would be equally possible to see it as also configured by the fact that, in the story as it is now told, Ankh-Su-Namun is also the replacement for Evie/Nefertiri’s mother, who is never mentioned and is thus her stepmother. (O’Connell too is now identified as motherless: both the children’s and the adult novelizations have him referring to having received his tattoo in an orphanage in Hong Kong, though in the movie itself he appears to say “Cairo,” while Revenge of the Scorpion King is equally the revenge of Rachel for the death of her mother at the hands of the Nazis, and immediately after the revelation of this Alex uncovers a cache of weapons and shouts, “We’ve hit the mother lode!” [Wolverton 71, 72].)

     

    But though Ankh-Su-Namun’s attack on Evie could be read as the rage of a childless woman against a mother, it is by no means clear that the film as a whole does regard motherhood as an enviable state. “Run, you sons of bitches!” screams Henderson in The Mummy to O’Connell and Jonathan, casually indicting all mothers as he flees. “Mother!” screams the Cockney lackey in The Mummy Returns when he first sees Imhotep. “Mummies!” says Rick in the first film disgustedly, adding, “I hate mummies!” in the second. This is unfortunate, since Evie’s dying words, “Look after Alex…. I love you,” in a sense constitute him as a mummy. Moreover, Rick is at first prostrated by grief at Evie’s death and, though he goes to fight Imhotep and the Scorpion King, he is soon knocked to the ground again and raised only by the unexpected sound of her voice. The effect is of a resurrection from the dead, something that is repeated when Evie pulls him up from the abyss: in one sense, then, it is now he who has returned from a symbolic grave. That his reprieve is, however, conditional is clearly indicated by the fact that the classic hand-over-the-edge shot here has the suggestive variation that Rick’s hand has a wedding ring: the suggestion is clearly that Evie comes and pulls him up because they are properly married, whereas Ankh-Su-Namun leaves Imhotep to die because they aren’t.

     

    Rick’s survival, then, is contingent on his status as a family man. But, as he himself says, “Sometimes it’s hard being a dad,” and the film does indeed make us clearly aware of the pressures of having children (not least since Jonathan, to whom Rick says sternly, “I thought I said no more wild parties?,” in effect functions as a substitute teenager, while Collins’s novelization makes quite clear the extent to which the pygmy mummies are also conceived of as hideously threatening children [228]). Indeed, the very casting of Brendan Fraser as Rick creates ripples, since two years before The Mummy he had appeared in Ross Marks’s Twilight of the Golds (another film with a highly conflicted view of Jewishness), playing a gay man whose sister is appalled to discover that the son she is carrying is likely to share his sexuality: in the end, she keeps the child, but the decision breaks up her marriage. (Not to mention Fraser’s even more recent appearance as Ian McKellen’s lust object in Bill Condon’s 1998 Gods and Monsters, where he once again sports a tattoo which allows another man to guess his past and appears too with Kevin J. O’Connor, who was to play Beni in The Mummy.) In The Mummy Returns, Alex’s repeated “Are we there yet?” seems only partly parodic; he and Jonathan both groan whenever Rick and Evie kiss (and it is also during a kiss that Alex manages to get himself kidnapped), and it is in fact only when Rick and Evie are without Alex that they are actually able to reprise the first film. The first two dangers Rick faces in the film come from his own family: Alex creeps up behind him, and Evie throws a snake just as he enters. Most notably, although the second film seems to be deliberately less frightening than the first, it still received a 12 certificate in the U.K., so that if you actually have a child like Alex, you can’t go to see it without a babysitter. Gothic is often predicated on the loss of a parent; here, though, the ultimate, darkest fantasy may well be the loss of a child. It is played out in safety (you can of course retrieve your own offspring from the babysitter later), but, just briefly, you can acknowledge that the role of mummy is the enemy, and kill it.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Ancient Evil: Scream of the Mummy. Dir. David DeCoteau. Perf. Jeff Peterson, Trent Latta, Ariauna Albright. Amsell, 2000.
    • The Awakening. Dir. Mike Newell. Perf. Charlton Heston, Susannah York. Orion Pictures/Warner Bros, 1980.
    • Barber, Nicholas. “Never Invest in Pyramid Sales.” Rev. of The Mummy Returns. The Independent 20 May 2002 <http://www.independent.co.uk/story.jsp?story=73724>.
    • Blood from the Mummy’s Tomb. Dir. Michael Carreras, Seth Holt. Perf. Andrew Keir, Valerie Leon. Hammer Films, 1971.
    • Bram Stoker’s Legend of the Mummy. Dir. Jeffrey Obrow. Perf. Louis Gossett Jr., Amy Locane. Unapix Films, 1997.
    • Brooks, Xan. Rev. of The Mummy Returns. The Guardian 18 May 2002 <http://www.guardian.co.uk/Archive/Article/0,4273,4188668,00.html>.
    • Collins, Max Allan. The Mummy. London: Ebury Press, 1999.
    • —. The Mummy Returns. New York: Berkley Boulevard, 2002
    • The Empire Strikes Back. Dir. Irvin Kershner. Perf. Mark Hamill, Harrison Ford, Carrie Fisher. Lucasfilm, 1980.
    • George of the Jungle. Dir. Sam Weisman. Perf. Brendan Fraser, Leslie Mann, John Cleese. Disney, 1997.
    • Glover, Jerry. “Jerry Glover’s Nearly Top Ten Mummy Movies.” The Mummy Souvenir Program. 1999. 30-31.
    • Grice, Andrew. “Europe: The Single Issue that Left Hague to Take a Pounding.” The Independent 9 Jun. 2002: 2 <http://www.independent.co.uk/story.jsp?story=77078>.
    • Indiana Jones and the Last Crusade. Dir. Stephen Spielberg. Perf. Harrison Ford, Sean Connery. Paramount, 1989.
    • Indiana Jones and the Temple of Doom. Dir. Stephen Spielberg. Perf. Harrison Ford, Kate Capshaw. Paramount, 1984.
    • MacAskill, Ewen. “Tory Matriarch Goes On Stage and Off Message.” The Guardian 23 May 2002: 1 <http://www.guardian.co.uk/Archive/Article/0,4273,4191057,00.html>.
    • The Mummy. Dir. Karl Freund, Perf. Boris Karloff, Zita Johann. Universal, 1932.
    • The Mummy. Dir. Stephen Sommers. Perf. Brendan Fraser, Rachel Weisz, Arnold Vosloo. MCA/Universal, 1999.
    • The Mummy Souvenir Program. 1999.
    • The Mummy Unwrapped. Dir. Christopher Sliney. Perf. Rachel Weisz, Brendan Fraser, Stephen Sommers. Universal, 1999.
    • Quinn, Anthony. “You Can’t Say Pharaoh Than That.” Rev. of The Mummy Returns. The Independent 18 May 2002 <http://www.independent.co.uk/story.jsp?story=73090>.
    • The Phantom Menace. Dir. George Lucas. Perf. Liam Neeson, Ewan McGregor, Natalie Portman. Lucasfilm, 1999.
    • Preston, Peter. “Mummy, What’s Anthea Doing on the Floor?” Rev. of The Mummy Returns. The Observer 20 May 2002 <http://www.guardian.co.uk/Archive/Article/0,4273,4189085,00.html>.
    • Raiders of the Lost Ark. Dir. Stephen Spielberg. Perf. Harrison Ford, Karen Allen. Paramount, 1981.
    • Stoker, Bram. Dracula. Ed. A. N. Wilson. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1983.
    • Stoker, Bram. The Jewel of Seven Stars. Intr. David Glover. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1996.
    • Whitman, John. The Mummy Returns. London: Bantam Books, 2002.
    • Wolverton, Dave. Revenge of the Scorpion King. London: Bantam, 2002.

     

  • Solvent Abuse: Irvine Welsh and Scotland

    Matthew Hart

    Department of English
    University of Pennsylvania
    matthart@english.upenn.edu

     

    Review of: Irvine Welsh, Glue.New York: Norton, 2002.

     

    There’s a passage in Bill Buford’s celebrated account of football violence, Among the Thugs, that is relevant to the question of Irvine Welsh’s Scottishness. Buford is on the Italian island of Sardinia, amidst a rioting crowd of hooligan inglesi, fleeing from the police in the aftermath of a 1990 World Cup match between England and Holland:

     

    Then I collided with the people near me. Someone had brought the crowd to a stop. I didn’t understand why: the police were behind us; they would appear at any moment. Someone then shouted that we were all English. Why were we running? The English don’t run…. And so it went on. Having fled in panic, some of the supporters would then remember that they were English and that this was important, and they would remind the others that they too were English, and that this was also important, and, with a renewed sense of national identity, they would come abruptly to a halt, turn around, and charge the Italian police. (Buford 296)

     

    Questions of national identity are at the center of Buford’s book. An American, writing about British football, he observes that hooliganism runs through concentric circles of club, city, caste, and country. But given that the ne plus ultra of football violence is the foreign campaign–the “taking” of a Continental city–Buford’s analysis necessarily privileges the great circle of nationalism: “The effect was immediate: these were no longer supporters of Manchester United; they were now defenders of the English nation. They had ceased to be Mancunians; in an instant, their origins had, blotterlike, spread from one dot on the map of the country to the entire map itself” (38-9). Hooliganism has been described as “the English disease.” And so, in Among the Thugs, football violence becomes the privileged sociological lens through which to view the post-industrial unmaking of the English working class: “a highly mannered suburban society stripped of culture and sophistication and living only for its affectations: a bloated code of maleness, an exaggerated, embarrassing patriotism, a violent nationalism, an array of bankrupt social habits” (262).

     

    Substitute “Scotland” for “England” and Buford’s dystopic sociology will serve as a fair entrance-point to the world of Irvine Welsh’s Glue, a novel with much to say about football, violence, “codes of maleness,” and the fate of four working-class men as they come to adulthood during the 1980s and ’90s. Of course, it would be foolish to link Buford and Welsh without some strong sense of the difference between Scottish and English class and sporting cultures.1 What is more significant, however, is that both Glue and Among the Thugs are texts trapped endlessly between national and “post-national” interpretive and structural imperatives. For if Buford’s Manchester United fans fill out their identities, “blotterlike,” to color the entire map of England, then it is also true that this is a nationalism subject to some of the most profoundly internationalizing forces in the contemporary world. The plots of both texts depend fundamentally on mass international travel: budget airlines, the package tour, and the Continental “weekender.” Both texts are written under the sign of the 1992 Maastricht treaty, which abolished immigration and labor controls between most European countries, creating a class of “Eurotrash” itinerants–both poor and wealthy–and giving fits to Continental policemen, struggling to separate law-abiding vacationers from an impossible-to-define “hooligan element.” Finally, both hooligans and literary cognoscenti revel in the recent unprecedented expansion in European and international cultural events, whether Glasgow Celtic vs. Juventus of Torino or a city-break to the new Guggenheim Museum in Bilbao. This last phenomenon gets great comic treatment in Glue, when Welsh’s protagonists–in Munich for the Oktoberfest beer festival–crash a cultural reception of the “Munich-Edinburgh Twin Cities Committee.”

     

    Though he barely addresses it outright, the Europeanization of England is the ever-present determining context for Buford’s narratives. The single market is a political economy that his motley crew of electricians and skinheads struggles to comprehend, yet knows intimately: “I thought: this is a parody of the holiday abroad. Except that it wasn’t a parody. This was the holiday abroad. Their dads, they kept telling me, never had a chance to see the world like this” (Buford 54). For Welsh, and Glue, the tensions between nation and post-nation are more complicated, in part because of the long struggle between Scottish nationalists and an Anglocentric cultural and political elite; for whereas the “Other” of English nationalism has usually been found across the Channel, the Scottish have always found their antagonists closer to home.2 But such tensions are also due to Welsh’s increasingly certain status as a representative Scottish author–a celebrity of Scottishness whose every character, setting, and incident will be put through the mincer of a cultural media which demands authentic national types even as it writes endless obituaries for the idea of the nation itself.

     

    The worldwide success of J. K. Rowling’s Harry Potter series means that Welsh is no longer the best-selling novelist identified with Edinburgh but, adolescent wizards aside, no other Scottish writer has equivalent celebrity and none has gone so far to upset common perceptions of Scotland as a land of heather and history. Welsh has often appeared in the major newspapers and magazines as an avatar of a new, harsh, and dole-queue-glamorous Scottishness. He is a twofold prophet, national and international at once: a spokesperson for post-Thatcherite parochial youth culture, buoyed up by the global success of the scene that he documents and promotes. Welsh upsets the genteel notions of tartan traditionalists yet, inevitably, the new Scotland he has anatomized over the last decade is immediately marketable as a new national type, his vision of a growing but underrepresented subculture coming to dominate, for a while, the calcified history of Old Caledonia. The irony is that Trainspotting, a novel that scorns “ninety minute patriotism”–the duration of an international football match–survives in the popular mind as a portable symbol of Scotland. What price Renton’s (self-)loathing for a nation that let itself be “colonized by wankers”?

     

    Glue is the first Welsh novel since the frankly awful Filth. Its main advance over that abortive satire on the police is that Welsh has toned down some of the overly psychologized experiments in typography and narrative form that worked well in the short stories of The Acid House but never synthesized with the claustrophobic character-study at the heart of Filth. Glue has all the drugs-‘n-sex-‘n-violence of any Welsh tome, but tries less hard to be obviously literary. It is the longest Welsh novel, yet little is wasted; it has generational ambitions–being the life story of four men, set in Scotland, Germany and Australia–but never loses sight of its roots in tribal, parochial, friendships. Welsh is very much a popular author, in literary as well as commercial terms. Besides being full of black-hearted belly laughs, the great strength of Welsh’s best stories is that they bring the traditional values of narrative prose–revealing character through action and dialogue–to a proletarian and pop-cultural scene badly in need of the kind of unsanctimonious comedy and pathos at which he excels. Here’s Gally, the tragic anti-hero of Glue, in bed with Sharon, having recently discovered that he’s HIV-positive:

     

    When she started kissing ays deeply ah thoat for ah while ah wis somebody else. Then it came back tae ays exactly who ah wis. Ah telt her she wis hingin aboot wi rubbish, n ah included maself in that, n told her she wis better thin that and she should sort it oot. (192)

     

    Gally is the misfit, the bad luck charm; contracting HIV is not even the end of his Job-like litany of misfortune. There’s something unbelievable–melodramatic and formulaic–about so much misery and mischance: Gally is the original scapegoat, the communal raw nerve. But there’s also real pathos in his story and narration: a tenderness and insight that are rarely mawkish and which derive in large part from Welsh’s suturing of idiom and consciousness. When Sharon finally understands why Gally won’t have sex with her, she reveals her own secret:

     

    Her sweaty face pulled away fae mines and came intae view.–It’s awright… disnae matter. Ah sortay guessed. Ah thoat ye kent: ah’m like that n aw, she told me with a mischievous wee smile.

     

    There wis no fear in her eyes. None at all. It was like she was talkin aboot bein in the fuckin Masons or something. It put the shits up me. Ah goat up, went through, and sat cross-legged in the chair, lookin at ma crossbow oan the waw. (193)

     

    Gally has only ever wanted to be “somebody else” and the last thing he desires is to hear the words “ah’m like that n aw.” Such a blank and fearless statement of affinity can only ever “put the shits” up a man with such depths of self-loathing and denial. Still, there’s time for a joke at the expense of Masons–and so, by extension, all Protestants and fans of Glasgow Rangers F.C. Reading these passages, it helps to link the paradox of Welsh’s Scots to the paradox of Gally’s mind. Both are decidedly parochial, forged out of a restricted vocabulary. But they are also surprisingly rich, endlessly comic and pathetic–mined from some cosmic source of narrative rogues and dialect one-liners.

     

    Welsh is not the only Scottish author writing in vernacular language, but he’s among the very few with anything like a mass audience. It’s difficult to know whether non-Scottish readers come to Welsh because of his Scots, or in spite of it. It is a problem that bothers the American media in particular.3 Here’s a comical exchange from a 1998 Time interview with Welsh; the question of language bleeds, inevitably, into the question of audience and sales:

     

    Q: Are you afraid that you have fewer American readers than you would if you didn’t write in Scottish dialect?
    A: Yeah, I’m doing a reading tonight, and nobody’s going to understand a word.
    Q: I haven’t understood anything you’ve said. I’m going to have to make most of it up. Oh, well, thanks anyway. (Stein)

     

    Either way, Welsh’s work draws attention to its Scottishness as a matter of language; as always, writing in Scots begs very basic questions of writing itself. Is using the “national” tongue a necessarily nationalist gesture? Is Anglophone Scottish writing a contradiction in terms? And in Scotland, which is the national tongue anyway? Is it Scots, the traditional language of the Lowlands, derived from Northumbrian Anglo-Saxon? And if so, shall we prefer Welsh’s Edinburgh vernacular to, say, the Glasgow Scots of James Kelman’s Booker-winning How Late It Was How Late? If we privilege longevity over popularity, shall we fasten on the Scottish Gaelic of the Highlands and western islands? And there are other alternatives, ancient and modern: Hugh MacDiarmid fused medieval Scots and contemporary coinage with the fruits of 19th-century etymological research, creating a literary language of a mobile and synthetic kind; Robert Alan Jamieson has written a series of novels and short stories which collectively mine and record the mixed Scandic-Scots vernacular of Sanni communities in the Shetland Isles of the far north.

     

    And what of English, that thousand-pound gorilla? Almost every Scottish author since the Reformation has written in English, to greater or lesser degree–and usually greater. Linguists can identify multiple dialects of Scottish English, including a Scottish Standard English to set against the dialect of the southern metropolis; English has been the language of church, court, and school for over 400 years; and so for every writer who talks of escaping the shadow of Anglophone cultural authority, there’s another who’ll celebrate the wholesale Scottishing of British English–a language confidently mastered and manipulated by Scottish writers from Burns (Robbie) to Burns (Gordon). It’s a sociological fact one can trace through the Scottish education system, where a side-effect of programmatic Anglophonization was a level of popular literacy far higher than in the linguistically homogeneous south. Scottish intellectuals likewise take pride in the fact that the academic study of English language and literature was pioneered in Scotland’s ancient universities. In the twentieth century these Scottish universities blazed a trail in the revivification of Scottish literature; in the eighteenth, they gave witness to “The Scottish Invention of English Literature.”4

     

    There are solid historical reasons for this duality. Cairns Craig, the general editor of the standard multi-volume history of Scottish literature, talks of Scottish literature existing “between cultures rather than within a culture” (3). Scottish writing necessarily partakes of the postcolonial politics that propels African writers like Ngugi wa Thiong’o to reject the language of Empire. But the Scottish situation is peculiar because “Scotland was an active partner in the extension of Empire that made English a world language, while at the same time, in its own linguistic experience, it shared the experience of the colonised” (Craig 5). This is a reality that Welsh recognizes: “I really like standard English but it is an administrative language, an imperialist language.” Nevertheless, his abandonment of the standard-English first drafts of Trainspotting is a decision he justifies in aesthetic, rather than wholeheartedly political terms: “It’s not very funky” (O’Shea and Shapiro). While the sometimes-hostile press reaction to Welsh’s Scots reminds him of his political affinity with a vernacular writer like Kelman, this is one more author who wants to have his Anglophone cake and eat it too.

     

    Welsh’s decision to write much of his fiction in the argot of the Edinburgh streets and schemes resurrects these historical and linguistic questions, now spun and counter-spun by the political economics of market globalization.5 More than anything, his commercial success testifies to the groundbreaking work done since MacDiarmid inaugurated the modernist “Scottish Renaissance” program of revivifying the vernacular in the 1920s. But what of Welsh’s Scots? What are its literary qualities? In the first place, his use of Edinburgh Scots is not especially innovative. His dialogue has a satirical bite missing from the late Romantic-era novels of James Hogg and Walter Scott, but doesn’t add much more to their technical example, using Scots largely as an indicator of social standing. Instead of the literate shepherd who betrays his peasant origins when he opens his mouth, meet the Pilton schemie, his Edinburgh accent flashing through the neutral English narration of “The Acid House”:

     

    Then the rain came: at first a few warning spits, followed by a hollow explosion of thunder in the sky. Coco saw a flash of lightning where his glowing vision had been and although unnerved in a different way, he breathed a sigh of relief that his strange sighting had been superseded by more earthly phenomena. Ah wis crazy tae drop that second tab ay acid. The visuals ur something else. (Welsh, Acid House 153)

     

    In “The Acid House” working class characters speak Edinburgh Scots, while the narrator takes on the standard English of the bourgeois citizens who have, through a coincidence of lightning and LSD, given birth to a baby with the mind of a football hooligan: “This is fuckin too radge, man, Andy conceded,–cannae handle aw this shite, eh” (167). Throughout Welsh’s writing, Scots is identified with spoken language–if not dialogue then interior monologue, the speech of the thinking mind. More often than not, the two registers are drawn together. In the opening of Glue, a man is leaving his wife and family, nervous during this last public outing as a nuclear unit:

     

    Henry Lawson shuffled around to check who’d heard. Met one nosy gape with a hard stare until it averted. Two old fuckers, a couple. Interfering auld bastards. Speaking through his teeth, in a strained whisper he said to her,–Ah’ve telt ye, they’ll be well looked eftir. Ah’ve fuckin well telt ye that. Ma ain fuckin bairns, he snapped at her, the tendons in his neck taut. (6)

     

    The narrative slides toward Scots as it moves toward Henry’s speech. The passage opens with two relatively standard English sentences, plainly descriptive; but by the third sentence the narrative point-of-view is Henry’s–though we remain in standard English, there’s no doubt about who’s calling whom an “old fucker.” The next sentence even more plainly belongs to Henry; and as we move closer to his next vocalized thought, the English word “old” mutates into the Scottish “auld.” The narrator needs just one more descriptive connector before Henry’s self-justifying rage can be given full throttle in the vernacular. As in much purportedly vernacular fiction, third-person omniscience requires the (seeming) authority and (seeming) transparency of administrative English, while Scots marks a register that is simultaneously social and subjective.

     

    It would be a mistake, however, to confuse the innately realist signifying-effect of Scots dialogue with a similar commitment to naturalist realism–telling it like it is, in the words of the street. According to The Guardian newspaper, the 2002 Edinburgh Book Festival saw Ronald Frame lump Welsh’s writing among the “cliched brand of novels celebrating such dark subjects as cannibalism, necrophilia and sado-masochism.” Frame has been joined in the attack by the poet Kenneth White, who accuses Welsh of serving-up the “remains of last night’s fish supper, sauced up with sordid naturalism.” But this is sour-faced and misplaced criticism. Welsh is no “dirty realist” after the fashion of Americans like Raymond Carver, still less some sort of S&M Zola. As he says in response to Frame and White, “I’ve never thought of myself as a realist. I don’t think that talking tapeworms and squirrels is all that realistic” (qtd. in Gibbons). Judging by his published remarks, Welsh’s chosen American precursor is William S. Burroughs, another prophet of chemical communities; but Welsh’s writing is most fully in the tradition of the “Caledonian Antisyzygy,” as identified by G. Gregory Smith in 1919. According to Smith, Scottish literature is marked by one overweening characteristic: the union of opposites such as the known and unknown, quotidian and fantastic, standard and vernacular, genteel and vulgar. This involves a linguistic, stylistic, and generic commitment to existing–as MacDiarmid put it–“Whaur extremes meet” (87). Welsh’s writing is nothing if not extreme: an always raw collage of generic mixing, surrealist fantasy, everyday bother, and hallucinatory black humor.6

     

    And yet, despite the omnipresent excesses of Welsh’s prose, Glue is largely constructed around friendships and human encounters. It boasts no talking tapeworms and its realism is interrupted not so much by fantasy and hallucination but by the sense that we’ve heard these stories before. The main characters are novel versions of familiar types: Gally, the victim of a schoolyard code of Omerta that he upholds but never controls; Billy, the loner who finds success and single-mindedness in sports and business; Juice Terry, hapless burglar, incorrigible dole-ite, and awesomely successful Don Juan; and Carl, a dreamer, lost in music and the excesses of life as an international DJ. As in most coming-of-age narratives, these are lives we can chart on mirror-image x/y graphs: a rising line on the graph marking social standing almost inevitably implies a fall in the chart that grades happiness, contentment, and the good feelings of friends left behind. It’s not that Glue is unoriginal but that its familiarity moves it in the direction of urban folklore, so that even the novel’s more improbable moments, like Terry’s night out with an American R-‘n’-B star, read like excursions into a well-established narrative sociology. In the case of the Sherman chanteuse,7 the thematics of high versus low cultures is a direct repeat from the brilliant short story “Where the Debris Meets the Sea.” In that ironic set-piece, Kim Basinger, Madonna, Kylie Minogue and Victoria Principal lust over magazines stuffed full with working-class Edinburgh man-meat: “A pile of glossy magazines lay on a large black coffee table. They bore such titles as Wide-o, Scheme Scene and Bevvy Merchants. Madonna flicked idly through the magazine called Radge, coming to an abrupt halt as her eyes fastened on the pallid figure of Deek Prentice, resplendent in purple, aqua and black shell-suit.” This abrupt reversal in the sexual economy of pop culture is cemented by Welsh’s decision to make his Hollywood stars speak broad Scots: “‘We’ll nivir go tae fuckin’ Leith!’ Kim said, in a tone of scornful dismissal. ‘Yous are fuckin’ dreamin’” (Welsh, Acid House 87-88, 92).

     

    Some reviewers have interpreted such echoes as evidence of repetition. Tired of tales told from nightclubs and housing schemes, reviewers have begun to dismiss Welsh as a one-trick pony. I generally enjoy the folkloric repetition that is increasingly a part of Welsh’s fiction–fans of serial fiction will be pleased to hear that he is penning a sequel to Trainspotting–and despite all the excess of a book like Glue the pleasures it gives are ultimately ones of recognition, as when the protagonists of earlier novels show up in cameo roles. Glue‘s argot and setting are familiar by now. The individual lives of the four friends are given structure by their similar movement out-and-back–an actual or metaphorical journey away, and the journey home. Glue ends with homecomings, both literal and symbolic, where an Oedipal politics of masculinity and maturation tries to crowd-out the vicissitudes of the nation. It closes with the death of one character’s father, shared grief mending damaged friendships. The dead man was the symbolic father of the group, an apologist for youth and the author of their childhood code of silence and loyalty. By closing with this death, Glue‘s narrative takes on a generational and patrilineal shape.

     

    One can see Welsh, and perhaps his audience, getting older. More seriously, we can see how the strength of Welsh’s fiction, and perhaps the source of its greatest popular appeal, is its study of the formation and deformation of tribal groups, as familial, musical, and pharmacological subcultures come to dominate–and now find some accommodation–in their struggle with (and within) traditional allegiances of class and nation. Trainspotting, for instance, is much more than days-in-the-life of a group of smack addicts: it documents the breakdown of the social and cultural bonds made by shared experiences of childhood, drugs, city, and nation. Like the middle section of Glue, its narrative charts the movement from punk rock and heroin to techno and MDMA. This cultural movement is itself predicated on a simultaneous physical movement away from the symbolic geography of the Scottish nation. Renton escapes first to London and the burgeoning club scene, then finally into European anonymity, flush with the drug money he stole from his friends, heading for a life outside of Scotland and the provinciality of its capital city. One can, it should be admitted, read even Renton’s narrative as a national allegory–Welsh’s use of Scots makes that almost inevitable. And despite its ultimately Oedipal structure, it’s clear that Welsh also sees Glue as an allegory of the nation–one that, this time, ends happily in New Caledonia, friends gathered round the big multi-cultural mixing desk of devolutionary Scotland.

     

    Welsh wants to have it both ways; Scotland, that antisyzygetical nation, insists on it. The Scotland that we see in Glue is both newly confident and newly irrelevant. Welsh’s characters are unabashed national stereotypes, yet we see them abroad in both mind and place, drawn to the international affinities of music, sport, and pharmaceuticals. Welsh has so far shown no sign of wanting to escape the triple Scottishness of language, setting, and type; but the Scotland he portrays is unimaginable without other criss-crossing elective affinities, running counter to the claims of the nation. In Glue, the nation is non-negotiable: a monument to modernity that postmodern chancers can neither overcome nor gainsay. A book like Glue, so full of the contradictions of international culture, nevertheless appears as a local affirmation of Tom Nairn’s global formula: “Blessing and curse together, nationality is simply the fate of modernity” (199).8 Scotland, its languages, its unknown destiny in the marketplace of nations and ethnicities, is a fundamental ingredient in the “glue” that holds these characters, and these pages, together. That we come to know such stickiness by watching its interaction with various global solvents shouldn’t surprise us. Didn’t the kids invent huffing? Didn’t they know what they were doing?

     

    Notes

     

    1. For example, Scottish football fans are very proud of their public difference from English supporters, especially when traveling abroad for international matches. While domestic Scottish games have seen their fair share of violence (witness Welsh’s many pages on the über-hooligans of Edinburgh’s Hibernian FC) traveling fans of the Scottish national team have styled themselves as the drunken but ultimately avuncular “Tartan Army.” The booze and military metaphors remain the same, but the relations between fans, police, foreign and local governments, and national public sentiment are quite different.

     

    2. Contrast, for instance, the different stances of English and Scottish political nationalists toward the question of E.U. federation. For Scottish nationalists, the slogan “Independence in Europe” represents the desire to root small-nation autarky within transnational (constitutional, cultural, and economic) structures and institutions. Current English nationalism is, on the contrary, largely of the xenophobic, “Eurosceptic” kind. This contemporary phenomenon is more interesting when considered next to Linda Colley’s argument that an Anglo-Scottish “British” identity was made possible, in part, by the common threat to England and Scotland from Napoleonic and Catholic France.

     

    3. The first American edition of Trainspotting (New York: Norton, 1996) printed a glossary of Scottish phrases not included in the original UK edition (London: Minerva, 1994). This troubles an interviewer for the U.S. online magazine, Feed: “Reading Trainspotting, at first you feel sort of alienated and distanced by the phonetic spellings, but after about five pages you really get into it, the language. But when the glossary of Scottish terms came out for the American edition it almost seemed to turn that language into a gimmick for Americans.” See O’Shea and Shapiro’s “RE: Irvine Welsh: William O’Shea and Deborah Shapiro Talk to the Author of Trainspotting about Populist Literature, the Drug Novel, and Surviving the Millennium.”

     

    4. See Robert Crawford, Devolving English Literature.

     

    5. For example, Danny Boyle’s 1996 Miramax film of Trainspotting becomes an international success and a text of archetypal modern Scottishness, in part because of its use of vernacular language; but the pop culture it does so much to celebrate is marked by cosmopolitan eclecticism–equal parts Sean Connery and Iggy Pop, with seemingly no tension between them. The movie of the film gains much attention for its depiction of post-industrial Scotland, partly because of the drug use, partly because of the language. But the film’s greatest marketing push comes from its brilliantly selected soundtrack, full of English Brit-poppers, European dance music, and American punk. Despite the insistently national focus of the press, the demographic assumed by the soundtrack is definitively post-national in the question of marketing and musical taste.

     

    6. There is much to distinguish Welsh from MacDiarmid, despite their common situation as writers made famous by Scots and Scottishness; the generalized horizon of Smith’s antisyzygy no doubt obscures as much as it reveals. Nevertheless, they share a common scabrous and antinomian quality, best found perhaps in a fuller version of the above quotation. The narrator of MacDiarmid’s A Drunk Man Looks at the Thistle proudly declares that he will “ha’e nae hauf-way hoose, but aye be whaur / Extremes meet–it’s the only way I ken / To dodge the curst conceit o’ bein’ richt” (87).

     

    7. “Sherman” is one of Welsh’s favorite pieces of rhyming slang, a form of demotic that Edinburgh Scots have perfected after the Cockney example. “Sherman” means “American,” deriving from “Sherman Tank,” which rhymes, of course, with “Yank.” Welsh’s rhyming slang invariably follows this kind of abbreviation and homophonic substitution–arguably the defining characteristics of traditional rhyming slang. The beauty of this argot lies in the distance between the slang-word and its referent. Thus, “Manto” from “Mantovani,” meaning “bit of fanny.”

     

    8. For a useful critique of Nairn’s fatalistic conjunction of modernity and nationality, see Mulhern (58-61).

    Works Cited

     

    • Buford, Bill. Among the Thugs. New York: Vintage, 1993.
    • Colley, Linda. Britons: Forging the Nation, 1707-1837. New Haven, CT: Yale UP, 1992.
    • Craig, Cairns, ed. The History of Scottish Literature, Vol 4: Twentieth Century Scottish Literature. 4 Vols. Aberdeen: Aberdeen UP, 1988.
    • Crawford, Robert. Devolving English Literature. Oxford: Clarendon, 1992.
    • Gibbons, Fiachra. “Eight Years on from Trainspotting, Irvine Welsh Pens the Sequel: Porno.” The Guardian 22 Aug. 2002 <http://books.guardian.co.uk/news/articles/0,6109,540572,00.html>.
    • MacDiarmid, Hugh. Collected Poems, Vol. 1. 2 vols. Michael Grieve & W. R. Aitken, eds. London: Penguin, 1985.
    • Mulhern, Francis. “Britain After Nairn.” New Left Review 5 (Sep.-Oct. 2000): 53-66.
    • Nairn, Tom. After Britain: New Labour and the Return of Scotland. London: Granta, 2000.
    • O’Shea, William, and Deborah Shapiro. “RE: Irvine Welsh: William O’Shea and Deborah Shapiro Talk to the Author of Trainspotting about Populist Literature, the Drug Novel, and Surviving the Millennium.” Feed 3 Sep. 1999.
    • Smith, G. Gregory. Scottish Literature: Character and Influence. London: MacMillan, 1919.
    • Stein, Joel. “Irvine Welsh: The Arts/Q+A.” Time 28 Sep. 1998 <http://www.time.com/time/magazine/1998/dom/980928/the_arts.q_a.irvine_wel32a.html>.
    • Welsh, Irvine. The Acid House. New York: Norton, 1994.
    • —. Trainspotting. New York: Norton, 1996.

     

  • “What’s It Like There?”: Desultory Notes on the Representation of Sarajevo

    Jim Hicks

    English and Comparative Literature
    Smith College
    james@transpan.it

     

     

     

    Figure 1

    “What does the earth look like in the places where people commit atrocities?”

     

    — Robert D. Kaplan, Balkan Ghosts

     

    In order to begin, I’ll have to confess: what follows here will be an essay in the early sense of the term (in other words, I have no idea whatsoever how it’s going to come out).1 I’ve decided, nonetheless, to make an effort to address–or at least avoid in a somewhat more professional manner–an issue which for me, in the five or so years that I’ve been visiting Sarajevo, just won’t go away. The problem is that I continue to have no real answer to the question that my title poses, the question that, for understandable reasons, I’m asked on almost every occasion when someone finds out I’ve been spending time in postwar Bosnia-Herzegovina.

     

    To some extent, my lack of a well-considered response may be personal. I also have a great deal of trouble with word association games (“What’s the first thing that comes to your mind when I say ‘Bosnia’?”); invariably, what comes to my mind–no matter what the word is–is nothing. Faced with such questions, rather than “associate freely” (as if such a thing were possible!), I become increasingly embarrassed at not having a response, more or less in the way that insomniacs lie awake obsessed with their inability to sleep. On the other hand, such a reaction may be situational as well. Hannah Arendt long ago argued that there is essentially nothing to say about events which require our compassion. For Arendt, the problem with compassion is precisely that: it puts an end to all discussion, and hence, to any possibility for political remedy (53-110).2 (There are, of course, other opinions about the relation between compassion and expression: Clarissa, La nouvelle Héloïse, and Uncle Tom’s Cabin are all very long novels.)

     

    In any case, in conversations with friends, I found out quick enough that my problem couldn’t easily be finessed through intellectualization. Like some character from a Woody Allen film, I tried to begin my (non)responses by describing my inability to describe, cleverly attributing this inability to my complete lack of adequate representational categories. My experience, in short, was “like” nothing in the least. And without adequate categories, some would argue, we may not even have the experience at all–“a blooming, buzzing confusion” is the phrase usually evoked in such contexts. Yet, for Walter Benjamin, experience itself–at least its truest, and increasingly rarest form–may in effect only come at times like these, where we lack all preparation.

     

    Friends, since they know you, can’t be put off by such diversionary tactics, and, to be frank, I wasn’t even satisfied myself with this non-answer. But then, at some point–I don’t remember precisely when–I came up with an alternate strategy. I still began by describing my inability to describe, but now this ramble became only the preamble to my next gambit–telling a joke or two. The number, as well as the character, of the war-related jokes that I heard on my initial trip to Sarajevo no doubt prompted this idea. In retelling these jokes, I also eventually managed to convince myself that there was logic behind my strategem: where do such jokes come from, after all? why do people tell them? and wasn’t the collective voice behind them more direct, more authentic, than anything that I myself might say? At one point, I even thought about compiling a Sarajevo Joke Book, a sort of exercise in contemporary folklore. One Bosnian who heard this idea from me commented, “Sure, everyone who comes here wants to do that.”

     

    A couple of jokes, then. Here’s one that nearly everybody there knows:

     

    Q. How do they give directions in Banja Luka?

     

    A. Turn left where the mosque used to be.

     

    Too quick? Lack the relevant history? (In case you don’t already know, during the war, Bosnian Serbs dynamited the mosques in the towns they controlled; Banja Luka used to have many, including the celebrated fifteenth-century Ferhadija mosque, which is now a parking lot).3 Let me try another one:4

     

    Mujo is walking down the street, just out of the hospital after having his right arm amputated. He’s depressed to the point of desperation, crying, talking to himself, thinking about suicide. He can’t bear the thought of life without his arm. Suddenly he sees Suljo walking towards him, skipping and smiling. When he gets closer, Mujo sees that Suljo is actually laughing out loud. What is most amazing to Mujo is that Suljo is carrying on like this despite the fact that not just one, but both of his arms have been amputated.

     

    So Mujo stops Suljo, who continues to snicker and smile. Mujo says, “Suljo, I don’t understand you. I’m desperate, I’m even thinking about killing myself, all because I’ve had one arm amputated. You’ve had both your arms cut off and here you are smiling and laughing like an idiot. In your condition, how can you be so happy?”

     

    Suljo replies, “Mujo, if you’d had both of your arms cut off, like I did, and your ass was itching like crazy, like mine is, you’d be laughing too.”

     

    So you get the picture. Or at least some of the picture. Whatever these jokes are, they’re certainly not timid. Part of their impact, no doubt, comes from the particular ways in which they violate our conventions and expectations. Take a look back at the image at the beginning of this essay. How does your sense of it change when I tell you that–although the site is in fact located in Sarajevo–it is not actually war-related? It’s just an abandoned farmhouse, and it’s looked more or less as it does here for as long as any of my Bosnian friends can remember.5

     

    Actually, the first photo I took in Sarajevo was this one:

     

    Figure 2

     

    This was the view from the window of the Human Rights Coordination Center, in the Office of the High Representative, downtown Sarajevo, Mar�ala Tita Street, in early January, 1997. I like it–something about the perspective reminds me of Bruegel.6 Given the stories about Sarajevans burning furniture and books in order to heat their homes, the sight of children sledding in this wooded urban park might surprise you. (It did me, which is probably why I took the photo.) Just above the park is the central police headquarters, used by the Bosnian military during the siege. The trees, in other words, were left as cover–anyone silly enough to try and cut one down would probably have been shot. A second park survived for similar reasons, and there is also still a beautiful, tree-lined avenue next to the river (and next to the former front line as well).

     

    My next photo is an exterior shot of the building from which the sledding picture was taken:

     

    Figure 3

     

    I have a theory about this one. This is, or was, the headquarters of the Office of the High Representative (the international supervisory agency set up as part of the Dayton Accords, <http://www.ohr.int>). The High Representative has very extensive powers to enforce the implementation of the peace accords; among other things, OHR has designed Bosnia’s new currency, license plates, and flag, and the High Rep has also dismissed a fairly large number of Bosnia’s elected officials (including on two occasions, members of the Presidency). If you’ve seen Men in Black, the movie that’s being advertised in this photo, you’ll understand my suspicions: my guess is that the placement of this particular advertisement is meant as a comment on the internationals working just behind these curtains. There’s certainly no cinema in this building, or anywhere close by, and, as far as I know, no other movie was ever advertised here.7

     

    My overall point so far, with the “farmhouse” photo as with the others, is fairly simple. Pictures don’t speak for themselves, however much we may be predisposed to let them do so. But then neither do my Bosnian jokes: one thing that strikes me about the two cited here, besides their ruthlessness, is that they are both in some sense directed at the very group that is telling them. Much like Jewish anti-Semitic jokes, Bosnian humor has a long tradition of self-parody. The two amputees of my second joke are actually the stock characters, the fools, of Bosnian comedy (Mujo, by the way, is short for Mustafa, or Muhamed, and Suljo for Sulejman). A third character, Mujo’s wife Fata (short for Fatima), also makes frequent appearances. But those jokes you don’t want to hear.8

     

    You have no doubt been waiting to see a photo like this:

     

    Figure 4

     

    Actually, I would go further than that. My guess is not only that you’ve been expecting to see a photo like this: if you followed the war in the former Yugoslavia at all, I imagine that, on some level, you’ve been waiting to see this very photo. This, of course, is the Oslobodjenje building, headquarters of the Sarajevan newpaper of the same name (which means “liberation” in English).9 I haven’t heard what, if anything, is planned for this building, but I wouldn’t be surprised to see it left as it is now, as a war memorial of sorts. Which, once again, changes what it is that we’re looking at, does it not? Is it event or emblem? In a certain sense, memorials may not be seen at all; to paraphrase Robert Musil, if you want to be absolutely certain that someone is forgotten by history, build them a statue.

     

    One more photo in this vein:

     

    Figure 5

     

    I reproduced this shot for two reasons. The photo shows a government office building in the foreground and the two UNIS skyscrapers in the background. What I mean to give you here–the academics among you–is a rather unique vantage point. The shot was taken from the balcony at the end of the hall on the fourth floor of the Filozofski Fakultet, right next to the English Department offices. (Does it make you feel at home?) My second reason is explained on the back of a map which the FAMA group–a local artists collective–did to commemorate the siege (<http://www.saray.net/SurvivalMap/Index.html>). It seems that Sarajevans had nicknamed these twin towers “Momo” and “Uzeir” after a popular pair of local comedians (their names mark them as members of two different cultural groups). According to FAMA, no one knew which tower was which, and so the Bosnian Serb army had to destroy them both. Such are the stories one hears.

     

    Time for another sort of story, I think.

     

    Figure 6

     

    This one is from Miljenko Jergovic, a journalist, novelist, and poet. Jergovic wrote for Oslobodjenje during the war, and he now writes for the Feral Tribune in Zagreb. The text of his that I will examine here is, in a sense, the titular story of his first published collection, Sarajevo Marlboro. The final scene of Jergovic’s short story unwraps this pair of name-brands for his reader–but I’ll get to that in a minute.10 The tale itself, in contrast, is titled “Grob” (“The Grave”–for reasons unclear to me, his translator decided to retitle the story “The Gravedigger,” i.e., “Grobar”).

     

    When Jergovic chose his title, it is absolutely certain that the grave he had in mind was not shown in this last photo. First of all, it’s not even the right graveyard. Second, this shot, if it were published in Sarajevo today, might well appear to be Bosnian Muslim propaganda. The tombstones in front, with their Arabic inscriptions written in calligraphy said to be found only in Bosnia, are just the sort of things used to send a “nationalist” message. (There are, of course, items of this sort available for all of the so-called nationalist parties. If it’s old enough, and culturally specific enough, it will do.) Nice photo, though.

     

    Figure 7

     

    The story begins by asking us a question: “Know why you should never bury people in a valley?” (78). Jergovic’s gravedigger, a Shakespearian character in more than one sense, goes on to answer the question with a story. He tells a tale of two lovers, and two deaths, related (in the original text) by means of a single long sentence, a conversational diatribe that twists and turns at least twice as often as the lives the story traces. In high school, Rasim and Mara fell in love (again, their names are markers), his father said no, and they ran away. Rasim’s father eventually found them, but his son wouldn’t come home alone; so the couple moved in but she wasn’t allowed to leave the house by day. Eventually the father built them a home in another neighborhood, they married publicly at last, and then she died. (As the gravedigger comments, “[the dead] just happened to lose [their lives], the way some people lose a pinball [… after] having scored a hundred points a hundred times–you could have scored more, but… you didn’t” [82].)11 Rasim moved again, mourned by day and worked in his uncle’s bakery at night, and, when WWII broke out, he joined the Usta�e (the Croatian fascists); then the war ended and the Partisans arrived, who jailed him and were planning to shoot him, at which time a certain Salamon Finci appeared and convinced them that, during the war, Rasim had helped five Jewish families escape through Italy. So Rasim was freed, but nothing changed, and he continued to mourn his wife until, one day, he too was found dead, facedown in a pile of bread dough, and was brought back to his father’s house and buried “just here beneath the patch of grass you are standing on” (80).

     

    As told by the gravedigger (as opposed to the account you just heard), this story is not only an answer to the opening question, it is a demonstration of the answer. As the narration unfolds, it is filled, in line after line, with gestures toward the neighborhoods, buildings, and landmarks where the lives of Rasim and Mara are said to unfold. Its refrain is “ono ti je Bistrik… ono ti je �irokaca… ono ti je Vrbanja” (Roughly, “That’s Bistrik for you,” “That’s �irokaca for you,” etc.) In my last photo, the lower section of the Alifakovac cemetery can just be seen on the upper left; like us, though from the other side, the gravedigger looks down the Miljacka river with all of the Old City before him. His story concluded, he points to Rasim’s grave below his feet and ends by commenting, with obvious satisfaction:

     

    From this spot, it’s possible for you to review and reflect on Rasim’s whole life. Only thieves and children and people with something to hide get buried in valleys. There’s no life left in the valleys–you can’t see anything from down there. (Jergovic 64, translation modified)

     

    In an essay entitled “Dell’opaco,” Italo Calvino has described how people can sometimes be imprinted with a particular topography of the imagination, just as goslings are imprinted with a maternal form. For Calvino, that topography was his native city of San Remo, with its rugged, mountainous coastline sloping sharply down to the west, opening out expansively toward the mist-covered sea. Jergovic’s gravedigger carries a different template, but his principles are those of Calvino.

     

    And there may be more. As we are painstakingly shown, Rasim’s life, with and without Mara, stitches together most of old Sarajevo, geographically and topographically (and hence, we may conclude, socially and culturally as well). We are even told that Mara’s distraught husband “blamed each of the local districts… for her death” (79), and that he responded by moving to Vrbanja. Now I don’t know what Vrbanja looked like before WWII, but I can show it to you on the FAMA Survival Map.

     

    Figure 8

     

    There it is, at the start of the modern city, where the Parliament building is, and where most major social protests in Sarajevo begin. It’s also where, on April 6, 1992, Radovan Karadzic’s men–from a position atop the Holiday Inn (the yellow building, circled in red)–started firing at a crowd of antiwar protesters. Serb paramilitaries had already killed one young student during similar demonstrations the previous day, on the bridge right at the bottom of the image. The bridge is also called Vrbanja.12

     

    However relevant such commentary may–or may not–be to the Jergovic story, it still leaves unmentioned that narrative’s central connection to the essay at hand. As it turns out, about half of “Grob” actually relates a second anecdote, one that speaks of the living rather than the dead. Immediately after his comment that “There’s no life left in the valleys,” the gravedigger begins telling a more recent tale, one that recounts the unpleasant experience of being interviewed by an American journalist:

     

    Perhaps he’d heard that I lived in California for a while, and had seen the world, spoke languages and knew important people. But now I was working as a gravedigger again, so perhaps he thought that I might be able to explain to him what had happened to the people of Sarajevo. (80)

     

     

    The journalist claims that “he wants to know everything” (81); in order to respond to his questions, however, Jergovic’s narrator has either to ask for clarifications or resist the terms in which the questions are put. Asked to speak indiscriminately of both the living and the dead, the gravedigger replies that such a task is impossible, “because the dead have their lives behind them while the living don’t know what’s just around the corner” (81); asked if he’s sorry, after all his travels, to have “ended up” in besieged Sarajevo, the narrator corrects his interrogator, commenting that, “I didn’t end up here. I was born here” (81). Then, when “the idiot” reporter asks if the gravedigger is ready to die now in Sarajevo, the latter replies, “I’ve thought up hundreds of ways to stay alive, and I like all of them” (82). Moreover, when the gravedigger does respond to the questions, his philosophizing appears to be of little interest: “I can tell that he doesn’t understand or even care what I’m saying, but I don’t take offense” (81).

     

    In short, Jergovic’s second anecdote relates an account of failed communication. This failure, we should know, is a specific sort, one probably common in such interviews. The central difficulty involves what might even be a familiar trope of journalistic performance, if readers and viewers were sufficiently aware of the tricks of the trade. At the risk of losing my own audience, I’ll venture to call this particular sleight of hand “Live Puppet Ventriloquism” (and I’m thinking here, analogically, of the “Live Organ Donors” scene from the Monty Python film, The Meaning of Life).

     

    As far as Balkanist writings go, the classic work for illustrating this trope is, without a doubt, Robert D. Kaplan’s Balkan Ghosts. For those not familar with this work, let me cite Kaplan’s thesis statement (a claim which, not by coincidence, is also a perfect example of the figure in question). Here then, for your information, is the essence of the Balkans, according to Kaplan:

     

    This was a time-capsule world: a dim stage upon which people raged, spilled blood, experienced visions and ecstasies. Yet their expressions remained fixed and distant, like dusty statuary. “Here, we are completely submerged under our own histories,” Luben Gotzev, Bulgaria’s former Foreign Minister, told me. (xxi)

     

     

    The sentence that ends this quote makes its author’s thesis explicit, yet it is ostensibly not the author speaking. Live Puppet Ventriloquism.

     

    In contrast, Jergovic’s tale is meant to reveal the way that such shenanigans obstruct communication (rather than, like a chemical precipitant, giving evidence of otherwise invisible interactions). The gravedigger is extremely clear on this point. When the interview finally breaks down entirely, he comments, “I understand that he is researching the subject for his article, except he can’t write the piece because he already knows what it’s going to say” (82). The apparent paradox in this sentence’s latter half (isn’t it easier to write when we know what we will say?) is, in effect, a clever subversion of the sort of journalistic research to which its first half refers. What sort of “research” is it, after all, that aims at producing, from the lips of another, speech that you yourself have scripted? Live Puppet Ventriloquism.

     

    Unlike Jergovic’s journalist, Kaplan is overtly and insistently conscious that he–or at least his American audience–may not yet possess the necessary script. Like Jergovic’s gravedigger, moreover, Kaplan sees this issue as a problem of perspective, of obtaining the correct distance and vantage point. The very first lines of Kaplan’s prologue summon up a relevant scene: the author has chosen an “awful, predawn hour to visit the monastery of Pec in ‘Old Serbia’” (xix). Moreover, he comments, “I brought neither flashlight nor candle. Nothing focuses the will like blindness” (xix). There, while pondering the monastery’s medieval frescoes, the author has his book-generating revelation. “Fleetingly, just as the darkness began to recede, I grasped what real struggle, desperation, and hatred are all about” (xx). We should also note that Kaplan opposes this knowledge–obtained as he “shivered and groped” (xix)–to the judgments typical of “a Western mind… a mind that, in Joseph Conrad’s words, did ‘not have an hereditary and personal knowledge of the means by which an historical autocracy represses ideas, guards its power, and defends its existence’” (xx). (A mind that is also, we may assume, comfortably installed in its favorite Western easy chair, reading Balkan Ghosts.)

     

    By the end of this prologue, Kaplan is capable of answering the question that he himself posed only a few pages ago, the same question which I borrowed as an epigraph for this essay. He pictures himself again, this time while crossing the Austrian border with the former Yugoslavia.

     

    The heating, even in the first-class compartments of the train, went off. The restaurant car was decoupled. The car that replaced it was only a stand-up zinc counter for beer, plum brandy, and foul cigarettes without filters. As more stops accumulated, men with grimy fingernails crowded the counter to drink and smoke. When not shouting at each other or slugging back alcohol, they worked their way quietly through pornographic magazines. (xxx)

     

     

    Needless to say, our Western mind turns quickly away from this scene of dirt, disease, and misogyny to look outside, only to find dirt, disease, and misogyny:

     

    Snow beat upon the window. Black lignite fumes rose from brick and scrap-iron chimneys. The earth here had the harsh, exhausted face of a prostitute, cursing bitterly between coughs. The landscape of atrocities is easy to recognize… (xxxi)13

     

    At last, increasingly fed up with his interviewer, Jergovic’s gravedigger finally shuts him up:

     

    I tell him that he shouldn’t gaze into people’s faces so intently if he doesn’t understand what he sees. Perhaps he should just look at things the way I used to look at neon signs in America, in order to get a rough idea of the country. (82)

     

     

    In other words, the American journalist is told that he, like Robert Venturi, ought to “learn from Las Vegas”: anyone moving at that speed, with those sort of interests, anyone so obviously out of place, certainly shouldn’t pretend to intimacy. “When you look at advertising billboards from fifty feet away, you don’t have a clue what Sarajevo Marlboro is or isn’t” (84). Telling the story of Rasim from a vantage point overlooking the city, or even reading into that story some significance which might still be of use for the living, is one thing. Reading the faces of strangers is certainly another.

     

    Or is it? An undeniable characteristic of the stories contained in Sarajevo Marlboro is that they often read like fables or parables. It is equally obvious that, unlike some fables or parables, the moral to these stories is anything but explicit. Capturing both qualities, the final scene of “Grob” will function as a synecdoche for the book as a whole. Having despaired of direct communication, Jergovic’s gravedigger resorts once again to demonstration. He takes from his pocket an unmarked pack of cigarettes. He explains that Bosnia has no factory capable of printing brand names and logos. “I bet you think we’re poor and unhappy because we don’t even have any writing on our cigarettes” (83). Whether this particular journalist, in this instance, had this particular thought or not, it’s safe to say that some journalist nearby did. If not about cigarette packs, about something.

     

    Having snared his opponent, the gravedigger moves in for the kill. He begins to undo the packet, ready to show that it does indeed contain printing, on the inside. Sometimes movie poster paper is used, sometimes soap boxes, sometimes other forms of advertisements. What’s inside is, in the narrator’s words, “always a surprise” (83). This time, however, hidden around the corner is a joke, one played on the gravedigger himself. In this particular case, the paper used was from the old Bosnian brand of Marlboros. Hidden inside the paper of this particular cigarette pack was the paper of a pack of cigarettes: Sarajevo Marlboros.

     

    The narrator comments:

     

    Later on, I regretted that I ever opened my big mouth to the American. Why didn’t I just say that we are an unhappy and unarmed people who are being killed by Chetnik beasts, and that we’ve all gone crazy with bereavement and grief. He could have written that down, and I wouldn’t have ended up looking ridiculous in his eyes or in my own. (84)

     

    Time to sum up. Having at last recounted “Grob”‘s final anecdote, I may now also be in a position to say something further about a contradiction, or at least a confusion, in my essay thus far. How exactly does the gravedigger’s favorite point of view, the template of his imagination, differ from that of Kaplan’s “Western mind”? Both, it seems clear, are a product of distance, and both attempt to present their subjects by placing them on some sort of narrative map; furthermore, the explanations that both give are explicitly meant to be seen as products of those maps. It wouldn’t be all that unfair to say, like Rasim, that Robert D. Kaplan blames “each of the local districts” for the tragic fates of its inhabitants. Given the unexpected, and self-defeating, result of the gravedigger’s final demonstration, could it then be said that a Las Vegas blur is the only sort of vantage that remains?

     

    It seems to me that such a conclusion, or any such conclusion, is precisely what Sarajevo Marlboro resists. Let me offer some small bit of evidence, albeit indirect. Until the final paragraph of “Grob” (I checked), none of the three so-called “ethnic” or “national” labels occur, even once, in Jergovic’s story. This is not to say, of course, that this is not a tale about cultural difference–above, you will recall, I argued that it is precisely that. If forced to summarize, I’d probably say that Jergovic shows us culture as the product of many things and people as the product of many cultures: names, neighborhoods, war, family, all of these things–even “a brand of cigarettes developed by Philip Morris Inc. to suit the taste of Bosnian smokers” (83, emphasis added).

     

    One more comment. When the gravedigger points out, with great satisfaction, each key site in the life of a single Sarajevan, I am quite certain that I don’t know what it is he’s talking about. I myself never set foot in any part of the former Yugoslavia while it was still Yugoslavia, I never visited Sarajevo until after the war, and, although I read journalists, I don’t plan to become one. You, in all likelihood, have never been to Sarajevo at all. Even so, you probably understand why some people wondered whether “Mara had in fact remained Mara, or had become Fatima” (79). Some people do worry about such things; in Jergovic’s tale, however, we are also told that no one asks, and that Rasim doesn’t tell. My point is quite simple. When we hear a litany of place names in a story about Sarajevo during the siege, just what does a given place, or even its name, mean to any given Sarajevan? How could we even ask?

     

    By way of closing, however, I will relate one last anecdote of my own (a brief one, I promise). Actually, what I’d like to do, even if only in virtual space, is to take you on a nice little walk, first up above the gravedigger’s cemetery (where it says “Alifakovac”–just below the first sharp turn in the river) to a sort of two-lane highway (the yellow road below the river), and then walking east along the hillsides, following the Miljacka upstream–eventually taking you right off the Sarajevo town map, I’m afraid.

     

    Figure 9

     

    I learned about this particular itinerary on my first trip to Sarajevo, from Leah Melnick, a close friend of my sister (and an inveterate flaneuse, I was told). That’s when the following pictures were taken.

     

    Walking down the highway, after fifteen minutes or so you come to a tunnel (visible on the far right of the map above). You don’t want to go in the tunnel, not even in a car. Tunnels in Bosnia don’t have artificial lighting and they’re usually full of water and potholes (although these days at least they no longer have little surprises like an IFOR tank at the other end).14 In any case, Leah’s directions were clear–follow a little path, off to the right, up over the tunnel. You should be a bit nervous about that, and, of course, you will remember the rule: don’t walk anywhere where many, many others haven’t already walked before you. Follow footprints. Otherwise, as the public safety announcement tells you, it’s not a question of “if,” just “when” (cf. <http://www.unicef.org/newsline/super.htm>). Here, the path is in fact a very well-trodden path, and it leads surprisingly soon into a small village, one that was hidden until now by the curve of the hill in front of you. (And by me.) Here’s a part of what you find.

     

    Figure 10

     

    I haven’t got anything to say about this one. Just look at it. And imagine, if you can. (I can’t.) Then, as you continue to walk along the small, two-track path though the village, this is what you see.

     

    Figure 11

     

    And this is all you see.15 And there’s plenty more of it, above these houses too and in front of you along the path, as well.

     

    And then, at the very last house before your road starts to wind around and down to the river, there’s something different. A dog barking. Not a friendly dog. Some movement and some noise in the back corner of a yard.

     

    Figure 12

     

    It’s not much of a house, not yet at least, but it’s standing. And there’s someone there, living there perhaps, working in the yard at the moment, probably cleaning up. I have no way of telling you how glad I was to see him.16

     

    After I followed the path down toward the river, I turned back once more. Here’s that shot as well:

     

    Figure 13

     

    Now then. Leah had mentioned that eventually I would come to a bridge, so that I would be able to get across the river and walk back along the other side. (This soon after the war, a bridge wasn’t by any means a given). Here’s the bridge:

     

    Figure 14

     

    The locals call this ancient monument, this sculpture, this testament to both place and time, The Goats’ Bridge. Though I didn’t know it then, it’s traditionally thought of as the easternmost border of Sarajevo. So here’s where we turn back, walking along the river back into town. What will greet us at this end of the city is, for a couple of reasons at least, a fitting conclusion to our (or at least my) cyberramble.

     

    Figure 15

     

    This, of course, is (or was) the National Library, first built as a city hall by the Austrians at the end of the nineteenth century. If the Oslobodjenje building has any competition in the category of de facto memorials to the Sarajevo siege, this would be it. Appropriately for us, Miljenko Jergovic ends his Sarajevo Marlborocollection with a piece entitled “The Library.” Its final words are as follows:

     

    The fate of the Sarajevo University Library, its famous city hall, whose books took a whole night and day to go up in flames, will be remembered as the fire to end all fires, a last mythical celebration of ash and dust. It happened, after a whistle and an explosion, almost exactly a year ago. Perhaps even the same date that you’re reading this now. Gently stroke your books, dear strangers, and remember, they are dust. (154)

     

    Figure 16

     

    Notes

     

    1. A shifty statement, for obvious reasons. The following text was first presented on April 21, 2001 as part of the “Visible Cities” session of the annual meeting of the American Comparative Literature Association, at the University of Colorado, Boulder. Given that it investigates public, and published, modes of representation, including my own, I think it best to present the paper here more or less “as is,” or “as it was.” With the exception of minor adjustments intended to ease the shift from oral to written, all elaborations, corrections, qualifications, commentaries, and other forms of more recent speculation on my part are given in italics.

     

    The quote by Kaplan, presented here as epigraph, was not read at the conference, although I did, and do, feel that my analysis as a whole can be characterized as an attempt to understand how someone–and quite possibly anyone–could think (not to say publish) such a thought. If I have an answer to Kaplan’s question, it would be, quite simply, “Home.”

     

    2. My summary of Arendt’s argument is borrowed from Elizabeth Spelman’s Fruits of Sorrow (62-8). Another important recent work, also responding to Arendt’s views, is Luc Boltanski’s La souffrance à distance (15-21).

     

    3. This reference, for anyone following events in the region, is particularly loaded. As it turned out, a couple of weeks after the ACLA conference, a ceremony was held in Banja Luka to mark the beginning of this very mosque’s reconstruction. The event was attended by various members of the international community, including the U.S. Ambassador. It was also attended by a well-organized, well-equipped mob of Bosnian Serb nationalists, who broke up the ceremony by stoning the officials and lighting buses on fire, fatally injuring at least one Bosnian Muslim man. For more information, see the Institute for War and Peace Reporting’s “Balkan Reports,” #245 and #258, by Gordana Katana (<http://www.iwpr.net>).

     

    4. At Boulder, I had to cut the second joke to keep within (or at least close to) my allotted time.

     

    5. This may be overstated. When I double-checked my story after the conference with another Sarajevan friend of mine, one who often goes rock-climbing near there, he agreed that the house was abandoned before the war, but added that it was also damaged significantly–the roof for example–during the war. My point in introducing the photo, and introducing the essay with the photo, was to evoke a certain ready response in my audience, one that is based on some fundamental assumptions. One such assumption is, of course, our belief that we know what we’re looking at: “We’ve seen this kind of thing before.” Also prevalent is our faith in the testimony of “experts.”

     

    6. Actually, the photo shown at the conference was somewhat different. Here various smudgy areas in the snow hide (poorly, I assume, since this is my first attempt at doctoring a photo) telephone and electricity wires, as well as a garbage can.

     

    7. The question remains, however, just how far my knowledge goes. Again, on further inquiry, I found out that there was in fact a cinema–The Dubrovnik–in this building before the war and that, a year or so after this photo was taken, the space was again used to advertise a movie (in this case, of all things, Runaway Bride). Despite these ugly facts, I still like my joke; moreover, it still sounds, to my ear, sort of “Bosnian.”

     

    As in the previous note, I mean to call attention to the dogmatic character of the language used: e.g., “no other movie was ever”. By now it should be evident that I don’t really trust such statements, yet I nonetheless find myself drawn into making them–as if it somehow goes with the territory.

     

    8. This section was also cut, mostly for lack of time.

     

    9. The story of how the paper kept going throughout the siege is recorded in a book called Sarajevo Daily, by Tom Gjelten. The paper’s editor-in-chief during the war, Kemal Kurspahic, has also published an account.

     

    10. Actually I didn’t. At the conference I decided, nonetheless, to leave in this reference to my original destination. The commentary on Jergovic’s story has been extended in this version, and now does include some analysis, however brief, of the section alluded to here.

     

    Ozren Kebo, in a war diary which rivals the achievements of Sarajevo Marlboro, has commented on the branding of the Bosnian capital:

     

    Anything blessed by the media acquires exchange value. The market is blind to morality, to the fight between good and evil. This market begins just behind the Serb trenches at Kiseljak. Once the media have managed to make people sick of one product, something that they’ve robbed of its tragic character, or its greatness, or whatever, that product becomes nothing more than consumer goods. In Milan, on the 24th of December, 1993, I came across a porno video that was titled “Sarajevo.” It was on display in a black street vendor’s stall. Here, in short, was the dirty trick played on us by CNN. The cassette offered a profusion of coprophagic mischief, of copulations, of trilingus, of cunnilingus, of fellatio, but that wasn’t enough to attract buyers. The title was there in order to sell it. The black man had no idea what this eight-letter word signified. ‘It’s a really good video,’ he told me, ‘Look at the title.’

     

    Sarajevo is becoming a brand name, like Benetton, Coca-Cola and Nike. (103, my translation of the French translation)

     

    11. Time constraints.

     

    12. Laura Silber and Allan Little’s Yugoslavia: Death of a Nation gives the following account

     

    As the leaders of the procession, gathering in the Parliament forecourt, declared a ‘National Salvation Committee,’ the demonstrators swung right, over the bridge, and into Grbavica. Unwittingly, they were moving up the hill towards the beseiged police academy and into the Serb guns. Shots rang out… someone threw a hand-grenade. The crowd panicked and dispersed. Unknown to most of the demonstrators–for whom the prospect of open war still seemed preposterous–Sarajevo had suffered its first casulties of war. Suada Dilberovic, a twenty-one-year-old medical student from Dubrovnik, was the first to die. She was shot in the chest as she crossed Vrbanja Bridge and was dead on arrival at Ko�evo Hospital. (227)

     

     

    Enida Jahic, a friend and former student, after reading the conference version, added a comment about the memorial now on this site. “The Vrbanja bridge is now [itself] called Suada Deliberovic…. So I guess that the whole bridge stands for her tombstone, and it can hardly be used for propaganda. The inscription is: ‘Krv moje krvi potece, i Bosna ne presu�i’ (‘A drop of my blood was spilt, and Bosnia–i.e., the river and the country–has not become dry.’)” The inscription was written by the Bosnian poet Abdulah Sidran.

     

    13. My excerpts from the Kaplan text may perhaps be criticized in that they intentionally excise the “big idea” which it is the purpose of this scene to convey (that bourgeois democracy and prosperity, with time, make fascism impossible). He gets “the old Nazi hunter [Simon] Wiesenthal” to mouth this one for him. My point, that Kaplan’s distinction between the West and the rest is, to put it as mildly as possible, self-serving, is certainly no less true of his actual thesis. To show that both the distinction and the idea are wrong–which I also believe–would require another essay, and, I’m afraid, another essayist.

     

    14. IFOR stands for “Implementation Force,” i.e., the 60,000 troops, led by NATO, that were dispatched into Bosnia-Herzegovina as a part of the Dayton accords. The name has since been changed to “SFOR,” an abbreviation of “Stabilization Force.”

     

    15. Again, the language here (“All you see,” “it”) now strikes me as particularly coercive. Moreover, things are no longer as they were then. In the years since this photo was taken, about half of these homes were rebuilt; on the other hand, the home that I show in the next photo hasn’t changed much at all.

     

    16. When I sent this essay to my friend in Sarajevo, I added the following comment: “In reading these lines, it occurs to me how the expression is typical of sentimental writing. The person writing this doesn’t know this man, and doesn’t want to know him. What he wants is a receptacle for his own interpreting sensibility. The man himself, here portrayed as a hero, may conceivably be just the opposite. Or he could just be an ordinary human being. What do we see, if we see?”

    Works Cited

     

    • Arendt, Hannah. On Revolution. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 1963.
    • Boltanski, Luc. La souffrance à distance: Morale humanitaire, médias et politique. Paris: Editions Métailié, 1993.
    • Calvino, Italo. “Dell’opaco.” La Strada di San Giovanni. Milano: Mondadori, 1990. 117-34.
    • Gjelten, Tom. Sarajevo Daily: A City and Its Newspaper Under Siege. New York: HarperCollins, 1995.
    • Jergovic, Miljenko. Sarajevo Marlboro. Trans. S. Toma�evic. London: Penguin, 1997.
    • Kaplan, Robert D. Balkan Ghosts: A Journey Through History. New York: Vintage, 1994.
    • Kebo, Ozren. Bienvenue au enfer: Sarajevo mode d’emploi. Trans. Mireille Robin. Paris: La Nuée Bleue, 1997.
    • Musil, Robert. “Monuments.” Posthumous Papers of a Living Author. Trans. Peter Wortsman. Hygiene, CO: Eridanos, 1987. 61-64.
    • Silber, Laura, and Allan Little. Yugoslavia: Death of a Nation. London: Penguin, 1997.
    • Spelman, Elizabeth V. Fruits of Sorrow: Framing Our Attention to Suffering. Boston: Beacon Press, 1997.

     

  • Marxism, Postmodernism, Zizek

    Brian Donahue

    Department of English
    Gonzaga University
    donahue@gonzaga.edu

     

    This essay begins in the midst of the ongoing dilemma posed by late-capitalist society and postmodern culture, namely, whether these remain the ultimate horizon of the contemporary world and whether efforts to resist, oppose, represent critically, or propose alternatives to the “cultural dominant” of postmodernism are merely atavistic. Below, I address some of the challenges to Marxism (as the discourse of the alternative to and the critique of capitalism par excellence) posed by the conditions of what Ernest Mandel has famously named “late capitalism” and by the theoretical discourse of what Dick Hebdige has called “the posts,”1and make a case for the continued relevance and value of Marxist theory for an ostensibly post-Marxist, would-be post-ideological period. The developments in the theory of ideology advanced in Slavoj Zizek’s work, focusing on the role of psychology in the functioning of ideology under conditions of late capitalism, are then taken as valuable criticisms and revisions of the Marxist tradition that open useful avenues for critically understanding American culture and society in recent decades.

     

    Hard Times for Marxism

     

    The zeitgeist is anti-Marxist to the same extent that it is antimodern, exhibiting what Jean-François Lyotard calls in The Postmodern Condition, in what has become one of the great slogan-definitions of postmodernism, an “incredulity toward metanarratives” (xxiv), including especially those inherited from the modern European Enlightenment tradition, such as progress and liberation. Lyotard’s argument in brief: totalizing “master narratives” no longer function to legitimate and unify knowledge; the postmodern condition is marked by heterogeneous and radically incommensurable language games; attempts to reconcile language games through the principle of consensus are “terrorist” (63). This argument is typical of postmodern neopragmatist theorizing in that it precludes the kind of large-scale analyses that would allow adequate attempts to elaborate connections between the epistemological-linguistic theory he proposes and the social, economic, and cultural forces to which he only occasionally refers. Obviously, Marxism is directly challenged in Lyotard’s analysis since it traditionally promotes both a progressive teleology and an emancipatory politics.

     

    Other specific challenges to particular Marxist concepts and protocols are widespread; for example, its utopianism, a topic much discussed by Fredric Jameson,2 often comes under fire. As Clint Burnham notes, the contemporary criticisms of utopia take two primary forms: “First, the culture doubts the possibility of some ‘better place’ than the undoubtedly excellent world of late capitalism,” a criticism that he characterizes as “‘bad,’ or negative, or ideological, or neoconservative”; and second, “that culture characterizes itself as already nonrepresentational by doubting the possibility of representationalism,” a claim that he calls the “‘good,’ or positive, or utopian, or postmodern critique of utopia” (2). In either case, a conception of radical social change toward an imagined (better) future beyond the capitalist horizon is eradicated. Other Marxist categories and concepts–everything from the labor theory of value to the claims for dialectical materialism as a “science” of inquiry3–have come under attack in various high theoretical arguments. Such writings, combined with the collapse of state socialism in Eastern Europe, have raised the question for leftist intellectuals at the start of the twenty-first century: why Marxism (still)?

     

    Burnham offers several answers to this question that are worth repeating: first, Marxism has for the past thirty years or so found its “moral legitimacy (for better or for worse)” more in the Western new social movements of “youth, ecology, feminism, antiracism” and the like and in the “Third World (from Che to postcolonialism)” than in Eastern European state socialism; second, Marxism is not a monolithic discourse, and even during the Soviet era its most significant theorists always maintained an “independent and skeptical attitude” rather than a blind allegiance to the Communist party; third, the European revolutions have demonstrated that “the masses can opt to take control of their own destinies,” invalidating fascist hopes for efficient control, even if these particular revolts were “as much about consumer goods as… about freedom”; and fourth, Marxist Third World liberation movements and Marxist critical analyses of world political-economic situations remain as relevant as ever in the post-Cold War period (4-5). Regardless of whether we wish to accept Burnham’s claims in their entirety, they certainly indicate at a minimum that Marxism should not be dismissed as casually as it often is in the current intellectual climate. For all of its demonstrable continued relevance, however, Marxism does face difficult times, not least among intellectuals, as can be seen in the debates over postmodernism in theoretical circles since the 1970s as well as in the events and developments that have prompted those debates.

     

    Postmodernism as Post-Marxism

     

    Most theoretical accounts of postmodernism have focused on various features of advanced industrialized societies since the end of the second World War, citing an array of historical transformations as signs of the birth of a new era. Such trends and events as the detonation of the first atomic bomb; the proliferation of television; the rise of rock and roll and youth culture; the first transmissions of images of the earth as seen from space; the expansion of finance capital and money markets; the attenuation of the distinction between high art and commercial popular culture; the development of sophisticated computer technology and the related nexus of information, power, and profit; the migration of the middle classes from cities to suburbs; the emergence of new social movements and political alliances unconstrained by older party affiliations; the shift in economically advanced regions away from heavy industrial manufacturing toward a service economy and consumer society, accompanied by an increased international division of labor; the rise of nationalist political independence movements; the proliferation of cynicism and suspicion of traditional narratives of legitimation; the expansion of multinational corporations; and the consolidation of reactionary fundamentalist religious and political movements have all been deemed hallmarks or inaugural moments of postmodern times.

     

    Different theorists associated with the discourse on postmodernism have taken different features as definitive and have approached the topic through different critical frameworks. Lyotard, as noted above, focuses on epistemology and aesthetics in The Postmodern Condition, addressing the crisis of legitimation in contemporary intellectual discourse and advocating the agonistics of irreconcilable language games. Jean Baudrillard, especially in his work since the late 1970s, experiments with a postmodern theoretical sociology that abandons traditional modes of critique and conceptual schemata in favor of pointed, ironic descriptions of consumer society and mass media. Gilles Deleuze and Félix Guattari espouse a militant philosophy of desire, championing the decentered, nomadic, postmodern subject as “schizo.” Jameson, writing on the postmodernism question from within the Marxist tradition, takes a broad historical perspective, linking postmodern culture explicitly to changes in the structure of capitalist political economy in the postwar era.4 The differences among the critical perspectives underlying these positions–in particular the differences between those that treat postmodernism as an aesthetic style, discursive problematic, or mood of schizophrenic, contradictory, conflicted subjectivity, and those that conceptualize postmodernity via a totalizing dialectical model as an overarching global, political-economic, historical reality or periodizing concept–remain significant. They are the differences that make a difference in this debate, marking a key theoretical dividing line.

     

    Slavoj Zizek discusses the implications of the way this dividing line is usually presented in contemporary theory. In a defense of dialectical totalization against the notions of dissemination and radically irreconcilable fragmentation that prevail in postmodern theory, Zizek claims that the very form of the opposition as posed in the question “gives predominance to the second term of the alternative” because it “silently assumes that every attempt at rational totalization is in advance doomed to failure” (For They 99). But this characterization misrepresents the Hegelian understanding of a rational totality, he writes, in that “the very impetus of the ‘dialectical progress’” has to do with “the possibility of ‘making a system’ out of the very series of failed totalizations, to enchain them in a rational way, to discern the strange ‘logic’ that regulates the process by means of which the breakdown of a totalization itself begets another totalization” (99). He goes on to make a similar argument with regard to the Marxist notion of the class struggle, which is widely criticized by postmodernists as “the ‘totalizing’ moment of society, its structuring principle,… a kind of ultimate guarantee authorizing us to grasp society as a rational totality” (100). Such characterizations, Zizek argues, overlook “the ultimate paradox of the notion of ‘class struggle,’” which is that

     

    society is “held together” by the very antagonism, split, that forever prevents its closure in a harmonious, transparent, rational Whole–by the very impediment that undermines every rational totalization. Although “class struggle” is nowhere directly given as a positive entity, it none the less functions, in its very absence, as the point of reference enabling us to locate every social phenomenon not by relating it to class struggle as its ultimate meaning (“transcendental signified”) but by conceiving it as an(other) attempt to conceal and “patch up” the rift of the class struggle, to efface its traces–what we have here is the typical structural-dialectical paradox of an effect which exists only in order to efface the causes of its existence; of an effect which in a way “resists” its own cause. (100)

     

    Here Zizek, like Jameson, rebuts condemnations of the maligned “closed, totalized system,” claiming that Hegelian and Marxist dialectical theory never aimed at total closure in the first place and reasserting its methodological value in the face of postmodern criticisms by arguing that those criticisms are based on a generalized and mistaken conception of Hegelian and Marxist thinking in terms of absolute, total, and unified systems. In other words, even Hegel knew that Absolute Spirit’s destiny of perfect, static self-contemplation was always already rendered impossible by the ineluctable necessity of movement, and, as Zizek writes, even Marx understood that the “‘normal’ state of capitalism is the permanent revolutionizing of its own conditions of existence,” even though he sometimes proceeded “as if he [did] not know it, by describing the very passage from capitalism to socialism in terms of… vulgar evolutionist dialectics” (Sublime 52-53). While he does defend the dialectical tradition, Zizek does not simply revert to a “vulgar” Marxism (although Jameson has recently suggested that such a move might in fact be called for in the post-Cold War era5). I develop a more thorough discussion of his work below.

     

    Returning now to the issues at stake in the postmodernism debate, I find persuasive the efforts of Jameson and Zizek to link them to a dialectical tradition that, according to their arguments, has not been “made obsolete” by the advent of postmodern theory. The concerns of this latter discourse–from problems of representation and language to concerns with history, subjectivity, aesthetics, and politics–have been and continue to be central concerns of Marxist theory, notably in the work of the critical theorists of the Frankfurt School. Thus, just as the postmodernism question–even after all the pages devoted to it over the past thirty years–still looms in the background of any contemporary Marxist criticism, so too the questions of totality, capitalism, praxis, telos, and the “properly political” must be brought to bear on any postmodern theory and criticism that avoids such topics.

     

    As for the term postmodernism itself, it has taken on multiple meanings in its various incarnations and has provoked numerous attacks and debates. The semantic widening that has occurred as the term has appeared in more and more discursive fields over the course of its popularization should not, however, according to Hebdige, be taken as reason to dismiss it as meaningless gibberish. On the contrary, following Raymond Williams’s reasoning in Keywords, he suggests that “the more complexly nuanced a word is, the more likely it is to have formed the focus for historically significant debates, to have occupied a semantic ground in which something precious and important was felt to be embedded” (182).

     

    As nonacademic writers and traditional humanist scholars have made forays into this semantic ground, the assaults against the concept of postmodernism have taken a variety of forms, including claims that the term has no clear definition, that it’s a faddish sign of changing academic fashion or an irrelevant topic for elites to ponder and debate in coded jargon, and especially recently, that the arguments surrounding the term have run their course and deserve to die out quietly. Yet each of these claims holds whatever degree of validity it may retain only to the extent that it implicitly accepts to some degree from the start the very kind of immanent, nominalist epistemology that is alleged to be the hallmark of postmodernism, an epistemology according to which the Jamesonian thesis–that postmodernity names the current historical totality of our actual global political economy (even if an exhaustive catalog of its empirical features remains properly impossible and if a selective description of such features would necessarily reveal contradictions)–is bracketed from the start. That is, it is possible to dismiss the concept of postmodernism as a “mere” fad only within an epistemological context that assumes that such fads constitute nothing more than elements of a linguistic game played by the academic “discourse community” and that they have relevance only to the extent that they, for example, provide fodder for conversations, presentations, and publications without ever “touching ground.” In this sense, conservative intellectuals who call for a return to essential Western values, the great classics, moral authority, and foundational principles and who simultaneously dismiss theories of postmodernism out of hand as fashionably relativistic nihilism are trying to have it both ways: they want foundationalism, but they want to insist at the same time that in the case of the concept of postmodernism, there is no foundation, as if with a vigorous enough rhetorical flourish they could make it–and what it signifies–disappear.

     

    In other words, there is a call to a reflection model of language in the conservative position, yet the idea that the sign postmodernism might refer to or reflect an actual “reality” is dismissed (and therefore the sign is deemed meaningless). Of course, one of the key features of postmodern theory–insofar as its lineage includes structuralist linguistics and the application of the linguistic model across the full range of theoretical discourse and cultural practices (and even the critique of the binary coding of this model in the poststructuralist moment)–is its questioning of the strict distinction between the “real world” and (linguistic) representation. As Derrida put it, “From the moment there is meaning there are nothing but signs” (50). But then at another level, mimesis reintroduces itself because such a theory may be held to “reflect” a certain virtualization, spectacularization, and intensified semioticization of the “real world” itself in the era of mass media and computerization and of the movement of scientific research toward what Lyotard calls “postmodern science” (53-60).6

     

    In any case, the conservative criticism wants to refuse both postmodern theory itself and the possibility that the theory may indicate that something “really has changed” about the world conceived and described in the discourses of modernity. Any tendencies in intellectual and cultural discourse that have emphasized the role of language and cultural forms in constructing social reality are therefore deemed suspect and potentially dangerous in that they allegedly put the cart of language and culture before the horse of the reality they reflect. Examples would include the aesthetic and cultural politics of the modernist avant-garde, who understood their work to be ahead of its time and who emphasized the autonomy of art and its consequent role in shaping rather than reflecting social reality; the Nietzschean-Heideggerian-Derridean philosophical lineage that emphasizes language as a kind of inescapable horizon circumscribing reality, history, experience, and consciousness; the Althusserian structuralist-Marxist emphasis on “ideological state apparatuses” as determinants of subjectivity; the propensity within literary criticism after the rise of semiotic theory to see signs everywhere, even where–the conservative critic would want to say–we used to see things; and the Lacanian psychoanalytic focus on the linguistic structure of the unconscious and the determining role of language in the formation of subjectivity. All of these very different critical approaches would be considered a departure from “common sense” realism and traditional foundational premises.

     

    The reflection or mimetic model of language and representation is also, however, a simplified version of a certain line of anti-poststructuralist Marxist critique. That is, as a counter to the tendency in poststructuralism to insist on the omnipresence of textuality, a traditional Marxist theoretical response insists on the determination of the cultural superstructure in the last instance by the economic base even if that “last instance” functions as a limit that is never actually reached and even if such determinations are mediated in multiple complex ways. So a kind of affinity can be seen between conservative and Marxist arguments against extreme versions of poststructuralism, but that shared criticism is where the similarity generally ends. The conservative argument is usually made in the name of an idealized conception of intellectual history as “great men who wrote great books.” Thus the critical-materialist dimension of Marxism is at odds with it. But there is a contending discourse, to which I have already referred, that offers a dialectical critical theory also strictly at odds with extreme versions of postmodern theory yet at the same time apparently comfortably “post”-Marxist and therefore (more of) a puzzle (than humanist liberalism or conservatism) for anyone claiming allegiance to traditional or “vulgar” Marxist materialism.

     

    Zizek, Defender of the Dialectic

     

    Among the most celebrated academic celebrities of the nineties, Slavoj Zizek is a prolific and authoritative writer who explains philosophical and psychoanalytic concepts through references to popular culture, jokes, and political ideologies. His work has done much to advance a psychoanalytic theory of ideology, offering a combined Lacanian-Hegelian model as a counter to both traditional Marxist ideology critique and more recent poststructuralist discourse analysis. His style is often breezy, associative, enjoyable, and hyperbolic, to the extent that it is not until one finishes reading that one begins to feel that he has been repeating the same idea throughout the various short segments of the text. This observation is not meant to imply that he is literally repeating himself but to suggest that the form of his arguments often appears the same even if the content shifts restlessly. From a certain distance, he appears to be an entertainer who can quickly and cleverly make Moebius strips out of every kind of material he encounters. Nonetheless, much of his work seems to capture perfectly the workings of ideology in our “post-ideological” times.

     

    To take one example, in The Sublime Object of Ideology Zizek revisits Pascal’s argument about the real effectivity of material practice, regardless of what one takes to be one’s subjective beliefs (33-40). The simplified version of Pascal’s approach to this topic is, “Kneel, and you will believe.” In other words, the ritualized practice of regulated bodily movements in particular religious settings, accompanied by specific physical sensations over time in a regular pattern, is enough to “induce” belief in a doubter. Zizek is careful to stress, however, the distinction between this materialism of “custom” and the simplistic concept of brainwashing or “insipid behaviorist wisdom (‘the content of your belief is conditioned by your factual behavior’)” (40), a distinction based on “the paradoxical status of a belief before belief“:

     

    By following a custom, the subject believes without knowing it, so that the final conversion is merely a formal act by means of which we recognize what we have already believed. In other words, what the behaviorist reading of Pascalian “custom” misses is the crucial fact that the external custom is always a material support for the subject’s unconscious. (40)

     

    Zizek applies this argument about the “automatism of the signifier” to a variety of homologous situations, such as the spinning of Tibetan prayer wheels and the practice in some cultures of hiring “weepers” to grieve on one’s behalf. He draws from these various examples the general lesson that external, material factors play an important though paradoxical role in producing, which is to say enabling retrospective recognition of, what are usually taken to be internal, spiritual-ideological states. This process thus demonstrates “the objectivity of belief”: the ritualized behavior “does the believing” for the doubter and induces/allows acknowledgment of “real” belief; the spinning wheels carrying written prayers effectively “do the praying” for whoever spins them; the hired mourners “do the grieving” for the relative of the deceased. As further examples, Zizek cites Lacan’s comments on the Chorus in Greek tragedy, which does “our duty of compassion for the heroes” even if we are “just drowsily watching the show,” as well as the familiar current example of canned laughter and applause on the soundtracks of television shows, sounds that perform the same function as the classical Chorus: “the Other–embodied in the television set–is relieving us even of our duty to laugh–is laughing instead of us” (35).

     

    Developing this idea in specifically Marxist terms, Zizek emphasizes the point that commodity fetishism is a property not of consciousness but of objective behavior and that belief in the fetish is always ascribed to a “subject presumed to believe.” Thus in their actual socioeconomic behavior, in their everyday activity, people fetishize commodities, even though consciously, they are perfectly aware that the “relations between things” mask “relations between people” (“Supposed” 41). In such a context, Zizek points out, the task for theory is not to “demonstrate how the original human belief was transposed onto things”; on the contrary, “displacement is original and constitutive” (“Supposed” 41). No one consciously acknowledges that he or she believes in the magical properties of commodities; rather, this belief is attributed always to an Other, in this case, to the uncritical consumer who is duped by the messages of advertising, ignorantly seeking happiness through the consumption of commodities:

     

    There are some beliefs, the most fundamental ones, which are from the very outset “decentered,” beliefs of the Other; the phenomenon of the “subject supposed to believe” is thus universal and structurally necessary…. All concrete versions of this “subject supposed to believe” (from the small kids for whose sake their parents pretend to believe in Santa Claus to the “ordinary working people” for whose sake communist intellectuals pretend to believe in socialism) are stand-ins for the big Other. So the answer to the conservative platitude according to which every honest man has a profound need to believe in something is that every honest man has a profound need to find another subject who would believe in his place. (“Supposed” 41-42)

     

    After summarizing this argument about the psychological displacement of belief that characterizes the subject’s relation to commodities in capitalist society, Zizek specifies the appropriate Marxist response, which is not to perform a kind of primary-level ideology critique, since the bourgeois subject is already consciously critical:

     

    What the fetish objectivizes is “my true belief,” the way things “truly seem to me,” although I never effectively experience them this way…. So when a critical Marxist encounters a bourgeois subject immersed in commodity fetishism, the Marxist’s reproach to him is not “Commodity may seem to you a magical object endowed with special powers, but it really is just a reified expression of relations between people”; the actual Marxist’s reproach is rather “You may think that the commodity appears to you as a simple embodiment of social relations (that, for example, money is just a kind of voucher entitling you to a part of the social product), but this is not how things really seem to you–in your social reality, by means of your participation in social exchange, you bear witness to the uncanny fact that a commodity really appears to you as a magical object endowed with special powers.” (“Supposed” 54)

     

    In other words, bourgeois subjects think they see through the veil of the commodity form and rest comfortably in that critical knowledge of socioeconomic relations; but in reality, they behave as if they believe differently from what they know, and their relation to commodities is the objective illustration of this disavowed belief.

     

    This line of reasoning, then, locates ideology not in consciousness but in real activity. Zizek cites the formula for contemporary cynical ideology proposed in Peter Sloterdijk’s Critique of Cynical Reason: as opposed to the traditional Marxist notion, according to which people are “duped” into believing the ruling ideology and thus “do not know what they are doing” when they effectively participate in their own subjugation, contemporary popular cynicism forces us to consider the notion of an “enlightened false consciousness” whereby “they know very well what they are doing, but still, they are doing it” (Sublime 29).

     

    Like most analyses of subjectivity in contemporary theory, this version disrupts radically the notion of a fully self-present subject: the grain of material practice in time is always already altering all ideological symbolization. To use Zizek’s Lacanian language: the irreducible “hard kernel” of the Real remains unassimilated into the Symbolic order. One can, for example, have a self-conception as an ironic, critical viewer who watches TV comedies as kitsch or as the detritus of the culture industry, but according to Zizek’s version of externalized ideology, as long as one sits and watches–whether laughing idiotically or making ironic, cynical comments–objectively, one is doing one’s duty to “enjoy the show.” This notion has significant implications for theories of both ideology and subjectivity. For example, the determining effect of objective activity regardless of subjective intention can be read as another way of stating the existentialist slogan that there is no “dress rehearsal” for life: at each moment actions are final and decisive, even if one believes oneself to be, for example, merely “performing a role” temporarily before returning to some other “real life.” That real life is being determined at each instant by numerous material factors in the face of which a concept like “personal choice” loses the certainty of its suggestion of direct action in pursuit of clearly understood interests.

     

    This Lacanian “hard kernel” that appears prominently in Zizek’s work can have varying political valences. Its value for radical politics derives from its affirmation of the Lacanian notion of the inherent lack enabling subjectivity: the subject is constituted through, yet simultaneously split by, the object-cause of desire such that the “it” is always already there before the “I” can be recognized. This focus on that which cannot be made consciously transparent to the subject through linguistic symbolization counters a prevailing current of contemporary mainstream U.S. culture that denies or derides the unconscious as an invention of psychoanalysis in the same way that it denies or derides class struggle as an invention of Marxism, both treated as entirely discredited projects. The idea that rational linguistic processes can never achieve transparency and that subjects are unable to know fully their own motivations is corrosive to the basic assumptions of liberalism. If rational discourse is subtended by an unassimilable, extradiscursive Real, then the model of liberal politics–free, rational subjects representing their interests through transparent communication in an effort to achieve consensus–is called into question. “Freedom,” “rationality,” and “transparency” are shown to be ideological fictions draped over the Real, which is never fully covered by them. Such a model poses problems for, among other projects, the Habermasian social-democratic ideal of rational intersubjective communication as well as the American liberal neopragmatism promoted by Richard Rorty.7

     

    For all the ground it gains in destabilizing liberal politics, the “hard kernel of the Real” also raises problems for radical politics. To the extent that it can be understood as a zone of absolute, prediscursive otherness beyond criticism, the Real can function as a naturalized, ahistorical alibi that assures in advance the failure of systemic critique and future-oriented political projects by fetishizing the moment at which we must throw up our hands and admit ignorance and the failure of representation. This insistence on the Real as radically foreclosed from symbolization thus effectively serves existing hegemonic relations by reinforcing the lines of inclusion and exclusion that determine the relative power accorded to various subject positions as inevitable effects of an invariant law of the Real. This is essentially Judith Butler’s critique of Zizek along feminist-poststructuralist lines.8

     

    Another common criticism of Zizek holds that he ultimately takes no position on the ideological issues he addresses. The problem is related to that Moebius strip quality mentioned above: Zizek consistently performs stunning critical analyses, but the question of where they are supposed to lead is not always answered, especially in The Sublime Object of Ideology, his first book published in English. Indeed, at the 1999 MLA convention, Teresa Ebert criticized Zizek from a strictly traditional Marxist standpoint, characterizing him as a contemporary cynic trapped in the dead-end of “enlightened false consciousness,” and arguing that despite his self-presentation as a critic who exposes the workings of contemporary popular-cynical ideology, Zizek himself assumes what amounts to a meta-cynical posture that does not free him from the charge of cynicism.

     

    Perhaps as a result of criticisms that his work avoids adopting clear and consistent political stances, Zizek has made some of his “ideological” positions more explicit in his recent writing.9 These recent essays directly address contemporary ideological issues, undermining critical comments such as the following by Sean Homer:

     

    His work never really moves to that second moment, whereby a consideration of what ideology returns to us may facilitate the formulation of oppositional ideologies and the space of politics proper. I always remain unclear, for example, what Zizek is actually arguing for. Moreover, for Zizek, this is not really a legitimate question; it is somehow to miss the point. (par. 12)

     

    In a similar gesture, Denise Gigante has made this characterization of Zizek’s work as apolitical or “undecidable” the central point of her recent article on him: “But where Zizek is unique, and where he makes his radical break with other literary theorists who take up a position, any position at all that pretends to some notional content, is the fact that he fundamentally has no position” (153).

     

    This conception of Zizek as a political cipher is perhaps understandable on a first reading of a text like Looking Awry or even The Sublime Object of Ideology and on a hasty categorization of him as a “poststructuralist psychoanalytic theorist” (a categorization that would require considerable elaboration). But in light of careful analysis of a wide selection of his writings, it would be difficult to insist on Zizek’s political inscrutability. On the contrary, his work evinces a general ideological commitment to a radical democracy that is critical of both the globalizing capitalism of the present and the bureaucratic state socialism of the recent past. Thus, he advocates an (admittedly somewhat nebulous) “third way” for the future while acknowledging the need for nation-states in the present as a counter both to the increasing transnationalism of capital and to the dialectically co-determined phenomenon of increasing ethnic and religious “fundamentalist” violence and racism. While Zizek does not frequently perform detailed analysis of specific policy issues, he does write consistently from within the broad ideological framework I have described above–contrary to the effort of Gigante to build an entire argument on the premise that Zizek’s “subjective transparency is precisely his point” (154) and of Homer to chastise him for failing to draw connections between his critical writing and the political sphere. Indeed, the following passage provides a clear statement of his ideas about at least one major topic of recent political philosophy, the “civil society” of late capitalism:

     

    People have this ethics of the bad state and good civic, independent structures. But sorry, in Slovenia I am for the state and against civil society! In Slovenia, civil society is equal to the right-wingers. In America, after the Oklahoma bombing, they suddenly discovered that there are hundreds of thousands of jerks. Civil society is not this nice social movement but a network of moral majority conservatives and nationalist pressure groups, against abortion, for religious education in schools: a real pressure from below. (“Japan,” par. 24)

     

    As for his stance with respect to political economy, it is clear that a major aim of Zizek’s work is a critique of capitalism in an effort to contribute to the building of an anti-capitalist agenda in the realm of the political, where struggles for hegemony are constantly engaged and renewed. Following the general thrust of post-Gramscian Marxism, he stresses that this hegemonizing process of “winning consent” is always at work, even at the supposedly objective level of the economy. Thus he argues, for example, that warnings from financial experts about the dangers of certain economic reform measures, even when such warnings are backed up by citations of crises “caused” by similar policies in other situations, should not be understood as neutral descriptions of “objective” economic causality:

     

    The fact that, if one does not obey the limits set by Capital, a crisis “really follows,” in no way “proves” that the necessity of these limits is an objective necessity of economic life. It should rather be conceived as proof of the privileged position Capital holds in the economic and political struggle, as in the situation where a stronger partner threatens that if you do X, you will be punished by Y, and then, upon your doing X, Y effectively ensues. (“Multiculturalism” 35)

     

    While this is a recent and fairly direct comment on the dynamics of multinational capitalist economic policy, his work has always exhibited an engagement with Marxist theory and has always been implicitly and often explicitly grounded in the project of a critique of capitalist social relations and ideology, especially as these are connected with questions of subjectivity. Numerous other examples could be cited in addition to the two passages above, each a rebuke to the attempt to represent Zizek as an apolitical ironist, resistant “to being born into any critical stance,” as Gigante characterizes him (160).

     

    In any case, many of Zizek’s arguments and concepts seem “intuitively” accurate in the contemporary world: representation does fail; evil does show itself; rational discourse does break down; motivations for behavior are not always explicable; ideology does seem to function through enjoyment at some level; ironic distance and cynicism, far from being subversive, do seem to be built into hegemonic discourse today. The relevance of these issues can be seen in recent episodes of violence in U.S. schools. It is possible to string the shootings together and interpret their meaning, drawing rational conclusions of various ideological shadings: the events are a sign of the moral bankruptcy of our secular society, an aftereffect of the permissive, anti-establishment counterculture of the sixties, which has left young people without a consistent moral code and ex-hippie adults with no authority to enforce such a code if it did exist. Conversely, one can argue that the violence is a sign of the growing alienation of youth in an increasingly competitive late-capitalist socioeconomic system in which all value has been translated into market value, a situation that sends parents to work for more hours of the week and leaves children to be surrogate-parented by television and other forms of commercial mass culture, which merely replicate and augment the alienation of the adult world, cynically positioning them solely as consumers representing market segments. Zizek’s work seems to suggest that neither the moralistic-conservative nor the Marxist-radical analysis (nor even the liberal reformer’s argument for gun control and educational prevention programs) will ultimately touch the “hard kernel of the Real” that emerges in all these cases of youth violence. Indeed, notwithstanding broad characterizations of contemporary theory as “antimetaphysical,” something like a theological conception of primal evil seems to be operating here and in work by theorists like Baudrillard, who argues in The Transparency of Evil that all the effort at eliminating evil from contemporary discourse (the various constructive engagement policies, win-win scenarios, conflict resolution programs, self-esteem workshops, and up-with-people organizations) cannot eradicate it, even if that evil is hidden and denied, or more accurately, is desymbolized:

     

    The world is so full of positive feelings, naive sentimentality, self-important rectitude and sycophancy that irony, mockery, and the subjective energy of evil are always in the weaker position. At this rate every last negative sentiment will soon be forced into a clandestine existence. (107-08)

     

    Another passage in the same text seems to forecast the logic of the school-violence outbursts of recent years:

     

    In a society which seeks–by prophylactic measures, by annihilating its own natural referents, by whitewashing violence, by exterminating all germs and all of the accursed share, by performing cosmetic surgery on the negative–to concern itself solely with quantified management and with the discourse of the Good, in a society where it is no longer possible to speak of Evil, Evil has metamorphosed into all the viral and terroristic forms that obsess us. (81)

     

    Thus evil erupts in any number of instances of the return of the repressed, among which the school shootings would no doubt be deemed exemplary, 10 as would the plot of their precursor text, Michael Lehmann’s film Heathers (1989), a dark comedy about the class structure of a “typical” suburban high school (an especially relevant reference in light of media reports about the clique-resentment that at least in part fueled the April 1999 killings at a “typical” suburban high school in Colorado). In this film the narrator, who at first tries to become accepted by the dominant group of girls (all named Heather), is eventually drawn by her sociopathic boyfriend into unknowingly helping him murder their popular-girl and jock-boy classmates, passing off the incidents as suicides, an explanation that the adults and other students are exceedingly willing to accept. The point for Baudrillard, following Bataille, is that the “accursed share” cannot be extricated from any economy: the “bad subject” may eventually try to blow up the school during the pep rally. This analysis essentially repeats a formula that Zizek frequently quotes from Lacan’s Third Seminar, Les Psychoses: “What is refused in the Symbolic order returns in the Real.”

     

    But we should not let this “theological” reading of contemporary evil stand without further elaboration since neither Zizek nor Baudrillard grounds his comments in Christian theology or calls for a stricter adherence to traditional moral codes as a “solution.” For Zizek this would be no solution at all, since morality operates in Symbolic reality while the particular kind of evil that he diagnoses in, for example, racist violence, skinhead beatings, and school shootings has roots in the non-symbolized Real of jouissance.

     

    Simulacrum, Superego, Lacanian Ethics, and the Problem of Evil

     

    According to Zizek, theorists of postmodern society who make much of the usurpation of the Real by the simulacrum either long nostalgically for the lost distinction between them or announce the final overcoming of the “metaphysical obsession with authentic Being,” or both (he mentions Paul Virilio and Gianni Vattimo, and we might add Baudrillard to the list). In either case they “miss the distinction between simulacrum and appearance”:

     

    What gets lost in today’s plague of simulations is not the firm, true, nonsimulated Real, but appearance itself. To put it in Lacanian terms: the simulacrum is imaginary (illusion), while appearance is symbolic (fiction); when the specific dimension of symbolic appearance starts to disintegrate, imaginary and real become more and more indistinguishable…. And, in sociopolitical terms, this domain of appearance (that is, symbolic fiction) is none other than that of politics…. The old conservative motto of keeping up appearances thus today obtains a new twist:… [it] stands for the effort to save the properly political space. (“Leftist” 995-96)

     

    Making the same argument about a slightly different version of this problem, Zizek writes that the standard reading of “outbursts of ‘irrational’ violence” in the postmodern “society of the spectacle” is that “our perception of reality is mediated by aestheticized media manipulations to such an extent that it is no longer possible for us to distinguish reality from its media image” (Metastases 75). Violent outbursts in this context are thus seen as “desperate attempts to draw a distinction between fiction and reality… [and] to dispel the cobweb of the aestheticized pseudo-reality” (75). Again with reference to the Lacanian triad of Imaginary-Symbolic-Real, Zizek argues that this analysis is “right for the wrong reasons“:

     

    What is missing from it is the crucial distinction between imaginary order and symbolic fiction.

     

    The problem of contemporary media resides not in their enticing us to confound fiction with reality but, rather, in their “hyperrealist” character by means of which they saturate the void that keeps open the space for symbolic fiction. (75)

     

    A society of proliferating, promiscuous images is thus not overly fictionalized but is, on the contrary, not “fictionalized” enough in the sense that the basis for making valid statements, the structure guaranteeing intersubjective communication, the order permitting shared narratives and, to use Jameson’s term, “cognitive mapping”11–in short, the realm of the Symbolic–is short-circuited by an incessant flow of images, which solicit not analysis and the powers of thought but rather nothing more than blank, unreflective enjoyment.

     

    The kind of subjectivity that corresponds to this hyperreal, spectacularized society without a stable Symbolic order is what Zizek calls in Looking Awry the “pathological narcissist” (102). That is, following the predominance of the “‘autonomous’ individual of the Protestant ethic” and the “heteronomous ‘organization man’” who finds satisfaction through “the feeling of loyalty to the group”–the two models of subjectivity corresponding to previous stages of capitalist society–today’s media-spectacle-consumer society is marked by the rise of the “pathological narcissist,” a subjective structure that breaks with the “underlying frame of the ego-ideal common to the first two forms” (102). The first two forms involved inverted versions of each other: one either strove to remain true to oneself (that is, to a “paternal ego-ideal”) or looked at oneself “through the eyes of the group,” which functioned as an “externalized” ego-ideal, and sought “to merit its love and esteem” (102). With the stage of the “pathological narcissist,” however, the ego-ideal itself is dissolved:

     

    Instead of the integration of a symbolic law, we have a multitude of rules to follow–rules of accommodation telling us “how to succeed.” The narcissistic subject knows only the “rules of the (social) game” enabling him to manipulate others; social relations constitute for him a playing field in which he assumes “roles,” not proper symbolic mandates; he stays clear of any kind of binding commitment that would imply a proper symbolic identification. He is a radical conformist who paradoxically experiences himself as an outlaw. (102)

     

    Thus the “permissive” society of the last decades of the twentieth century, marked by the often-noted “decline of paternal authority,” turns out not to be more liberating than earlier social formations after all; in fact, Zizek writes, “this disintegration of the ego-ideal entails the installation of a ‘maternal’ superego that does not prohibit enjoyment but, on the contrary, imposes it and punishes ‘social failure’ in a far more cruel and severe way, through an unbearable and self-destructive anxiety” (103).

     

    While its generalized form may be more recent, the effects of this overbearing presence of the maternal superego are already evident in Orson Welles’s Citizen Kane (1941).12 The film offers viewers a fairly simple “psychological” reading of the title character’s dying utterance, “Rosebud”: we learn at the end of the narrative that this was the name of Kane’s childhood sled; thus we surmise that Kane’s saying the word as he dies indicates his nostalgic longing for his idyllic Colorado childhood. The word evokes the period before Kane was separated from his parents–at a time when he was not yet mature enough (still a “rosebud”) to make decisions for himself–and was inserted into a position of wealth and power that he never sought and in which he could not, after all, find true happiness. But this reading overlooks the fact that it is Kane’s mother who initiates the tragic progression of her son’s future through her desire that Charles should have a “better life” than was possible in their rural home. It also overlooks the related fact that she does so over the impotent objections of Kane’s ineffectual father, a man who is without power because he is without property: the deed to the mine that has become the source of the family’s sudden wealth belongs to Mrs. Kane alone.

     

    Kane’s acts of youthful rebellion against his despised guardian-father Thatcher, which include transgressions that get him expelled from various elite colleges, and his decision to enter adult public life as the publisher of a sensationalistic, populist, anti-big-business newspaper because running a newspaper might be “fun,” as he tells Thatcher, appear at first to be attempts to break free of the restrictive “law of the father” embodied in the stern and humorless banker, who predictably disapproves of Kane’s activities and decisions. But Thatcher is merely a substitute-father put in place to enact the desire of Kane’s mother that Charles should grow up to be someone important, a situation that Kane never shows any awareness of in his defiance. As Kane’s friend Jed Leland, thinking back on their relationship, comments about Kane, “He loved Charlie Kane, of course, very dearly; and his mother–I guess he always loved her.” Kane’s explicit rebellion, then, is directed against the world of sober responsibility as law-of-the-father and thus takes the form of his “enjoying himself,” “having fun,” and “championing the cause of the common man,” behavior that he experiences as transgressive but that actually involves his acting out the paradoxical injunction to enjoy imposed by the maternal superego.

     

    As for Kane’s fight for “the common man,” it is ambiguous at best and seems to be motivated initially by the enjoyment that he derives from defying Thatcher and promoting causes antithetical to his interests. His “convictions” are sustained thereafter by his enjoyment of the support and adulation of friends and voters during his political campaign. Significantly, it is just when it appears inevitable, according to polls, that Kane will win the election and become governor–that is, just when he will have to make good on his attested convictions and assume the symbolic position of paternal authority as embodiment of Law–that he initiates an extramarital affair, which, when exposed, leads to his defeat on election day. This pathological pattern is continued later in the film as he begins wasting money by making wildly irrational expenditures on useless objects to fill his “fantasy palace,” Xanadu, violating the paternal laws of utility and economy and evading the “reality principle”: he remains trapped in a cycle of compulsive repetition on a narcissistic quest for enjoyment that can never be achieved precisely because it is demanded by the maternal superego, which determines his actions despite his properly egotistical claims that only he himself decides what he will do.

     

    On the night when he first meets his mistress and second wife Susan Alexander while on the way to a warehouse where his deceased mother’s possessions are stored, Kane learns that Alexander’s mother always wanted Susan to be an opera singer. As if by command, he immediately asks her to sing for him that evening and soon begins the process of training her for an opera career, fulfilling the desire of her mother regardless of Susan’s own desire and thereby taking on the role that Thatcher played for Kane himself as a youth. As both Kane’s and Susan’s misery demonstrate, however, avoiding the law of the father by fulfilling the desire of the mother is hardly an advisable course of action.13 As Leland remarks, directly contradicting the affected ethical resolution of Kane’s “declaration of principles,” which Kane signs with a flourish in front of Leland and publishes in his newspaper early in the film, Kane “never believed in anything except Charlie Kane; he never had a conviction except Charlie Kane in his life”–precisely the definition of the “pathological narcissist.” This subjective structure is figured near the end of the film in the famous shot of Kane walking past a mirrored mirror, producing a brief infinite regression of images of himself. Inasmuch as his “self” of infinite narcissistic images and his own private (blocked) enjoyment mark the limits of his “care,” Kane has remained under the command of the maternal superego and never acceded to symbolic law.

     

    Zizek specifies this crucial opposition between symbolic law and superego explicitly in terms of the movement from permission to obligation, from possibility based on clearly defined universal prohibition to necessity based on radical contingency. Paradoxically, in the absence of prohibition, where one might expect the free flow of libidinal energy, superego intervenes to require what is already permitted:

     

    Law is the agency of prohibition which regulates the distribution of enjoyment on the basis of a common, shared renunciation (the “symbolic castration”), whereas superego marks a point at which permitted enjoyment, freedom-to-enjoy, is reversed into obligation to enjoy–which, one must add, is the most effective way to block access to enjoyment. (For They 237)

     

    It is because of this obscene, harsh, punitive quality of the superego that the subject can never settle accounts with it. There is always more that can be sacrificed, Zizek explains, which is why Lacanian psychoanalytic ethics is based explicitly on opposing the coercion of the superego, in contrast to the ordinary association of superego with “conscience” or the moral sense guiding ethical behavior:

     

    Lacan’s maxim of the ethics of psychoanalysis (“not to compromise one’s desire”) is not to be confounded with the pressure of the superego…. Lacan takes seriously and literally the Freudian “economical paradox” of the superego–that is, the vicious cycle that characterizes the superego: the more we submit ourselves to the superego imperative, the greater its pressure, the more we feel guilty. According to Lacan, this “feeling of guilt” is not a self-deception to be dispelled in the course of the psychoanalytic cure–we really are guilty: superego draws the energy of the pressure it exerts upon the subject from the fact that the subject was not faithful to his desire, that he gave it up. Our sacrificing to the superego, our paying tribute to it, only corroborates our guilt. For that reason our debt to the superego is unredeemable: the more we pay it off, the more we owe. (Metastases 67-68)

     

    Indeed, Lacan’s ethical imperative must be taken as explicitly opposed to the concept of conventional morality with its focus on maximizing the Good, which functions as the arbiter of all action, since this model ultimately leads to a psychological paralysis arising from infinite consideration of ramifications, a process that turns the subject into a perpetual Hamlet, standing behind Claudius but unable to decide whether killing him or not killing him would be the better option. The interminable process of trying to decide which course of action leads to the “greater Good” entails its own kind of choice (that is, to “compromise one’s desire” by default) with its own kind of psychic consequences for the subject. Zizek explains this ethical-moral distinction through a Greimasian semiotic square based on the four possible arrangements of the positive and negative versions of these terms and the figures corresponding to the four pairings–moral, ethical (Saint); immoral, unethical (Scoundrel); immoral, ethical (Hero); and moral, unethical (superego)–and endorses the Lacanian championing of Hero over superego (Metastases 67).

     

    Zizek also anticipates the anxious objection that this Lacanian ethical attitude is too radical in its practical implications: is it reasonable to propose that everyone unrelentingly pursue his or her own desire and renounce all other considerations? Don’t “ordinary” people need an “ethics of the ‘common Good,’… despicable as it may appear in the eyes of the suicidal heroic ethics advocated by Lacan?” (Metastases 69). But he concludes that this concern–“What if everyone were to do the same as me?”–is simply another way of introducing the “pathological consideration of the consequences of our act in reality” and therefore functions as a way of imposing superego injunctions, restraints, and cycles of guilt through the insistence that we renounce our desire precisely because it cannot be universalized (69).

     

    From these comments on the Lacanian ethics of desire, Zizek moves, understandably, into a section on the unavoidable corollary to such an ethics, that is, the problem of evil, which has prompted the present discussion. Zizek identifies three kinds of evil, categorized according to the Freudian scheme of Ego, Superego, and Id. Ego-Evil is the most common kind: “behavior motivated by selfish calculation and greed”; Superego-Evil is the kind attributed to “fundamentalist fanatics,” that is, “Evil accomplished in the name of fanatical devotion to some ideological ideal”; finally, there is Id-Evil, “structured and motivated by the most elementary imbalance in the relationship between the Ich and jouissance, by the tension between pleasure and the foreign body of jouissance at the very heart of it” (Metastases 70-71). In other words, Id-Evil involves a kind of pure, irrational enjoyment in the evil act. The skinheads who beat up foreigners because it “feels good” to do so, the white racists who killed an African-American man by dragging him from a chain tied behind their pickup truck because the mere presence of a black man “bothered” them, the adolescents who committed the shooting sprees in U.S. schools over the past several years: all of these cases involve “violence not grounded in utilitarian or ideological reasons” (“Leftist” 998) but rather raw outbreaks of the Real of jouissance:

     

    The psychotic passage à l’acte is to be conceived of as a desperate attempt of the subject to evict objet a from reality by force, and thus gain access to reality. (The psychotic “loss of reality” does not arise when something is missing in reality, but, on the contrary, when there is too much of a Thing in reality.) (Metastases 77)

     

    Of course, what is most disturbing about such instances of the psychotic passage à l’acte is the often-reported “desensitization” of the subject toward the violent acts that he performs. The reports about the Columbine High School shooting incident, for example, included witnesses’ recollections of some details of the two killers’ comments as they walked around shooting their classmates. It was reported that they were laughing and saying, “We’ve been wanting to do this for years,” and commenting to each other about how “cool” it looked to see blood and pieces of victims’ bodies “fly” when they shot them. This last statement precisely illustrates Zizek’s diagnosis of the breakdown of the distinction between the Imaginary and the Real in a society marked by the attenuation of the Symbolic: the Real, the actual spraying of blood, is experienced as Imaginary, as a “cool” image or effect, a purely aesthetic phenomenon, while the Symbolic identity of the victim (someone with a name, a family, a “story,” a network of intersubjective connections) is not considered or recognized.

     

    Violence, Evil, and Late Capitalism at the Movies

     

    Such cases of “desensitization” toward violence and desymbolization of victims’ identities are widespread in contemporary film, as conservative politicians, desperate to locate in the culture industry the “causes” of violent crime (while impeding legislative efforts to curb easy access to guns), are quick to mention. But limited claims for causality (bad movies, bad parenting, bad guns) begin within a positivist framework that, as discussed above, misses the eruption of the Real in these cases of Id-Evil and that fails to account for the socioeconomic, historical context of multinational capitalism within which such eruptions take place. Even broader claims for causality based on the notion of a widespread “culture of death”–encompassing media violence, the prevalence of guns, drug abuse, as well as legalized abortion, euthanasia, and other indicators of an alleged rejection of belief in the “sanctity of human life”–fail to address the ways in which the structural demands of capitalism have contributed to the unwelcome social and cultural transformations since the “good old days” (usually meaning anytime before the 1960s).

     

    These criticisms, in both narrow and broad versions, are underwritten by the belief that with the correct combination of policy reforms to excise the diseased elements of the social body we might return to the “normal” state of society, having eliminated its anomalous, disruptive features. This belief, however, itself depends on ignoring the dialectical logic of the symptom, which Zizek, following Lacan, reminds us was “invented” by Marx:

     

    Marx’s great achievement was to demonstrate how all phenomena which appear to everyday bourgeois consciousness as simple deviations, contingent deformations and degenerations of the “normal” functioning of society (economic crises, wars, and so on), and as such abolishable through amelioration of the system, are necessary products of the system itself–the points at which the “truth,” the immanent antagonistic character of the system, erupts. (Sublime 128)

     

    Thus if many U.S. adolescents feel isolated and desperate, see no future for themselves that they would want to occupy, feel no symbolic identification with any entity beyond themselves (nation, community, family), resent their “well-adjusted” peers, expect little from others or themselves, and shift among affective states of manic euphoria, defensive denial, and depressive anomie, and if some of these adolescents realize their abject frustration in acts of violence, those acts are not to be understood as anomalies that might be “fixed” with appropriate reform measures but rather as symptomatic eruptions of the “truth” of the current capitalist world system. In other words, the explanation for these violent outbursts has more to do with what Zizek has assessed as the attenuation of the Symbolic order under conditions of globalizing media-technology-consumer capitalism and the concomitant rise of the “pathological narcissist” as a dominant mode of subjectivity than with any isolated individual “causes” upon which empirical studies may be (and will be) performed.

     

    Still, a brief examination of late-capitalist film violence is worthwhile, not as a direct cause behind actual violent incidents but as a symptom of rationalized systemic violence and also (sometimes) as a critical representation of it. For examples of the former, we need look no further than action-adventure genre films, as well as the video games based on this genre, and their often-noted uncritical, “gratuitous” violence, which may certainly be characterized as “symptomatic” of late capitalism to the extent that it functions within hyper-masculine fantasy scenarios.14 While such cultural products may encode a justifiable desire for an alternative to the “managed society” of “soft” liberalism, that alternative is usually figured in terms of a fascistic emphasis on law and order brought about through the exercise of violent masculine power and domination.

     

    But then other films present violent situations in ways that challenge prevailing genre conventions and invite critical reflection on the meaning of the violence depicted. Perhaps the most relevant case of the latter in recent years is Quentin Tarantino’s Pulp Fiction (1994), especially the famous scene in which John Travolta’s working-man gangster character Vincent Vega, gesturing with his gun, accidentally shoots the character Marvin in the face when the car they are riding in goes over a bump. The incident is treated as an irritating inconvenience, prompting arguments between Vincent and Samuel Jackson’s Jules Winnfield character over Vincent’s carelessness, the potential for being seen by cops, and the general disruption in the smooth routine of their day. Cleaning the car and disposing of the body are regarded as chores to be dealt with as efficiently as possible. In fact, “The Wolf” (Harvey Keitel), a specialist who “fixes things,” is called in to manage the clean-up operation. He, like Jules and Vincent, wears a black business suit.

     

    First, it should be noted that many features of the film, including the business suits, combine to create what looks like an allegory of contemporary capitalism: Vincent and Jules are, after all, hit-men working for Ving Rhames’s black-market entrepreneur character Marsellus Wallace, and their sudden, unpredictable violence is the truth of a system whose purpose is to rationalize and manage that violence and its perpetual threat efficiently in order to ensure the continuation of exchange and profit. The Wolf is a free-agent consultant called in when business “difficulties” arise. The “postmodern” quality of the representation of capitalism here is evident by contrast with earlier generations of crime films, in which the criminal enterprise is justified by reference to some ideological principle, such as “beating the system” by sticking together in bonds of friendship and allegiance to the “old neighborhood,” as in William Wellman’s Public Enemy (1931) and Michael Curtiz’s Angels with Dirty Faces (1938), or maintaining the “old way of life” associated with family and ethnic heritage, as in Francis Ford Coppola’s Godfather trilogy (1972, 1974, 1990).

     

    Pulp Fiction “reflects” the late capitalist moment in that its “post-ideological” criminals have no commitment to anything but getting their own “piece of the action”: the performativity of the system is its own justification; no metanarrative is needed for ideological legitimation. Other features of the film are also consistent with late capitalism and contrast with earlier crime genre films: the structure of the criminal operation appears to be decentralized and “flexible”; the dividing line between criminal and non-criminal is blurry at best; the criminals maintain loose, diversified connections across a wide range of social strata, covering the decentered space of greater Los Angeles’s urban sprawl; and the idea of an alternative way of life–what might have appeared as the position of the “good citizen” in an earlier crime story–can be figured only by reference to a possibility that is never shown.

     

    This alternative possibility is raised hypothetically in Jules and Vincent’s conversations about miracles and the gangster life. After he and Vincent are fired upon multiple times in a surprise attack from across a room without being hurt–an experience that Jules interprets as a miracle–Jules raises the idea of giving up “the life” to “walk the earth” as a kind of modern-day religious mendicant. Dismissing Jules’s interpretation of what he considers a “freak occurrence,” Vincent scoffs and tells Jules that there is a name for people who do what he has proposed: “they’re called bums.” A typical contemporary “pathological narcissist,” Vincent mocks the suggestion that he and Jules have experienced a miracle. As a skeptical nominalist, he is living in what he takes to be, for better or worse, the “best of all possible worlds” and cannot accept even the possibility of singularity or transcendence or of a utopian potential beyond “the life.” Significantly, Vincent is killed on his next job for Marsellus, after Jules has quit, and the fact that his death has been shown out of chronological sequence earlier in the plot adds dramatic impact to the conversation in which Jules decides to quit and Vincent ridicules him. We know already as they leave the diner at the end of the film what their respective fates are–or at least we know Vincent’s; we never learn what happens to Jules. That reference to the alternative–the desire to “walk the earth,” to live outside the paranoid circuits of power without participating in rationalized violence and exploitation–suggests the utopian (and non-representable) dimension of the film: the continuation of Jules’s story cannot be shown precisely because it gestures beyond the limits of contemporary capitalist society. Any actual content provided for this future story would restrict and trivialize the utopian desire suggested by his speculations.

     

    Just as the violent incidents in Pulp Fiction in the context of the film as a whole estrange the violence of the “normal,” smooth, everyday functioning of contemporary capitalism, inviting critical reflection, so too the jarring suddenness of the violence when Vincent shoots Marvin, and in other scenes (and in other Tarantino films), disrupts the smooth operation of ordinary narrative film form, in which climactic, redemptive violent moments are usually cued through narrative suspense, music, editing, lighting, and other techniques. The unexpected intrusion of violence into scenes of witty hipster banter among likable characters forces us to confront these characters as agents of the violent system in which they participate, even when they do not intend to use violence, that is, even when someone like Marvin is killed “accidentally” as opposed to someone who “had it coming.”

     

    In other words, the ethical-political lesson is Zizekian: actions speak louder than words; the material actuality of practice overrides intention. Vincent cannot guarantee that the Real will not intrude on his rationalized, mundane, and solipsistic Ego-Evil. His participation in the criminal life would be justified from his perspective in terms of self-interest: as a contemporary cynic, he would reason that if the entire capitalist system is just a large-scale criminal racket, then his work as a gangster is the only intelligent response–he might as well enjoy the high life instead of working like a sucker to line the pockets of the corporate bosses in the legitimate economy. At the allegorical level, then, this reading suggests that smart, hip cynics like Vincent are actually the dutiful foot soldiers of contemporary capitalism. Justifying any action in terms of “enlightened” cynical reason, such a person is, as Zizek puts it in another context, a “crook who tries to sell as honesty the open admission of his crookedness,” effectively functioning as a “conformist who takes the mere existence of the given order as an argument for it” (“Leftist” 1004-05).

     

    Two final and related points deserve to be made, via Zizek, about Jules and Vincent and their relationship to the event that only Jules takes to be a miracle. First, their difference in interpretation perfectly exemplifies Zizek’s argument about the strict separation between belief and knowledge:

     

    Belief can only thrive in the shadowy domain between outright falsity and positive truth. The Jansenist notion of miracle bears witness to the fact that they were fully aware of this paradox: an event which has the quality of a miracle only in the eyes of the believer–to the commonsense eyes of an infidel, it appears as a purely natural coincidence. (“Supposed” 44)

     

    This precise relationship is enacted in the conversation in which Jules and Vincent argue over their respective interpretations of the event: no amount of convincing will cause the other to abandon his interpretation because logical proofs and rhetorical appeals operate in the realm of knowledge, which will not touch belief. As Zizek puts it, “the miracle is inherently linked to the fact of belief–there is no neutral miracle to convince cynical infidels” (“Supposed” 44).

     

    The other point is that this argument also takes place in the somewhat different register of class consciousness and subjectivity. Perhaps stretching the allegorical reading of the Jules and Vincent story in Pulp Fiction to its limit, I would suggest that Jules’s “conversion” experience might as easily be read in Marxist as in religious terms. (And for the reasons cited above, the Marxist reading is not without justification.) Thus allegorically, if Vincent clings to his egocentric and effectively neoconservative cynicism, Jules’s experience of the miracle amounts to his interpellation as a proletarian subject, or at least (since his story ends after his testament of faith) to a protopolitical baptism. This moment of divergence in the trajectories of the stories of two (until then) similar characters illustrates what Zizek identifies as the crucial importance of class consciousness as distinct from objective class position in the class struggle:

     

    From a truly radical Marxist perspective, although there is a link between the working class as a social group and the proletariat as the position of the militant fighting for universal Truth, this link is not a determining causal connection, and the two levels are to be strictly distinguished. To be proletarian involves assuming a certain subjective stance (of class struggle destined to achieve redemption through revolution) that, in principle, can occur to any individual; to put it in religious terms, irrespective of his (good) works, any individual can be touched by grace and interpellated as a proletarian subject. The limit that separates the two opposed sides in the class struggle is thus not objective, not the limit separating two positive social groups, but ultimately radically subjective; it involves the position individuals assume towards the Event of universal Truth. (“Leftist” 1003)

     

    Thus a long line of conversion stories–from the sudden, terrible hailing of Saul of Tarsus through the more gradual radicalization of American literary proletarians like Tom Joad and Biff Loman (whose relationship to his brother Happy, despite numerous differences in detail, including especially the absence of cynicism in Death of a Salesman, is nonetheless homologous with that of Jules to Vincent after the disputed event)–become enmeshed in the sociohistorical narrative of the formation of revolutionary subjectivity. Zizek’s commentary explains, among other things, how class traitors are possible, since the class struggle, as he puts it,

     

    mobilizes… not the division between two well-defined social groups but the division, which runs “diagonally” to the social division in the Order of Being, between those who recognize themselves in the call of the Truth-Event, becoming its followers, and those who deny or ignore it. (“Leftist” 1003)

     

    The impetus behind this recognition and conversion need not, of course, be a brush with violent death, as in the case of Jules. In principle, the negative motivation for conversion is available everywhere in capitalist society. As for positive or utopian “calls to conversion,” these can be found in unexpected spaces occasionally wrested free from the demands of the vast commerical strip mall of contemporary U.S. culture.

     

    Conclusion: Zizek as Late Marxist

     

    The title of this essay may be read to imply a progression of the type thesis, antithesis, synthesis. Such a progression is not my intention. I certainly do not wish to give the impression that I take Zizek’s work to be the culminating synthesis of the problematic of Marxism and postmodernism. Nonetheless, I do regard his work, which responds with dialectical thoroughness (and with humor, and with perceptive references to popular culture, and with brilliant on-the-run insights) to new problems of ideology and subjectivity in late capitalism, as a valuable critical contribution to the tradition of Marxist theory, despite Ebert’s (and others’) criticisms characterizing him as a cynical “post-Marxist.” If anything, his explicit appropriation of Hegel would perhaps better qualify him for the critical label “pre-Marxist.” But even such a half-serious appellation would fail to account for the variety of careful analyses, explanations, and criticisms appearing throughout his work that can be characterized only as Marxist without a prefix. Or, if a prefix is needed, then Jameson’s term late Marxist would perhaps actually be the most accurate for Zizek’s work.

     

    Jameson has the following to say about the term late Marxism in his 1990 book of that title:

     

    I find it helpful above all for a sharpening of the implication I developed above: namely, that Marxism, like other cultural phenomena, varies according to its socioeconomic context. There should be nothing scandalous about the proposition that the Marxism required by Third World countries will have different emphases from the one that speaks to already receding socialism, let alone to the “advanced” countries of multinational capitalism. (11)

     

    Thus late Marxism’s “big tent,” according to this conception, would have room for a revival of a Freudian-Marxist theory of ideology by way of Lacan and Hegel in the socioeconomic context of defeated state socialisms in the former Eastern bloc and in the context of a triumphal, expanding multinational capitalism based in the “advanced” capitalist countries. If this version of Marxism is among those “required” for critically understanding the dynamics of capitalist society and culture in this context, then it belongs alongside the other Marxisms speaking to other contexts of the late-capitalist world system.

     

    The more narrow context for Zizek’s project of a revived psychoanalytic Marxism is, as he puts it in the abstract opposite the title pages of books in the Wo Es War series that he edits, “the twin rule of pragmatic-relativist New Sophists and New Age obscurantists” in critical writing. Commenting more specifically on the state of theory and criticism in the age of globalizing capitalism and dominant market ideology, Zizek writes:

     

    It is effectively as if, since the horizon of social imagination no longer allows us to entertain the idea of an eventual demise of capitalism–since, as we might put it, everybody silently accepts that capitalism is here to stay–critical energy has found a substitute outlet in fighting for cultural differences which leave the basic homogeneity of the capitalist world-system intact. (“Multiculturalism” 46)

     

    If we accept these descriptions of the socioeconomic and critical contexts into which Zizek intervenes, then the revival of dialectical models of criticism that are capable of addressing systemic problems at a level of sufficient generality and of drawing connections between “local” objects and the “totality” of their relations is indeed precisely what is needed. In any case, efforts to purge or discredit Zizek from an assumed position of orthodoxy are not especially helpful to the Marxist cause in either of the above contexts.

     

    Marxist and Freudian theory are parallel and privileged theoretical discourses, according to Zizek, in part because the relationship of each to theory itself is one aspect of its domain of inquiry. This contentious reflexivity makes error a structurally necessary element of the theory, as opposed to the case of positivist sciences:

     

    In both cases we are dealing with a field of knowledge that is inherently antagonistic: errors are not simply external to the true knowledge…. In Marxism, as in psychoanalysis, truth literally emerges through error, which is why in both cases the struggle with “revisionism” is an inherent part of the theory itself…. The “object” of Marxism is society, yet “class struggle in theory” means that the ultimate theme of Marxism is the “material force of ideas”–that is, the way Marxism itself qua revolutionary theory transforms its object (brings about the emergence of the revolutionary subject, etc.). This is analogous to psychoanalysis, which is also not simply a theory of its “object” (the unconscious) but a theory whose inherent mode of existence involves the transformation of its object (via interpretation in the psychoanalytic cure). (Metastases 181-82)

     

    Each theory, in short, “acknowledges the short circuit between the theoretical frame and an element within this frame: theory itself is a moment of the totality that is its ‘object’” (Metastases 182). Such a process, Zizek insists, is not to be confused with a “comfortable evolutionary position,” which, “from a safe distance,” seeks “to relativize every determinate form of knowledge” (Metastases 182-83). On the contrary, each tradition is characterized by what he calls a “thought that endeavors to grasp its own limitation and dependence” even as it proceeds, and this perpetual critical interrogation of its own “position of enunciation” enables whatever claims to truth it may make: “Marxism and psychoanalysis are ‘infallible’ at the level of enunciated content, precisely insofar as they continually question the very place from which they speak” (Metastases 182-83).

     

    I cite these comments in order to defend Zizek’s Marxist credentials against charges of post-Marxist cynicism. But I also recognize that his welding of Lacanian psychoanalysis onto Marxism is not seamless: irreducible traditional antagonisms between the two discourses can easily seem to disappear because of Zizek’s deft handling of both. Nonetheless, his writing offers fresh and cogent criticism of contemporary culture and society and opens avenues for further critical reflection, as I hope the preceding analyses have shown. His Marxism is “late” not in the sense of “fading fast” or even “already deceased” but rather in the Jamesonian sense cited above. It is “recent” and addresses current socioeconomic and critical contexts. In other words, Zizek’s Marxism is only as late as what it proposes to criticize–the late capitalism so named in the somewhat hopeful title of Ernest Mandel’s 1978 book. Whatever label is attached to it, Zizek’s work fulfills one of the primary goals of Marxist theory, that is, to harness the “material force of ideas” in an effort to expose and criticize the workings of capitalism.

    Notes

     

    1. Hebdige uses this abbreviated term to accommodate the various “post” terms and discourses that have emerged in theoretical writing since the late 1960s, especially postmodernism/postmodernity. See Hiding in the Light, Chapter 8, “Staking out the Posts.”

     

    2. See especially Jameson’s essay “Reification and Utopia in Mass Culture,” Social Text 1 (1979), reprinted as Chapter 1 of Signatures of the Visible.

     

    3. Jean Baudrillard’s writing in the late 1960s and 1970s offers a critique of the production-oriented labor theory of value in favor of a consumption-oriented model of sign value; see Selected Writings, especially Chapters 1-4. The implicit and explicit critique of dialectical method and teleology can be seen in many versions of postmodern theory; Lyotard’s Postmodern Condition is exemplary, especially the discussions of postmodern science and paralogy in Chapters 13 and 14. The generally critical stance of “French poststructuralists” toward Marxism may be explained partly as a reaction against the influential role of Communist parties in European intellectual debates of the 1950s and 1960s, as Burnham suggests:

     

    Lyotard’s critique, based as it is on a certain causal relationship between grand narratives and local actions, is more suited to a culture of powerful communist parties and unexamined Stalinism than the less rigorous Marxism to be found in the Anglo-American tradition…. An important flaw in Lyotard’s analysis is that he overestimates the aforementioned causality. (13)

     

    4. See Lyotard, The Postmodern Condition; Baudrillard’s recent apocalyptic and impressionistic essays can be found in America, Cool Memories, and The Transparency of Evil; Deleuze and Guattari develop their project of “schizoanalysis” in Anti-Oedipus, especially Section 4; Jameson presents his extended critique of postmodern culture in Postmodernism.

     

    5. Commenting on the ongoing globalization of capital and the accompanying triumphalist discourse of neoliberal market economists, Jameson writes:

     

    Now that, following master thinkers like Hayek, it has become customary to identify political freedom with market freedom, the motivations behind ideology no longer seem to need an elaborate machinery of decoding and hermeneutic reinterpretation; and the guiding thread of all contemporary politics seems much easier to grasp, namely, that the rich want their taxes lowered. This means that an older vulgar Marxism may once again be more relevant to our situation than the newer models. (“Culture” 247)

     

    6. The notion of a historical transformation of the “real world” into semiotic spectacle is the thesis of Guy Debord’s critique of media-consumer capitalism in Society of the Spectacle: “everything that was directly lived has moved away into a representation” (par. 1). Debord, however, has no patience for the structuralist effort to interpret all phenomena in terms of differential sign-systems, a project that he sees as the philosophical corollary to spectacular society: “Structuralism is the thought guaranteed by the State which regards the present conditions of spectacular ‘communication’ as an absolute” (par. 202). My citation of Derrida in this context should by no means be taken as an effort to characterize his work as part of this “thought guaranteed by the State,” merely uncritically reflecting prevailing semio-capitalist society. On the contrary, the opening pages of the first chapter of Of Grammatology indicate an acute critical awareness of the historical determination of the meditation on writing undertaken in that text: beyond his general emphasis on the historical dimension of the problem, Derrida mentions specifically the “death of the civilization of the book” and the rise of cybernetic theory and the DNA-coding paradigm in biology, among other historically recent developments, as catalysts for a theory of generalized writing (6-10).

     

    7. See Habermas’s Theory of Communicative Action and Rorty’s Contingency, Irony, and Solidarity, among other texts by these authors.

     

    8. See Butler, Chapter 7, “Arguing with the Real,” in Bodies That Matter.

     

    9. See Zizek’s essays “Multiculturalism, or, the Cultural Logic of Multinational Capitalism” and “A Leftist Plea for ‘Eurocentrism,’” as well as the interview “Japan through a Slovenian Looking Glass.”

     

    10. For an analysis–via Bataille and Baudrillard–of the Columbine High School shooting incident in Colorado in terms of a heterological politics of the unassimilable, see Wernick.

     

    11. For discussion of this term, see Jameson’s essay “Cognitive Mapping” as well as the last segment of Chapter 1 of Postmodernism (45-54).

     

    12. My reading of a “darker” truth behind the film’s overt suggestion of nostalgia for lost childhood as an explanation for Kane’s downfall is based on Marshall Deutelbaum’s article “‘Rosebud’ and the Illusion of Childhood Innocence in Citizen Kane.” Zizek includes Citizen Kane among those films in which, he claims, Welles depicts a “larger-than-life” individual with an “ambiguous relationship to morals” but a nonetheless heroic ethical nature (Metastases 66). My reading suggests a rejection of this notion that Kane’s “acts irradiate a deeper ‘ethics of Life itself’” (66).

     

    13. A useful contrast to this case of oppressive desire of the mother is raised in the following passage in which Zizek discusses Lacan’s determination of Name-of-the-Father as the “metaphoric substitute of the desire of the mother” (For They 135). Zizek explains this relationship in terms of the scene from Hitchcock’s North by Northwest in which Roger Thornhill–certainly also a “pathological narcissist,” but one whose story ends “happily”–is “‘mistakenly identified’ as the mysterious ‘George Kaplan’ and thus hooked on his Name-of-the-Father, his Master-Signifier.” The precise instant of the mistaken identification, Zizek writes,

     

    is the very moment when he raises his hand in order to comply with his mother’s desire by phoning her…. North by Northwest thus presents a case of “successful” substitution of the paternal metaphor for the mother’s desire. (For They 135)

     

    14. See Susan Jeffords’s analysis of Hollywood masculine-fantasy narratives and the New Right in Hard Bodies.

    Works Cited

     

    • Althusser, Louis. “Ideology and Ideological State Apparatuses.” Lenin and Philosophy. Trans. Ben Brewster. New York: Monthly Review, 1971. 127-86.
    • Baudrillard, Jean. America. Trans. Chris Turner. London: Verso, 1989.
    • —. Cool Memories, 1980-1985. Trans. Chris Turner. London: Verso, 1990.
    • —. Selected Writings. Ed. Mark Poster. Stanford, CA: Stanford UP, 1988.
    • —. The Transparency of Evil: Essays on Extreme Phenomena. 1990. Trans. James Benedict. London: Verso, 1993.
    • Burnham, Clint. The Jamesonian Unconscious: The Aesthetics of Marxist Theory. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1995.
    • Butler, Judith. Bodies That Matter: On the Discursive Limits of “Sex.” New York: Routledge, 1993.
    • Citizen Kane. Dir. Orson Welles. Perf. Orson Welles, Joseph Cotton, Dorothy Comingore. RKO, 1941.
    • Debord, Guy. Society of the Spectacle. 1967. Detroit: Black and Red, 1983.
    • Deleuze, Gilles, and Félix Guattari. Anti-Oedipus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. 1977. Trans. Robert Hurley, Mark Seem, and Helen R. Lane. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1983.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Of Grammatology. Trans. Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins UP, 1974.
    • Deutelbaum, Marshall. “‘Rosebud’ and the Illusion of Childhood Innocence in Citizen Kane.The Kingdom of Dreams: Selected Papers from the Tenth Florida State University Conference on Literature and Film. Ed. Douglas Fowler. Tallahassee: Florida State UP, 1986. 46-61.
    • Ebert, Teresa L. “Beyond ‘Enlightened False Consciousness’ and for a Red Theory.” Div. on Sociological Approaches to Literature, MLA Convention. Chicago, IL. 28 Dec. 1999.
    • Gigante, Denise. “Toward a Notion of Critical Self-Creation: Slavoj Zizek and the ‘Vortex of Madness.’” New Literary History 29 (1998): 153-68.
    • Habermas, Jürgen. The Theory of Communicative Action. Trans. Thomas McCarthy. Boston: Beacon, 1984.
    • Hebdige, Dick. Hiding in the Light: On Images and Things. New York: Routledge, 1988.
    • Homer, Sean. “Psychoanalysis, Representation, Politics: On the (Im)possibility of a Psychoanalytic Theory of Ideology?” University of Sheffield, Centre for Psychotherapeutic Studies (1995): 16 pars. <http://www.shef.ac.uk/uni/academic/N-Q/psysc/staff/sihomer/prp.html>.
    • Jameson, Fredric. “Cognitive Mapping.” Cultural Studies. Ed. Lawrence Grossberg, Cary Nelson, and Paula A. Treichler. New York: Routledge, 1992. 347-57.
    • —. “Culture and Finance Capital.” Critical Inquiry 24 (1997): 246-65.
    • —. Late Marxism: Adorno, or, The Persistence of the Dialectic. London: Verso, 1990.
    • —. Postmodernism, or, The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. Durham: Duke UP, 1991.
    • —. Signatures of the Visible. New York: Routledge, 1992.
    • Jeffords, Susan. Hard Bodies: Hollywood Masculinity in the Reagan Era. New Brunswick, NJ: Rutgers UP, 1994.
    • Lacan, Jacques. The Seminar of Jacques Lacan, Book III: The Psychoses. Trans. Russell Grigg. Ed. Jacques-Alain Miller. New York: Norton, 1993.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François. The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge. Trans. Geoff Bennington and Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P. 1984.
    • Mandel, Ernest. Late Capitalism. Trans. Joris DeBres. London: Verso, 1978.
    • Pulp Fiction. Dir. Quentin Tarantino. Perf. John Travolta, Samuel L. Jackson, Uma Thurman. Miramax, 1994.
    • Rorty, Richard. Contingency, Irony, and Solidarity. New York: Cambridge UP, 1989.
    • Sloterdijk, Peter. Critique of Cynical Reason. Trans. Michael Eldred. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1987.
    • Wernick, Andrew. “Bataille’s Columbine: The Sacred Space of Hate.” Ctheory (3 Nov. 1999): 43 pars. <http://www.ctheory.net/text_file.asp?pick=119>.
    • Williams, Raymond. Keywords: A Vocabulary of Culture and Society. 1983. New York: Oxford UP, 1985.
    • Zizek, Slavoj. For They Know Not What They Do: Enjoyment as a Political Factor. London: Verso, 1991.
    • —. “Japan through a Slovenian Looking Glass: Reflections of Media and Politics and Cinema.” Interview. InterCommunication 14 (1995): 40 pars. <http://www.ntticc.or.jp/pub/ic_mag/ic014/zizek/zizek_e.html>.
    • —. “A Leftist Plea for ‘Eurocentrism.’” Critical Inquiry 24 (1998): 988-1009.
    • —. Looking Awry: An Introduction to Jacques Lacan through Popular Culture. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1991.
    • —. The Metastases of Enjoyment: Six Essays on Woman and Causality. London: Verso, 1994.
    • —. “Multiculturalism, Or, the Cultural Logic of Multinational Capitalism.” New Left Review 225 (1997): 28-51.
    • —. The Sublime Object of Ideology. London: Verso, 1989.
    • —. “The Supposed Subjects of Ideology.” Critical Quarterly 39.2 (1997): 39-59.

     

  • Inhuman Love: Jane Campion’s The Piano

    Samir Dayal

    English Department
    Bentley College
    sdayal@bentley.edu

    Introduction: What Does the Woman Want?

     

    The release of Jane Campion’s The Piano (1993) was almost an epochal event. It arrived to mark the zenith of a phase of extraordinary creativity in Australian cinema in the 1970s and 1980s with films such as Picnic at Hanging Rock, My Brilliant Career, The Lighthorsemen, Breaker Morant, and Gallipoli. In the following decade, close on the heels of Strictly Ballroom, Romper Stomper, and The Adventures of Priscilla, Queen of the Desert, Campion’s film won the Palm D’Or at Cannes and three Academy Awards (see Orr 151, Coombs and Gemmell, “Preface” vii). Highly successful at the box office, the film elicited praise and stirred much passionate debate among critics and ordinary filmgoers. Neither were audiences oblivious to its sheer ambition in cinematic technique.1 That ambition foregrounds itself here in virtuoso camera movement, as when the camera seems to enter a character’s pocket, and there in an homage to a grand auteur, as when a close-up of Ada McGrath’s (Holly Hunter’s) hair tied in a tight spiral knot, in evoking an ocular vertigo, invites comparison to an emblematic shot in Hitchcock’s Vertigo and with equal point, for in this gesture the camera in each case indexes the female object of its fascinated gaze.2 Inviting attention to its own gaze, the camera elevates the piano to the level almost of a character in the film, even a gendered character, as Felicity Coombs argues (85). And if the music “made” by the piano is in some ways the real voice of the speechless protagonist, her voiceover also functions as a kind of spectral extradiegetic intrusion, particularly in a crucial scene when Ada becomes the victim of savage violence at the hands of Stewart, her husband. Ada’s haunting voice-over, however, is not just a trick: it functions at the ideological level as a counter to the customary “othering” of the feminine voice in cinema, and at the representational level to problematize the real versus the symbolic. The visual language of the film is frequently as telling. In one scene, for instance, an important and mischievous point about Ada’s second husband’s twisted libido is made by the camera. Stewart is voyeuristically spying on his wife and her lover, whose face is buried in her skirts. As he watches, her lover’s pet dog, possibly this man’s only (or best) friend, licks Stewart’s open palm.

     

    Above all, the film was, and remains, thought provoking. It became the focus of intense debates about the postcolonial critique of New Zealand’s–and Australia’s–colonial past (and, by implication, their neocolonial present and their multicultural future); about feminine desire and its institutional containment within marriage; and about the psychological perplexities of human relationships, particularly love, that are the film’s main subject. These debates raise issues that remain vital in contemporary cultural studies–the inarticulacy of what enables women’s agency, the possibility of alternative forms of desire and human intercourse, the quandaries of aspirations to a meaningful postcolonial or ethnic citizenship that does not slip into the quagmire of racial and identity politics. However, when reviewing these central debates focused on feminine agency in the film, one has a strange sense of irresolution, as though some of the major issues were being abandoned without being fully developed, let alone resolved. The crux of these debates has to do with this question: what does Ada want? In this essay I offer a contribution to the debate that seeks to reinterpret this as a question not only about what Ada wants from love, but as a question about what drives her beyond love–a question about the structure of that drive.

     

    Love, after all, is the telos of melodrama, which is itself the focus of one important trend in the film’s reception. The nineteenth century saw the rise of melodrama in an age where traditional anchors of society in organized religion and hierarchical authority were on the wane. Into the vacuum came the private individual as the locus of meaning. This individual, however, was defined primarily by his or her role within the nuclear family (Vasudevan 310), and needless to say, the role assigned to the woman within the bourgeois family was particularly narrow, restricting the orbit of her desire and imagination. Indeed, where the modernist work of art in the West was coded as an autonomous, “masculine,” form (see Huyssen), the mass cultural form of melodrama was itself coded as “feminine” and addressed to women as those who were subjugated or even rendered voiceless by that masculinist discourse. This view is in line with Peter Brooks’s The Melodramatic Imagination (1976), which provides an important formal schematization of the silencing that is constitutive of melodrama, although since the publication of Brooks’s work, melodrama has come to be regarded as having as much claim to facilitating the democratic revolution as realism (Prasad 56).3 If Brooks offered a formal account of melodrama, then an important feminist advance in theorizing melodrama was achieved by Mary Ann Doane, who is credited with the most widely cited claim about the way in which classical women’s melodrama portrays the suppression of women’s agency by patriarchal structures of society (The Desire to Desire).

     

    As melodrama came more and more to be addressed to women it gave rise in the Hollywood of the 1950s to a “women’s melodrama.” In the age of classical Hollywood cinema, as Neil Robinson notes, women’s melodrama “tells the story of a woman who attempts to resolve the tensions between her own subjectivity and erotic desire, and the patriarchal world in which she lives” and in doing so the melodrama seeks to “[re]define the contours of… community” (19). The Piano is, in these terms, a women’s film (see Barcan and Fogarty). But what is often missed in such a claim about this film is precisely that The Piano‘s spin on melodrama is not to posit the goal of reintegration into community as in traditional melodrama. It is not even a “critique [of] the false either/or choices which patriarchy offers to both women and men” as Robinson puts it (20), for that too implies a desire to be reintegrated into a regenerated community. Doane was criticized for being too pessimistic to recognize melodrama’s potential for enabling feminine agency: “the woman’s film,” she concluded, “does not provide us with an access to a pure and authentic female subjectivity, much as we might like it to do so” (4). Whatever the merits of this criticism, perhaps we should not make of melodrama a Procrustean bed, simply in order to cut Campion’s film down to size so that it will fit the structure of melodrama, as Robinson does when he writes that “Patriarchy is a nightmare from which Ada is trying to awake, and her near death [near the end of the film] demonstrates that only by the narrowest of margins does she escape its prohibitions against female desire” (37). Similarly, Bridget Orr, an otherwise astute reader of the film, can only conclude that “it seems curious that Ada’s resistance… [at the end of the film] should be rewarded by her establishment in white picket contentment” (158). If we read The Piano as merely one more women’s melodrama, even what Richard Allen describes as a “gothic melodrama” (44-45), we might fail to see something crucial about the ending. I argue below that it is structured around a darker intensity, a jouissance that constitutes a deformation of melodrama and betrays no wish to be so reintegrated. This deformation involves a kind of radical exceptionalism and implies an erotics that is better described, as I argue at the acknowledged risk of overinterpreting the film, in terms of courtly love as a negation of romantic love.

     

    Campion does offer, in this “women’s film,” an oppositional structure of desire, or at least of a woman’s desire, that counters both the tepid agency that is freed up for women in women’s melodrama and the more realist script of restrictive bourgeois domesticity with an alternative erotic structure. This is a structure that Bruce Fink specifices as a “feminine structure,” namely a “position or stance with respect to (an experience of) jouissance” (Lacanian Subject 117). That oppositional structure of desire is homologous, I suggest, to the structure of courtly love in that it respects both the erotic attachment familiar to anyone who has been in love or has desired another body and the “impossibility” of the sexual relation, as Jacques Lacan has insistently theorized it. The sexual relation is “impossible” because sexual difference is enigmatic, because it is as though feminine desire and masculine desire were not speaking the same tongue. But beyond this always failing love is something else that we can trace, an inhuman love.

     

    The Structure of the Essay

     

    In the light of what has been said above, the essay is structured in three sections of unequal length:

     

    Section I:

     

    In the first section, the shortest because it treats themes given relatively lower prominence by the film, I discuss the colonial context of the film, describing the significance of its setting in New Zealand and developing its critique of colonialism. It is as easy to offer a reductive reading of such a film as to claim too great a sophistication for it. Still, I suggest that the film is informed by the insights of postcolonialism and is sensitive to postcolonialism’s own reinscription of the advances of poststructuralist discourse.

     

    Section II:

     

    In the second section I discuss Campion’s exploration of feminine desire, or at least of Ada’s irregular desire within the context of her relationship to Baines–and therefore to romantic love. This is a way not only of critiquing received ideas about love but of revisiting related issues: choice of sexual object, desire as a support of subjectivity, and femininity as an epistemological category. It is equally a way of asking about masculine desire, when it exceeds the bounds of normative sexuality. Just as Campion critiques the structuring of (colonial) racial minorities and women, she is also sensitive to the class differentiations among women as a group, and she is committed to the destabilization of pieties about sexual relations and social institutions. This section of course is intimately linked to the first and the third, and in this section I discuss what I see as the surface of the film: its narrative of a woman’s struggle to connect with her “dark talent.”

     

    Section III:

     

    In the final and necessarily densest section, I come to Ada’s radical, psychoanalytically suggestive, and intriguing psychic structure. I employ here a Lacanian terminology of desire and drive because I believe Campion is interested in exploring a particular psychic structure that captures Ada’s desire, a desire that transgresses the melodrama of bourgeois domesticity and is outside the ken of patriarchal discourse.4 While I invoke a Lacanian paradigm in order to highlight this transgressive excess, I am not unaware of the accusation (leveled by Judith Butler in Antigone’s Claim, for instance) that Lacanian psychoanalysis lends itself to a support of a patriarchal status quo. Insensitivity to this accusation would be especially egregious in my generally appreciative reading of Campion’s film, a reading that is aligned with feminist approaches. I am not appealing to the Lacan who has been construed as ultimately tethered to a defence of a patriarchal, phallic order, in which a woman of course has no real agency, no real voice. But neither do I preoccupy myself here with an exposé of Lacan’s patriarchal blind spots by way of noticing how woman’s voice is indeed suppressed. It would be a real disservice to Campion to turn her exquisitely complex portrayal of Ada into merely a representation of this muteness. I turn instead to another Lacan who, even if his oeuvre betrays him as a man of his era and a creature of a patriarchal worldview, offers a useful vocabulary that moves beyond pat, dismissive accounts of his theoretical advances.

     

    A couple of further clarifications seem in order at this juncture. First, many contemporary critics (particularly feminists) have rightly discredited the thesis of the autonomy of the aesthetic, removed from the political, the linguistic, the cultural, or the psychoanalytic. Therefore it is appropriate to present a “cultural studies” approach to the film, not only to read the film as aesthetic object but to see it as presenting a politicized representation of a psychic problematic. Second, my suggestion is that Lacan offers a particularly useful vocabulary of drive, of courtly love, of the “real” body, of “das Ding,” of the partial object, of desubjectivation or acephalous subjectivity. As I develop my argument, the significance of this difficult terminology will, I hope, become evident. I don’t want to detain the reader by a long excursus on definitions. But let me say here that one of the most important features of Ada’s structure as it is represented in filmic language is a kind of excess. I propose that the secret to her desire is this excess, and my essay furthermore tracks the relationship between her and George Baines (Harvey Keitel) as anchored to their mutual, but differently inflected, gendered orientation to excess.

     

    Ada’s excess is synecdochically, if ironically, represented by her darkly eloquent, voluntary muteness. If the Lacanian paradigm of subject formation is customarily understood in film studies to propose that the advent of the subject is coeval with the moment of entry into the symbolic, we should note that Ada’s elective muteness may not contradict this mechanically reproduced truism of that conventional application of Lacanian theory to film studies. But neither does it lend itself unproblematically to the kind of recuperative utopian narrative of a Tania Modleski, whose “project,” in the words of Ruth Barcan and Madeleine Fogarty, is “to save the possibility of referential language for a feminist future when the traditionally mute body, the mother, will be given the same access to the names–language and speech–that men have enjoyed” (5). It marks instead an inverse trajectory whereby Ada’s silence signals her withdrawal from a conventional individualization within the bourgeois patriarchal narratives into which she has been interpellated, first as the daughter of a father who practically sells her into marriage, and then as the wife of a man whom she has not chosen, never met, and can never love. The film projects her straining to move beyond the straitjacket of the identity positions sanctioned for her within the patriarchal symbolic. Yet, and this is a diacritic of my approach, many readings of Ada-as-subject limit themselves to a narrow interpretation of “symbolic” identity. Lacanian discourse, in elaborating the beyond of the symbolic (in other words, the realm of the “real” associated with the drive), better approximates Ada’s–and Baines’s–psychic structures.

     

    For the purposes of structural contrast between normative heterosexual coupling and the odd (even strange) couple of Ada and Baines, I have recourse late in the essay to the structure of “courtly love.” Beyond the banalized “symbolic” interpretation of subject-formation that has bedeviled some readings of the film, Lacan’s elaboration of the structure of courtly love helps explain the excess of Woman, what Lacan terms the “not All,” over and above romantic love and the sexual relation. I maintain that this ostensibly archaic structure, as it is reappropriated by Lacan (and glossed by Slavoj Zizek and Renata Salecl), helps us appreciate Ada’s relinquishment of romantic love and what I call her instrumentalization of sexuality. The Lacanian reading of courtly love as a psychic structure also permits a perspectivization of the strange arrangement, or structure, of her relationship with her lover, George Baines, and of Baines’s own equally irregular desire. In spelling out what I have called their mutual orientation to excess of enjoyment, I refer to the vocabulary of the “subject of drive” oriented to jouissance, as opposed to the subject of (the Other’s) desire. As I understand it–and this understanding is substantiated by the fastidious exegeses of Bruce Fink–desire and drive are ultimately along the same continuum, but desire belongs to the realm of the symbolic, while drive circulates in the (Lacanian) real (see A Clinical Introduction). The real, and this is a fundamental distinction in Lacan, is distinguished from quotidian reality. And jouissance, which is itself associated with drive, not desire, is as much about pain as it is about pure pleasure. Jouissance indeed also indexes what must be protected against, if the subject is to be maintained: falling into jouissance entails desubjectivation.

     

    The alternative structure of courtly love is of course to be read in terms of a filmic code in this instance, rather than as “straight” psychoanalysis. It is in the interaction of the visual, narrative, and sound elements of the film that Ada’s desire is represented, and here Lacanian psychoanalysis functions as no more than an aid in understanding the workings of Ada’s desire and drive–it helps us understand the representation of Ada as a subject constituted by conscious desire and unconscious drive.

     

    Section I:
    Nature Denaturalized; Or, Postcolonial Critique in The Piano

     

    Ada has been married off by her father and sent to join her new and as yet unseen husband, Stewart, in New Zealand in the 1850s. Accompanying Ada on this journey from a satellite of the former imperial center, Scotland, to New Zealand is Flora (Anna Paquin), her daughter from an earlier marriage. Stewart is a pakeha pioneer (neither truly “European” nor accepted as one of the local Maori natives). Sam Neill describes Stewart as rendered vulnerable by his unrequitable love/lust for a woman who happens to be his wife but remains truly strange to him: he is “a man who has lost all his skin” (qtd. in Bilborough 147). Campion takes great pains to portray Stewart’s utterly benighted attitude to the land, which he can only see as property. He wants to buy Maori land, which they don’t “use” but hold sacred, and he asks Baines, “What do they want it for?” and “How do they even know it’s theirs?” In fact the land has always been sacred to Maori, and more recently has been a major bone of contention between Maori and the Pakeha. Stewart is marooned within the colony as a pakeha and within heteronormative conventionality as an unfulfilled man in desperate need of a wife–he is so uptight about his sexuality that Maori call him “Old dry balls.” Ada rejects him in all but name as husband. But Ada is a misfit too. An elective mute from age six, she relies mainly on Flora for communication. To the spectator she speaks in voiceover–in her “mind’s voice,” as she says. A newcomer to the settler postcolony, she is no less a border figure than Stewart.

     

    The film’s postcolonialist representation of colonial New Zealand raises the question of the significance of the lush colonial setting. Is this only an aesthetic convention? Richard Allen rightly suggests that the setting is not arbitrary: he observes that Campion has filmed the bush as “a muddy, glutinous, fecund landscape, a kind of primal swamp that is filmed in a luminous aquamarine. In Campion’s naturalist vision, the bush is a feminine landscape, boldly celebrated as an antidote to the denaturing of the land enacted by a patriarchal colonialism” (46-47).

     

    The film’s treatment of landscape, in other words, is construed as informed by a progressive politics. I would argue that it is more, and it is less. It is more than a critique of the “colonial narrative of origin… as the appropriation and enclosure of landscape as the first and only expression of civilisation” (Coombs and Gemmell, “Preface” ix). It is “a liminal zone,” as Laurence Simmons observes, “of beaches of encounter and boundary fences between self and savagery”–the topos of a landscape of liminality is crucial to the film (132), but I argue here that landscape, particularly the ocean itself, is also a liminal zone in that it metaphorically suggests a porous border between the realms of the symbolic and the real. Campion herself has intimated the psychic allegory subtended by the film’s re-presentation of the natural: “The bush has got an enchanted, complex, even frightening quality to it, unlike anything that you see anywhere else…. I was after the vivid, subconscious imagery of the bush, its dark, inner world” (qtd. in Bilborough 139). It is the “dark continent,” the psychic landscape of unconscious desire and (death) drive modulated as opposition to the life force represented in the physical landscape, that the film seeks to fathom. Precisely because an examination or problematization of subject construction within a colonial context is a central project of the film, the “beautiful” as a category of audience reception is problematized by making this beautiful setting the context for the territorial violence of the colonial expropriation of Maori land, as well as for sexual violence.

     

    The film presents a strange love story, but a love story set in a specific location, and in a specific historical, socio-political, and discursive context; moreover it is a love story that undoes itself. Ostensibly, Ada’s struggle is to achieve agency–faithfulness to her own desire–in a social and physical environment that hinders it. Noting some of the complicating subtexts of this struggle, Bridget Orr observes that “arguably, The Piano‘s feminocentric narrative seeks to recentre its female protagonist by writing her out of history into romance; to absolve her from settler guilt by linking her through an erotic economy to Maori” (149).

     

    There is evidently much contemporary appeal in this emancipatory narrative of gender as tied to the representation of nature. However, in articulating the natural environment and the national romance, Campion ironically invites the question whether her representation of the relationships among landscape and racial hierarchy and material conditions is not somewhat unreconstructed. In this sense, the film’s treatment of landscape is less than politically progressive. Anna Neill has rightly noted that “despite, or more precisely, because of the way the film’s luscious footage of remote bush trades in the exotic, it brings New Zealand right into the global economic arena, offering its hardly touched landscape up to the tourist’s (or foreign investor’s) eye” (137). However, Campion is aware that nature, as the “first” world of Maori culture, cannot be simply counterposed to pakeha or colonial civilization.

     

    Whether representing social arrangements such as marriage or expressions of the body such as desire, the film refuses to participate in the simple opposition of nature and culture. Thus the life force represented by the lush natural environment is contrasted not only with the deadening conformity of a dislocated European culture, but also with Ada’s “dark talent” for self-annihilation, which her father had presciently identified as fundamental to her being. This opposition of the death drive and life force is repeated in the mother-daughter pairing of the austere and “driven” Ada with the aptly named Flora, as a young girl full of life and as much at home in the landscape as Maori children.

     

    Denaturalization, I would suggest, is an overdetermined figure for the film: the denaturalization of identitarian and libidinal, as well as ontological, social, or epistemological objects. If landscape has often functioned to territorialize the imagined national identity, this denaturalization has a critical function. The liminal space of the colony is an appropriate context in which to dramatize the destabilizations of subject-position: Campion’s film works to destabilize identities or subject positions with regard to race and gender or sexual position in order to interrogate the relations between pakehas and Maoris, and to suggest that a colonial structure depends on the subordination and “feminization” or queering of Maoris, as well as on the subordination of women in a hierarchical structure. Colonialism is about racial and sexual oppression. The postcolonial setting of The Piano emphasizes that Stewart is a placeholder for bourgeois postcolonial white masculinity in New Zealand, an identity that is specifically in crisis.

     

    The political and economic inflections of this crisis are muted in the film, but it is clear that the location is not incidental. Linda Dyson has argued that the film “re-presents the story of colonization in New Zealand as a narrative of reconciliation.” Here in the periphery of the former empire, argues Dyson, “the film addresses the concerns of the dominant white majority… providing a textual palliative for postcolonial anxieties generated by the contemporary struggles over the nation’s past” (267). Dyson remarks that “the critical acclaim surrounding the film constructed The Piano as a feminist exploration of nineteenth-century sexuality and tended to ignore the way in which ‘race’ is embedded in the text” (267). The film rehearses a familiar Orientalist trope: Maoris are once again on the wrong side of the nature/culture, primitive/modern divide. They are “on the margins of the film as the repositories of an authentic, unchanging and simple way of life”–a paradise or “New Jerusalem” which could become the site for the self-regenerative project of the whites “energized by the utopian fantasy of building a society free of the political and economic divisions and inequalities of Europe” (268). The British Crown in 1840 actually signed the Treaty of Waitangi with five hundred Maori tribal leaders acquiring land from Maori, who in return could see this moment as marking their achievement of sovereign national status. The Crown did not honor the treaty, and Maori have frequently had to fight over the issue of land acquisition. The treaty has become a rallying point for a bicultural Maori Renaissance, but today, despite the worldwide recognition of Maori claims, they remain a peripheral people in political and social terms (269-70).

     

    Near the film’s conclusion, the relocation of Ada and Baines to a house in Nelson, because it is a landscape of apparent contentment, has misled some critics to conclude, reading the film’s own narrative too literally, that Ada has chosen “life” at the end of the film. Felicity Coombs and Suzanne Gemmell, the editors of what they themselves describe as “an authoritative collection” of criticism on the film (x), venture the editorial generalization that the film “establish[es]” a “colonial narrative” only to “disrupt” it “via the narrative machinations of romance, whereby desire transcends the unequal relations of power and, albeit violently, the colony releases the heroine to pursue her fortunes with her lover. Such an ending is a testament to the problematic terrain that the film must negotiate in order to resolve the converging post-colonial themes it employs en route” (viii-ix). Even critics who do not, against the evidence of the film’s ending, endorse a sentimental narrative of the integration of Ada within a completely fulfilling marriage to Baines in Nelson–and Dyson is a good example–undertheorize the film’s conclusion with regard to Ada herself. Dyson fails to underscore what I would argue is crucial–the imbrication of the sexual with the sociopolitical and postcolonial registers. I don’t wish to single out Dyson but to point up a blockage in the body of criticism of the film: that it inadequately conceptualizes the interlinkages even when it takes the trouble to mention them. The result is a substantial underinterpretation or a partial understanding. This essay demonstrates that such readings miss an important dimenson of irresolution: the crucial trajectory of the drive that retains, at least as fantasy, Ada’s passages to jouissance against the semblance of happy matrimony.

     

    Section II:
    A Beautiful Relationship or a Perverse Couple?

     

    In this section I discuss the film’s representation of Ada as desiring subject, a subject that also seeks access to the freedom to pursue an “other” satisfaction than the one she is officially granted within the family romance. My intention is to raise the question of why Ada seeks something beyond the limits of what looks like the best human love can offer: a relationship that grows into a non-exploitative, mutually respectful, and erotically complete arrangement, one that culminates in an apparently happy marriage with room for growth. This, as I indicated at the outset, is an issue around which the most vigorous debates about the film have raged: What does Ada want? What other satisfaction does she seek if she rejects marriage? Could marital bliss with a man who comes to love her be really all that she desires–and does the film’s power not lie in its unmasking of the power relations undergirding the institution of conventional marriage? Why does Ada consent to the “bargain” Baines proposes, which as he himself observes as the relationship develops, makes a “whore” out of her, if she is a figure on whom so many viewers have projected (cathected?) a passionate resistance to patriarchal relations? I will discuss these important issues. But first I want to re-emphasize here that ultimately it is the relationship with Baines that allows us to recognize Ada’s access to that satisfaction, so a consideration of Baines must be a part of any analysis of Ada’s dark talent, her drive toward satisfaction.

     

    The film received a great deal of attention as a riveting and profoundly disturbing portrait of a woman’s self-assertion. It has less frequently been discussed as an equally powerful representation of the remaking of masculinity in the postcolony. Many critics, while offering illuminating, complex, and even confessedly ambivalent and multiple readings of Ada (Barcan and Fogarty, for instance), underestimate the role of Ada’s partner, Baines, as though his desire were beneath serious consideration. Dyson, in an essay that is in many ways solid and helpful, focuses almost exclusively on Ada, missing a crucial dimension of the film by underestimating the significance of Baines’s borderline subjectivity and unorthodox libidinal impulses–although admittedly Campion herself cannot sustain the oddity of Baines’s “love” and too quickly contains it in a more conventional, tranquil domesticity, as if he had suddenly relinquished his journey toward going native and had become a respectable burgher in colonial garb, embracing a new domesticity in Nelson with Ada. Many other persuasive readings, such as Bridget Orr’s, that purport to be attentive to the “speaking subjectivity” and “accession to agency” of Ada as a resistant and “desiring subject,” underestimate the importance of Baines’s desiring subjectivity. Orr’s interpretation cannot go beyond noticing the film’s “final wish-fulfilling retreat from the ‘frontier,’ the back-blocks site of pioneer endeavour, to the gentility of Nelson, [which] concludes a process by which Baines is transformed into the sentimental hero of female desire, while Stewart is left alone in the bush” (149). The film in such accounts appears little more than a narrative, albeit an admittedly complex one, of a white man saved from going native by a process of something like embourgeoisement–a return to the settler colonial fold and a return to domesticity.

     

    I want to redirect exclusive attention from Ada onto her relationship with Baines, the perplexities of which are precisely the source of the puzzlement of even friendly feminist spectators with whom I align myself.5 I propose that a signal contribution of The Piano lies in its representation of the erotic attachment and detachment that constitute this relationship. The film is certainly gripping, but it is also unusual (and this is insufficiently emphasized in the critical reception of the film) in that here in the settler postcolony it is the white male subject (whiteness being the presumptively invisible marker of race)–represented by Stewart–who is represented as being in crisis. It is the white man in the film who, emerging from the nightmare of colonialism, seems in need of therapeutic transformation, not the distressed colonial black- or brown-skinned subject. But Baines too is a subject in crisis–except that he is in transition toward going native, as indicated by the unfinished moko on his face. So in a sense he is in a quite different psychosocial place from Stewart.

     

    There is a noticeable effort on the part of the filmmaker to point the way to the redemption of the white male colonial subject in the case of Baines. As the third element in the love triangle with Ada and Stewart, Baines is a pivotal figure whom Ada first resists as an “oaf” but gradually warms to when he turns out to have unsounded depths. In addition to transgressing the border of sexual identification, he also crosses cultural barriers, as Harvey Keitel states: “Baines has given up his culture–he’s not a pakeha and he’s not a Maori. He’s nowhere, looking for a place to be” (qtd. in Bilborough 143). If Baines is culturally borderline he is, even more intriguingly, sexually liminal. This is visually indicated in an early scene in which both a Maori woman and a young man “dressed as a woman” (Campion 53) make sexual overtures to him: clearly he appeals to both men and women, and this already introduces a degree of doubt about his desire, a doubt that is encouraged by the fact that he is living apart from his wife, who never appears in the film. But this visual index of his ambiguous sexuality does scant justice to the radically “border” status of Baines’s eroticized body in the film, and in some ways is really a red herring if it suggests a latent homosexuality: I argue that in his own way Baines wants “something else” too, like Ada.

     

    The need to complicate the structure of what Baines really wants as a subject is indicated in the screenplay of the film where Campion repeatedly describes Baines as a kind of radically innocent or culturally naive voluptuary, who desires neither an ordinary relationship of the kind consecrated in marriage nor a kind of crude sexual encounter, however sustained. Baines, I would argue, wants in some way to “suffer”–and to enjoy through the suffering, which is precisely the meaning of jouissance–the body of the other in this subjective sense. In her own screenplay directions, Campion repeatedly emphasizes Baines’s “odd sensual pleasure-taking” (Campion 61). When he has secured his “bargain” with Ada, we see an indication of what he really wants: “Twice he closes his eyes and breathes deeply. BAINES is experiencing an unpractised sense of appreciation and lust” (Campion 56; emphasis added). The discordant yoking together of “appreciation and lust” is an index of Campion’s struggle to demarcate the psychic territory of drive that she is trying to map–the territory one might say of a kind of “perverse couple.”6 She is entirely uninterested in either the hydraulics of sex or the soap operas of romance.

     

    Contrary to what some commentators insist, even the infamous “bargain” for the piano is something more or less than sexual harassment; and it is not simply rape (see Barcan and Fogarty 7). One reviewer, Kerryn Goldsworthy, even suggests the compact is of a kind that “doesn’t really have a name” (qtd. in Barcan and Fogarty 10). For one thing, Ada herself is actively bartering for her piano from the very beginning of the film, even before Baines says that he wants to “touch” her as she plays. Certainly it is Ada who approaches Baines to arrange for the piano to be retrieved from the beach, so that one could say that it is she who endows the piano with its commodity character (exchange value) as well as its symbolic value for her. Yet it is Stewart who, at the suggestion of Baines, barters piano lessons from Ada in exchange for land–and Baines approaches Stewart first with his proposal. At this initial phase Ada has little say in the bargain. Stewart has a key role, and he and Baines both treat her at least initially as a tradeable commodity–woman as a means of exchange between men. This homosociality complicates the bargain Ada and Baines strike together for the piano itself. Ada does not or cannot refuse the lessons, but neither does she communicate, even in writing to Stewart, how Baines queers the barter.

     

    A crucial turning point in the relationship is marked by the moment when she comes to find the mere fulfilling of the bargain without the erotic component unsatisfactory to her. By this time Baines has practically given the piano to her to his own disadvantage, so for Ada it is no longer just about winning back the piano, at least in the later stages of the game. As Neil Robinson correctly notices, Baines gives her the piano because he too has come to feel that the body cannot be enjoyed unless affect is also invested in it (31). Yet this is not to say that it is simply a matter of Ada and Baines growing fonder (in the sense of romantic love) of each other despite the “ugliness” of the barter–nothing makes this point more indisputable than the actual ending of the film, and this ending is emphatically not the scene of happy matrimony as so many have suggested. It is the frankly erotic nature of the terms that fuels their “love.” I would add that the apparent domestication, or taming, of Baines’s specific libidinal drive suggests a failure of energy or nerve on the part of the filmmaker–Campion’s interest in sustaining the symmetry of Baines’s drive appears to flag in comparison with her pointed concern to retain Ada’s exorbitant drive, which courses well beyond the boundary of bourgeois domesticity, as I argue below. Surely we have here a relationship that is more than the enforced prostitution of a desperate woman without choices by a sexually predatory male, even though there are elements of both prostitution and predation in play?

     

    I suggest that what is “more” is precisely the excess that I am trying to trace, particularly in Section III of the essay. It has to be acknowledged that the relationship grows as the story develops, but there is something about the ending of the film that suggests that ordinary bourgeois domesticity, no matter how emancipated the partners, does not speak the language of the drive, which is so crucial in fathoming Ada’s continuing urge to tarry with the negative even when she has available to her the sunny positive of married life in Nelson. It is an excess of the drive speaking through the body–the real body, and not just the fleshly. Explicitly and self-consciously, Campion plumbs the unconscious or extraconscious intelligence of the body:

     

    My exploration can be a lot more sexual [than if she had been writing in the nineteenth century], a lot more investigative of the power of eroticism, which can add another dimension. Because then you get involved in the actual bodyscape of it as well, because the body has certain effects, like a drug almost, certain desires for erotic satisfaction which are very strong forces too. (qtd. in Bilborough 140)

     

    Campion’s epigraph to the screenplay unwittingly captures something of this excess, although she elects a banal vocabulary: “the romantic impulse is in all of us,” she writes, “but it’s not part of a sensible way of living. It’s a heroic path and it generally ends dangerously. I treasure it in the sense that I believe it’s a path of great courage. It can also be the path of the foolhardy and the compulsive” (7). Campion’s monitory tone echoes Lacan’s account of the attraction of transgression. But the “romantic impulse” as conceived within the bourgeois ideal of happiness is a lure; for Lacan, love requires moving beyond a limit. Whatever Campion says, the film itself has complex resonances for a reader of Lacan.

     

    It would be perverse to suggest that Baines, and masculine sexuality, are more important in the film than the issue of feminine sexuality, or to focus on his desire to the exclusion of female desire in the film. And of course there are other women in the film besides Ada, and a discussion of the sexual economy in this colonial context cannot ignore the structural position of those other women within it. They help us to see Ada’s desire more clearly, if only by contrast. But they also complicate our understanding of Ada’s structural positioning in settler colonial society. Many of the other white women in the film are presented in rather complex hierarchies of race and class. One of the white women, Nessie, who has designs on Baines as in effect a bachelor (he is separated from his wife), is presented as infantile and a creature of petty jealousies and dreams. But even the white matriarch, Aunt Morag, is presented as gullible and controlling, hardly an attractive figure. Her gullibility is only redoubled when one recognizes to what extent she has incorporated settler colonial ideology. The native women have a natural vitality, but they and their men remain even more gullible than Morag and Nessie (as when the Maori in the audience are taken in by the shadow play performance of Bluebeard wielding an ax, in a foreshadowing of Stewart’s own act of chopping off Ada’s finger; the whites in the audience do not have the same reaction). In effect, Maori remain relegated to the natural world, outside of “culture,” that is to say opposed to the “civilized” world of the colonial white man. Under the colonial regime, natives and whites cannot occupy the same cultural space except as divided from each other. Baines straddles the border between the races, at least in the first half of the film, but ultimately he cannot bring it down, even in himself, which perhaps is why our final view of him is of him dressed again in white settler clothes. There is, in short, much that is troubling about the way Maori are presented in the film, although one does not have to go as far as a 1993 newsletter of the Coalition against Sexual Violence, which reviewed The Piano as a racist and even sexist film (Barcan and Fogarty 7).

     

    Campion is not entirely insensitive to race and class concerns. At some level the film also makes the white female colonial subject exorbitant to the colonial economy, since the film’s theme is resistance and agency. Ada and her daughter are able in the worst circumstances to carve out a zone of intensely private fulfillment and therefore an empowerment; this empowerment is not commensurate with the empowerment that would be available in the public sphere to women. The film also subtly ironizes the claims of Western modernity and civilization, suggesting that the white male postcolonial subject may redeem himself not by a return to the former metropolitan center but by way of a self-deconstruction. The film’s double project, then, is to trace the unmaking of postcolonial subjectivity and to imagine a radical reconceptualization of love–between subjects that are no longer merely subjects of desire. The film does give fresh meaning to the cliché that love requires the dissolution of the self by provocatively exploring the contours of an “inhuman” love as a constitutive contradiction of ordinary romantic love. Perhaps no film could fully succeed in such a project.

     

    The film works hard to save Baines from heteronormative conventionality as a subject. Unlike Stewart, whose desire for Ada is conventional and desperate, Baines’s desire for Ada appears tepid to a casual viewer. But if his desire seems attenuated, he is psychically driven by a lust for an “other satisfaction” that also drives Ada. Campion herself emphasizes the word “satisfaction” in this connection (qtd. in Bilborough 140) and explicitly indicates her interest in something like the drive as associated with satisfaction: “We grow up with so many expectations around [sex], that it’s almost like the pure sexual erotic impulse is lost to us” (qtd. in Bilborough 138). The film also eroticizes Baines’s body. In one charged scene, the nude Baines caresses Ada’s piano, while Campion’s camera’s gaze in turn “caresses” his buttocks, at eye level. Sue Gillett’s observation here is that “jealously [Baines] wishes to be the piano, to be the receiver of such rapturous touching,… to have such haunting music evoked in and through his own body, to tremble under the powerful cadences of [Ada’s] transcendence” (278-9). Yet Gillett says little about the nature of Ada’s transcendence or Baines’s wish to “be the piano.” The “other satisfaction,” according to Lacan’s formulae of sexuation, is available only to Woman. But Baines’s desire to “tremble,” the transcendence Baines “really wants,” is to enjoy and be enjoyed as Woman.

     

    Campion’s own notation is suggestive of Baines’s unusual orientation to jouissance: in the direction to a scene when Ada is playing contrary to Baines’s wishes, she writes, “Ada starts playing again; Baines feels powerless. He no longer admires her absorption with the piano, he is jealous of it” (67). In the notes to the scene in which Baines caresses the piano Campion hints at Baines’s aspiration to a kind of ec-stasy, or transcendence of the body: “As he wipes the smooth wood he becomes aware of his nakedness. His movements become slower until he is no longer cleaning, but caressing the piano” (49). And the film’s transgressive momentum lies in its ability to tease us into a beyond where even an inhuman love could be conceived as affording an other satisfaction, where “being played like the piano” might function as a figure for the play of the drive through the real body enjoying jouissance beyond the reach of “speaking being.” My attempt is to resituate that inhuman love at the heart of the film.

     

    The trajectory of Campion’s project involves a deconstruction and reconstruction of masculinity, as well as the deformation and retexturing of racialized postcolonial subjectivity. If the film has a purpose in refashioning postcolonial masculinity, it is precisely to offer an alternative to the violence (epistemological, existential, sexual, emotional), not only of colonialism but of conventional love. In his relations with Ada, the film seems to present Baines as being redeemed as a “sensitive” (“non-masculine”) man, a fool for love, in short the regenerate man of women’s melodrama. But this is an inadequate description. It turns out that his “hysterical” desire is not so much to love or have sex with Ada as to be loved. In Gillett’s words, “contravening the Oedipal logic of desire, Baines comes to the realization that his desire, crucially, has the passive aim ‘normally’ allotted to woman. His desire is for her desire” (282). His passivized–one might even call it masochistic–masculinity is a major theme of the film, in stark contrast to the violent and stereotypical phallic masculinity of Stewart. He rises out of the confines of his raced and gendered body, as well as beyond the confines of the Oedipal structure. I had earlier quoted a comment by Harvey Keitel to the effect that Baines is “looking for a place to be, and he finds it through his ability to suffer” (qtd in Bilborough 143). I want to read Baines’s desire to suffer as a desire to enjoy the body of the other through suffering–which is precisely the meaning of jouissance.

     

    Stewart’s entrapment in the melodramatic orthodoxy of bourgeois love, within the parameters of which he is condemned to being uncomplicatedly masculine, is understandable in terms of the arc of desire. But Baines’s fantasmatic ambition is clearly of another order, and the film fascinatingly makes us distinguish between Stewart’s and Baines’s dispositions to desire, by first soliciting the viewer’s identification with Stewart, followed by a disidentification, and therefore a return of the look to Baines’s strange positioning as a subject.7 The difference between these two pakeha men is also clear in that Stewart is much more anxious to retain some anchor for his endangered postcolonial masculinity, much more anxious not to open himself to feminization than is Baines. Stewart is defensive about all the markers of European superiority in matters of society and sexuality. By contrast, Baines is presented in the position of eroticized object, part of the film’s tactic (noted by Barcan and Fogarty) of offering female viewers opportunities for erotic identification that are rare in contemporary mainstream cinema (7). Stewart is anerotic; Baines becomes an erotic object not only for Ada but for the (female) viewer. But my point is not so much to dwell on the contrast between the two men, to condemn one and praise the other, as to mark the subtle way the film explores an alternative to the melodrama of love.

     

    More than being increasingly drawn to Baines (which is partly true), Ada finds herself increasingly drawn by Baines’s desire to be loved by her: “I want you to love me, but you can’t,” he says. This is in proportion to the degree to which she is repulsed by Stewart’s desperate and violent desire to possess her. Stewart’s desperation (metonymic of the pakeha‘s desperate confrontation with the fact of his own impotent interstitiality in the postcolony) is not lost on the Maori. Baines offers her the promise of a love that an ordinary (violent) man could never offer her. It is this promise, the film seems to suggest, that draws the elective mute out of her silence and her death wish–for it is clear that the typical heterosexual domesticity, marriage, or love she had previously been offered were among the aspects of a woman’s fate Ada was declining through her exorbitant silence.

     

    But it is precisely here that many astute observers and commentators, such as Gillett and Gordon, tend to turn the film into an exploration of issues of consent, rape, and Ada’s progression toward a sentimental love, even a love contained within the paradigm of bourgeois domesticity (see Gordon 197). But such interpretations, I have argued, make the film seem a rather simpler artifact than it is, set the viewer up for “disappointment” and, worse, obliterate a crucial “remainder” or “excess,” a conatus of negativity to which Ada cleaves and to which cleaves the sentimental narrative. The excess seems to be minimized even by those who, like Dyson, register Ada’s resistant performative. Dyson focuses on the presumed choice of “life” that Ada makes, ultimately undertheorizing both the excess as well as the issue of postcolonial masculinity that she also recognizes is at the heart of the film: “At the end of the film, Ada chooses ‘life’ after jumping overboard with her piano. She leaves the instrument (the symbol of European bourgeois culture) at the bottom of the ocean, thus severing her connection with the imperial centre and begins her life anew with her man who has already ‘gone native’” (268).

     

    On the contrary, I would suggest that if she renounces one instrument she also takes up another–that Baines becomes Ada’s instrument and Ada his. This is why Ada can ultimately renounce the piano, and not because Baines has given her marital bliss and love. This brings us closer to understanding why Ada, who has taken such a significant step in renouncing ordinary love and sexual relationships as having elected to go mute, should consent so readily to the strange compact with Baines. Even some critics such as Barcan and Fogarty, who find the category of romantic love apposite to describing Ada and Baines’s relationship, admit that it fails to capture something important about the “affective economy” of the relationship, and it is not just that this economy is “subtended by an economic one” (12). My sense is that Ada’s “surrender” has in the final analysis less to do with loving that particular man and more to do with finding, or at least seeking, a kind of pleasure–not love but a kind of jouissance. Nor is it Baines’s “actual lived body”–to use Donald Lowe’s phrase–that she wants to “enjoy” in jouissance.

     

    If the film disappoints, it is in losing track of Baines’s transgressive drive, his aspirations to jouissance, while Ada is permitted to remain complex and mysterious. The film also seems to leave underdeveloped the ethics of Baines’s transgressive performative, which is really a crucial foil to Ada’s performative.8 In the final moments of the film, her memory of jouissance persists as her subversive secret, interrupting the trajectory and temporality of melodrama and refusing the idyll of bourgeois domesticity. Yet Campion allows Baines to turn back into a frog, into a happily married white burgher, after having gone so far to save him from erotic and racialized conventionality. In part, this essay’s project is an anamnesis, or re-membering of Baines’s lost enjoyment. If we do not attend to Baines’s orientation to an other jouissance, we risk reading only his desire and misconstruing his relationship with Ada, just as we would if we read only Ada’s desire in her consenting to a “deal” to regain her piano and to a marriage with Baines.

     

    Readings that focus on desire are too reductive to account for the refractions of love that the film presents to us. After Stewart discovers what Ada has been doing instead of giving Baines piano lessons, he first tries to assault her, but since she coldly rejects him, he boards her up in the house with her daughter. Alone in her bed, she is seen kissing her own reflection in a hand mirror: this is neither narcissism nor an example of a woman newly in love. It is a portrait of a woman re-discovering a pleasure that exceeds its object or makes an accident of its object. At night, in bed with her daughter, she first lasciviously caresses the little girl and then, in a scene rarely commented on, approaches Stewart, running her hands over his chest and then between his buttocks. This is the first time she makes a sexual advance to Stewart, whom she has always rejected with phobic energy. But when Stewart reacts with relief admixed with panic, she turns away, and he finds himself unable to grasp the opportunity that has been his obsession: he is “unmanned” by this advance, as Campion tells us (92). Ada’s is not a gesture of rapprochement; she still denies him. Shortly afterwards, in a fit of jealous rage, Stewart chops off Ada’s index finger in a symbolic castration for which Baines will later try to compensate with a prosthesis of his own fashioning.9 But where is Ada’s jouissance? What does the woman want?

     

    Certainly phallic jouissance. But Ada seeks something else through Baines than what “Old dry balls” Stewart could offer. Were Ada simply “in love” with Baines, it would be strange for her to transfer desire onto her daughter and then, without missing a beat, onto Stewart. It is more productive to recognize in this strange recathexis an anamorphic emblem of the circuit of the drive as it seeks an other satisfaction in keeping with Lacan’s dictum that “all the needs of speaking beings are contaminated by the fact of being involved in an other satisfaction” (Four Fundamental 51). Clearly, it is not Stewart she wants, but erotic fulfillment; nor is he a stand-in for Baines, for sex with Baines is evidently quite as satisfying as one could expect it to be. Rather, we are witnessing here a token of the instrumentalization of love in the service of an other satisfaction, and Campion’s notation confirms that “Ada seems removed from Stewart as if she has a separate curiosity of her own” (Campion 90). Ada wants to be a subject not wholly defined by the Other’s desire–to be what Fink calls a “subject [that is] someThing else” (“Desire” 37).

     

    If we take Baines’s own pleasure as seriously as Ada’s drive toward satisfaction, it is hard to ignore the fact that while there is clearly some sympathy and affection that Baines feels for Ada, there is also, from the beginning, something radically narcissistic in Baines’s desire to be looked at with the gaze of love, to “be the piano.”10 In truth, from his perspective too this is a non-reciprocal relationship, not constrained within the paradigm of melodrama. Baines does not want only romantic love, any more than Ada thinks good sex or good companionship negates her misgivings about sexual relationships within patriarchy or about marriage and its social meaning within the Oedipal paradigm. A description of the forms of their jouissance requires a different structure.

     

    Section III:
    Not Courtship But Courtly Love

     

    If I have returned to this film that has already been discussed at such length, it is in part because of a dissatisfaction with the discussion I have already described, but also because of the lessons to be gleaned from Campion’s suggestive exploration of the psychic economy of love. Some of these lessons are anticipated by the Lacanian distinction between romantic courtship and courtly love. Sam Neill, who plays Stewart, observes that “this film explores both the desperate and the wonderful things that happen between men and women in a way that’s not often done in films. And these things make for moments of sublime ecstasy and moments of the most terrible fear, of terror. It’s been pretty scary territory to be acting in–it helps to have had a little life experience” (qtd. in Bilborough 147). Life experience provides, if nothing else, a recognition that we never find a total, blissful love. We contrast this actually experienced imperfection of human love with what one might call the myth (myths being something other than mere falsehoods) of a perfect, and therefore inhuman, love.

     

    A useful framework for understanding the irregular dispositions of the two main characters toward pleasure or jouissance is Jacques Lacan’s psychoanalytic adaptation of “courtly love.” While courtly love may appear to be an outmoded discursive paradigm, it can help us to grasp something of the real power of the film’s representation of Ada’s strange relationship with Baines.11 What’s more, the admittedly extreme artificiality of courtly love today is precisely its strongest recommendation because it defamiliarizes the category of bourgeois sexual relationship afresh and reperspectivizes the overdetermination of Baines’s cultural and sexual liminality as well.

     

    Within the optics of courtly love’s categories adapted to a psychoanalytic understanding, we need no longer agonize over whether Baines and Ada are involved in a romance or a rape, or whether they really find domestic bliss in Nelson. Ada’s strange compact with Baines comes into sharper focus as neither simply the quid pro quo of desire, nor a reciprocation of exactly contrapuntal trajectories of desire. It is rather a mutual a-relational groping after jouissance that is nevertheless supported by the scaffolding of a relationship. How else might we explain the fact that images of Ada’s near-drowning intrude immediately after the scenes of her new, happily married life with Baines? Why does Ada not choose between these two “endings”? What is this trace of trauma that is nurtured by Ada in the midst or embrace of married bliss?

     

    Ada’s settling into married life with Baines is certainly shocking in its bathos and tameness.12 “Feminist friends,” Gillett writes, “have criticized the film for offering [an] apparent return [at the end of the film] to sexual conventionality” (280); but as Gillett observes, this is not really the “end” of the film:

     

    The seeming closure offered by the domestic ending is only temporary. It is immediately undercut by another vision: Ada’s body is floating underwater above her piano, Victorian dress ballooning around her. The return to this second image, coming so soon after Ada’s rescue from drowning, unsettles the happily-ever-after of the couple, not in that it forebodes an end to this happiness but in its recognition of the insistent presence of another territory and mode of experience. (281; emphasis added)

     

    In part agreeing here with Gillett, I argue that this “other territory” is the territory of the Lacanian real (distinguished from the symbolic and the imaginary). The image of a delicious death is not merely “consign[ed]… to fantasy” (Bruzzi 266; emphasis added); it irrupts into the idyll of the actual, disappointing Gillett’s “feminist friends,” perhaps, but redeeming the melodramatic bourgeois idyll of love through the anamorphotic ideal of courtly love in the real. Apparently some viewers–like Gillett–have the experience of being “affected… very deeply” by the film, “entranced, moved, dazed” (Gillett 286). But if those feminist viewers were often nonplussed or felt betrayed first by Ada’s participation in the not very feminist “bargain” and then by her apparent scuttling of the narrative of feminine resistance by acquiescing to a conventional and conventionally happy marriage to Baines, could it not have been because they had the experience but missed the meaning? That they underestimated the tour de force of Ada’s displacement, her anamorphosis, of “love” from the actual to the real, even if they acknowledged that, like Gillett herself, they felt that they had visited “another territory,” and therefore felt “reluctant to re-enter the everyday world after the film had finished” (286; emphasis added)?

     

    The last moments of the film do seem a letdown. But as I have already suggested, it is not so much because Ada settles into a conventional settler marriage, “a sensible way of living,” in Campion’s equally sensible phrasing. In some minor respects the film is bathetic because, even if Ada retains at least the memory of jouissance as a subversive secret splitting the temporality of the film, the film loses track of Baines‘s jouissance. Baines has a crucial role in enabling Ada’s passage to jouissance and her safe passage back from what otherwise could be annihilation for her. Like the knight of courtly love, his service to his lady is to enable her access to “enjoyment,” jouissance–an “other” satisfaction. They are partners in supporting each other, “renouncing” romantic love as well as taking satisfaction through each other.13

     

    Lacan’s formulae of sexuation suggest that an other satisfaction is theoretically available to the position “Woman,” even if no actual women experience it. “Woman” is a category under erasure. The Woman is an empty category. But that is what makes possible the fantasy of occupying that position. As fantasy, it can be indulged equally by anatomical men and anatomical women. In theorizing the problem to which courtly love offers an alternative, Lacan says that there is no sexual relation: “the only basis of analytic discourse is the statement that there is no–that it is impossible to pose–sexual relation” (qtd. in Heath 53). In the Lacanian misprision of the paradigm of courtly love, the Woman is coded as the Lady, the obscure object of the courtly lover who must renounce sexual relations (not the same thing as “the sexual relation”) with her. To “have” her he must forgo her. But in what sense does the courtly lover forgo her?

     

    The Anamorphosis of Anamorphosis

     

    Everybody “falls in love” sometime, as the song goes; people fall in and out of love, experience its successes and its failures, and sex has its place. How is courtly love different? If Lacan’s disillusioned perspective (that there is no sexual relation) is meaningful, what does the distance between everyday or ordinary notions of love and Lacan’s technically evacuated category of love and the sexual relation signify? In the first place, as Charles Shepherdson puts it, “sexuality” is not completed–does not achieve satisfaction–in sexual intercourse. Rather, if we remember the Lacanian distinction between the object of need and the object of demand, “the first being necessary to biological life, the second designating an object that belongs to the field of the Other,” sexuality “emerges in the difference between need and demand, and… its object and its modes of satisfaction, are distinct from the satisfaction of biological need,” although sexuality may find expression as the bodily inscription of demand (139). Sexuality is “not all” contained in the symbolic register, but exceeds the law. The excess can be enjoyed only by God or Woman, both of which are structural positions and not people. Since ordinarily women never experience this excessive jouissance, and since the structural position “Woman” is under erasure, Woman’s completion occurs in the real where the sexed Other obtains. Courtly love formulates this (phantasmatic) perfected love as anamorphosis. If the inamorata, the Lady of courtly love, is allowed access to a real jouissance with the real sexed God, then the courtly lover, or knight, might also be imagined as wishing for a real jouissance and completion according to the Lacanian formula “There is some One.”

     

    But I want to disfigure even this anamorphotic figure of courtly love, and to suggest that the courtly lover’s goal may be not the Lady (even as sublimated) but her real jouissance: her experience that “There is some One” (‘Y a de l’un). The Piano points obliquely to this insight by making Baines an instantiation of the anamorphic courtly lover. What the sexually liminal Baines “really wants” (unconsciously fantasizes) is to enjoy the jouissance of Woman, as though he occupied the empty position. The film represents this anamorphically in the attenuation of his desire. Baines seems to recognize the impossibility of love (“I want you to love me but you can’t,” he tells her, more truly than even he understands) and the inevitable failure covered over in love by what we usually call the “consummation” of love, namely the coming together, in sexual union, of the lovers. He “chooses” to renounce that always imperfect love, his act of abnegation mirroring the much more obvious election of silence on Ada’s part, for a higher, more ritualized and purer love–in short, an anamorphosis of ordinary love. It is in this sense that the courtly lover, here represented by Baines, forgoes romantic love with the lady–but one “forgoes” only in the hope of attaining some higher goal.

     

    Ordinary romantic love is circumscribed in the ambit of desire, converging there with, at best, what Lacan would call “phallic” jouissance, which can be experienced by women as well as men, in sex. By contrast, courtly love, precisely because it is a formal, ritual sacrament that displaces God in the realm of jouissance, affords a satisfaction that love could never promise. (This ability finally to enjoy enjoyment [Fink, “Desire and the Drives” 41] is something even a thinker of the order of Marx could miss in the admittedly odd arrangement called courtly love.)14 Desire and satisfaction are really at odds in romantic love and ordinary sex; Lacan notes that most adults never want to wake up–“when something happens in their dreams that threatens to cross over into the real, it distresses them so much that they immediately awaken… they go on dreaming” (Seminar XX 53). Fink observes that the later Lacan of The Four Fundamental Concepts does not argue that the subject who has traversed his most basic fantasy in order to live out the drive [vivre la pulsion] “becomes a kind of non-stop pleasure-seeking machine, but rather that desire stops inhibiting the subject from obtaining satisfaction” (41). Desire is also “a defense against satisfaction” (43). You can have your cake and eat it.

     

    Courtly love, as an anamorphosis of ordinary love, obviates the premises of romantic love and the usual laments of “sublunary” lovers. It shows how for Baines Ada is something more, or less, than a woman he falls for and seduces, just as it shows that Ada is after something that is not “in” Baines. The principle of courtly love is a kind of abnegation of ordinary completion or consummation, a denial from the outset of what ordinary lovers are said to pine for. Then why do they have sex? How, to return to one of the key questions I posed above, should we read the sexual relationship of the couple, which has caused such flutter even among the film’s more sophisticated commentators?

     

    I would argue that as mere mortals Baines and Ada can hardly help seeking satisfaction through sex and romantic love–but that is not where satisfaction obtains, and they “know” this without perhaps understanding it. As Lacan writes in Seminar XX, “all the needs of speaking beings are contaminated by the fact of being involved in an other satisfaction… that those needs may not live up to” (51).15 That men and women couple or marry does not mean that they have contradicted the Lacanian nostrum that there is no sexual relation. The failure of the sexual relation is inevitable because, as Lacan’s formulae of sexuation suggest, it is only God as a sexed Other who perfects the sexual relation and the jouissance of the Woman. This sexed God is not the Christian God but is “unsignifiable” in speech, beyond language, in Serge André’s terms (91). “The sexual act of coitus,” André goes on to say,

     

    takes on then the figure of an eternal missed act where repeatedly the absence of the sexual relation, the failure to reunite the subject with the Other to form one body, is verified. The resulting satisfaction can only be defined as the failure of the jouissance of the body and the return to the jouissance of the organ. Lacan gives to it a pretty name: jouissance of the idiot–‘idiot’ should be understood according to its Greek root–that is to say, jouissance that can do without the Other” (98).

     

    The sexual act of coitus remains the “figure of an eternal missed act,” writes André (91), represented in courtly love’s eternal deferral of union between lover and Lady. In this (missed act), satisfaction “can only be defined as the failure of the jouissance of the body and the return to the jouissance of the organ”–but this obtains only if the Other can be killed off, and castration refused. The is an anamorphosis of the inhuman love in which the drive would find an other satisfaction, and in which the Woman would find her real partner, not just the Other’s desire with whom all castrated beings must deal. In the film, the anamorphosis of love reveals-and-conceals that what binds the lovers is that they are each after “someThing else” (Fink, “Desire and Drive” 37): this pursuit of “someThing else” is operative at the level of fantasmatic drive.

     

    The fact that Baines and Ada actually have sex is thus merely the predictable human attempt to achieve an ideal, or it represents a conscious or unconscious covering-over or endless deferral (tuxn) of the recognition of the ideal’s unachievabliity. Men and women want to sleep together because “in fact, they want ‘encore,’ to unite with the real Other, even if they are supposed to know that the latter is out of reach,” André writes (97). And furthermore:

     

    Post coitum omne animal triste,” the saying goes. But it should be corrected in the sense that only the speaking being has a fundamental reason to experience some sadness. In fact, only for him alone can aiming toward the Other and failing to reach it make any sense. Language, in short, does not keep its promises: it makes us believe in the Other and by the same token takes it away from us; it evokes the horizon of a jouissance of the body, but makes it inaccessible to us. Sexual jouissance can only connote dissatisfaction. (98)

     

    The sadness of the speaking being is the inevitable end(point) of the sexual relation, which as Lacan insists “does not take place” (Lacan, Feminine Sexuality 138). The other jouissance is by definition beyond. The heuristic frame of courtly love psychoanalytically interpreted allows us to negotiate the question of satisfaction, jouissance, in connection with the status and signification of the body.

     

    My emphasis on Ada’s jouissance and drive is not intended to suggest that her desire is inoperative–precisely the contrary. Ada’s desire, however, points beyond itself. Playing Ada, Holly Hunter was conscious that Campion “was very brave in holding out for a more original kind of sexuality and sensuous quality in Ada” (qtd. in Bilborough 149). And in her analysis of the film, Gordon herself acknowledges that there is indeed a “something else“–not just desire–that circulates in the film, although her gloss on it is somewhat different from the one I have given it above:

     

    On first reading “The Piano debate,” I was struck by the curious sense that something else had gone missing, in addition to… [the] loss of a referent for the negativity that the film entertains in its account of female desire. Something both more and less than the brutal violence (attempted rape, “castration”) depicted onscreen: “more” because the film stages a potentially unlimited replay of that violence as an affect [sic] of cinematic spectatorship; and “less” because the final violation of the woman’s body is rehearsed at repeated moments of spectatorship within the film. (193-94)

     

    It turns out that while she draws upon Freud and Lacan, all Gordon means by negativity is “the mechanism by which destructiveness can exert a threat on, and provide the means for, the subject” (194). Her interest is to suggest that “to the extent that [the film] provides a commentary on the negativity of female desire and female spectatorship… this negativity is inextricable from the sexually differentiated dynamics of cinematic looking” (197).

     

    Ada’s renunciation of speech (a “negativity” that permits self-assertion for Ada) represents something like an intuitive grasp of André’s point that

     

    the fact of being caught in language implies a loss for the human being at the level of the body–as much of his body as of the body of the Other. This loss appears as a loss of being whose tongue carries its trace: one does not say of man that he is a body, but rather that he has a body. By the fact that he speaks, the human being is no longer a body: a disjunction is introduced between the subject and his body, the latter becoming an external entity from whom the subject feels more or less separated. The subject that the effect of language brings into existence is as such distinct from the body. What remains for him is to inhabit it or to reach that of the Other. But he can only do so by way of the signifier, since it is the signifier that, to start with, tells us that we have a body, indeed, induces in us the illusion of a primordial body, of a being-body prior to language. Language intervenes between subject and body. This intervention constitutes at the same time an access and a barrier: access to the body insofar as it is symbolized, and a barrier to the body insofar as it is real. [André 94; emphasis added]

     

    This account better approximates Ada’s experience of the disjunction between body and speech. The disjunction is absolutely central to her character. Ada has renounced speech. And as Campion herself has stated, the conceit of making Ada an elective mute is at one level not some grand feminist statement but merely the result of a formal decision about how to make the piano figure as a larger presence in the film: “I felt that if [Ada] couldn’t speak, the piano would mean so much more to her” (qtd. in Barcan and Fogarty 8). Nevertheless, to say that she “communicates through her piano, and that is why she does not need to speak” is to make only the most banal observation about her uncanny ability to divorce body and speech, and fails to address the enormous power of the film to speak, at least to women, of a specifically gendered muting. Campion also says that Ada’s muteness makes her “sexier”; this has been interpreted “both as fashionably feminist, for example, by Neil Jillett, and as alarmingly conservative” (Barcan and Fogarty 8).

     

    In any case, it is inaccurate to say that the piano says in music what Ada cannot say in speech. It would be more accurate to say that the function of the piano represents the insight that art, as Julia Kristeva puts it, enables the “flow of jouissance into language” and that music in particular connects us “directly to the otherwise silent place of its subject” (167). But even this optimistic and harmonious metaphor does not capture Ada’s access to jouissance, which occupies another place from the place occupied by music in her life, as I trust my analysis will show. The piano is not just her way of communicating. The music is, for one thing, not Ada’s own, although Michael Nyman, who based his compositions on Scottish folk and popular songs, also intended the pieces to be received as Ada’s repertoire “as if she had been the composer” (qtd. in Coombs 92). As Kirsten Thompson has demonstrated in her fine essay on the film, the progression of Ada’s complicated relationship with Baines, and as I would argue the progression of erotic complications of her libidinal investments, “is charted through the narrative structuring of six piano lessons, the final one of which ends with the two making love. The subtle transformations are marked in this relationship by the shift in the music played by Ada, beginning with scales (first visit), Silver Fling (the first lesson), Big My Secret (the second lesson), and The Attraction of the Pedaling Ankle (the third lesson)” (71). Other key moments are also marked by music, again mostly that of Michael Nyman. As I noted at the outset of this essay, in crucial scenes the music has an extradiegetic presence. The thawing of Ada’s resistance to Baines, her choice to open herself to him, is signaled by “A Bed of Ferns,” a nondiegetic melody (75) accompanying a dolly shot that focuses on Ada, who is facing away from the camera. This allows the camera’s “eye” to enter the whirlpool of her coiled hair in a Hitchcockian reference, indicating the intensification of her erotic energies. That she now wants Baines’s attention is signaled by yet another brief melody, “Little Impulse,” when she looks around to see if Baines is watching her, and stops because he is not. Perhaps the most stirring accompaniment occurs in the sequence when Stewart takes one of Ada’s playing fingers with his ax, to the score of the again appropriately titled “The Sacrifice,” played very loudly. Other important musical accompaniments include Chopin’s “Prelude in E,” as Allen reminds us (54), and the especially apposite title “The Heart Asks Pleasure First.” Again, the piano does not simply “stand in” for Ada’s lost voice in a simple compensatory relationship, for that would imply that the melodic strains of the piano adequately contain Ada’s “big secret.” On the contrary, as I argue, Ada’s drive toward “pleasure” is in excess of such harmonious equations.

     

    Not only does Ada’s daughter translate for her, but more importantly with Ada it is almost as if her body, not just her piano, “speaks.” She tells Flora that with Flora’s father, her teacher, “I didn’t need to speak, I could lay thoughts out in his mind like they were a sheet.” Ada’s relinquishment of the speech of the physical body is a metonymy for her choice of jouissance over language as support of subjectivity. But the choice cannot be final: only an inhuman being could dwell in or with jouissance. There is something homologous in her dilemma and in the “lethal factor” that characterizes the Lacanian “alienating vel” between Being and Meaning. Lacan suggests that the concept of the vel, derived from Hegel, describes a (non-)choice framed as “Your money or your life” or “Your freedom or your life” or “freedom or death”–choosing one the subject loses the other; there is no good choice (Four Fundamental 211-13).

     

    Ada is a being for death much the way Lacan’s Ethics seminar (number VII) situates Antigone between two deaths, at the limit or 16 She arrives and stays at this limit at the film’s conclusion as a result of her calculated traversal (which implies both formal denial and “crossing through”) of the choice between acquiescing completely to the bourgeois and sentimental idyll of marital bliss with Baines, and surrendering completely to the other, darker bliss she has already tasted in the depths of the ocean. It is this traversal that many critical approaches miss. Understanding Ada’s jouissance is facilitated by the Lacanian (dis)articulation of desire and drive because we find ourselves continually having to discriminate between Ada’s absence of diegetic speech and her extradiegetic speech that is saturated with negative passion (and for Stewart with palpable force); we are similarly confronted repeatedly by the contrast between the stunted or restricted desire of Ada’s physical body and the excessive and transgressive drive of her real body, and by the division between the real body and the fleshly body.

     

    The Heart Asks Pleasure First

     

    What would it mean for a human being to aspire to or to approximate a perfect bliss–to respond to the demand encapsulated in the title of one of The Piano‘s signature musical pieces by Nyman, “The Heart Asks Pleasure First”? If the “heart” asks pleasure first, what is the nature of its demand? Do we not see here the demand of the drive, rather than some sentimental notion of romantic love? Wouldn’t “pleasure” construed in the radical sense of jouissance, a sense that is apposite in the film, be at once total ecstasy and terror–like the experience of trauma?

     

    When we mention trauma, we are already in the realm of the unconscious. To pursue this question I consider here the role of the body in Ada’s erotic investments. There is also the matter of the subject, however, a linguistic effect. That (always divided) subject is the subject of desire, $<>a. But at the structural level of drive there is no identification as desiring subject. A freeing of drive entails desubjectivation of the signified subject. Parallel to the distinction between desire and the drive is that between the “actual lived body” that experiences the failed sexual relation and the real body that could enjoy an other jouissance. Jouissance obliterates being: for where there is jouissance there is only a real body.

     

    The split between the ontic body and the real body appears most clearly when Stewart has an uncanny experience with this voiceless “speech.” As she is recuperating from having her finger chopped off by Stewart, he tries to rape her. But he is stopped in his tracks by her black stare and her disembodied voice, which seems to strike him on his forehead. “I am frightened of my will,” she says, “Let Baines try to save me.” What is this disembodied voice but a “real” body’s language, a body for which the will (or drive) has a kind of suprasubjective status? This traumatic moment of physical mutilation is tied to the equally traumatic event of near-drowning; in both she is situated at a limit, between will and aphanisis. In the latter scene, following her will (or her drive), which her father had already diagnosed as her “dark talent,” she allows herself to be dragged off a boat by her own piano. As Campion details the moment, the force of the drive is neatly emblematized as a “fatal curiosity”: “As the piano splashes into the sea, the loose ropes speed their way after it. Ada watches them snake past her feet and then, out of a fatal curiosity, odd and undisciplined, she steps into a loop” (Campion 120-21). Slipping into the ocean depths she enjoys a kind of jouissance until she kicks away the rope and allows herself to be saved from the completion of the death drive’s circuit–or should we say that the symbolized body reasserts itself against the real body’s jouissance. Back on the boat of life she “says” in her spectral voiceover, “What a death! What a chance! What a surprise!” (Campion 121; see also Campion and Pullinger 214).

     

    One could call Ada a masochist. Baines, too, has corresponding masochistic traits.17 The masochist’s question is, in André’s words, about “knowing what is experienced by the body that the other enjoys through whiplashes or signifiers” (100)–or actually enjoying what the other enjoys. Lacan observes that “Man cannot reach Woman without finding himself run aground on the field of perversion” (qtd. in André 100); André explains, “the masochistic man manifests something on the order of a feminine position…. The masochist is woman or tries hard to be one” (101). A masochistic courtly lover, Baines sublimates the Lady at one level, and at another desublimates her in order to occupy her place as desubjectivated subject of drive. He recognizes that the enjoyment he seeks is not sexual relation. Baines, too, wants to enjoy as Woman. Thus Baines’s subjectivity is, like Ada’s, constituted not so much in terms of desire as in terms of drive. And he understands very clearly that enjoyment is only for a “body” that is not simply the biological organism. As we have seen, only the Woman under erasure can enjoy such enjoyment. From Baines’s point of view, Ada as a woman merely embodies the metaphor of the Other, something made clear in André’s theorization: “If a woman can incarnate the body that the subject tries in vain to unite with, it is because woman, or the body of woman, has the value of the metaphor of the Other to which there is no signifiable relation: like the Other, the woman is discompleted, not-all subjected to the signifying law” (97).18 Baines does not want so much to seduce Ada or even to love her as to be loved, to be in the gaze, in psychoanalytic terms. Now it becomes clear that even though he can say in the film that “I want you to care for me, but you can’t” he is in love, as they say, with love. He does not merely desire–and now it becomes clear why Gillett is less than precise when she writes that “His desire is for her desire” (282). Gillett herself recognizes that things are more complex:

     

    Baines calls the bargain [between Ada and himself] to end, realizing that he cannot buy, and Ada cannot sell, the personal connection, the experience of love, which he desires. Her desire, which he desires, does not exist in market terms: “I am giving the piano back to you. I’ve had enough. The arrangement is making you a whore and me wretched.”

     

    Irigaray writes: “The economy of desire–of exchange–is man’s business.” Baines experiences the poverty of this economy. He yields to this knowledge, allowing it to make him sick…. Baines’s experience of his own femininity does not lead to a usurping of the feminine for the bolstering of a threatened masculinity at the expense of the woman herself. It is effected through both an imaginative inquiry into Ada’s experience and an acceptance of his own lack of power with regard to the otherness presented by her, and leads him to turn away from the appropriative aims of a phallicly defined masculinity. (282-83; emphases added)

     

    But Gillett does not pursue (or fully grasp?) the implications of her own observations. What, for instance, are the parameters of Baines’s “imaginative inquiry” into Ada’s experience? To what extent is he himself able to enter a non-phallic, feminine “experience”? I would submit that the model of courtly love offers the best answer. Baines does idealize Ada, but this idealization is what enables Baines to enjoy the experience of love. He does not merely desire Ada’s sexual body. If the Lacanian Woman-under-erasure enjoys jouissance, she also knows that the sexual relation is impossible. It is because Baines knows this too, at some level, that he idealizes Ada. What motivates Baines, even if he does not recognize this, is the drive–he embodies the Lacanian understanding, perhaps not entirely consciously or self-reflexively, that “it is not heterosexual genital reproductive sexuality that is sought by the drives, but a partial object that provides jouissance” (Fink 41). This is a central issue in the eroticization of Baines’s colonial male body. His orientation to love evokes the paradoxical questions posed by André: “Why does Achilles pursue the tortoise, why does a man relentlessly seek Woman, why does the subject drive himself crazy to rejoin his body?” (96). Baines’s wish to enjoy as Woman is tellingly evoked when he crawls under the piano as Ada plays. He asks her to hike up her Victorian skirt higher and higher and closes his eyes rapturously–Campion in her directions uses the word “enthralled” (57)–and inserts his finger through a hole in her black stocking, under which lies the blankness of her skin. It is as if this were the black hole through which the impossible Thing could be accessed, but also kept at bay.

     

    Narcissism and Renunciation: Self-Reflexivity and Self-Silencing

     

    Baines wants to “enjoy” a jouissance, a state of being in the gaze, a gaze here instantiated as the gaze of a woman he has idealized as the Lady of courtly love, Ada. But what is the nature of this idealization? Zizek reminds us that the Lady of courtly love is idealized in the sense of becoming an “inhuman partner,” as she is raised to the status of das Ding.19 Furthermore, there is a certain sublime narcissism about Baines’s sublimation of Ada that is frequently missed. Lacan glosses the narcissistic dimension of the sublimation of the Lady as das Ding:

     

    The object in front of us, our anamorphosis, will also enable us to be precise about something that remains a little vague in the perspective adopted, namely, the narcissistic function…. The element of idealizing exaltation that is expressly sought out in the ideology of courtly love has certainly been demonstrated; it is fundamentally narcissistic in character. (Seminar VII 151)

     

    If Woman is the limit of courtly love, das Ding, the courtly lover attempts to place himself at that limit, which means going beyond the Lady. It is by a kind of anamorphosis that the courtly lover’s position coincides with that of the Woman of the sexuation graph–not that of the Lady of courtly love. (Lacan defines anamorphosis as that which “geometral researches into perspective allow to escape from vision” [Four Fundamental 87].) There is something essentially unself-reflexive about this narcissistic becoming Woman in jouissance, something exemplified by St. Theresa:

     

    As for Saint Theresa–you only have to go and look at Bernini’s statue in Rome to understand immediately that she’s coming, there is no doubt about it. And what is her jouissance, her coming from? It is clear that the essential testimony of the mystics is that they are experiencing it but know nothing about it. (Lacan, Feminine Sexuality 147)

     

    This theme of unself-consciousness is crucial–one cannot have jouissanceas well as self-reflexivity about knowledge. Lacan writes,

     

    There is a jouissance proper to her, to this “her” which does not exist and which signifies nothing. There is a jouissance proper to her and of which she herself may know nothing, except that she experiences it–that much she does know…. The woman can love in the man only the way in which he faces the knowledge he souls for. But as for the knowledge by which he is, we can only ask this question if we grant that there is something, jouissance, which makes it impossible to tell whether the woman can say anything about it–whether she can say what she knows of it. (Feminine Sexuality 144-45, 159)

     

    I bring up this point about unself-reflexivity to suggest why the filmmaker instinctively insists on Baines’s illiteracy, his “oafishness”–to employ the terms of Ada’s initial reaction to him. It is precisely because he makes no pretense to knowledge, mastery, control, understanding, and power, because he does not question Ada’s own deliberate self-silencing and self-disempowerment, that Ada finds the route to her own jouissance through him, and he through her. Through the operation of das Ding, they both “[come] to desire death” as Lacan puts it (Seminar VII 83). Ada, too, renounces knowledge in favor of the delicious surrender to the possibility of jouissance (most explicitly when faced with the prospect of drowning). Ada and Baines are thus linked in their renunciation of self-reflexivity: their “non-knowledge or even… anti-knowledge” is in fact an epistemological vel, just as there is a vel between meaning and being.20 It could be argued that both Ada and Baines choose “being” over “meaning,” just as they seek jouissance over desire. But the point about non-knowledge must not be precipitated into a question merely of feminist resistance.

     

    For Mary Ann Doane, ultimately, “the question is why the woman must always carry the burden of the philosophical demonstration, why she must be the one to figure truth, dissimulation, jouissance, untruth, the abyss, etc., why she is the support of these tropological systems–even and especially anti-metaphysical or anti-humanistic systems” (Femmes Fatales 74). Thus for Doane, but not for me, the issue is a matter of a return of the look:

     

    Usually, the placement of a veil over a woman’s face works to localize and hence contain dissimulation, to keep it from contaminating the male subject. But how can we imagine, conceive her look back? Everything would become woven, narrativized, dissimulation. Derrida envies that look [and, as Doane suggests, Lacan as well: c.f. Lacan’s “invidia“]…. It would be preferable to disentangle the woman and the veil, to tell another story. As soon as the dichotomy between the visible as guarantee and the visible as inherently destabilized, between truth and appearance, is mapped onto sexual difference, the woman is idealized, whether as undecidability or jouissance. The necessary incompletion or failure of the attempt to leave behind the terms of such a problematic is revealed in the symptomatic role of the woman, who takes up the slack and becomes the object of a desire which reflects the lack that haunts theory. (75; emphasis added)

     

    Placing the emphasis elsewhere, I suggest that at least in courtly love, which I am treating without evaluative prejudice as a rarefied and “purified” form of love as such, the idealization of the woman as Lady is not the real issue. Certainly the Lady in courtly love is idealized, elevated to sublimity as das Ding. But the “completion” of love occurs in the real, at the level of jouissance, for it is impossible in the actual.

     

    The Sublimated Lady and the Acephalous Subject

     

    Zizek cautions that it is not enough to rehearse commonplaces about the differences between the Lady of courtly love and actual women, and that it will not do to say merely that the Lady in courtly love “stands for the man’s narcissistic projection which involves the mortification of the actual, flesh-and-blood woman.” Instead, he says, we must address the larger question about narcissism: “where does that empty surface come from, that cold, neutral screen which opens up the space for possible projections? That is to say, if we are to project onto the mirror our narcissistic ideal, the mute mirror-surface must already be there. This surface functions as a kind of ‘black hole’ in reality, as a limit whose Beyond is inaccessible” (97).

     

    The Lady of courtly love is idealized; indeed she is idealized away, beyond the point of sexual consummation. She functions as das Ding that covers the hole in the real. But in the real she allows the courtly lover, the chevalier or knight, a kind of jouissance that is beyond phallic jouissance. But it is available only to an acephalous subject, or a subject who is not construed as a desiring subject. Perhaps it would be useful to specify further the nature of that idealization and that acephalousness. As Fink writes:

     

    What Lacan comes to see in the later stage of his work is that the unconscious desire is not the radical, revolutionary force he once believed it to be. Desire is subservient to the law! What the law prohibits, desire seeks. It seeks only transgression, and that makes desire entirely dependent on the law (that is, the Other) that brings it into being… we can say that desire remains inscribed… within the Other, while the subject is someThing else [sic]. (“Desire and the Drives” 37)

     

    What is that “someThing else”? How can it escape the ambit of the Other, the law? Fink traces the shift in Lacan’s thinking from conceiving the subject as/of Demand to the subject as/of desire to, in the late stage, the subject as/of drive. The significance of this is that the desiring subject, not to speak of the subject of Demand, is blocked from enjoyment or jouissance precisely by that desire, which is always the desire of the Other (38, 39). When the subject is conceptualized as drive, there opens up, in this almost utopian move, the theoretical possibility of the pursuit of satisfaction: “Subjugated first by the Other’s demands and then by the Other’s desire, the drive is finally freed to pursue object a” (39). This subject, constituted after the traversal of fantasy, is the subject in the real, the acephalous subject as drive. I am suggesting that Baines, though admittedly he may be no great prize, embodies (if that’s the word) such a subjectivity. He is motivated not to seek the aim of his desire, but to pursue his enjoyment, or jouissance. First, however, he must go beyond the petty narcissism of the subject as desiring.

     

    Lacan speaks of a “something that in its subsistence appears as possessing the character of a beyond of the sacred–something that we are precisely trying to identify in its most general form by the term, the Thing. I would say it is primitive subsistence viewed from the perspective of the Thing” (Seminar VII 140). This is what Baines is after. It is a something else, something not violent but violence’s contradiction in him, that Ada recognizes as basic to his being, and it is that something else which she finds it possible to respond to, to yield to. Is there not a certain receptivity in Baines that allows her to make nearly arbitrary demands on him, like the Lady of courtly love, and does not Baines on occasion ostentatiously present himself as submitting to these (unspoken?) demands quite readily? This helps explain also the nature of the compact Ada enters into with Baines. But why bother with getting married if bourgeois marriage is not really the source of the deepest satisfaction for either of them? Why construct a barrier to the real satisfaction?

     

    The Construction of Obstacles to Love as Aids to the Metaphor of Love

     

    For Lacan, courtly love is “an altogether refined way of making up for the absence of sexual relation by pretending that it is we who put an obstacle to it. It is truly the most staggering thing that has ever been tried. But how can we expose its fraud?” (Feminine 141). We might emend this to, what is at stake for us in not exposing the fraud of what Lacan, following Aristotle, calls “Entasis” or obstacle (141)? The construction of the obstacle is self-protective on the part of the subject. Renata Salecl writes: “One of the greatest illusions of love is that prohibition and social codes prevent its realization. The illusionary character of this proposition is unveiled in every ‘self-help’ manual: the advice persons desperately in love usually get is to establish artificial barriers, prohibitions, and make themselves temporarily inaccessible in order to provoke their love object to return love” (179). The difference in The Piano is that the prohibitions and social codes preventing realization do double duty; in their case a prohibition is also constructed barring them from jouissance. As Zizek writes, to have power we must limit our access to power; “the impediment that prevents the full realization of love is internal” (“There Is No” 209). Baines demonstrates a degree of renunciation: to have ordinary love, the lovers must renounce complete love, must renounce jouissance, for as Zizek suggests through a pithy quotation from Edith Wharton, “I can’t love you unless I give you up” (qtd. in Zizek, 209). The reward Baines seeks is not the seduction of Ada, but access to jouissance through her, along the lines of courtly love. One could as well say that Baines engages in a certain psychic detour: as Lacan puts it, “The techniques involved in courtly love… are techniques of holding back, of suspension, of amor interruptus” (152).21

     

    Courtly love, at least, is not a wholesale seduction by the lure of love. It is emancipated, for instance, from the belief in complete reciprocity between lover and beloved. This is what Lacan means when he says in “God and the Jouissance of The Woman” that “in the case of the speaking being the relation between the sexes does not take place” (Feminine Sexuality 138). Similarly, the knight in courtly love is not a figure representing a delusion about the delusion we commonly call “love.” The knight seeks no cheap solace in keeping alive a hope that the Lady will actually enable him to achieve the sexual relation, which is already marked as impossible. The metaphor captured by the technically obsolete and limited social formation that goes by that name is a figure for the willed suspension of disbelief, and therefore a canny self-seduction into the uncanny: canny because it requires a recognition that those who presume to be non-duped about love do err, a recognition that the sexual relation is impossible, except in the real, but also that love does not have to be reciprocal precisely because it is not wholly within the ambit of desire.

     

    While Lacan says that there is no sexual relation and that love is a lure, Zizek reminds us that love is available as a metaphor. But what are the contours of this metaphor? In the first place if there is a reciprocity, it is a reciprocity within an asymmetry. In the first instance, the beloved (eromenos) turns, and in the turning becomes the loving one, the lover (erastes). But the complementary moment is that the subject himself (now) attains the status of “an answer of the real” (qtd. in Zizek, “Courtly Love” 105). The subject himself becomes the beloved of the beloved: but this reciprocity is not the real thing called love. It is a reciprocity within a more general asymmetry, for love remains unattainable: “the other sees something in me and wants something from me, but I cannot give him what I do not possess–or, as Lacan puts it, there is no relationship between what the loved one possesses and what the loving one lacks” (106). But the significance of this reversal is not to be obscured. Zizek observes that “although we have now two loving subjects instead of the initial duality of the loving one and the loved one, the asymmetry persists, since it was the object itself which as it were confessed to its lack by way of its subjectivization. There is something deeply embarrassing and truly scandalous in this reversal by means of which the mysterious, fascinating, elusive object of love discloses its deadlock and thus acquires the status of another subject” (106). But how do we understand this in the heuristic frame of courtly love?

     

    Again, Zizek explains that “in courtly love… the long-awaited moment of the highest fulfilment, called Gnade, mercy (rendered by the Lady to her servant), is neither the Lady’s surrender, her consent to the sexual act, nor some mysterious rite of initiation, but simply a sign of love from the side of the Lady, the ‘miracle’ of the fact that the Object answered, stretched its hand back to the supplicant” (“Courtly Love” 106). I would emphasize that it is only a sign, not a performative act of love, and it may well be a fantasy projected by the knight. It is not a reciprocal act of love; there is no sexual relation, except “in the real.” It is in this nonreciprocity that Baines’s love is most pure, and the relationship between Ada and Baines is by the same token least compelling when it degenerates into mere “reciprocal” domesticity. In his purest moments, furthermore, Baines wants not so much to love Ada as to be loved, to be looked at. Baines, as I have said, seeks in fact to take the place of the Woman under erasure, not merely to admire and love the Lady. Reciprocity indeed has little to do with it.

     

    Salecl notes that in Plato’s Symposium, Socrates deliberately declines Alcibiades’ “courting” (203) and denies his own elevation as the loved one because, as Lacan points out in Le transfert, for Socrates, “there is nothing in himself worthy of love. His essence was that ouden, emptiness, hollowness” (qtd. in Salecl 203). If I follow Salecl’s line of reasoning, Socrates’ declining of the elevation to the status of the loved one is a denial of “agalma”–the “something” precious that Alcibiades asks for “without knowing what it is” (Lacan, Four Fundamental 255) or even presumably without knowing that he is asking for it.22 Salecl writes that “Socrates’s denial is a denial too of the discourse of the Master in preference for the discourse of the Analyst. It is in courtly love that this agalma, this “someThing else” exists, the thing that Baines and Ada seek without knowing what it is. As Holly Hunter, who plays Ada, recognized from the outset, the script had “one ingredient that almost every script I read does not have: a vast dimension of things being unexplained to the audience or even to the characters themselves–and that’s just a real haunting part of the story, very, very haunting” (qtd. in Bilborough 149). Salecl adds helpfully,

     

    One can ask whether Socrates does not act in a similar way to the lady in courtly love when she also constantly refuses to return love. It can be said that both Socrates and the lady occupy the same place–both are objects of unfulfilled love. However, the function that they perform at this place is different. The lady is the master who constantly imposes on her admirer new duties and keeps him on a string by hinting that sometime in the future she might show him some mercy. Socrates, on the other hand, refuses the position of master. With his refusal Socrates points to the emptiness of the object of love, while the lady believes that there is in herself something worthy of love. That is why she puts herself in the position of the Master (S1), from which she capriciously gives orders. Socrates opposes this attitude altogether and does not want to encourage false hope. (203, n. 53)

     

    In a subsequent note, Salecl continues this thread:

     

    Socrates’s position is similar to that of the analyst, since both of them occupy the position of the object a and try to “keep that nothingness,” emptiness, the traumatic and horrifying nature of the object. Putting oneself in the position of the object accounts for the fact that the subject is not represented by any signifier–what we have here, is therefore the subject as pure emptiness. The analyst is not a Master whom the analysand would identify with and who would impose duties on the subject. By occupying the place of the object, the analyst enables the subject to find the truth about his or her desire. (207, n. 55)

     

    I agree with Salecl that in courtly love the Lady’s discourse is the discourse of the Master and Socrates’ that of the analyst. But my disagreement with Salecl is on the following grounds: I would suggest that the courtly lover–André’s knight–enters the “contract” of courtly love in the full recognition that the Lady’s “mercy” is always already deferred; the object is always already suffused with différance. That is, as I have argued, precisely the essence of courtly love. The knight knows that the Lady is elevated precisely because she is inaccessible. She is not the object of a lovelorn romantic lover. Furthermore, I believe we must also emend Salecl’s argument that “With his refusal Socrates points to the emptiness of the object of love, while the lady believes that there is in herself something worthy of love. That is why she puts herself in the position of the Master (S1), from which she capriciously gives orders” (203). In fact, even if the lady does “believe” anything, her belief is irrelevant; the lady who “believes” is in some sense not the Lady who is elevated to the level of the Real, to the level at which God has jouissance. Woman as mystic does not “know,” as Lacan himself recognizes.

     

    Conclusion

     

    The Anamorphic Inamorata is sublimated, therefore, in the following manner. In the first place, the Object is elevated to the status of das Ding but remains only a “stand-in” for the Thing. Second, it is both spatially and temporally anamorphotic: it can only be viewed from an oblique perspective, although it transforms the experience of the whole; and it is susceptible to a perpetual deferral–as Zizek writes, “the Object is attainable only by way of an incessant postponement, as its absent point-of-reference” (“Courtly” 101). As Zizek himself says, “‘sublimation’ occurs when an object, part of everyday reality, finds itself at the place of the impossible Thing. Therein consists the function of artificial obstacles which all of a sudden hinder our access to some ordinary object: they elevate the object into a stand-in for the Thing” (101). Similarly, Salecl writes that “what love as a demand targets in the other is… the object in him or herself, the Real, the nonsymbolizable kernel around which the subject organizes his or her desire. What gives to the beloved his or her dignity, what leads the loving subject to the survalorization of the beloved, is the presence of the object in him or her” (192). The object is what plugs the lack in the Other, and it is in these terms, Salecl tells us, that we can differentiate the two relations of the subject to this object. Used as a plug or stopper, the object “renders invisible” the lack in the Other–this is the function of the object in romantic love. But in sublimationwe encounter

     

    a circulation around the object that never touches its core. Sublimation is not a form of romantic love kept alive by the endless striving for the inaccessible love object. In sublimation, the subject confronts the horrifying dimension of the object, the object as das Ding, the traumatic foreign body in the symbolic structure. Sublimation circles around the object, it is driven by the fact that the object can never be reached because of its impossible, horrifying nature. Whereas romantic love strives to enjoy the Whole of the Other, of the partner, the true sublime love renounces, since it is well aware that we can [as Lacan puts it in Seminar XX] “only enjoy a part of the body of the Other…. That is why we are limited in this to a little contact, to touch only the forearm or whatever else–ouch!” (Salecl 193)

     

    Salecl notes that such a sublimation is “well exemplified” in The Piano. But where is the true renunciation in The Piano? My argument about The Piano is rather different from Salecl’s. First, we need to be clear about the vectors of renunciation, which indeed doesplay an important role in courtly love. Here Baines’s “sublimation” of Ada is not a spiritualizing, chaste adoration; nor is it a matter of desiring sex with the “ideal mate.” As Zizek observes, the sublimated Lady “is in no way a warm, compassionate, understanding fellow-creature” (95).

     

    Sublimation as renunciation can take two trajectories: the first is an Aristotelian renunciation: Aristotle says in the Nicomachean Ethics that “most people seem… to wish to be loved rather than to love” (482). And loving someone means in fact wishing the loved one well, rather than merely desiring that the look of love is returned by the loved person, or that, as Zizek puts it, the hand of love is extended by the loved one to the loving one. The Aristotelian renunciation is the renunciation of the wish to be loved as object of romantic affection, which is, in one sense, no more than a fetish covering over the “someThing else.” The second renunciation is the willed suspension of reciprocity: here the loving one is like the knight or the mystic, or indeed Woman–there may not be a noble love here, but there is a one-way jouissance that is precisely not constrained by phallic jouissance. It does not require a response from the loved one, indeed the loved one (God) is reduced to an idiotic (to exploit the etymological connection with idios, meaning private, own, peculiar to one’s own universe) construct, an “as if.”

     

    The model of the courtly lover’s elevation of the Lady and of his accompanying self-abnegation is only half the story–it only marks once again the failure of mortal love. The interest of courtly love is that there is an excess, a jouissance, which theoretically the knight or courtly lover could access. What Baines wants is the gaze as jouissance, an intense form of auto-erotism, defined as the turning away of sexuality “from its natural object” and its “find[ing] itself delivered over to phantasy” (Laplanche and Pontalis 46); it is not just a question of Baines’s “desire… for her desire,” as Gillett formulates it (282). For Gillett, the iconic moment is the one in which Ada kisses her own mirrored reflection as a rejection of her husband and a preference for auto-eroticism. But Gillett fails to clarify that there are two trajectories of auto-eroticism–Baines’s as well as Ada’s. In a similar undertheorization, Gordon, following Bruzzi, reads Baines as a “masochistic male” subject whose “desire” merely “mirrors” Ada’s and “is constituted in the staging of the non-reciprocity of desire” (199). Thus,

     

    Masochistic male desire… is also part of a logic of recuperation where the impossibility of desire’s absent object can be substituted. Here, it is the woman’s desire that stands in for the return on the man’s. The question of the woman’s desire, then, continually shifts from the proximity of the object to its absolute alienation. Indeed, auto-erotism similarly teeters on the brink of masochism proper, and ultimately suicide. The scene of the lips that kiss themselves, then, circumscribes precisely the mutual association of danger and enablement that complicates, and makes especially apposite, the relation of auto-erotism to The Piano. (199)

     

    This analysis is too simple. Baines is like the courtly lover whose aim may be the Lady, but whose goal really is the jouissance of the Woman under erasure. It is not the flesh of the Lady/Ada that is desired, but the “body” of the Woman under erasure–this is the focus of Baines’s masochism, as again André makes plain: “The man who lets himself be humiliated, insulted, whipped by his associate seeks in reality to take the place of the woman” (99)–the woman being analogous to the Woman under erasure, not the Lady of courtly love in this instance, and the masochism being largely a matter of discursive enunciation or emotional disposition.23 As masochist, Baines is not simply interested in loving Ada, but in discovering the conditions of his own enjoyment, in a nonreciprocal way, beyond sexual intercourse. The masochist’s question is about an enjoyment beyond. Thus, André continues, “The question that the masochist puts to the test through his practice is that of knowing what is experienced by the body that the other enjoys through whiplashes or signifiers: does this body enjoy as well? and does it enjoy beyond what is provided by the instrument that marks him?” (100). As Lacan himself writes in Television, “a woman only encounters Man (l’homme) in psychosis…. She is a party to the perversion which is, I maintain, Man’s” (40).

     

    Furthermore, there is a way in which the masochistic man “manifests something on the order of a feminine position: it is his position as subject that is feminine…. The sense of the expression ‘feminine masochism’ is… not that woman is masochistic, but really that the masochist is woman or tries hard to be one” (André 101; emphasis added). Finally, we can see why Baines’s feminization, his crossover sexuality, and his hybridized postcolonial interpellation as subject are the key to his eroticization–he is Woman under erasure, but he also displaces whiteness as a postcolonial subject. His relationship with Ada conforms to a model of courtly love. It is only courtly love’s anamorphosis that enables Baines and Ada to say to each other, “I love in you something more than you.”

     

    One could therefore propose that the usefulness of the category of courtly love is that it allows us to see the relationship in terms of the psychoanalytic model of Lacan’s formulae of sexuation, which more fully addresses the unconscious or phantasmatic motivations of Baines and Ada. It is in this connection that an ambiguity in André’s argument about the meaning of wanting to enjoy as Woman emerges. God is the sexed real Other because in the real there is a sexual relation, whereas in the case of the divided subject of desire there is not. One possible outcome of the constellation of positions presented in Lacan’s formulae of sexuation is that it is possible that the knight’s Lady is analogous to the Woman under erasure, in that they are both idealized (and the Woman is under erasure because she is–in Lacanian terms–not the ordinary, divided subject). I think the more likely analogy is that the knight himself is, to some extent, similar to the Woman under erasure, for his fantasmatic relation to the Lady is like that of the Woman who has a fantasmatic relation to God. The knight and the Woman (the reference of course is not to any actual biological female) are isomorphically disposed toward das Ding and God the Other in the real. Das Ding, the Thing, is that absent or “excluded” center around which “the subjective world of the unconscious [is] organized in a series of signifying relations” (Lacan, Seminar VII 71). Appropriating the language of Paul’s Epistle to the Romans, Lacan implies that the Thing is that which the Law forbids and makes desirable to the point of self-annihilation: “the Thing finds a way by producing in me all kinds of covetousness thanks to the commandment, for without the Law the Thing is dead. But even without the Law, I was once alive. But when the commandment appeared, the Thing flared up, returned once again, I met my death…. Through it I came to desire death” (83).

     

    I contend therefore that the knight in courtly love can be installed in the place of the Woman under erasure. The knight is thus also beyond phallic jouissance,24 and since the knight elevates the Lady to the place of das Ding, the jouissance of speech displaces phallic jouissance, although as we have seen, the jouissance of speech fails relative to the jouissance of being (André 89). In courtly love, the knight is disposed to the Lady in a relationship where he enjoys a sexual relation that is unavailable in ordinary sex. The knight, prototype for Baines, seeks the enjoyment enjoyed by the Woman in the real. This Woman under erasure enjoys jouissance with God in the real (this God is “sexed” so that a “real sexual relation” is “completed” again in the real as it could never be in sex). Finally, there is an analogous relation in the real between “the subject” and “the body” (which in André’s phrase has a real sexed consistency), but the relation between subject and body is cleaved by language, since the subject is only the subject of a signifier. The film approximates this schema in that Baines elevates (“sublimates”) Ada to the position of the Lady of courtly love, while he himself is structurally in the discursive site, the place of the Woman under erasure. I maintain that Baines and Ada seek the experience of sexuality as satisfaction of the drive, beyond the “actual lived body,” but this point requires some clarification.

     

    For the later Lacan, Fink reminds us, in the subject who has traversed his fundamental fantasy to live out the drive, “desire stops inhibiting the subject from obtaining satisfaction,” although desire is also a needed defence against jouissance (“Desire and the Drives” 41, 43). This subject has evolved from a relation to demand to a relation to a partial object of the drive–ultimately the death drive. No longer identified with unconscious desire but with satisfaction, he becomes an acephalous subject with head enough to heed “symbolic constraints” in order to manage jouissance (to have protection and pleasure, and protection of pleasure) (Fink, Clinical 208). Ada and Baines, like courtly lovers, manage their inhuman love by acquiescing to bourgeois domesticity as symbolic constraint but simultaneously preserve perversion, as if to say with Lacan that they seek “something in you more than you.” This acquiescence is a kind of complicated masquerade: Baines masquerades as a man, while Ada masquerades femininity, although in fact she (and Baines to some extent) are really seeking to be in the place of Woman.25

     

    Ada manages her approach to the impossible Thing not by the process of sublimation described by Zizek as the erection of artificial obstacles that “hinder our access to some ordinary object: they elevate the object into a stand-in” for das Ding (101). For Ada, the Thing is not sublimated but sublated by the ordinary stand-in of the edifice of heteronormativity itself. The film stages this in cutting from the scene of their new domestic bliss to Ada’s re-memoration, as Toni Morrison might put it, of the encounter with das Ding: “At night I think of my piano in its ocean grave and sometimes myself floating above it. Down there everything is so still and silent it lulls me to sleep. It is a weird lullaby. And so it is. It is mine.” Ada eroticizes the negative, das Ding. And Campion’s final image of Ada is of the perfection of a kind of inhuman love, or jouissance: “Ada’s piano on the sea bed… Above floats Ada, her hair and arms stretched out in a gesture of surrender, her body slowly turning on the end of the rope. The seaweed’s rust-coloured fronds reach out to touch her” (Campion 122). Ada’s unusual satisfaction approximates Lacan’s idea, in Four Fundamental Concepts, phrased as a rhetorical question: “Is there no satisfaction in being under the gaze?” (75). In the gaze, the subject experiences an extreme pleasure (jouissance) precisely through an aphanisis or desubjectivation, when the subject’s pleasure comes from filling a lack in the Other. Baines functions merely as a stand-in for the Other, for whom Ada is also an object. Ada takes some erotic satisfaction, of course, from Baines’s erotic satisfaction; but her jouissance lies elsewhere, in her own desubjectivation.

     

    This is the secret of this perverse couple’s ec-static relationship: something other than human love, and it is thus that Ada and Baines hold the Thing at bay, recognizing that humankind cannot bear very much Lacanian “reality,” and that the other satisfaction each seeks is agalma if kept at a ritualized distance but turns monstrous if approached too closely. The Piano, then, is an exemplary if not fully self-conscious staging of the dialectic between erotic attachment and de-tachment, sublimation and sublation, desubjectivation and subjectification–a dialectic that must remain unresolved.

     

    Notes

     

    1. The ambition is evident even in the sequences that appear close to the beginning of the film, such as when Ada McGrath, the protagonist, plays on the beach in New Zealand–sequences which Campion edits, as Kirsten Thompson notes,

     

    with alternating close ups of Ada, medium shots of [her lover-to-be] Baines, and full shots of her daughter [Flora]. The dominant impression is one of movement, accentuated by Campion’s constant use of camera movement within shots, mimicked through the visual arc Baines paces around Ada, and echoed in the lyrical movements of her daughter’s ballet…. The final shot of this central sequence is a crane shot showing the three in long shot, mother and daughter walking off together, with Baines slowly joining the two ahead. Their footprints in the sand form a triangle, counterpointed by the spiral swirls of Flora’s seahorse sculpture. This graphic patterning allegorically foreshadows the future narrative formation of this particular family. (69)

     

    2. And this is not a purely gratuitous homage, for as in Hitchcock’s film, the close-up of the hair functions as a visual metaphor for the vertigo of the core mystery the film wants to plumb: what Ada wants.

     

    3. Brooks, as Prasad points out, theorized not only the characteristically hyperbolic gesture of melodrama and its signature melody (melos), but also the muting or suppression of the protagonist.

     

    4. I consistently speak of desire and drive as being discrete but also as part of the same dynamic circuit. This reading of the continuity of desire and drive is, I believe, faithful to Lacan. Bruce Fink makes this continuity clear.

     

    5. It need hardly be said that my approach in no way disparages a viable feminist approach or denies the importance of the film’s representation (Darstellung) of dissident femininity. Nor do I wish to deprecate the fascination of the (albeit negative) expression of feminine agency in the film. I would, however, like to consider briefly one example of how a reading that almost exclusively privileges a critical focus on the feminine can prove inadequate in the case of this film. Indeed, it is significant that not only are women’s spaces separated from and valorized above masculine spaces (the male sphere of action), but there are also differentiations among the women in the film, even differentiations among the white women in terms of class and age, not to mention differentiations between white women and Maori women in terms of culture versus nature. But such a reading leads Dyson, for instance, to the misleadingly underdetermined conclusion that “While never relinquishing his whiteness, [Baines] is able to arouse Ada’s passions because he is closer to nature than Stewart” (271). The misled viewer/reader, if she or he follows this line of reasoning, is then drawn into an extremely narrow understanding of the erotic dimensions of the film (which are in themselves admittedly crucial here). We are told that although Baines is a “member of the lower orders–in an early scene Ada describes him as an ‘oaf’ because he is illiterate”–Baines’s “baseness is constructed through the eroticization of his body” (271), as if Baines’s own erotic imagination were never an issue. My reading seeks in part to restore precisely this issue to its rightful importance, at least so that we can better understand what makes the relationship between the two principals so undeniably riveting–and I do so precisely by complicating the eroticization of Baines’s “body,” something which is inadequately articulated by Dyson and other critics even when they notice or thematize that body. Even a feminist analysis of the film, I would also insist, ought to do justice to the complex and subtle relay of the sexual and the sociopolitical vectors that define Baines’s place between pakeha and Maori positionalities: especially, it ought not to ignore the problematization of colonial masculinity.

     

    6. Zizek, as well as scholars such as Jean Clavreul, emphasize the conceptual importance of the perverse couple. He writes, “history has to be read retroactively: the anatomy of man offers the key to the anatomy of ape, as Marx puts it. It is only the emergence of masochism, of the masochistic couple, towards the end of the last century, which enables us to grasp the libidinal economy of courtly love” (“Courtly Love” 95).

     

    7. Pace Stella Bruzzi’s too-sweeping assertion that “our look is most emphatically not aligned with Stewart’s” as we watch Baines and Ada making love (262), I would argue that we are congruently situated with Stewart. That is, we are almost caught, at least for a moment, in the position of identification with Stewart, although of course the audience must subsequently reject any identification with this voyeuristic or fetishistic position. In the scene where Stewart discovers what Ada has been doing instead of giving Baines piano lessons, the director goes to extreme lengths to portray him in a degrading act of voyeurism. As he watches Baines kneel before Ada, his face buried under her skirt, he doesn’t notice that Baines’s dog is licking his palm. Stewart then crawls under the floorboards, positioning himself the better to experience their lovemaking vicariously.

     

    Could this be seen as the film’s way of juxtaposing and contrasting ordinary heterosexual desire with an other economy of love? The effectiveness of the mise en scène is precisely that first there must be an identification before there can be this element of renunciation of the male voyeur position in which the audience shares, an experience of a renunciation analogous to Baines’s performative: a relinquishment of unambivalent masculinity, of pure whiteness, of the former colonizer’s presumed superiority. Stewart “watches” Baines and Ada making love because he himself wants to be where Baines is; he is condemned forever to watching Ada as a husband who cannot himself enjoy her but must fantasize such a scene with someone in his (Stewart’s) “rightful” place. Thus one can conclude that ultimately the point of the audience’s initial, momentary structural identification with Stewart, followed immediately by a rejection of emotional identification, is to defamiliarize the masculine or phallic position. Such a defamiliarization is consistent with the defamiliarization of colonial masculinity effected by Baines. In saying this, I acknowledge the possibility that the very feminization could be yet another masculinist turn. But it is precisely because the renunciation of an unambivalent masculinity has a fundamental and fantasmatic dimension–it is not just an act–that this possibility seems remote.

     

    8. The “ethical” here is Lacan’s almost catachrestic conception of ethics, which has very little of the Kantian “ought.” He speaks rather of the knotting of moral questions with the fatal attraction of transgression (Seminar VII 2), tied to the death instinct. Glossing Freud, Lacan explains that “that ‘I’ which is supposed to come to be where ‘it’ was… is nothing more than that whose root we already found in the ‘I’ which asks itself what it wants” (7). The transgressive subject is finally able to ask the question of its deepest satisfaction, when the drive functions according to the classic formula, “Wo es war soll Ich werden.

     

    In other words, subjectivation beyond divided subjectivity is made possible by a freeing of the drive, a transgression enabling the subject to enjoy an “other jouissance” than phallic jouissance. The distinction between two kinds of jouissance maps onto the crucial (dis)articulation of drive and desire. It is desire that, according to the Lacanian ethical credo, the subject must not cede. Since drive is anterior to the advent of the divided subject, the drive is also amoral, exorbitant to the ethical. To privilege a subjectivation beyond divided subjectivity (as the subject of the drive able to enjoy the other jouissance) is therefore a post-ethical position.

     

    The post-ethical imperative confronts the subject who would enjoy the other jouissance with two alternatives. The first is death. The second is transgression, the attraction of which is that it promises an other jouissance, but which requires a certain brinkmanship or management of jouissance. This is encapsulated in the Lacanian misprision of the paradigm of courtly love. While it implies an irresolvable dialectic, the attraction of transgression need not be forsaken, as I argue in this rereading of Campion’s film.

     

    9. “The Piano literalizes the woman’s castration,” as Suzy Gordon notes, in presenting Ada’s chopped finger as “a prosthetic substitute and an actual bodily lack (‘visible’ because invisible)”–a lack that constitutes the subject (Gordon calls it “identity,” wrongly, in my opinion). But “it does so simultaneously with an insistence on the trauma of male subjectivity, the impotency of which serves to conceal the violence of the colonial encounter” (201). This is too linear a reading of colonial masculinity, in my view, rendering Campion’s impulse to put masculinity in question too flatly, as though the only interest one ought to take in this problematizing of masculinity were to critique and then dispose of the category of masculinity, presumably to focus on the really important issue of femininity. The film certainly does not “conceal the violence of the colonial encounter,” but rather emphasizes it and articulates it as an element of the overdetermined problematization of postcolonial masculinity in the film.

     

    10. The only place in The Four Fundamental Concepts where Lacan presents himself explicitly in the mode of desiring to be looked at is in the episode of the sardine can that looks at him. This is a moment of a curious loss of energy, a near dissolution. Lacan’s rhetoric is more “feminine” here than anywhere else. My contention is that in The Piano this wished “looked at-ness” is Baines’s essential position.

     

    11. With Slavoj Zizek, I would argue that the paradigm of courtly love remains a powerful one for understanding the continuing, even increasing, charisma of and public attraction to icons such as Marilyn Monroe, the Kennedys, Lady Diana, and even Ronald Reagan, not to mention Bill Clinton. This is in spite of and to some extent because of their peccadilloes and failings as ordinary mortals. The metaphor of love encapsulated in the formulae of courtly love helps to explain how these figures maintain their charisma precisely because they are unlike the people with whom we ordinarily find ourselves able to conceive a reciprocal romantic attachment. They are not sexual objects for us even though the scaffolding of our relationships to these public figures may involve the structure of our erotic projection or libidinal investment in them. While “courtly love has remained an enigma,” as Lacan writes,

     

    Instead of wavering over the paradox that courtly love appeared in the age of feudalism, the materialists should see this as a magnificent opportunity for showing how, on the contrary, it is rooted in the discourse of fealty, of fidelity to the person. In the last resort, the person is always the discourse of the master. For the man, whose lady was entirely, in the most servile sense of the term, his female subject, courtly love is the only way of coming off elegantly from the absence of sexual relation. (Feminine Sexuality 156, 141)

    We should perhaps insist that there is more at stake for the man than for the woman. Lacan also writes that “what it is all about is the fact that love is impossible, and that the sexual relation founders in non-sense, not that this should in any way diminish the interest we feel for the Other” (Feminine 158). “Ultimately,” he says, “the question is to know, in whatever it is that constitutes feminine jouissance where it is not all taken up by the man–and I would even say that feminine jouissance as such is not taken up by him at all–the question is to know where her knowledge is at” (158).

    Lacan asks the question of what purpose is served by the jouissance of the body if there is in fact no sexual relation (Feminine 143). His answer is that “short of castration, that is, short of something which says no to the phallic function, man has no chance of enjoying the body of the woman, in other words, of making love”:

     

    Contrary to what Freud argues, it is the man–by which I mean he who finds himself male without knowing what to do about it, for all that he is a speaking being–who takes on the woman, or who can believe he takes her on…. Except that what he takes on is the cause of his desire, the cause I have designated as the objet a. That is the act of love. To make love, as the term indicates, is poetry. Only there is a world between poetry and the act. The act of love is the polymorphous perversion of the male, in the case of the speaking being. (143)

     

    12. See Suzy Gordon, Stella Bruzzi, Sue Gillett, and Lynda Dyson.

     

    13. One could say then that the film poses an ethics of relinquishment as the radical alternative to these positions of privilege and power through the figure of Baines as well. Of course, this ethics of relinquishment is explicit in the case of Ada, who has relinquished speaking as a kind of ethical withdrawal. One could also suggest that Ada enacts a renunciation in accord with Lacan’s suggestion, in Television, that women are to be credited with an even more quotidian renunciation or accommodation, “to the point where there is no limit to the concessions made by any woman for a man: of her body, her soul, her possessions” (44). Women renounce Man so that their man “remains a man” (André 103). This is why Lacan can say that “some ingrates” cease to recognize her ethical position, even her generosity (Television 44). But one could also argue that both Ada and Baines also aim to relinquish “speaking being” in favor of the Other jouissance, in Lacanian terms.

     

    14. Marx writes,

     

    Although monogamy was the only known form of the family out of which modern sex love could develop, it does not follow that this love developed within it exclusively, or even predominantly, as the mutual love of man and wife. The whole nature of strict monogamian marriage under male domination ruled this out. Among all historically active classes, that is, among all ruling classes, matrimony remained what it had been since pairing marriage–a matter of convenience arranged by the parents. And the first form of sex love that historically emerges as a passion, and as a passion in which any person (at least of the ruling classes) has a right to indulge, as the highest form of the sexual impulse–which is precisely its specific feature–this, its first form, the chivalrous love of the Middle Ages, was by no means conjugal love. On the contrary, in its classical form, among the Provencals, it steers under full sail towards adultery, the praises of which are sung by their poets. (233)

     

    15. Lacan notes that here he is returning to the notion of “the jouissance on which that other satisfaction depends, the one that is based on language” (Seminar XX 51).

     

    16. See also Lacan’s Four Fundamental Concepts (273).

     

    17. Harvey Keitel conceives of the character he plays in the film as a masochist in Freud’s sense; masochist fanstasies “place the subject in a characteristically female situation” (Freud 124). André cites a passage from Pierre Klossowski’s Sade My Neighbor to the effect that the pervert (masochist) seeks to enjoy the body of the victim of his sadistic torturer “in the subjective sense of the expression rather than in the objective sense”–by putting himself in the victim’s body and seeing his own body as foreign. André deduces from this that “the sadistic act, from this point of view, is supported by a masochistic fantasm” (99).

     

    18. The “tension between Woman and the Other,” André says,

     

    can be analyzed… as that of the relation of the subject to the body. The apprehension of the body by the subject reveals, in fact, the same polarities that we have identified regarding the Other: the place where the signifier is inscribed and as such exists and is identifiable as a being of signifiance, and on the other hand, as a real sexed consistency that is unnameable as such. This disjunction between the Other of desire, which exists, and the Other of jouissance, which does not exist, is thus reproduced at the level of the body. (93)

     

    19. As Zizek writes in “Courtly Love,”

     

    The Lady is… as far as possible from any kind of purified spirituality; she functions as an inhuman partner [and Lacan uses this very word] in the precise sense of a radical Otherness which is wholly incommensurable with our needs and desires; as such, she is simultaneously a kind of automaton, a machine which randomly utters meaningless demands. This coincidence of absolute, inscrutable Otherness and pure machine is what confers on the Lady her uncanny, monstrous character–the lady is the Other which is not our “fellow creature,” i.e., with whom no relationship of empathy is possible. This traumatic Otherness is what Lacan designates by the Freudian term das Ding, the Thing. The idealization of the Lady, her elevation to a spiritual, ethereal Ideal, is therefore to be conceived as a strictly secondary phenomenon, a narcissistic projection whose function is to render invisible her traumatic, intolerable dimension…. Deprived of every real substance, the Lady functions as a mirror onto which the subject projects his narcissistic ideal. (“Courtly” 96)

     

    20. Here it is not a question of a Nietzschean anti-hermeneutics of truth, as Mary Ann Doane describes it, where “woman” is veiled because she knows that there is no truth behind the veil of femininity (Femmes 57). While Luce Irigaray criticizes Nietzsche for contructing femininity as “the living support of all the staging/production of the world” and thus of masculinity, Jacques Derrida approves of Nietzsche’s anti-essentialist account, as Doane observes, quoting Derrida:

     

    There is no such thing as the essence of woman because woman averts, she is averted of herself…. And the philosophical discourse, blinded, founders on these shoals and is hurled down these depthless depths to its ruin. There is no such thing as the truth of woman, but it is because of that abyssal divergence of the truth, because that untruth is “truth.” Woman is but one name for that untruth of truth. (qtd. in Doane 58)

     

    Doane points out that Nietzsche’s woman induces in herself a state of innocence, of non-subjectivity. As Doane puts it, “The philosopher-voyeur sees quite well that the woman ‘closes her eyes to herself’ [Nietzsche’s phrase]. She does not know that she is deceiving or plan to deceive; conscious deception would be repellent to the man and quite dangerous. Rather, she intuits or ‘divines’ what the man needs–a belief in her innocence–and she becomes innocent. Closing her eyes to herself she becomes the pure construct of a philosophical gaze” (59). And “a woman is granted knowledge when she is old enough to become a man–which is to say, old enough to lose her dissembling appearance, her seductive power. And even then, it is a kind of ‘old wives[‘]’ knowledge, not, properly speaking, philosophical” (59). But as I understand it, if the woman is naive, the man is not so much sentimental as duped. The courtly lover is not a dupe in that sense. It is he who “becomes innocent” in courtly love. Neither is he just a lover of appearances. On the contrary, we see again how he comes, in his peculiar devotion, to occupy not the place of (old) women, or of women no longer invested in lending themselves to the uses of masculinity, but the place of the “jouissant” Woman. He can therefore afford to yield to the arbitrary whims of the Lady, for he is not just a man whose masculinity depends on the willed innocence of women, nor on a woman, on the other hand, whose very being depends on an illusion.

     

    21. Lacan tells us that the reward in the tradition of courtly love is the “strange rite, namely, reward, clemency, grace or Gnade, felicity” (146). The detour to jouissance is described in terms of asceticism as an “ethical function of eroticism”:

     

    It is an artificial and cunning organization of the signifier that lays down at a given moment the lines of a certain asceticism, and… the meaning we must attribute to the negotiation of the detour in the psychic economy. The detour in the psyche isn’t always designed to regulate the commerce between whatever is organized in the domain of the pleasure principle and whatever presents itself as the structure of reality. There are also detours and obstacles which are organized so as to make the domain of the vacuole stand out as such. What gets to be projected as such is a certain transgression of desire.

     

    And it is here that the ethical function of eroticism enters into play. Freudianism is in brief nothing but a perpetual allusion to the fecundity of eroticism in ethics, but it doesn’t formulate it as such. (152)

     

    22. This is presumably different from what Aristotle speaks about as the “attribute” (325) called “happiness,” that is to say, “something final and self sufficient, and… the end of action” (317); this “attribute” of happiness “belong[s] to the happy man” (322; see also 323-24, 529, 531). Rather, Alcibiades seeks something that answers the drive. This is to go beyond both the deontological and the teleolgical as Aristotle conceives them: what Alcibiades “seeks” is both a good in itself, for him, as well as a good that always defers its own ends. At the same time the demand of Alcibiades, insofar as its fantasmatic goal is a partial object ultimately responsive to the partial drive, cannot be reduced to mere selfishness. (Aristotle asks, “Do men love… the good, or what is good for them?” [472].) Nor for that matter can Alcibiades’s goal in loving be judged as a shortfall within a rationalistic calculus, what Aristotle points to as definitive of Man when he speaks of “an active life of the element that has a rational principle” (318; see also 315, 317).

     

    23. André usefully asks, “what distinction should be made between the two forms of cleavage that are implied by the perverse position and the feminine position?” This important question receives the following answer:

     

    In both cases, the subject sees itself divided between two sides: one where castration is recognized and subjectified, the other where it is neither recognized nor subjectified. In what does the nonrecognition (the denial) of castration by the pervert differ from a woman’s nonsubjectification (the not-all)? This question is equivalent to asking what logical distinction separates the two parts of the Lacanian table of sexuation. This table shows us indeed that on one side a cleavage is made between subjection to castration (.) and the negation of castration (.~), while on the other side, the cleavage operates between the affirmation of a partial nonsubjection (.~) and the negation of the negation of castration (~.~). The masochistic position, whatever it may have in common with the feminine position regarding its aim, thus remains distinct from it: it is only a caricature of it. This difference becomes more apparent if we note that the pervert himself believes in the Other, in the subjective jouissance of the Other, while a woman does not have to believe it–she simply finds herself in the place of where the question of the Other is formulated. For the masochist, the bar is never really inscribed on the Other and must, consequently, replay incessantly the scenario in which the Other receives this mark from his partner, while what woman attests to is actually the irremovable character of this bar–that is to say, the impossible subjectification of the body as Other. The pervert appears able to slide into the skin of this Other body like a hand into a glove; women themselves repeatedly say that this body does not fit them like a glove, that it is Other to them as well, and that the jouissance that can be produced here is foreign to them and is not subjectifiable. (101-2)

     

    24. We must acknowledge, as André cautions, that “Phallic jouissance should not be confused with what happens in the lovers’ bed–in any case it cannot be restricted to it. One of the fundamental revelations of the analytic experience consists in this recentering of the jouissance called sexual: its space is less the bed [lit] than the said [dit]. This is the reason why jouissance is repressed and unrecognized by the subject: jouissance does not even fulfill the requirement that the subject properly meet its partner in bed!” (90-91).

     

    25. See Joan Rivière’s “Womanliness as a Masquerade” and Mary Ann Doane’s “Film and the Masquerade: Theorizing the Female Spectator.”

    Works Cited

     

    • Allen, Richard. “Female Sexuality, Creativity, and Desire in The Piano.” Coombs and Gemmell 44-63.
    • André, Serge. “Otherness of the Body.” Lacanian Theory of Discourse: Subject, Structure, and Society. Ed. Mark Bracher, Marshall W. Alcorn, Ronald J. Corthell, and Françoise Massardier-Kennedy. New York: New York UP, 1994. 88-104.
    • Aristotle. Nicomachean Ethics. Introduction to Aristotle. Ed. Richard McKeon. New York: The Modern Library, n.d. [1947]. 308-543.
    • Barcan, Ruth, and Madeleine Fogarty. “Performing The Piano.” Coombs and Gemmell 3-18.
    • Bilborough, Milo. “The Making of The Piano.” Campion 135-53.
    • Bruzzi, Stella. “Tempestuous Petticoats: Costume and Desire in The Piano.Screen 36.3 (Autumn 1995): 257-266.
    • Brooks, Peter. The Melodramatic Imagination: Balzac, Henry James, Melodrama, and the Mode of Excess. New Haven: Yale UP, 1976.
    • Butler, Judith. Antigone’s Claim: Kinship Between Life and Death. New York: Columbia UP, 2000.
    • Campion, Jane. The Piano. New York: Hyperion, 1993.
    • Campion, Jane, and Kate Pullinger. The Piano: A Novel. New York: Miramax Books, 1994.
    • Coombs, Felicity. “In the Body of The Piano.” Coombs and Gemmell 82-96.
    • Coombs, Felicity, and Suzanne Gemmell, eds. Piano Lessons: Approaches to The Piano. Southern Screen Classics: 1. London: John Libbey, 1999.
    • Coombs, Felicity, and Suzanne Gemmell. “Preface.” Coombs and Gemmell vii-x.
    • Doane, Mary Ann. The Desire to Desire: The Woman’s Film of the 1940s. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1987.
    • —. Femmes Fatales: Feminism, Film Theory, Psychoanalysis. New York: Routledge, 1991.
    • —. “Film and the Masquerade: Theorizing the Female Spectator.” Merck 227-243.
    • Dyson, Lynda. “The Return of the Repressed? Whiteness, Femininity and Colonialism in The Piano.Screen 36.3 (Autumn 1995): 267-287.
    • Fink, Bruce. A Clinical Introduction to Lacanian Psychoanalysis: Theory and Technique. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1997.
    • —. “Desire and the Drives.” UMBR(a) 1 (1997): 35-51.
    • —. The Lacanian Subject: Between Language and Jouissance. Princeton, NJ: Princeton UP, 1995.
    • Freud, Sigmund. “The Economic Problem of Masochism.” The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud. Trans. J. Strachey. Vol. 19. London: Hogarth, 1924.
    • Gillett, Sue. “Lips and Fingers: Jane Campion’s The Piano.Screen 36.3 (Autumn 1995): 277-287.
    • Gordon, Suzy. “‘I Clipped Your Wing, That’s All:’ Auto-Erotism and the Female Spectator in The Piano Debate.” Screen 37. 2 (Summer 1996): 193-205.
    • Heath, Stephen. “Difference.” Merck 47-106.
    • Huyssen, Andreas. After the Great Divide. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1986.
    • Kristeva, Julia. Desire in Language: A Semiotic Approach to Literature and Art. Ed. Leon S. Roudiez. Trans. Thomas Gora, Alice Jardine, and Leon S. Roudiez. New York: Columbia UP, 1980.
    • Lacan, Jacques. Écrits: A Selection. Trans. Alan Sheridan. New York: Norton, 1977.
    • —. Feminine Sexuality: Jacques Lacan and the École Freudienne. Ed. Juliet Mitchell and Jacqueline Rose. Trans. Jacqueline Rose. New York: Norton, 1982.
    • —. The Four Fundamental Concepts of Psycho-Analysis. Ed. Jacques-Alain Miller. Trans. Alan Sheridan. New York: Norton, 1977.
    • —. The Seminar of Jacques Lacan, Book VII: The Ethics of Psychoanalysis 1959-1960. Trans. Dennis Potter. New York: Norton, 1992.
    • —. The Seminar of Jacques Lacan, Book XX: Encore. Trans. Bruce Fink. New York: Norton, 1998.
    • —. Television: A Challenge to the Psychoanalytic Establishment. Ed. Joan Copjec. Trans. Denis Hollier, Rosalind Krauss, and Annette Michelson. New York: Norton, 1990.
    • Laplanche, Jean, and Jean-Bertrand Pontalis. The Language of Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press, 1973.
    • Lowe, Donald M. The Body in Late-Capitalist USA. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1995.
    • Marx, Karl, and Friedrich Engels. On Literature and Art. Moscow: Progress Publishers, 1978.
    • Merck, Mandy, ed. The Sexual Subject: A Screen Reader in Sexuality. London: Routledge, 1992.
    • Neill, Anna. “A Land Without a Past: Dreamtime and Nation in The Piano.” Coombs and Gemmell 136-147.
    • Orr, Bridget. “Birth of a Nation? From Utu to The Piano.” Coombs and Gemmell 148-160.
    • The Piano. Dir. Jane Campion. Perf. Holly Hunter and Harvey Keitel. Miramax: 1993.
    • Prasad, M. Madhava. Ideology of the Hindi Film: A Historical Construction. Delhi: Oxford UP, 1998.
    • Rivière, Joan. “Womanliness as a Masquerade.” Psychoanalysis and Female Sexuality. Ed. Hendrick M. Ruitenbeek. New Haven: College and University Press, 1966.
    • Robinson, Neil. “With Friends Like These, Who Needs Enemies?” Coombs and Gemmell 19-42.
    • Salecl, Renata. “I Can’t Love You Unless I Give You Up.” Gaze and Voice as Love Objects. Ed. Renata Salecl and Slavoj Zizek. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1996. 179-207.
    • Shepherdson, Charles. “The Elements of the Drive.” UMBR(a) 1 (1997): 131-145.
    • Simmons, Laurence. “From Land Escape to Bodyscape: Images of the Land in The Piano. Coombs and Gemmell 122-135.
    • Thompson, Kirsten Moana. “The Sickness unto Death: Dislocated Gothic in a Minor Key.” Coombs and Gemmell 64-80.
    • Vasudevan, Ravi S. “Addressing the Spectator of a ‘Third World’ National Cinema: The Bombay ‘Social’ Film of the 1940s and 1950s.” Screen 36.4 (Winter 1995): 305-324.
    • Zizek, Slavoj. “From Courtly Love to The Crying Game.New Left Review 202 (Nov./Dec. 1993): 95-108.
    • —. “There Is No Sexual Relationship.” Gaze and Voice as Love Objects. Ed. Renata Salecl and Slavoj Zizek. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1996. 208-249.

     

  • Practical Politics at the Limits of Community: The Cases of Affirmative Action and Welfare

    Scott Michaelsen

    Department of English
    Michigan State University
    smichael@pilot.msu.edu

     

    and

     

    Scott Cutler Shershow

    Department of English
    Miami University
    shershsc@muohio.edu

     

    As soon as, through the movement of those forces tending toward a break, revolution appears as something possible, with a possibility that is not abstract, but historically and concretely determined, then in those moments revolution has taken place.

     

    –Maurice Blanchot

    We are left with a simple command, and an infinite responsibility. Be just with Justice.

     

    –Drucilla Cornell

     

    This essay attempts to confront perhaps the most obvious and yet the most difficult challenge of radical social critique: the question of the practical. Both of its authors have been interested for many years in various modes of deconstruction and post-Marxism, and we have attempted, in our separate ways, to expose the limits not only of the historical discourses of economy and anthropology, but even of some of the cherished concepts of contemporary left-wing thought. But our work on multiculturalism, political economy, and cultural studies has brought us to the limit of our own critiques. At this limit, how does one say “yes” to the affirmative? How can we, in the words of the famous Marxist injunction, “prove the truth, that is, the reality and power, the this-sidedness” of our thinking in practice (Marx and Engels 144)?

     

    We thus respond here to two challenges. The first concerns the general perception in many circles that poststructuralist thought is either a form of quietism with no political consequences or a reactionary practice that easily slides into the anti-Semitisms and fascisms of Nazi-era Heidegger and deMan. Much recent work in the tradition of poststructuralist Marxism, including our own, has been attacked on one or the other of these grounds. To some, the work seems merely theoretical and thus utterly impractical. To others, even more seriously, the work seems counterproductive in its relentless critique of seemingly promising possibilities for political thought and action. In other words, poststructuralist and post-Marxist modes of theory are perceived as merely alternating between a scholastic cataloguing of utopian (im)possibilities, and a categorical rejection of all down-to-earth, practical-progressive thought. A great deal has been written in recent years attempting to disprove these views. One might mention, among others, Michael Ryan’s Marxism and Deconstruction: A Critical Articulation (1982), Drucilla Cornell’s Beyond Accommodations (1991; new edition 1999), Geoff Bennington’s Legislations (1996), Richard Beardsworth’s Derrida and the Political (1996), Chantel Mouffe’s The Democratic Paradox (2000), and Derrida’s own many recent writings on politics, including, most famously, Specters of Marx (1994), and his response to the critics of that book in Ghostly Demarcations (Sprinker ed. 1999). It must be admitted, however, that little of this work undertakes a deconstructive approach to particular instances of politico-economic decision-making (although Derrida’s writing on South Africa is one of several interesting exceptions).1 Our project here would be unimaginable without the rigorous work of these and many other contemporary theorists. But whatever its myriad achievements, none of this work has stilled the well-meaning voices that constantly interpose to it the belittling claims of brute practicality. All of us have frequently heard these voices: it is well and good, they say, to debate such things in a seminar room or an academic journal, but how will any of this help the refugees in Kosovo or Afghanistan, or feed the homeless, or fight racism, or relieve any of the other small or large acts of violence and injustice among which we daily live and work? In this essay, we do not shrink from such questions. Instead, we embrace them and, in a preliminary way, attempt to take up what we acknowledge to be this necessary burden.

     

    The second matter to which we attempt to respond is the one that Roberto Mangabeira Unger has elaborated: the question of remaining committed to an ultimate radicality of thought even as one examines and endorses certain sorts of practical reformism, such as affirmative action and welfare. As Unger observes, “The idea of institutional tinkering, or part-by-part change, has often been associated with the abandonment of the challenge to the fundamental institutions of society,” and “Conversely, the conception of such a challenge has just as often been connected with the idea that our institutional structures exist as indivisible systems, standing or falling together” (Unger 19). Marx himself sometimes positioned himself in such a way as to rule out the possibility of anything but an absolute transformation of society. In the “Critique of the Gotha Program,” for example, Marx deploys a logic that seems to suggest that any given social arrangement can be declared either bourgeois or revolutionary, with nothing in between, and with an absolute divide between the two. Marx will occasionally grade the various forms of bourgeois society, as when he argues that “vulgar democracy… towers mountains” over the Gotha Program’s projected Lassallian arrangements (Marx and Engels 538-39), but he also insists that all bourgeois arrangements remain bourgeois through and through and hence should be rigorously rejected. And by such logic, Marx finds himself declaring at the end of this text, for example, that “a general prohibition of child labor” is “incompatible with the existence of large-scale industry” and therefore not only an “empty, pious wish,” but even “reactionary” (Marx and Engels 541). We cite such a passage not to suggest it somehow vitiates the whole Marxist project, within whose broad lines we continue to place our own, but rather to underline our contrasting belief that certain modes of practical political reform are entirely commensurate with more radical forms of theoretical critique. Here, we consider whether certain versions of affirmative action and welfare might remain faithful to what Jean-Luc Nancy, Maurice Blanchot, and Giorgio Agamben, among others, have described as a community beyond the limits of all prevailing models of community, a community that is not the end-result of some forever-deferred cataclysm but that is, rather, uncovered or recognized in the acknowledgment of our being-in-common.2 In this way, we position ourselves at one remove from Unger’s twin concerns regarding “the dangerous limiting case of transformative politics”: on the one hand, the demand for nothing less than an absolute revolution, an all-transformative intervention within an imagined History; on the other hand, the inevitable lapse into a “pessimism” about change that no longer aspires to do more than “humanize the inevitable” (Unger 19, 20). The first case is that of the “would be revolutionar[y]” suffering from a “hypertrophy of the will,” while the second is that of the “disillusioned ex-Marxist become the institutionally conservative social democrat” (Unger 20). Here, we seek to avoid either of these extremes and agree generally with Unger that it is valid and important to experiment at the border of existing social arrangements–that is, to imagine practical, incremental reforms even as one also tries to think a society that, by contrast, wholly exceeds the exclusionary practices of the present moment.

     

    In what follows, we first critique at length the reasoning of some of the well-known legal decisions of recent years that address the issues of affirmative action and welfare, in order to suggest how and why the prevailing thought on either issue has reached an impasse. Then we go on to discover the possibility of a new opening of theory and practice that takes place at the very limit of the prevailing logic on either issue.

     

    1. Toward a Theory of Affirmative Action Without White Affirmation

     

    In the third presidential debate of 2000, candidates George W. Bush and Albert Gore, Jr. jousted over affirmative action. Gore attempted to show that Bush did not accept affirmative action’s fundamental principles–by which he apparently meant the celebrated opinion of Supreme Court Justice Louis Powell in Regents of California v. Bakke (1978). Bush, conversely, asserted that he supported the Texas system: that is, the system instituted in the wake of Hopwood v. Texas (1996), in which ten percent of every public high school graduate class is guaranteed admission into Texas higher education. But there was clear agreement over the matter of “quotas.” Both vigorously asserted their opposition to that form of affirmative action. Indeed, the term “quotas” has become in recent years the all-purpose bugbear in affirmative action discourse.

     

    But precisely what are we referring to when we use this crucial term? The commonplace in this regard is that “quota” signals an interest in placing racial minorities in jobs and admitting them as students irrespective of merit. Thus, according to this account, quota-based affirmative action involves the placement of unqualified or considerably less qualified racial minorities into sought-after positions. But as anyone knows who has served, for example, on an admitting committee for graduate students at a major university, the question of qualifications simply cannot be settled: excellent students come from all types of colleges, with all forms of credentials, and with all manner of test scores and grades; and the same is true of mediocre students. Success in graduate school is premised on factors that are impossible to weigh according to any simple standards. The enormous body of literature surrounding, for example, the matter of standardized test scores should have convinced anyone long ago of the foolishness of predicting talent and performance.3

     

    Something else, of course, is at stake in the rhetoric of “quotas,” and while it might be obvious to some, it is also worth rehearsing. One can start with the key decision in Hopwood v. Texas (1996; also known as “Hopwood II”), where a striking series of consecutive paragraphs signals some hard kernel of ideology in their very repetitiveness. The decision, handed down 18 March 1996 by the United States Court of Appeals for the Fifth Circuit, rejects the idea that a state or a state institution has “a compelling state interest in remedying the present effects of past societal discrimination” and makes clear the limits of remedial action (Hopwood 949). The three-member court unanimously and approvingly cites Justice Powell’s decision in Wygant v. Jackson Board of Education (1986):

     

    In the absence of particularized findings, a court could uphold remedies that are ageless in their reach into the past, and timeless in their ability to affect the future. (Hopwood 950)

     

    And again, the Court cites Powell in Wygant:

     

    A remedy reaching all education within a state addresses a putative injury that is vague and amorphous. It has “no logical stopping point.” (950)

     

    Then, citing the Supreme Court’s plurality opinion in City of Richmond v. J.A. Croson Co.(1989):

     

    The “evidence” relied upon by the dissent, history of school desegregation in Richmond and numerous congressional reports, does little to define the scope of any injury to minority contractors in Richmond or the necessary remedy. The factors relied upon by the dissent could justify a preference of any size or duration. (950-1)

     

    And, finally, the Fifth Circuit declares in its own voice that the previous decision of the district court, the decision they are overturning, must be rejected because it “employs no viable limiting principle” (950), and because

     

    the very program at issue here shows how remedying such past wrongs may be expanded beyond any reasonable limits. (951)

     

    “Ageless and timeless,” “no logical stopping point,” “preference of any size or duration,” “no viable limiting principle,” “beyond any reasonable limits”: what each of these moments has in common is an assertion that affirmative action can go too far, can overrun what Wygant calls the “limiting [of] the remedial purpose to the ‘governmental unit involved’” (qtd. in Hopwood 952, n. 44). The argument here is clear: the Court in Hopwood II asserts that the University of Texas Law School is only permitted to take account of its own local and particular discriminatory practices (not those of society in general, or Texas education, or even the University of Texas) and only with regard to citizens of the State of Texas.

     

    And indeed, nested in this flurry of limits, the Court asserts yet one more–here once again citing Croson:

     

    Relief for such an ill-defined wrong could extend until the percentage of public contracts awarded to [minority businesses] in Richmond mirrored the percentage of minorities in the population as a whole. (950; for original, see Croson 498)

     

    In the context of all of the other, repetitive phrases regarding “no reasonable limits,” the logic of the whole becomes visible: parity or equivalence between the state’s racial categorization and public contract awards, or between racial categorization and law school admissions, would be the moment when one has gone “beyond” the “viable,” when one has clearly exceeded all “reasonable limits.” In other words, “reasonable” affirmative action must never approach an equalization of opportunities between and among racial categories. What will remain absolutely unthinkable, unreasonable, and without any “viable” stopping point or limit would be a world in which an X percent statewide African-American population would yield an X percent African-American entering class at the University of Texas Law School.

     

    This is, then, one of the crucial decipherings for the term “quota”: a system in which affirmative action targets might produce equal opportunities. It is as simple as that. (Conversations about “merit,” therefore, are merely code for continued white supremacy; as Richard Delgado, through the fictional professor “Rodrigo,” writes: “The first problem I have with the idea of merit has to do with its majoritarian quality…. Merit is what the victors impose” [Delgado 71].) And while it is certainly true that Hopwood in general represents the rhetorical opposite or end of affirmative action (striking down remedies for any but the most egregious, intentional, and local examples of discrimination and exclusion), one should not too quickly presume that one will find a different logic operating elsewhere–in Justice Powell’s decision in Bakke, for example, which Hopwood explicitly seeks to overturn. Powell quite clearly asserts the same logic of “boundlessness’” in his decision:

     

    In the school cases, the States were required by court order to redress the wrongs worked by specific instances of racial discrimination. That goal was far more focused than the remedying of the effects of “societal discrimination,” an amorphous concept of injury that may be ageless in its reach into the past. (Regents 307)

     

    What precisely does Powell imply here by “amorphous” and “ageless”? Earlier in the opinion, he writes:

     

    The clock of our liberties cannot be turned back to 1868…. It is far too late to argue that the guarantee of equal protection to all persons permits the recognition of special wards entitled to a degree of greater protection than that accorded others. “The Fourteenth Amendment is not directed solely against discrimination due to a “two-class theory”–that is, based upon differences between “white” and Negro.” Hernandez, 347 U.S., at 478. (Regents 295)

     

    Powell in essence argues that the Fourteenth Amendment embodies a “two-class theory” that, if it were 1868, might be of relevance for deciding the matter. One hundred and ten years later, however, he asserts that the Fourteenth Amendment has other agendas; somewhere between 1868 and 1978, then, the Fourteenth Amendment was transformed. There was a time limit, he asserts, on strict construction of the Amendment.4 During this period, the mode of interpretation of the Amendment shifted from strict to loose construction, from original intent to new historical needs and exigencies. Powell dates this transition by signaling that something new has taken place “over the last 30 years”–meaning, roughly, 1950 (Regents 293). The implication is that by 1950 it was “too late” for race-based remedies. The fact that Powell here directly alludes in his language to the most famous passage in Brown v. Board of Education (1954) tells us a great deal. Brown had argued that, “we cannot turn the clock back to 1896 when Plessy v. Ferguson was written. We must consider public education in the light of its full development and its present place in American life throughout the Nation” (Brown 492-3). Thus, Brown suggests that Plessy (the notorious “separate yet equal” case) belongs to a historical moment, and Powell does much the same, but to reverse effect: the project of Brown, he concludes, has made race-based affirmative action an impossibility. Affirmative action at the University of California is thus more like Plessy than Brown, according to Powell.

     

    The effects of an “ageless” remedy for social discrimination are multiple, according to Powell. “Gender-based distinctions,” for example, “might become part of affirmative action,” although, as Powell writes, “gender-based classifications do not share” the “lengthy and tragic history” of race-based classifications (Regents 303). More troubling, he indicates, is that while gender involves only “two possible classifications,” the matter of “racial and ethnic preferences presents far more complex and intractable problems than gender-based classifications” (303):

     

    The white “majority” itself is composed of various minority groups, most of which can lay claim to a history of prior discrimination at the hands of the State and private individuals. Not all of these groups can receive preferential treatment and corresponding judicial tolerance of distinctions drawn in terms of race and nationality, for then the only “majority” left would be a new minority of white Anglo-Saxon Protestants. (Regents 295-6)

     

    Thus, the hinge for Powell’s determination of that which is too unbounded for consideration in matters of affirmative action is precisely that moment when whiteness would no longer constitute a majority. In other words, affirmative action, for Powell, is a “majority” solution to the problem of minorities that can operate only to the limit of the maintenance of majority status for whites. In this way, the limit of affirmative action in Powell’s opinion in Bakke is precisely the same as the limit described in Hopwood, and the one thing that the entire tradition of court decisions regarding affirmative action can never tolerate, therefore, is the disenabling of white privilege and thus the disenabling of “race.”5 Although Ronald Dworkin suggests that the “ultimate goal [of University-based affirmative action] is to lessen not to increase the importance of race in American social and professional life” (Dworkin 294), this most certainly has not turned out to be the case in practice–not since Bakke, at least. In this regard, all liberal scholarly celebrations of the Powell opinion’s “pragmatic accommodation” and “shining virtues” (Post 24, 20) and its “salutary” character of opening up rather than closing debate on affirmative action (Sunstein 118) are misguided. If the Powell opinion settled anything, it was that affirmative action must be accommodated to the presumed views of the “white majority.”

     

    Indeed, there are so many moments of dicta in this regard in Powell’s opinion, separate and distinct from any form of legal argumentation, that it is difficult to read it without being struck by the sheer force of its defense of white privilege. In a moment (lurking in Powell’s footnotes) that interests the distinguished legal scholar Reva Seigel, Powell marshals onto the side of his argument the “outrage” of white people:

     

    All state-imposed classifications that rearrange burdens and benefits on the basis of race are likely to be viewed with deep resentment by the individuals burdened. The denial to innocent persons of equal rights and opportunities may outrage those so deprived and therefore may be perceived to be invidious. These individuals are likely to find little comfort in the notion that the deprivation they are asked to endure is merely the price of membership in the dominant majority and that its imposition is inspired by the supposedly benign purpose of aiding others. One should not lightly dismiss the inherent unfairness of, and the perception of mistreatment that accompanies, a system of allocating benefits and privileges on the basis of skin color and ethnic origin. (Regents 294, n. 34)

     

    One might want to underline the words “merely the price of membership in the dominant majority” in order to underscore the way that Powell takes as a given the continued existence of a “dominant” white majority, and that even an affirmative action that in no way imperils this status might cross the line of “inherent unfairness.” In this sense, affirmative action theory as embedded in the Powell opinion and its many later judicial and scholarly commentaries begins from the assumption that affirmative action may only set as its goal a minimal sort of tokenism. Again, one perhaps wants to underline the extra-legal character of this moment: a U.S. Supreme Court justice decides here to speak for the white race rather than on behalf of a legal principle.

     

    And there is still to consider in this regard one more matter buried in the Powell decision that will permit the theorization of affirmative action in a far more explicit way. It should be remembered, of course, that Powell’s opinion in Bakke pleased no one on the court: that Justices Burger, Stewart, Rehnquist, and Stevens affirmed the overturning of the University of California affirmative action program but wrote a combined dissent to Powell; and that Justices White, Brennan, Marshall, and Blackmun accepted Powell’s logic only at its most minimal point, Section V-C, which is one paragraph long and provides no guidance as to how “the competitive consideration of race” might continue (Regents 320). Historically, however, the totality of Powell’s decision has become increasingly important, with large chucks of its entirely solo logic cited in later court decisions.

     

    Justice Powell relied not only on his reading of the Fourteenth Amendment and of Brown v. Board of Education in order to reject California-Davis’s version of affirmative action. He also linked his opinion on several occasions to a network of Supreme Court and other court cases concerning Asian-Americans. Section III-A, for example, which was joined by Justice White and thus perhaps stands firmer than any other part of the decision except for V-C, ends by citing approvingly the language from Hirabayashi v. United States (1942) and Korematsu v. United States (1944):

     

    Racial and ethnic classifications, however, are subject to stringent examination without regard to these additional characteristics {i.e., “discreteness” and “insularity” of the classification}. We declared as much in the first cases explicitly to recognize racial distinctions as suspect:

     

    “Distinctions between citizens solely because of their ancestry are by their very nature odious to a free people whose institutions are founded upon the doctrine of equality.” Hirabayashi, 320 U.S., at 100. “[A]ll legal restrictions which curtail the civil rights of a single racial group are immediately suspect. This is not to say that all such restrictions are unconstitutional. It is to say that courts must subject them to the most rigid scrutiny.” Korematsu, 323 U.S., at 216.

     

    The Court has never questioned the validity of these pronouncements. Racial and ethnic distinctions of any sort are inherently suspect and thus call for the most exacting judicial examination. (Regents 290-91)

     

    These perhaps fine-sounding words appear in cases that leave the blackest mark on the Supreme Court’s record in the twentieth century. Hirabayashi and Korematsu are the Japanese-American Exclusion Order cases; both affirm the Constitutional authority to discriminate and exclude U.S. citizens on the basis of race if “a group of one national extraction may menace that safety more than others” (Hirabayashi 101) and if it is “deemed necessary because of the presence of an unascertained number of disloyal members of the group” (Korematsu 218).

     

    Both cases were reopened through Congressional inquiry shortly after Powell’s decision in Bakke, and the final Congressional Report concluded that the cases had been “overruled in the court of history.”6 Yet, of course, the cases stood as precedent in 1978, just as they stand today. As Reggie Oh and Frank Wu have written, “Korematsu remains controlling case law” (167). The cases constitutionally authorize a two-tier or two-class model of U.S. citizenship, upholding the Exclusion Orders during a time of emergency even as they affirm Asian-American “status as citizens” (Hirabayashi 113-14).

     

    Thus, the question of what Powell has accomplished by yoking his decision in Bakke to these cases is a curious one, and yet one which must be asked because Powell continues along the same lines in Section III-B of the decision. Here, he includes a long footnote that uses the Exclusion Order cases to declare that “no Western state… can claim that it has always treated Japanese and Chinese in a fair and evenhanded manner” in order to demonstrate that an affirmation of general “minority” entitlement will open the door to an unbounded number of groups which might claim discrimination (Regents 297, n. 37l; also 292, 294).

     

    Powell is here operating by complex analogy. When he writes, “This is not to say that all such restrictions are unconstitutional. It is to say that courts must subject them to the most rigid scrutiny,” he suggests that the logic of the state of emergency in Hirabayashi and Korematsu will be applied to California-Davis in order to ascertain whether the State of California’s racial hierarchies justify the emergency measure of quota-based affirmative action. For Powell, of course, California does not meet the test. Thus, the same standard which permits the Japanese concentration camps denies the need for affirmative action. But this is more than the mere application of some clear and determinate standard in two separate cases. By thinking these two instances together as a coherent political strategy, one can conclude that the logic of the limit in Bakke is double: Affirmative action can only proceed so long as it does not disturb white privilege, while at the same time the Constitutional protection of raceless citizenship extends also only to the point where white privilege senses its disturbance. The Supreme Court, then, has clarified the matter of racial politics in the following way: the only race that always counts (or matters) is the white race. All other races are counted (that is, enumerated and taken account of) flexibly, and this depends entirely on whether such counting is seen as a furtherance or hindrance to white majoritarian rule.

     

    Hirabayashi and Korematsu are by any measure highly exceptional cases, but such exceptions, as Carl Schmitt argues, reveal the precise location of “sovereignty”: “Sovereign is he who decides on the exception” (Schmitt 5). “What characterizes an exception is principally unlimited authority, which means the suspension of the entire existing order,” and therefore “the exception reveals most clearly the essence of the state’s authority” (Schmitt 12, 13). Exceptions to Constitutional norms, then, are not precisely exceptional:

     

    The rule proves nothing; the exception proves everything: It confirms not only the rule but also its existence, which derives only from the exception. (Schmitt 15)

     

    It is only in the exception that one can see clearly the grounding of the norm. In this case, legal racelessness, legal color-blindness, is premised, grounded, and founded upon a bedrock of Constitutional white privilege, of white supremacy. The law of white supremacy “is not wholly beyond the limits of the Constitution and is not to be condemned merely because in other and in most circumstances racial distinctions are irrelevant” (Hirabayashi 101). Powell’s founding of all future affirmative action theory on the base of Hirabayashi and Korematsu thus assures theoretically that affirmative action must content itself with results far below those that would permit the equalization of racial opportunities in the United States. The body of affirmative action decisions in the U.S. since 1978 are coextensive with the entire history of state-based and state-sponsored racial hierarchies and exclusions. (From a related perspective, as Oh and Wu suggest, the affirmative action decision Adarand Constructors v. Pena (1995) explicitly reinforces the logic of Korematsu and lays the groundwork for a future related race-emergency decision [182]).

     

    One sees the results of Powell throughout the country, in institutions that claim to be strongly operating under the principles of affirmative action. At Michigan State University, for example, where Michaelsen teaches, the official affirmative action goals of colleges and departments are set far below general population distributions and are instead keyed to a concept of market “availability” of potential faculty. In addition, in setting unit goals all “minorities” are lumped together; thus, at a time when the national minority population officially nears 30% and rapidly heads toward 50%, the total target for the Department of English is 10.6% minority composition (or six out of approximately fifty faculty). The implications are serious, as the University’s Affirmative Action Officer reports: once these minimal targets are met, no University-level support need be offered in terms of the hiring of additional minority faculty members. “The test is whether there is underutilization,” according to the UAAO. Since the English Department has two American Indian faculty members, one Asian/Pacific Islander, and two Black faculty members, no “unit hiring goal” is set in terms of Hispanic faculty, for example, even though the Department has no Chicano/Latino faculty members. There are, in essence, too many other minorities already in place, and there currently is 1.6% “over-utilization” of minority faculty positions in the Department from the University’s perspective. Indeed, the Department has been officially notified that it has no “hiring goal” at all at the present time as far as racial minorities are concerned. In this game, no unit can easily or even reasonably manage to achieve parity with larger social demographics, and “minorities” are condemned to super-minority or “minority-minority” status.7

     

    None of this is surprising in the wake of Bakke, and MSU in this regard is neither better nor worse than its peer institutions. Everything in the case law concerning affirmative action would steer an institution in this direction. For example, in Fullilove v. Klutznick (1980), a case that considered the Public Works Employment Act of 1977, the Supreme Court found that a 10% set-aside for federally funded contracts was constitutional, while in the Croson decision, which was cited at the crucial ideological moment in Hopwood, the court threw out a 30% set-aside instituted by a major U.S. city (a city, by the way, that claimed at the time a 50% minority population). The Supreme Court produced a highly contorted logic in Croson in order to reach the conclusion that one form of set-aside was constitutional and the other not. Justice O’Connor, writing the majority opinion, argued, for example, that the U.S. Congress had stronger powers in regard to determining set-asides and noted that the Thirteenth and Fourteenth Amendments themselves had limited the powers of states to undertake their own initiatives and enlarged those of the U.S. Congress (City of Richmond 490). Thus, in part, Richmond’s plan was overturned because it represented local rather than federal affirmative action.

     

    But it would be difficult not to see in these two opinions that the Supreme Court has determined that affirmative action has an appropriate target goal, and that it is closer to 10% inclusion than it is to 30%. Justice O’Connor writes tellingly in Croson: “the 30% quota cannot be said to be narrowly tailored to any goal, except perhaps outright racial balancing” (City of Richmond 507). This is precisely the heart of the matter: 10% tokenism is acceptable to the Supreme Court, while 30% “racial balancing” is not (even though “racial balancing,” or attention to affirmative action with regard to population, would go far further than 30%). Therefore, when one finds that a Research 1 institution such as Michigan State has adopted a roughly 10% plan, it is clear that the University seeks to position itself in relation to the case law in a space where its policy cannot easily be contravened. In fact, it is in Croson that the logic of “availability” is laid down as law in the clearest fashion. But the results of this “lowballing” of affirmative action targets are also perfectly clear.

     

    One related area in which Croson completely overturned Fullilove, rather than distorted it, concerns the matter of statistical analysis. Fullilove had cited approvingly a House Committee on Small Business report that had argued that statistical disparities constituted prima facie evidence of discrimination:

     

    While minority persons comprise about 16 percent of the Nation’s population, of the 13 million businesses in the United States, only 382,000, or approximately 3.0 percent, are owned by minority individuals. The most recent data from the Department of Commerce also indicates that the gross receipts of all businesses in this country totals about $2,540.8 billion, and of this amount only $16.6 billion, or about 0.65 percent was realized by minority business concerns.

     

    These statistics are not the result of random chance. The presumption most be made that past discriminatory systems have resulted in present economic inequities. (qtd. in Fullilove 465)

     

    And the Court concludes on this point: “we are satisfied that Congress had abundant historical basis from which it could conclude that traditional procurement practices, when applied to minority businesses, could perpetuate the effects of prior discrimination” (Fullilove 478).

     

    Croson‘s rejection of this sort of statistical evaluation is sweeping: “But where special qualifications are necessary, the relevant statistical pool for purposes of demonstrating discriminatory exclusion must be the number of minorities qualified to undertake the particular task” (Croson 501-02). “Blacks may be disproportionately attracted to industries other than construction,” the Court argues (Croson 503). And the court describes as “non-racial factors” such matters as “deficiencies in working capital, inability to meet bonding requirements, unfamiliarity with bidding procedures, and disability caused by an inadequate track record” (Croson 498-99). Thus, according to Croson, affirmative action begins and ends with things as they are in the present moment. The fact that in the city of Richmond, with a minority population base of 50%, 0.67% of the city’s recent contracts had been awarded to minority firms belongs to a network of “inherently unmeasurable claims of past wrongs” (Croson 506). The Supreme Court in the area of affirmative action has long been and has continued to be the protector, then, of white privilege, accepting or rejecting various affirmative action plans and evidence of discrimination entirely on the basis of whether percentage hiring/contracting goals for such programs are kept to a bare minimum. Every time the Supreme Court invokes its logic of “unboundedness,” therefore, the dirty secret is that the Court means that a particular program has come too close to racial redress. At times, the Court completely strips away its own masking of this agenda, as in Croson, in which a 10% set-aside is declared “flexible,” while a 30% set-aside is deemed a “quota.” Here, the Court declares its preference for not calculating discrimination and the limit of deracialization, while more typically (and even in Croson) the court rhetorically has rested on the logic of rejection of any “amorphous claim” for a program “of any size or duration” (Croson 499, 505).

     

    The absolute disaster of attempting to build an affirmative action program atop the logic of Powell and the Supreme Court decisions that follow is clear, then, but for one exception. As is well known, Powell often is celebrated (even by his detractors) for Section IV of the opinion, in which he affirms the “benefits that flow from an ethnically diverse student body” and the first amendment “freedom of the university” (Regents 306, 312). As is also well known, this limited defense of affirmative action has become the crucial matter in all subsequent affirmative action discussion.

     

    Indeed, the summary judgment issued in Gratz v. Bollinger (2000), which ruled that the University of Michigan’s undergraduate affirmative action program (at least in its most recent incarnation) is constitutional, turns on the question of diversity, and here one should first note the language that the Court reiterates from Plaintiffs’ arguments:

     

    Plaintiffs have presented no argument or evidence rebutting the University Defendants’ assertion that a racially and ethnically diverse student body gives rise to educational benefits for both minority and non-minority students. In fact, during oral argument, counsel for Plaintiffs indicated his willingness to assume, for purposes of these motions, that diversity in institutional settings of higher education is “good, important, and valuable.” Counsel for Plaintiffs, however, contends that “good, important, and valuable” is not enough, and that the diversity rationale is too amorphous and ill-defined, and “too limitless, timeless, and scopeless,” to rise to the level of a compelling interest. According to counsel for Plaintiffs, the University’s diversity rationale has “no logical stopping point” but rather is a “permanent regime” in direct conflict with strict scrutiny standards. (Gratz 25)

     

    It is here that something novel perhaps enters the case law of affirmative action: an affirmation of that which is unlimited, rather than minimal, in Judge Duggan’s rejection of Plaintiff’s argument. Already one can note some guarded celebration in liberal quarters regarding the Gratz affirmation of affirmative action, but Gratz comes with important and barbed qualifiers in its unwillingness to determine the limit of affirmative action. First, “in other contexts, i.e. the construction industry context” (which historically has been another important site for affirmative action law), a diversity law rationale may well be “too amorphous and ill-defined” (Gratz 25). Thus, what Powell has left as affirmative action’s only leg to stand on will function only in an educational context, with its specialized needs in terms of diversity.

     

    Second, Gratz precisely reflects Powell’s opinion in Bakke (and the limiting logic of the combined Fullilove and Croson decisions) in its rejection of quotas. Most dramatically, Gratz signals its agreement with the Supreme Court in specifying some indistinct numerical limit to affirmative action:

     

    A university’s interest in achieving the educational benefits that flow from a diverse student body does not justify an admissions program designed to admit a predetermined number or proportion of minority students. Instead, a university must carefully design its system to fall between these two competing ends of the spectrum, i.e., between a system that completely fails to achieve a meaningful level of diversity, under which the benefits associated with a diverse student body will never be realized, and a rigid quota system, which is clearly unconstitutional under Justice Powell’s opinion in Bakke. (Gratz 31-2)

     

    Thus, “the fact that the University cannot articulate a set number or percentage of minority students that would constitute the requisite level of diversity” poses no problem for Judge Duggan, because the “requisite level” is already limited by Bakke (Gratz 25).

     

    Gratz, read carefully, thus affirms only that proper affirmative action falls somewhere between total “failure” to diversify and quotas (or “racial balancing”). It remains balanced precariously between, roughly, the 10% and 30% continuum, and likely closer to the former than the latter, given the earlier case law.

     

    What Gratz does affirm turns entirely and merely, then, on “diversity,” and Judge Duggan’s decision includes several pages of reference to Patricia Y. Gurin’s contribution to a very large document prepared by the University of Michigan toward its defense, entitled, “The Compelling Need for Diversity in Higher Education.” Though a number of more famous commentators weigh in with pages on the history and results of racism and affirmative action (Derek Bok, Eric Foner, and the like), it is clear that the most interesting part of the document is Gurin’s, and her claim is that she has generated the first quantified results of the benefits of diversity.

     

    Duggan writes: “The University Defendants have presented this Court with solid evidence regarding the educational benefits that flow from a racially and ethnically diverse student body” and it is quite likely that Gurin’s findings as well as similar sorts of future studies will now become part of the next phase of defense of university-based affirmative action programs (Gratz 21). It is thus worth pondering the implications of Gurin’s argument, in order to understand whether affirmative action theory finally has broken through the barrier of white privilege or instead has recapitulated it in some new but entirely recognizable form.

     

    Gurin’s text refers to an enormous body of literature on psychological development in order to advance a complex thesis whose main features can be boiled down to the following:

     

    • College students are still psychologically unformed in terms of their positioning in a “pre-reflective stage of judgment” (Gurin, “Theoretical” 5);

     

    • Late adolescent and early adult experiences, when they are discontinuous enough from the home environment and complex enough to offer new ideas and possibilities, can be critical sources of development. (“Theoretical” 2)

     

    College students, therefore, in order to engage in “deep thinking” and in order generally to “help… democracy thrive” through reflexive acts of citizenship, must be thrown into a college environment that is sufficiently racially and culturally different from the one they have occupied until age eighteen (“Theoretical” 4, 6). The particular categories of useful outcomes include such matters as “growth in active thinking processes,” “engagement and motivation” concerning learning and thinking, as well as general “citizenship engagement,” “racial/cultural engagement,” and recognition of the “compatibility of differences” in modern society (Gurin, “Studies” 4).

     

    Several levels of analysis are necessary to understand the implications of these arguments, but first one should acknowledge that Gurin’s text is attempting to salvage affirmative action within the set of highly narrow constraints imposed by the Supreme Court’s previous decisions. Her general goals in this regard often are admirable, including the “disrupt[ion]” of a “pattern” of post-college “segregation,” and here it is possible to square her goals with those of an affirmative action of deracialization (Gurin, “Empirical” 2). Gurin’s defense can never go far enough, however, given the discursive constraints imposed on the defense in Gratz, and major portions of the structure of the argument prove problematic on closer examination.

     

    First, to the extent that a dynamic shift or change in racial/cultural milieu for college-age students is necessary for the achievement of important social objectives, such as thinking itself, the argument is weakened by the fact that the universally positive social benefits she cites are only possible, in the first place, within a society that is segregated. In other words, if the U.S. were not segregated in the first place–if college students had already been brought up in a diverse environment–then no such outcomes would be possible. By defining and valuing critical thinking in this way, the argument could be interpreted as implicitly supporting the maintenance of a geographically racialized United States.

     

    Second, to the extent that one of the key outcomes is greater “knowledge and awareness” of racial/cultural difference, the argument values “an increasingly heterogeneous and complex society” (“Studies” 4; “Theoretical” 6). “It is discourse over conflict, not unanimity, that helps democracy thrive” (“Theoretical” 6). Rather than defending affirmative action as anti-racialist practice, as deracialization, therefore, the argument subtly promotes difference-construction and difference-building, in order to continue to exploit such differences for intellectual purposes. Here one would need to confront the text’s fibrillation when using the terms “race” and “culture”–a fibrillation that is perhaps symptomatic, since the two are notoriously difficult to disentangle analytically. As Michaelsen has argued elsewhere at length, there is no benign concept of “culture” or “cultural difference” that might be separated from “race” and “racial difference.” The ideas of cultural difference and cultural pluralism in this century simply replace “race” in anthropological thought, and the discourse of “culture” is therefore a product of racial thought. To the extent that there are lived experiences of cultural difference in the United States, they remain tied necessarily to the heritage of race violence and exclusion in such a way as to always function analogously when made to operate politically.

     

    Finally, one should note that the diversity argument in Gurin’s text primarily and perhaps fundamentally emphasizes the benefits that accrue to white student populations (“Empirical” 4). In contradistinction, “peer interaction must be considered in more complex ways for African American students. These findings suggest the supportive function of group identity for African American students, and the potentially positive effects of having sufficient numbers of same-race peers” (“Empirical” 5). Gurin believes that difference benefits everyone, intellectually and democratically, although she also argues that a substantially African-American college environment for African-American students may well benefit them in precisely the same ways that a diverse environment benefits whites. In other words, the world of education need not be reformed in the manner of the University of Michigan, unless the needs of whites constitute the primary agenda. For example, benefit for African-Americans would accrue equally well in a world of primarily black colleges, with all African-Americans attending them rather than historically white institutions. In this way, the University of Michigan’s defense of its affirmative action policy is continuous with all of the affirmative action decisions in arguing from the position of white needs.

     

    But the privileging of white benefit in the argument should come as no surprise to those who know the Wygant decision, which explicitly reversed any form of affirmative action on the basis of a “role model” theory.8 In other words, any argument for affirmative action that claims that historically racialized students will benefit from classrooms run by similarly racialized teachers is struck down in Wygant as a reintroduction of Plessy‘s exclusionary logic:

     

    Carried to its logical extreme, the idea that black students are better off with black teachers could lead to the very system the Court rejected in Brown v. Board of Education. (Wygant 276)

     

    After Wygant, then, the only avenue left to pursue is precisely the one that Gurin’s text takes up: that whites benefit from teachers and peers of color. In this way, the University of Michigan’s defense of its affirmative action policy is continuous with all of the affirmative action decisions in arguing from the position of white needs.

     

    To be perfectly clear here: this argument does not reject the very limited inroads that have been made in the wake of Bakke and that may come if Gratz remains the law of the land (increasingly unlikely as this may be, given more recent developments).9 It is true, however, that the thinking that underlies this tradition is one that has a coherent relationship to the logic of Hopwood and thus to the logic of anti-affirmative action. The coherence takes place around the determination of the limit of affirmative action as a permanent system of affirming and supporting hierarchical racial/cultural difference rather than a project of deracialization. Deracialization’s promise cannot be realized until a moment when the historic “races” that live and work in the United States find themselves with truly equal opportunities all the way down, in a pattern of economic well-being and career prestige that matches population statistics. One clear roadblock to deracialization is a hundreds-of-years-old pattern of general economic and social inequality amongst the historic “races.” The disruption of the pattern depends, minimally, not on the achievements of diversity but upon the ending of deep structural inequalities.

     

    Affirmative action explicitly has separated itself from this goal after Bakke, and the entire line of post-Bakke court decisions operate as one.10 These decisions, in fact, take their place as merely part of a whole landscape of history and policy–including the colonization and reservationization of Native America, African-American slavery, the Treaty of Guadalupe Hidalgo, Jim Crow, the Chinese Exclusion Act and its reiterations, the WWII concentration camps for Japanese Americans, Manning Marable’s formulation of capitalism’s underdevelopment of black America, and in general what Charles Mills calls “the racial contract”–in which minority citizenship in the United States remains constantly at risk or even impossible to inaugurate. As it was in 1868 so it remains in the twenty-first century, when the “savage inequalities” of racialization, to borrow Jonathan Kozol’s phrase, are as much on evidence as they were one hundred and thirty five years ago.11

     

    One possible redefinition, then, of affirmative action that might take us beyond a mere reiteration of the past (and this is precisely the one that none of the various courts have taken seriously) is as follows: affirmative action should be the white race’s expenditure without reserve of its privilege. Phrasing the matter in this way, affirmative action is about deracialization and the disempowerment of a whiteness that will remain in place for as long as there are income, savings, and property-holding discrepancies between the historic races. Affirmative action, then, must become a special form of what is called “race traitorism”–and not an individuated, voluntarist one (as one finds in the work of Mills, for example), but a white-state-based traitorism. The legal arguments for a Constitutionally based dismantling of white property have been carefully and compellingly assembled in the 1990s by scholars such as Ronald J. Fiscus, Cheryl I. Harris, and Barbara J. Flagg, and this body of work is of great historico-theoretical importance. One must underline, however, that this dismantling or dissolving of that whole social construct called “race” need not and should not become anything affirmative at all–such as, most clearly, an affirmation of diversity. It is a spending that does not explicitly produce new works, does not build anything, does not begin from the idea of “humanity” or “diversity” in order to divest itself of privilege. Such affirmative action does not have any concept in advance of “who” will appear at the limit of such expenditure. In this sense, affirmative action is neither action, in the sense of a positive project or a building up of something, nor, strictly, affirmative of anything, including constitutionalism itself. Indeed, such a version of affirmative action would take one necessarily and theoretically to the limits of U.S. constitutionalism and sovereignty in order to confront its structurally embedded ruling class in the form of, for example, a conception of citizenship as a work or a labor that is judged or determined in terms of its completeness. (In terms of the Japanese exclusion act cases, it was precisely this citizen-structure that permitted the ascription of the Japanese as foreign nationals, who had somehow not yet worked themselves into the figure of “Americans.” The question of the truth of matters of Americanization is not at stake here, but merely the bare politico-social scientific structure known as the “citizen.”) This is simply to say that rather than a process of reforming the U.S. Constitution (making it live up to its best intentions), affirmative action at its limit necessarily amounts to a dismembering of constitutionalism, to a “politics” at the edge of what Schmitt has called “the concept of the political” and toward, for example, what Derrida has briefly described as “the State as it ought to be–as a counter-institution, necessary for opposing those institutions that represent particular interests and properties” (Derrida and Ferraris 51). Another way to say the preceding would begin with Schmitt’s definition of sovereignty as the exception and continue with Benjamin’s eighth thesis on the philosophy of history, Agamben’s Homo Sacer (1995), and Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri’s Empire (2000), all of which suggest in their different ways that the exception has become the “rule” and that the modern state is characterized by a permanent state of exception (Agamben, Homo Sacer 12; Hardt and Negri 17-18). Such thought allows us to conclude that, if sovereignty is the right to declare the exception, then the limit of such sovereignty would be the exception to the exception.12 Transformative affirmative action therefore will appear only at the limit of the present juridical order (at the limit of white supremacy).

     

    This maximal form of affirmative action is entirely faithful to our understanding of the Marxist project in general, which, as Shershow suggests elsewhere, inaugurates a process of calculation in order to end the regime of calculation (Shershow 491). Affirmative action, if it is to be anything, will have to calculate itself to the limits of its calculability–to the limit at which the calculation and counting of a white privileged majority would have no meaning. The promise of affirmative action will thus remain of interest to political progressives strictly as a project that seeks to remove “race” as a mode through which the state may distinguish and exclude.

     

    Affirmative action does not, however, take us to the limit of all forms of exclusivity. For example, because affirmative action begins and ends with the attempt to rationally allocate scarce resources (contracts, tenure-track jobs, graduate student fellowships, and the like), affirmative action remains complicit with the construction of social and economic classes. One certainly could imagine a future world in which the historic races no longer have meaning, yet in which the opportunity to attend an Ivy League university instead of a community college continues to be denied to some citizens. And even a policy of guaranteed higher education for all might not in itself prevent some educations from being (to borrow from George Orwell) “more equal than others.” Though “race” is an analytically distinct category from “class,” their relationship remains overdetermined, and the attempt to address one inevitably opens out onto the other (and onto still other domains of inequity, such as gender, sexuality, and the like). In the next section of this essay, we specifically take up another hotly debated policy matter of recent years in order to explore the economic implications of post-structuralist politics.

     

    2. Towards a Theory of Welfare without Exclusion

     

    On the subject of welfare, candidates Bush and Gore in the last presidential campaign didn’t disagree even in the measured and ambiguous way that they did on the subject of affirmative action. Rather, both candidates hailed as a significant achievement the Personal Responsibility and Work Opportunity Reconciliation Act passed by Congress and signed by President Bill Clinton in 1996, an act that ended the very idea of a federal entitlement to subsistence benefits and set strict new limits on the amount of time a family could receive cash relief. In fact, today it can easily seem as though practically everyone, on all sides of the political spectrum, agrees that the constellation of programs known loosely as “welfare”–especially the Aid for Families with Dependent Children (AFDC)–had for a long time been promoting a so-called “dependence” on the part of the poor.13 This apparent political consensus about welfare has somehow overcome what from another perspective might seem a broad and fundamental ideological opposition. In this apparent opposition, one side emphasizes a kind of altruism or mutual obligation (“we must help those less fortunate than ourselves”), while the other side emphasizes a kind of possessive individualism or self-reliance (“look out for number one”; “charity begins at home”). Michael B. Katz, author of a history of welfare policy in the United States, summarizes the enduring American debate about welfare in almost exactly such terms: one side asks “what do we owe each other, not simply as individuals, but as a community or nation?” while the other side seeks to strengthen an “open market in which responsible individuals [can] carve out their success or accept the consequences of their failure” (Katz 332-3). The first of these positions is typically thought of as liberal or Left, the second as conservative or Right. We want to argue, however, that the prevailing consensus about welfare is not simply the triumph of the conservative position, but rather a kind of internal collapse of the opposition itself, something that takes place at the conjunction of questions of common being and the economic calculus.

     

    The thought of the Left seems to focus on the first of these terms, grounding our social obligation in what Michael Walzer, for example, calls our “membership” in a particular community, a particular commonality of being. For Walzer, “the members of a political community owe to one another… the communal provision of security and welfare” (Walzer 63). The members of a community provide for one another, and they do so precisely on the basis of their membership: the immanent common being they share with other members.14 This is a vision of communal inclusion founded, in the most basic sense, on an exclusion, for members of a community owe one another, as Walzer puts it, “mutual provision of all those things for the sake of which they have separated themselves from mankind as a whole” (65). And just as the communal membership requires separation from and exclusion of other social subjects, so it must involve an act of economic calculation. In other words, when we ask, to whom are we obligated and why?, we must then also ask, how much do we owe one another? how much can we afford to give? For further example, the liberal economist Robert M. Solow, in his Tanner lectures at Princeton University in 1998, begins by denouncing the so-called “welfare-reform” bill of 1996 but nevertheless advocates a model of welfare that (citing Amy Gutmann’s introductory summary) “is guided by two explicit aims: one, to increase self-reliance among those citizens who are now on welfare, and two, to decrease the need for altruism among those citizens who now pay for welfare” (viii). Altruism itself, Solow concludes, “is scarce; there is never enough to go around” (3). In such a model, social policies, even of the most “liberal” or “progressive” kind, are literally constituted by acts of calculation, for not only material resources but sociality itself is grasped as being in short supply.

     

    Correspondingly, the conservative or right-wing approach to social welfare, however much it seems to emphasize individual responsibility and self-reliance instead of altruism or mutual obligation, does not simply turn the other position inside-out to suggest that we owe one another nothing. On the contrary, conservative approaches to welfare envision an even more complex and subtle network of mutual obligation.15 In this case, the connection of common being and the economic calculus is even more fundamental, since what is believed most to unite us is our status as economic subjects of a particular kind, whose behavior is the aggregate product of a balance of needs and exertions, and who must accordingly be constantly subjected to the goad of subsistence and survival. The basic conservative position can thus be schematically summarized like this: poverty occurs when individuals are either unable or unwilling to work. When people are truly unable to work because of factors beyond their control, such as a crippling disability, they are “deserving” of economic support, and the community is obligated to give it. But more often, people are merely unwilling to work, either because of some moral weakness such as drug addiction or because they are just plain lazy. In this case, it is argued, to relieve their poverty merely rewards and encourages their moral failure and makes them dependent on what more extreme ideologues like to call the “public trough.”16 Therefore, any system of organized charity or welfare always tends to foster rather than alleviate poverty; our moral obligation to prevent “undeserving” objects from receiving relief is, if anything, even greater than our original obligation to give.

     

    In recent years, this argument has been expounded at length by an interrelated group of social scientists and historians, including, among others, Martin Anderson, George Gilder, Gertrude Himmelfarb, Lawrence M. Mead, Charles Murray, and Marvin Olasky.17 (The latter also coined the slogan “compassionate conservatism” on which George W. Bush successfully campaigned for president in 2000, a slogan that in this context is revealed as referring specifically to the thesis just summarized by denoting an alleged mode of proper compassion characterized by its refusal to give to the “undeserving” poor. We will only cite one brief example, since all these writers make essentially the same argument and often cross-reference one another. Murray, in his introductory remarks to one of Olasky’s books, argues that even if our society went far beyond all previous models of welfare relief and literally “put everyone above the poverty line with a check,” this would simply mean that “families that once managed to stay above the poverty line through their own labor” would begin “to take it a little easier,” producing “significant reductions in work effort.” Therefore, to provide welfare in the form of cash relief, Murray asserts, “is an efficient way to increase the size of the underclass, not reduce it” (Murray, “Preface” xiii-xiv).

     

    To compare these apparently opposed visions of Left and Right is to see clearly how they merely propose what might be called negative and positive versions of the same argument: the Right emphasizes how a kind of naked and impersonal economic coercion forces people to be self-reliant, and the Left emphasizes, instead, helping people to help themselves… to be self-reliant. As Judith N. Shklar suggests,

     

    What is really astonishing is the degree of agreement between these critics and defenders of welfare. Independence, exchanging the welfare check for a paycheck, is what both sides hope for. All want to make good citizens of the “underclass” by getting them a job and making them, too, earning members of society. (96)18

     

    And for either Left or Right, the seemingly inevitable claims of common being, however such being is understood, always require an exclusion: we will provide for our own, we will not relieve the “undeserving” poor, and so on. And such observations also further indicate how, for Right and Left alike, scarcity itself remains the one utterly irreducible assumption, and therefore the economic calculus remains the one essential and forever-unfinished operation of all social thought. It is here that one rediscovers, on the axis of class, a version of the same formula we previously uncovered on the axis of race. Just as the prevailing logic of affirmation action can never go past the point where white privilege senses its disturbance, so the prevailing logic of welfare can never relieve poverty all the way down, to the point where economic privilege itself might be threatened. Here, conventional liberal or conservative approaches to the question of poverty converge in a kind of aporia, an argument whose fatal circularity is hidden in plain sight–precisely because its fundamental underlying assumption both addresses and itself appears as what might be called “nature,” the ultimate otherness of material Necessity itself. People require the goad of subsistence, it is argued, in order to keep them working. And they must be kept working in order to subsist. Need keeps us working and work overcomes our need. But this means that the one absolute assumed in every version of this thought, subsistence itself, is in effect something that cannot and must not be guaranteed. Our daily victory over scarcity is the condition of our very existence and also something that cannot be ensured in some political or social sense as an expectation or a right. Subsistence itself must always be both present and absent; for only the threat of its absence produces its presence. Or, to phrase this ruinous argument in its most absolutely paradoxical form: in order to overcome scarcity we must never overcome scarcity.

     

    This paradoxical and self-defeating logic, we go on to argue, underlies a pair of interrelated Supreme Court decisions that were issued about thirty years ago, but whose primary themes continue to figure centrally in contemporary debates about welfare. At the time of the first of these decisions, Shapiro v. Thompson (1969), the Warren Court–now approaching its end and already, of course, celebrated for its innovative decisions in civil rights–had seemed to some observers to be on the brink of declaring a constitutional “right” to economic subsistence, a hope that was, however, effectively dashed the following year with Dandridge v. Williams (1970).19 In Shapiro, the Court struck down durational residency requirements in Connecticut and several other states, laws that required a needy family to establish residence in a state for one full year before becoming eligible for welfare benefits. In briefs submitted to the Court on both sides of the case, it was acknowledged that such policies descend from the so-called “poor laws” of Elizabethan England and early colonial America, laws that prohibited indigent persons from leaving their own parish and established draconian penalties for vagrancy.20 For example, Robert K. Killian and Francis J. MacGregor, attorneys general of Connecticut, acknowledge in their appellant’s brief that the central question of the case is

     

    whether unlimited migration of those poor who do not want to enter the labor market should be allowed, with the end result that Connecticut’s liberal program would be curtailed because of this additional tax bite, or whether Connecticut should set up a reasonable residence requirement that protected… those poor resident applicants, who in the past, had contributed to the economy. (LBA 68: 10)

     

    In other words, the appellants argue that durational residency requirements are necessary to prevent indigents migrating to a state with relatively higher benefits and hence putting pressure on that state’s welfare budget.

     

    The issues in this case thus locate themselves precisely at the fatal intersection of common being and the economic calculus, for there would be no dispute at all if there were not different levels of welfare benefit in different American states. In effect, three different levels of identity are at issue in this question: citizenship in a particular state, citizenship in the United States, and membership in a common humanity–this latter, in the discourse of this case, explicitly understood as a mode of being characterized by particular needs and a particular degree of willingness to work for the sake of the community (or, as the appellants put it, to “contribute to the economy”). The appellants defend residency requirements in the name of that social calculation which all modes of common being seemingly make necessary and by emphasizing the most particular mode of identity or common being at issue. Killian and MacGregor concede that the state of Connecticut was, in its laws, discriminating “against potential applicants [for welfare], who come into the state… to get on the welfare rolls, and who would not come into the state if there were no liberal welfare benefits” (LBA 68: 24); but stipulate that such discrimination is not “racially aimed” (LBA 68: 7) and is therefore not a “suspect” classification. Instead, the classification is made only as part of a necessary process of quantitative provision: that is, because “there is a practical limit to the amount of tax dollars that can be raised” to provide for the “members” of the state of Connecticut (LBA 68: 37). Correspondingly, another advocate for the appellants, Lorna Lawhead Williams of Iowa, defended her state’s similar welfare residency laws during oral arguments as something made necessary by the attempt to balance individual and communal needs. Williams claimed that the distinction between residents and nonresidents is reasonable

     

    because it affords the ones who want to have a sort of permanency in that community and have the professionally hired counselors come into their homes and help them on their family problems…. They help them. They consult with them. They have a friend in the community, besides just bread and butter money. (LBA 68: 339)

     

    In this argument, it is made particularly clear how one must allegedly exclude in order to include and must discriminate against outsiders in order to maintain the intimacy of the community itself.

     

    Against such claims, Archibald Cox, representing the appellees, moved the argument back towards broader modes of identity and common being. He successfully convinced a majority of the court that welfare residency requirements, precisely in their intended protection of the integrity of individual state borders and budgets, infringed on a constitutionally protected liberty: the right to travel. “Our constitutional law,” Cox writes in his brief for the case, “recognizes the basic human right to geographic mobility,” a liberty that “was a key element in our development as a free people” (LBA 68: 100). (Cox even points out, in a telling historical detail, that the Articles of Confederation except “paupers and vagabonds” from what they otherwise guaranteed to be “free ingress and regress to and from any other State,” but that this exception was omitted in Article IV, Section 2 of the U.S. Constitution, which declares that “the Citizens of each State shall be entitled to all the Privileges and Immunities of Citizens in the several States” [LBA 68: 100].) Cox also argues eloquently that the classification at issue in this case

     

    is made in relation to the bare essentials of life, material and spiritual. Public assistance is the last resource of those unable to support themselves…. For those who cannot satisfy the one-year-residence rule, the classification means deprivation of shelter, food, and clothing. When public assistance is withheld, the entire quality of life–sometimes even life itself–is placed in jeopardy. (LBA 68: 92)

     

    In effect, Cox’s argument evokes a common human identity defined this time not by its duties and responsibilities but by its brute material needs. Thus, as he said in oral arguments, the policies in question discriminate against “those who exercise the fundamental liberty of moving to a new residence in pursuit of better opportunities, better life, or what else they consider to be an advantage.” Such a discrimination, he argued strongly, “is invidious in the same sense that discrimination on grounds of race or religion is invidious” (LBA 68: 390). Cox thus tried to associate a discrimination against short-time residents with the kind of racial categories already recognized as “suspect” classifications and therefore requiring a state to have “compelling” reasons in order to employ them.

     

    Such arguments prevailed with the majority of the court. In his decision, Justice William Brennan rejected the communitarian language of insiders and outsiders and, echoing Cox’s language of biological necessity, argued that durational requirements merely created

     

    two classes of needy resident families indistinguishable from each other except that one is composed of residents who have resided a year or more, and the second of residents who have resided less than a year, in the jurisdiction. On the basis of this sole difference, the first class is granted, and the second class is denied, welfare aid upon which may depend the ability of the families to obtain the very means to subsist–food, shelter, and other necessities of life…. [The] appellees’ central contention is that the statutory prohibition of benefits to residents of less than a year creates a classification which constitutes an invidious discrimination denying them equal protection of the laws. We agree. (Shapiro 627)

     

    Citing Korematsu v. United States and the established doctrine of “compelling” state interests, Brennan also argues that when welfare applicants move from state to state, even if they are doing so to seek higher welfare benefits, they are “exercising a constitutional right, and any classification which serves to penalize the exercise of that right, unless shown to be necessary to promote a compelling governmental interest, is unconstitutional” (Shapiro 634). For the majority, none of the several reasons proposed as justifications for the state’s interest in welfare residency requirements–such as protecting state budgets or discouraging immigration by indigents–appeared sufficiently compelling.

     

    Shapiro‘s rejection of durational residency tests for welfare would thus seem to be a significant victory for a relatively inclusive vision of welfare rights. But the logic of this case actually conceals a theoretical limitation, at once broad and particular, on the concept of collective provision.21 As we have seen, Cox’s successful argument for the appellees emphasizes that residency requirements infringe a constitutional right to travel and suggests that welfare is different from other state-provided benefits because it addresses fundamental human needs. In several exchanges during oral arguments, however, Cox and the Court seem to indicate a crucial point at which the provision of even such basic necessities can be limited. This limit is never quite spelled out and yet is shadowed by the very reticence with which Cox and the justices avoid spelling it out. This process begins when Cox is in the process of questioning the various rationales that are being used to explain the state’s alleged interest in durational residency requirements. One such argument is the idea that such requirements provide an objective test of residence.22 Cox suggests that “one has to be very careful” about this concept, because

     

    Residence under the Social Security laws means residence–means presence in the state. Living there. Not for temporary purpose. In other words, without the intention of going somewhere else. (LBA 68: 393)

     

    Here, Cox seems at first to say that residence is no different than simple presence, but then immediately begins to limit such a definition. He concedes that residence must not be for a “temporary purpose” and says there must be no intention to leave; yet he pointedly refrains from the more obvious possible formulation: that residency requires a positive intention to stay.The Court, perhaps understandably, wants to know more about precisely what this means:

     

    THE COURT. Suppose he wanted to stay in Massachusetts six months–live as a resident?
    MR. COX: He would then be a resident.
    THE COURT. And live in Florida six months as a resident?
    MR. COX: Well, it would then be–it’s a little hard for me to think of someone doing that and still qualifying for Aid to Dependent Children, Your Honor. The very money spent going back and forth–
    THE COURT: You can’t laugh that proposition off, because that’s a very common thing in America.
    MR. COX: Well, I suggest it isn’t a common thing in relation to the types of people we’re talking about here. (LBA 68: 393)

     

    Let us mark in passing the rather dark irony that surfaces momentarily here in the acknowledgment that a political freedom to travel is not the same thing as a material ability to travel. In 1956, Supreme Court Justice Felix Frankfurter, in a concurring opinion on another case involving issues of wealth and poverty, had cited Anatole France’s ironic praise of the “majestic equality” of a Law that “forbids the rich as well as the poor to sleep under bridges, to beg in the streets, and to steal bread” (Griffin v. Illinois 351 U.S. 12, 15). The Shapirodecision in effect makes the same point in reverse, by affirming how the law permits both rich and poor to spend six months of the year in Florida if they can afford to get there. At this point, however, the Court still wishes to press Cox on this difficult idea of what it means to “live as a resident” in a state:

     

    THE COURT: But how long must he be a resident?
    MR. COX: Such a person under our position, to answer you squarely, such a person under our position would be entitled to aid six months in Massachusetts and six months in Florida….
    THE COURT: That, Mr. Cox, is subject to the right of each state to take a reasonable time to authenticate the bona fide residence in the state, and the “means test,” and the various other things.
    MR. COX: Oh, yes, quite…. The point that I want to emphasize with respect to this test of residence is that one must ask what is it that you are trying to test? I think that it lurks behind that expression…. We are really asking more permanency than being in the state voluntarily with no intention of leaving. And to the extent that something more lurks there, then our answer is simply that requiring the “something more” is itself an arbitrary and capricious classification. (LBA 68: 393-4)

     

    Something “lurks” behind the demand for residency, Cox suggests–his very image seeming, as it were, to evoke the homeless vagrant lurking in the doorways and back alleys of civil life. Cox rejects whatever “lurks behind” this demand for a so-called “permanency” that in some elusive way transcends mere physical presence in the state. This term, Cox seems to imply, is simply a coded expression for something that, in political discourses of early-modern England and America, might have been called a “settled interest,” a minimum level of income or property (the kind of criteria that used to be required, prior to and sometimes after the American Constitution, even for suffrage itself).23 Cox also rejects the idea argued in the Connecticut brief that permanent residents are those who have made an “investment” in the community, pointing out that AFDC is designed in the first place to aid “dependent children,” who can hardly be said to have yet contributed anything to any community anywhere. Moreover, he says, since it is generally impossible to “measure the matter of ‘contribution’ or ‘investment’ in the community… this is really a euphemistic way of expressing… discrimination against strangers, or outsiders” (LBA 68: 396). But the specific citizens discriminated against in this case (by their exclusion from welfare benefits) are already being considered, at least by Cox, as full-fledged residents. Does one then cease to be a stranger and outsider at the very moment of arrival at a given place, provided only that one has no “intention of going somewhere else”? This question is necessarily pertinent in that this whole exchange follows Cox’s rejection of the idea that requiring a one-year stay would provide the state with an “objective” test to determine whether or not an individual was a genuine, bona fide resident.

     

    But even as Cox systematically rejects all these related ideas of permanency and economic interest as appropriate criteria for welfare eligibility, he still accepts that there is some basic status that can be called residency. In fact, he is constrained to do so, for it is the heart of his argument–as Justice Brennan restates in the passage from the majority decision cited above–that durational welfare requirements do not merely distinguish between insiders and outsiders, residents and nonresidents, but instead between two classes of resident. But this “bona fide residence in a state” that both Cox and the court agree is a legitimate distinction appears to be a deeply problematic status, since it is constituted neither by simply being in the state, nor by a particular duration of time spent there, nor by having a “settled interest” of property and income. A radical indeterminacy seems to be inscribed not only in this all-important concept but also in the parallel idea of travel and migration against which residency must be defined. A few moments later, in fact, the Court draws from Cox another significant qualification:

     

    THE COURT: I haven’t quite understood how all the arguments are going on the assumption that the right to travel from place to place is precisely the same as the right to live where you please.
    MR. COX: Well I think that I have sought to stress the right to live where you please as the basic right. It seems to me that the right to journey, to make a pleasure swing around the country or to go to Europe, raises different problems and is a lesser right, I would think. And my case–Your Honors emphasized a point I should have made more sharply, perhaps. Our case deals with the right to live where you please to seek better opportunities.
    THE COURT: That’s what I think this resolves itself into, instead of the right to “travel.”
    MR. COX: I agree. (LBA 68: 397)

     

    Even though the salient issue of Shapirois repeatedly defined as the right to travel, the case would indeed seem, as Cox concedes here, to be more precisely understood as being about the right to migrate, to “live where you please to seek better opportunities.” This more specific word does briefly appear in the majority decision:

     

    An indigent who desires to migrate, resettle, find a new job, and start a new life will doubtless hesitate if he knows that he must risk making the move without the possibility of falling back on state welfare assistance during his first year of residence, when his need may be most acute. But the purpose of inhibiting migration by needy persons into the State is constitutionally impermissible. (Shapiro 629; emphases added)

     

    In this passage, migration refers to the act of a person who goes somewhere to settle or make a life: the act of the pioneer, the homesteader, or the immigrant, the very dramatis personae of the American dream. In many respects, the appellees’ winning case depends on the ideological force of this image, as against an equally ideological contrast between the homeless vagrant and what the Court calls the “old families” of a well-established community (401). In his majority decision, for example, Brennan argues that residency requirements are grounded in the assumption “that indigents who enter a State with the hope of securing higher welfare benefits are somehow less deserving.” By contrast, Brennan writes,

     

    we do not perceive why a mother who is seeking to make a new life for herself and her children should be regarded as less deserving because she considers, among other factors, the level of a State’s public assistance. Surely such a mother is no less deserving than a mother who moves into a particular State in order to take advantage of its better educational facilities. (Shapiro 631-2)

     

    In such a passage, Brennan in effect displaces the ideological specters of the “welfare queen” and the “lurking” vagrant by imagining the kind of person at issue in this case as a devoted mother moved by a spirit of independence and rational economic calculation to seek out a better life for her family and herself. The force of the image is almost enough to conceal how this description also implicitly accepts the conservative principle that relief should, in any case, go only to what Brennan frankly calls the “deserving” poor.

     

    Nevertheless, the word “migrant” inevitably evokes another meaning that indicates the absolute limit of what might be thinkable by the prevailing logic of welfare. This becomes clear in another exchange a few minutes later:

     

    THE COURT: Mr. Cox, I’ve come across statements to the effect that in some of these states that have fine climates, such as the far Western states, the children of migrants are not allowed into the public schools because they don’t satisfy the residence requirements; and also the same sort of statement with respect to access to state health facilities. Assuming that that’s so, does that present a related conceptual problem?
    MR. COX: Well I would think the genuine migrant presented a different problem, that here we are talking about someone who is not moving from place to place. I don’t mean to suggest, Your Honor, that there isn’t ground for a constitutional attack in those cases, but I do suggest that at least from the standpoint of what we’re dealing with–
    THE COURT: But a negative answer here–would a negative answer here indicate, a fortiori, a negative answer in–
    MR. COX: You mean if we were to lose these cases?
    THE COURT: If you were to lose these cases, would that indicate a negative answer in the case of the migrants who are denied an opportunity to go to school?
    MR. COX: I would think it clearly would even enable Connecticut, say, to say that it would not admit to the schools in Greenwich and other places near New York the children of people who move out from New York to Greenwich because there are better schools there (403).

     

    This striking passage both insists on and yet virtually refuses to name or consider the migrant worker as the limit case at which the whole argument finally arrives. The force of the discourse in the current case tends to exclude the migrant from consideration, by focusing on residents who are said to be equal in status and therefore entitled to “equal protection” under the law. Yet the figure of the migrant worker forces itself into the argument here, much as it did implicitly in Cox’s previous reference above to “strangers” and “outsiders.” The Court seems to ask, though perhaps not very clearly and with a kind of reticence, about the implications of the current case for the much more drastic residency restrictions imposed on migrant workers, who are often, as he mentions, excluded from even the most basic state services such as elementary education because they lack even the intention to stay in the place they happen to be. If the Court should decide in this case to allow states to deny welfare benefits even to immigrants in the positive sense (those who arrive intending to stay), then states will surely believe they can deny services of any kind to the mere migrant. Cox assents to this conclusion, though only in the most indirect of ways: by displacing the already-ghostly figure of the migrant worker with that of the citizen who moves from the city to the suburbs because they have better schools there! One suspects that Cox’s incongruous counterexample is intended to reassure the Court that more is at stake here than the rights of those whom even that tenuous and indefinable status of “resident” eludes. At any rate, one thing is clear about the decision reached in this case. Although it is still commonly argued that “Residency as a factor in determining eligibility for public assistance was declared illegal… in the case of Shapiro v. Thompson (Trattner 21, n. 3), the real fact is, as Edward Sparer summarizes, that “Shapiro bans durational residency tests, but not residency tests.” The decision thus permits the states to “bar the nonresident citizen from receiving welfare benefits,” and “the principal group of persons to whom this distinction applies is the migratory workers who move from state to state for the purpose of working in the field” (76). The migrant worker is thus a kind of absent presence in a case whose specific positive effect–the striking down of durational requirements for AFDC–seems in its whole force and absolute principle to license his exclusion from social welfare in every sense. Even more broadly, this case affirms certain rights and freedoms only by limiting them and extends welfare benefits to newly arrived residents only by excluding the nonresident.

     

    Such conclusions are further confirmed by the obvious observation that the figure of the illegal alien or migrant worker, present in this case only in his nearly total absence, is by contrast central in other discourses about welfare. To cite an almost random example of an all-too-familiar discourse, Senator Strom Thurmond, a few years before the welfare reform bill of 1996, made the argument that such a bill would be necessary

     

    to limit the rising tide of illegal aliens who, attracted by the many advantages of living or working in the United States, flood across our borders and take jobs from American workers. In many cases, those illegal entrants and their families soon become a welfare burden on our society, supported in one way or another by the American taxpayer. (qtd. in Harris 186)

     

    Correspondingly, the “welfare reform” act of 1996 placed explicit new limits on what it also carefully identifies as three different kinds of migrant or immigrant: Americans moving between states, “qualified” (that is, legal) aliens from outside the United States, and illegal aliens. For the first class, the bill authorized any State to “apply to a family the rules (including benefit amounts) of the program… of another State if the family has moved to the State from the other State and has resided in the State for less than 12 months” (United States 20).24 The second class, qualified aliens, were declared “not eligible for any Federal means-tested public benefit for a period of 5 years beginning on the date of the alien’s entry into the United States” (United States 161). And as for the third class, which would, of course, include the majority of migrant workers, the law provides that “an alien who is not a qualified alien… is not eligible for any Federal public benefit” (United States 157). In the debates leading up to and following the passage of the bill, some liberal voices particularly deplored such provisions, and President Clinton promised that “if reelected he would fix a flawed welfare law” (Weaver 336)–though this promise (unlike his famous original promise to “end welfare as we know it”) was at best partially fulfilled by provisions of the 1997 budget, which restored some benefits for disabled immigrants. And in any case, it was merely the restrictions on welfare for legal aliens that were even at issue. Our analysis suggests, by contrast, that limitations on welfare for “strangers and outsiders” are in no sense merely peripheral to the bill’s overall purpose but rather quite central to it. Indeed, the fact that, as most studies suggest, illegal migrant workers pay more into state budgets (via payroll taxes) than they ever receive via welfare also merely confirms, by contrast, that such policies do not really respond to material social problems but emerge, rather, from the kind of enduring habits of thought sketched here.

     

    Early in the year following Shapiro, the Supreme Court issued another decision on welfare that is, by contrast, generally considered a profound defeat for welfare rights. In Dandridge v. Williams (1970), the Court upheld the constitutionality of laws in Maryland (and, by extension, of numerous similar laws in other states) that set a maximum cap on the welfare benefits available to a given family. In Maryland, specific welfare benefits were paid to each needy family under AFDC according to a formula calculating the minimum level of subsistence income necessary per child; yet the state also set a maximum limit of $250 per month per family and thus failed to provide additional benefits for any family with seven or more members–five children with two parents, or six children with one parent. Like Shapiro, this case thus also locates itself at the intersection of common being and the economic calculus. In this case, it is implicitly conceded by both sides that human beings are united by a common level of material and financial need that can be precisely determined by the state. There could have been be no dispute at all if there had not been that initial act of calculation by the state to determine the minimum subsistence level for a family of three, four, or five people, and so forth.

     

    At the simplest level, then, the Court’s decision is a negative one: that is, it rules that a state need not support people according to the state’s own calculation of their needs. Such a conclusion is, moreover, itself made in the name of calculation. As Justice Potter Stewart writes in the majority decision, the Maryland law is justified as an attempt to “reconcile the demands of its needy citizens with the finite resources available to meet those demands” (Dandridge 474). Cutting off the larger families from additional benefits is one reasonable way, the majority argues, of rationing an overall welfare budget that is evidently too small to meet the needs of collective provision in the state. At the end of the majority decision, Justice Stewart once again portrays the Court’s actions in negative terms: as simply a refusal to intervene in matters best left to the wisdom of state lawmakers:

     

    We do not decide today that the Maryland regulation is wise, that it best fulfills the relevant social and economic objectives that Maryland might ideally espouse, or that a more just and humane system could not be devised. Conflicting claims of morality and intelligence are raised by opponents and proponents of almost every measure, certainly including the one before us. But the intractable economic, social, and even philosophical problems presented by public welfare assistance programs are not the business of this Court. (Dandridge 486)

     

    In fact, however, the negative form of the principle affirmed in this decision necessarily entails a positive version of itself, one that indeed has fundamental economic, social, and philosophic consequences. This positive principle might be formulated something like this: the State must calculate a standard of material need for its citizens and yet must not meet that standard. The brief for the appellants frankly acknowledges that the laws at issue here continue to reflect long-standing fears about the “undeserving poor,” citing the conclusions of the British Poor Law Commission of 1835 that the situation of people on relief “shall not be made really or apparently so eligible (desirable) as the situation of the independent laborer of the lowest class” (LBA 69: 60). They also cite Arthur Burns, at the time a counselor to President Nixon on domestic affairs and soon to be Chair of the Federal Reserve bank, who claims that “there are… States in which the welfare payments going to the family are larger than what an unskilled man working at or close to the minimum wage can earn,” which “stimulates some people to leave work and join the welfare population.” To avoid this, Burns argues, the state should set “a maximum on welfare payments so that welfare is not too attractive financially” (cited LBA 69: 87). This argument, which prevailed with a majority of the Court on this occasion, and which we identified above as the quintessential right-wing approach to poverty, here grounds itself in an act of calculation that is always unfinished (that is, the state must calculate the minimum it should give and then must also recalculate how much not to give) and, even more paradoxically, grasps equality itself only in the form of inequality. In its laws, argued the majority decision, “the State maintains some semblance of an equitable balance between families on welfare and those supported by an employed breadwinner” (Dandridge 486). But what the Court means, to speak in coldly practical terms, is that welfare families must have less than the working poor: the “equitable balance” of which he speaks literally exists in the form of a material inequity. To be as clear as possible, in this case, the law devotes itself with its full force and principle not to ending privation, and not even, at least after a certain point, to relieving privation, but instead, quite precisely, to preserving it.

     

    This paradoxical logic only deepens when one considers the appellees’s unsuccessful argument that family caps for welfare infringe on the constitutional doctrine of Equal Protection. The maximum grant regulation, write Joseph A. Matera and Gerald A. Smith in their appellee’s brief, creates “two subclasses of AFDC recipients, those who are members of large families containing seven or more people and those who belong to families of six members or less” (LBA 69: 125). And as for the additional children in large families, Matera suggests in oral argument, “the State computes their needs, and then simply ignores them” (LBA 69: 298). The Court points out, however, that the state formula does not simply provide a particular dollar amount per child but rather employs a sliding scale, giving “$30 a month for the first child, and $25 a month for the second child” and so forth (LBA 69: 300). It would thus seem difficult to make an equal protection argument in terms of individual children within families, as opposed to between families as a whole. To be sure, the state makes its initial calculation on the basis of the number of children in a family. But, as the Court suggests:

     

    THE COURT: …$30 isn’t allocated to A, and $10 to B, or anything like that?
    MR. MATERA: No, sir. It’s dependent upon the number of individuals in the family.
    THE COURT: So, when the State sets a maximum of $250, that money is allocable among all members of the family. It doesn’t mean that the State doesn’t think the seventh child is going to not share at all in the $250.
    MR. MATERA: I would disagree, in this respect, Mr. Justice White, because the State does think that…. Because when they looked at… the number of people in that family, they said that in order to live you need $331–
    THE COURT: Well, I understand that.
    MR. MATERA: …But, of course, the welfare department would believe that the mother would take those funds which already are available, and certainly divide them among the children, because she wouldn’t allow certain children to starve merely because their needs are not recognized, you see. (LBA 69: 305)

     

    And again, similarly, in the final moments of the oral arguments:

     

    THE COURT: …it’s not the fifth, or sixth, or seventh, or eighth child that necessarily suffers. It’s the whole family’s income that is reduced, on a per capita basis.
    MR. MATERA: That would be the practical effect, because a parent would simply not let its child starve. (LBA 69: 310)

     

    At this point, it is hard not to hear a hypothetical rejoinder that Matera’s words seem irresistibly to evoke: that although a parent would simply not let its child starve, a state would. To be precise, however, the Court is simply claiming that because of the possible economies of scale and, even more so, the emotional bonds of the family as such, the “fifth or sixth child in a family” will “eat right along with the rest of them,” so that the law “just means that everybody [in the family] would eat less” (306). As the majority decision puts it, more formally:

     

    Although the appellees argue that the younger and more recently arrived children in such families are totally deprived of aid, a more realistic view is that the lot of the entire family is diminished because of the presence of additional children without any increase in payments. (Dandridge 477)

     

    Thus, as it were, the additional children are not entitled to a claim of equal protection under the law precisely because they belong to a collectivity: they are members of a kind of mini-community within which they will be provided for, if not adequately, then at least equally with all its other members.

     

    Our primary point here is not that this claim about the intrinsic equality of the family is spurious, as a whole range of feminist work on familial relations and domestic abuse has vividly suggested. Nor are we primarily observing that these so-called “family caps” on welfare (which remain central in contemporary debates on the subject) are obviously conditioned by the ideological fantasy of the “welfare queen” who has additional babies in order to get larger welfare checks. Rather, we want to emphasize how this decision grounds itself on the alleged existence of this domain of absolute, unconditional collectivity and equality, the family, which it uses to license or justify a vision of society and the state understood as, by contrast, fundamentally individualistic and unequal. Within this logic, the family is assumed, by some mysterious and nonnegotiable necessity of its own nature, to care for each new member within its preexisting material capabilities, however limited they may be. The whole purpose of the AFDC program from its beginnings, the appellees argue repeatedly in the discourse of this case, is to “make it possible for the child to remain in or return to the custody and care of his parents or relatives who have a natural bond of affection and concern for his well-being” (LBA 69: 45; paraphrasing the Social Security Act, 42 U.S.C.A. 601). Indeed, the appellees observe how the Maryland Code itself declares that the primary goal of AFDC is “the strengthening of family life” (LBA 69: 135, citing Maryland Code Annotated Article 88A, Section 44a [1064]). Only via the achievement of this goal does the program in any sense even attempt to achieve what might otherwise be understood as the broader and more fundamental goal of enabling “the child’s unmet need to be supplied” (LBA 69: 45). The welfare reform bill of 1996 operates with precisely the same logic. This bill amends Title IV of the Social Security Act in a fundamental way: on the one hand, it continues to state that the fundamental purpose of welfare is to “encourage the formation and maintenance of two-parent families,” and on the other hand, it specifically licenses states to enact “family cap” limits on welfare and stipulates that its programs will not “entitle any individual or family to assistance” (42 USCS 601 [2001]). So, one more time, let us be plain: precisely as it strips away any protection against scarcity from almost every space of social life, the law also claims to be fostering a specific domain of irreducible collectivity called “the family” within which, allegedly, our most fundamental needs may somehow always be met.

     

    3. At the Limits of Community

     

    The two figures our readings have discovered at the center of these cases about welfare, the migrant worker and the family, represent as it were the positive and negative limits of common being itself. The migrant worker is excluded from the process of mutual provision in the familiar positive way, because of his race, his national identity, his lack of a settled interest or even a permanent residency in a place. With the family, however–or at least with this hypothetical vision of the family–the very idea of common being encounters something that exceeds it: that is, our national identity as Americans binds us less than this imagined family does. Thus, even as our analysis pointed to a theoretical exclusion of the migrant at the heart of the seemingly inclusive logic of the Shapiro decision, so the brutal language of indifference in Dandridge could also be read as announcing the possibility of something very different: a sphere of limitless, open-ended inclusivity, where all, as the Court suggests, will “eat right along with the rest.” In this imagined collectivity, mutual provision evidently takes place without thought; or, more precisely, takes place via a calculation that, instead of being forever-unfinished, is rather always-already in excess of itself. And to do no more than extend the same hypothetical model in the other direction, every kind of abundance would, one can only assume, be similarly shared without thought or calculation–or, again, more precisely, shared via a process of calculation that undoes itself by being shared.

     

    In this case, indeed, the brute fact that real families do not necessarily embody this model is precisely what allows it to reemerge as a new possibility in theory and in practice. For this is not, of course, to suggest that a state should think of itself as one big happy family, a model long ago contaminated with the worst features of patriarchal oppression. It is, rather, to suggest that at one and the same point where a model of community based on common being reaches its negative limit, one recognizes, by contrast, what Jean-Luc Nancy in The Inoperative Community calls the community of our being-in-common. The various models of mutual provision considered throughout, whether in relatively liberal, communitarian versions, or relatively conservative or libertarian versions, grasp community only as a unity of subjects who have something in common and whose obligation to other members always retains a fatal circularity: each subject is obligated to help create and preserve other subjects who are themselves defined by their capacity and willingness to undertake the same obligation. In such a model, as we have observed, the community does not and cannot end privation or poverty, since the threat of these things constitutes not only what is understood as the necessary goad of survival, but indeed the very glue of the social bond itself. In the community for which we argue, by contrast, singular beings join together on the basis of having nothing in common, that is, they have in common only their own finitude and consequently their exposure to both scarcity and to one another. Here, the inescapable neediness of finite beings is grasped not as their weakness or reproach but as their access to a collective wealth that is, if not infinite, then at least without limit. As against what even progressives tend to suggest is a necessary conservation of altruism (e.g., Solow ix), the community of being-in-common begins in the recognition of what Emmanuel Levinas calls the “plenitude of alterity”: a relation to the Other that is incommensurable and that therefore exceeds all calculation (Levinas 345). This community has no inside or outside and therefore no insiders or outsiders; it is a community (and an economy) of an all that remains forever open, an all thought so radically that this word would no longer even be an appropriate term to calculate it.

     

    Here, similarly, the very idea of “welfare” shifts–rather as T. H. Marshall suggested over thirty years ago but exceeding his suggestion–from its negative to its positive sense, from the ideas of “relief” or “insurance” or “safety net” to the much broader and more basic semantic idea of well-being. Marshall argues that the provision of welfare in this sense to everyone cannot exactly be a legal right as such, precisely because such a right would have to be calculated, quantified, and legislated; instead, he suggests, it can only be provided via what he calls “discretion,” an operation that does not ask, “‘what do the regulations say must be done?’, but ‘What action is most likely to produce the desired result?’” (87-88). And, he goes on, “this notion of discretion as positive, personal and beneficent can only be fully realized in a ‘welfare society’, that is, a society that recognizes its collective responsibility to seek to achieve welfare, and not only to relieve destitution or eradicate penury” (88). Marshall’s own thought unfortunately also illustrates how easy it is for this discretion to simply become calculation by another name.25 Thus one must give a slight additional turn to his schema, understanding this “discretion” as something always performed in the name of what Derrida calls Justice: that which brings forth and yet always escapes and exceeds all notions of law and right. “It is just that there be law,” Derrida argues, but at the same time, “just justice is incalculable, it requires us to calculate with the incalculable” (“Force of Law” 16). And the evident fact that justice “is always in excess with respect to right” does not mean, as some might claim (attempting, in the familiar way, to reduce deconstruction to quietism), that justice is therefore infinitely deferred or simply unattainable. Rather, as Derrida always insists, this “excess” whose name is Justice “presses urgently here and now” (Derrida and Ferraris 23).

     

    It is therefore self-evident to us that just as affirmative action makes sense only in the name of absolute deracialization, so any law addressing something called “welfare” must guarantee income, education, health-care, and the like, to all social subjects; and that the sole criterion of eligibility for such guarantees can only be finite being itself. Therefore: no one who is in any sense there can possibly be excluded from it. This process of mutual provision cannot even be reduced to what has sometimes been called a guaranteed minimum income (a formulation that simply returns to the economic calculus in its most ruinous form).26 Indeed, what some would raise as objections to such a policy–that the level of such guaranteed income could not be determined in advance nor fixed once and for all, that people could and probably would always ask for it to be higher, and that to afford it would collectively require the expenditure without reserve of all economic privilege and individual wealth–are in fact its strengths. For one must understand this worldwide offering or sharing of well-being as, to repeat our formula, a process of calculation intended to undo calculation. Because all being is being-in-common, and because all community takes place, as Nancy argues, at the common limit where finite beings are exposed to one another, therefore those of us who meet at this limit (of) community literally in so doing pro-vide or look out for one another. This is not a (moral) choice, nor the product of ascetic self-denial, nor even something to be built as a Work in the aftermath of a revolution and in the name of some principle like Humanity or Equality; rather, it is the simple, inevitable (practical) condition of our existence, remaining always already to be re-revealed.

     

    Some will perhaps respond, however, that this essay, far from having in any sense begun to solve the problem of the practical, has not yet even begun to address it; that all this remains mere theory, and that none of it is either feasible or realistic. People will simply not go along with it, some will say; indeed, Americans have recently shown, if anything, an increasing resistance to affirmative action and an “increasing reluctance… to support citizens on welfare” (Gutmann ix). But we observe how such objections are always themselves posed as questions of thought and yet never really presented as one’s own thought. In other words, it is not argued that racial or economic justice is somehow materially impossible; rather, it is alleged that there is some ideality, some unspecified absence or vague presence in consciousness that makes it impossible. Similarly, most people never quite say, “I am selfish”; instead, they say, impersonally or abstractly, that altruism is scarce, or that Americans are greedy and individualistic, or that life isn’t fair. The same logic always re-engenders itself: because there might not be enough, we must each grab what we can, producing an aggregate of selfishness that endlessly ensures the repetition of the same scarcity and the same response. But if the impediment itself exists only in ideas and consciousness, then where else but in what Nancy calls “the gravity of thought” could one look for the solution?27 Thus the whole question of the practical necessarily evokes that exhilarating inversion that Marx articulates in perhaps his most famous single utterance–“Philosophers have only interpreted the world, in various ways; the point, however, is to change it” (Marx and Engels 145). We join others in the broad Marxist and post-Marxist tradition in understanding this famous dictum not as a simple opposition of theory and practice, intended to reproach philosophers for interpreting rather than changing the world. Rather, Marx suggests that to reinterpret the world is always, and necessarily, to change it.28 We acknowledge, then, that our project here is unfinished, but this is because the community for which we argue is always “to come” and because the problem of the practical itself therefore always remains (to be) thought.

     

    Notes

     

    1. See Derrida, “Racism’s Last Word” (1985), and Derrida and Tlili, eds., For Nelson Mandela (1987).

     

    2. The model of politics and collectivity for which we argue in this essay follows most closely the thought of Jean-Luc Nancy in The Inoperative Community. In addition to the works named in our text, other books that have influenced our thought include Maurice Blanchot’s The Unavowable Community and Giorgio Agamben’s The Coming Community. We also believe the community for which we argue to be broadly consistent with what Derrida calls “the new international” in Specters of Marx. Although Derrida has expressed theoretical reservations about the term “community,” he also acknowledges that he finally has “no qualms” about “Blanchot’s ‘unavowable’ community or Nancy’s ‘inoperative’ one” (Derrida and Ferraris 24). We join Derrida in understanding Nancy, as well as Blanchot, as affirming “a communism where the common is anything but common; it is the placing in common [mise en commun] of that which is no longer of the order of subjectivities, or of intersubjectivity as a relation–however paradoxical–between presences.” It is important to emphasize, therefore, how the thought of any of these writers always seeks to question “community in the classical sense, and intersubjectivity as well” (Derrida and Ferraris 24-25).

     

    3. See the volume co-edited by Guinier and Sturm, and perhaps in particular Claude M. Steele’s contribution, “Understanding the Performance Gap” (60-67), on the problem of what he calls “stereotype threat.” During the period in which this article was written, the head of the University of California school system, Richard C. Atkinson, announced plans to “no longer require that students take the SAT I in order to apply for admission to the University,” in part because “minority perceptions about fairness [of such tests] cannot be… easily dismissed.” Atkinson’s remarks can be found at the following address: <http://www.ucop.edu/ucophome/pres/comments/satspch.html>.

     

    4. The other Justices who side with Powell, it should be noted, assert in their opinion a strict construction of Title VI, for example. The matter of revised or even reversed construction principles over time is interesting, to say the least.

     

    5. Reva B. Siegel’s exemplary analysis of Hopwood argues that “strict scrutiny” doctrines under the Fourteenth Amendment radically restrict the use of race-conscious remedies “in order to protect and preserve real differences among racial groups” (49). See Gotanda and also Kull, who both suggest that U.S. constitutional policy has never been “color blind.”

     

    6. See Personal Justice Denied: The Report of the Commission on Wartime Relocation and Internment of Civilians (Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1982). The most salient parts of the document, including the quotation, are on the web at: <http://www.geocities.com/capitolhill/Senate/4417/personaljusticedenied.html>.

     

    7. Statistics in this paragraph are from the University’s official Affirmative Action Reports, issued in October 2000, produced by the Office of the Assistant Provost and Assistant Vice President for Academic Human Resources. The quotation is from the University’s UAAO, Paulette Granberry Russell, from an e-mail, 25 January 2001. The University does provide itself some “wiggle room” on these matters, since it does break down particular minority utilizations/underutilizations separately from the general minority statistic. Nevertheless, every possible category of minority hiring for the Department of English is listed as having a hiring goal of zero, which effectively tells Chairs of Departments that no affirmative action activity is necessary. The concept of “availability” is defined on the University’s Affirmative Action Office website as: “Availability analysis estimates the percentages of minorities and women available for employment in each identified job group. Persons available are those interested and qualified to perform the work at hand during the upcoming Affirmative Action Plan year.” Michigan State University’s policies on affirmative action are contained in two documents called “IDEA” and “IDEA II.” “IDEA II” specifically links University support of affirmative action to “utilization” data: “Academic units that are underrepresented in terms of relevant availability data can work in partnership with the Office of the Provost as needed to arrange transitional funding and/or set up funds necessary to take advantage of targeted hiring opportunities when they arise, or to broaden possible recruitment or retention activities” (emphasis added; <http://web.msu.edu/access/idea2.html#enhanceeffort>).

     

    8. Delgado has written about “role model” theory in telling ways (“Affirmative”). This logic, too, would have proven problematic, had the Supreme Court affirmed it.

     

    9. See the Grutter companion decision, decided 27 March 2001, which overturns the University of Michigan Law School system of affirmative action admissions and explicitly sets up a future collision of Gratz and Grutter on appeal.

     

    10. It is important to acknowledge here and throughout (as general inspiration for the analysis of affirmative action in these pages) the significance of Girardeau A. Spann’s work in this area, and particularly Race Against the Court, which concludes that racial minorities must recognize the Supreme Court as having functioned generally as “an antagonistic political institution rather than as a hospitable benefactor” (170).

     

    11. See, for example, Klinkner and Smith for an elaboration of the limits of twentieth-century racial inequity reformism.

     

    12. We borrow the phrase “exception to the exception” from Donald E. Pease, in his oral response to Michael Hardt at Michigan State University’s “Globalicities” conference, October, 2001.

     

    13. Nancy Fraser and Linda Gordon suggest that “‘dependency’ is the single most crucial term in the current U. S. debate about welfare reform,” in an important essay that historicizes and critiques this term (618).

     

    14. In addition to books otherwise cited, some of the many other outstanding liberal or Left approaches to welfare include Frances Fox Piven and Richard A. Cloward’s Regulating the Poor (1971; 2nd ed. 1993); Michael B. Katz’s The Undeserving Poor (1989); Joel F. Handler’s and Yeheskel Hansenfeld’s The Moral Construction of Poverty (1991) and Handler’s The Poverty of Welfare Reform (1995); Linda Gordon’s Pitied but Not Entitled (1994); Herbert Gans’s The War Against the Poor (1995); and Ruth Sidel’s Keeping Women and Children Last (1996).

     

    15. Mead argues quite specifically that “obligation,” rather than mere quantitative “equality,” is the fundamental issue of all social policy, arguing that “The most vulnerable Americans need obligations, as much as rights” (Mead 17).

     

    16. Senator Jesse Helms on the floor of the Senate on Thursday, 1 August 1996, alleged that “the average welfare recipient stays at the public trough for 13 years.” (Helms’s statistics are, by the way, as excessive as his rhetoric, since, as Wilson documents, most studies of welfare usage conclude that “half of all welfare recipients exited welfare during the first year, and three-quarters departed within two years” (166).

     

    17. Some of the best-known works in this conservative conversation are Martin Anderson’s Welfare (1978), George Gilder’s Wealth and Poverty (1981), Charles Murray’s Losing Ground (1984), Lawrence M. Mead’s Beyond Entitlement (1986), Gertrude Himmelfarb’s The De-Moralization of Society (1995), and Marvin Olasky’s The Tragedy of American Compassion (1996). Concise samples of various writers making the argument summarized here can be found in Mehuron, Points of Light (1990).

     

    18. William Julius Wilson agrees that “a liberal-conservative consensus on welfare reform has recently emerged,” which includes, among other things, the opinion that welfare recipients should be required to work (164).

     

    19. Edward V. Sparer, who at the time of these decisions headed the Columbia University Center on Social Welfare Policy and Law, writes that “the particulars in the Court’s reasoning… gave great hope that Shapiro would have enormous consequences for other welfare rights. By April 1970… the Court–after a significant change in personnel–made it clear that such hope was false” (75).

     

    20. See, e.g., Kurland and Casper, Landmark Briefs and Arguments of the Supreme Court (37, 108, 237). All subsequent citations from the briefs and oral arguments of both Shapiro v. Thompson and Dandridge v. Williams are from this series, henceforth identified parenthetically as LBA, with volume and page number.

     

    21. Although it has different particulars, our argument about Shapiro is complementary to that of Bussiere, who suggests that Justice Brennan put together a majority decision in this case only by grounding it “in the right to interstate travel and… classical liberal values,” thus stripping the case “of its downwardly redistributive policy potential” (107). We also agree generally with Nixon, who argues “that the Supreme Court’s traditional approach to deciding durational residency requirements, while producing a sound moral outcome, is legally flawed and ultimately does more harm than good to strengthen welfare rights” (210-11).

     

    22. In his dissent, Justice Stewart finds plausible, as one “rational basis” for the kind of laws at issue in this case, the idea that “a residence requirement provides an objective and workable means of determining that an applicant intends to remain indefinitely within the jurisdiction” (Shapiro 673).

     

    23. In his dissent to Shapiro, Justice Harlan cites his own previous dissent in Harper v. Virginia Board of Elections 383 U.S. 663 (1966), a well-known case that ruled that poll taxes were unconstitutional. In that earlier case, Harlan had suggested that “it was probably accepted as sound political theory by a large percentage of Americans through most of our history, that people with some property have a deeper stake in community affairs, and are consequently more responsible, more educated, more knowledgeable, more worthy of confidence, than those without means, and that the community and Nation would be better managed if the franchise were restricted to such citizens” (Harper 683).

     

    24. This provision seems, however, to have been declared unconstitutional by the Supreme Court’s 1999 decision, Saenz v. Roe, which reaffirmed Shapiro‘s assertion of the right to travel.

     

    25. In his “Afterthought on ‘The Right to Welfare,’” for example, Marshall discusses how one British welfare agency, the Supplementary Benefits Commission, had adapted a “discretionary” model in the years following his original essay, but that such a policy had been found “to cause conflict, unhappy comparisons between the workless and the working poor and complaints from those who did not believe that they were getting their ‘rights’” (96).

     

    26. This is not the place for a detailed exposition of the enduring tradition of thought concerning a guaranteed social income, or what has recently been dubbed a “universal basic income” or “UBI” (see Parijs). But we very briefly observe how one tradition of this thought, influenced in part by Henry George’s famous idea of a land-value tax, considers the natural environment as a kind of common patrimony whose value should be divided among all citizens–an idea grounded absolutely in the most mechanical kind of economic calculation. The idea of a “negative income tax” or basic minimum income–which has sometimes been advocated even by right-wing thinkers such as Milton Friedman–also tends to fall prey to questions of common being (what are basic needs?) and calculation (how much can society afford to give?). For example, Robert Solow, in his preface to Parijs, suggests “a very low-level UBI would be feasible in economic, even budgetary, terms, especially because it would at least partially replace some current means-tested transfers” (Parijs xiii). In other words, UBI would just be “welfare” or “relief” under another name.

     

    27. For this phrase, see Nancy’s The Gravity of Thought.

     

    28. See, for example, Resnick and Wolff 37.

    Works Cited

     

    • Agamben, Giorgio. The Coming Community. Trans. Michael Hardt. Minneapolis, MN: U of Minnesota P, 1993.
    • —. Homo Sacer: Sovereign Power and Bare Life. Stanford, CA: Stanford UP, 1998.
    • Anderson, Martin. Welfare: The Political Economy of Welfare Reform in the United States. Palo Alto, CA: Hoover Institution P, 1978.
    • Bennington, Geoff. Legislations: The Politics of Deconstruction. London: Verso, 1994.
    • Blanchot, Maurice. The Unavowable Community. Trans. Pierre Joris. Barrytown, NY: Station Hill, 1988.
    • Brown v. Board of Education. 347 U.S. Supreme Court 483. 1954.
    • Bussiere, Elizabeth. (Dis)entitling the Poor: The Warren Court, Welfare Rights, and the American Political Tradition. University Park, PA: Pennsylvania State UP, 1997.
    • City of Richmond v. J.A. Croson Co. 488 U.S. Supreme Court 469. 1989.
    • Cornell, Drucilla. Beyond Accommodation: Ethical Feminism, Deconstruction, and the Law. 2nd ed. Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield, 1999.
    • Dandridge v. Williams. 397 U.S. Supreme Court 471. 1970.
    • Delgado, Richard. “Affirmative Action as a Majoritarian Device: Or, Do You Really Want to Be a Role Model?” Critical Race Theory: The Cutting Edge. Ed. Richard Delgado. Philadelphia: Temple UP, 1995. 355-61.
    • —. The Coming Race War? And Other Apocalyptic Tales of America after Affirmative Action and Welfare. New York: New York UP, 1996.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “Force of Law: The ‘Mystical Foundation of Authority’.” Deconstruction and the Possibility of Justice. Ed. Drucilla Cornell, Michael Rosenfeld, and David Gray Carlson. New York: Routledge, 1992. 3-67.
    • —. “Racism’s Last Word.” Trans. Peggy Kamuf. Critical Inquiry 12 (Autumn 1985): 290-299.
    • —. Specters of Marx: The State of the Debt, the Work of Mourning, and the New International. Trans. Peggy Kamuf. New York: Routledge, 1994.
    • Derrida, Jacques, and Maurizio Ferraris. A Taste for the Secret. Trans. Giacomo Donis. Ed. Giacomo Donis and David Webb. Cambridge, UK: Polity P, 2001.
    • Derrida, Jacques, and Mustapha Tlili, eds. For Nelson Mandela. New York: Seaver, 1987.
    • Dworkin, Ronald. A Matter of Principle. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1985.
    • Fiscus, Ronald J. The Constitutional Logic of Affirmative Action: Making the Case for Quotas. Ed. Stephen L. Wasby. Foreword Stanley Fish. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1992.
    • Flagg, Barbara J. Was Blind But Now I See: White Race Consciousness and the Law. New York and London: New York UP, 1998.
    • Fraser, Nancy, and Linda Gordon. “‘Dependency’ Demystified: Inscriptions of Power in a Keyword of the Welfare State.” Contemporary Political Philosophy: An Anthology. Ed. Robert E. Goodin and Philip Pettit. Oxford, UK: Blackwell, 1997. 618-633.
    • Fullilove v. Klutznick. 448 U.S. Supreme Court 448. 1980.
    • Gans, Herbert. The War Against the Poor: The Underclass and Antipoverty Policy. New York: Basic Books, 1995.
    • Gilder, George. Wealth and Poverty. New York: Basic Books, 1993.
    • Gordon, Linda. Pitied But Not Entitled: Single Mothers and the History of Welfare. New York, Free P, 1994.
    • Gotanda, Neil. “A Critique of ‘Our Constitution Is Color-Blind’.” Stanford Law Review 44.1 (November 1991): 1-68.
    • Gratz v. Bollinger. U.S. Dist. Court, E. Mich., South. Div. 2000. <http://www.mied.uscourts.gov/_opinions/Dugganpdf/PJD97cv75231.pdf>.
    • Griffin v. Illinois 351 U.S. Supreme Court 12. 1956.
    • Grutter v. Bollinger. U.S. Dist. Court, E. Mich., South. Div. 2001. <http://www.mied.uscourts.gov/_opinions/Friedmanpdf/BAF97cv75928.pdf>.
    • Guinier, Lani and Susan Sturm, eds. Who’s Qualified? Boston, MA: Beacon, 2001.
    • Gurin, Patricia. “Empirical Results from the Analyses Conducted for this Litigation.” <http://www.umich.edu/~urel/admissions/legal/expert/empir.html>.
    • —. “The Studies: Method and Measures.” <http://www.umich.edu/~urel/admissions/legal/expert/studies.html>.
    • —. “Theoretical Foundations for the Effect of Diversity.” <http://www.umich.edu/~urel/admissions/legal/expert/theor.html>.
    • Gutmann, Amy. “Introduction.” Solow vii-xv.
    • Handler, Joel F. The Poverty of Welfare Reform. New Haven, CT: Yale UP, 1995.
    • Handler, Joel F., and Yeheskel Hansenfeld. The Moral Construction of Poverty: Welfare Reform in America. Newbury Park, CA: Sage, 1991.
    • Hardt, Michael, and Antonio Negri. Empire. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 2000.
    • Harper v. Virginia Board of Elections. 383 U.S. Supreme Court 663. 1966.
    • Harris, Cheryl I. “Whiteness as Property.” Harvard Law Review 106 (1993): 1709-91.
    • Harris, Nigel. The New Untouchables: Immigration and the New World Order. London: I. B. Tauris, 1995.
    • Himmelfarb, Gertrude. The De-Moralization of Society: From Victorian Virtues to Modern Values. New York: Knopf, 1995.
    • Hirabayashi v. United States. 320 U.S. Supreme Court 81. 1942.
    • Hopwood v. Texas. 78 F.3d. 5th U.S. Circuit 932. 1996.
    • Katz, Michael B. In the Shadow of the Poorhouse: A Social History of Welfare in America. Revised ed. New York: Basic Books, 1996.
    • —. The Undeserving Poor: From the War on Poverty to the War on Welfare. Revised ed. New York: Pantheon, 1989.
    • Klinkner, Philip A., with Rogers M. Smith. The Unsteady March: The Rise and Decline of Racial Equality in America. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1999.
    • Korematsu v. United States. 323 U.S. Supreme Court 214. 1944.
    • Kozol, Jonathan. Savage Inequalities: Children in America’s Schools. New York: Crown, 1991.
    • Kull, Andrew. The Color-Blind Constitution. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1992.
    • Kurland, Philip B., and Gerhard Casper, eds. Landmark Briefs and Arguments of the Supreme Court of the United States: Constitutional Law. Arlington, VA: U Publications of America, 1975.
    • Levinas, Emmanuel. “The Trace of the Other.” Trans. Alphonso Lingis. Deconstruction in Context: Literature and Philosophy. Ed. Mark C. Taylor. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1986.
    • Marable, Manning. How Capitalism Underdeveloped Black America: Problems in Race, Political Economy, and Society. Updated ed. Boston, MA: South End, 2000.
    • Marshall, T. H. The Right to Welfare and Other Essays. New York: Free P, 1981.
    • Marx, Karl, and Friedrich Engels. The Marx-Engels Reader. 2nd ed. Ed. Robert Tucker. New York: Norton, 1978.
    • Mead, Lawrence M. Beyond Entitlement: The Social Obligations of Citizenship. New York: Free P, 1986.
    • Mehuron, Tamar Ann, ed. Points of Light: New Approaches to Ending Welfare Dependency. Washington, DC: Ethics and Public Policy Center, 1990.
    • Michaelsen, Scott. The Limits of Multiculturalism: Interrogating the Origins of American Anthropology. Minneapolis, MN: Minnesota UP, 1999.
    • Mills, Charles W. The Racial Contract. Ithaca, NY: Cornell UP, 1997.
    • Mouffe, Chantal. The Democratic Paradox. New York: Verso, 2000.
    • Murray, Charles. Losing Ground: American Social Policy, 1950-1980. New York: Basic Books, 1984.
    • —. “Preface.” The Tragedy of American Compassion. Washington, D.C.: Regnery Publishing, 1992.
    • Nancy, Jean-Luc. The Gravity of Thought. Trans. François Raffoul and Gregory Recco. Atlantic Highlands, NJ: Humanities P, 1997.
    • —. The Inoperative Community. Trans. Peter Connor, et. al. Minneapolis, MN: U of Minnesota P, 1991.
    • Nixon, Bryce. “‘Rational Basis with a Bite’: A Retreat from the Constitutional Right to Travel.” Law & Inequality Journal 18 (Winter 2000): 209-242.
    • Oh, Reggie, and Frank Wu. “The Evolution of Race in the Law: The Supreme Court Moves from Approving Internment of Japanese Americans to Disapproving Affirmative Action for African Americans.” Journal of Race and Law (Winter 1996): 165-93.
    • Olasky, Marvin. The Tragedy of American Compassion. Washington, D.C.: Regnery Publishing, 1992.
    • Olasky, Marvin, and George W. Bush. Compassionate Conservatism: What It Is, What It Does, and How It Can Transform America. New York: Free P, 2000.
    • Parijs, Philippe Van. What’s Wrong With a Free Lunch? Ed. Joshua Cohen and Joel Rogers. Forward by Robert M. Solow. Boston, MA: Beacon P, 2001.
    • Piven, Frances Fox, and Richard A. Cloward. Regulating the Poor: The Functions of Public Welfare. New York: Pantheon Books, 1971.
    • Post, Robert. “Introduction: After Bakke.” Post and Rogin 13-27.
    • Post, Robert, and Michael Rogin, eds. Race and Representation: Affirmative Action. New York: Zone, 1998.
    • Regents of U of California v. Bakke. 438 U.S. Supreme Court 265. 1978.
    • Resnick, Stephen A., and Richard D. Wolff. Knowledge and Class: A Marxian Critique of Political Economy. Chicago and London: U of Chicago P, 1987.
    • Schmitt, Carl. Political Theology: Four Chapters on the Concept of Sovereignty. 1922. Trans. George Schwab. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1985.
    • Shapiro v. Thompson, 394 U.S. Supreme Court 618. 1969.
    • Shershow, Scott Cutler. “Of Sinking: Marxism and the ‘General’ Economy.” Critical Inquiry 27 (Spring 2001): 468-92.
    • Sidel, Ruth. Keeping Women and Children Last: America’s War on the Poor. New York: Penguin, 1996.
    • Shklar, Judith N. American Citizenship: The Quest for Inclusion. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1991.
    • Siegal, Reva B. “The Racial Rhetorics of Colorblind Constitutionalism: The Case of Hopwood v. Texas.” Post and Rogin 29-72.
    • Solow, Robert M. Work and Welfare. Ed. Amy Gutmann. Princeton, NJ: Princeton UP, 1998.
    • Spann, Girardeau A. The Law of Affirmative Action: Twenty-Five Years of Supreme Court Decisions on Race and Remedies. New York and London: New York UP, 2000.
    • —. Race Against the Court: The Supreme Court & Minorities in Contemporary America. New York and London: New York UP, 1993.
    • Sparer, Edward V. “The Right to Welfare.” The Rights of Americans: What They Are–What They Should Be. Ed. Norman Dorsen. New York: Pantheon, 1970. 65-93.
    • Sprinker, Michael, ed. Ghostly Demarcations: A Symposium on Jacques Derrida’s Spectres of Marx. New York: Verso, 1999.
    • Sunstein, Cass R. One Case at a Time: Judicial Minimalism on the Supreme Court. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1999.
    • Trattner, Walter I. From Poor Law to Welfare State: A History of Social Welfare in America. 5th ed. New York: Free P, 1994.
    • Unger, Roberto Mangabeira. Democracy Realized: The Progressive Alternative. London: Verso, 1998.
    • United States. Cong. House. Committee on the Budget. Welfare and Medicaid Reform Act of 1996. HR 3734. Washington: GPO, 1996.
    • Walzer, Michael. Spheres of Justice: A Defense of Pluralism and Equality. New York: Basic Books, 1983.
    • Weaver, R. Kent. Ending Welfare as We Know It. Washington, DC: Brookings Institution P, 2000.
    • Wilson, William Julius. When Work Disappears: The World of the New Urban Poor. New York: Random House, 1996.
    • Wygant v. Jackson Board of Education. 476 U.S. Supreme Court 267. 1986.

     

  • Notices

     

     

     

    Volume 12, Number 3
    May, 2002
    Every issue of Postmodern Culturecarries notices of events, calls for papers, and other announcements, free of charge. Advertisements will also be published on an exchange basis. If you respond to one of the ads or announcements below, please mention that you saw the notice in PMC.

     


    Publication Announcements

    • Topia
    • Blackbird
    • Year Zero One
    • Organdi Quarterly
    • Beyond Webcams: An Introduction to Online Robots

    Conferences, Calls for Papers, Invitations to Submit

    • University of South Carolina’s 5th Annual Comparative Literature Conference: The Desire of the Analysts
    • 8th Qualitative Methods Conference: Something for Nothing

    General Announcements

    • Bureau of Public Secrets

     

  • Gursky’s Sublime

    Caroline Levine

    Department of English
    Rutgers University-Camden
    levinec@camden.rutgers.edu

     

    Review of: Andreas Gursky. The Museum of Modern Art, New York. 4 March – 15 May 2001. Exhibition Website

     

    Peter Galassi. Andreas Gursky. New York: The Museum of Modern Art, 2001.

     

    The modernist avant-garde made a gesture of rejecting popular entertainment and the commodification of culture. To be sure, avant-garde artists often employed the best techniques of advertising and marketing, but they did so on the sly, careful always to boast of their isolation and disinterestedness. With Andy Warhol came something new, a suggestion that there was nothing outside of commodification, that we were always already enmeshed in the repetitions of exchange. One definition of postmodernism makes this the central, the characteristic move of our time: don’t try to escape commodity fetishism, we hear, because there’s no way out, no elsewhere, no other.

     

    Jeff Koons gives us this version of postmodernism par excellence. Sneaker advertisements and basketballs, porn stars and kitsch toys, vacuum cleaners and stuffed puppies: Koons appropriates the most mass-produced objects and shines them up, making them glow with appealing prettiness at the same time that their banality appalls. Koons, astute about the marketplace, is a self-proclaimed artist of desire: he plays on the fact that his audience wants these objects, coveting the luminous glossiness of mass-marketed commodities. Shamed though we may feel, Koons seduces us into a longing for those things which appear to transcend their ordinariness, but not by any magic other than commodification itself–the bright, unmistakable sheen of the newly packaged purchase.

     

    At first glance, the photographer Andreas Gursky might seem to fall into the same category as Jeff Koons, a critic-cum-devotee of the global seductions of marketing. His huge glossy photographs offer up rows of athletic shoes, a landscape of Toyota and Toys ‘R’ Us logos, digitally doctored images of hotels and corporate offices in Hong Kong, New York, and Atlanta, floors full of stock traders, and, perhaps best of all, the endless riches of a 99¢ store, where stacks of brightly colored commodities are so radiant that they cast a gorgeous pastel glow on the store ceiling.

     

    But taken together, the photographs that are collected in Gursky’s mid-career retrospective at the Museum of Modern Art in New York hint at something else, something other than the commonplace workings of desire.

     

    It’s not easy to articulate what that something is. Peter Galassi’s richly illustrated catalogue works to do justice to the monumentality of Gursky’s oeuvre, and its large scale does succeed in evoking some sense of the work’s grandeur. Galassi, in a wide-ranging and scholarly introduction, strives to account for Gursky’s striking aesthetic by tracing major influences: his father the commercial photographer, his disciplined training under Bernd and Hilla Becher at the Kunstakademie in Düsseldorf, his references to Minimalist painting, his turn to color, to big print, and to digital techniques. Galassi also labors to differentiate Gursky from his contemporaries, arguing, for example, that although Gursky’s work can seem reminiscent of American photography, his “adherence to a ruling pictorial scheme” distinguishes him from the Americans and marks a crucial debt to the Bechers (Galassi 24). All of these contexts and conclusions are convincing, but somehow the mystery of Gursky’s work–its ability to “knock your socks off,” as Galassi puts it (9)–remains unaccounted for, elusive.

     

    Take “99 Cent” (1999), for example. Here the title and the date begin by pushing us to the brink. We are just under, just short, imminent, incomplete. And yet the image itself is one of repletion, even of excess, as candy bars and bottles of juice, shampoo, and detergent line up in row after row of color, and the products appear to go on forever. Indeed, what Gursky offers us is a tempo of fullness and insufficiency, as blocks of color are punctuated by horizontal white stripes, and the store as a whole is held up by six slender white vertical columns, rhythmically spaced. The ceiling itself repeats the inside of the store, the bright colors reflected into pale versions of themselves, echoing the floor, symmetrically placed in their own ghostly rows. The few shoppers who dot the storescape seem like prowlers hiding in the shelter of the shelves, their heads barely rising above the patterns of packaging. The remarkable effect is that the arrangement of the whole takes over, as the play of whites and colors overwhelms both the single commodity and the lone consumer. The objects are not there to be bought and sold, clutched and consumed, eaten and used. They are there to add their small notes to the vast pulsing rhythm of the spectacle.

     

    Awed, visitors to the show step back.

     

    With Gursky, the grip of consumerist desire is gone. Gone is the impulse to grasp and to own, to finger and to taste. He invites distance–the detachment of wonder.

     

    But how? How do these marvelous, luminous photographs engender a feeling of awed distance? How do they frustrate the attraction of commodification? The answer, I want to suggest, lies in their remarkable formal control–something Gursky took from his training in Düsseldorf. But even more specifically, their wonder emerges from the one formal pattern that recurs in almost all of Andreas Gursky’s work: parallel lines.

     

    Sometimes Gursky’s parallel lines come from familiar scenes of contemporary life, like store shelves and divided highways. Sometimes they are uncanny, as in “Engadine” (1995), where a trail of tiny skiers runs parallel to a vast mountain range, each echoing the other as they stretch from one frame of the photo to the other. Sometimes the lines are constructed and intentional, as in “EM, Arena, Amsterdam I” (2000), which offers up a painted soccer field, or “Untitled XII” (1999), which gives us a vastly magnified image of a leaf from a printed book, where the lines of words trace perfect parallels across the page. But at other times Gursky’s parallels seem eerily found or given, as in “Rhein II” (1999), which shows us a slice of the river running in a single straight path and flanked by green lawns in such perfectly straight lines that nature itself defies belief. Or the brilliant “Salerno” (1990), where a view of a harbor becomes mysteriously ordered and arranged in juxtaposed planes: first rows of colored cars, then rows of packing crates, then rows of houses, and finally rows of mountains and the sky. Nature and industry, sports and government, sneakers and mountain ranges, mundane and transcendent–all resolve into the twinned tracks of the parallel in Gursky’s glossy universe.

     

    For mathematicians, the parallel is defined by lines extending to infinity without intersecting. Gursky invites us to imagine that his lines not only go on forever, but that they are everywhere, underlying not only the disciplined orderings of culture but the unconscious life of nature. His parallels suggest a forever beyond the photograph, a forever of lines extending beyond the frames of each image and, more frighteningly, entirely beyond reason, representation, and calculation. Despite the formal harmonies of these photographs, then, Gursky’s infinitely extending lines evoke the sublime. Thus with their beauty comes a kind of terror.

     

    Of course, postmodernity has encountered and embraced the sublime before, as theorized in what are now its most classic articulations. Jean-François Lyotard famously pits the postmodern sublime against the eclecticism of “anything goes.” A genuine postmodernism, refusing to value art according to its profits, launches an enthusiastic defiance of conventional forms and expectations, the desire to “put forward… the unpresentable in presentation itself” (Lyotard 81). If for Lyotard this sublime can happen in Montaigne as well as in Mille Plateaux, Fredric Jameson argues for a sublime particular to the emergence of the vast, decentered complexity of multinational capitalism. Jameson’s sublime, like Lyotard’s, reveals the limits of figuration, but it results specifically from the attempt to grasp the “impossible totality of the contemporary world system” (38).

     

    While Lyotard’s sublime is evoked by unprofitable novelty and Jameson’s sublime emerges from the endless surfaces of a world overtaken by commodification, Gursky’s parallels seem to offer something older, something more metaphysical. In their extension from frame to frame the lines imply a constant, a depth beneath the surface, an underlying pattern or structure. As if Gursky was a faithful reader of Kant, his work appears to present something like an enactment of the Critique of Judgment: his lines offer a formal harmony and also, in their infinite extension, they rupture that harmony; they frame the world and they also break that frame. Thus unlike Jameson’s bewildering postmodern architecture, which dislocates and disorients, Gursky’s photographs embrace an order that is disordered only by the fact that the same forms eerily spread from one photograph to the next. In his allegiance to a venerable formalism, Gursky also seems to invoke an older philosophical paradigm. Indeed, his loving references to Romantic painters reinforce the notion of a sublime that belongs to the late eighteenth century. We see echoes of Caspar David Friedrich in “Seilbahn, Dolomiten” (1987), and we find J. M. W. Turner’s mysterious and illegible landscapes neatly framed by parallel lines in “Turner Collection” (1995).1

     

    If it is possible to see Gursky as the representative of a tradition that is now centuries old, it is worth remembering that both Lyotard and Jameson also locate their definitions of the sublime in Kant. And we can begin to bring Gursky together with these two theorists of postmodernism by recognizing that all three offer us the Kantian sublime in relation to global capitalism. For Lyotard, the sublime is that which unsettles the easy flow of the market by presenting something so unexpected that it does not lend itself to being bought and sold. For Jameson, the sublime is that which exposes our inability to grasp a world entirely overtaken by the endless surfaces of commodification. And for Gursky, the sublime transforms the banality of commodities into the grandeur of the infinite. For all three, the sublime is that which blocks desire and replaces the covetousness of a rampant materialism with a confounding awe.

     

    Notes

     

    Access to other on-line exhibitions of Andreas Gursky’s work may be gained via artcyclopedia. com.

     

    1. Galassi writes that “Turner Collection” is disappointing, “because the trick of reducing masterpieces of painting to generic objects of reverence has become all too familiar” (35). But surely Gursky’s photograph deserves a richer reading than that: by framing Turner’s wild romanticism inside the neatness of parallel lines–not only the frames of Turner’s own work, but the pristine wood floors and moldings that echo the lines of the frames–Gursky contains one kind of sublime inside another. Turner’s sublime of an overwhelming nature is bordered and enclosed by Gursky’s infinitely extending lines, what Kant called the mathematical sublime.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Jameson, Fredric. Postmodernism, or The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. Durham: Duke UP, 1991.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François. The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1984.

     

  • Computable Culture and the Closure of the Media Paradigm

    William B. Warner

    Digital Cultures Project
    Department of English
    University of California, Santa Barbara
    warner@english.ucsb.edu

     

    Review of: Lev Manovich, The Language of New Media.Cambridge, MA: MIT P, 2000.

     

    Most scholars of modern media now agree that the shift of symbolic representation to a global digital information network is as systemic and pervasive a mutation, and as fraught with consequences for culture, as the shift from manuscript to print. Anyone who wants to think clearly about the cultural implications of the digital mutation should read Lev Manovich’s new book, The Language of New Media. This book offers the most rigorous definition to date of new digital media; it places its object of attention within the most suggestive and broad-ranging media history since Marshall McLuhan’s; finally, by showing how software takes us beyond the constraints of any particular media substrate–paper, screen, tape, film, etc.–this book overcomes the media framework indexed by its own title. The Language of New Media leads its reader to confront what is strange yet familiar, that is, uncanny, about the computable culture we have begun to inhabit.

     

    Before characterizing Manovich in greater detail, it is helpful to say what this book is not. Pragmatically focused upon the present contours of computable media, Lev Manovich is neither a prophet nor a doomsayer, peddling neither a utopian manifesto nor dystopian warnings. Manovich also eschews the conceptual purity of those cultural critics who set out to show how new digital media realize the program of Gilles Deleuze, Jean Baudrillard, Jacques Derrida (insert your favorite theorist). Like many raised in the former Soviet Union, Manovich seems inoculated against any explicit aesthetic, conceptual, or political ideology. Instead, Manovich practices a catholicity founded in negative capability: if an art practice or popular media culture has flourished, it is part of the picture, and the critic and historian of media must find a way to account for it. This helps to explain the remarkable scope of Manovich’s book as it ranges easily from analysis of the software/hardware/network infrastructure that supports new media practice to the synthetic efforts to explain what new media is; from contemporary artistic practice to aesthetic theory; from popular media culture to advanced media theory; in short, from the Frankfurt School and Dziga Vertov to the GUI (Graphical User Interface) and Doom.

     

    Defining New Media

     

    What makes new digital media different from old media? Many early answers–discrete versus continuous information, digital versus analog media–founder upon closer inspection. A host of scholars and critics have approached this question from various vantage points: the history of technical culture (Jay David Bolter), hypertext (George Landow), narrative (Janet Murray), architecture (William J. Mitchell), virtual reality (Michael Heim), theatre (Brenda Laurel), and so on.1 From these books there has emerged a series of general traits ascribed to new media. Here are a few: new computer-based media are described as procedural, participatory, and spatial (Murray); discrete, conventional, finite, and isolated (Bolter); liquid (Mitchell); productive of virtuality (N. Katherine Hayles, Heim) or of cyberspace (William Gibson). While these traits and terms have cogency within particular analyses, the attempt to generalize their use brings diminishing returns. Thus Manovich argues that a favorite term to characterize new media–“interactive”–is simply too broad and vague to be critically useful. It not only fails to account for the variety and specificity of new media, the term also tendentiously implies that old media are fundamentally non-interactive. For example, isn’t it part of the critical point of various kinds of modernism to make its audience “interact” with the art object (56)?

     

    Trying to isolate the essential traits of new media repeatedly courts two complementary problems: one may overplay the novelty and difference of new media by ascribing to it traits in fact found in old media (so, for example, random access to packets of data is as old as the codex); or, by restricting attention to the aesthetic or phenomenological effects of new media products, for example by comparing “e-literature” and print literature as formal artifacts (cf. J. Hillis Miller on “the Digital Blake”), one may fail to come to terms with the difference made by what lies at the heart of new media–a computer running software. The sheer familiarity of the personal computer may have encouraged cultural critics to treat the cultural products of the computer (word processing documents, cinema with digital special effects, hypertext) as nothing more than old media enhanced by the flexibility and transportability of digital code and a global network. Thus, in Cybertext, Espen Aarseth has shown how literary theorists who interpret new media genres like hypertext or computer games have reduced them to conceptual terms–like labyrinth, game, and world–that annul the difference for textuality of a computer operating in the background and doing calculations (8, 75). Manovich’s first response to this dilemma is to develop a list of the five intrinsic principles of new media, a cluster of terms that specify the techniques and operations of a computer running software and suggest how an old media sphere is being “transcoded.”

     

    Here is a rather bald restatement of Manovich’s five intrinsic principles of new media. First, through numerical representation, a new object can be described formally (mathematically) and subject to algorithmic manipulation: “in short, media becomes programmable” (27). Second, new media objects have modularity at the level of representation and at the level of code. Thus, new media objects such as a digital film or a web page are composed from an assemblage of elements–images, sounds, shapes, or behaviors–that sustain their separate identity and can be operated upon separately, without rendering the rest of the assemblage unusable. In an analogous fashion, modular programming speeds the development and maintenance of large-scale software (31). Third, numerical coding and modularity “allow for the automation of many operations involved in media creation, manipulation, and access” (32). From the earliest use of computers to target weapons at high speed, to web pages generated on the fly, to intelligent agents that sift and retrieve information, automation achieves speed that is the fulcrum of computer “power.” Fourth, while old media depended upon an original construction of an object that could then be exactly reproduced (for example, as a printed book or photograph), new media are characterized by variability. Thus, browsers and word processors allow users defined parameters; databases allow selective search-sensitive views; web pages can be customized to the user. The variability of new media allows for branching-type interactivity, periodic updates, and scalability as to size or detail (37-38). Finally, new media find themselves at the center of the “transcoding” between the layers of the computer and the layers of culture (46). In new-media lingo, to “transcode something is to translate it into another format” (47). Manovich makes the strong claim that the “computerization of culture gradually accomplishes similar transcoding in relation to all cultural categories and subjects” (47). By using the term “transcoding,” Manovich acknowledges the distance between computer and culture, even as that distance is often dissimulated. Thus, as Manovich explains, the “cultural layers” of a new media object (like Microsoft’s Encarta) might be as familiar as an encyclopedia, but its “computer layers” are process and packet, sorting and matching, function and variable (46).

     

    These admittedly cumbersome five principles don’t seek to specify the computer/software in itself, nor do they characterize the specific media forms it makes possible (like hypertext, computer games, jpegs, web pages, etc). Instead, these five principles characterize that zone between and across which the transport between computer and culture is happening. These five principles offer a commonsense way to specify the capacities and tendencies of that new “universal media machine,” the computer running software: computers use numerical representation and modularity so as to automate functions and offer variability within the media objects that are produced and sustained by them (69). These four tendencies of computer-based media help to win its broader cultural effect, a “transcoding” between computer and culture, so we begin to inhabit the new forms of a computable culture. These general tendencies of a computer running software are what Manovich explores in the rest of the book, a trajectory of analysis that implicitly offers a second answer to the question “what is new media?” While several influential books have sought to embed the computer in the history of media (Bolter and Grusin’s Remediation, Borgmann’s Holding on to Reality, and Levinson’s The Soft Edge), Manovich insists that if one is to take account of the full scope of the new media, one must take account of their different “levels.” He begins at the most basic level with the “operating system” and the human-computer interface, taking account of the inheritance from print and cinema, the salience of the screen, and the body of the user (chapter 2). Moving up to the level of the software applications, Manovich offers broad cultural interpretations of operations like “selection,” “compositing,” and “teleaction” (chapter 3). At the level of user experience, Manovich turns to the “illusions” created by computer-based image making: “synthetic realism” or virtual reality (chapter 4). At the level of new computable media genres, Manovich reads the “database” and “navigable space” as rivals and alternatives to the previously hegemonic cultural form, “narrative” (chapter 5). And finally, Manovich traces the dislocations worked by new media upon what he calls the dominant medium of the 20th century, cinema (chapter 6).

     

    Manovich’s multi-layered topology of new media does not really claim conceptual comprehensiveness: surely new “layers” could be discerned between his layers. Nor does he attempt completeness at the level of media types; hypertext, which plays a large part of the critical survey of new media told by Landow and Aarseth and others writing out of literary studies, plays a rather small role in this book. Manovich’s book of new media draws its methodological rigor from Russian formalism and from the technique of doing a topology. However, that does not mean we have to accept the empiricist anti-idealist assumptions of that approach. One doesn’t have to take this multi-leveled approach to new media literally–as though Manovich has suddenly taken the blindfold from the eyes of critics groping around the elephant of new media–to appreciate the fruitfulness of this approach. Manovich’s topology of new media is based on a self-conscious analogy to the conventional “levels” of the computer hardware and software (from microprocessor through operating system to high-level application). But this analogy works because it allows him to “touch” upon more of the many constituents of computable media, and thus more of the complexity and plurality of new media, than any other critic I have read. Manovich does this by introducing new terms into the analysis of new media. The “language” of his title suggests that the computer, as the new universal media machine, is producing new discourses and new terms, and thus a new “language” in the strong sense of post-structuralism and Russian formalist theory. Manovich’s book implicitly invites the reader to enter into a language game that will develop a lexicon that can do two things: 1) specify with precision the software technique and underlying technology of new media, and 2) open these techniques and technologies out to the broader cultural practices and unsuspected historical affiliations of new media.

     

    This terminological strategy is on display in his development of the term “interface,” the term used in computer science where there is “a point of interaction or communication between a computer and any other entity” (American Heritage Dictionary). Computer culture has given a rich and diverse elaboration to this term because the interface is habitually the crucial boundary, or zone of articulation and translation, whenever a computer would communicate with devices (such as printers, networks, monitors, machines) or the human user. In Interface Culture, Stephen Johnson demonstrates the unprecedented centrality that computers give to the computer human interface. Manovich takes a different approach: he expands the concept of “interface” backward in time so that it encompasses not just the diverse software interfaces of new media (from the desktop Windows environment to the conventions of computer game design) but also the formal traits and user practices with salient media like the printed word and cinema. Rather than viewing the persistence of the printed word and cinema as the indebtedness of new to the old, perhaps by citing Marshall McLuhan’s well-known dictum that each new medium takes an old medium as its content, Manovich argues that the printed word and cinema should be considered not just as media forms but as “cultural interfaces.” Here is how he describes the crucial components of each: “the printed word” includes “a rectangular page containing one or more columns of text, illustrations or other graphic framed by the text, pages that follow each other sequentially, a table of contexts, and index”; cinema “includes the mobile camera, representations of space, editing techniques, narrative conventions, spectator activity” (71). These formal descriptions of “the printed word” and “cinema” uncouple them from their original media so that Manovich can trace how they migrate into, and become part of, the interfaces of new media. Although the human-computer interface is much newer, Manovich insists it has become “a cultural tradition in its own right” (72) featuring “direct manipulations of objects on the screen, overlapping windows, iconic representation, and dynamic menus” (71) along with operations like copy/paste and search/replace. Manovich puts these three cultural interfaces side by side so that we can see that they are richly different ways of “organizing information, presenting it to the user, correlating space and time, and structuring human experience in the process of accessing information” (72). The subsistence of these cultural interfaces at the moment when the printed word and cinema are being “liberated from their traditional storage media–paper, film, stone, glass, magnetic tape” means that a “digital designer can freely mix pages and virtual cameras, tables of content and screens, bookmarks and points of view” (73).

     

    The concept of “cultural interface” suggests what distinguishes this book from many discussions of digital media: its resolutely historical consciousness. Many critics have argued that the digital mutation, through a kind of (historical) retroaction, is enabling us to see earlier events like the “print revolution” in new ways. (For an influential example, see Landow 20-32.) Manovich carries this perspective much further by offering an archaeology of earlier cultural forms and practices that are flowing into, and receiving distinctive inflection within, new media. Thus Manovich’s discussion of the “screen” of the human computer interface [HCI] distinguishes the static screen of traditional painting from the dynamic screen of the moving image (of cinema and TV), and both of these from the screen of real time (of radar, of video feeds). This comparative perspective allows him to ask questions about how each screen places the user and entails certain costs. He shows, for example, the tension between uses of the computer screen to make it, on the one hand, a real-time control panel, and on the other, the site for an absorptive experience which expands the threshold of the visible but imposes stasis on the body of the spectator.

     

    Manovich’s Analytical Engine

     

    My discussion of Manovich’s redefinition of new media does not come to terms with the critical range of this book. With wit and elegance, Manovich coordinates several different agents: the thoughtful critic of modernism, the accomplished scholar of cinema, the innovative practitioner of new media, and the humanist who wears his vast learning lightly. All are needed to do what this book attempts: to crosscut between the full range of contemporary new media (art and popular culture) and the history of visual and technical culture. The analysis achieves a lot of its rhetorical force from the consistent operation of what I would like to call Manovich’s analytical engine. By using the word “engine,” I am seeking to isolate the recurrent movements in his analysis. I can demonstrate this analytical engine as it sorts the implications of one of the “operations” discussed in the third chapter: selection. Although selection appears as an apparently simple and modest operation in many software programs, Manovich insists upon its broader cultural implications. “While operations [like selection] are embedded in software, they are not tied to it. They are employed not only within the computer but also in the social world outside it. They are not only ways of working within the computer but also in the social world outside it. They are… general ways of working, ways of thinking, ways of existing in the computer age” (118).

     

    To suggest the key rhetorical and conceptual moves of Manovich’s analytical engine, I have put them in bold type.

     

    •Manovich begins his overview by offering several empirical examples of selection: he describes the centrality of selection in programs from Adobe Photoshop 5, Macromedia Director 7, and Apple’s Quicktime 4.

     

    •These programs suggest a basic logic of new media, which is expressed as an opening generalization, provocatively overstated: “New media objects are rarely created from scratch; usually they are assembled from ready-made parts. Put differently, in computer culture, authentic creation has been replaced by selection from a menu” (124).

     

    Archaeological questions that situate selection within the long history of visual culture: “What are the historical origins of this new cultural logic?” (125). Manovich describes the way E. H. Gombrich and Roland Barthes have critiqued the romantic ideal of artistic creation and how industrial production prepares for the artistic experiments around 1910 with montage and photomontage, culminating with their use in Metropolis (1923) and other films, and finally, to Pop artists of the 1960s.

     

    • Manovich, playing the journalistic cultural critic, makes a broad and loose cultural connection: “The process of art has finally caught up… with the rest of modern society, where everything from objects to people’s identities is assembled from ready-made parts. Whether assembling an outfit, decorating an apartment, choosing dishes from a restaurant menu, or choosing which interest group to join, the modern subject proceeds through life by selecting from numerous menus and catalogs of items” (126). After a discussion of the branching menu systems of various software program, Manovich refuses to the software user the “author” function of creating something new (128).

     

    • Manovich then poses a provocative question. How can one resist this rhetoric of endless choice through selection, the obligation to choose as a vehicle for expressing your identity? Perhaps by accepting a computer’s and software program’s bland defaults, one can refuse to choose, and thus wear the software equivalent of jeans and a tee shirt.

     

    • Manovich then invokes a new media example to clinch the case for the centrality of selection: “The WWW takes this process [of selection as more pervasive than invention] to the next level: it encourages the creation of texts that consist entirely of pointers to other texts that are already on the Web” (127), cf. Yahoo, Voice of the Shuttle.

     

    •Manovich makes a a detour into the prehistory of cinema: the Magic Lantern exhibitor was also a selector. Crucial to this practice in film and video has been the modern standardization of formats. These allow the cutting and pasting that enables selection to work.

     

    •Manovich makes a cultural connection to art theory (here postmodernism). The technique of pastiche, the quoting of earlier styles, which is widely associated with postmodernism (by Fredric Jameson and others in the early 80s) is seen by Manovich as finding its fullest realization with software: “In my view, this new cultural condition found its perfect reflection in the emerging computer software of the 1980s that privileged selection from ready-made media elements over creating them from scratch” (131).

     

    • Manovich makes a conceptual extension of the concept of selection to that of filtering, in new as well as older electronic media. It is not just selection that is central to new media, but the fact that we can modify what we select through the use of software programs, for example, through using the filters in Photoshop. But this is not a new phenomenon in the history of media. The telephone, the radio, and television were already based on a technology that made selection–through the modification of an existing signal–crucial. “All electronic media technologies of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries are based on modifying a signal by passing it through various filters. These include technologies for real-time communication such as the telephone, as well as broadcasting technologies used for mass distribution of media products such as radio and television….” (132).

     

    • This leads to a retroactive interpretation of older media in light of new media: “In retrospect, the shift from a material object to a signal accomplished by electronic technologies represents a fundamental conceptual step toward computer media. In contrast to a permanent imprint in some material, a signal can be modified in real time by passing it through a filter or filters… an electronic filter can modify the signal all at once… an electronic signal does not have a singular identity–a particular qualitatively different state from all other possible states” (132). Examples include volume control for a radio receiver and brightness control for an analog TV set. “In contrast to a material object, the electronic signal is essentially mutable.” “This mutability of electronic media is just one step away from the ‘variability’ of new media” (132-33).

     

    •This allows Manovich to make an assessment of the difference effected by digital mutation: Now we can see that the mutability of signals suggests that radio and TV signals are “already new media.” “Put differently, in the progression from material object to electronic signal to computer media, the first shift is more radical than the second” (133). The increase in range of variation in the digital is accounted for by two factors: “modern digital computers separate hardware and software” (so for example, changing volume will be just a software change) and second, “because an object is now represented by numbers, that is, it has become computer data that can be modified by software. In short, a media object becomes ‘soft’–with all the implications contained in this metaphor” (133). The mutability of TV (with hue, brightness, vertical hold, etc.) becomes the much wider range of variability for display of a page in a browser window.

     

    • Manovich closes his analysis through a witty invocation of a new cultural practice: The rise of the DJ is seen as cultural symptom of the centrality of the art of selection. “The essence of the DJ’s art is the ability to mix selected elements in rich and sophisticated ways…. The practice of live electronic music demonstrates that true art lies in the ‘mix’ (135).

     

    Manovich’s analytical engine develops here an ordinary term–selection–with which to think about what living in a computable culture means. By his account, selection does not come from the computer running software. It is something humans–artists, consumers, and users–do and have done in a vast range of contexts, perhaps for as long as there has been human culture. Of course, by expanding the range of selectable commodities, modern industrial production has increased the everyday salience of the act of selection. By changing media objects into media signals, modern electronic media have expanded the powers of selection through modulation (of, for example, a radio signal, its volume, etc.). Manovich’s discussion effectively puts aesthetic theorists, moralists, and artists in dialogue around the subject of selection. Such a perspective on “selection” embeds an argument against media determinism he never makes explicit: computable media do not determine culture. The pleasures of selection help to drive the harnessing of a technology that extends the powers of selection. In this way, new media are a symptom of culture, rather than something that comes from outside it (cf. Bruno Latour on technology). Of course, it is also easy to see how selection in real time is greatly facilitated by the first four principles of new media: numerical representation, modularity, automation, and variability. Thus, by the way computers expand the pervasiveness and varieties of selection, computable media bear their effects into culture. My favorite popular cultural expression of this trend: Amy Heckerling’s film Clueless, where the heroine, Cher, begins the day by using a computer to preview and select the outfit she will wear to Beverly Hills High.

     

    Software Theory as a Theory of a-Media; or, Surpassing McLuhan

     

    Although Manovich’s book takes “new media” as its object, there is much in his book to suggest that computable culture unsettles the media paradigm introduced by Marshall McLuhan in the early 1960s. In The Gutenberg Galaxy: The Making of Typographic Man (1962) and Understanding Media: The Extensions of Man (1964), McLuhan introduced a set of terms and concepts that defined media studies. Like any other paradigm shift, McLuhan’s work helped to ground scholarly monographs in the humanities and social sciences (e.g., Elizabeth L. Eisentein’s The Printing Press as an Agent of Social Change). But McLuhan’s ideas also became part of the common sense about media that circulates in daily conversation and the Sunday supplements. To understand how the computer running software challenges the grounding premises of media theory and media history, I will suggest, very briefly, what these grounding ideas are. McLuhan’s invention of modern media theory depends on three related ideas. First, he focuses on the centrality of the physical medium of communication and insists upon the profound mutual imbrication of the medium (the material substrate of the symbolic expression) and the “message” or meaning (ideas, ideology, plausible genres, etc.) Thus the slogan, “the medium is the message.” Second, by emphasizing the way the physical contours of a medium condition the production, use, and experience of media, McLuhan shifts attention from meaning to practice, from what media do in the mind to the way bodies can dispose themselves while communicating. Thus the transformation of the first slogan into its somatic extension in an artist’s book he published with the artist Quentin Fiore in 1967 under the title “the medium is the massage.” Third, McLuhan’s approach to media encourages a broadly comparative study of media: media as different as speech, manuscript, print, radio, and television, as well as other “media” of communication such as the automobile, the airplane, the human body, etc., can be compared with each other as to their defining traits and across their long histories. Although McLuhan’s approach has been exposed to withering critique–for its central premise that [the] media [environment] determines [human] culture, for its facile anecdotal “probes” of media history, and for its quasi-religious belief that electronic media can restore an earlier time of intuitive, embodied communication, McLuhan’s writings offer a particularly ecstatic and credulous version of what Armand Mattelart calls “the ideology of communication” (xi). Nonetheless, any historian of media who accepts the centrality of the category “media” inherits and extends the three basic ideas I have listed above: the centrality of the media substrate, its implications for embodied practice, and the comparability of media. As we have seen, Manovich is a particularly effective practitioner of this sort of media history and analysis.

     

    In the way it applies this framework to “new media,” The Language of New Media also suggests the limits of the media paradigm. For Lev Manovich allows us to grasp this fundamental fact about new media: while computable cultural forms can be understood, for the sake of historical comparison and in our study of modern media culture, as successors to earlier media forms, a computer running software produces digital code which simply is not a medium. Manovich first broaches this complication in his story when he points to the limitations of the comparative historical approach he uses so well. Understanding new media as old media that are now digitized and thereby changed has fundamental limitations:

     

    [This perspective] cannot address the fundamental quality of new media that has no historical precedent–programmability. Comparing new media to print, photography, or television will never tell us the whole story. For although from one point of view new media is indeed another type of media, from another it is simply a particular type of computer data, something stored in files and databases, retrieved and sorted, run through algorithms and written to the output device. That the data represent pixels and that this device happens to be an output screen is beside the point…. New media may look like media, but this is only the surface. (47-48)

     

    The most casual acquaintance with the history of the computer suggests the relative autonomy of computable information from its media “surface.” Over sixty years of development, computers have communicated information to their users first on paper tape, then on computer cards, then on paper from printer output, then on video display screens, and most recently through a simulated voice. Media are not just used for input and output; the information within the computer is stored on computer cards, magnetic tape, floppy disks and hard-drive media, and on the silicon chip (as RAM, ROM, and bubble memory). Of course, this list of media is far from complete, and, in any case, it is subject to ongoing technological extension.

     

    The mobility of information encoded in digital form makes the objects of media study waver. Thus, although some computer code can be expressed as an image that can be printed on glossy paper (and thus resemble a conventional photograph) and other computer code can be expressed as letters on a monitor screen, the physical surface (whether paper or screen) is not the salient aspect of computable information systems. In fact, one of new media’s crucial traits is the way they elude bondage to any medium. How is one to conceptualize this different system so that we grasp not only how it extends the forms and practices of the long history of media, but also the way it simply is not a medium, but (perhaps) a species of a-media? Soon after the passage quoted above, Manovich seems to realize that his definition of new media challenges the media paradigm he still uses for his analytical framework. He invokes the “revolutionary works” of Harold Innis and Marshall McLuhan and insists that we must turn to computer science to understand new media. Then, in a gesture of surpassing that echoes the manifestoes of modernism and post-structuralism, Manovich calls for a fundamentally different approach to computable media: “From media studies, we move to something that can be called ‘software studies’–from media theory to software theory” (48, emphasis Manovich). That Manovich does not heed his own call to go beyond media study and media theory, that he just begins to explain what “software theory” might look like, does not diminish the importance of his having demonstrated the logic of a movement beyond the media paradigm toward one based on the great underlying fact that software is what is really new about new (a-)media.

     

    A computer and its software are much more intimately and essentially co-implicated with one another than a book and its written content, a television and its program. In fact, a computer scientist would be correct to point out that the phrase I’ve been using–“a computer running software”–is tautological. From the first mathematical theorization of the computer as a “universal machine” by Alan Turing, and Turing’s subsequent realization of an early (base 10) computer, the “Bombe,” built to decipher the code produced by the German Enigma machine in WWII (see Singh and Hodges), to John Von Neumann’s first designs for the computer after the war, computers receive their essential character from the software they do not just run but on which they run. When compared with the earlier analog computing devices used to point weapons and automate machinery during World War II, the flexibility and power of the computer running software comes from the way data and the program are loaded into memory at the same time (Bolter 47-49, Turing 436-42), meaning that the computer, unlike the machine, could be reconfigured by the changes introduced at the level of software. Although the phrase “the computer running software” is redundant, it offers a way to emphasize how a relatively immaterial thing–software–invades and dematerializes its supposedly hard home, what is conventionally called “hardware” but what we sometimes mistakenly identify as “the computer.” This is a mistake, not just because hardware needs software the way, by analogy, the human body needs the communications media of neurons, enzymes, and electric signals as a condition of life. From the beginning of computing, even the hardest components of design–the arrangement of circuits and vacuum tubes, the code embedded on read-only memory, and microprocessors made of silicon–were designed to embed “logic blocks” (like “and,” “or,” “invert”) and algorithms first expressed as software (see Hillis 21-38). In other words, there is a very real sense in which the computer is software all the way down.2

     

    How can we begin to think about the difference for media made by software? Manovich shows how software produces uncanny effects upon the cultural and aesthetic sphere it operates within, for example, by challenging the underlying assumptions of the realist project. The long Western commitment to mimesis as a pathway to truth (see Derrida, Disseminations) has gained expression in the development of visual technologies–from the linear perspective of painting to photography to film–that win visual fidelity for the image. It is hardly surprising that the computer running software has been used to develop new and more powerful forms of realism. For example, algorithms embedded in Adobe Photoshop allow a photographer to correct and enhance a photograph. However, the computer also simplifies the production of simulations of what was never photographed, undermining the indexical function of photography and cinema. Manovich has a vivid way of putting this idea: “Cinema is the art of the index; it is an attempt to make art out of the footprint” (295). Digital special effects technologies have enabled Hollywood films to bring a new level of realism to the visually believable representation of the impossible. For example, in Terminator 2 an ordinary policeman seems to morph into a “metal man.” Manovich notes that digital special effects like “metal man” are made possible by the software algorithms that migrate from computer science journals to software programs. Because images within the computer interface can become bit-mapped control panels, the software at the heart of the digital image disturbs the classical image of the Western aesthetic tradition. There it was assumed that the viewer assumed a detached frontal position before the image so as to compare it with “memories of represented reality to judge its reality effect” (183). The new media image summons a more active user: “The new media image is something the user actively goes into, zooming in or clicking on individual parts with the assumption that they contain hyperlinks (for instance, image-maps in Web sites). Moreover, new media turn most images into image-interfaces and image-instruments” (183, emphasis Manovich).

     

    Images supported by software turn out to be fundamentally different from the traditional images they can simulate. In order to fake photorealism, computer software does not enrich but instead downgrades the synthetic image so that we experience it as a photo: it is given the blur, graininess, and texture of the photographic image. We may think of these computer-generated images as inferior to the photographs, but Manovich notes, “in fact, they are too perfect. But beyond that we can also say that, paradoxically, they are also too real” (202, emphasis Manovich).

     

    The synthetic image is free of the limitations of both human and camera vision. It can have unlimited resolution and an unlimited level of detail. It is free of the depth-of-field effect, this inevitable consequence of the lens, so everything is in focus. It is also free of grain–the layer of noise created by film stock and by human perception. Its colors are more saturated, and its sharp lines follow the economy of geometry. From the point of view of human vision, it is hyperreal. And yet, it is completely realistic. The synthetic is the result of a different, more perfect than human, vision. Whose vision is it? It is the vision of a computer, a cyborg, an automatic missile…. Synthetic computer-generated imagery is not an inferior representation of our reality, but a realistic representation of a different reality. (202)

     

    Manovich here gives a trenchant s/f turn to his argument. If we unmoor what is being done from its arbitrary referent (here photorealism as a functional stand-in for “reality”), we can see the uncanny difference of the new digital image: it can go beyond the constraints of social conventions, aesthetic traditions, and even the human perceptual apparatus. The computer running software can serve the old ideals of visual realism, but it can also overturn that logic of appropriation through visual approximation and proceed to do very different things. Thus in Terminator 2, the fact that the metal man comes from the future offers a narrative rationale for his ability to benefit fully from the “reflection mapping algorithm” operating in the software. That algorithm creates the highly unrealistic special effect of a hyper-reflective body. In this way, the “metal man” of T2provides a visual analog of the uncanny perfection, the infinite plasticity, the soft hardness of the computer-generated image as it seems to leap past the limitations of the film medium itself.

     

    An Ethos for Software Studies?

     

    Software studies can teach us skepticism of what might be called the covert idealism of media theory’s materialism: the notion that if one knows the medium of an act of semiosis, then one grasps its essence or inner logic. There are obvious reasons to be distrustful of the reductive tendencies of this sort of materialism. Thus, if a molecular biologist tells us that all central constituents of life–DNA, RNA and proteins–are composed of “nothing” but carbon, oxygen, hydrogen, and nitrogen, we have not learned very much about what life is. For example, the life functions of these molecules–most crucially the capacity to replicate–depend in part upon the way they are folded into 3-dimensional shapes. Similarly, when a cyber critic claims that what distinguishes the computer running software is its use of digital code (bits of 1s and 0s), or that all the algorithms that a computer can perform are combinations of three logical actions: “and,” “or,” and “not,” we have not learned much about the underlying logic of computable culture. However, if software studies gets us to travel too far away from the materialism of media studies, toward a celebration of the “magic” (Bill Gates) and “power” of software code, one soon finds oneself implicated in problematic new fantasies of control and in an idealism based on the immateriality of software.

     

    A glance at the early history of computing suggests that a will to control through the powers of the mind may explain the tendency to go beyond material embodiment. Alan Turing and Norbert Weiner conceived the computer as a machine that could simulate and extend human intelligence, so it could, for example, decipher encrypted enemy messages, target weapons in real time, and perhaps someday rival human intelligence (for example, by beating human chess masters). This project–by emphasizing the distance between the human and the computer–helps to seed the s/f narratives about those robots, artificially intelligent computers, and cyborgs that exceed their assigned functions and return to haunt their human creators. This popular interpretation of the computer as a dangerous “other,” with the diverse techno-gothic scenarios it invites, may have little of the predictive value science fiction craves. Nonetheless, these narratives carry intimations of the uncanny powers of the computer running software. However, by exaggerating the distance between a software technology and the historical and cultural locus of its invention, they also breed popular new ideas of transcendence. For example, in Clarke/Kubrick’s 2001: A Space Odyssey, transcendence takes the form of the final ride where the astronaut morphs into a “star child;” at the end of Gibson’s Neuromancer the mysterious union of the information agents–Wintermute and Neuromancer–leads them to claim that they are now “the matrix” of “the whole show” (269).

     

    Katherine Hayles has developed an analysis that challenges this drift toward transcendence. In her overview of the historical emergence of the concept of information after World War II, she notes that molecular biology helped to popularize the notion that what is crucial to the constitution of human bodies are the patterns of information embedded in genetic code. The hierarchies that quickly creep into these terms breed a new form of idealism. “In the contemporary view, the body is said to ‘express’ information encoded in the genes” (69-70). Hayles shows how in this theory “pattern triumphs over the body’s materiality–a triumph achieved first by distinguishing between pattern and materiality and then by privileging pattern over materiality” (72). By constructing “information as the site of mastery and control over the material world,” this line of thinking suppresses the equally obvious insight that “the efficacy of information depends on a highly articulated material base” (72). In this way, Hayles casts suspicion on the idea that spirit (as code) is superior to matter, an idea she links to Western religious culture and which returns with the ultimate computer fantasy–Han Moravec’s scenario by which humans could achieve immortality by uploading the mind’s information from the brain to a computer (72).

     

    How can we grasp the new powers of software without refusing a necessary embodiment and materiality? The temptations of disembodied transcendence, so prevalent in books on “cyberculture,” make this reader appreciate the way Manovich has balanced the momentum and staying power of traditionally embodied media forms (like the book, cinema, and the screen) with a sustained analysis of what enables the production, networked distribution, and use of “new” media: the computer running software.

     

    Notes

     

    1. The most casual reader of this book will be able to note “where Manovich comes from”–film studies and the history of cinema. But his giving cinema pride of place among twentieth-century cultural production is less an unconscious bias than a conscious strategy. It gives this book on a vast topic (new media) the discursive coherence necessary to reconceptualize new media. Through an irony that obviously pleases Manovich, he is able to show how many of the traits ascribed to new computer-based media can be read off the practice of the Russian 1920s avant-garde filmmaker, Dziga Vertov.

     

    2. Andrew Grove, former CEO of Intel, has conceded the impossibility of making a fundamental categorical distinction between the code embedded in Intel chip designs and the software provided by Microsoft. This became a problem when Intel wanted to embed functions in their chips to prepare them for the use of Java, the open-source programming language developed by Microsoft’s rival, Sun Microsystems. Manovich notes the tendency, over the development of a computer system, to integrate functions first introduced as software into hardware defaults.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Aarseth, Espen. Cybertext: Perspectives on Ergodic Literature. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1997.
    • American Heritage Dictionary. Boston: Houghton, 1992.
    • Bolter, J. David. Turing’s Man: Western Culture in the Computer Age. Chapel Hill: U of North Carolina P, 1984.
    • Bolter, Jay David, and Grusin, Richard. Remediation: Understanding New Media. Cambridge, MA: MIT P, 1999.
    • Borgmann, Albert. Holding on to Reality: The Nature of Information at the Turn of the Millennium. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2000.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Disseminations. Trans. Barbara Johnson. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1981.
    • Eisenstein, Elizabeth L. The Printing Press as an Agent of Change: Communications and Cultural Transformations in Early Modern Europe. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1979.
    • Gibson, William. Neuromancer. New York: Ace, 1984.
    • Hayles, N. Katherine. “The Condition of Virtuality.” Lunenfeld 68-94.
    • Heim, Michael. Virtual Realism. New York: Oxford UP, 1998.
    • Hillis, Daniel. The Pattern on the Stone: The Simple Ideas that Make Computers Work. New York: Basic, 1998.
    • Hodges, Andrew. Alan Turing: The Enigma. New York: Simon, 1983.
    • Johnson, Stephen. Interface Culture: How New Technology Transforms the Way We Create and Communicate. New York: Basic, 1997.
    • Landow, George P. Hypertext 2.0. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1997.
    • Laurel, Brenda. Computers as Theater. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1993, 1991.
    • Levinson, Paul. The Soft Edge: A Natural History and Future of the Information Revolution. New York: Routledge, 1998.
    • Lunenfeld, Peter, ed. The Digital Dialectic. Cambridge, MA: MIT P, 2000.
    • Mattelart, Armand. The Invention of Communication. Trans. Susan Emanuel. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1996.
    • McLuhan, Marshall. The Gutenberg Galaxy: The Making of Typographic Man. Toronto: U of Toronto P, 1962.
    • —. Understanding Media: The Extensions of Man. Cambridge, MA: MIT P, 1994.
    • Miller, J. Hillis. “Digital Blake.” The Digital Cultures Project. 31 October 2000. <http://dc-mrg.english.ucsb.edu/conference/2000/PANELS/BEssick/jhmiller .html>.
    • Mitchell, William J. “Replacing Place.” Lunenfeld 112-128.
    • Murray, Janet. Hamlet on the Holodeck: The Future of Narrative in Cyberspace. New York: Free, 1997.
    • Singh, Simon. The Code Book: The Secret History of Codes and Code-breaking. London: Fourth Estate, 1999.
    • Turing, Alan. “Computing Machines and Intelligence.” Mind: A Quarterly Review of Psychology and Philosophy 236-60 (October 1950): 436-42.

     

  • Information and the Paradox of Perspicuity

    Samuel Gerald Collins

    Dept. of Sociology, Anthropology and Criminal Justice
    Towson University
    scollins@towson.edu

     

    Review of: Albert Borgmann, Holding On to Reality: The Nature of Information at the Turn of the Millennium. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2000.

     

    Reacting against the Boasian study of myths for “historical data,” Claude Levi-Strauss urged anthropologists to look behind myths to what they might reveal of cultural and cognitive structures:

     

    The myth is certainly related to given facts, but not a representation of them. The relationship is of a dialectical kind, and the institutions described in the myths can be the very opposite of the real institutions. This conception of the relation of myth to reality no doubt limits the use of the former as a documentary source. But it opens the way for other possibilities; for in abandoning the search for a constantly accurate picture of ethnographic reality in the myth, we gain, on occasions, a means of reading unconscious realities. (172-73)

     

    The twenty-first century finds the myth-making apparatus producing a surfeit of narratives chronicling the emergence of the “information society.” Some of these posit a decisive break with the past, an information society so different from preceding Fordist or Gutenberg eras as to engender entirely new modes of being. Other works locate the information society at the apex (or the aporia) of developments in culture, politics, or library science. In these, the information society is only explicable in light of earlier epochs–a “Gutenberg Galaxy” giving way to more “cool” mediums, the vertical organizations of Fordism giving way to post-Fordist, flexible networks. But all of these formulations remain “emergent”; the information society has proven notoriously resistant to empirical description, and to argue for a summary break with the past or for a selective genealogy is, in these works, ultimately a metaphysical question. Nevertheless, the tremendous outpouring of commentary suggests that information–whatever its status as a bona fide object of social inquiry–is an important site for cultural work. What is at stake here is, I would suggest, nothing less than the shape of the future: the possibilities engendered in the new and the continuities with what has gone before.

     

    Albert Borgmann’s Holding On to Reality is an ultimately mythological narrative outlining a highly selective vision of the past parlayed into a Procrustean manifesto for the future. Uneasily jumping between Dionysian novelty and Apollonian continuity, Borgmann’s work is, finally, conservative and even Arnoldian, recapitulating the moral-redemptive message of his 1993 Crossing the Postmodern Divide. And yet, there is much here that might prove useful to the student of the information society, even if one sometimes works against Borgmann’s text.

     

    Unlike technocratic definitions of information as a thing, value, or signal:noise ratio, Borgmann’s information is relational: “INTELLIGENCE provided, a PERSON is informed by a SIGN about some THING in a certain CONTEXT” (38). That is, given some pre-acquired information literacy, people are able to ascertain something about the world from signs in a particular social or cultural milieu. It’s this phenomenological reading that has changed over the course of millennia, from Edenic beginnings in “natural information” to the contemporary postmodernity of “technological information.” Ultimately, Borgmann’s information is the motor informing both his historical narrative and his moral judgments on the efficacy of information for modern life.

     

    Like the savage for Rousseau, Native Americans function for Borgmann as the architectonic origin of information, the “ancestral computer,” as it were. The Salish, according to Borgmann, lived in a world characterized by natural information: for example, “Snow-capped Lolo Peak was the sign that pointed the Salish toward the salmon on the other side of the Bitterroot divide” (25). People (with proper knowledge) are surrounded by a world of signs and things in the “fullness” of natural contexts. Humans inhabit an inherently perspicuous world. In any paradise, of course, there must be a myth of the Fall. For the Salish (uncomfortably subsumed as “our” ancestors), this means the erection of monumental signs across the landscape, cairns, and “medicine wheels” that while “well-ordered” and “eloquent” nevertheless gesture to things expelled from the garden of presence. And yet, these monumental signs have only a limited capacity for reference:

     

    Since the informational capacity of the cairn is so small, large tasks remain for the people to whom the cairn is significant. Elaborate instruction and careful memorizing are needed if the message of the sign is to survive. Moreover, since the cairn as a sign is occasion-bound as well as place-bound, it normally carries one and only one message. It is not a vessel that can be used to convey different contents on different occasions. (37)

     

    We can see where Borgmann is going here. In this tale of information theodicy, successive forms of information are already immanent in their predecessors, forms that admit technical advantage while gradually surrendering the antediluvian “fullness” of signs, things, and contexts.

     

    The successor to natural information–that is, “cultural information”–is typified by the emergence of writing: “letters and texts, lines and graphs, notes and scores” (57). Its strength lies precisely in its abstraction from reality, the way that three of the five nodes signified in information “drift into the background,” i.e., “intelligence,” “person,” and “context” recede against the ascendance of “sign” and “thing.” “Writing consists of signs that are about some thing, letters that convey meaning. By itself, writing is not bound to a particular person or context, and its possession requires no particular intelligence” (47).

     

    However, by removing information from natural “presence,” cultural information opens up the world to “structure,” by both exposing structure through the study of nature and imposing structure through the elaboration of musical notation and architectural drawing. By foregrounding signs and things, cultural information begs the question of their ratio, ultimately opening the possibility of the perfect concordance of signs and things. Yet, in the wake of Wittgenstein and in the slow demise of generative grammars, this would seem an impossible goal.

     

    Nevertheless, it is cultural information that, for Borgmann, heralds the development of the sciences and humanities, of the great works that he alternately rhapsodizes and elegizes. It is cultural information that balances perspicuity and nature, reality and structure. In a vast, synthetic panorama, Borgmann turns from Euclid’s postulates to the development of writing and reading culture to Thomas Jefferson’s surveying methodologies to, finally, the architecture of Freiburg Minster, the great medieval church that, for Borgmann, is one of the finest exemplars of cultural information, a monumental structure that is also an “open book” filled with signs.

     

    Combining Romanesque and Gothic elements in the context of the mountainous landscape, Freiburg Minster is manifestly perspicuous but also highly engaged with reality, or what Borgmann begins glossing as “contingency”: “contingency, however, is inherently meaningful and so makes significant information possible. Contingency comes to us as misfortune or good luck, as disaster or relief, as misery or grace” (105). For Freiburg Minster, “contingency” means a succession of builders each appending different designs to the church–Romanesque, Gothic, Renaissance. In other words, it is in the frisson of the contending, contingent whole that we apprehend cultural information.

     

    And yet, as wonderfully balanced as cultural information is, “technological information” is already immanent in the cultural. In the search for ultimate structure and the struggle to impose structure on an obstinately contingent world, physics, mathematics, and, later, cybernetics and information science posit fundamental, fungible elements ultimately constitutive of reality; this will-to-structure generates our “digital” world. “Thus physics and mathematics engendered the hope that, once the elementary particles of information had been found, information theory might devise a semantic engine that would bridge the gap between structural and instructive information” (128). Out of the conjectural interstices of physics and the topologies of mathematics comes an “information space” structured “all the way down” to binary “bits” and, therefore, potentially infinitely transparent and infinitely controllable.

     

    However, by developing an information space, reality itself is elided by this self-contained, infinite perspicuity: signs detach from things, completing the alienation from presence that cultural information began. In a somewhat labored and oddly trivial example, Borgmann explains the difference. Your daughter attends a performance of Bach’s Cantata no. 10 and returns home. In answer to your query, she tells you she’s just attended a performance of Bach’s Cantata no. 10. This corresponds to natural information about reality. In the second case, she returns home and presents you with a score for the Cantata. This is an example of cultural information for reality. In the final case, she returns home and gives you a CD. “The compact disc, finally, can be information about and for reality. But the technological information it contains is distinctively information as reality. Information gets more and more detached from reality and in the end is offered as something that rivals and replaces reality” (182). That is, the performance itself is utterly eclipsed by the world of the compact disc. There is no need to go beyond the information space of the CD. It is all there–absolute presence premised on the absolute absence of context.

     

    It is this progressive disengagement from reality that really irks Borgmann, and he summons up touchingly dated evocations of MUDs and MOOs to drive home his point.

     

    At the limit, virtual reality takes up with the contingency of the world by avoiding it altogether. The computer, when it harbors virtual reality, is no longer a machine that helps us cope with the world by making a beneficial difference in reality; it makes all the difference and liberates us from actual reality. (183)

     

     

    Only signs matter in the hermetic, evacuated worlds of technological information. But by refusing the contingency of the world for self-contained information space, technological information risks triviality, a fatal separation from the “eloquence” of reality. The result, Borgmann suggests, is an unsatisfying life riven with postmodern versions of modern alienation: “anomie 2.1.”

     

    Not surprisingly, Borgmann cautions us to attend to the contingency and ambiguity of reality and balance that against the torpor of technological information.

     

    No amount or sophistication of cultural or technological information can compensate for the loss of well-being we would suffer if we let the realm of natural information decay to one of resources, storage, and transportation. Analogously, nothing so concentrates human creativity and discipline as the austerity of cultural information, provided the latter again is of the highest order, consisting of the great literature of fiction, poetry, and music. Our power of realizing information and our competence in enriching the life of the mind and spirit would atrophy if we surrendered the task of realization to information technology. (219-20)

     

    In a foregone conclusion, Borgmann returns to the idyll of the Montana countryside, interspersed with some unexpected paeans to urban living. For him, the “moral eloquence of reality” can only be achieved through admixtures of Virgilian nature and Arnoldian culture, heir to the Emersonian perambulations Leo Marx explores in The Machine in the Garden; indeed, Borgmann reiterates a well-worn American ambivalence towards technological change and social “tradition.”

     

    So what are we supposed to draw from Borgmann’s triptych? Certainly not lessons on historiography. Holding On to Reality is rife with jarring anachronisms and prolepses. We are told that “Theuth discovered the digital nature of letters” (60). And this “digitality,” moreover, would have resulted in “faultless copying were it not for the foibles of scribes” (81).1 The book of Genesis is testament to the fullness of natural information, with God designing to directly manifest to Moses (rather than send an e-mail with a .jpg attachment). “That there should be information of such magnitude seems incredible or incomprehensible to some of the most thoughtful people today” (32). But these examples, however fanciful, are consistent with the spurious teleology of the whole project. We have to give up much in the way of incredulity to see burial cairns as the ancestors of the CD. In anthropology, we certainly have no compelling reason to think of these things as species of proto-computers. To do so is simply to subsume the past into the present, the Other into the Self, constructing far-flung genealogies that echo the Victorian penchant for unilinear, evolutionary schema–first savages, then barbarians, and finally civilized Europeans. An “Assiniboin Medicine Sign,” a medieval church, a Vedic fire altar: we can only consider these varieties of information if we submerge their cultural and historical contexts, building, as it were, our own hermetically sealed, virtual environments where others are consigned to infinitely reflecting the West. There may be, as anthropologists have pointed out since the end of the nineteenth century, a brief thrill in discovering an information society in the Salish, in Euclid, in incunabulum, but that pleasure is bought at the cost of real understanding.

     

    But while Borgmann’s evolutionary account of “our ancestors” is unconvincing, I find his description of contemporary information compelling. “Technological information” is inherently transparent, e.g., Geographical Information Systems (GIS) can “uncover” successive features of geomorphology. Fourteen hundred digital photos of Freiburg Minster taken by a computerized camera mounted on a helicopter render every detail stunningly clear. Yet, the transparency of technological information may not be analogous to the perspicuity of natural or cultural information:

     

    The word transparency, like clarity, has a double meaning. It denotes both absence and presence. We call information transparent when the fog between us and our object of inquiry has been removed and the medium of transmission has become pellucid. But we also call clear or transparent what has become present once the fog has lifted, the objects or structures we are curious about. (176-77)

     

     

    Borgmann’s point–though deeply imbricated in a metaphysics of presence–is that information implies both transparency and occlusion, the foregrounding of some signs and the active suppression of others. Back at the aforementioned Freiburg Minster, site of cultural information’s triumph, another sort of knowledge has been suppressed. Despite heroic portrayals of many Old Testament motifs that “generally reflect the genial and cooperative relations” between Jewish and Christian citizens, Freiburg excelled–for over five hundred years–in brutal anti-Semitism (116). Is this information part of the church, or is this information in spite of the church?

     

    Part of the context in the relationship that enables information must be institutional. Surely, cultural and technological information doesn’t just exist “out there” to be apprehended by monadic intellects. Information is instead produced by governments, universities, and corporations. And it may be in the interest of institutions to suppress information even as they produce it. In the course of my research on the information society at the Library of Congress, I attended a staff introduction to the LC’s National Digital Library. In response to Head Librarian James Billington’s proclamation that the digital collection would concentrate on “American memory,” one of the staffers asked if Latin American or South American materials would be included. Billington angrily retorted that only U.S. materials would be digitized. Was there nothing in Latin or South American histories germane to U.S. history? And what does it mean to distance “U.S. history” from its military and mercantile past in these regions? We may be able to understand Billington’s summary comments, however, in the context of a budget-cutting Congress and the growing importance of corporate sponsorship in which philanthropy is oftentimes synonymous with public relations. This context is vital to the production (and reduction) of information.2

     

    By the 1960s, commentators would complain that we are awash in too much information, that, inundated with “data smog,” we suffer from “information anxiety.” The prescription for this postmodern malaise is the establishment of “limits” and “boundaries.” As Saul Wurman advises in Information Anxiety, “the secret to processing information is narrowing your field of information to that which is relevant to your life, i.e. making careful choices about what kind of information merits your time and attention” (317). This is a formidable task. Any perfunctory internet search opens onto a jumble of widely brachiating topics, each exhibiting considerable variance in relevance and banality. Efforts at limiting information, however, are immensely helped by the shape of technological information itself.

     

    As Borgmann demonstrates in an interesting chapter on Boolean architecture in information processing, technological information is binary–it is “on” or “off,” “yes” or “no.” “Between input and output, however, there is nothing but the pure structure of yeses or noes” (147). Either the file is there, or it is not; either the hyper-links are there, or they aren’t. Technological information may be hyperbolically fecund in a media-saturated, internetworked world, but it is also easier to control, to parse “all the way down.”

     

    As I write this review, the United States is engaged in a military campaign in Afghanistan. It is very much a physical battle, with many Afghani casualties, but it is also a war of information, with the United States battling its “information other,” the flexible, post-Fordist al-Qaida network.3 The United States seeks to expand its information network at all costs–detaining immigrants, seizing bank accounts, renewing a campaign of cloak-and-dagger espionage. At the same time, it tries to limit information output, winning seemingly complete complicity from news corporations in not reporting, underreporting, or misreporting details of U.S. military maneuvers and tactics. Al-Qaida seems equally invested in the occlusion of perspicuity, sundering the binary linkages in its network at the onset of U.S. investigations. On the other hand, deliberate misinformation abounds: the London Sunday Telegraph reported that, in a particularly postmodern subterfuge, Osama bin Laden has as many of 10 doubles of himself in Afghanistan (Hall and Rayment).

     

    In military communications, information is subsumed into C3I (Command, Control, Communications and Information). But, as an organizational form, the information society demands this kind of vigilant surveillance of all institutions: proprietary knowledge and spin control have arisen alongside any putative information explosion. Additionally, insofar as we have all become–à la C. Wright Mills–“organization” people, we have also been interpellated as information managers, separating public from private lives, taking care to control our appearance under the surveillant glare of the corporation and the state. In other words, not enabling information is as important as enabling it; in binary logic, “information” and “no-information” are meaningful values constituting the program of advanced capitalism. To re-work Borgmann’s initial formulation, “INTELLIGENCE provided, a PERSON is informed about a SIGN about some THING and NOT ABOUT some OTHER THING in a certain CONTEXT” (38). Erasing those errant or critical linkages to alternative things, meanings, and identities has been the great defining element in an era of technological information, resulting in an information black hole right alongside the information explosion. Alternatives to capitalism, local struggles, dialectical theorizing–all of these have disappeared into an event horizon even as other information overwhelms the public sensorium.

     

    Notes

     

    1. The “copy” has had a very long history, from Plato’s denunciations in The Republic to Benjamin’s “The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction” and beyond. Monks copying the Vulgate are doing something rather different than I do when I download MP3 files!

     

    2. This is a serious–and telling–omission in Borgmann’s book. Anthony Giddens, Herbert Schiller and many others have examined political economies of information, while Borgmann considers only IT theorists (cf. Shannon and Weaver).

     

    3. Al-Qaida appears (in the U.S. press, at least) to employ the same sorts of “flexible accumulation” strategies as transnational corporations, making them the perfect foil of advanced capitalism, the ideal enemy in the post-socialist imaginary.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Borgmann, Albert. Crossing the Postmodern Divide. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1993.
    • Giddens, Anthony. The Nation-State and Violence. Cambridge: Polity, 1985.
    • Hall, Macer, and Sean Rayment. “Ring ‘Closing’ on bin Laden.” Sunday Telegraph [London] 18 Nov. 2001.
    • Lévi-Strauss, Claude. Structural Anthropology. Vol. 2. New York: Basic, 1976.
    • Marx, Leo. The Machine in the Garden: Technology and the Pastoral Ideal in America. [1964] New York: Oxford UP, 2000.
    • Schiller, Herbert. Culture, Inc.: The Corporate Takeover of American Expression. New York: Oxford UP, 1989.
    • Schwartz, Hillel. The Culture of the Copy: Striking Likenesses, Unreasonable Facsimiles. New York: Zone, 1996.
    • Shannon, Claude E., and Warren Weaver. The Mathematical Theory of Communication. Urbana, IL: U of Illinois P, 1964.
    • Wurman, Richard Saul. Information Anxiety. New York: Doubleday, 1989.

     

  • Maintaining the Other

    Kelly Pender

    Rhetoric and Composition Program
    English Department
    Purdue University
    penderk@purdue.edu

     

    Review of: Simon Critchley, Ethics, Politics, Subjectivity: Essays on Derrida, Levinas, and Contemporary French Thought. London: Verso, 1999.

     

    In his latest collection of essays, Ethics, Politics, Subjectivity, Simon Critchley extends and modifies the discussion of deconstruction and ethics that he put forward in his earlier book, The Ethics of Deconstruction. Like that earlier work, Ethics, Politics, Subjectivity examines the nature–or rather, the possibility–of ethics and politics after (or during) deconstruction in relation primarily to the work of Jacques Derrida and Emmanuel Levinas. In contrast to his position in the earlier book, however, Critchley’s reading or assessment of Levinasian ethics in Ethics, Politics, Subjectivity is, as he puts it, “a critical reconstruction” (ix). Specifically, he extends, deepens, and modifies his arguments about the “persuasive force” of Levinasian ethics in regard to deconstruction. One way of reading Ethics, Politics, Subjectivity (a way that Critchley seems to encourage in the preface) is to see the culmination of this consideration of the subject in his affirmation of the political possibilities of deconstruction (chapter 12).

     

    However, because Critchley investigates subjectivity outside the issues of deconstruction and politics, it would be unfortunate to read his essays strictly in terms of such a culmination. For instance, his discussions of subjectivity, ethics, sublimation, and art in “The Original Traumatism: Levinas and Psychoanalysis” (chapter 8) and in “Das Ding: Lacan and Levinas” (chapter 9) provide a reconstruction (or an additional reading) of Levinasian ethics outside of the question of politics. In addition, and more importantly in regard to the aims of this review, Critchley’s careful treatment of subjectivity distinguishes Ethics, Politics, Subjectivity from a number of “postmodern” treatises on the subject. It is, I think, this carefulness (which is enacted as much as it is expressed) that makes the strongest case for the political possibilities of deconstruction.

     

    When I say “postmodern” treatises on the subject, I am referring to the work in a number of fields (e.g., literary theory, rhetoric and composition, and cultural studies) that takes for granted the dissolution of the humanist subject, declares its epiphenomenal status, and then celebrates postmodernism’s victory over the Enlightenment, or homo rhetoricus‘s victory over homo seriosus, often taking for granted the ascendancy of ethics over politics. Often these arguments contend that politics are based on the assumption that humans are free to deliberate on issues, to express opinions, and take collective action. However, since the means of reaching consensus are always already predetermined by hegemonic, capitalistic forces, the political endeavor–as traditionally understood, for example, in terms of various ideologies of the Enlightenment–is a doomed endeavor. It is on this basis that some scholars attempt to distinguish the ethical from the political, and in doing so advocate new modes of subjectivity or post-subjectivity–for instance, following Deleuze and Guattari, the schizophrenic or rhizomatic modes; following Baudrillard, the seductive mode; and following Gorgias, the sophistic mode. In fact, it is the question of subjectivity that seems to drive these arguments; that is, the exigency for their discussion of ethics and politics is the dissolution of the humanist subject. While I do not want to imply that such arguments are simplistic or unwarranted (since Quintilian’s “good man speaking well” is indeed alive and thriving), I do want to suggest that this exigency potentially leads to totalizing conceptions of the subject, or, conversely, of the dissolution of the subject, as well as problematic conceptions of the relationship between ethics and politics.

     

    It is precisely this exigency that Critchley problematizes in his third chapter, “Post-Deconstructive Subjectivity.” By turning Heidegger’s critique of Husserl (and Descartes) back onto Heidegger, Critchley explores the possibility of a conception of the subject outside of metaphysics. Specifically, he argues that the very grounds that distinguish Dasein from a contemplative subject (the openness to the call to Being) can be read metaphysically, which is to say that they can be read as modes of authentic selfhood. “It is Dasein,” he claims, “who calls itself in the phenomenon of conscience, . . . and the voice of the friend that calls Dasein to its most authentic ability to be . . . is a voice that Dasein carries within it” (58). Based on this Heideggerian argument, then, there is no subject outside of metaphysics. From this position, Critchley questions the history and the presuppositions entailed in the idea of a post-metaphysical subject. Among these presuppositions, he contends, is the idea that we have achieved an “epochal break in the continuum of history.” “For reasons that one might call ‘classically’ Derridian,” he continues, “all ideas of exceeding the metaphysical closure should make us highly suspicious, and the seductive illusions of ‘overcoming’, ‘exceeding’, ‘transgressing’, ‘breaking through’, and ‘stepping beyond’ are a series of tropes that demand careful and persistent deconstruction” (59).

     

    Indeed, Critchley finds problematic the very argument that there was a metaphysical res cogitans, a subject of representation, in Descartes’s work–a paradigmatic case and a key starting point in the history of the idea of the unified subject. It is because this unified self has been retrospectively projected onto all conceptions of the subject since Descartes that Critchley sees the history of modern philosophy as (in part) “a series of caricatures or cartoon versions of the history of metaphysics, a series of narratives based upon a greater or lesser misreading of the philosophical tradition” (60). “Has there ever existed a unified conscious subject, a watertight Cartesian ego?” he asks (59).

     

    Although Critchley’s response to the question is “no,” he does not advocate a pre-Heideggerian conception of the subject, the subject that is outside metaphysics. In other words, Critchley argues, following John Llewelyn, that we must seek a conception of the subject that tries to avoid the metaphysics of subjectivity without falling into the metaphysical denial of metaphysics (73). Critchley finds this attempt in Levinasian ethics–in its nuanced account of metaphysics, subjectivity, and the relation between subjective experience and the other. For Critchley, what’s most important in Levinasian ethics is the shift from intentionality to sensing, which is to say the shift from representation to enjoyment. As Critchley puts it, “Levinas’s work offers a material phenomenology of subjective life. . . . The self-conscious, autonomous subject of intentionality is reduced to a living subject that is subject to the conditions of its existence” (63). It is because of this sentience that the I is capable of being called into question by the other. The I, in fact, is more accurately a me in Levinasian ethics and subjectivity in that the subject is subject precisely because it (its freedom) undergoes the call of the other. According to Critchley, then, the (post-) Levinasian conception of the subject does not react conservatively to the poststructuralist or antihumanist critique of subjectivity by trying to rehabilitate the free, autarchic ego (70). Rather, it needs these discourses in order to conceive of the subject as non-identical, overflowed, and dependent on that which is it incapable of knowing. “Levinasian ethics,” Critchley contends, “is a humanism, but it is a humanism of the other human being” (67).

     

    In the final section of the essay, Critchley argues that the Levinasian conception of the sentient, ethical subject is very close to the kind of postdeconstructive subjectivity sought by Derrida. According to Critchley, Derrida has called for a “new determination of the ‘subject’ in terms of responsibility, of an affirmative openness to the other prior to questioning” (71). While Critchley does not suggest that Derrida is referring only or directly to Levinas’s conception of the subject, he does stress the consonance between the subject that is formed by non-comprehensible experience of the other and the postdeconstructive subject alluded to by Derrida. He claims, for instance, that the determination of the Levinasian subject “takes place precisely in the space cleared by the anti-humanist and post-structuralist deconstruction of subjectivity” (73). What’s more, according to Critchley, is that Levinas offers a metaphysical account of ethics and the subject while simultaneously displacing and transforming metaphysical language. For example, in Levinas’s work, “ethics” is transformed to mean “a sensible responsibility to the singular other”; “metaphysics” becomes “the movement of positive desire tending towards infinite alterity,” and “subjectivity” is “pre-conscious, non-identical sentient subjection to the other” (75). As a result of these conceptual shifts, he argues, the Levinasian subject avoids predeconstructive metaphysics, or intentionality, without attempting a Heideggerian denial of metaphysics.

     

    In “Deconstruction and Pragmatism: Is Derrida a Private Ironist or a Public Liberal?” (chapter 4), Critchley moves away from a direct discussion of subjectivity in order to consider the political/public potentialities of deconstruction. Specifically, by taking issue with Richard Rorty’s classification of Derrida as a private ironist, he articulates a connection between Rorty’s conceptions of the public and the liberal ironist and Derrida’s conception of justice and thereby argues for the public value of deconstruction. Critchley begins this argument by problematizing the grounds upon which Rorty’s classification of Derrida depends. For Rorty, Critchley explains, Derrida is a private ironist because his projects have become individualized projects of self-creation or self-overcoming–they have become non-argumentative, oracular discourses that do not address the problems of social justice (95). In Critchley’s view, Rorty’s claim (his developmental thesis) depends upon a reductive periodization of Derrida’s work, as well as a foundational conception of argument or public discourse. Moreover, Critchley argues that what Rorty has observed is not a change in the public significance of Derrida’s work, but rather a shift “from a constative form of theorizing to a performative mode of writing, or, in other terms, from meta-language to language” (96).

     

    What ultimately problematizes Rorty’s classification, however, is the connection that Critchley sees between Rorty’s definition of public liberal and Derrida’s conception of justice. For Rorty, the public is defined as that which is concerned with “‘the suffering of other human beings’, with the attempt to minimize cruelty and work for social justice” (85). According to Critchley, this definition of the public (of liberalism) attempts to ground the criterion for moral obligation in a “sentient disposition that provokes compassion in the face of the other’s suffering” (90). This criterion, he continues to argue, is found in Levinasian ethics–it is the ethical relation to the other that takes place at the level of sensibility. In addition, this criterion is found in Derrida’s conception of justice. As Critchley explains it, “Derrida paradoxically defines justice as an experience of that which we are not able to experience, which is qualified as ‘the mystical’, ‘the impossible’, or ‘aporia’ . . . an ‘experience’ of the undecidable” (99). And for Derrida, it is the experience of justice–of the unknowable–that propels one forward into politics. Critchley is careful not to suggest that Derrida locates justice in politics. To the contrary, Derrida believes that no political decision can embody justice; however, no political should be made without passing through the aporia–the face to face–of justice. Critchley concludes, then, that “what motivates the practice of deconstruction is an ethical conception of justice, that is, by Rorty’s criteria, public and liberal” (102).

     

    While he certainly does not collapse the distinction between ethics and politics in this chapter, Critchley, through his interpretation of Derrida’s conception of justice, does cast doubt upon any kind of ethics/politics polemic. Put another way, I think that by destabilizing Rorty’s private/public distinction, Critchley opens up a space in which notions such as the “post-political” can be examined and possibly understood in light of more nuanced accounts of deconstruction. Moreover, Critchley’s argument for a Levinasian conception of subjectivity as the ethical basis of deconstruction (even if it is a more cautious or reconstructed argument) calls into question the kinds of subjectivity (schizophrenic, sophistic, etc.) that some scholars see as part and parcel of the poststructuralist deconstruction of the subject. Like Critchley, many of these scholars theorize a new kind of politics that comes after the ethical experience, after the deconstructive aporia. Requisite to experiencing this aporia, however, is a kind of Dionysian or Deleuzian subjectivity–an unhinging of desires or an experience of the multiple within the individual. The problem here, and it is a problem well illuminated in chapter 3, is that in the space left by the exiled humanist, metaphysical subject, these kinds of arguments insert yet another metaphysical subject. In other words, this subject, as well as the ethics derived from it, is something we can know and control–something that we can enact or release at the level of language by obfuscating meaning, identity, and representation. As a result, the aporia is playfully characterized as a utopian dimension of discourse–or worse, as an intellectual enterprise in which one can participate through self-reflexive, parodic, paradoxical, and digressive ways of writing. And it is by virtue of this characterization that the subject, it seems, is once again reduced to representation.

     

    Critchley takes up this issue of representation, or thematization, in his discussion of Levinasian ethics and psychoanalysis in chapter 8, “The Original Traumatism: Levinas and Psychoanalysis.” Here Critchley argues that Levinas attempts to articulate the relation to the other in a series of “termes éthiques“: accusation, persecution, obsession, substitution, hostage, and trauma (184). Like Levinas, Critchley points out that this attempt is an attempt to thematize the unthematizable; it is a phenomenology of the unphenomenologizable (184). Quite contrary to Levinas, however, Critchley sees this language as indicative of a psychoanalytic understanding of the unconscious. Of particular interest to Critchley is Levinas’s use of the term “trauma.” He writes, “Levinas tries to thematize the subject that is, according to me, the condition of possibility for the ethical relation with the notion of trauma. He thinks the subject as trauma–ethics is a traumatology” (185).

     

    Critchley’s question to Levinas (a question which he admits is in opposition to Levinas’s intentions) is: “What does it mean to think the subject–the subject of the unconscious–as trauma?” (188). To begin with, according to Critchley, thinking the Levinasian subject as trauma means that the ethical relation “takes place at the level of pre-reflective sensibility and not at the level of reflective consciousness” (188). More specifically, and based on the “Substitution” chapter of Otherwise than Being, Critchley writes that the subject as trauma is a subject utterly responsible for the suffering that it undergoes–it is a subject of persecution, outrage, and suffering. He later describes this original traumatism as a deafening traumatism, as “that towards which I relate in passivity that exceeds representation, i.e. that exceeds the intentional act of consciousness, that cannot be experienced as an object” (190). “In other terms,” he continues, “the subject is constituted–without its knowledge, prior to cognition and recognition–in a relation that exceeds representation, intentionality, symmetry, correspondence, coincidence, equality and reciprocity, that is to say, to any form of ontology, whether phenomenological or dialectical” (190).

     

    Despite Levinas’ resistance to psychoanalytic theory, Critchley believes that his conceptions of the subject and the ethical relation depend on, to put it in Lacanian terms, “a relation to the real, through the non-intentional affect of jouissance, where the original traumatism of the other is the Thing, das Ding” (190). Without this notion or mechanism of trauma, Critchley claims, there would be no ethics in the Levinasian sense of the word (195). Taking this connection further, he writes that “without a relation to trauma, or at least without a relation to that which claims, calls, commands, summons, interrupts or troubles the subject . . . there would no ethics, neither an ethics of phenomenology, nor an ethics of psychoanalysis” (195). Finally, foreshadowing his argument in chapter 12, Critchley contends that without this ethical relation, one could not conceive a politics that would refuse the category of totality. It is the absence of this ethical relation–this passivity towards the other–that seems to limit, if not debilitate, so many other recent discussions of ethics, politics, and subjectivity.

     

    In chapter 12, “The Other’s Decision in Me (What are the Politics of Friendship?),” Critchley focuses primarily on the question of a non-totalizing politics, positioning his previous discussions of subjectivity as a context for his argument. As he explains early in the essay, through a reading of Blanchot’s Friendship, as well as a reading of Derrida’s reading of Blanchot in The Politics of Friendship, Critchley examines this question in regard to Derrida’s recent Adieu to Emmanuel Levinas. By way of this discussion of friendship, and its relation to the public and the private and to politics, Critchley argues that despite the connections between Derrida’s conception of “sur-vivance” (his attempt to think a nontraditional conception of the passive decision of friendship that is linked to mortality) and Levinas’s ethical relation to the other, there is an important distance between Derrida’s work and that of Levinas. Critchley sees this distance as the result of five problems in Levinas: (1) the idea of fraternity, (2) the question of God, (3) his androcentric conception of friendship, (4) the relation of friendship to the “family schema,” and (5) the political fate of Levinasian ethics in regards to the question of Israel (273-74).

     

    With these problems in mind, Critchley goes on to provide a positive reading of Derrida’s position on politics in Adieu. According to Critchley, although Derrida recognizes the gap in Levinas’s work in regard to the path from the ethical to the political, he does not read it as paralysis or resignation. On the contrary, this hiatus, says Critchley, “allows Derrida both to affirm the primacy of an ethics of hospitality, whilst leaving open the sphere of the political as a realm of risk and danger” (275). It is this danger that allows for what Derrida refers to as “political invention”–an invention or creation that arises from “a response to the utter singularity of a particular and inexhaustible context” (276). Critchley then describes this response as both non-foundational and non-arbitrary–which is to say that it is a response that is both unknowable and passive. It is in this respect that Critchley relates political invention to Derrida’s nontraditional conception of friendship, his notion of “the other’s decision is made in me” (277). In summary Critchley writes that “what we seem to have here is a relation between friendship and democracy, or ethics and politics . . . which leaves the decision open for invention whilst acknowledging that the decision comes from the other” (277).

     

    As I have argued throughout this review, it is the acknowledgment of the other that distinguishes Ethics, Politics, Subjectivity from so many other works on subjectivity, ethics, and politics. Without this acknowledgment, that is, without being affected by a consideration of the incomprehensible or unthematizable, these works risk a kind of totality–they risk saying what the subject is (a fragmented stream of desires) and what it isn’t (a unified, coherent self). That they can know undermines their discussions of the other, reducing it at times to a trope. This is not to say that all discussions of subjectivity, ethics, and politics must be Levinasian. However, since they tend to use this term, “other,” in addition to many Derridian terms, in order to wage war on metaphysics, the Enlightenment, and humanism, it seems that closer readings of deconstruction, subjectivity, ethics, and politics are called for. Critchley has begun to answer that call.

     

    Work Cited

     

    • Llewelyn, John. The Middle Voice of Ecological Conscience: A Chiasmic Reading of Responsibility in the Neighborhood of Levinas, Heidegger, and Others. New York: St. Martin’s P, 1991.

     

  • The Deus Ex-Machina

    Juan E. de Castro

    Division of Liberal Arts and International Studies
    Colorado School of Mines
    jdecastr@mines.edu

     

    Review of: Jerry Hoeg, Science, Technology, and Latin American Narrative in the Twentieth Century and Beyond.Bethlehem, PA: Lehigh UP, 2000.

     

    During the electoral process of 1990, Alberto Fujimori, a little-known agricultural engineer and academic, stormed the Peruvian political scene. One of the keys to his mass appeal lay in his often-repeated promise to bring “honradez, tecnología y trabajo” (honesty, technology, and jobs) to Peru. This slogan responded directly to the concerns of a country fed up with the demagogy, corruption, and inefficiency of then-President Alan García’s regime. However, while the slogan implies, at least in part, a moral and political critique of García’s failed populism, Fujimori’s reference to tecnología signifies his campaign’s privileging of technology as the solution to the problems of Peru. Thus one can argue that Fujimori’s propagandistic mantra was also implicitly directed against the presidential candidate then leading the polls, the internationally renowned novelist Mario Vargas Llosa.

     

    It is, therefore, possible to see in this election a sign of contemporary Latin American attitudes regarding what C.P. Snow once called “the two cultures” (scientific versus humanistic). Faced with the choice between an engineer and a man of letters, and by implication between technological and humanities-based paradigms for the interpretation of and solution to the country’s problems, the Peruvian population decided in favor of the technocrat.1 At the dawn of the twentieth century, the Uruguayan José Enrique Rodó could, in his classic essay Ariel, argue for the superiority of a supposedly spiritual and artistic Latin America over a more developed, in technological and material terms, United States. But, by the end of the century, the privileging of technology–seen as neutral, apolitical, and necessarily positive–was a tenet held by large sectors of the population of Peru and the region as a whole, as demonstrated in part by the electoral success of Fujimori. While this faith in technological development as the solution to all social problems echoes discourses popular in the “First World” media, it also reflects the desire of Latin America’s population to break the cycle of poverty in which the region has been trapped. However, in one of the great ironies in Peruvian history, Fujimori’s now fortunately defunct regime has left the country mired in corruption, unemployment, poverty, and, of course, technological underdevelopment. Nevertheless, it is doubtful whether Fujimori’s failure has significantly altered Latin American or even Peruvian attitudes toward technology.

     

    This centrality of technology in contemporary Latin American political discourse gives special relevance to Jerry Hoeg’s Science, Technology, and Latin American Narrative in the Twentieth Century and Beyond. This book consists of a series of powerful and persuasive interpretations of Latin American texts that emphasize the ideas (both explicit and implicit) regarding technology and science to be found in them. Hoeg’s readings are rooted in a theoretical framework that fuses Martin Heidegger’s and José Ortega y Gasset’s “philosophies of technology,” Cornelius Castoriadis’s notion of the “Social Imaginary,” and concepts originating in communications science, such as “code” and “redundancy.” From Heidegger and Ortega, Hoeg takes the idea that “the essence of our present technological era is nothing technological, but rather the product of a higher level mediation. Heidegger calls this mediation das Ge-stell, while Ortega refers to it as the social construction or definition of bienestar or well-being” (11).

     

    Hoeg sees Ge-stell/bienestar as defining the central code of the West, what Hoeg, following Castoriadis, terms its “Social Imaginary” (18).2 Using the concepts of Ge-stell/bienestar and that of the Social Imaginary, Hoeg deconstructs the traditional opposition between science and the humanities. Rather than presenting them as dichotomous, he believes that both technology and the humanities, especially literature, express in different, occasionally even contradictory, manners the same societal Ge-stell/bienestar. From the point of view of communications science, technology and literature can, therefore, be interpreted as examples of “the redundancy necessary to protect the message against the perturbations of a ‘noisy’ environment. . . . Without this coding or redundancy, a given society must necessarily succumb to the effects predicted by the Second Law of Thermodynamics, that is, it would become more and more entropic over time, until it eventually dissolved into complete disorder” (30). Thus, for Hoeg,

     

    Literature, technology, and science are among the societal messages that help constitute a Western society/communications system built upon a Ge-stell/ bienestar (and Social Imaginary) that has ultimately led not only to “controlling nature” and its side-consequences of ecological degradation, but also to “controlling humanity” and the decomposition of any semblance of social equity. (63)

     

    While the Latin American “cult of technology” is generally linked to the embrace of economic neoliberalism and the celebration of the United States (understood as the Mecca of consumerism and unbridled free markets) as the privileged societal model, Hoeg presents his analysis as oppositional to the current economic, political, and social order.3 In fact, he claims “the ultimate aim of this inquiry is to shed light on the possibility of constructing alternative codes or mediations which will produce sociotechnical messages of empowerment rather than domination” (10). And this desire for a radical change in the current Social Imaginary leads him to speculate on the possibility of a Heideggerian “Turning” from the Ge-stell that has led to our current ecological and social impasses and that would thus bring “a new coding of the relationship between nature, society, and technics [uses of technology]” (22-23). Moreover, based on his vision of society as a communications system, as well as on Ortega’s notion of bienestar as socially constructed, he believes one can assign to literature and literary criticism a central role in this possible “Turning”: “The fact that a given society’s ‘system of necessities’ is constrained and mediated by the Social Imaginary raises the question of the possible influence of literature in reshaping that Social Imaginary” (38). Hoeg not only breaks down the opposition between science/technology and the humanities/literature, he identifies the latter as a possible source of change of the Ge-stell/bienestar and the Social Imaginary.

     

    From this brief and, of necessity, incomplete summary of Hoeg’s complex theoretical framework, it should be clear that Science, Technology, and Latin American Narrative is built on a contrary philosophical base that, while not invalidating the study’s importance, is symptomatic of certain characteristic problems faced by criticism in the present political and theoretical conjuncture. But, as we will see, Hoeg’s selection of texts and his interpretation of Latin American reality camouflage the theoretical disjunctions present in this study.

     

    These contradictions are directly linked to Hoeg’s simultaneous reliance on Heidegger and Ortega. Hoeg himself notes that:

     

    A key distinction between the view postulated by Ortega and that adumbrated by Heidegger concerns the role of technics in human socio-cultural activity. For Heidegger, the imposition of a certain metaphysical enframing or Ge-stell–the Social Imaginary–is an essential feature of the Western human condition which leads inevitably to our current technological society. For Ortega, on the other hand, the technics used to realize the creative projects of humanity can also lead to symbolic rather that [sic] imaginary constructions, that is, to cultural messages, such as art or literature, which can produce a society whose relations with the real are not predominantly rationalist or metaphysical. (20)

     

    In other words, the appropriation of Heidegger’s concept of das Ge-stell necessarily leads to a deterministic vision of the development of Western culture. Western civilization–which now includes the whole world–is thus a system that can only develop in the direction pre-programmed by the Ge-stell. True change is precluded. It is, therefore, not surprising that Heidegger sees the “Turning” in mystical, even messianic terms:

     

    But the surmounting of a destining of Being–here and now the surmounting of Enframing–each time comes to pass out of the arrival of another destining that does not allow itself to be either logically or historically predicted or to be metaphysically construed as a sequence belonging to a process of history. (qtd. in Hoeg 22)

     

    Unpredictable and nearly inconceivable, the “Turning” implies the irruption into the closed system of Western civilization of an unknown and unknowable external element capable of making visible the until-then “concealed truth” of the prevailing Ge-stell and, therefore, of presenting an alternative road that can lead to the “surmounting” of the path trodden, according to Heidegger, by our culture since Socrates. But Ortega’s bienestar, at least in Hoeg’s interpretation, includes social change in its definition. As society changes, and as the discourses society produces change, bienestar can change. Bienestar thus not only determines history, but is also historically determined. Beneath the obvious similarities, Ge-stell and bienestar are, therefore, irreconcilable concepts.

     

    This tension between the Heideggerian and Ortegan poles is present throughout Science, Technology, and Latin American Narrative. Hoeg’s simultaneous reliance on bienestar and Ge-stell leads him to a contradictory search for possible agents of the “Turning” and a simultaneous dismissal of these same agents. Building on Ortega and communications science, Hoeg proposes literature as a possible source for the “Turning.” In fact, he ends his study by suggesting this possibility: “I would argue that if it [Latin American society] can change its social coding, a precondition of such a change is an awareness of the present coding, and that one source of this awareness can be found in Latin American narrative, if only we would look” (122). While Hoeg identifies what could be categorized as the kernels of a truly emancipating discourse in, for instance, the implicit criticism of the “techno-military-political structure” to be found in Gabriel García Márquez’s One Hundred Years of Solitude (33), or in the implied acknowledgment that “technology can be usefully contested only at the level of the code” discernable in Jorge Amado’s Gabriela (38), among other examples, his general evaluation of Latin American narrative and criticism is pessimistic. Hoeg finds that Latin American narrative and criticism, despite their often progressive tinge, are, as one would expect from Heidegger’s analysis, “mediated by the metaphysics of Modernity,” “mediated by a now global Social Imaginary,” and, furthermore, that “what these narratives do is perpetuate that enframing which is the essence of technology” (122). The same texts that are somehow a source for emancipation also help perpetuate the “metaphysics” of Modernity. (Indeed, both evaluations of Latin American literature are made on the same page of Science, Technology and Latin American Narrative.)

     

    Another facet of the aporia present throughout Hoeg’s study can be found in his analysis of cybernetic technology and the concomitant new media as possible “sources” for the “Turning.” Thus, Hoeg entertains the possibility that “the radical differences of electronically mediated communication” could lead to a “new social narrative” (25). Here Hoeg joins hands with other celebrants of the postmodern and even posthuman condition, such as N. Katherine Hayles and Donna Haraway. For instance, Hoeg quotes approvingly Haraway’s vision of the posthuman as overcoming “the tradition of racist male-dominated capitalism; the tradition of progress; the tradition of the appropriation of nature as resource for the productions of culture; the tradition of the reproduction of the self from the reflection of the other” (24). What is ironic is that Hoeg’s (as well as Hayles’s and Haraway’s) celebration of cybernetics and current digital innovations is nothing but the mirror image of the blind faith in technology commonplace in contemporary Latin America. If Fujimori and Latin American neo-liberals propose technology as the solution to the problems raised by the region’s lack of a “modern condition,” Hoeg, like the prophets of the posthuman, finds in current digital technologies the antidote to the “metaphysics of Modernity.”

     

    Needless to say, this belief in technology as leading not only to social change but also to a kind of utopia where all the dichotomies that haunt modernity are sutured into what could be called a “heterogeneous plenitude” contradicts the Heideggerean pole of Hoeg’s arguments. From a Heideggerean perspective, cybernetics and digital technology are nothing but the latest and until now fullest stage in the development of the Ge-stell. Hoeg, however, stops short of the full identification of technological development with the agent for the “Turning.” Despite his celebration of “postmodernity” and the “posthuman,” he remains aware of the fact that “new technologies are routinely heralded as the solution to all problems, only to be coopted shortly thereafter by the ‘system’” and of “the present impossibility of reconciling cyberscience with Third World realities” (26).

     

    It is possible, however, to argue that the contradiction between the Heideggerean Ge-stell and the Ortegan bienestar is not as clear in the case of Latin America as it would be in that of the “First World.” Despite Hoeg’s belief in the need to create a discourse of empowerment that would help generate the conditions necessary for the “Turning,” his analysis implies the impossibility of a willful change in the Ge-stell or the bienestar. After all, according to Hoeg’s version of Ortega’s bienestar, change at this level is rooted in technics. Thus Hoeg’s (as well as Hayles’s and Haraway’s) celebration of the possibilities for social change created by technological change and the new discourses derived from it is fully congruent with the version of Ortega presented in Science, Technology, and Latin American Narrative. For Hoeg, change in the Social Imaginary originates in the possibilities created by the new digital and cybernetic technologies and media and not in any type of political or social resistance (although new technologies may give rise to the latter). While bienestar is grounded in history, it is doubtful whether Ortega’s concept can be seen as directly justifying any type of individual or group action. Moreover, since Latin American literature and criticism are described as trapped by the “global Social Imaginary” and without access to the apparently liberating possibilities generated by cybernetic technology and its concomitant media, the region can only depend on a deus ex-machina for its liberation.

     

    Hoeg somewhat unwillingly acknowledges the true consequences of his analysis when he asks, “Can Latin American society change its system of necessities without a wholesale change in the global Social Imaginary, or must it await the arrival of a new global destining in order to surmount its current enframing?” (122). It is this question, rather than the somewhat forced attempt at presenting Latin American literature as leading to “an awareness of the present coding” (122), that comes closest to being the logical conclusion of his study. When it comes to Latin America, both the Ortegan and Heideggerean poles of Science, Technology, and Latin American Narrative are reconciled.

     

    Hoeg’s pessimism may, however, be reinforced by what I believe is a mistaken description of attitudes toward technology in Latin America. This misrepresentation is reinforced by his selection of texts. While there is no denying the importance of most of the texts chosen by Hoeg, the nearly exclusive selection of “Magic Realist” novels and other anti-rationalist texts such as Vasconcelos’s La raza cósmica skews his vision of Latin American narrative and culture.4 For instance, based on his analysis of García Márquez’s One Hundred Years of Solitude and Isabel Allende’s The House of the Spirits, Hoeg comes to the conclusion that contemporary Latin American fiction and, one can assume, criticism, are characterized by rejecting “technology . . . as imposed foreign domination” and as believing that it “leads inevitably to disastrous consequences” (35). However, as Fujimori’s slogan exemplifies, this is far from being today the only or, I would argue, the hegemonic attitude toward technology. In fact, rather than being possessed by an uncritical technophobia, many Latin Americans have been, to paraphrase the Mexican critic Carlos Monsiváis, “blinded by technology.”5 And this societal technophilia has led to the proliferation of writings on technology. For instance, many of Latin America’s most influential newspapers include weekly sections on technology that while frequently being just another cog in the cyber-industry’s advertising machinery also occasionally incorporate significant reflections on the subject.6

     

    This interest in technology, although clearly boosted by the “digital revolution,” is, moreover, not a new phenomenon. Monsiváis dates it to the post-Second World War and, in particular, to the introduction of television (211-12). Moreover, if, following Hoeg, one looks for literary reflections on technology, one can safely include texts that span much of the twentieth century. Such texts would include Spanish American vanguardista and Brazilian modernista narratives and poems of the 1920s, Roberto Arlt’s El juguete rabioso (1931), Adolfo Bioy Casares’s Morel’s Invention (1940), and, from an indigenista perspective, José María Arguedas’s poem “Oda al jet” (1967).7 And the obvious affinity between Borges’s interest in levels of reality in his stories prefigures contemporary concerns regarding virtual realities and simulacra present in such recent science fiction films as The Matrix, The Thirteenth Floor, and Existenz, or the Spanish Open Your Eyes and its American remake Vanilla Sky.8

     

    Nevertheless, the cultural vein analyzed by Hoeg is still important. The fact is that despite the region’s current obsession with technological development, “Magical Realism” expresses a significant tendency in Latin American culture. It is not accidental that One Hundred Years of Solitude is generally considered to be the most important Latin American novel, or that the works of Isabel Allende and Laura Esquivel are frequently best-sellers in the region. Dissatisfaction with a technological progress that never fully arrives, and distrust of a never-ending process of modernization that seems to exacerbate social inequality and environmental degradation, are the underside of the region’s technophilia.

     

    Thus, despite the contradictions and omissions analyzed above, Science, Technology, and Latin American Narrative is a groundbreaking work. Hoeg’s profound, though problematic, philosophical framework leads him to read the texts selected from a new and topically relevant perspective. After all, technology is at the center of contemporary existence, whether in the so-called “First” or “Third” World, and any attempt at thinking through social change must necessarily deal with the problematics of technology, technics, and science. And the anti-technological (and anti-rational) tradition identified and studied by Hoeg is an important tendency in Latin American culture, though at the present it is far from hegemonic. Hoeg is not alone in his inability to reconcile his desire for social change with his analyses of society and literature. Rather, this simultaneous dissatisfaction with existing social reality and an incapacity to imagine a way to move beyond it is the quandary faced by much postmodern thought. If earlier generations of critics (especially Latin American and Latin Americanist) could find in revolution the deus ex-machina capable of changing reality, it would seem that today one has to be satisfied with finding in technology, discourse, or literature the seeds of a change nearly impossible to imagine.

     

    Notes

     

    1. It is necessary to point out that I am referring to the connotations implicit in Vargas Llosa’s and Fujimori’s professions, rather than to the actual political positions held by both then candidates. Vargas Llosa, as a staunch neo-liberal, is far from being a technophobe and believes that “the internationalization of modern life–of markets, of technology, of capital–permits any country . . . to achieve rapid growth” (45). It must be noted, however, that Fujimori’s campaign played up not only his career–frequently contrasting it with his rival’s profession as a novelist–but also his Japanese background. The Japanese in Peru, as in other countries, are associated with technological prowess, among other traits.

     

    2. Heidegger defines the Ge-stell or “Enframing” as “the gathering together that belongs to that setting-upon man and puts him in position to reveal the real, in the mode of ordering as a standing-reserve,” and notes that “Enframing, as the challenging-forth into ordering, sends into a way of revealing” (24). Ortega y Gasset argues that the concept of bienestar incorporates not only physical necessities but also “the objectively superfluous” considered by a group of people as necessary (294). Thus bienestar determines technology: “technology is a system of actions called forth and directed by these necessities, it likewise is of a Protean nature and ever changing” (294). Castoriadis defines the Social Imaginary as the element “which gives a specific orientation to every institutional system, which overdetermines the choice and the connections of symbolic networks, which is the creation of each historical period, its singular manner of living, of seeing and of conducting its own existence, its world, and its relations with this world” (145). Despite the fact that one can establish differences between the three concepts (Ge-stell and bienestar are presented as defining technology, while the Social Imaginary determines society as a whole; and unlike Ge-stell, bienestar and the Social Imaginary are explicitly presented as historically determined), they all imply the existence of higher-level mediations for technology and/or society. In Hoeg’s study the exact relationship between Ge-stell, bienestar, and the Social Imaginary is, however, not fully theorized. Although Hoeg frequently uses the concepts of Ge-stell and bienestar as synonymous with that of the Social Imaginary–see the quotation in paragraph 7–it is not clear whether they only determine the fields of Western science, modern technology, and “creative production” (18). In other words, Hoeg doesn’t make explicit whether he believes that the code that “overdetermines” science and technology actually determines society as a whole, or that it is simply one of the “ensemble of societal codes that constitute . . . [the] Social Imaginary,” even if the most important (30).

     

    3. Carlos Monsiváis, the astute Mexican cultural critic, describes this attitude in the following terms: “Technology blinds and there is no doubt about the correct strategy: imitate [everything] North American” (212). The translation is mine.

     

    4. The novels studied by Hoeg include such “Magical Realist” texts as Gabriel García Márquez’s One Hundred Years of Solitude, Isabel Allende’s House of the Spirits, and Laura Esquivel’s Like Water for Chocolate. He also analyzes the Brazilian film O Boto that, in its use of regional myths, shows a certain affinity with the Magical Realism of these novels.

     

    5. See note 3.

     

    6. Among the major newspapers that include weekly sections on technology are the Argentinean La Nación and El Clarín, the Mexican La Jornada, the Brazilian O Estado de São Paulo, and the Peruvian El Comercio. Nahif Yehva’s articles on the Internet, software, and hardware for La Jornada can serve as an example of the critical discourse presented in the Latin American mass media.

     

    7. Vicky Unruh, in her account of Spanish American vanguardia and Brazilian modernista poetic movements of the 1920s, Latin American Vanguards: The Art of Contentious Encounters, writes about this interest in technology: “Vanguardist expression reinforced this self-defining image of artists as workers by portraying artistic work with technological or athletic motifs, a poetics of airplanes, automobiles, elevators, bicycles, and trampolines” (80). Flora Süssekind describes the relation of pre-modernista and modernista literature, with technology as “flirtation, friction, or appropriation” (4). In both the cases of Brazil and Spanish America, the attitude of writers toward technology during the first decades of the century cannot be characterized as being exclusively, or even mainly, one of rejection.

     

    8. This interest in simulacra, virtual realities, and technology is precisely the topic of Bioy’s Morel’s Invention, which, as is well known, is based on an idea by Borges.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Castoriadis, Cornelius. The Imaginary Institution of Society. Trans. Kathleen Blamey. Cambridge, MA: MIT P, 1987.
    • Heidegger, Martin. “The Question Concerning Technology.” The Question Concerning Technology, and Other Essays. Trans. William Lovitt. New York: Garland, 1977. 3-35.
    • Monsiváis, Carlos. Aires de familia: Cultura y sociedad en América Latina. Barcelona: Editorial Anagrama, 2000.
    • Ortega y Gasset, José. “Thoughts on Technology.” Trans. Helene Weyl. Philosophy and Technology: Readings in the Philosophical Problems of Technology. Ed. Carl Mitcham and Robert Mackey. New York: Free, 1972. 290-313.
    • Süssekind, Flora. Cinematograph of Words: Literature, Technique, and Modernization in Brazil. Trans. Paulo Henriques Britto. Stanford, CA: Stanford UP, 1997.
    • Unruh, Vicky. Latin American Vanguards: The Art of Contentious Encounters. Berkeley, CA: U of California P, 1994.
    • Vargas Llosa, Mario. A Fish in the Water: A Memoir. Trans. Helen Lane. New York: Farrar, 1994.

     

  • Demonstration and Democracy

    Arkady Plotnitsky

    Theory and Cultural Studies Program
    Department of English
    Purdue University
    aplotnit@sla.purdue.edu

     

    Review of: Bruno Latour, Pandora’s Hope: Essays on the Reality of Science Studies.Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1999.

     

    Scientists are becoming more attentive to and are addressing more openly the relationships between politics and science. (Many scientists have of course–at least since Galileo, if not Archimedes or even the pre-Socratics–been aware of and had to confront the complexity of these relationships.) As I am writing this review, I am reading a commentary by Roger A. Pielke Jr., “Science Policy: Policy, Politics, and Perspective,” in the current issue of Nature (28 March 2002), dealing with these relationships in their, I would argue, postmodern specificity, as does Bruno Latour’s Pandora’s Hope. The timing of the Nature article could not be more auspicious for this review, but other examples, articles, and books, technical and popular, are not hard to come by.

     

    It is difficult to say to what degree this increased attention is specifically due to the influence of what is known as science studies or social, or sometimes social-constructivist, studies of science, a controversial field that has emerged during the last several decades and to which Latour’s work largely belongs. It is also not altogether clear how much this attention was influenced by the controversies themselves around science studies, most recently the so-called “Science Wars.” The latter followed the appearance of Paul Gross and Norman Levitt’s book Higher Superstition: The Academic Left and its Quarrels with Science (1994), theoretical physicist Alan Sokal’s hoax article published in the journal Social Text (1995), and Impostures intellectueles (1998), co-authored by Sokal and another theoretical physicist, Jean Bricmont, first published in France, and then in England and the U.S., under the title Fashionable Nonsense: Postmodern Intellectuals’ Abuse of Science (1998). Latour has been a prominent subject of and participant in the Science Wars debates, beginning with Gross and Levitt’s book, and through Latour’s responses to his critics, including those in Pandora’s Hope (some among the essays included in the book have been published earlier). Some of these debates have been conducted in scientific journals, such as Nature and Physics Today, and have involved leading scientists. Accordingly, they may have had an impact (it is, again, difficult to say how large) on the proliferating discussions of the relationships between politics and science in the scientific community. It would be hard, however, to underestimate other factors involved, from increasing competition for funding to the problems of bioethics; these may indeed be the more significant ones.

     

    Be that as it may, Latour’s work and arguments, as presented in the book, could help scientists and others who want to understand the complexity, “the Gordian knot,” as Latour called it in his earlier We Have Never Been Modern, of the postmodern entanglement of politics and science. Indeed, the three problem phenomena invoked by the Nature article just cited, under the fitting heading “Gridlock”–“global climate change,” “nuclear power,” and “biodiversity” (367)–are paradigmatically Latourian, and the first is specifically invoked by him in We Have Never Been Modern. That need not mean that scientists or others must agree with Latour’s analysis (the present author does not always either). But they might do well to engage with it properly, or at least to stay with it for more than a sentence or two, the usual limit of most “science warriors,” which also applies to other postmodernists they “read.” I am not sure how much hope–this may be a kind of Pandora’s hope in turn–one might hold here, and sometimes the Pandora’s-box nature of these works, Latour’s included, complicates their chances. I am not sure that humanists, especially historians, sociologists, and philosophers of science, will always give Latour the chance he deserves either. I hope they will.

     

    Beyond serving as a useful introduction to the current stage of science studies and as a commentary on the Science Wars (and it is, again, worth reading for the sake of these subjects alone), Pandora’s Hope pursues, with many notable successes, at least three ambitious and interconnected tasks. The first is to redefine the concept of reality by using the research undertaken in science studies; the second is to rethink the relationships between science and politics in modern (ultimately extending from Plato) and then postmodern culture; and the third is to redefine political philosophy–indeed, Latour appears to suggest, even to define it meaningfully for the first time. These tasks are interconnected in part because the phenomena in question are, Latour rightly argues, themselves irreducibly interconnected. In particular, there can be no modernity or postmodernity other than scientific, as science was irreducibly involved with setting up what Latour calls, in We Have Never Been Modern, “the modern constitution,” which unequivocally separated nature and politics. Or rather, the moderns only claim (and can only claim) to separate them, since such a separation is, in principle, impossible, as both are ultimately entangled in any phenomena, scientific or political. Hence, Latour’s title, We Have Never Been Modern. Pandora’s Hope builds on and deepens this argument.

     

    The book has some key “postmodern” allies, in particular Michel Serres, Gilles Deleuze (in part via Isabelle Stengers’s work) and Jean-François Lyotard, who, while mentioned only in passing, may be more important for the book than it might appear. Indeed, I would argue that Latour’s work is much more postmodern, at least in Lyotard’s sense, than he is willing to acknowledge. Latour’s argument that “we have never been modern” can be coordinated with Lyotard’s famous maxim that the postmodern precedes the modern, in a pre-logical rather than ontological sense. This sense is defined by a complex underlying (“postmodern”) dynamics that both gives rise to and is suppressed or repressed by the modern, not unlike the way in which the hybrid or the “factish” (combining “fact” and “fetish”) are repressed by the moderns’ unequivocal separations (into nature and politics, into facts and fetishes) in Latour. This kind of postmodernism, that is, the one that is both Lyotardian and Latourian (keeping in mind the differences between Lyotard’s and Latour’s views), helps the richness and effectiveness of Latour’s analysis, rather than misses its arguments, as some postmodernisms, or at least some postmodernists, indeed might. Reciprocally, Latour’s analysis enriches and expands our understanding of postmodern culture and the role of science and technology in it.

     

    The book has nine hefty chapters (and a substantial conclusion). The first, “Do You Believe in Reality?: News from the Trenches of the Science War,” serves as an introduction and a set-up, but it is significant in its own right in giving its title question a necessary complexity and a necessary ambiguity, or in Niels Bohr’s phrase “essential ambiguity,” without which one cannot perhaps refer to any form of ultimate reality. The next four chapters are case studies, vintage Latour and engrossing reading, but with significant philosophical twists. Two of them, Chapters 4 and 5, extend Latour’s justly famous work on Louis Pasteur. Latour’s work is arguably the best that science studies has to offer us, in part given its greater philosopher charge, which contrasts with most other works in this generally more empiricist field. The case studies also ground and prepare the last three, more philosophical, chapters, on which I shall primarily concentrate here. These chapters define the book’s achievement as a contribution to the current state of the debates concerning the relationships between science and culture, politics included. The Science Wars are, Latour argues, a reflection and an effect of this role.

     

    Indeed, as he became arguably the main target of the Science Wars scientific critics, at least as far as science studies are concerned (Lacan, Deleuze, and, overt disclaimers to the contrary, Derrida, are targeted for their “postmodernist” abuses of science), Latour gets hold of some among the deeper underlying forces involved in shaping the confrontation. Reciprocally, however, these forces define the postmodern philosophical, cultural, and political scene. As I said, the grounds for both this insight into the Science Wars and the underlying play of forces in question are prepared in We Have Never Been Modern and, to some degree, already in Conversations on Science, Culture, and Time by Serres and Latour. The workings of these forces are now traced to Plato’s Gorgias (not coincidentally, Lyotard discusses Gorgias, the philosopher, in The Differend as well), in Chapter 7, “The Inventions of the Science War: The Settlement of Socrates and Callicles” and in Chapter 8, “A Politics Freed from Science: The Body Cosmopolitics.”

     

    Stephen Weinberg’s comment in his “Sokal’s Hoax,” parallel to Socrates’s (broader) view of the role of geometry in the world (human and divine) in Gorgias, provides a fitting point of departure: “Our civilization has been powerfully affected by the discovery that nature is strictly governed by impersonal laws….We will need to confirm and strengthen the vision of a rationally understandable world if we are to protect ourselves from the irrational tendencies that still best humanity” (216). Weinberg is not wrong in the first part of this statement, although one could, and Latour does, assess the value and significance of this impact differently. The impact itself may indeed be traced to the Greeks’ invention of mathematics rather than, as in Weinberg’s narrower context, to the invention of modern (mathematical) physics by Galileo and, especially, by Newton. It is Weinberg’s second statement, or rather the conjunction of both statements thus defined, that is Latour’s primary target. Alan Sokal’s “serious” “political,” including his “Marxist,” arguments, may be shown to follow the same “logic” (quotation marks appear obligatory here). To the degree, which is large, that this conjunction defines the Science Wars, one can indeed trace their invention to Plato’s Gorgias, defined by “the strong link…between the respect for impersonal natural laws, on the one hand, and the fight against irrationality, immorality, and political disorder, on the other” (217). More accurately, in Socrates’s case one would speak of the universal laws (of geometry), more those of mind than of nature, and Weinberg, in fairness, does not claim a role for mathematics beyond science, as his immediate context is more narrowly and differently defined. Essentially, however, Latour’s argument stands, given the deeper underpinning of Weinberg’s argument. Indeed Latour’s immediate elaboration nearly makes the case. He writes:

     

    In both quotations the fate of Reason and the fate of Politics are associated in a single destiny. To attack Reason is to render morality and social peace impossible. Right is what protects us against Might; Reason against civil warfare. The common tenet is that we need something “inhuman”–for Weinberg, the natural law no human has constructed; for Socrates, geometry whose demonstrations escape human whim–if we want to be able to fight against “inhumanity.” To sum up: only inhumanity will quash inhumanity. Only a Science that is not made by man will protect a Body Politic that is in constant risk of being made by the mob. Yes, Reason is our rampart, our Great Wall of China, our Maginot Line against the dangerous unruly mob. (217)

     

    What is perhaps most remarkable about this, one might say, naïve view, naïve as concerns both science or mathematics (for example, in applying to nature, including the nature of mind, a human, “all too human,” concept of law) and politics, or the relationships between them, is that it has been so successful. For, as Latour immediately observes, “this line of reasoning, which I will call ‘inhumanity against inhumanity,’ has been attacked ever since it began, from the Sophists, against whom Plato launches his all-out assault, all the way to the motley gang of people accused of ‘postmodernism’ (an accusation, by the way, as vague as the curse of being a ‘sophist’)” (217). Indeed the two accusations are often vaguely combined. There is no simple answer to the question why these counterarguments have more often failed than succeeded, and it would, accordingly, be difficult to blame Latour for not really pursuing the subject in the book. But he could have. This relative lack of success, admittedly, gives the other side of the Science Wars additional ammunition that is philosophically feeble but politically workable. Admittedly, too, many of these counterarguments have been equally deficient, philosophically and politically. Indeed, according to Latour, most (all?) of them have failed in at least one respect, something he aims to remedy: “None of these critiques…has disputed simultaneously the definition of Science and the definition of the Body Politic that it implies. Inhumanity is accepted in both or in at least one of them” (218).

     

    This assessment does not appear to me entirely accurate, even with respect to what Latour sees as “postmodern” critique and specifically to Friedrich Nietzsche, who, perhaps inevitably, enters the scene immediately, first by way of quotation, “human all too human,” and then by name (217). Nietzsche’s argument in On the Genealogy of Morals, invoked throughout the chapter, is not sufficiently explored by Latour, either. Nietzsche’s and Latour’s views are of course not the same, but, especially on this particular point, they share more than Latour appears to think. The philosophical effectiveness of any given argument, however, does not necessarily guarantee and sometimes prevents its success anywhere, among people or philosophers, for example, as indeed both Socrates (including in Gorgias, as Latour observes) and, more deeply, Nietzsche understood so well. Beginning with The Birth of Tragedy, Nietzsche undertook an investigation, unprecedented in profundity and scope alike, of the question why Socrates’s or related and parallel arguments (those shaping the history of Christian morality, for example) have, eventually, succeeded on such an extraordinary scale, including where they initially failed, in Greece.

     

    Similarly, Lyotard’s argument from The Postmodern Condition on goes quite far in understanding the “humanity,” indeed conjoined “humanity” rather than conjoined “inhumanity,” of both science and politics, that is, speaking for the moment in terms Latour uses. Ultimately, to return to the idiom of We Have Never Been Modern, we need a new “constitution,” one that, as against the (unworkable) “modern constitution,” enacts a conjunction rather than a strict separation of nature and politics, and even a certain “parliamentarity” of the human and the nonhuman. In Pandora’s Hope Latour approaches this economy, which is also a political economy, in other terms as well, such as those of the collective (of humans and nonhumans), specifically in Chapter 6, indebted in part to the work of Michel Callon (with whom Latour collaborated earlier), and also in “factish” (“fact-fetish”) in Chapter 9. This view is not far from Lyotard’s, even though Latour himself, again, juxtaposes it to postmodernism. Lyotard’s own concept of “the inhuman,” developed in his The Inhuman: Reflections on Time, could be considered from this viewpoint and used to complement and amplify Latour’s critique. On the other hand, Latour seems to give Lyotard credit, well deserved indeed, for his engagement with the political in his subsequent works, specifically along the lines of Latour’s argument here (232). These works, however, such as Just Gaming and The Differend, extend rather than depart from his argument in The Postmodern Condition. As I said, Latour is much more “postmodernist” than he suspects. Reciprocally, Latour’s argument throws a new light on postmodernism and the debates around it, or within it, for example, concerning the more Lyotardian view of postmodernist epistemology and politics versus more Marxist views, such as those of Fredric Jameson and his followers. In the latter case, a Socratic-like agenda of the governing role of a particular, almost geometrically demonstrable, political theory, often takes over.

     

    It may be noted that even short of a deeper analysis of its human or human-nonhuman nature, one could argue that, at least, modern or “postmodern” (the term has been used even by some scientists) mathematics and science are not as cooperative in the agenda in question as, for example, Weinberg would believe them to be. Even if one accepts Weinberg’s position and views modern mathematics and science in his “inhuman” terms, they appear to tell us something quite different from what Weinberg seems to hear. Indeed more limited as it is, this type of counterargument has a force of its own. The grounds on which the science warriors, from Socrates on, build their edifice are, Latour is right, untenable; but their argument fails, their edifice collapses even on its own ground. Lyotard offers this type of argument as part of his critique of modernity’s ideology of science in The Postmodern Condition (a critique that has often been misunderstood, including by the science warriors). If, he argues, one wants to follow mathematics and science or what they tell us about nature and mind, in the way the Enlightenment follows classical mathematics and physics, one might want to examine first what twentieth-century mathematics and science–relativity, quantum physics, chaos theory, modern molecular biology and genetics, post-Gödelian mathematical logic, and so forth–actually tell us. More accurately, one should speak of a certain version or reading of the Enlightenment, to begin with, since both the Enlightenment and, for that matter, classical mathematics and science tell us a different story and a different history as well.

     

    In any event, what mathematics and science in fact appear to tell us (about nature or themselves) is in conflict with the key premises of the modern (either in Lyotard’s or Latour’s sense) view or ideology of either mathematics and science or nature and politics. Among these premises are reality and causality (concomitantly defined by their mathematical, and specifically continuous, character); the independence of this mathematical, and indeed geometrical, reality of our engagement with nature through observation and measurement; a strictly logical view of mathematical reasoning (i.e., as always decidable as concerns the truth or falsity of any given proposition); and so forth. These premises and their necessity for the practice of mathematics and science have been questioned by some (it is true, not very many) mathematicians and scientists as well, in particular by Bohr, Heisenberg, and other founders of quantum physics, which puts these premises to their arguably most severe test on scientific grounds. The same premises also define the key programs of the Enlightenment and “the modern constitution,” based on the (“inhuman”) way in which mathematics and science, or nature and politics, allegedly work or, in the case of politics, ought to work. It follows, among other things, that contrary to Weinberg’s view or hope, nature may not in fact be subject to immutable, or any, mathematical laws. It goes almost without saying that to question such premises is not the same as simply abandoning them, but instead enables a better understanding of the limits of their applicability, a refinement of their conceptualization and formulations, and so forth. I say “almost” in view of persistent misunderstandings of this and related points, including those made by Latour himself, the misunderstandings that defined and in some ways (there are deeper philosophical and political factors, which is the point here) initiated the Science Wars debates.

     

    Latour amplifies the preceding argument by his powerful and elegant analysis, one of the best in the book, in Chapter 8, “A Politics Freed from Science: The Body Cosmopolitics,” concerning the actual practice of science, which he sees, rightly, as in conflict with the Science Warriors’, the Socrates-Weinberg, view of science. This argument also allows one to

     

    see…how the sciences can be free from the burden of making a type of politics that shortcuts politics. If we now calmly read the Gorgias, we recognize that a certain specialized form of reasoning, epistèmè, was kidnapped for a political purpose it could not possibly fulfill. This has resulted in bad politics but in an even worse science. If we let the kidnapped science escape, then two different meanings of the adjective “scientific” become distinguishable again after being lumped together for so long. (258)

     

     

    The implications of this argument thus reach beyond our understanding of science, although not beyond science, which cannot be dissociated from modern politics–and there is perhaps no other politics, beginning with the Greeks and their invention of demonstration and democracy. As will be seen, for Latour, bringing science and politics, and demonstration and democracy, together so that both they and we could indeed benefit from each other is a task, a formidable “task of today” (265). First, however, we need to consider the two different meanings of “scientific” in question. As Latour writes:

     

    The first meaning is that of Science with a capital S, the ideal of transportation of information without discussion or deformation. This Science, capital S, is not a description of what scientists do. To use an old term, it is an ideology that never had any other use, in the epistemologists’ hands, than to offer a substitute for public discussion. It has always been a political weapon to do away with the constraints of politics. From the beginning, as we saw in the dialogue, it was tailored to this end alone, and it has never stopped, through the ages, being used in this way. Because it was intended as a weapon, this conception of Science, the one Weinberg clings to so forcefully, is usable neither to “make humanity less irrational” nor to make the sciences better. It has only one use: “Keep your mouth shut!”–the “you” designating, interestingly enough, other scientists involved in controversies as much as the people in general. “Substitute Science, capital S, for political rationality” is only a war cry. In that sense, and that sense only, it is useful, as we can witness in these days of the Science Wars. However, this definition of Science No. 1, I am afraid, has no more uses than a Maginot Line, and I take great pleasure in being branded as “antiscientific” if scientific has only this meaning. (258-59)

     

    The actual situation may be somewhat more complex, since Weinberg’s view of science (but not of politics) could be related to what scientists actually do, as Latour acknowledges in his discussion of the second meaning of “scientific,” but to which one might give further attention (259). In this sense, it is indeed the ideology in question that is the main problem here. Paul Feyerabend sees this move–this tremendous and impoverishing, “cold,” reduction of science and, through thus reduced science, of politics or even of life itself–as “the tale of abstraction against the richness of being,” his subtitle of Conquest of Abundance. He traces this move to the pre-Socratics, especially to Democritus’s atomism and Parmenides’s logic of oneness, and, ethically-politically, to Homer (on virtue), and then to the modern view of science, from Newton to Einstein and beyond. (Weinberg’s view would be an example as well.) Keats drives the point home more speedily and effectively in Lamia (with Socrates, and his philosophy, and both Descartes and Newton, and their optics, in mind, and perhaps with Democritus and Boyle as well, all figures crucial to Latour’s argument, here and elsewhere): “… Do not all charms fly/ At the mere touch of cold philosophy? … Philosophy will clip an Angel’s wings/ Conquer all mysteries by rule and line,/ Empty the haunted air …” (Part II, ll. 229-30, 234-35).

     

    At least, a certain philosophy and/as a certain form or ideology of mathematics and science, since the latter views pursued differently (or even also differently) could also create “the richness of being,” even by their rules and lines. “But,” Latour continues, “‘scientific’ has one other meaning, which is much more interesting and is not engaged in doing away with politics, not because it is apolitical or because it is politicized, but because it deals with entirely different questions, a difference that is never respected when Science No. 1 is taken, by its friends as well as by its foes, as all there is to say about science” (259). It is, thus, first of all, not a question of an argument or discourse against science, quite the contrary. Latour’s conception of science (or, and again comcomitantly, of reality or truth)–one of his most important and original in the book–also goes beyond earlier and more rigid forms of social constructivism, such as that of David Bloor and his school (197). This richer and subtler “constructivism” is arrived at in part by reciprocally rethinking the social as well, most especially through the concept of the collective of human and nonhumans, and of their entangled and mutually defining relationships, in Chapter 6. As Latour writes:

     

    The second meaning of the adjective “scientific” is the gaining of access, through experiments and calculations, to entities that at first do not have the same characteristics as humans do. This definition may seem odd, but it is what is alluded to by Weinberg’s own interest in “impersonal laws.” Science No. 2 deals with nonhumans, which in the beginning are foreign to social life, and which are slowly socialized on our midst through the channels of laboratories, expeditions, institutions, and so on, as recent historians of science have so often described. What working scientists want to be sure of is that they do not make up, with their own repertoire of actions, the new entities to which they have access. They want each new nonhuman to enrich their repertoire of action, their ontology. Pasteur, for example, does not [arbitrarily] “construct” his microbes; rather his microbes, and French society, are changed, through their common agency, from a collective [of humans and nonhumans] made up of, say, x entities into one made up of many more entities, including microbes. (259)

     

    This argument may need a more nuanced stratification as concerns the production and circulation in question, as Latour indeed intimates (259). In particular, one might need to consider multiple circulations of and circulations between circulations, within science and between science and culture. It is also clear that these profusions or circulations within circulations are bound to give rise to other meanings of “scientific” as well. Latour adds one himself (260, note 3), but still others, either more limited to science or mathematics or more extended, are conceivable and indeed necessary. Latour’s argument is, however, fundamentally right and momentous in its implications. First of all, it follows that there could be neither a concept of reality nor a meaningful relation to any reality outside such circulations. Accordingly, all “realities” of science studies (such as those defined by various collectives of humans and nonhumans, hybrids, factishes, and so forth) in turn emerge in relation to these circulations. This view also makes “it possible to say, without contradiction,” as Latour does in his analysis of Pasteur, “both ‘Airborne germs were made up in 1984’ and ‘They were there all along’” (173). The same logic applies to several of his similar arguments elsewhere, often equally misunderstood or unread, for example, by science warriors.

     

    Indeed one of the most remarkable capacities of modern science, specifically quantum theory, is to “construct” (using this terms with Latour’s qualification in the above passage in mind) and place in circulation unconstructible entities (such as those known as “elementary particles”). That is, it is capable of constructing and placing in circulation something to which no conceivable notion or property, physical or mathematical, could be rigorously attributed. They are circulated as such both within and outside physics, albeit far from without much resistance to this type of epistemology, either within science (Einstein was one the primary forces of this resistance and inspiration for many others) or outside it. It is not surprising that the idea meets so much resistance since, as I have indicated, it puts on hold the claims, such as Weinberg’s, that “nature” could ultimately be described or governed by mathematics. This is, of course, not to say that one no longer uses mathematics, but only that one uses it differently, including for the purposes of circulating the work concerning such un-objects.

     

    From a Latourian perspective, Weinberg’s or others’ “interests,” grounding (but not identical to) their view of science as Science No. 1, would be part of such circulations, possibly by grounding some among them. But this view must also be understood in relation to other circulations, possible or actual, or of course also to impossibilities of circulation. The same argument would apply to mathematics (so crucial for Weinberg’s or Socrates’s views of the world), to mathematical circulation, and to the circulation of mathematics itself (as a field). Mathematics may well be a special case, including (a special case of its own) specifically geometrical demonstration or proof, and we must account for this specificity, in turn, in a special way. But it is not outside of this picture. Mathematics is not likely to be some special gift from the “heavens” (divine or human), although some mathematicians, scientists, and philosophers may think it is. Instead, like science or philosophy, it may be seen as having arisen and continuing to arise from translating and refining more common experiences and practices, and from circulations they entail or that give rise to them.

     

    As Latour elegantly argues in Chapter 3, “Circulating Reference,” the work of science studies, such as Latour’s own, participates differently from but reciprocally with science itself in these circulations and circulations of circulation (78-79). This circulation is contiguous or metonymic. A remarkable case of a circulation, indeed a circulation between, at least, two circulations, where reciprocity and metonymy are accompanied by metaphoric parallels, is that of Frederic Joliot, considered in Chapter 3, “Science’s Blood Flow: Joliot’s Scientific Intelligence.” Latour’s title is aptly fitting on both counts, in its circulation metaphor and its blood metaphor. Circulation is the life-blood of science, which also needs what exceeds it. (Latour also puns on “intelligence.”) I ought to add, however, that this argument is only a part, a small part, of this superb chapter, which offers a brilliant and complex analysis of a complex case, defined as much by Joliot’s political as by his scientific activities, and by the complex circulations between science and politics. This economy, Latour shows, defines Joliot’s work well before he becomes (after the Second World War) a prominent presence on the political scene in France and beyond.

     

    Now, the analysis of such circulations and circulations between circulations is not easy, either in their historical specificity or (to the degree we can separate them) in terms of the necessary concepts, and Latour’s analysis by and large succeeds on both counts. But he seems to me stronger on the work and abundance of circulations than on “breaks” in circulations or the impossibility of circulation or “construction,” in mathematics and science or elsewhere, which seems to me just as important, in some cases, more important. In general, Latour’s thought is closer to what may be seen as the (more utopian?) philosophy of abundance and continuity, which also defines the thought of Feyerabend and Deleuze, or Whitehead and Bergson, or earlier Leibniz and Spinoza (the last three in turn major inspirations for Deleuze). This philosophy may be contrasted to the philosophy of insufficiency and rupture, extending from Kant’s critical philosophy to Heidegger, Bataille, Levinas, Derrida, and de Man, among others. Descartes, Hegel, and Nietzsche may be seen as the thinkers of both, and it is to be observed that in all these cases it is also a question of relative balance, rather than unequivocal determination. Allegiances to the first and, conversely, distances from the second line of thought are quite apparent in Latour’s views–sometimes, I would argue, at a price, and especially, again, as concerns a more rigorous understanding of heterogeneities and breaks in the circulations in question. On that score, Latour’s analysis could benefit from the ideas of the figures just mentioned, especially Bataille, Derrida, de Man, or, again, Lyotard (specifically on “the inhuman”). Lyotard defines the political as the irreducible heterogeneous, even if interactive–interactively heterogeneous and heterogeneously interactive–and subject to equally irreducible breaks in its circulations. Latour, however, is quite right to insist on the significance of circulation, especially insofar as the relationships between science and politics, or culture, are concerned. His analysis of such circulations, their rhizomatic networks, and circulations between circulations, networks linking networks, is a major contribution, whose significance extends well beyond science studies.

     

    Latour is also right in arguing that “to do justice to this scientific work,” the work defined as Science No. 2, (the ideology of) Science No. 1 is “totally inadequate” (260). He adds a significant observation:

     

    We recognize here, by the way, the two enemy camps between which science studies is trying to gain a foothold: those from the humanities who think we give too much to nonhumans; and those from some quarters of the “hard” sciences who accuse us of giving too much to the humans. This symmetrical accusation triangulates with great precision the place where we in science studies stand: we follow scientists in their daily scientific practice in the No. 2 definition, not in the No. 1 political definition. Reason–meaning Science No. 1–does not describe science better than cynicism describes politics. (260)

     

    This statement, again, makes clear a crucial point. It is not a matter of a discourse against science, any more than against reality or truth, but rather that of refiguring and re-delimiting both and their relationships, in their relationships, naturally, as against, the ideology, ultimately itself non-scientific, although political, of Science No. 1. This is a brilliant reversal with respect to the attacks (such as those by the science warriors) against science studies. It is the science warriors’ view of science that is in fact political and not scientific; the science studies political view of science will be shown to be more scientific.

     

    Nor is this all, as we now begin to perceive Latour’s ultimate, and quite elegant, logic more clearly. First of all, it is worth reiterating yet another more obvious and more easily apparent reversal. The “politics” of science warriors, let’s call it Politics or, with Latour, the Social No. 1, is not really political or social, any more than their science, Science No. 1, is scientific. Science No. 2 is more political as well, along with being scientific. It is, however, by combining both reversals that Latour’s logic reaches its ultimate conclusions. The form, the formal logic, as it were, of Socrates’s argument is in fact repeated. Science is indeed crucial to and defines politics, which might, finally (might!) enable us “to benefit from the Greeks’ two inventions, demonstration and democracy” (265). But how different is the substance of both politics and science, and of their relationships, and, hence, how different is the political philosophy one now needs to pursue! For, thanks in large measure to what Science No. 2 could do for politics, this new constitution entails a very different social, or in Serres’s terms, natural or social-natural contract and a new collectivity and, in the language of We Have Never Been Modern, a new “parliamentarity” of both humans and nonhumans. Latour writes:

     

    Far from taking us away from the agora, Science No. 2–one clearly separated from the impossible agenda of Science, capital S–redefines political order as that which brings together stars, prions, cows, heavens, and people, the task being to turn this collective into a “cosmos” instead of “unruly shambles” [as invoked by Socrates]. For scientists such an endeavor seems much more lively, much more interesting, much more adapted to their skills and genius, than the boring repetitive chore of beating the poor undisciplined demos with the big stick of “impersonal laws.” This new settlement is not the one Socrates and Callicles agreed on [in Gorgias ]–“appealing to one form of inhumanity to avoid inhuman social behavior”–but something that could be defined as “collectively making sure that the collective formed by ever vaster numbers of humans and nonhumans becomes a cosmos.” (261)

     

    Naturally, this new politics is not easy to put into practice. (But then it took Socratic politics, defined by Science No. 1, a while to take a hold, indeed a grip, upon the world.) For, as Latour says,

     

    For this other possible task, however, we not only need scientists who will abandon the older privileges of Science No. 1 and at last take up a science (No. 2) freed from politics [Politics No. 1, defined by Science No. 1], we also need a symmetrical transformation of politics. I confess that this is much more difficult, because, in practice, very few scientists are happy in the artificial straitjacket that Socrates’s position imposes on them, and they would be very happy to deal with what they are good at, Science No. 2. But what about politics? To convince Socrates is one things, but what about Callicles? To free science from politics [Politics No. 1] is easy, but how can we free politics from science [No. 1]? (261)

     

    Latour may be too optimistic about scientists. He is right, however, to see politics as a more difficult problem here. Latour makes few suggestions in this direction, in this and in the following chapter. In the end, however, we, Latour and myself included, end with a question:

     

    How can we mix Science No. 2, which brings an ever greater number of nonhumans into the agora, with Social No. 2, which deals with the very specific conditions of felicity that cannot be content with transporting forces or truth without deformation? I don’t know, but I am sure of one thing: no shortcuts are possible, no short-circuits, and no acceleration. Half of our knowledge may be in the hands of scientists, but the other, missing half is alive only in those most despised of all people, the politicians, who are risking their lives and ours in scientifico-political controversies that nowadays make up most of our daily bread. To deal with these controversies, a “double circulation” has to flow effortlessly again in the Body Politics: the one of science (No. 2) free from politics, and the other of politics freed from science (No. 1). The task of today may be summed up in the following odd sentence: Can we learn to like scientists as much as politicians so that at last we can benefit from the Greeks’ two inventions, demonstration and democracy? (265)

     

    Latour, it is true, does not end here, observing that, while he “seem[s] to have accomplished [his] task, to have dismantled the old settlement that held sway over us,” “it is still as if [he has] achieved nothing” (266). Accordingly, he proceeds to his final chapter, Chapter 9, “The Slight Surprise of Action: Facts, Fetishes, Factishes,” more constructive and more constructivist, but, again, beyond (merely) “social constructivism,” which he contends (I think, rightly) he never really subscribed to (197). We, as the book’s readers, can indeed be only slightly surprised here, since Latour’s analysis is well prepared and anticipated, and partly accomplished in an earlier chapter, but is now given a more rigorous conceptual architecture.

     

    And yet the questions return and even bring a war with them, “a world war, even–at least a metaphysical one,” but also the Science Wars, now as “a respectable intellectual issue, not a pathetic dispute over funding fueled by campus journalists.” It is a war between the two views of reality and two settlements in opposition, the modernist one (with the reality of the world out there and Science No. 1 and Politics No. 1) and the settlement defined by the view of reality, science, and politics that is defined by Science No. 2. In this war, however, one might be sure, or “pretty sure,”

     

    we will be without weapons, dressed in civilian clothes, since the task of inventing the collective [of humans and nonhumans] is so formidable that it renders all wars puny by comparison–including, of course, the Science Wars. In this [twentieth] century, which fortunately is coming to a close, we seem to have exhausted the evils that emerged from the open box of the clumsy Pandora. Though it was here unrestrained curiosity that made the artificial maiden open the box, there is no reason to stop being curious about what was left inside. To retrieve the Hope that is lodged there, at the bottom, we need a new and rather convoluted contrivance. I have had a go at it. Maybe we will succeed with the next attempt. (300)

     

    Maybe we will. Latour thus ends (this is his last sentence) with an implicit question mark, for the new century perhaps. He begins the book with a warning to the reader. “This,” he says,

     

    is not a book about new facts, nor is it exactly a book of philosophy. In it, using only very rudimentary tools, I simply try to present, in the space left empty by the dichotomy between subject and object, a conceptual scenography for the pair human and nonhuman. I agree that powerful arguments and detailed empirical studies would be better, but, as sometimes happens in detective stories, a somewhat weaker, more solitary, and more adventurous strategy may succeed against the kidnapping of scientific disciplines by science warriors where others have failed. (viii)

     

    The book does achieve this success and, as I have argued, it offers much more in the way of both “powerful arguments” and, especially, “empirical studies” than Latour here suggests. Accordingly, a deeper conceptual and, thus, more deeply philosophical scenography of the scenes in question is not impossible. It is perhaps permissible to view the book as setting the stage for a deeper philosophical exploration in spaces more closed than, as Latour suggests, left empty by so many dichotomies and pairs, from subject and object to, not inconceivably, human and nonhuman.

    Works Cited

     

    • Feyerabend, Paul. Conquest of Abundance: A Tale of Abstraction Versus the Richness of Being. Ed. Bert Terpstra. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1999.
    • Gross, Paul, and Norman Levitt. Higher Superstition: The Academic Left and its Quarrels with Science. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1994.
    • Latour, Bruno. We Have Never Been Modern. Trans. Catherine Porter. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1993.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François. The Differend: Phrases in Dispute. Trans. Georges Van Den Abbeele. Minneapolis, MN: U of Minnesota P, 1988.
    • —. The Inhuman: Reflections on Time. Trans. Geoffrey Bennington and Rachel Bowlby. Stanford, CA: Stanford UP, 1991.
    • —. The Postmodern Condition. Trans. Geoffrey Bennington and Brian Massumi. Minneapolis, MN: U of Minnesota P, 1984.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François, and Jean-Loup Thêbaud. Just Gaming. Trans. Brian Massumi. Minneapolis, MN: U of Minnesota P, 1985.
    • Pielke, Roger A. Jr. “Science Policy: Policy, Politics, and Perspective.” Nature 416 (2002): 367-68.
    • Serres, Michel (with Bruno Latour). Conversations on Science, Culture, and Time. Trans. Roxanne Lapidus. Ann Arbor, MI: U of Michigan P, 1995.
    • Sokal, Alan, and Jean Bricmont. Fashionable Nonsense: Postmodern Intellectuals’ Abuse of Science. New York: Picador, 1998.

     

  • Radiohead’s Antivideos: Works of Art in the Age of Electronic Reproduction

    Joseph Tate

    Department of English
    University of Washington
    jtate@u.washington.edu

    I. Introduction: Test Specimens

    Figure 1

     

    The blinking icon you see above is called a “test specimen.” Wide-eyed bears with murderous grins, drawn alternately as symmetrical, disembodied heads or frantically sketched, stiff-limbed figures, they punctuate the art of the music group Radiohead, from CD packaging and packing slips to web site images and promotional stickers.

     

    Although directly analogous to easily recognizable character-mascots used to establish a product’s unique brand identity, the bears function like painter Philip Guston’s hooded men, with a difference (see Guston’s “City Limits”). While Guston’s figures, versions of Ku Klux Klansmen, gave a disturbingly organic shape to American civil unrest and racial injustice in the late 1960s and early ’70s, Radiohead’s test specimens are protagonists in a self-referential aesthetic that pastiches the band’s commodification and the operation of capital at large.1

     

    In what follows, I explore the bears’ appearances in QuickTime computer-animated music video shorts released concurrently with Kid A, the band’s critically anticipated fourth album.2 Titled “antivideos,” or “blips,” the short videos (10-30 seconds in duration) were released only on the internet, a virtually inexhaustible distribution channel. Via this medium, the antivideos provide a useful plateau from which to consider popular art’s current state and future potential in the age of electronic reproduction.

     

    II. Commodified Culture, Culturalized Commodification

     

    In The Fragile Absolute, or Why is the Christian Legacy Worth Fighting For?, Slavoj Zizek observes that “today’s artistic scene” consists of two opposed movements. The first is the “much-deplored commodification of culture (art objects produced for the market),” while the second, and “less noted but perhaps more crucial opposite movement,” is “the growing ‘culturalization’ of the market economy itself.” He elaborates:

     

    With the shift towards the tertiary economy (services, cultural goods), culture is less and less a specific sphere exempted from the market, and more and more not just one of the spheres of the market, but its central component (from the software amusement industry to other media productions). (25)3

     

    We can add to this latter list the music industry. The paired phenomena of commodified culture and a culturalized market are nowhere more evident than in the music business, and it is these movements of commodification and culturalization that Radiohead’s antivideos thematize.

     

    Originally released on the band’s web site (<http://www.more-radiohead.com/alps .html>) several weeks before the 2 October 2000 release of Kid A, the antivideos jettison the standard hierarchy between song and music video as elaborated by media critic Jody Berland. According to Berland, “the 3-minute musical single” is a music video’s

     

    unalterable foundation, its one unconditional ingredient. A single can exist (technically, at least) without the video, but the reverse is not the case. As if in evidence of this, music videos, almost without exception, do not make so much as a single incision in the sound or structure of the song. However bizarre or disruptive videos appear, they never challenge or emancipate themselves from their musical foundation, without which their charismatic indulgences would never reach our eyes. (25)

     

    As if in direct response to Berland’s phonocentrism, the antivideos do exactly what music videos do not and/or should not: make radical incisions and changes to the sound and structure of the songs they promote.

     

    The web site’s title introduces the antivideos bluntly as “brief films used as promotional material.” Immediately, visitors are alerted to the antivideo’s situation within a matrix of capitalist exchange, an unusual acknowledgment in an industry that regularly denounces any discernible trace of commercialization. As music critic Lawrence Grossberg has noted, “Rock fans have always constructed a difference between authentic and co-opted rock. And it is this which is often interpreted as rock’s inextricable tie to resistance, refusal, alienation, marginality, etc.” (Grossberg 202). Authentic rock has as its ideal a “collective, spontaneous creativity,” in the words of Kalefa Sanneh, critic for the New York Times, that is unfettered by the crass demands of capital. Co-opted rock, however, is an example of what Zizek calls the “much-deplored commodification of culture (art objects produced for the market)”; co-opted rock is commercially successful music with an international distribution that fails to hide adequately its commodification, thus opening itself up for censure. Radiohead’s music, videos, cover art, and packaging, however, expose its commodification and culturalize it.

     

    As one example, the CD packaging for Kid A foregrounds its own commodification. A limited number of CDs contained a supplementary text hidden beneath the jewel case’s polystyrene tray. The untitled booklet by Stanley Donwood, the band’s artist, and Tchock, a pseudonym for Thom Yorke, the band’s lead singer, comprises fragmentary phrases juxtaposed against images of test specimens posed as either cartoonishly violent corporate sycophants or traumatized victims of surveillance. Rarely are listeners asked to disassemble the object that distills a performer’s presence for uniform portable consumption, only to find a text that decries consumption. Radiohead’s antivideos work similarly as agents of disassembly, leading consumers into a labyrinthine network of hyperbolic images that pastiche commodification.

     

    III. Flying Bears

     

    The first antivideo on the Radiohead site is titled “Flying Bears,” a nineteen-second movie that imagines limitless reproduction with a twist of surreal horror. The scene opens on two figures, both of which stare up in horror at a murky sky crowded with flying test specimen bears (see Figure 2).

     

    Figure 2

     

    The movie then fades into an exclusive focus on the flying bears, the brand icons for Radiohead, while the antivideo’s soundtrack plays an excerpt from the song “In Limbo.” Yorke’s voice unhurriedly croons the refrain, “You’re living in a fantasy / You’re living in a fantasy” (see Figure 3).

     

    Figure 3

     

    Finally, our view shifts to a close-up of a frightened onlooker, eyes fixed upward and mouth opened in muted fear. Furiously he clutches a mobile phone, a device that may be his last connection to the world: a connection enabled and mediated by an electronic communication network (see Figure 4).

     

    Figure 4

     

    The fantasy, then, of which the lyrics speak and that the onlookers inhabit is not a pleasant one, as the alarmed facial expressions evince. Instead, it is the ultimate fantasy of the capitalist/Communist dyad: “unbridled productivity” (Zizek 18). As Zizek notes, it is no accident that capitalism and Communism rose simultaneously: “Marx’s notion of Communist society is itself the inherent capitalist fantasy–a fantasmatic scenario for resolving the capitalist antagonism he so aptly described” (Zizek 19). The bears metaphorize the boundless commodification that modern technologies facilitate. Radiohead’s symbols threaten to overcome the onlooker. In this way, the antivideo critiques its own medium–the internet, a technology that allows endless and nearly effortless production. Once an antivideo reaches the internet, it can be accessed indefinitely by multiple viewers simultaneously.

     

    The limitless reproducibility of visual and aural art objects that the internet enables is the apogee of simulation, as it is defined by Jean Baudrillard. Via digital technologies, “The real is produced from miniaturized cells, matrices, and memory banks, models of control–and it can be reproduced an indefinite number of times from these” (Baudrillard 2). The real or the authentic ceases to matter, an inevitability that Radiohead’s music and art incorporate.

     

    Nevertheless, the real is what audiences, music critics and fans alike, desire. Critic David Fricke commented in Rolling Stone that despite the experimental sounds of Radiohead’s electronic music, what you actually hear is “real rock singing and chops, altered beyond easy recognition” (Fricke 48). What Fricke fails to grasp is that Radiohead’s aesthetic undermines the real that he attempts to recuperate on the band’s behalf. This misreading of Radiohead’s music by Fricke and others has a venerable antecedent: Walter Benjamin’s “The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction.”

     

    Fricke would agree with Benjamin that mass reproduction corrupts the art object’s authenticity, an essential, if intangible, element of art: “that which withers in the age of mechanical reproduction is the aura of the work of art” (Benjamin 221). But, unlike Benjamin, Fricke and the sum of music industry rhetoric stops there. Benjamin’s anxiety gains a dimension as he considers the possibility that the real may cease to exist at all. As he explains in the case of photography, the question of authenticity “makes no sense” when one can make innumerable prints from a photographic negative (Benjamin 224). Similarly, the internet acts as a spectral production line, an immense factory, open to all comers, that has transcended production’s physical limitations.

     

    A fear that authenticity will lose significance animates Benjamin’s essay but does not explain Fricke’s naïve praise for a hidden, real rock music underlying Radiohead’s experimentation. The band’s music, I argue, is not a distortion of real rock, but an uncovering of its absence, its phantasmic structure. Fricke assumes that the real continues to bloom when, as Baudrillard told us and as Benjamin knew would happen, it has long since been a desert.

     

    Benjamin’s anxiety is the emotion that animates the onlookers’ faces in “Flying Bears.” The antivideo’s countless test specimens are the epitomic image of electronic reproduction, specifically, the internet’s realization of the fundamental capitalist fantasy of unimpeded production. But here the capitalist dream is refigured as a nightmarish scenario of flying bears looming over frightened mobile phone users. However, the precession of simulation, to use Baudrillard’s phrase, is that capital desires its own undoing, as I argue in the following section.

     

    IV. “I’m not here / This isn’t happening”

     

    The fourth song on Kid A is titled “How to Disappear Completely.” The lyrics, while supposedly based on a dream, eerily narrate the singer’s subject position as experienced by the listener: “I’m not here / This isn’t happening.” The point is so simple as to go unnoticed: when I hear Radiohead’s music the band is not here, where I am at the moment of listening; and the performance is not happening, and may have, in fact, never happened. Like Miles Davis’s Bitches Brew, an achievement not of instrumental virtuosity but of production technique ahead of its time, Kid A is the record of a performance never performed, an electronically constructed collage of disparate studio recordings, found sounds, drum loops, samples, and other forms of noise.

     

    While Kid A challenges authenticity, the antivideo “Screaming Bears” pastiches it. “Screaming Bears” casts the test specimens as performers furnishing what spectators crave–an authentic performance. Gradually, five agitated bears (notably, Radiohead has five band members) appear from stage-left on a flat, desolate landscape (see Figure 5) populated randomly by pyramids, resembling Cy Twombly’s Anabasis. The performance is blatantly pointless: the bears enter, the bears leave.

     

    Figure 5

     

    Nevertheless, the bears’ performance is more compelling than what the performers of Radiohead offer. In “Morning Bell,” Thom Yorke plays a piano, face averted from the camera and downcast, in a lonely, possibly domestic setting. We are given an authentic band member, but the authentic person, compared to the screaming and dancing test specimens, is far less thrilling. It is the simulation that captures our attention, not the authentic. The intimate, if artificially staged, mood of “Morning Bell,” signaled by the black and white film and overhead film angle–the common position of surveillance cameras–is more akin to voyeurism than to spectatorship (see Figure 6).

     

    Figure 6

     

    Whatever authenticity “Morning Bell” lays claim to is dissolved by “Yeti,” another antivideo that calls attention to the band’s role as victims of surveillance and status as objects, or rather of an institutionalized gaze so well given voice by David Fricke, above. To return to Fricke’s assessment, Radiohead’s music is “real rock singing and chops” (48). Fricke’s desire to establish the band’s music as real rock is a near-death symptom of capitalism. Capitalism, especially its embodiment in the music industry, frequently reminds us of “its foundations in real people and their relations” (Zizek 16). Underneath the mysterious celebrity-identity there is a real person, which the hunched-over Yorke of “Morning Bell” perfectly signifies. Another example proves instructive: on 8 August 2001, fans had the chance to chat online with Jonny Greenwood, the band’s lead guitarist and keyboardist. An event hosted by the Yahoo! web site, such a promotional move is not unlike another that Zizek describes: “Visitors to the London Stock Exchange are given a free leaflet which explains to them that the stock market is not about some mysterious fluctuations, but about real people and their products–this is ideology at its purest” (16). Being able to chat with Jonny Greenwood in real time: this, too, is ideology at its purest.4

     

    But this reassertion of the real, Baudrillard argues, is capital’s attempt to calm its characteristic powers of “abstraction, disconnection, deterritorialization” (22), the very powers that now threaten it. To confront the oceanic elision of difference it inaugurated, capital re-injects the real, but to no avail:

     

    as soon as [capital] wishes to combat this disastrous spiral by secreting a last glimmer of reality, on which to establish a last glimmer of power, it does nothing but multiply the signs and accelerate the play of simulation. (22)

     

    It is this reassertion of the real that “Yeti,” the next antivideo, pastiches.

     

    In “Yeti,” a test specimen bear is caught on camera, much in the same way the appearances of supposedly mystical monsters, such as Bigfoot and the Loch Ness Monster, are captured on videotape. To reinforce the antivideo’s relation to surveillance footage, the movie begins with and is interrupted by moments of static (see Figure 7). Most often a nuisance, the camera’s disruption of images, its intrusion as creator of artifice into a reality that would ideally otherwise remain unaltered, here signals reality. Between these staged disruptions, the camera slowly pans across an empty snow field (see Figure 8) and eventually locates a test specimen (see Figure 9) who flees upon realizing that he has been discovered.

     

    Figure 7
    Figure 8
    Figure 9

     

    Like Sartre at the keyhole, hearing footsteps approaching from behind, the test specimen turns in shock: “Someone is looking at me!” (Sartre 349). Presumably, the test specimen escapes into the forest; the antivideo ends before the bear is captured. We are left with a noisy image of the bear running away (see Figure 10).

     

    Figure 10

     

    Surveillance video, the electronic gaze with which authorities establish incontrovertible fact, is used frivolously–to follow a cartoon bear. Comparatively, this antivideo renders the ostensibly authentic scene of “Morning Bell” artificial and thus simultaneously lampoons authenticity more generally, exposing capital’s covert insistence that commodified celebrities are real people.

     

    V. Is a Music Video Without Music a Music Video?

     

    Slavoj Zizek tells an interesting personal story in The Fragile Absolute worth quoting at length. During a trip to Berlin he

     

    noticed along and above all the main streets numerous large blue tubes and pipes, as if the intricate cobweb of water, phone, electricity, and so on, was no longer hidden beneath the earth, but displayed in public. My reaction was, of course, that this was probably another of those postmodern art performances whose aim was, this time, to reveal the intestines of the town, its hidden inner machinery, in a kind of equivalent to displaying on the video the palpitation of our stomach or lungs–I was soon proved wrong, however, when friends pointed out to me that what I saw was merely part of the standard maintenance and repair of the city’s underground service network. (n. 13, 162)

     

    Before recounting the story of what he terms a blunder, Zizek contextualizes his confusion, citing the example of a recent art performance in Potzdamerplatz in Berlin, where the movements of several gigantic cranes were orchestrated for an art performance. A similar performance, he fails to note, happened in Helsinki in the early 1980s.

     

    In this context, Zizek’s confusion in Berlin is understandable, and, I argue, symptomatic of the postmodern era. What begins to emerge is that postmodernism cannot be regarded merely as a set of objective attributes for which objects can be tested, but might instead be considered a perspective, a condition of the subject as well as objects. Not a radical thesis, by any means, but an important one that marks the difference between Jean-François Lyotard and Fredric Jameson: the former promoting distrust of metanarratives, a subjective state, as distinctive of postmodernism (Lyotard xxiv), the latter elaborating a stylistic description with architecture serving as the “privileged aesthetic language” (Postmodernism 37).

     

    Another example of confusion symptomatic of postmodernism is my own. Thirteen of sixteen antivideos released in June 2001 in support of the band’s fifth album, Amnesiac, are musicless. These latest antivideos, to reuse Jody Berland’s vocabulary quoted above, emancipate themselves from their musical foundation so thoroughly that the foundation is abandoned altogether. My initial response to these musicless antivideos was to declare myself in the presence of a postmodern pastiche of John Cage’s revolutionary 4’33”.

     

    At 8:15 p.m. on 29 August 1952, an audience gathered at the Maverick Concert Hall in Woodstock, New York to hear the pianist David Tudor perform John Cage’s latest composition. They heard nothing, a nothing entitled 4’33”. Inspired by Robert Rauschenberg’s three-paneled White Painting of 1951, Cage’s handwritten score indicated a silence of three movements. Music without music: is it still music? Cage, of course, thought it was. Cage’s modernist aesthetic was heavily influenced by Eastern philosophy. The point of the performance of 4’33” was to force the listener to listen closely, to close read his or her immediate sonic environment. The common reference to 4’33” as Cage’s “silent piece” is, from the composer’s standpoint, a mistake. For one aim of the piece is to underscore Cage’s belief that silence does not in fact exist (Cage 8).5

     

    Radiohead’s aesthetic, then, in this instance, was Cage’s impulse turned against the commercialization of music through the relentless promotion of music videos. Music videos are promotional materials, but without music, what can they promote? Nothing, and by promoting nothing they become advertising simply for advertising’s sake. Further, the resulting affect isn’t modernist shock (what have I endured!?), but what Jameson termed the postmodern sublime: a panic-boredom (I have to endure this for how long!?) (37-8).6

     

    My theory of the antivideos along these lines was disturbed, however, by information I received from the primary artist responsible for Radiohead’s antivideos, Chris Bran, one of the self-titled Vapour Brothers. In July of 2001 I interviewed Bran via email. Responding to a question regarding how and when the Amnesiac antivideos were created, Bran wrote that they were “just out takes, left overs, works in progress. they were all created for the current radiohead project I am doing. we just decided to put these online and try to build up a gallery of video ideas” [sic]. When asked specifically why a majority of the shorts do not use music, Bran referred to his earlier response: “as i said these are all works in progress, unfinished ideas or out takes.” The last comment Bran added was, “check out radiohead.com in the next few weeks.” What was to come was the release of “I Might Be Wrong” (available at <http://www.radiohead.com/009.html& gt;), an internet only, traditional music video constructed from the various musicless antivideos and created entirely on a laptop computer.

     

    What Bran’s comments required of me was to erase the earlier response, or at least to rewrite that response, in this way: the soundless antivideos are not the postmodern descendents of John Cage’s famous silence; they are, instead, waste, leftovers–in a word, excrement. While Bran’s comments frustrate the genealogical connection to John Cage, his they open up a new set of theoretical problems. Waste, in its various forms, is now routinely handled by critical theory and theorists.

     

    Zizek, leaning on the work of his former mentor and analyst Jacques-Alain Miller (the son-in-law of Jacques Lacan), offers a compelling description of what material condition is historically particular to postmodernism: waste. Late capitalism, Zizek writes, has “introduce[d] a breathtaking dynamics of obsolescence” (40) that generates massive mounds of waste. I quote Zizek quoting Miller:

     

    The main production of the modern and postmodern capitalist industry is precisely waste. We are postmodern beings because we realize that all our aesthetically appealing consumption artifacts will eventually end as leftover, to the point that it will transform the earth into a vast waste land. (qtd. in Zizek 40)

     

    Along these lines Zizek notes that

     

    in today’s art, the gap that separates the sacred space of sublime beauty from the excremental space of trash (leftover) is gradually narrowing, up to the paradoxical identity of opposites: are not modern art objects more and more excremental objects, trash (often in a quite literal sense: faeces, rotting corpses…) displayed in–made to occupy, to fill in–the sacred place of the Thing? (25-26)

     

    Perhaps the most famous example of this is Chris Ofili’s 1996 painting “The Holy Virgin Mary,” a portrait of the religious icon as a black woman decorated with elephant dung. The painting was featured in the 1999 Museum of Modern Art exhibit “Sensation: Young British Artists from the Saatchi Collection,” an exhibit former Mayor of New York Rudolph Giuliani called “sick stuff.”

     

    Back in Berlin, the aesthetic wonder Zizek felt at seeing the innards of the city exposed need not necessarily be considered a blunder. The actual circumstances of any situation, the ultimately phantasmic Real, is, as Lacan instructs us, only a fantasy that has yet to be unveiled. Instead, what we witness in Zizek’s confusion (which was, interestingly, submerged in a footnote–the semi-exposed innards of the book, the book’s waste products) and in my own is the epitome of the postmodern condition–the subject thrust into a state of perpetual awareness, never knowing where art will come from next.

     

    VI. In Place of a Conclusion: A Myth

     

    With the release in June 2001 of Amnesiac, the band’s fifth album, the test specimen bears of Kid A have been replaced by crying minotaurs. While the bears were adaptable to various situations, the minotaurs are unambiguously and consistently modeled as victims. In one interactive portion of the Radiohead web site <http://www. waste-game.com/hogger/numeeja/minotaur.html>, visitors can participate in “Experiment #6: Torturing the Minotaur” where they have a chance to inflict pain upon a crying minotaur using a small trident. The game, if it can rightly be called a game, is in the tradition of Stanley Milgram’s psychological experiments conducted from 1961 to 1962. A somewhat milder version of the same experiment is available at Capitol Records’ Radiohead site, <http://hollywoodandvine.com/ radiohead/>, a separate site not directly maintained by the band. At the top of the main page, one click will cause a minotaur to weep while a continuously depressed mouse button intensifies the minotaur’s sorrow, prompting him to ruefully rub his tearful eyes as he shakes his head.

     

    Unlike Milgram’s experiments, however, these opportunities to torture a minotaur test not our willingness to obey, but the limits of curiosity–our desire for knowledge. However, like Milgram’s experiments, and more significantly, “Experiment #6” is a simulation. We torture nothing. We instead simulate a torture, a process far more dangerous according to Baudrillard. Comparing a simulated and a real hold-up, he writes:

     

    the latter does nothing but disturb the order of things, the right to property, whereas the former attacks the reality principle itself. Transgression and violence are less serious because they only contest the distribution of the real. Simulation is infinitely more dangerous because it always leaves open to supposition that, above and beyond its object, law and order themselves might be nothing but simulation. (20)

     

    Capital attempts to stabilize its power through the maintenance of reality. This, to reiterate Zizek, “is ideology at its purest” (16). Simulation resists this stabilizing influence.

     

    However, the band’s reflexive aesthetic effectively disrupts naïve consumption, confronting the listener with music and art that adhere to opacity versus authenticity as a guiding principal. As the novelist Nick Hornby wrote in a New Yorker review deriding Radiohead:

     

    You have to work at albums like Kid A. You have to sit at home night after night and give yourself over to its paranoid millennial atmosphere as you try to decipher elliptical snatches of lyrics and puzzle out how the titles (‘Treefingers,’ ‘The National Anthem,’ and so on) might refer to the songs. … Kid A demands the patience of the devoted …. (qtd. in Dettmar)

     

     

    That a listener would be given pause by a mass-produced art object troubles Hornby, who prefers not to enter Radiohead’s maze of possible meaning.

     

    Thus, explicitly evoking the myth of the minotaur with Amnesiac, Radiohead has found an icon more fitting than the test specimens. A limited-edition CD of the album is packaged in a cloth-bound book. Inside we find the following disclaimers: “This book is to be hidden. Labyrinthine structures are entered at the reader’s own risk. Nosuch Library and Lending Service cannot be held responsible for Misuse.” Radiohead’s music and art are, finally, as Hornby acknowledges, a labyrinthine structure that, once entered, baffles with its mesmerizing difficulty.

     

    While Radiohead’s music and art together sustain a significant critique of capitalist ideology, the band has no pretension of saving the world single-handedly. Instead, their web site at <http://www.radiohead.com/00.html> recommends links to alternative news and information sites with similarly worthy, if unattainable, goals: to revise the relationship between consumer and commodity. The goal of both Kid A and Amnesiac, however, is far more modest: to revise our relationship to popular music and forms of popular culture more generally, a goal that Radiohead, I argue, achieves.

     

    Notes

     

    1. I follow Fredric Jameson’s assertion that, in postmodernism, pastiche eclipses parody. His definition is useful: “Pastiche is, like parody, the imitation of a peculiar or unique style, the wearing of a stylistic mask, speech in a dead language: but it is a neutral practice of such mimicry, without parody’s ulterior motive, without the satirical impulse, without laughter, without that still latent feeling that there exists something normal compared with which what is being imitated is rather comic” (Cultural Turn 5).

     

    2. Kid A, which received a Grammy Award for Best Alternative Album in 2000, was highly anticipated due to the success of OK Computer, the band’s 1997 album which was among the top-ten highest selling albums in Great Britain. In 1998, OK Computer received a Grammy Award for Best Alternative Album (Hale 127) and the band was nominated for four MTV awards (133). Comprehensive indexes of the band’s album reviews and awards are available in both Jonathan Hale’s Radiohead: From a Great Height and Martin Clarke’s Radiohead: Hysterical and Useless.

     

    3. This echoes Jameson’s claim that “aesthetic production today has become integrated into commodity production generally” (Postmodernism 4).

     

    4. Discussants’ questions remained superficial throughout the chat. At one point, Greenwood comments, “Apparently 90% of your questions are about hair.”

     

    5. A now-famous anecdote tells of Cage visiting NASA’s soundproof room at Harvard University. Expecting absolute silence, he instead heard two sounds: “one high and one low” (8). The first, he was told, was his nervous system, the second his circulatory system. Even silence could not be silent.

     

    6. One antivideo, “minotauralley,” makes an excellent case for Jameson’s postmodern sublime. For 46 seconds the viewer watches a cartoon minotaur weeping with inexplicable calm in a deserted, wet alleyway.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Baudrillard, Jean. Simulacra and Simulation. Trans. Sheila Faria Glaser. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1994.
    • Benjamin, Walter. “The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction.” Illuminations. Ed. Hannah Arendt. Trans. Harry Zohn. New York: Schocken, 1968. 217-251.
    • Berland, Jody. “Sound, Image and Social Space: Music Video and Media Reconstruction.” Frith et al. 25-43.
    • Bran, Chris. “Re: questions.” Email to the author. 15 July 2001.
    • Cage, John. Silence: Lectures and Writings by John Cage. Hanover, NH: Wesleyan UP, 1973.
    • Clarke, Martin. Radiohead: Hysterical and Useless. London: Plexus, 2000.
    • Dettmar, Kevin. “Is Rock ‘n’ Roll Dead? Only if You Aren’t Listening.” The Chronicle of Higher Education. 11 May 2001 <http://chronicle.com/ free/v47/i35/35b01001.htm>.
    • Fricke, David. “Radiohead: Making Music That Matters.” Rolling Stone. 2 August 2001. 42-48, 73.
    • Frith, Simon, Andrew Goodwin, and Lawrence Grossberg, eds. Sound and Vision: The Music Video Reader. London and New York: Routledge, 1993.
    • Greenwood, Jonny. Online chat. 8 August 2001. < http://hollywoodandvine.com/radiohead/rha_primary_frame.html?chat>.
    • Grossberg, Lawrence. “The Media Economy of Rock Culture: Cinema, Post-Modernity and Authenticity.” Frith et al. 185-209.
    • Hale, Jonathan. Radiohead: From a Great Height. Toronto: ECW, 1999.
    • Jameson, Fredric. The Cultural Turn: Selected Writings on the Postmodern, 1983-1998. New York: Verso, 1998.
    • —. Postmodernism, or, The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. Durham: Duke UP, 1991.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François. The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge. Trans. Geoff Bennington and Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1984.
    • Saneh, Kalefa. “Rock Groups that No Longer Rock.” New York Times on the Web. 1 July 2001 <http://www.nytimes.com/ 2001/07/01/arts/01SANN.html>.
    • Sartre, Jean-Paul. Being and Nothingness. 1943. Trans. Hazel E. Barnes. NY: Washington Square, 1992.
    • Zizek, Slavoj. The Fragile Absolute, or Why Is the Christian Legacy Worth Fighting For? London: Verso, 2000.